Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080200120 | MANAGING LOW-POWER WIRELESS MEDIUMS IN MULTIRADIO DEVICES - A system for optimizing the operation of a plurality of radio modules incorporated within a wireless communication device (WCD) connected as a slave on a low-power wireless network, wherein a low-power device is acting as the master of the wireless network. The timing of communication between master and slave may be established by the master, and as a result, the WCD may utilize a control strategy to allow substantially concurrent active communication in one or more of the plurality of radio modules while still operating under the parameters set forth by the low-power master device. | 08-21-2008 |
20080200121 | VEHICLE-TO-ROADSIDE AND VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM THEREOF - To resolve the problems of the vehicle-to-roadside communication and the vehicle-to-vehicle communication, and to enhance the safety of the road traffic and the convenience of the user by expanding the communication providing area and further stabilizing the communication. A vehicle-to-roadside and vehicle-to-vehicle communication system including a plurality of roadside communication devices being arranged on a roadside with a narrow range communication area, and an on-board communication device mounted on a vehicle which travels with passing through the communication area, and carrying out a wireless communication by cooperating a vehicle-to-roadside communication and a vehicle-to-vehicle communication is provided; where the roadside communication device and the on-board communication device are configured to be mutually communicable through two wireless channels, and the on-board communication device is configured to execute channel switching after notifying channel switching to a communicating party via wireless channel in communication when switching the channel from one to the other. | 08-21-2008 |
20080200122 | IN-BUILDING RADIO FREQUENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WITH AUTOMATIC FAILOVER RECOVERY - An improved in-building radio frequency communications system with automatic failover recovery comprising a primary external antenna and one ancillary external antenna, each antenna directed to a primary transmission tower and to an ancillary transmission tower, respectively, and a diversity site donor system capable of monitoring the strength and/or quality of the radio frequency signals received from the primary transmission tower and switching communications between the primary transmission tower and the ancillary transmission tower based on the strength and/or quality of the radio frequency signals received from the primary transmission tower. | 08-21-2008 |
20080207124 | Mobile Device With Near Field Communication Module And Secure Chip - A mobile device provided with a secure chip and a short-range wireless RF communication module, which can be used for contactless transactions with external short-range wireless RF communication devices, for example at a point of sales. The mobile device is provided with user selectable activity levels of the secure chip to reduce security risks/concerns associated with such a terminal. The user selectable activity levels may include levels in which the secure chip is deactivated by default, and only temporarily activated upon user confirmation or the entry of a password or PIN. | 08-28-2008 |
20080207125 | Method and Apparatus to Facilitate Conforming a Wireless Personal Communications Device to a Local Social Standard - A wireless transmitter ( | 08-28-2008 |
20080207126 | Method and System for Dynamically Changing Poll Timing Based on Bluetooth Activity - Methods and systems for dynamically changing poll timing based on Bluetooth activity are disclosed. Aspects of one method may include determining synchronous Bluetooth activity between a Bluetooth master device and at least one Bluetooth slave device. The synchronous Bluetooth activity may comprise, for example, transmission of packets by the Bluetooth master device via a SCO link and/or a eSCO link. The Bluetooth master device may dynamically adjust a polling period based on the synchronous Bluetooth activity. For example, the polling period may be less when there is synchronous activity than when there is no synchronous activity. The polling periods for when there is synchronous activity and when there is no synchronous activity may be default values. The default polling periods may be changed to different values, for example, by the user. | 08-28-2008 |
20080207127 | Medical Communication System and its Communication Method - A medical communication system is provided with a scope | 08-28-2008 |
20080207128 | Method, Device and System for Controlling Application Launching in a Mobile Terminal Device - The present invention generally discloses methods, devices and systems for controlling application launching by means of a dedicated application launching table. According to a first aspect of the present invention a method for controlling launching of an application in a first mobile terminal device is provided. Said first mobile device comprises a first near field communication (NFC) module. The method according to the present invention comprises the steps of maintaining a dedicated application launching table, detecting the presence of a second device adapted to communicate with said first terminal device, determining identification parameters relating to said second device, and launching at least one predetermined application in said first device, wherein said application is selected to be launched based on entries in said dedicated application launching table and on said determined identification parameters. | 08-28-2008 |
20080214109 | Communication System For Short-Range Wireless Data Exchange - Communication system, comprising cooperating modules ( | 09-04-2008 |
20080214110 | Apparatus and method for exchanging active profile in bluetooth communication system - An active profile exchange in a Bluetooth communication system is provided. A method for exchanging a profile of a server device in the Bluetooth communication system includes receiving a request for a service support list from a client device; when there is no adequate profile for the client device, generating and transmitting a service support list including information informing that an active profile generation is possible in response to the request; after providing the service support list, receiving the active profile generated by the client device when the client device requests an active profile exchange; and operating according to the active profile generated by the client device. | 09-04-2008 |
20080214111 | LOST PHONE ALARM SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system and method having an alarm software module recorded on a computer-readable medium programmed to monitor a connection between an accoutrement and a mobile phone. The alarm software module instructs an alarm to be issued if a threshold is met. In addition, the module may instruct the phone to lock. | 09-04-2008 |
20080214112 | Method and System for Using PSK Sync Word for Fine Tuning Frequency Adjustment - In RF transceivers, a method and system for using phase shift key (PSK) sync word for fine tuning frequency adjustment are provided. One aspect of the invention provides for adjusting a local oscillator frequency in a radio frequency (RF) receiver when a residual DC offset remains after a coarse frequency offset adjustment if performed. The fine adjustment may be necessary because of the synchronization required with a PSK-based modulated portion of a Bluetooth packet. A residual phase shift detected in a sync sequence portion of the Bluetooth packet may be utilized to determine a residual or fine frequency adjustment. This approach may allow an RF receiver to operate, in some instances, without the need for an equalizer. In this regard, the power consumed by the RF receiver may be minimized and/or the overall cost of the RF receiver may be reduced. | 09-04-2008 |
20080220718 | Bluetooth Communication System for Drivers of Vehicules - A system is provided that enables communications between a driver of a vehicle and a person outside the vehicle, between a rider of a motorcycle and a fellow rider of the same vehicle, or between a driver of a vehicle and another driver of another vehicle. A Bluetooth communication system comprises a Bluetooth communication device mountable to a helmet, and an indicator unit having an indicator disposed in a viewing range of a driver of such a vehicle as a car or a boat. It further comprises a transmitting module disposed in the Bluetooth communication device for transmitting an indication signal to the indicator in response to reception of a calling signal and a receiving module disposed in the indicator unit for driving the indicator in response to reception of the indication signal. The indicator indicates when a call arrives at a Bluetooth communication device mounted on a helmet. | 09-11-2008 |
20080220719 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING MULTIMEDIA CONTENT TO A WIRELESS DEVICE - The present disclosure relates generally to systems and methods for providing multimedia content to a wireless device. In one example, the method includes receiving a request from a wireless device to establish a connection to a telephone number. Multimedia content access information associated with the telephone number is identified, and the multimedia content access information is provided to the wireless device in response to the request to establish the connection. A request is received from the wireless device to access multimedia content associated with the multimedia content access information and the multimedia content is sent to the wireless device. | 09-11-2008 |
20080220720 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING AREA SPECIFIC MESSAGING - A system and method for precisely locating a mobile device at a precise geographical distance and messaging to communication devices carried by persons in specific areas is disclosed. The method utilizes at least two elements, a mobile device and at least one location tag. When activated, the mobile device will interact with all of the location tags in range and determine the location tag most practically near. The mobile device will then download detailed local information from the location tag most practically near. The messaging system may be used to selectively send messages to communication devices known to be within range of location transmitters or tags in a predetermined area. | 09-11-2008 |
20080227392 | System and Method for Sense-Areas for Ad-Hoc Networking - A method and system are provided for electronic devices ( | 09-18-2008 |
20080233870 | Adapter and Method for Wireless Transfer of Memory Card Contents - The invention relates to an adapter ( | 09-25-2008 |
20080233871 | Method and System For Bluetooth, Near Field Communication And Simultaneous FM Transmission and Reception Functions - Methods and systems for wireless communication are disclosed and may comprise generating a first signal to enable transmission and/or reception of Bluetooth signals, and clocking direct digital frequency synthesizers (DDFSs) via the first signal to enable simultaneous transmission and reception of FM and NFC signals. The first signal may be generated via a Bluetooth LOGEN or PLL, and may comprise in-phase and quadrature components. The frequency of the first signal may be within the range of 2.4 GHz to 2.483 GHz, or mixed to result in a frequency within the same range. Control word inputs may be generated to control the DDFSs, and may be adjusted to compensate for changes in frequency of the first signal. Simultaneous NFC transmission and reception may be simulated by switching the control word inputs between a plurality of values in successive time intervals to perform time division duplexing, and may occur at different frequencies. | 09-25-2008 |
20080233872 | Method and System for Clocking FM Transmit FM Receive, and Near Field Communication Functions Using DDFS - Methods and systems for clocking FM transmit, FM receive and near field communication functions using DDFS are disclosed. Aspects of one method may include generating a Bluetooth signal that may comprise, for example, I and Q components, or Bluetooth local oscillator (LO) signals, for use in Bluetooth communication. One of the two Bluetooth LO signals may then be used by a DDFS to generate I and Q LO signals for FM reception and/or transmission. One of the I and Q LO signals for FM communication may be used by another DDFS to generate at least one LO signal for near field communication (NFC) transmission and/or reception. While the Bluetooth LO signal may vary in frequency as Bluetooth frequency hopping occurs, the FM LO signals may remain constant for a specific channel frequency. Similarly, while the FM LO signals may be changed to tune to different FM channels, the NFC LO signals may remain at a constant frequency. | 09-25-2008 |
20080233873 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIMULTANEOUS FM TRANSMIT AND FM RECEIVE FUNCTIONS USING AN INTEGRATED BLUETOOTH LOCAL OSCILLATOR GENERATOR (LOGEN) - Aspects of a method and system for enabling simultaneous FM transmitter and FM receiver functions using an integrated Bluetooth Local Oscillator Generator (LOGEN). A Bluetooth® LOGEN may be utilized to generate Bluetooth® signal that comprise (I) and (Q) components for use in Bluetooth® communication. The Bluetooth® LOGEN may then be utilized by a DDFS to generate FM radio (I) and (Q) signals for FM radio reception. The Bluetooth® LOGEN may also be utilized by a second DDFS to generate FM radio (I) and (Q) signals for FM radio reception. The Bluetooth® signals may be kept at the same frequency, or reduced in frequency, for use in clocking the DDFS. A frequency word may also be utilized to clock the two DDFS. The outputs of each DDFS may be a constant frequency while the inputs to each DDFS may vary in frequency. | 09-25-2008 |
20080233874 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR USING A BLUETOOTH PLL TO DRIVE FM TRANSMIT, FM RECEIVE, BLUETOOTH, AND NFC FUNCTIONS - Aspects of a method and system for using a Bluetooth® PLL/LO to drive FM Transmit, FM Receive, Bluetooth, and NFC functions. A Bluetooth® PLL/LO may be utilized to generate Bluetooth® signal that comprise I and Q components for use in Bluetooth® communication. The Bluetooth® signals may then be utilized by a DDFS to generate FM radio I and Q signals for FM radio reception and/or transmission. The Bluetooth® signals may also be utilized by a second DDFS to generate signals for near field communication (NFC) transmission and/or reception. The Bluetooth® signals may be kept at the same frequency, or reduced in frequency, for use in clocking the DDFS. A frequency word may also be utilized to clock the DDFS. The outputs of each DDFS may be a constant frequency while the inputs to each DDFS may vary in frequency. | 09-25-2008 |
20080233875 | Method and System for Collaborative Coexistence of Bluetooth and WIMAX - Methods and systems for collaborative coexistence of Bluetooth and WiMax are disclosed. Aspects of one method may include a packet traffic arbiter (PTA) in a mobile terminal that arbitrates among requests to transmit from one or more communication devices collocated in the mobile terminal. The communication devices may comprise, for example, a WLAN communication device, a WiMax communication device, and/or a Bluetooth communication device. The arbitration may be based on, for example, whether a packet will be received by one of the plurality of collocated communication devices at a time of transmission of the present data packet and/or a priority for data to be transmitted. An exemplary scenario may be where a Bluetooth headset may be used for communication over a WiMax voice connection. One arbitration method may comprise allowing the WiMax packet to be transmitted, and replacing the received Bluetooth packet with data indicating silence. Another method may comprise not allowing transmission of the present WiMax packet. Rather, the present WiMax packet and a subsequent WiMax packet may e transmitted at the next transmission period. | 09-25-2008 |
20080233876 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SHARING AN AUDIO PROCESSOR IN AN INTEGRATED FM RADIO AND BLUETOOTH SYSTEM - Aspects of a method and system for sharing an audio processor in an integrated FM and Bluetooth system are provided. In this regard, the shared audio processor may be enabled to process Bluetooth audio signals and/or FM audio signals. The shared audio processor may enable A/D conversion, D/A conversion, and/or conversion between digital audio formats. The shared audio processor may process signals from a FM radio receiver, a Bluetooth receiver, a FM radio transmitter, and/or a Bluetooth transmitter. The shared audio processor may process analog and/or digital signals, and may process encoded signals. | 09-25-2008 |
20080242227 | Movable apparatus and duplex module thereof - A movable apparatus and a duplex module thereof are provided. A duplex module comprises a bluetooth wireless module and a wireless network module. The bluetooth wireless module is matched with and activates an electronic product. The wireless network module retrieves an internet protocol address by internet connection, wherein the electronic product uploads/downloads digital data through the wireless network module. A movable apparatus has a duplex module comprising a bluetooth wireless module and a wireless network module. The bluetooth wireless module is matched with and activates an electronic product. The wireless network module retrieves an internet protocol address by internet connection, wherein the electronic product uploads/downloads digital data through the wireless network module. | 10-02-2008 |
20080242228 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS HEADPHONE AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to one embodiment, a radio communication system has a radio communication apparatus and a wireless headphone for connecting a communication link with the radio communication apparatus to perform radio communication. The radio communication apparatus has a first radio communication device configured to connect a communication link with the wireless headphone to perform radio communication, and a transmission control unit configured to cause the first radio communication device to transmit sound data to the wireless headphone by streaming and cause the first radio communication device to transmit location information for obtaining the sound data to the wireless headphone. The wireless headphone has a second radio communication device configured to connect a communication link with the radio communication apparatus to perform radio communication, a reproduction control unit configured to perform streaming reproduction of the sound data received by the second radio communication device, and a data storage device configured to store the location information received by the second radio communication device. | 10-02-2008 |
20080248748 | Systems and methods for pairing Bluetooth devices - Embodiments of software-supervised pairing processes are provided. The processes enable a user to pair a mouse and keyboard with a Bluetooth transceiver without having to use a second mouse and keyboard. At least two separate processes are provided, including a long transition for initial pairing or re-pairing and a short transition for re-establishing a connection after devices have already been paired. | 10-09-2008 |
20080248749 | SIGNALING OVER CELLULAR NETWORKS TO REDUCE THE WI-FI ENERGY CONSUMPTION OF MOBILE DEVICES - Techniques for increasing the battery life on a mobile device by decreasing the energy consumption of the mobile device's wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) interface are described. In one embodiment, the mobile device's Wi-Fi interface is automatically disabled when the device is not engaged. When the device receives a wake up call from a server via its Cellular interface, the Wi-Fi interface is enabled if the device answers the wake up call and the Wi-Fi interface is available. Using its Wi-Fi interface, the mobile device then connects to an IP-based network via a Wi-Fi access point. | 10-09-2008 |
20080248750 | COMPONENTIZATION OF MOBILE DEVICES - A mobile device with full functionality is comprised of two or more hardware components. Each hardware component provides a subset of mobile device functionality. Full functionality includes transceiver communications, processing, non-volatile memory, power, input and output. A communications interface, whether wired or wireless means, is used to link the two or more components together to produce a fully functionally mobile device. One or more of the hardware components can be advantageously embedded in or proximate to a piece of jewelry, a garment, or a fashion accessory. Other non-portable hardware components, when available, can also be linked to two or more components of the mobile device to provide additional functionality. | 10-09-2008 |
20080248751 | Systems and methods for managing out-of-band device connection - Systems and methods for managing connection of devices to a wireless network using out-of-band communications. | 10-09-2008 |
20080254744 | DATA DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS - A communication system of the type in which a base station, which can take the form of an electronic tag, is used to send data to users of wireless mobile units. The tags are used in environments such as on poster panels and in football grounds to deliver information relevant to that environment, e.g. information concerning the product advertised on the poster. A problem is that people who do not want the information offered by the base station will receive an invitation that they regard as a nuisance leading to negative association towards the brand. The invention seeks to overcome this problem by transmitting an enquiry signal at a relatively low power so that only mobile units in relatively close proximity to the base station will receive an invitation but uses a relatively high power when transmitting information to mobile units that have accepted the invitation. | 10-16-2008 |
20080254745 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING COLLABORATIVE COEXISTENCE BETWEEN BLUETOOTH AND WI-FI - Methods and systems are described for providing Bluetooth and Wi-Fi coexistence on an electronic device. Aspects of exemplary embodiments include determining Bluetooth link parameters for a Bluetooth connection and Wi-Fi link parameters for a Wi-Fi connection. Also, a Bluetooth path loss for the Bluetooth connection and a Wi-Fi path loss for the Wi-Fi connection can be determined. According to this embodiment, one or more link conditions, based upon one or more of the Bluetooth link parameters, the Wi-Fi link parameters, the Bluetooth path loss, and the Wi-Fi path loss, may be calculated to determine if simultaneous collaboration between the Bluetooth connection and Wi-Fi connection is feasible. In response to simultaneous collaboration being feasible, the Bluetooth link parameters and the Wi-Fi link parameters are customized based on the one or more link conditions to permit simultaneous collaboration between the Bluetooth connection and the Wi-Fi connection. | 10-16-2008 |
20080261524 | Method and System for a Bluetooth Device That Supports Multiple Connections - Methods and systems for a Bluetooth device that supports multiple connections are disclosed. Aspects of one method may include enabling an active Bluetooth device to generate an indication of an incoming call via a second of a plurality of Bluetooth devices when the Bluetooth enabled device is engaged in an existing call via a first of the plurality of Bluetooth devices. The indication may be an audible indication, a visible indication, and/or vibratory indication. A user of the active Bluetooth device may then decide whether to accept the incoming call, and may place the existing call on hold. The active Bluetooth device may also be used to initiate an outgoing call via another one of the plurality of Bluetooth devices, when the active Bluetooth device is engaged in the existing call via the first Bluetooth device. | 10-23-2008 |
20080261525 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, PROGRAM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - There is provided a wireless communication device that includes a first communication portion that performs non-contact communication with an other wireless communication device and receives unit specific data indicating the other wireless communication device's communication function; a second communication portion that can communicate wirelessly faster than the first communication portion; a determination portion that determines, based on the unit specific data, whether the other wireless communication device's communication function is compatible with the second communication portion; and a format conversion portion that converts a format of transmission data that is transmitted to the other wireless communication device to a format that reduces the volume of the transmission data. If the determination portion determines that the other wireless communication device's communication function is not compatible with the second communication portion, the first communication portion transmits the transmission data to the other wireless communication device in the converted data format. | 10-23-2008 |
20080261526 | IDENTIFYING AND REACHING USERS THROUGH MOBILE DEVICES TO PROVIDE RELEVANT AND REAL-TIME INFORMATION - A method to identify and reach users of mobile devices to provide relevant and real-time information including discount coupons and promotional messages is disclosed. The present invention uses short range connectivity present in most mobile devices to identify mobile devices and reaches the mobile devices using long range or short range communication to provide relevant and real-time information. In one embodiment, the present invention enables identifying new and existing members in stores implementing customer loyalty programs to effectively share information about discounts and promotions with existing customers and convert prospective customers in new members. In another embodiment, the present invention enables tracking of user in events including trade shows, exhibitions, seminars, city tours etc, to provide relevant and real-time information based on the location and the needs of the user. | 10-23-2008 |
20080261527 | Bluetooth earpiece with two-way audio transmissions - A Bluetooth earpiece with two-way audio transmissions adopts a base body combined with a Bluetooth earphone containing a signal transmitting end. An electrically connected amplifying unit, loudspeaker unit and audio signal capture unit are installed in the base body. The amplifying unit electrically connects to signal transmitting end of the Bluetooth earphone while the Bluetooth earphone is inserted in the base body. The Bluetooth earphone is capable of receiving audio information from a remote end and sending the information to the loudspeaker unit of the Bluetooth earpiece through an audio transmission switching unit in the Bluetooth earphone to produce sounds. In the meantime, users can receive the sounds by the audio signal capture unit of the Bluetooth earpiece, and the captured audio information is sent to the Bluetooth earphone through the amplifying unit to complete the two-way audio transmission. | 10-23-2008 |
20080268776 | Method and Apparatus for Secure Pairing of Bluetooth Devices - Embodiments of the invention generally provide a method and apparatus for secure pairing of Bluetooth devices that supports the detection of man-in-the-middle attacks. One embodiment of a method for pairing a first Bluetooth device and a second Bluetooth device includes sending, by the first Bluetooth device, a series of audio tones to the second Bluetooth device, comparing the series of audio tones to a verification value computed by the second Bluetooth device and pairing with the second Bluetooth device if the verification value corresponds to the series of audio tones. Another embodiment of a method for pairing a first Bluetooth device and a second Bluetooth device includes receiving, at the second Bluetooth device, a series of audio tones from the first Bluetooth device, comparing the series of audio tones to a first verification value computed by the second Bluetooth device and pairing with the first Bluetooth device if the series of audio tones corresponds to the first verification value. | 10-30-2008 |
20080268777 | Apparatus for combining bluetooth headset and speaker base - An apparatus for combining a Bluetooth headset and a speaker base is disclosed. The principle of magnetic adsorptive is used to combine the Bluetooth headset with the speaker base. The apparatus for combining a Bluetooth headset and a speaker base includes a Bluetooth headset and a speaker base. The Bluetooth headset has an absorbable part and a signal-transmitting terminal. The speaker base has a headset receiving slot and a control circuit board. The headset receiving slot has a magnetic element. When the Bluetooth headset approaches the headset receiving slot, the magnetic element absorbs the absorbable part of the Bluetooth headset to receive the Bluetooth headset in the headset receiving slot and electrically connect the signal-transmitting terminal of the Bluetooth headset with the control circuit board of the speaker base. | 10-30-2008 |
20080268778 | Media Access Controller for Use in a Multi-Sector Access Point Array - A wireless access point with a centralized media access controller MAC ( | 10-30-2008 |
20080268779 | DAA concept with uplink detection: frequency domain quiet periods - A victim wireless device is detected by obtaining a set of wireless bands and a set of time periods. During a given time period a subset of wireless bands corresponding to that time period is vacant and a remaining subset of wireless bands is used to exchange data. During each of the time periods in the set of time periods: a signal, if any, is received; in the event a signal is received, the subset of vacant wireless bands corresponding to that time period is recorded; and after the set of time periods ends, it is determined whether there is a victim wireless device based at least in part on the number of vacant wireless bands recorded. | 10-30-2008 |
20080268780 | WIRELESS NOTIFICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - A notification apparatus for alerting the user of a wireless device to an event, such as an incoming communication or calendar reminder. When the event occurs, the wireless device may send out a notification signal using a wireless protocol. The notification apparatus detects the notification signal using a wireless transceiver and activates a signaling device which alerts the user to the event. | 10-30-2008 |
20080274695 | Bluetooth-enabled system and related method - According to one exemplary embodiment, a Bluetooth-enabled system includes a computer coupled to a Bluetooth-enabled host, e.g. a Bluetooth-enabled IP phone, via a communication link, where the communication link can be either an Ethernet link or a WLAN link. The Bluetooth-enabled system further includes at least one Bluetooth-enabled input device, e.g. a Bluetooth-enabled mouse or keyboard, being capable of communicating with the Bluetooth-enabled host via a Bluetooth link. The Bluetooth-enabled host is configured to transmit data received via the Bluetooth link from the at least one Bluetooth-enabled input device to the computer via the communication link. The communication link can utilize a TCP/IP protocol. | 11-06-2008 |
20080274696 | Procedure for headset and device authentication - Disclosed herein is a system for configuring and setting up a one to one communication correspondence between a headset and a mobile device. The authentication PIN allows communication of the headset with only those devices that are authenticated using the PIN. A first software application and a second software application are provided on the mobile device and a headset respectively. The process of configuring the PIN access information on the headset using the first and second application comprises the step of establishing a secure communication link by completing challenge response sequence between the headset and the device using the currently prevailing PIN, transmitting a configuration set PIN from the device to the headset, enforcing reauthentication using the newly configured PIN, and establishing and locking a communication between the device and the headset based on the new personal identification number. | 11-06-2008 |
20080280559 | Enabling Bluetooth Support Within a Secondary and/or Across Multiple Operating System Partitions - A method for sharing Bluetooth pairs across multiple operating system partitions. The method includes the steps of pairing a first operating system partition with a Bluetooth enabled device; determining when a memory of an information handling system includes an additional operating system partition; and, pairing the additional operating system partition with the Bluetooth enabled device when the additional operating system partition is present. | 11-13-2008 |
20080280560 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF PLACING A RFID TAG IN A CONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION MODE - Method and system of placing a RFID tag in a continuous transmission mode. At least some of the illustrative embodiments are methods comprising sending a command from a radio frequency identification (RFID) reader to a first RFID tag, and then transmitting continuously by the first RFID tag based on the command. Other illustrative embodiments are RFID tags comprising a tag antenna, and a RFID circuit coupled to the tag antenna. The RFID circuit is configured to, responsive to a first command from a RFID reader, repeatedly transmit a message to the RFID reader. | 11-13-2008 |
20080280561 | Intergrated communication apparatus - An integrated communication apparatus is linked to the PSTN or the Internet for making a PSTN call or a VoIP call. The integrated communication apparatus includes a Bluetooth earphone having a signal transmitting terminal, and a body having an earphone receiving slot and a control circuit board. The earphone receiving slot is used for receiving the earphone and the signal transmitting terminal of the Bluetooth earphone is electrically connected with the control circuit board. The control circuit board includes a control module. The control module is connected with a Bluetooth module, a wireless VoIP module, a PSTN module, a voice-signal encoding/decoding circuit, a judging and charging circuit, and a voice-signal switching module for operating and controlling the modules and the circuits. The voice-signal switching module is connected with a speaker and a microphone via an ECHO eliminating circuit. | 11-13-2008 |
20080280562 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The present invention relates to a data communication method, a data communication system and a communication device. In particular, the present invention relates to a wireless communication device, wherein a broadband internet connection between said communication device and a data network is used. Said broadband internet connection has a high security between said wireless communication device and a data network by the usage of a unique port secured access by means of public known keys. | 11-13-2008 |
20080287062 | EXCLUSIVE PAIRING TECHNIQUE FOR BLUETOOTH COMPLIANT DEVICES - A method and system of establishing communications between at least two independent software modules in a safety critical system, such as a medical system, is provided. The design comprises providing an exclusive Bluetooth connection between at least two wireless devices. A master wireless device is configured with Bluetooth master device functionality and a slave wireless device is configured with Bluetooth slave device functionality. The wireless devices are employed in performing procedures in a safety critical environment. The method further comprises acquiring a stored unique address from the slave wireless device over the Bluetooth connection, comparing the stored unique address to a master wireless device unique address available at the master wireless device, and exclusively pairing the master wireless device and the slave wireless device when the unique address acquired from the slave wireless device is found to identically match the master wireless device unique address. | 11-20-2008 |
20080287063 | Controller integrated audio codec for advanced audio distribution profile audio streaming applications - A novel and useful apparatus for and method of integrating the advanced audio distribution profile (A2DP) audio codec into a Bluetooth controller for audio streaming applications. The mechanism functions to break the prior art Bluetooth protocol stack by integrating a profile packet composer into the controller. The profile/stack control signaling is performed by the host while the profile data packet composer is implemented in the controller. The integrated data packet composer does not break the data path and flow control over the standard HCI. Further, the integrated packet composer allows the controller to open a dedicated data interface for specific applications (e.g., PCM/I2S for audio data). | 11-20-2008 |
20080287064 | AUTOMATIC IN-VEHICLE MOBILE DEVICE DETECTION - A system and method for automatically configuring a communications system between a local mode in which a local communications device (such as an in-vehicle device or “land-line phone”) is active and a remote mode in which a mobile communications device is active and coupled to the communications system. One example of the method includes searching for a Bluetooth™ enabled device, selecting the remote mode of operation responsive to detection of the Bluetooth™ enabled device, and selecting the local mode of operation responsive to failure to detect the Bluetooth™ enabled device. In one example, selecting the local mode of operation includes activating the local communications device, and selecting the remote mode of operation includes activating local Bluetooth™ systems to connect the Bluetooth™ enabled device to the communications system. | 11-20-2008 |
20080293361 | Communication devices, communication systems, a bluetooth communications protocol communication device, and communication methods - Communication devices, communication systems, a Bluetooth communication protocol communication device, and communication methods are provided. According to a first aspect, a communication device includes a single buffer configured to store communication data; control circuitry coupled with the buffer and configured to generate a plurality of packets including different amounts of communication data from the buffer; and communication circuitry coupled with the control circuitry and configured to communicate the packets. | 11-27-2008 |
20080299905 | SYSTEM WITH INCOMING CALL DISPLAY INDICATION AND THE METHOD FOR USING THE SAME - A method for noticing an incoming call of a mobile phone includes the step of coupling the mobile phone to a system. Thereafter, a message of the incoming call is sent to the system. Next, the message is transformed into displaying information by the system. Also, the displaying information is shown on the system. | 12-04-2008 |
20080299906 | EMULATING PLAYING APPARATUS OF SIMULATING GAMES - An emulating playing apparatus of simulating games includes a simulating musical instrument, and a receiving member. The simulating musical instrument has controlling keys set thereon and includes a first battery, a first MCU, a first wireless module, and a first antenna. Signals are produced by the controlling keys and transmitted to the first MCU. The first MCU is communicated with the first wireless module which is connected to the first antenna. The receiving member has a port for connecting with a game frame and includes a second battery, a second MCU, a second wireless module, and a second antenna. The second MCU is communicated with the game frame and the second wireless module. The second wireless module is connected to the second antenna. The simulating musical instrument is wirelessly connected to the receiving member via the first wireless module, the first and second antennas, and the second wireless module. | 12-04-2008 |
20080299907 | Communication Apparatus, Communication Method, and Program - A communication apparatus capable of fully exhibiting capabilities that are inherently possessed by the communication apparatus for performing near field communication, a communication method for use therewith, and a program for use therewith an initiator performs near field communication with a target in accordance with are provided. For example, for each of predetermined n+1 types of capabilities possessed by the initiator or the target, the initiator generates capsules [ | 12-04-2008 |
20080305741 | METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY PAIRING BETWEEN MOBILE DEVICE HAVING A HINGE PORTION AND A COUPLEABLE HARDWARE ACCESSORY - A system securely forming a short distance wireless network has a first device for generating a first signal including an identification symbol; and a second device for receiving the first signal over a wired data connection or proximity based wireless connection between the first and the second devices. The second device generates a second signal responsive to the second device generating a first signal including the identification symbol and receiving a second signal including a pairing message. | 12-11-2008 |
20080305742 | INTERFACE FOR PDA AND COMPUTING DEVICE - An interface between PDAs and computing devices, such as a PC or an in-vehicle system permits a user to use the better user interface of the computing device to access and control the operation of the PDA. | 12-11-2008 |
20080311851 | Method and system for 60 GHZ location determination and coordination of WLAN/WPAN/GPS multimode devices - Within a local region, information may be communicated between two or more wireless multimode communication devices (WMCD) comprising 60 GHz band and lower frequency band wireless interfaces, wherein spatial relationships between devices may vary. The 60 GHz interface may handle location determination operations and data transfers. The lower frequency band may support WPAN, WLAN and may handle coordination of communications and data transfers. The WMCDs may be coupled with a network. Antennas may be directional. Moreover, the spatial orientation of the antennas may be dynamically modified or swept across a specified angle. Furthermore, intelligent and/or adaptive antenna systems may be utilized. The WMCDs may utilize a position and/or time reference system to aid in location determination operations. | 12-18-2008 |
20080311852 | MULTIPLE COMMUNICATION LINK COORDINATION FOR SHARED DATA TRANSMISSIONS - An integrated circuit radio transceiver and associated method comprises a multi-mode device operable to support personal area network communications as well as traditional wireless local area network communications and to synchronize communications therein. In one embodiment, a direct link comprising direct packet transfers without beaconing is performed between the multi-mode device and another multi-mode device. Thus, the multi-mode device is operable to establish traditional BSS communications with an Access Point in addition to establishing peer-to-peer communications with another multi-mode device to transport the Bluetooth communications over the | 12-18-2008 |
20080318525 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR EXCHANGING CONTENTS - Opportunity of enjoying video and music is enlarged. A content reproducing device is used in a contents exchange system including a plurality of contents reproducing devices. The content reproducing device includes a short range communication unit, a memory, a control unit, and a speaker. The short range communication unit communicates request information, response information, content data and flag information to/from content reproducing devices. The control unit controls the short range communication unit so that content data is transmitted. The control unit controls the memory such that the content data and the flag information received by the short range communication unit are stored. | 12-25-2008 |
20080318526 | Arrangement of devices comprising at least one transmitter and method for improving the receiving field strength - An arrangement of devices which may be worn on the body of a person comprising a first device for transmitting signals to at least one second device via electromagnetic fields or waves, with the first device comprising a transmitter for transmitting such signals and an antenna connected to this transmitter, having a linear or chain-like, but not necessarily straight, arrangement of materials starting from the antenna, which affect the path of the electromagnetic waves or fields transmitted or produced by the antenna, such that at the location of at least one second device a higher receiving field strength of the signals transmitted by the transmitter prevails than without this arrangement of materials. | 12-25-2008 |
20090011707 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING NEIGHBORING DEVICE - A method and apparatus for identifying a neighboring device are provided. The method of identifying a neighboring device, which is performed in a user terminal, includes: obtaining identification information and location information of a plurality of neighboring devices that can wirelessly communicate with the user terminal; extracting the identification information of one of the neighboring devices, the neighboring device being in the actual location range within the field of vision of the user terminal; and using the extracted identification information to request that the neighboring device perform wireless communication with the user terminal. According to the method and apparatus, identification information of a neighboring device with which a user terminal desires to perform wireless communication can be obtained using a viewfinder or liquid crystal display of the user terminal. | 01-08-2009 |
20090017755 | INFORMATION COMMUNICATION DEVICE - In the information communication device of the present invention, the first device and the second device are arranged to be connected by wired and exchange device information with each other, as a result of which the first device and the second device can be placed into a state permitting Bluetooth-based wireless communication between the two even without performing a Bluetooth pairing process. Accordingly, the user can enable Bluetooth-based wireless communication simply by inserting the portable audio device | 01-15-2009 |
20090017756 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AVOIDING INTERFERENCE IN A DUAL-SIGNAL DEVICE - A dual-signal wireless transceiver is provided, comprising: a first wireless transceiver circuit configured to transmit and receive first signals using a first protocol; a second wireless transceiver circuit configured to transmit and receive second signals using a second protocol; and a control circuit configured to generate control signals to control operation of the first and second wireless transceiver circuits, wherein the first wireless transceiver circuit is configured to disable second transmission operations by the second wireless transceiver during first transmission operations by the first wireless transceiver circuit through the use of a shutdown signal. In this method, the second protocol allows the second wireless transceiver to retransmit first signals whose transmission was disabled by the shutdown signal. Furthermore, the second protocol is a Bluetooth protocol, and the first protocol is a wireless protocol other than the Bluetooth protocol. | 01-15-2009 |
20090023388 | Wireless transceiver and microphone based communications system - In one embodiment a communications system includes at least one wireless microphone having a communications modules and a wireless transceiver also having a communications modules. In one operation the transceiver is adapted to send data to each microphone after setting a common operating frequency and ID. A PC having a wireless communications module is provided in another embodiment. The PC is adapted to activate the transceiver to send data to each microphone through its communications module. Each communications modules is complied with IEEE 802.15.4 standard. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023389 | System and method for remotely controlling bluetooth enabled electronic equipment - According to one exemplary embodiment, a system providing remote control of Bluetooth enabled electronic equipment comprises Bluetooth enabled electronic equipment for initiating a pairing mode to authorize a virtual remote controller transfer, a Bluetooth enabled wireless device for activating a setup mode so as to pair with the Bluetooth enabled electronic equipment and for downloading the virtual remote controller. The virtual remote controller may be described in an advanced markup language, for example. In one embodiment, a method for utilizing a Bluetooth enabled wireless device to remotely control a Bluetooth enabled electronic equipment comprises initiating a pairing mode of the Bluetooth enabled electronic equipment to authorize a virtual remote controller transfer, activating a setup mode of the Bluetooth enabled wireless device so as to pair with the Bluetooth enabled electronic equipment, and downloading the virtual remote controller to the Bluetooth enabled wireless device. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023390 | Bring call here selectively - A communication system includes logic to detect a second communication device in proximity to a first communication device engaged in a call, and to provide a substantially uninterrupted transfer of selected parties to the call to the second communication device. A proximate device may be identified as one capable of rendering a particular data type, and a substantially uninterrupted transfer may be performed to the proximate device of data of the communications having the data type. An application associated with communication data may be identified, as well as a proximate device capable of providing the application, and a substantially uninterrupted transfer may be performed to the proximate device of data associated with the application. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023391 | WIRELESS BODY SENSOR NETWORK - Disclosed are communication devices especially devices adapted for use as body-worn medical sensors for continuously measuring ECG, SpO2, heart rate, blood pressure and the like, and in particular a method and apparatus for setting up wireless networks of such devices, specifically a communication device adapted for attachment to the body of a wearer so as to form part of a body area network (“BAN”) comprising a body coupled communication (“BCC”) device, and a short-range radio device, the device including means for detecting other similar communication devices on the wearer using BCC, and means for establishing a wireless network with other such devices using their short range radios. | 01-22-2009 |
20090029646 | Communications device, a system and method using inductive communication - The invention relates to the transmission of a signal from a communications device to another device (e.g. a hearing aid) by inductive communication and particularly to a scheme for improving the signal quality at the location of the other device. The object of the present invention is to provide an alternative scheme for improving the quality of inductive communication between two (e.g. portable) devices. The basic idea is to arrange at least two induction coils at an angle to each other in a transmitting device and to apply electrical signals comprising carrier signals comprising a carrier frequency f | 01-29-2009 |
20090036053 | ASSOCIATED COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - The present invention discloses an associated communication apparatus that includes a telephone transmitter, a telephone base, and a Bluetooth earphone so that user can install the telephone transmitter into the telephone base and can install the Bluetooth earphone into the telephone transmitter. Furthermore, the telephone transmitter can be removed from the base and the Bluetooth earphone can be removed from the telephone transmitter. The present invention provides various means for communication such as the earphone, the telephone transmitter, and the telephone base. | 02-05-2009 |
20090036054 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD HAVING COMMUNICATION FUNCTION - The present invention is an information processing apparatus which obtains identification information of an electronic device and makes communication with the electronic device via a network based on the identification information. When a portable telephone ( | 02-05-2009 |
20090036055 | CHANNEL SWITCHING METHOD FOR SWITCHING CHANNELS THROUGH WHICH CONTENT DATA IS RECEIVED IN A ZIGBEE NETWORK SYSTEM, AND ZIGBEE NETWORK SYSTEM THEREOF - A peripheral device can reduce its reconnection time to a mobile communication terminal in a short-range personal wireless communication system including the peripheral device and the mobile communication terminal that performs short-range wireless communication. A short-range communication method of a node in a short-range personal wireless communication system in which communication is performed between at least one Personal Area Network (PAN) and multiple nodes is provided. A peripheral PAN is monitored to perform short-range communication, and at least one PAN is selected as a result of the monitoring; generating channel information for the selected PAN. The generated channel information is transmitted to a peripheral device connected to the node, and the selected PAN is connected with. | 02-05-2009 |
20090047903 | AUTOMATIC RESOURCE AVAILABILITY USING BLUETOOTH - A method, apparatus, and system for automatically sharing data resources between Bluetooth devices. A Bluetooth device is paired with a “trusted” Bluetooth device. When paired devices are found, the Bluetooth device automatically allows the other device to present a virtual representation of data that is shared. The shared data can be selectively downloaded for use by the other device as long as the devices are in proximity. In an alternate embodiment, the devices may share pairing information with a network, so that the same shared resource can be made available at a large number of access points but specifically only for one paired, trusted device. | 02-19-2009 |
20090047904 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPROCESSOR SYSTEM - A multiprocessor system used in a car, home, or office environment includes multiple processors that run different real-time applications. A dynamic configuration system runs on the multiple processors and includes a device manager, configuration manager, and data manager. The device manager automatically detects and adds new devices to the multiprocessor system, and the configuration manager automatically reconfigures which processors run the real-time applications. The data manager identifies the type of data generated by the new devices and identifies which devices in the multiprocessor system are able to process the data. | 02-19-2009 |
20090053997 | DYNAMIC USER INTERFACE FOR DISPLAYING CONNECTION STATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - A method for providing a user interface for a device ( | 02-26-2009 |
20090053998 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION BY MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICES DURING RADIO COMMUNICATION - An apparatus comprising an energy-harvesting means and a radio frequency (RF) communication means. Said energy-harvesting means is configured to capture mechanical energy from the human motion and convert it to useful electrical energy. Said RF communication means is configured to establish RF communication with the mobile electronic devices in its vicinity using low-power, short-range RF communication signals. Said RF communication means is further configured to retransmit the information received through said short range RF communication signals using high-power long-range communication signals, thereby allowing said mobile electronic devices to establish a long-range RF communication with the remote recipient substantially utilizing the energy derived from the energy-harvesting means rather than the energy predominantly derived from said mobile electronic devices themselves | 02-26-2009 |
20090061769 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE PAIRING OF BLUETOOTH DEVICES - The described methods and devices provide a more user-friendly solution to the problem of pairing and connecting multiple devices to a Bluetooth accessory. The paired device list of the Bluetooth accessory is check to determine the most recently paired devices having particular Bluetooth profiles, for example, a hands free profile (HFP) or an advanced audio distribution profile (A2DP). The accessory attempts connection with the devices, if found. Otherwise the accessory continues connection attempts with devices on the paired device list, according to the connection recency, until the accessory has two connections with different profiles. If no connections are made, or the paired device list is empty, the device enters discoverable mode. In this manner a more user-friendly solution to the problem of pairing a Bluetooth accessory to multiple Bluetooth devices is provided. | 03-05-2009 |
20090061770 | BLUETOOTH DEVICE WITH ON-DEMAND PAGE SCAN - A Bluetooth device that includes a Bluetooth transceiver operatively configured to perform inquiry scans and page scans periodically during a standby mode, and to carry out communications during a connection state. The device further includes a Bluetooth controller for controlling operation of the transceiver, the controller being operatively configured to selectively control the transceiver to perform the inquiry scans and the page scans concurrently in a normal standby mode, and to perform the inquiry scans alone in the absence of the page scans in an on-demand page scanning mode, as a function of a predefined criteria. | 03-05-2009 |
20090061771 | Methods of reconfiguring sector coverage in in-building communications system - In an in-building wireless communications network, a weighted sum of a downlink signal from two relevant base station interfaces (BSIs) is transmitted by a radio transceiver transitioning between two sectors. During a transition period, the weight of the combined downlink signal is adjusted gradually to simulate a smooth shift in the coverage of the sectors and transition the radio transceiver from a first sector to a second sector. This allows a base station to hand over users from a first sector to a second sector while suppressing any disruption in service. | 03-05-2009 |
20090061772 | APPARATUS FOR COLLECTING ENVIRONMENTAL DATA AND METHOD OF MONITORING ENVIRONMENT IN REAL TIME - Provided are an apparatus for collecting environmental data and a method of monitoring an environment in real time. The apparatus for collecting environmental data includes a receiver for receiving an environmental data collection command from outside, a headset controller for interpreting the environmental data collection command received from the receiver, and distinguishing an audio signal received from outside from the environmental data collection command, the environment sensor unit for collecting environmental data according to the environmental data collection command interpreted from the headset controller, and a transmitter for transmitting the environmental data collected by the environment sensor unit. | 03-05-2009 |
20090061773 | DEVICE ISOLATION AND DATA TRANSFER FOR WIRELESS MEMORY - A method of enabling communication is described. The method comprises transmitting a channel identifier and an a socket identifier to an initiator responsive to performing a reset of the channel identifier and the socket identifier on one or more target devices. The method also comprises communicating with an identified target device of the one or more target devices based on the transmitted channel identifier and the transmitted socket identifier of the identified target device responsive to receipt of the channel identifier and the socket identifier. The method also comprises enumerating two or more identified target devices of the one or more target devices based on a collision detection of transmitted channel identifiers and socket identifiers of the two or more identified target devices. | 03-05-2009 |
20090061774 | LINK ADAPTATION AND POWER CONTROL WITH CONSUMED ENERGY MINIMIZATION - The invention relates to the control and adaptation of transmit parameters for wireless communication between a transmitter (TX) and at least one receiver (RX) to provide joint power and link adaptation. A basic idea of the invention is to collectively determine the transmit duration (T) and transmit power (P) of the transmitter based on minimization of a given objective function representative of total consumed energy, on both the transmitting side and the receiving side, with respect to transmit duration and/or transmit power. In effect, this means that link transmit parameters are determined based on the energy consumption on both the transmitting side and the receiving side. In addition, both transmit power and transmit duration are varied, while minimizing overall consumed energy. | 03-05-2009 |
20090061775 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTIPORT COMMUNICATION DISTRIBUTION - Various systems and methods for distributing multiple Bluetooth data streams are discussed herein. As one example, a method for communicably coupling a single point Bluetooth device to multiple Bluetooth devices is taught. The method includes providing a multiport Bluetooth distributor that includes two or more Bluetooth protocol interfaces and a multiport processor. The multiport processor is operable to communicably couple one of the Bluetooth protocol interfaces to another Bluetooth protocol interface. The method further includes identifying at least two Bluetooth devices within range of the multiport Bluetooth distributor, and assembling a service offering based on the identified Bluetooth devices. The service offering includes a plurality of service types including at least a first service type and a second service type. | 03-05-2009 |
20090068945 | DETACHABLE EARPHONE STRUCTURE - A detachable earphone structure includes an earphone body and a transmitter detachable from the earphone body. The earphone body has an opening portion, a pair of connecting terminals installed in the opening portion and electrically connected to an internal circuit. The transmitter has a pair of contact terminals stored in the opening portion of the earphone body or detachably connected to the earphone body for electrically conducting the connecting terminal and the contact terminal through the contact of the connecting terminal with the contact terminal. | 03-12-2009 |
20090068946 | METHOD AND APPARATUS THAT MITIGATES THE EFFECTS OF BLUETOOTH-BASED DENIAL OF SERVICE ATTACKS AGAINST MOBILE DEVICES - A method and apparatus that mitigates the effects of a Bluetooth-based Denial of Service (DoS) attack on a Bluetooth-enabled mobile communications device is disclosed. The method may include determining if the mobile communications device is under a DoS attack, wherein if it is determined that the mobile communications device is under a DoS attack, the method may include temporarily disabling Bluetooth services that were enabled using a first Bluetooth address, storing the first Bluetooth address in a memory in the mobile communications device, changing the first Bluetooth address to a second Bluetooth address, and enabling Bluetooth services using the second Bluetooth address. | 03-12-2009 |
20090068947 | MULTI-FUNCTION GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSCEIVERS & DEVICES - The present invention is generally directed to a system and associated method for communicating information. In some embodiments, the invention is directed to a general purpose transceiver having a receiver for receiving an information signal and a transmitter configured to transmit an outgoing signal to a central station. A portion of the information signal can include an instruction code, which may be decoded and acted upon accordingly. Other embodiments and features are also claimed and described. | 03-12-2009 |
20090075593 | DATA SECURITY DEVICE - A backup device comprising a secondary user-carried device for backing up data from a primary portable data storage device is described. The backup device includes a short-range wireless communication link, a communication interface for communicating with the primary portable data storage device over the communication link to receive data to back up and to check for removal of the primary portable data storage device and storage for storing data received over the communication link from the primary portable data storage device. A triggering device is also provided for triggering an alert procedure when the primary portable data storage device is out of range for a predetermined period. | 03-19-2009 |
20090081951 | TIME SYNCHRONIZATION IN WIRELESS AD HOC NETWORKS OF MEDICAL DEVICES AND SENSORS - A short-range ad-hoc network ( | 03-26-2009 |
20090081952 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONNECTING TO NETWORK IN A SHORT-RANGE MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method and apparatus for connecting to a network in a short-range mobile communication terminal are provided, in which a neighbor terminal information request message is periodically broadcast, a neighbor terminal information response message is received from at least one neighbor short-range mobile communication terminal, an RSSI of the neighbor terminal information response message is measured, the RSSI and neighbor terminal information included in the neighbor terminal information response message are stored for the at least one neighbor short-range mobile communication terminal, a closest neighbor WPAN is determined using the RSSI, a WPAN to join is selected based on the determination, and the selected WPAN is connected to. | 03-26-2009 |
20090088075 | Method and System for Enhance Roaming and Connectivity in MIMO-Based Systems - A system and method for communicating with a first network device via a first communication link established by a plurality of transceivers, the first communication link including a plurality of wireless signals and communicating with a second network device via a second communication link established by at least one of the plurality of transceivers, the second communication link including at least one wireless signals, wherein the at least one of the plurality of the receivers terminates one of the plurality of wireless signals communicating with the first network device and at least one other one of the plurality of transceivers maintains an other one of the plurality of signals communicating with the first network device. | 04-02-2009 |
20090088076 | FLASH PAIRING BETWEEN BLUETOOTH DEVICES - In an example embodiment, a technique that allows a device unable to display a confirmation value and/or unable to receive a keyed data entry to confirm a generated confirmation value with a confirmation value produced by a second device. The confirmation value is output one character at a time. For example, for performing a six digit numerical comparison (NC), each digit is presented one at a time enabling a user to compare the output digit with the corresponding digit output by the second device. | 04-02-2009 |
20090088077 | Communications Apparatus - Communications apparatus has a short range wireless radio frequency communicator ( | 04-02-2009 |
20090088078 | PORTABLE TERMINAL HAVING BLUETOOTH MODULE AND BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A portable terminal having a Bluetooth module and a Bluetooth communication method between the portable terminal and a device having a Bluetooth module are provided. The method includes determining whether the portable terminal receives a signal from the device in a call history viewing mode, during Bluetooth communication between the portable terminal and the device, wherein the signal is generated as a volume control key of the device is operated. The method also includes scrolling and displaying the call history, in the portable terminal, according to the received signal. The call history can be searched for in the portable terminal by using a volume control key of a headset or a hands-free accessory, which is linked to the portable terminal via Bluetooth communication, thereby providing users with a convenient mode of operation. | 04-02-2009 |
20090093215 | AUTOMATIC DATA ENCRYPTION AND ACCESS CONTROL BASED ON BLUETOOTH DEVICE PROXIMITY - A method, apparatus, and system for using Bluetooth devices to secure sensitive data on other Bluetooth devices is described. A Bluetooth device is paired with a “trusted” Bluetooth device. When contact with the trusted device is lost, designated sensitive data on the secured Bluetooth device is automatically encrypted. When contact is restored, the data is automatically decrypted. In an alternate embodiment, a secured device can be associated with multiple trusted devices, and the secured device designate different sensitive data for each trusted device. In this way, multiple users can share a common, “public” Bluetooth device without concern that the other users will access their sensitive data on the device when the device is not being used by that user. | 04-09-2009 |
20090098827 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - A communication apparatus and a method used by the communication apparatus to perform magnetic-field communication with an external apparatus is provided. The communication apparatus determines the communication distance between the communication apparatus and the external apparatus based on the voltage level of a radio signal, a distance measuring device, or other means. The communication distance is compared to a predetermined distance and the communication apparatus dynamically adjusts its resonance frequency for improved magnetic-field communication with the external apparatus. | 04-16-2009 |
20090104874 | System And Method Of Providing Automatic Information Exchange And Matching - A method and apparatus provides wireless transceivers which may be used for various tasks, including the exchange of information with other devices. In one example, the wireless transceivers are a part of a WIC used in an environment such as an amusement park, water park, reception area, or tradeshow to provide various capabilities. | 04-23-2009 |
20090111379 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH CONFIGURABLE ANTENNA - A wireless communication device having a configurable antenna, includes: a first antenna having a first resonant frequency; a first frequency modification unit for modifying the first resonant frequency of the antenna; a function operation unit activating a plurality of functions; and a control unit controlling the first frequency modification unit to modify the first resonant frequency in accordance with a function activated by the function operation unit. | 04-30-2009 |
20090117848 | Mobile device system and mobile device - Even when the mobile devices which one carries change from day to day, the invention can flexibly handle such changes to prevent misplacement and the like of a mobile device. Each mobile device includes a communication unit for communicating with other mobile devices, a GPS receiver for acquiring current location information of the mobile device, a group registration unit, an announcing unit, and a control unit. In each mobile device, other mobile devices located within a predetermined range of that mobile device are registered as a group in the group registration unit, and after this registration, the other mobile devices located within the predetermined range of the mobile device are periodically detected, and when the combination of detected other mobile devices does not match the combination of other mobile devices registered in the group registration unit, the announcing unit is operated. | 05-07-2009 |
20090117849 | CELL PHONE TERMINAL, METHOD FOR STARTING DATA PROCESSING, METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING DATA - The present invention provides a portable terminal which can easily start processing for data selected to be processed, a method for starting data processing, and a method for transferring data. | 05-07-2009 |
20090124199 | TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS WITH EFFICIENT SPATIAL REUSE - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus, comprising at least one transceiver operable in a wireless personal area network (WPAN), wherein said at least one transceiver is equipped with the directional antennas adapted to point substantially vertically towards a horizontal reflecting surface, such as a ceiling, and with an antenna pattern specifically designed to control the interference levels. | 05-14-2009 |
20090124200 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A CONTINUING SCAN IN A BLUETOOTH WIRELESS SYSTEM - Methods and systems for wireless communication are disclosed and may include controlling one or more scans of a received signal detection frequency across a frequency range and storing a magnitude of the received signal at each frequency where the magnitude exceeds a threshold level. A type of one or more signals in the received signal may be determined based on a bandwidth of the signals. A Bluetooth page/inquiry scan may be initiated if the determined type is a page/inquiry signal, and scans may be continued if the determined type may not be a page/inquiry signal. The scans may be repeated on a periodic basis and may be controlled utilizing a voltage controlled oscillator. Each of the scans may include a plurality of discrete frequency steps or a continuous frequency ramp. The controlling may include a start frequency, an end frequency and a frequency step size for the scans. | 05-14-2009 |
20090124201 | SHORT RANGE COMMUNICATIONS FOR BODY CONTACTING DEVICES - A communication system for wirelessly transmitting at least one signal, the system comprising: a first device configured to receive and modulate the at least one signal, the first device having a first conductive element operatively adapted to contact a first human body and a second conductive element isolated from the first human body, wherein the first and second elements operate to wirelessly transmit the modulated signal; and a second device having a first conductive element operatively adapted to contact a second human body, and a second conductive element isolated from the second human body, wherein the first and second elements operate to receive the transmitted modulated signal from the first device. | 05-14-2009 |
20090124202 | Modular wireless multimedia device - A modular wireless headset includes wearable earpiece(s) and wearable microphone(s), where the earpiece and microphone may be physically separate devices. The wearable earpiece renders inbound radio frequencies received from a host device audible. The wearable earpiece may include a receiver module, data recovery module, and speaker module. The receiver module may convert inbound RF signals into low intermediate frequency (IF) signals. The data recovery module recovers audio signals from the low IF signals. The speaker module renders the audio signals audible. The wearable microphone converts received audio signals into outbound RF signals, where the outbound RF signals are transmitted to the host device. The wearable microphone includes an audio input module and a transmitter module. The audio input module is operably coupled to convert received analog audio signals into digital audio signals. The transmitter module is operably coupled to convert the digital audio signals into the outbound RF signals. | 05-14-2009 |
20090130977 | BLOCKING OF COMMUNICATION CHANNELS - A system may include a scanning module that is arranged and configured to scan communication channels for channel interference, a channel assessor module that is arranged and configured to determine a type of channel interference present on one or more of the communication channels, and a blocking module that is arranged and configured to selectively block one or more of the communication channels based on the type of channel interference. | 05-21-2009 |
20090137205 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PRESENTING DATA TO A USER - The invention relates to a portable device comprising:
| 05-28-2009 |
20090137206 | APPARATUS FOR AND METHOD OF BLUETOOTH AND WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK COEXISTENCE USING A SINGLE ANTENNA IN A COLLOCATED DEVICE - A novel and useful apparatus for and method of providing a mechanism for achieving coexistence between a Bluetooth system and WLAN system collocated in the same communications device such as a mobile terminal. The coexistence mechanism of the present invention functions to monitor WLAN and Bluetooth system activity, determine the access priority of both WLAN and Bluetooth systems, predict Bluetooth high priority packet transmission patterns, allocate bandwidth to both the Bluetooth and WLAN systems in accordance with the traffic patterns predicted, and switch the antenna and control the Bluetooth and WLAN power amplifiers when required. | 05-28-2009 |
20090143011 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING JAVA PUSH REQUEST EQUIPMENTS USING BLUETOOTH IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - Provided are an identifying method and an apparatus for identifying a plurality of JAVA™ PUSH request terminals using Bluetooth® communication in a mobile communication terminal. According to the method, acquiring information records for performing JAVA™ PUSH about a plurality of terminals by requesting a service search through a Logical Link Control and Adaption Protocol (L2CAP) connection between the mobile communication terminal and the plurality of JAVA™ PUSH request terminals and displaying unique identification information of the plurality of JAVA™ PUSH request terminals by checking the information records of the plurality of JAVA™ PUSH request terminals. | 06-04-2009 |
20090143012 | BLUETOOTH-ENABLED MOBILE TERMINAL AND FAST DEVICE CONNECTION METHOD THEREOF - A Bluetooth-enabled mobile terminal and fast device connection method is provided for reducing device connection latency and power consumption. The device connection method includes inquiring of devices by broadcasting an inquiry at an inquiry Power Control Level (PCL), requesting the devices responded to the inquiry for remote names by transmitting a remote name request, determining whether a device is selected among the devices responded to the remote name request, determining, when a device is selected, whether the selected device is a pre-paired device, attempting, when the selected device is a pre-paired device, pairing with the selected device at a preset PCL, and attempting, when the selected device is not a pre-paired device, pairing with the selected device at the inquiry PCL set for broadcasting the inquiry. | 06-04-2009 |
20090149127 | Method for saving power in a wireless terminal and a terminal - The object of the invention is a method for controlling the power saving properties in a terminal, which utilizes cellular phone technology and short range radio frequency wireless communication features in order to increase the operative life of the batteries, and a terminal utilizing the method. In the method of the invention the activity state of the short range wireless communication utilization in the terminal determines the level of the short range wireless communication power save mode. | 06-11-2009 |
20090156120 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PORTABLE DATA STORAGE WITH INTEGRATED 60 GHZ RADIO - Aspects of a method and system for portable data storage with an integrated 60 GHz radio may include establishing a microwave communication link between a wireless portable storage device and a wireless transmitter and/or wireless receiver. Beamforming parameters of a first antenna array coupled to said wireless portable storage device and a second antenna array coupled to said wireless transmitter and/or wireless receiver may be adjusted automatically and/or dynamically. The wireless portable storage and the wireless transmitter and/or wireless receiver may exchange data via said first antenna array and said second antenna array. A secondary wireless communication link may be established to initialize the establishing of the microwave communication link. The secondary wireless communication link may be established via Bluetooth protocol. The wireless portable storage and the wireless transmitter and/or wireless receiver may receive and transmit in the 60 GHz frequency band. | 06-18-2009 |
20090156121 | WIRELESS NETWORK AWARENESS IN APPLIANCES - A household appliance, such as a microwave oven or cordless phone, reduces interference with a wireless network by requesting control of the network's channel during a period of time when the appliance will be emitting signals that may interfere with network communications on that channel. Some embodiments contend for the channel before transmitting the request by using standard protocols, while other embodiments simply transmit the request during a detected idle period. Some embodiments don't bother sending a request if no activity is detected on the channel. | 06-18-2009 |
20090156122 | MODULATOR APPARATUS HAVING A MECHANISM FOR CHARGING ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND/OR DIGITAL FILE DECODING CAPABILITIES - A modulator apparatus comprising: an elongate housing having a distal portion and a proximal portion that flares outwardly from the distal portion; a cigarette lighter power adapter formed into the distal portion of the elongate housing; a user control panel located on the proximal portion of the elongate housing; an audio input jack in the elongate housing; a battery charging mechanism in the elongate housing for charging a battery of an external electronic device; a circuit located within the elongate housing and operably coupled to the cigarette lighter power adapter, the battery charging mechanism, the audio input jack, and the user control panel; and the circuit comprising means for transmitting an audio signal received by the audio input jack to a radio tuner. | 06-18-2009 |
20090156123 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR DISPLAYING WIRELESS DEVICES THEREOF - A mobile terminal includes a wireless communication unit for searching for wireless devices for pairing with the mobile terminal, a controller for determining a priority of each of the searched wireless devices according to a specific condition, and a display unit for displaying the searched wireless devices, wherein each searched wireless device is particularly displayed on a display region with respect to the other searched wireless devices according to its determined priority. | 06-18-2009 |
20090156124 | Portable communication device having matching function and portable communication system and communication method therefor - A portable communication device having a matching function and a portable communication system and a communication method thereof are provided. The portable communication device includes an operating interface, a wireless communication module, a determining unit and a displaying unit. The operating interface is capable of generating a first user data. The wireless communication module is capable of receiving a second user data transmitted by another portable communication device. The determining unit is capable of determining whether the first user data and the second user data satisfy a matching condition. The displaying unit is capable of showing a noticing figure if the first user data and the second user data satisfy the matching condition. | 06-18-2009 |
20090156125 | System and Method for Matching Wireless Devices - Vehicles and methods for providing a communication between a mobile unit and a vehicle are described. In one embodiment, a communication is received from a mobile unit, the communication is interfaced to a vehicle's electromechanical system, an audio-visual interface associated with the vehicle's electromechanical system displays the communication; and a communication is transmitted to the mobile unit. | 06-18-2009 |
20090163140 | Biochip electroporator and its use in multi-site, single-cell electroporation - A remote access and control system for remotely controlling a wide variety of devices using an application installed in a cell phone in conjunction with a control module in communication with the cell phone and the device(s). A portal-based access and control system is also disclosed. | 06-25-2009 |
20090170434 | METHOD OF VEHICLE TO VEHICLE COMMUNICATION - A method of communicating information that has been formatted for Internet publication from a principal vehicle using short range wireless communication components to communicate with a second vehicle. The method includes storing a web page (blog, social networking page, etc.) or other information formatted for Internet publication in the principal vehicle. An introductory signal is transmitted to the second vehicle. A communication link is established between the principal vehicle and the second vehicle using the respective short range wireless communication components. The second vehicle is then queried for authorization to transmit the information and, if given, the information is then transmitted to the second vehicle via the communications link. User-selected categories can be used to identify common interests between users of the two vehicles. The method can be used to share user information with other potentially interested drivers to facilitate human interactions and relationships. | 07-02-2009 |
20090170435 | DATA FORMAT CONVERSION FOR BLUETOOTH-ENABLED DEVICES - Format converters and methods of performing data format conversion are provided. The format converters may convert compressed data into a different compressed format that is compatible with the Bluetooth transmission standard. The format converter may decompose the compressed data into frequency domain data streams of different frequency sub-bands. The format converter may transform each data stream of frequency domain information from a first encoding scheme to a second encoding scheme, and may then quantize the transformed data steams based on bit allocation information for each sub-band. The format converters may also include a bit allocation component which computes the bit allocation information for each sub-band based on an unfiltered version of the compressed data. | 07-02-2009 |
20090176451 | ENCODED COLOR INFORMATION FACILITATING DEVICE PAIRING FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Pairing information is encoded as color information by a color coding device. The encoded color information is displayed by the color coding device and viewed by a color decoding device. The color decoding device decodes the encoded pairing information and uses the decoded pairing information to establish wireless communication with the color coding device. | 07-09-2009 |
20090176452 | MECHANISM FOR IMPROVED INTEROPERABILITY WHEN CONTENT PROTECTION IS USED WITH AN AUDIO STREAM - A method and system that configure communication between devices in a network utilizing bluetooth technology, where one device may or may not support content protection, and another device may or may not support content protection. A first device may utilize a configuration that enables data communication via a bluetooth communication link with a second device based on whether the second device supports content protection. The content protected data communicated between the devices is based on the first device configuration. If the second device does not support content protection, the first device may utilize a configuration that does not require content protection for communicating data with the second device. If the second device supports content protection, the first device may utilize a configuration that requires content protection for communicating data. If data communication utilizing content protection fails, one or both of the devices may revert to a configuration that does not require content protection. | 07-09-2009 |
20090176453 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC CARRIER SELECTION - A dynamic carrier selection method and system permit units operating on a first carrier to change to a second carrier when performance of the first carrier becomes unacceptable. Carrier quality measurements are taken in which carrier quality is a function of interference and multi-path fading and carrier-signal strength. The carriers are ranked according to measured quality in a carrier candidate list. The carrier candidate list is used to permit units to determine which carrier they should switch to when the carrier there currently operating on is determined to have unacceptable performance. Carrier measurements are retaken in response to a carrier change by unit or a predetermined time period having elapsed. | 07-09-2009 |
20090186575 | Individualized Short-Range Radio Communication Method, System and Central Device for the Implementation Thereof - The present invention relates to an individualized short-range radio communication method applicable to communications which can include applications or programs and multimedia information, between:
| 07-23-2009 |
20090186576 | Bluetooth car kit - The “Bluetooth Car Kit” is a new and unique product combining Bluetooth hands-free cell phone calling and USB/SD/MMC supporting FM transmission. The integrated FM Transmitter streams stereo music from its own USB disk, or SD/MMC card through the in-car sound system for music play, playback as well as music select. The “Bluetooth Car Kit” has an audio cable line-in hole which is used to connect any audio device. The “Bluetooth Car Kit” also has the function of hands-free speaking. The “Bluetooth Car Kit” just simply connects to the cigarette lighter socket in the vehicle making it easily transportable. The integrated 1.5 inch LCD display can show multi-information from both of its own USB disk/SD/MMC card as well as the cell phone Bluetooth. The appearance of the “Bluetooth Car Kit” is unique. | 07-23-2009 |
20090186577 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING NETWORK ASSOCIATION STATUS - An apparatus and method for determining network association status includes a first electronic device having a wireless communication system and a proximity system, and a second electronic device having a wireless communication system and a proximity system. The wireless communication systems of the first and second electronic devices have a communication range therebetween greater than an interaction range between the proximity systems of the first and second electronic devices. The proximity system of one of the first and second electronic devices is configured to interact with the proximity system of the other of the first and second electronic devices to determine proximity between the first and second electronic devices. The communication system of the first electronic device is configured to establish an association status communication with the communication system of the second electronic device after the proximity of the first and second electronic devices has been determined. Further, one of the first and second electronic devices is configured to notify an operator of an association status of the first and second electronic devices. | 07-23-2009 |
20090186578 | HINGE TYPE BLUETOOTH EAR SET - Disclosed herein is a hinge type Bluetooth ear set. The hinge type Bluetooth ear set has an ear phone hingably connected to a main body of the ear set. An antenna is provided by an antenna pattern formed on an antenna board independent of a main board. The antenna board is connected to the main board at a right angle and disposed in a space between a shaft support supporting the ear phone and an outer surface of the main body. The hinge type Bluetooth ear set has a reduced size of the main board. Further, the hinge type Bluetooth ear set has the antenna board disposed at a lateral side of the hinge shaft, enabling reduction of an overall size of the Bluetooth ear set while ensuring a suitable size of the antenna board. | 07-23-2009 |
20090186579 | WIRELESS HEADSET WITH CHARACTER MESSAGE OUTPUTTING FUNCTION AND METHOD FOR OUTPUTTING CHARACTER MESSAGE - A wireless headset with a character message outputting function and a method for outputting a character message are disclosed. The character message is output after being converted into a voice signal when a mobile communication terminal performing wireless connection with the wireless headset receives the character message. A user can confirm the character message through the voice signal using the wireless headset without directly confirming the character message in the mobile communication terminal, which allows the user to confirm the character message in the wireless headset while listening to the music. | 07-23-2009 |
20090197530 | Guard tour system utilizing mote networks - A guard tour system utilizing mote networks is disclosed. The system includes a web browser, a server and a plurality of motes in a network which communicate with one another using radio frequency communication. The motes have media readers associated therewith permitting the identification of guard tour officers and incident identifiers to be read from various types of media. The motes transmit guard tour data to the server via a radio frequency transceiver or a communication interface for analysis, reporting, notification or other purpose. Pre-existing mote networks can be utilized thus reducing the number of motes required for communication with the server or other computer utilized by the guard tour system. | 08-06-2009 |
20090197531 | Method and system for patching a communication line using magneto-inductive signals - A system and method for patching a break in a communication line using magneto-inductive signals. The magneto-inductive signals are modulated data signals having a carrier frequency below 10 kHz. Multiple magneto-inductive communication units are placed in spaced relation on a communication line. A break in the communication line is detected between two of the units and the units establish a magneto-inductive link to relay communication signals from the communication line, thereby patching the break. | 08-06-2009 |
20090197532 | POWER CONSUMPTION NORMALIZATION FOR DEVICES WITHIN A DISTRIBUTED NETWORK - An apparatus may include a power monitor that is arranged and configured to monitor a level of power, a link module that is arranged and configured to establish a wireless link having link parameters with a first device, a link parameters module that is arranged and configured to monitor the link parameters, and a transfer control module that is arranged and configured to communicate the link parameters to a second device and transfer control of the wireless link to the second device. | 08-06-2009 |
20090203316 | METHOD FOR USING BLUETOOTH MODULE TO PROCESS NON-BLUETOOTH SIGNALS - An electronic device having a communications module with a first set of data rates can be enabled to use the communications module to process signals received from a source that uses a second set of data rates. The device may generate packets, frames, etc. at the first set of data rates using the communications module from the signals received from the remote source by sampling signals at one or more of the first set of data rates. The device may then reconstruct data or payloads originally transmitted in the signals at the second set of data rates from the packets generated at the first set of data rates. Thus, the device can process signals or transmissions at the second set of data rates using the first set of data rates without requiring additional receivers or communications modules to process the signals. | 08-13-2009 |
20090203317 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EVENT CONFIRMATION USING PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - A method and a system for confirming an event using a short-range wireless communications network are disclosed. The mechanism includes various steps including monitoring the event, verifying the event, and performing a function when the event is verified. In one embodiment, a series of events are initially entered in a scheduling database such as a calendar software. Once the events are stored in the scheduling database, the mechanism monitors the events in accordance with a predefined sequence. In one aspect, the events may be ordered in a chronological order. If an occurrence of the event according to a predefined sequence is detected, the mechanism obtains ambient information using its short-range wireless capability to verify the actual occurrence of the event. Upon verifying the occurrence of the event, the mechanism performs a function, which can be a predetermined function or a real-time instructed function. | 08-13-2009 |
20090209202 | Managing anonymous communications between users based on short-range wireless connection identifiers - A method for managing in network equipment of a communication network anonymous communications between a first and a second mobile user apparatus includes: a) receiving from the first mobile user apparatus, through a first network connection, data indicating that a short-range wireless connection between the first mobile user apparatus and the second mobile user apparatus has been established, the data including a second unique short-range wireless connection identifier associated with the second mobile user apparatus and a message for the second mobile user apparatus; b) by using the second unique short-range wireless connection identifier, obtaining a network address associated with the second mobile user apparatus; and c) by using the network address obtained in b), sending data to the second mobile user apparatus through a second network connection, the data including the message received in a) from the first mobile user apparatus and a first anonymous identifying code univocally associated with the first mobile user apparatus. | 08-20-2009 |
20090215392 | Electronic Device and a Method for Transfer of Data - A first electronic device includes a radio transceiver for receiving a name request message from a second electronic device and for responding with a name reply message including data in addition to or as an alternative to a name. The second electronic device includes a radio transceiver for transmitting the name request message and for receiving in reply the name reply message; and extraction means for extracting from the received name reply message the data that is included in the name reply message as an addition to or as an alternative to a name. The data may be a URI and the first device may be an advertiser device. | 08-27-2009 |
20090215393 | AUTOMATIC INFORMATION DELIVERY USING A PLURALITY OF NETWORKED DEVICES - Particular embodiments generally relate to providing information to a user. In one embodiment, a first information delivery device detects a headset associated with a user. The headset is detected when it is within a range of the first information delivery device. The first information delivery device contacts the headset using pairing information for the headset. After the pairing operation, information to deliver to the user is then determined. The information may be determined based on a user identifier associated with the user. For example, personalized information may be delivered to the headset. This personalized information may be information about the store or shopping center. In one example, the headset may be automatically contacted by information delivery device, which may cause the headset to ring. The user may decide to answer and can then hear the personalized information. | 08-27-2009 |
20090215394 | WIRELESS TRANSLATION DEVICE - A translator for translating wireless communications. The translator includes a first antenna configured to carry signals between the wireless translator and a contactless payment reader, and a second antenna configured to carry signals between the wireless translator and a Bluetooth-enabled device. Circuitry operably coupled to both antennas establishes wireless communication with the contactless payment reader via the first antenna and receives from the contactless payment reader a signal comprising a request for information. The circuitry establishes wireless communication with the Bluetooth-enabled device via the second antenna, and requests the information from the Bluetooth-enabled device. The circuitry receives the information from the Bluetooth-enabled device, and relays the information to the contactless payment reader. | 08-27-2009 |
20090215395 | Enhanced Range Passive Wireless Controller - A wireless keyboard and reader combination comprises a keyboard having a plurality of keys, an antenna, and a plurality of passive transponder circuits, employing backscatter transmission coded in the time domain using a reflected series of pulses, coupled to the antenna and associated with the keys. For example, SAW transponders may be employed. The passive transponder circuits are selectively coupled to the antenna and provide a coded response identifying a key in response to key activation. An associated reader includes a source of an interrogating field applied to the antenna of the keyboard and a decoder for determining the coded response from the passive transponder circuits. | 08-27-2009 |
20090215396 | INTER-DEVICE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FOR INTRA-DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS - To support an intra-device communication using inter-device wireless communications, an RF bus controller is operably coupled to receive an RF bus access request from one of a plurality of circuit modules for an intra-device RF communication. The RF bus controller determines whether to grant the RF bus access request using intra-device RF bus resources or inter-device RF bus resources. The RF bus controller determines desired inter-device RF bus resources of another device when the inter-device RF bus resources are to be used. The RF bus controller transmit a request for access to the desired inter-device RF bus resources to an RF bus controller of the another device. The RF bus controller establishes an RF communication link between the one of the plurality of circuit modules and a target circuit module of another IC within the device when access to the desired inter-device RF bus resources is granted. | 08-27-2009 |
20090215397 | COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES BASED ON DEVICE-TO-DEVICE PHYSICAL CONTACT - A method includes detecting one or more physical contacts between the device and another device and determining whether the one or more physical contacts correspond to one or more taps. The method further includes initiating a discovery request to the other device, when it is determined that the physical contact corresponds to the one or more taps, and communicating to the other device when a communication link is established between the device and the other device based on the discovery request. | 08-27-2009 |
20090221234 | Method and system for providing concurrent wireless universal serial bus (WUSB) hub and wireless audio/video interfaces within a single device - Systems and methods are disclosed that provide WUSB (wireless universal serial bus) and wireless audio/video interfaces within a single device by integrating a Bluetooth subsystem with a WUSB hub and by providing shared operation between the UWB (ultra wide band) and Bluetooth subsystems. In one embodiment, a system includes both a UWB subsystem and a Bluetooth subsystem that are configured to share one or more operational parameters, such as device pairing information. As such, Bluetooth subsystems and the WUSB subsystems are allowed to cooperate and share information to streamline operation, and this streamlining allows the Bluetooth subsystem to handle isochronous operations, such as audio/video communications, and allows the UWB subsystem to continue to handle USB connected peripheral devices. The disclosed systems with WUSB and wireless audio/video interfaces can also be included as subsystems within other devices, such as display monitors or speaker systems for computer systems. | 09-03-2009 |
20090233547 | CRADLE FOR A MEDIA PLAYER - A cradle for a media player is provided. The cradle comprises a base and at least one side wall extending upwardly from the base and extending around the periphery of the base. The base and the at least one side wall define a hollow interior for releasably receiving therein the media player. The cradle also has a retainer for assisting in releasably retaining the media player in the hollow interior, and a signal receiver for receiving a media signal from the media player when the media player is in the hollow interior and in a reproduction mode. An antenna in the cradle is for receiving the media signal from the signal receiver and transmitting the media signal by use of a wireless system for enabling reproduction of the media signal by a wireless-enabled reproduction apparatus. | 09-17-2009 |
20090233548 | SKIN-BASED INFORMATION TRANSFER BETWEEN MOBILE DEVICES - A first mobile terminal may transmit wireless network setup information to a second mobile terminal via a skin-based communication network. A wireless network connection may be established based on information included in the wireless network setup message. A data item may be received from the second mobile terminal via the wireless network connection. | 09-17-2009 |
20090233549 | Techniques for MMWAVE WPAN communications with high-directional steerable antennas combining omni-directional transmissions with beamforming training - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method for communicating in a millimeter wave (MMWAVE) wireless personal area network (WPAN) system using a reliable low-rate omni-directional communications mode implemented as TX-RX space scanning using directional antennas; and using a high-rate directional communications mode with beamformed directional antennas. | 09-17-2009 |
20090233550 | SERVICE CONNECTION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BLUETOOTH DEVICE - A service connection system and a method for a Bluetooth-enabled device for avoiding error caused by Hands-Free Profile (HFP) mismatch in a service level connection initialization procedure are provided. A service connection method for Bluetooth communication includes receiving, at a master device, a first command containing a first set of features supported in a slave device, extracting the first set of features from the first command, matching a second set of features with the first set of features, and transmitting a second command including the second set of features to the slave device. | 09-17-2009 |
20090239467 | SOPHISTICATED AUTOMATED RELATIONSHIP ALERTER - Device, process and program for determining and alerting a user of the existence of nearby acquaintance, including: providing a first electronic communication device having near-field transmitting and receiving communications capability, a user interface and control circuitry; transmitting from the first communication device an inquiry to determine the presence in the near-field of a compatible second electronic communication device; upon receipt of a positive response to the inquiry, transmitting from the first communication device anonymous user indicia; receiving anonymous user indicia from the second communication device; coordinating the received anonymous user indicia to determine the presence of any matches between the transmitted anonymous user information and the received anonymous user indicia; and providing either a list of matches or an indication of no matches to the user via the user interface. Based on the information exchanged, the users can determine whether a relationship between the users exists or might be created. | 09-24-2009 |
20090239468 | WIRELESS MASS STORAGE FLASH MEMORY - Systems and/or methods are presented that can facilitate access of a memory device by the use of wireless communication technologies. A memory module is presented which combines memory with a wireless adapter component and a memory controller component to facilitate the wireless transmission and reception of data and/or commands from and to host component that requests access to the memory and the data stored therein. The memory module can dynamically switch between one wireless communication technology to another based on signal strength, signal quality, the distance between the memory module and a host component, power usage, as well as other criteria to facilitate an optimal data transmission or throughput rate. | 09-24-2009 |
20090239469 | TECHNIQUES FOR DISCOVERING SERVICES PROVIDED IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method for discovering services provided in a wireless network, comprising enabling devices equipped with radio interfaces to advertise the services it provides and discover services offered by other nearby devices without establishing a network connection with the devices. | 09-24-2009 |
20090239470 | Modular cell phone for laptop computers - A communication system including a wireless communicator including a baseband modem for connecting to the Internet via a cellular network, and a connector for physically connecting the wireless communicator to a laptop computer port, and a laptop computer including a wireless modem for communicating in a wireless mode with the wireless communicator, a port for physically connecting the wireless communicator to the laptop computer and for communicating in a wired mode with the wireless communicator, and a connection wedge, wherein the laptop computer connects to the Internet via a link between the laptop computer and the wireless communicator, and wherein the connection wedge selectively uses the wired mode or the wireless mode for the link according to whether or not the wireless communicator is physically connected to the laptop computer, respectively. A method is also described and claimed. | 09-24-2009 |
20090239471 | BLUETOOTH AND WLAN COEXISTENCE ARCHITECTURE HAVING A SHARED LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER - A radio frequency (RF) front-end configured to share transmissions and receptions of Bluetooth signals and WLAN signals. In an exemplary embodiment, the RF front-end comprises a first path coupled between an antenna and a transceiver dedicated to transmissions of the WLAN signals; a second path coupled between the antenna and the transceiver dedicated to simultaneous receptions of the Bluetooth signals and the WLAN signals; and a third path coupled between the antenna and the transceiver. The third path may be dedicated to transmissions only of the Bluetooth signals when a WLAN link is active; and transmissions and receptions of the Bluetooth signals when the WLAN link is active and in a power save state, and when the WLAN link is inactive. | 09-24-2009 |
20090247080 | METHOD OF TRANSFERRING APPLICATION DATA FROM A FIRST DEVICE TO A SECOND DEVICE, AND A DATA TRANSFER SYSTEM - The invention describes a method of transferring application data (F | 10-01-2009 |
20090247081 | WIRELESS TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DEVICE - A wireless transmitting/receiving device includes a wireless emitter, a connector, a digital signal processor, an audio signal connector and an analog signal processor. The wireless transmitting/receiving device is used to be electrically connected to an electronic device and transmit data by sending and receiving wireless signals. The connector is used to be electrically connected to the electronic device. The digital signal processor is electrically connected to the wireless emitter, and the digital signal processor may be connected to the connector. The audio signal connector is used to be electrically connected to the electronic device. The analog signal processor is electrically connected to the wireless emitter, and the analog signal processor may be connected to the audio signal connector. | 10-01-2009 |
20090247082 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS, COMPUTER SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic apparatus comprises a wireless communication device configured to conduct wireless communication with an external apparatus, a switch connected to a radio frequency circuit of the wireless communication device, and configured to couple an RF signal input and output port of the radio frequency circuit to one of a wireless communication antenna and a cable connected to the external apparatus, and a control module configured to control the switch to switch a mode of conducting communication with the external apparatus between a wireless communication mode and a wired communication mode, a wireless signal being transmitted and received between the external apparatus and the wireless communication device through the wireless communication antenna in the wireless communication mode, the wireless signal being transmitted and received between the external apparatus and the wireless communication device through the cable in the wired communication mode. | 10-01-2009 |
20090253373 | Enhanced sensitivity radio frequency front end circuit - An enhanced sensitivity radio frequency (RF) front end circuit includes a transformer configured to convert a balanced transmit signal to an unbalanced transmit signal and to convert a second filtered receive signal to a balanced receive signal. A switch in a first state receives the unbalanced transmit signal from the transformer and transfers the unbalanced transmit signal to an amplifier circuit and receives an amplified transmit signal from the amplifier circuit and transfers the amplified transmit signal to a filter. In a second state, the switch receives a first filtered receive signal from the filter and transfers the first filtered receive signal to the amplifier circuit and receives a second filtered receive signal from the amplifier circuit and transfers the second filtered receive signal to the transformer. In a first state, the amplifier circuit receives the unbalanced transmit signal from the switch and amplifies the unbalanced transmit signal to generate the amplified transmit signal, and in a second state, the amplifier circuit receives the first filtered receive signal from the switch and attenuates selected first frequencies to generate the second filtered receive signal. | 10-08-2009 |
20090253374 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication device is provided with a first communication section for performing non-contact communication with another wireless communication device and receiving predetermined setting data from the other wireless communication device, a second communication section capable of establishing a wireless connection with the other wireless communication device, a control section for establishing the wireless connection between the second communication section and the other wireless communication device by using the setting data, necessary for the wireless connection, received by the first communication section, and a data processing section for storing the setting data in a storage medium before the wireless connection is released. The control section uses the setting data stored in the storage medium at the time of establishing a wireless reconnection between the second communication section and the other wireless communication device. | 10-08-2009 |
20090258596 | DYNAMICALLY VARYING LINK SUPER VISION TIMEOUT IN BLUETOOTH AND SIMILARLY ENABLED DEVICES TO DETECT LINK LOSS - The present example provides for modification of the link supervision timer allows for an enhanced user experience with wireless devices, by allowing loss of the wireless link to be handled more effectively. The link super vision timer may be changed without modifying the device profile being used. The change in the timer may be based upon the profile of the communications that is occurring, and upon the current state of the communications. | 10-15-2009 |
20090258597 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING RADIO SIGNALS TO IDENTIFY AN ACTIVE SYSTEM IN A COEXISTING RADIO NETWORK - The present invention discloses a method of multiple systems sensing for coexisting radio networks, including: performing energy detection and carrier locking; detecting the fundamental frequencies; and identifying the corresponding active systems from the detected fundamental frequencies and the evaluation of the estimated power spectrum density vector or the estimated trispectrum matrix. Based on the method, an apparatus capable of multiple systems sensing is presented. Furthermore, the present invention also provides an apparatus of multiple systems sensing for coexisting radio networks. | 10-15-2009 |
20090264070 | Data Communications Between Short-Range Enabled Wireless Devices Over Networks and Proximity Marketing to Such Devices - A method for allowing short-ranged communication devices to communicate with each other using the Internet. Cell servers are provided in a first and second zones linked to the Internet and adapted for transmitting voice and other digital data over the Internet such as using VoIP. The method includes registering users of short-range enabled devices, such as Bluetooth cell phones, with a communication system and storing a device identifier along with a user ID and password. A contact list is stored for each registered user. The method includes a registered user entering a cell serviced by a server, the server discovering the user's device, logging the user into the system based on the device identifier and an entered user ID and password, receiving a communication request to chat with one of the listed contacts, and establishing a communication session using time previously awarded to the user for receiving marketing content. | 10-22-2009 |
20090264071 | MULTIFUNCTIONAL PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - The invention discloses a multifunctional portable electronic device ( | 10-22-2009 |
20090264072 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND VOLUME ADJUSTING METHOD FOR AUDIO DEVICE - An exemplary communication device is capable of adjusting a sound volume on an audio device. The communication device includes an input module, a communication unit, a signal generator, and a wireless transmitter. The input module is configured for receiving a first input. The communication unit is configured for receiving a call, and answering the call in response to the first input. The signal generator is configured for generating a first control signal when the communication unit answers the call. The wireless transmitter is configured for sending the first control signal to the audio device to change a current sound volume on the audio device from a first volume value to a first predetermined value. A related volume adjusting method for an audio device is also provided. | 10-22-2009 |
20090264073 | NECKPAD COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM FOR A HELMET - A neckpad communications system for a helmet includes a neckpad body that includes coupling members for detachably coupling the neckpad body to a surface of the helmet. The system includes a communications unit having a first part that is disposed within and covered by the neckpad body and is configured to permit audio communication with another remote device and a second part including audio transducers located at least partially outside the neckpad body. The audio transducers are operatively connected to the communications unit and can include at least one speaker and a microphone. The neckpad body includes cushioning to allow it to be worn against a user's body and includes controls associated with the communications unit that are accessible exteriorly. | 10-22-2009 |
20090264074 | Integrated Multimode Radio and Components Thereof - An integrated multimode radio includes a multimode receiver and a multimode transmitter. The multimode receiver includes a shared receiver front-end, a receiver multiplexor, and a plurality of receiver IF stages. The multimode transmitter includes a shared transmitter front-end, a transmitter multiplexor, and a plurality of transmitter IF stages. | 10-22-2009 |
20090264075 | BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION THROUGH A SINGLE VIRTUAL PORT - A system that provides for Bluetooth communications from a first Bluetooth enabled device to a second Bluetooth enabled device is provided. The system comprising a Bluetooth manager that provides a graphical user interface, an Outgoing Port Driver that shares configurational information with and is started by the Bluetooth manager, a first serial port that receives data from an application operating on the first device, the first serial port acting as a virtual serial port where the first serial port is not connected to communications hardware, a second serial port that is connected to communications hardware, the second serial port acting as an outgoing port, and a Bluetooth stack that receives data to be communicated from the second serial port, wherein the Outgoing Port Driver directs the data from the first serial port to the second serial port via the Outgoing Port Driver. | 10-22-2009 |
20090270033 | Public Information Method and System - Public information system, wherein information bases communicate information interactively to mobiles via a short-range radio link. Each mobile has interface software enabling the information base to display the information on the screen of the mobile as if the screen were a device of the information base, and enabling the user to communicate data to the information base via the keypad of said mobile as if the mobile input interface were a device of the information base. | 10-29-2009 |
20090270034 | Devices, methods, and programs for identifying radio communication devices - Devices, methods, and programs for identifying radio communication devices in a subject vehicle perform a first search and second search for radio communication devices in a vicinity of an in-vehicle device and store addresses of the radio communication devices identified by the first search and the second search. The devices, methods, and programs compare the addresses of the radio communication devices searched by the second search with the addresses of the radio communication devices searched by the first search, and determine that a particular radio communication device is inside the subject vehicle if that particular radio communication device's address is identified by both the first search and the second search. | 10-29-2009 |
20090270035 | BROADCASTING RECEIVING APPARATUS, WIRELESS INTERFACE APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - Provided is a broadcasting receiving apparatus which includes: a first communication unit which communicates with a wireless interface apparatus in a first communication manner based on identification information; a second communication unit which communicates with the wireless interface apparatus in a second communication manner; and a controller which receives the identification information corresponding to the wireless interface apparatus through the second communication unit. | 10-29-2009 |
20090275283 | Use of intra-body communication - Disclosed is a communication apparatus capable of communicating with a radio network and capable of communicating with an external apparatus over an intra-body communication connection and an accessory apparatus capable of transmitting data to a radio network and capable of communicating with an external apparatus over an intra-body communication connection. The communication apparatus communicates through the intra-body communication connection to the accessory apparatus configuration data relating to connecting to the radio network. | 11-05-2009 |
20090280743 | DEVICE FOR THE WIRELESS TRANSMISSION OF SIGNALS BETWEEN TWO PARTS OF A PROCESSING MACHINE - In a device for wireless transmission of signals between two parts ( | 11-12-2009 |
20090280744 | Controlling Visibility of a Wireless Device in Discoverable Mode - A wireless device in a discoverable mode controls its visibility by determining whether to ignore or respond to an inquiry, received from an inquiring device, based at least in part on one or more properties of the inquiring device. | 11-12-2009 |
20090286477 | Methods, Portable Electronic Devices, Systems and Computer Program Products Providing Electronic Versions of Information from Electronic Conference Room Whiteboards - Methods, portable electronic devices, systems and computer program products for wirelessly transmitting information from an electronic whiteboard. A wireless connection is established between a portable electronic device and the electronic whiteboard. A digital copy of content of the electronic whiteboard is received at the portable electronic device over the established wireless connection. | 11-19-2009 |
20090286478 | ARRANGEMENT TO TRANSMIT MAGNETIC RESONANCE SIGNALS - An arrangement for transmitting magnetic resonance signals, with a transmission link that connects a local coil with a receiver, has a first channel of the local coil with a first single antenna to acquire a first magnetic resonance signal, as well as a first mixer connected with the first single antenna. The first mixer forms an intermediate-frequency first signal from the supplied first magnetic resonance signal. A second channel of the local coil has a second single antenna to acquire a second magnetic resonance signal, as well as a second mixer connected with the second single antenna. The second mixer forms an intermediate-frequency second signal from the supplied second magnetic resonance signal. The local coil has a device for signal combination that, by frequency multiplexing, that combines the intermediate-frequency first signal of the first channel and the intermediate-frequency second signal of the second channel so that it arrives at the receiver via the transmission path. The receiver has an A/D converter at which one of the transmitted intermediate-frequency signals of an associated channel arrives in order to be sampled with a sampling frequency for digitization. For frequency conversion, a first local oscillator frequency is connected at the first mixer and a second local oscillator frequency is connected at the second mixer. the first and second local oscillator frequencies are selected such that intermediate-frequencies formed by the frequency conversion are mirror-symmetrical relative to the sampling frequency of the A/D converter. | 11-19-2009 |
20090291636 | System and method for locating a device - Described are a system and a method for locating a device. The system includes a mobile device associated with a network via a wireless transceiver, the mobile device including an audio output component; and a network component receiving a query and generating a command signal to be transmitted to the mobile device in response to the query, the command signal indicating to the mobile device to activate the audio output component. A sound emitted from the audio output component is used to locate the mobile device when a location of the mobile device is unknown. | 11-26-2009 |
20090291637 | SECURE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless communication system for a vehicle is provided. The system comprises a portable wireless device comprising first and second manual interface devices and adapted to transmit a wireless network security protocol confirmation signal in response to manipulation of the first and second manual interface devices, and an onboard wireless communication device for the vehicle, adapted to accept a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) session outcome in response to receiving the wireless network security protocol confirmation signal. | 11-26-2009 |
20090291638 | Wireless Communication Device, Program, Wireless Communication Method, and Wireless Communication System - A wireless communication device includes: a generation portion that generates management information for forming a wireless network with wireless communication devices in the vicinity, and operation instruction information that instructs operation of at least one of the wireless communication devices in the vicinity; and a communication portion that periodically transmits, to the wireless communication devices in the vicinity, management information to which the operation instruction information has been added. | 11-26-2009 |
20090291639 | Communication Apparatus, Communication System, Communication Method, and Program - A communication apparatus, a communication system, a communication method, and a program capable of performing relay transfer of a data file swiftly and simply in performing short-distance one-to-one communication are provided. The communication apparatus includes a communication part that performs short-distance one-to-one communication with a communication partner apparatus via electric field coupling or magnetic field coupling, a relay transfer mode setting part that sets a relay transfer mode in which a data file are relay-transferred from at least one first apparatus to at least one second apparatus, a storage part that holds the data file received from the first apparatus while the relay transfer mode is set, and a transmission control part that transmits the data file held in the storage part to the second apparatus with which communication is established while the relay transfer mode is set. | 11-26-2009 |
20090298428 | METHOD OF CONNECTING MULTIPLE BLUETOOTH PROFILES AND BLUETOOTH APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A method of connecting multiple Bluetooth profiles and a Bluetooth apparatus using the same. The method of connecting Bluetooth profiles includes connecting at least one of multiple Bluetooth profiles, and then connecting the remaining ones(s) of the multiple Bluetooth profiles. Accordingly, an application as desired by a user can be performed more conveniently and more simply. | 12-03-2009 |
20090298429 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication apparatus includes: a communication module configured to perform close proximity wireless communication with an external device; a communication detector configured to detect whether the close proximity wireless communication is established by the communication module; an orientation detector configured to detect an orientation of the apparatus; and a processor configured to perform processing cooperatively with the communication module while the close proximity wireless communication is established based on the orientation detected by the orientation detector. | 12-03-2009 |
20090305631 | Method And System For A Bluetooth Headset With A Clock - Aspects of a method and system for a Bluetooth headset with a clock are provided. A Bluetooth headset may have an access to real-time clock information such as a real-time clock value at a specific time instant and generate corresponding audio and/or visual representations to a user via Bluetooth communication. The real-time clock information to the Bluetooth headset may be originated within or external to the Bluetooth headset. The timing of the real-time clock of the Bluetooth headset may be maintained by a Bluetooth clock of the BT headset. The Bluetooth headset may provide respective real-time updates by pressing a button on the Bluetooth headset or from timing events such as calendar entries or personal alarms downloaded into the BT headset from a Bluetooth device, and/or from timed Bluetooth messages communicated to the Bluetooth headset from the peer device. | 12-10-2009 |
20090305632 | Mobile Telephony Presence - Systems and methods for reporting of presence information associated with use of a mobile telephone are presented. In one example, a headset that is paired with a cellular mobile phone relays presence information to a presence application running on a computer. | 12-10-2009 |
20090305633 | Identification of Mobile Electronic Terminal Through Wireless Interface Capabilities - The present invention provides a method for determining an identification of a mobile electronic terminal comprising at least one wireless interface, the method comprising maintaining a database storing a plurality of data sets, wherein each data set is indicative of capabilities of a wireless interface and associated with at least one identification of a mobile electronic terminal, receiving wireless interface capability data from said wireless interface, comparing said received wireless interface capability data with said stored data sets, and determining an identification of said mobile electronic terminal on the basis of said comparison. The invention further provides a device for determining an identification of a mobile electronic terminal which comprises at least one wireless interface, the device comprising a database access component adapted for accessing a database comprising a plurality of data sets, wherein each data set is indicative of capabilities of a wireless interface and is associated with at least one mobile electronic terminal, a wireless interface adapted for requesting wireless interface capabilities from said wireless interface of said mobile electronic terminal, and for receiving wireless interface capability data from said wireless interface, and a controller adapted for comparing said received wireless interface capability data with said plurality of data sets, and for determining an identification of said mobile electronic terminal on the basis of said comparison. | 12-10-2009 |
20090305634 | Device, Method, Computer Program and Chipset for Facilitating Data Exchange Between Two Piconets - A low power radio frequency device, comprising: a low power radio frequency transceiver; and a processor operable to control the transceiver to transfer first data between the low power radio frequency device and a further low power radio frequency device using slots allocated according to a predetermined regular schedule, to shift the predetermined regular schedule to free slots previously allocated to transferring first data, and to transfer second data using at least one of the freed slots between the low power radio frequency device and at least one other low power radio frequency device, different to the further low power radio frequency device. | 12-10-2009 |
20090305635 | PACKAGING MATERIAL WITH ELECTROMAGNETIC COUPLING MODULE - A packaging material with an electromagnetic coupling module for a RFID system, is constructed such that a radio IC chip is protected from external shock and environmental change without adversely affecting the planarity of the packaging material, the assembly of a radiator and an electromagnetic coupling module is facilitated, and the radiation characteristics are satisfactory. A packaging material includes a liner and a wave-shaped core material, wherein an electromagnetic coupling module and a radiator that are electromagnetically coupled to each other are arranged inside of the packaging material. The electromagnetic coupling module includes a radio IC chip and a feeder circuit board, on which the radio IC chip is mounted, the feeder circuit board including a resonant circuit that includes an inductance element. The radiator electromagnetically couples with the electromagnetic coupling module to transmit/receive high frequency signals. | 12-10-2009 |
20090311960 | Smart/Active RFID Tag for Use in a WPAN - A system and method is provided for processing communication signals in a wireless personal area network (WPAN) using a transceiver comprising a first transmitter and a first receiver operable to transmit and receive signals using a first transmission protocol and a second transmitter operable to transmit signals using a second transmission protocol. In various embodiments, the first receiver is used to receive a first signal that was transmitted using the first communication protocol and the second transmitter is used to transmit a second signal using the second transmission protocol in response to receipt of the first signal. The second signal is then processed to determine the location of the object. In some embodiments, the first transmission protocol is compliant with an Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 802.15.4 transmission protocol and the second transmission protocol is compliant with an Ultra-Wide Band (UWB) protocol. | 12-17-2009 |
20090311961 | Short-Range Wireless Communication - The present specification describes techniques and apparatus that enable wireless devices to communicate effectively at short ranges. In one implementation, the transmit power of a transmitting device is reduced to permit a receiving device to demodulate a signal. | 12-17-2009 |
20090311962 | Communication Apparatus, Communication System, Communication Method and Program - There is provided a communication apparatus including a first communication control unit for controlling a communication in a first communication method, a storage unit in which contact information of other communication apparatus in the first communication method is recorded, and a second communication control unit for controlling a connection establishment communication with a communication party in a second communication method based on electric field coupling or magnetic field coupling and a data communication with the communication party in the second communication method, wherein the second communication control unit does not make the data communication with the communication party when the contact information recorded in the storage unit is not contained in a signal transmitted from the communication party during the connection establishment communication. | 12-17-2009 |
20090318081 | BLUETOOTH CONTROL FOR VOIP TELEPHONY USING HEADSET PROFILE - Systems and methods for Bluetooth Control for VoIP telephony using the Bluetooth Headset Profile are presented. A Bluetooth Headset Profile volume control command message is received and translated to a corresponding USB HID profile menu up or menu down command message. A Bluetooth Headset Profile hookswitch command message is received and translated to a USB HID profile menu item select command message. | 12-24-2009 |
20090318082 | Apparatus and Method for Transmission of Audio Signals - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method is presented which comprises searching for at least a device that is capable of a point-to-point transmission of media data. If such a device is not selected for the point-to-point transmission, a transmission of the media data is started on a second communication interface using a broadcast transmission. | 12-24-2009 |
20090318083 | One Button Access to Network Services From a Remote Control Device - Systems and methods of accessing a network-based communication service provide for generating a dialing request at a remote control device based on user input. A dialing signal is transmitted toward a mobile communication device based on the request, where the dialing signal instructs the mobile communication device to access the network-based communication service. Communication services can enable a user to use information retrieval at a network server as well as use number dialing at the network server. In one example, the dialing signal is transmitted according to a Bluetooth standard. | 12-24-2009 |
20090318084 | VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A vehicle-based wireless communication system includes an interior rearview mirror assembly having an interior mirror reflective element, a housing for the reflective element and a mirror-mounted communication system. The mirror-mounted communication system preferably includes a communication data port for short-range communication with a mobile device that is a personal accessory of an occupant of the vehicle. The communication system further includes a telecommunication link from the vehicle to an external provider of information or service. In this manner, the communication system provides connectivity between a low-power mobile device and a provider of information or service that is separate from the vehicle. | 12-24-2009 |
20090325486 | Sensor Device, Sensor Network System, and Sensor Device Control Method - Disclosed are a sensor device and a sensor device control method. The sensor device comprises a reader for requesting a tag information and detecting an interference channel, and a short range wireless communication nodule for sharing a information of the interference channel through short range wireless communication, and reallocating channels to be used for the reader. | 12-31-2009 |
20090325487 | DATA CONTROL APPARATUS, DATA CONTROL METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A data control apparatus that enables data communication among devices with simple operations. A first communication unit communicates with a first device placed on a predetermined surface of the data control apparatus. A second communication unit communicates with a second device. A detection unit detects a position of the first device placed on the predetermined surface of the data control apparatus. A communication control unit controls communication between the first device and the second device according to the position of the first device detected by the detection unit. | 12-31-2009 |
20090325488 | PORTABLE TERMINAL COMPRISING NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION MODULE AND METHOD FOR OPERATING THE SAME - A portable terminal operable in a tag mode a read mode and a method for operating the terminal are provided. The portable terminal includes a Near Field Communication (NFC) module including a plurality of amplifiers, a mode selector for controlling the plurality of amplifiers to perform a power supplying operation and a power cutting operation, a controller for outputting a control signal to the mode selector according to the tag mode and the read mode, and a selection signal line for transmitting the control signal to the mode selector. | 12-31-2009 |
20090325489 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING CONTROL PROGRAM THEREFOR - An authentication unit authenticates an external apparatus if the external apparatus is registered beforehand as an apparatus that permits data transmission to a wireless communication apparatus. An instruction unit instructs transmission of data stored in the wireless communication apparatus. A determination unit determines whether data transmission is instructed by the instruction unit if the wireless communication apparatus and the external apparatus are close within the communication available range. A control unit transmits data to the external apparatus after authentication of the external apparatus by the authentication unit if the determination unit determines that the data transmission has not been instructed, and transmits data to the external apparatus without authentication by the authentication unit if the determination unit determines that the data transmission has been instructed by the instruction unit. | 12-31-2009 |
20090325490 | Baseband Controller in a Micronetwork - A baseband controller includes a microsequencer with special hardware resources circuitry and a configuration that supports real-time micronetwork functionality for an upper limit of slave devices. The microsequencer includes a correlator that may also be used as an accumulator, wherein the topology provides that the correlator can communicate with an arithmetic logic unit that correspondingly enables the correlator to act as an accumulator. The microsequencer also includes a plurality of clocks and timers for facilitating micronetwork timing functionality, and at registers for temporarily storing computational data, where each of the storage registers have different sizes for accommodating different-sized packets of computational data. | 12-31-2009 |
20100003918 | WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHODS USING ACTIVE RADIO FREQUENCY TAGS AND WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION DEVICES - A wireless data communication system and related operating methods are provided. The system uses active radio frequency (RF) tags to communicate content data to consumer-grade wireless telecommunication devices, in accordance with a wireless local area network (WLAN) protocol. A method of wirelessly providing information to a consumer-grade wireless telephone begins by providing data content to an active RF tag. The active RF tag creates a content message that conveys the data content, and wirelessly transmits the content message in accordance with a designated WLAN data communication protocol. The wireless telephone wirelessly receives the content message in accordance with the WLAN data communication protocol, and then displays indicia of the data content. | 01-07-2010 |
20100009629 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A wireless communication method, and a wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication system using the same. The wireless communication method includes pairing with a specific device, extracting a media access control (MAC) address of the specific device, and communicating with the specific device. Accordingly, even when a MAC address of a counterpart device is not known, pairing with the counterpart device can be performed without interference with other devices. | 01-14-2010 |
20100009630 | MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DISPLAYING CHARACTERS ON A BLUETOOTH DEVICE - A system and method for displaying characters on a BLUETOOTH device using a mobile electronic device obtains a telephone number of an incoming call, and converts associated one or more characters into a bitmap picture in response to a determination that the telephone number is associated with one or more characters in a character encoding packet. The system and method further reads a resolution of the bitmap picture and a resolution of a display of the BLUETOOTH device, and adjusts the resolution of the bitmap picture to match the resolution of the display of the BLUETOOTH device. Furthermore, the system and method sends the bitmap picture or the telephone number to the BLUETOOTH device, and displays the bitmap picture on the display of the BLUETOOTH device. | 01-14-2010 |
20100009631 | TRANSMITTING ACCESSORY UTILIZING POWER SYSTEM TRANSMISSION - An accessory for broadcasting audio from a portable electronic device to an automobile stereo receiver has an input/output port that couples the accessory to the device. The accessory receives an audio signal from the device and modulates the audio signal to a broadcast frequency. The modulated signal is coupled to the automobiles electrical system. The wiring in the automobiles electrical system then acts as an antenna that transmits the audio signal to vehicles stereo. Since the automobiles wiring is very close to the stereo antenna, an exceptionally clear, very low transmission can be achieved. The accessory is preferably adapted to be mounted in a | 01-14-2010 |
20100009632 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BLUETOOTH 802.11 ALTERNATE MAC/PHY (AMP) TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL (TPC) - Aspects of a method and system for Bluetooth 802.11 alternate MAC/PHY (AMP) transmit power control (TPC) may include one or more processors, receiver circuits and/or transmitter circuits that are operable to determine a maximum input level based on signals received via a Bluetooth basic rate (BR) connection and/or via a Bluetooth extended data rate (EDR) connection. The processors and/or circuits may be operable to determine a transmitted signal power level based on the determined maximum input level. The processors and/or circuits may be operable to transmit subsequent signals via a distinct Bluetooth connection based on the determined transmitted signal power level. The data rate for signal transmission via the distinct Bluetooth connection may exceed the data rate for signal transmission via the BR connection and the data rate for signal transmission via the EDR connection. | 01-14-2010 |
20100015919 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING MULTI-TYPE SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method, an apparatus and a system for managing multi-type short-range wireless communications for a wireless combination device are provided. The system has one wireless combination device and at least one other wireless device, in which the wireless combination device has multiple wireless communication modules for respectively supporting various type short-range wireless communications, and has one wireless connection management module connected with the wireless communication module and one wireless connection management interface connected with the wireless connection management module in order to manage uniformly multiple different types wireless communications between the wireless combination device and at least one other wireless device. For each of the other wireless devices, one unique entity is used to record it in the wireless combination device. The unique entity may be a parameter set, and includes all the wireless communication types supported by the wireless device and corresponding wireless communication parameters. The wireless combination device manages multiple different types communications with the other wireless devices according to the unique entity. | 01-21-2010 |
20100015920 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING QUALITY OF SERVICE OF MASTER BLUETOOTH TERMINAL IN PICONET - An apparatus for controlling Quality of Service (QoS) of a master Bluetooth® terminal in a piconet. A file-specific band setting unit sets information about files and information about bandwidths set for the files, which are stored in the master Bluetooth® terminal, for a content meta database. A QoS controller checks the content meta database when an arbitrary slave Bluetooth® terminal requests file download service, and provides the set bandwidth information of the corresponding file. A balancing Bluetooth® Network Encapsulation Protocol (BNEP) creates a virtual interface when the slave Bluetooth® terminal is accessed, and sets a bandwidth of the virtual interface, which is set for the slave Bluetooth® terminal requesting the download service, to a bandwidth of the corresponding file when the set bandwidth information of the file for which the download service is requested is received from the QoS controller, and provides the download service to the slave Bluetooth® terminal. | 01-21-2010 |
20100022187 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic device comprises a close proximity wireless transfer device and a connection mode switching module. The close proximity wireless transfer device executes a close proximity wireless transfer. The connection mode switching module alternately switches, when the close proximity wireless transfer device is not connected to another close proximity wireless transfer device, a connection mode of the close proximity wireless transfer device between a first mode that requests connection to the other close proximity wireless transfer device and a second mode that detects a connection request from the other close proximity wireless transfer device. | 01-28-2010 |
20100022188 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, a communication apparatus comprises a close proximity wireless transfer device, a closeness detection module and a device control module. The close proximity wireless transfer device executes a close proximity wireless transfer. The closeness detection module detects that the close proximity wireless transfer device and an external device are in a close proximity state. Power which the closeness detection module consumes is lower than power which the close proximity wireless transfer device consumes in an idle state. The device control module is configured to activate the close proximity wireless transfer device when the closeness detection module detects the close proximity state. | 01-28-2010 |
20100029204 | Techniques to improve the radio co-existence of wireless signals - Techniques are described that can be used to perform one or more of the following actions in order to reduce signal interference between WLAN and BlueTooth radios that are proximate to one another. One action is to selectively reduce a filter bandwidth in a WLAN radio applied to a received WLAN radio signal to reduce BlueTooth signal interference. An additional or alternative action is to selectively indicate a WLAN radio channel bandwidth larger than a channel bandwidth used for the WLAN radio so that the BlueTooth radio avoids transmitting over the indicated channel bandwidth. An additional or alternative action is to selectively reduce BlueTooth transmitter power in response to antenna isolation between BT and WLAN radio being less than a first threshold in order to reduce the likelihood of WLAN radio front end saturation. | 02-04-2010 |
20100029205 | WIRELESS DEVICE, PAIRING METHOD, AND UNPAIRING METHOD - A wireless device triggers pairing or un-pairing between the wireless device and another wireless device. The wireless device further exchanges media access control (MAC) addresses, pairing magic numbers (PMNs), and pairing indices with the another wireless device so as to establish the pairing with the another wireless device upon the condition that the wireless device triggers the pairing. The wireless device further exchanges the MAC addresses, the PMNs, and the pairing indices with the another wireless device so as to establish the unpairing with the another wireless device upon the condition that the wireless device triggers the unpairing. The pairing magic numbers are operable to identify the pairing between the wireless device and the another wireless device. The pairing indices are operable to launch the MAC addresses, the PMNs, and the pairing indices. | 02-04-2010 |
20100029206 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, STORAGE MEDIUM THAT RECORDS COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - The system includes a storage unit that stores a number of times of receiving a reference request received by the communication unit, a comparison unit that totals the number of times of receiving the reference request stored in the storage unit when the communication unit receives the reference request, and then compares a given number of times and the number of times of receiving the reference request stored in the storage unit, and a control unit that makes the communication unit transmit a reference response in response to the reference request received by the communication unit if the number of times of receiving the reference request is less than or equal to the given number of times, and makes the communication unit transmit no response in response to the reference request if the number of times of receiving the reference request is more than the given number of times. | 02-04-2010 |
20100035545 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BLUETOOTH HID ACTIVITY PREDICTION FOR WIRELESS COEXISTENCE THROUGHPUT OPTIMIZATION - A host device may be enabled to support a plurality of wireless interfaces, wherein some of these interfaces may be utilized to support human interface device (HID) based communication. The host device may be enabled to monitor activity of HID devices based on communications via HID capable wireless interfaces, may predict future use of the HID devices based on the monitoring, and may manage sniff communication that is utilized to track and/or detect activities in the HID devices. The management of the sniff communication may comprise adjusting characteristics of the sniff communication to enable improving throughput of other wireless interfaces available via the host device that may be affected by the sniff communication. The adjustment of the characteristics of sniff communication may comprise adjusting, statically and/or dynamically, length of sniff intervals and/or designating of sniff packets as high priority requests. | 02-11-2010 |
20100035546 | LOCATING REFERENCE NODES FOR POSITIONING DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for matching an actual device in a wireless network to a corresponding device indicated in a plan ( | 02-11-2010 |
20100035547 | Video transmission apparatus and switch control method of output destination by video transmission apparatus - The present invention provides a video transmission apparatus including an input terminal input with a video signal; an output terminal wire connected to a video device; a wireless communication unit for modulating the video signal through a predetermined wireless modulation method and wirelessly transmitting the modulated video signal; an output switch unit, connected with the input terminal, the output terminal, and the wireless transmission unit, for switching an output destination of the video signal input from the input terminal to the output terminal or the wireless transmission unit; and a switch controller for causing the output switch unit to switch the output destination of the video signal in response to a switch request when receiving the switch request of the output destination by the wireless communication unit. | 02-11-2010 |
20100041333 | CHARGING STATION THAT OPERATES AS AN INTERMEDIARY DEVICE BETWEEN MOBILE DEVICES AND OTHER DEVICES - A charging station for mobile devices that acts as an intermediary device to facilitate communication between mobile devices and other proximate devices. The charging station may receive data with a mobile device via a first communication protocol (e.g., Bluetooth) or in a first data format and may transmit the received data to a proximate device via a second communication protocol (e.g., WiFi) or in a second data format. The charging station may then receive responsive data from the proximate device via the second communication protocol (e.g., WiFi) or second data format and transmit the responsive data the mobile device via the first communication protocol (e.g., Bluetooth) or first data format. In some embodiments, the charging station may communicate status data about a mobile device to other proximate devices. | 02-18-2010 |
20100041334 | DISCOVERING PRESENCE INFORMATION AND DISPLAYING A PRESENCE MAP - Disclosed is a personal communication device (called here the “local device”) that “looks around” to discover the presence of other personal communication devices (“remote devices”) in the near neighborhood. Using various techniques, the local device attempts to discover who is associated with each remote device that it discovers. The local device also attempts to assign a position value to each discovered remote device. Using this information, the local device constructs a “presence map” for its user, the map showing who is nearby. By consulting the presence map, the user of the local device can associate a name with each person in the near neighborhood. In some embodiments, the presence map is a virtual two- or three-dimensional representation of the neighborhood surrounding the user of the local device. | 02-18-2010 |
20100041335 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR FLEXIBLY PROVIDING VARIOUS APPLICATION PROFILES OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication apparatus is provided. The communication apparatus comprises an external memory device and a communication unit. The external memory device stores software functions corresponding to a predetermined application profile of the wireless communication system. The communication unit comprises: a radio transceiver module transceiving radio frequency wireless signals and converting the radio frequency wireless signals to or from baseband signals; a baseband module converting the baseband signals to or from digital signals and processing the digital signals; an internal memory device storing a firmware programmed for controlling the radio transceiver module, the baseband module, and performing a physical layer protocol and a data link layer protocol of the wireless communication system; and a microprocessor accessing the software functions via an interface and executing the firmware and the software functions when implementing the predetermined application profile. | 02-18-2010 |
20100041336 | PARTITIONED BLUETOOTH SYSTEM - A system includes a first memory, a second memory, a host processor, and a second processor. The first memory is configured to store first layers of a Bluetooth protocol stack including at least a portion of a link manager layer. The second memory is configured to store second layers of the Bluetooth protocol stack. The second layers have higher real-time requirements than the first layers. The host processor is coupled to the first memory. The host processor is configured to execute the first layers. The second processor is coupled to the second memory. The second processor is configured to execute the second layers. | 02-18-2010 |
20100041337 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING WITH VEHICLE OCCUPANTS - An application for a two-way communication system for communicating with a person who is within a closed vehicle includes a short-range radio transmission to transmit audio to a radio within the vehicle. Communication from the person is done by reflecting a light beam on a window of the vehicle and receiving the light beam, which is modulated by vibration of the window caused by the person's voice. The received light beam is then processed to reproduce the sound of the person's voice. | 02-18-2010 |
20100048128 | COMMUNICATION METHOD BETWEEN COMPONENTS IN A WIRELESS SHORT HAUL NETWORK, AND NETWORK COMPONENT - Communication method between components in a wireless short haul network as part of a battlefield simulation, where one component is in the form of a master and the other components (AC | 02-25-2010 |
20100048129 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A communication apparatus of the present invention includes a transmission/reception coupler for performing a close-range one-to-one communication with a device of a communication counterpart by electric field coupling or magnetic field coupling; an intermittent operation unit for performing intermittent operation without releasing connection after the connection is established with the device of the communication counterpart; and an intermittent operation notifying unit for notifying the device of the communication counterpart of performing the intermittent operation. | 02-25-2010 |
20100048130 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A communication device of the present invention includes a physical layer for performing close-range one-to-one communication with a device of a communication counterpart by electric field coupling or magnetic field coupling; one or a plurality of PCL Emulations for converting a protocol of a higher level application to a protocol for communicating at the physical layer; and a PCL common for performing negotiation with the device of the communication counterpart without the higher level application started after the connection with the communication counterpart is established or at the same time as the connection establishment to select one PCL Emulation. | 02-25-2010 |
20100056048 | Supercapacitor Device For Ultra Low Frequency Transmission System - Ultra low frequency transmissions can be used to penetrate obstructions to areas where other operation of other communication devices may be limited, such as in a mine, tunnel, or other underground location. A portable device that includes a supercapacitor, a transmitter, and an antenna can be used to communicate using ultra low frequency transmissions. In one aspect, a communication device comprises a supercapacitor; a transmitter powered by the supercapacitor; and an antenna connected to the transmitter for sending messages. In another aspect, a method for communicating comprises the steps of receiving a message to be transmitted, powering a transmitter from a charged supercapacitor, and transmitting the message via an antenna. | 03-04-2010 |
20100056049 | Wireless Mobile Telescanners - A mobile scanner with telecommunication functions is disclosed. The mobile scanner is designed to be able to wirelessly transport scanning data to a computing device (e.g., a fax machine or an email server). Unlike a USB-based mobile scanner, the scanner operates without being connected to a computing device. With an embedded wireless module, the scanning data can be transported via a standard wireless protocol (e.g., WiFi, WiMAX, or Bluetooth), or a standard cellular standard (e.g., GSM or CDMA). | 03-04-2010 |
20100056050 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUDIO FEEDBACK PROCESSING IN AN AUDIO CODEC - Aspects of a method and system for audio feedback processing in an audio CODEC are provided. In this regard, in a hardware audio CODEC for a wireless device, voice content from a first audio source may be mixed with audio content from one or more second audio sources to generate a composite audio signal. The composite audio may be transmitted to one or more far-end communication partners via a wireless communication channel. The wireless communication channel may be a channel of a cellular network. The composite audio signal may also be mixed with audio content received from a far-end communication partner and output to a local user via one or more audio output devices. The audio content from the second audio sources may comprise music played from a digital storage medium within the wireless device and/or music extracted from a signal received by the wireless device. | 03-04-2010 |
20100056051 | COEXISTANCE DEVICE COMMUNICATION - The present invention provides a system and a method for transferring data between a Bluetooth device (BTD) and a wireless local area network (WLAN) device which uses packet traffic arbitration (PTA). The method of the present invention includes encoding data using a plurality of control lines between the BTD and WLAN, transmitting the data and acknowledging the data reception using the existing control lines. The method according to the present invention allows BTD and WLAN device to transmit additional scheduling information, schedule the medium access, and reduce the number of collisions between the two devices. | 03-04-2010 |
20100056052 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND SEARCHING METHOD THEREOF - An electronic device and searching method are provided to search for an electronic device via a BLUETOOTH (BT) connection between a BT device and a BT headset of the electronic. The electronic device and searching method include setting intensity levels of BT signals of the BT connection and one or more alarm means. The electronic device and searching method further include detecting a signal intensity of the BT signals of the BT connection, and activating one or more of the alarm means to alarm a location of the electronic device, if the signal intensity is in a low intensity level. | 03-04-2010 |
20100056053 | SINGLE COMMUNICATION CHANNEL BETWEEN A CONTACTLESS FRONTEND DEVICE AND A TRANSCEIVER DEVICE - Method for exchanging data between an NFC device ( | 03-04-2010 |
20100056054 | METHOD OF SETTING WIRELESS LINK, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS SYSTEM - A method of setting a wireless link is provided between a first wireless device and a second wireless device in a wireless system. The first wireless device includes an extremely low-power receiver. When the extremely low-power receiver receives a predetermined wireless signal, the receiver turns on the first wireless device, and continues broadcast transmission of a packet periodically without a transmission pause until receiving a response packet from the second wireless device. | 03-04-2010 |
20100062710 | MONITORING FOR THE PRESENCE OF A RADIO-COMMUNICATING MODULE IN THE VICINITY OF A RADIO-COMMUNICATING TERMINAL - The invention relates to a method of determining the presence or otherwise in a zone of defined size around a master radio-communicating terminal, of a peripheral radio-communicating module, the radio-communicating terminal and module operating according to a radio communication protocol of BLUETOOTH® type and under the dependence of application programs, the protocol having means for retransmitting data from the module when the reception of said data by the terminal is incomplete or erroneous, this being so for a maximum re-try time, the data not being considered to have been received unless the reception of all the data is correct in the course of the maximum re-try time, the data exchanges being characterized by a transmission error rate. According to the invention, after the master terminal ( | 03-11-2010 |
20100062711 | BLUETOOTH DEVICE AND METHOD OF SEARCHING FOR PERIPHERAL BLUETOOTH DEVICE - A Bluetooth device and a method of searching for a peripheral Bluetooth device using a previous search results are provided. The method of searching for a peripheral Bluetooth device includes: acquiring, if input instructing the start of an initial search is received, initial search address information and initial search device information about at least one peripheral Bluetooth device in a preset period; storing the acquired initial search address information and initial search device information in a storage unit; acquiring, if a request for searching for a peripheral device for performing Bluetooth communication is input, address information of a found peripheral Bluetooth device; determining whether address information corresponding to the acquired address information of the found peripheral Bluetooth device exists in the storage unit; and notifying a user, if address information corresponding to the acquired address information of the found peripheral Bluetooth device exists in the storage unit, of the stored initial search device information of the found peripheral device corresponding to the address information. | 03-11-2010 |
20100062712 | CUSTOMIZED BLUETOOTH ENABLED IDENTIFICATION DEVICE - A customized Bluetooth enabled identification device for Bluetooth based identification, communication and tracking system is described. The device uses a customized Bluetooth hardware as identification of location is done through its 48 bit unique hardware address by providing password based security over identification. | 03-11-2010 |
20100069002 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE UTILIZING BLUETOOTH TECHNOLOGY - A method and an apparatus for a wireless communication device utilizing a Bluetooth technology for use on a helmet is disclosed here. More specifically, a helmet with a cavity within said helmet that allows the Bluetooth transceiver to be easily removable and easily upgradable without changing the external host controller. The method and apparatus is capable of communicating with a cell phone, communicating with a second helmet, communicating with an audio device, communicating with a global positioning system, and communicating with two or more Bluetooth transceivers all within one unit. | 03-18-2010 |
20100069003 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF SWITCHING IDENTITY MODULES - A mobile terminal includes a first and a second identity module in which user information is stored. A first controller for controlling wireless communication based on user information is connected to either the first or the second identity module. A second controller for controlling wireless communication through a second wireless communication unit is connected to the other identity module. An switch connects one of the first or second identity modules to one of the first or second controllers, and optionally, connects the other identity module to the other controller responsive to a manual command or a service event such as a multimedia message, a short-range communication, a wireless Internet connection, a broadcast reception, or receipt of position information. | 03-18-2010 |
20100075599 | Data Transmission and Exchange Using Spin Waves - Devices are proposed for use in nanoscale data transfer and exchange between electronic components. Spin wave generators translate an input signal charge-carrier based signal to spin waves within a ferromagnetic stripe. The spin waves propagate along the ferromagnetic stripe and are detected by spin wave detectors. Further, signal transfer devices such as a splitter, mixer, and switch are disclosed. Embodiments of the invention provide a solution for replacing copper connections, which is a limiting factor in current and future development of high-performance chips. | 03-25-2010 |
20100075600 | WIRELESS PICONETS, DEVICES AND METHODS THAT SELF-LEARN MULTI-FRAME SLOT PATTERNS - A first device in a short-range wireless piconet self-learns a multi-frame piconet pattern that is used by a second device as a result of a deferral that reduces or avoids simultaneous transmission and reception by two transceivers at the second device. The first device uses this self-learned multi-frame piconet pattern to selectively control transmitting and receiving by the first device. Power can thereby be conserved at the first device. Related devices, networks and methods are described. | 03-25-2010 |
20100075601 | Wireless Communication Apparatus and Wireless Communication Method - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus includes a communication module configured to wirelessly communicate with an external device, a field strength measurement module configured to measure a field strength which is received by the communication module from the external device, a determination module configured to determine whether a state is a first state in which a period during which the field strength measured by the field strength measurement module is continuously greater than or equal to a threshold is greater than or equal to a certain period, or a second state in that the period is less than the certain period, and a control module configured to execute a first process using the communication module when the state is determined to be the first state, and execute a second process using the communication module when the state is determined to be the second state. | 03-25-2010 |
20100075602 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF FACILITATING THE DISSEMINATION OF INFORMATION BY MEANS OF ACTIVE ADVERTISEMENTS IN PORTABLE INFORMATION TRANSCEIVERS - A system and method to provide a user with a requisite receiving device, such as cell phone, with the ability to record contact information, from an interactive advertisement for storage and later use, or, at the user's option, to obtain the information at his or her convenience even at the location of the advertisement. The invention can work accurately in any environment, including those regions where there might be heavy traffic or congestion, and a plurality of interaction signs or posters can readily interface with the recipient's device. However, an important feature of the present invention is that the user can choose to only accept that contact information that is of interest to him or her, and does not have to automatically record and/or interact with any transmitter just because it is in the sphere of influence of the receiving device. | 03-25-2010 |
20100075603 | DETERMINING RELATIVE PHASE DATA OF A RECEIVED SIGNAL - A method of determining relative phase data of a signal received at multiple antennas, the signal being a phase-modulated data signal having a plurality of periods of constant frequency, the method comprising: within each period of constant frequency, sampling the signal received by a first one of the multiple antennas and sampling the signal received by at least one different one of the multiple antennas; determining from the received samples a data symbol value represented by the received signal for each of the periods of constant frequency; and using the determined data symbol value information to eliminate phase variations between the samples received by the different antennas within each constant frequency period arising from the modulation of the data signal to generate relative phase data for said different antennas. | 03-25-2010 |
20100081380 | TELEPHONE APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERING A CELLULAR PHONE CALL TO A HOME PHONE AND MAKING A CELLULAR PHONE CALL BY A HOME PHONE - An exemplary telephone apparatus which can transfer a first phone call from a Bluetooth enabled cellular phone to a home phone and, making a second cellular phone call by a home phone via a Bluetooth enabled cellular phone, includes a Bluetooth enabled integrated chip (IC). The IC includes a Bluetooth modem configured for receiving a Bluetooth signal from a Bluetooth radio frequency (RF) antenna of the cellular phone, a central processing unit (CPU) built-in the IC, for switching controlling of transferring between the first phone call and the second phone call, and a digital signal processor (DSP) and a CODEC built-in the IC. The telephone apparatus makes use of digital signal processing technology to generate and decode various tones and signals. The telephone also avoids the problem of distortion of DTMF tone during transmission through a Bluetooth RF. | 04-01-2010 |
20100081381 | MULTIBAND COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR USE WITH A MESH NETWORK AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A communication device includes an RF transceiver for communicating first data with at least one of a plurality of remote communication devices via a first protocol and a first frequency band. A millimeter wave transceiver communicates second data with at least one of the plurality of remote communication devices via a second protocol and a second frequency band. A communication control module coordinates the communication of the first data and the second data with the at least one of the plurality of remote communication devices and for establishing a mesh network between the communication device and the plurality of remote communication devices. | 04-01-2010 |
20100081382 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus includes a plurality of communication modules configured to execute wireless communication with an external device, a field strength measurement module configured to measure a field strength from the external device, which is received by each of the plurality of communication modules, a recognition module configured to recognize a movement log of the external device on the basis of a change state of the field strength in each of the plurality of communication modules, which is measured by the field strength measurement module, and a processing module configured to execute a process corresponding to the movement log recognized by the recognition module. | 04-01-2010 |
20100081383 | PORTABLE TERMINAL - A portable terminal includes: a display unit configured to display various information; an user interface; a proximity communication interface configured to establish a wireless communication path with a counterpart device in a proximity state; a detector configured to detect whether the portable terminal is in an enabled state capable of performing a content movement operation with the user interface or in a disabled state that is not capable of performing the content movement operation with the user interface; and a content controller configured to perform a process for controlling the display unit to display a list of contents which can be transmitted by the proximity communication, when the proximity communication interface establishes the wireless communication path and the detector detects that the portable terminal is in the enabled state. | 04-01-2010 |
20100081384 | FREQUENCY SEPARATION FOR MULTIPLE BLUETOOTH DEVICES RESIDING ON A SINGLE PLATFORM - A single host device, comprising a plurality of Bluetooth devices, estimates bandwidth requirements such as maximum rates and/or an average data rate expected by each of a plurality of Bluetooth applications to be run on the single host. For each Bluetooth device, available frequencies utilized are determined based on the estimated bandwidth requirements. Each of the plurality of Bluetooth applications is allocated to corresponding one or more Bluetooth devices based on the determined available frequencies so as to, for example, concurrently run corresponding Bluetooth applications on the single host. The determined available frequencies are assigned to corresponding Bluetooth devices based on the estimated bandwidth requirements. The determined available frequencies and the plurality of Bluetooth applications may be reassigned and reallocated, respectively. Each of plurality of Bluetooth applications is allocated to the corresponding one or more Bluetooth devices based on the assigned/reassigned available frequencies and/or the estimated bandwidth requirements. | 04-01-2010 |
20100087144 | Short Range Exchange of Information - A method for exchanging short range information, the method includes: receiving, by a first device and over a short range communication channel, a strength indication signal that is transmitted from a second device; wherein the strength indication signal is representative of a strength of a signal that was transmitted by the third device and was received by the second device; estimating locations of the second device and the third device in response to a content of the strength indication signal and in response to a strength of a signal that is received by the first device and was transmitted by the second device; and providing to a user of the first device location information representative of the locations of the second device and of the third device. | 04-08-2010 |
20100087145 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device includes: a close proximity communication unit configured to perform close proximity wireless communication with a count part device to receive a command signal sent from the counterpart device and to transmit a response signal to the counterpart device in response to the command signal; a detector configured to detect an amount of a spatial movement of the close proximity communication unit; and a controller configured to control the detector to detect the amount of the spatial movement when the command signal is received by the close proximity communication unit and control the close proximity communication unit to transmit the response signal in a first transmission power when the amount of the spatial movement is below a threshold and in a second transmission power that is larger than the first transmission power when the amount of the spatial movement is above the threshold. | 04-08-2010 |
20100087146 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PERFORMING SHORT RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OF MOBILE TERMINAL - A method and device for performing short range wireless communication of a mobile terminal reduces a time period of searching for terminals for connection. A short wireless communication distance can be extended by switching to/from a directional antenna and an omni-directional antenna of the mobile terminal according to a user setting. The method of performing short range wireless communication in a mobile terminal including a directional first antenna, an omni-directional second antenna, and a switch unit for switching the first antenna and the second antenna includes: activating the first antenna and searching for connectable terminals, when a short range wireless communication function is activated; and forming a communication channel with the found terminal, if a connectable terminal is found after activating the first antenna. | 04-08-2010 |
20100087147 | Method and System for Input/Output Pads in a Mobile Multimedia Processor - Methods and systems for input/output pads in a mobile multimedia processor are disclosed and may include receiving data from a host device in an integrated circuit having at least one contact pad and generating at least one control signal that controls the contact pads. The received data may be processed by the MMP based on the generated at least one control signal, or may be passed through the MMP in a bypass mode based on the control signal, thereby allowing the received data to pass through the MMP without processing to an external memory via the at least one contact pad, thereby sharing the external memory with the host device. The data may be transferred to external memory coupled to a contact pad on the MMP when the received data is to be passed through the MMP. The received data may be stored temporarily before transfer to an external device. | 04-08-2010 |
20100093279 | ELECTRONIC DEVICES FOR COMMUNICATION UTILIZING ENERGY DETECTION AND/OR FREQUENCY SYNTHESIS - An electronic device for communication comprises a processor. The processor comprises a power scan module configured to receive an energy detection signal identifying detection of energy of a page signal or an inquiry signal. The power scan module is further configured to provide, upon receiving the energy detection signal, an instruction to perform a page scan or an inquiry scan. | 04-15-2010 |
20100093280 | Bluetooth connection method and apparatus - A Bluetooth® connection method and a Bluetooth module for discovering and connecting peripheral Bluetooth devices. An inquiry signal is sent with a minimum transmit power. It is determined if an inquiry response signal is received for a waiting time. A path loss corresponding to each inquiry response signal is calculated when a plurality of inquiry response signals are received for the waiting time, the calculated path losses are compared, and Bluetooth® connection is performed with a Bluetooth® device that sent an inquiry response signal having a lowest path loss. | 04-15-2010 |
20100099356 | Wireless self-service terminal audio lead through - A system for the audio lead through of a visually impaired user of a self-service terminal employs near field communication techniques to transfer connection data required for the establishment of a Bluetooth connection between the self-service terminal and a remote audio output device. Once a Bluetooth connection is established audio files containing instructions on how to execute a transaction on the self-service terminal are transferred from the self-service terminal to the audio output device such that the user can hear audio files when played. | 04-22-2010 |
20100099357 | WIRELESS TRANSCEIVER MODULE - A wireless transceiver module has a plurality of through holes and includes a wireless network chip, a circuit substrate, a Bluetooth chip, and a plurality of conductive connection structures. The Bluetooth chip is disposed between the circuit substrate and the wireless network chip, and the through holes are formed by passing through the wireless network chip, the circuit substrate, and the Bluetooth chip. The conductive connection structures are respectively disposed in the through hole. With the conductive connection structures, the Bluetooth chip, the wireless network chip, and the circuit substrate are electrically connected with each another. | 04-22-2010 |
20100105324 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system, a communication apparatus, a communication method and a program wherein the communication time can be shortened. An initiator, when performing a passive mode of communication, transmits a polling request frame in which a first value is set as time slot information. The initiator, when performing a simple mode of communication, transmits a polling request frame in which a second value, different from the first value, is set as the time slot information. When the time slot information, which is included in the polling request frame from the initiator, is the first value, a target transmits a polling response frame including an ID that identifies the target at the timing of a time slot decided by use of a random number. When the time slot information is the second value, the target transmits a polling response frame including real data at the timing of a predetermined time slot. The present invention can be applied to, for example, IC card systems performing proximity communication. | 04-29-2010 |
20100105325 | Plurality of Mobile Communication Devices for Performing Locally Collaborative Operations - A plurality of mobile communication devices for performing one or more locally collaborative operations. In one embodiment, one of the mobile communication devices provides a first local energy emission and, related thereto, a local wireless transmission signal, while another of the mobile communication devices responds to the local wireless transmission signal by providing a second local energy emission related to the first local energy emission. In another embodiment, one of the mobile communication devices receives a local stimulus, exclusive of vocal energy emitted by a user, and in response thereto provides a local wireless transmission signal, while another of the mobile communication devices responds to the local wireless transmission signal by providing a local energy emission related to the local stimulus. In another embodiment, each of the mobile communication devices receives a respective portion of a local stimulus in response to which at least one of the mobile communication devices transmits a local wireless transmission signal in response to which a second one of the mobile communication devices provides a local energy emission related to responses to the local stimulus in addition to its own. In additional embodiments, each of the mobile communication devices receives a respective portion of a local stimulus and in response thereto transmits a wireless transmission signal for collaboratively providing, to a remotely located system, information about the various responses to the local stimulus. | 04-29-2010 |
20100105326 | SIGNAL TRANSMITTING DEVICE FOR DRUMS - A signal transmitting device of the present invention includes a plurality of drums and a sound module. Each drum has a pickup and a wireless signal transceiver, and the sound module includes several wireless signal receivers, each of which corresponds to one of the drums. While the drum is beaten upon, the pickup sends a signal to the wireless signal transceiver, and the signal is then transmitted to the corresponding wireless signal receiver wirelessly. Thereby, the complex wiring process can be significantly simplified or even totally resolved. | 04-29-2010 |
20100105327 | METHOD OF OPERATING DIRECTORY PROXY AGENT IN LOW POWER WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK, METHOD OF SEARCHING FOR SPECIFIC SERVICE INFORMATION THEREIN, AND DIRECTORY PROXY AGENT PERFORMING THE SAME THEREIN - A method of operating a directory proxy agent (DPA) in a low-power wireless personal area network (LoWPAN) includes advertising a service registration request message to neighboring nodes including at least one service agent and at least one user agent to receive a service registration message from the at least one service agent, storing information for the at least one service agent to a memory to refresh a service information list when the at least one service is not stored in the memory, and transmitting the service information list to at least one directory agent or another DPA to cause the at least one directory agent or the other DPA to be consistent with information for the at least one service agent. Thus, the method may use a DPA to effectively search for information for a service desired by a user agent. | 04-29-2010 |
20100105328 | Method and apparatus for providing information using bluetooth and system therefor - A method for providing information by an information providing device with a Bluetooth module in an information broadcast service based on Bluetooth. The method includes broadcasting an inquiry signal to provide the information; receiving an inquiry response signal; determining if a broadcast request is included in the inquiry response signal; and delivering the information to a Bluetooth device that sent the inquiry response signal, when a broadcast request is included in the inquiry response signal. | 04-29-2010 |
20100105329 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A PORTABLE COMPUTER SYSTEM AND ITEMS OF AVIONICS EQUIPMENT - The device for communication between a portable computer system ( | 04-29-2010 |
20100112942 | Enhanced wireless network security using GPS - A wireless piconet network device includes a GPS receiver to determine and provide earth coordinates to a gatekeeper of a wireless network so as to provide a level of security to wireless networks which requires accessing wireless devices to be within predefined boundary coordinates. The automatic restriction of access to a wireless network (e.g., a wireless local area network (LAN) such as a piconet network) by requiring a wireless network device to provide earth coordinates (e.g., GPS location information) as part of an establishment or maintenance of a connection to a wireless network, independent of a range of communication of any device in the wireless network. A wireless piconet network device outside of predetermined earth coordinates of a secured area (e.g., a building, a room in a building, a desk in a room in a building, etc.) may be denied access to resources on the wireless network, and/or required to provide additional authorization information so as to confirm authorized secured status of the entering wireless device. | 05-06-2010 |
20100112943 | RECEIVER ARRANGEMENT AND A TRANSMITTER ARRANGEMENT - A transmitter/receiver (a transceiver) having: a digital synthesizer signal generator ( | 05-06-2010 |
20100112944 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio communication apparatus includes: a first communication unit having a first communication coverage including a short-distance portion and a long-distance portion; a second communication unit having a second communication coverage including at least the long-distance portion; a reception detecting unit detecting that a short-distance communication request transmitted from a first communication unit of an other communication apparatus has been received by at least one of the first and second communication units; a determining unit permitting the request when the request is received by the first communication unit and not received by the second communication unit, and rejecting the request when the request is received by the second communication unit; and a communication processing unit carrying out short-distance communication with the other communication apparatus via the first communication unit when the request is permitted. | 05-06-2010 |
20100112945 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ELECTRONIC DEVICE - An electronic control device transmits a function control signal within a predetermined area. Other electronic devices within the predetermined area receive the function control signal. The function control signal initiates a control program in an electronic device in the predetermined area that adjusts one or more user setting conditions of the electronic device, such as audio volume level, display brightness level, etc. The original user setting conditions are returned to their prior values when the device exits the predetermined area or otherwise stops receiving the function control signal. | 05-06-2010 |
20100112946 | MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE - A mobile terminal device for communication with other terminal devices via one of a plurality of base stations, at least one of the base stations using a radio access technology different from that of at least one other base station, the mobile terminal device includes: a capturing unit for capturing a radio communication signal transmitted from another mobile terminal device in proximity to the mobile terminal device to determine the radio access technology; a processor for controlling to communicate with one of the other terminal devices in accordance with a process including: determining priority of which of the radio access technologies; seeking one of the radio access technologies currently available in the order of the priority; setting up a radio communication condition using one of the radio access technologies; and initiating communication with one of the other terminal devices via said one of the base stations. | 05-06-2010 |
20100112947 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SYNCHRONIZING ATTRIBUTES AMONG ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A method and system for synchronizing attributes among electronic devices is provided. The method includes scanning a low energy bluetooth network for one or more attributes of a second electronic device by a first electronic device, establishing a low energy bluetooth connection between the first electronic device and the second electronic device, synchronizing the one or more attributes of the second electronic device and one or more attributes of the first electronic device. | 05-06-2010 |
20100120362 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR QUICK BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY (BLE) PROTOCOL SIGNAL PRESENCE DETECTION FOR COEXISTENCE - Aspects of the invention may comprise managing operations of BLE interfaces and/or other radio interfaces in a wireless device to mitigate interference to communication via the BLE interfaces by the other radio interfaces. Operating parameters may be communicated between the BLE interfaces and the other radio interfaces to enable mitigating the interference to the BLE interfaces, and at least some of the BLE interfaces and/or the other radio interfaces may be configured based on the communicated operating parameters. The operating parameters may comprise adaptive frequency hopping (AFH) maps that may be adjusted to prevent use of common and/or used channels. The communication device may detect energy associated with BLE communication via scan of all or some of channels used for BLE communication. BLE communication may be predicted based on monitoring of frequency bands used during BLE communication, and/or monitoring of events that may trigger and/or occur during BLE communication. | 05-13-2010 |
20100120363 | Slave Device Complying with Bluetooth Communication Protocol and Related Method for Establishing Bluetooth Communication Connection - A slave device that complies with Bluetooth communication protocol includes a communication module, a memory and a RF output module. The communication module can be operated to generate a driving signal. The memory stores an access code that complies with Bluetooth communication protocol and is electrically connected to the communication module. The memory is configured to determine whether or not to output the access code according to the driving signal output by the communication module. The RF output module is electrically connected to the memory so as to receive and output the access code. | 05-13-2010 |
20100120364 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR OBTAINING INFORMATION ON BLUETOOTH DEVICES IN A COMPUTING DEVICE USING BLUETOOTH - An apparatus and method for obtaining information on Bluetooth devices in a computing device using Bluetooth are provided. The method includes, if an Inquiry Response (IR) packet is received as a response to an inquiry packet, obtaining information on a first Bluetooth device transmitting the IR packet and determining whether a supplementary response indication field is enabled and, if the supplementary response indication field is enabled, receiving an Extended Inquiry Response (EIR) packet, and obtaining information on at least one Bluetooth device other than the first Bluetooth device through the EIR packet. | 05-13-2010 |
20100124884 | Communication device - An interactive communication device, wherein the device is in communication with a second remotely located device, preferably through the use of high-speed wireless technology such as Bluetooth™, and wherein the instant invention is capable of sending and/or receiving a plurality of signals to and from the second remotely located device. | 05-20-2010 |
20100130128 | SOCIAL INTERACTION TRACKING - A device may include a communication interface configured to transmit and receive communications from a second device. The device may further include logic configured to determine whether a user of the device is in a social interaction with a user of the second device, obtain identification information associated with the second device when the user of the device is in a social interaction with the user of the second device, and store the obtained identification information associated with the second device to track the social interaction with the user of the second device. | 05-27-2010 |
20100130129 | WLAN and bluetooth harmonization - Described is a WLAN/BT system with improved compatibility. It employs an adaptive algorithm that dynamically optimizes the WLAN data fragmentation size based on the current WLAN data rates such that the fragmented data packets fit the time slots allowed by the BT SCO stream gaps. The algorithm first uses system level information to acquire the concurrent BT traffic types to decide if TDM method needs to be enabled. Then it uses the smoothed WLAN date rate to calculate maximum fragmentation packet size consistent with current overall WLAN traffic. | 05-27-2010 |
20100130130 | MASTER-SLAVE BLUETOOTH MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND NETWORK DOMAIN LOGIN METHOD - A master-slave Bluetooth mobile communication system includes a host device and an extension device. The host device includes a call module, a first Bluetooth module and a first communication module. The extension device includes a second Bluetooth module and a second communication module. The first and second communication modules log in to a first and a second network domain respectively. The first and second Bluetooth modules provide an information channel between the host device and the extension device to transmit a data. The extension device informs the host device a login data of the second network domain. The host device communicates with a remote device through the first network domain or the information channel and the second network domain that the extension device logs into. Therefore, in a specific range, the host device uses functions of the extension device and a Bluetooth technology to log in to two network domains. | 05-27-2010 |
20100136907 | DUAL-MODE MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE CAPABLE OF SHARING BLUETOOTH MODULE TO PERFORM COMMUNICATION - A dual-mode portable communication device capable of sharing Bluetooth module to perform communication is disclosed. The dual-mode portable communication device includes a first communication module, a second communication module and a Bluetooth module. The Bluetooth module of the dual-mode portable communication device is electrically connected with a Bluetooth module. The first communication module is electrically connected with the second communication module and the Bluetooth module respectively. | 06-03-2010 |
20100136908 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal and controlling method thereof includes determining priority between at least two tag types used for short-range communication according to a current location, and establishing the short-range communication using the tag type having the highest priority among of the tag types. When the location of the terminal or the service provider is changed due to roaming, an appropriate tag for short-range communication is automatically or manually determined allowing the convenient use of a payment service. | 06-03-2010 |
20100136909 | ON-VEHICLE DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Disclosed is an on-vehicle device which can effectively and surely provide content information. The on-vehicle device includes a control unit which causes a feature information storage region to store feature information having predetermined items as information on the on-vehicle device features (step S | 06-03-2010 |
20100136910 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DEVICE SEARCH FOR HIGH-SPEED BASED BLUETOOTH APPLICATIONS - Provided are a device searching method of a Bluetooth application and an apparatus using the same. The apparatus includes an application unit that generates a command for searching a Bluetooth device in a surrounding area of the device searching apparatus, a stack unit that performs a Bluetooth device initialization process and processes the command generated in the application unit, a first module unit that searches first Bluetooth devices in the surrounding area of the device searching apparatus, and a second module unit that searches second Bluetooth devices in the surrounding area of the device searching apparatus. | 06-03-2010 |
20100136911 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM - An information processing device is provided. The information processing device including a communication antenna having a variable Q value, for performing contactless-type communication with an external device by using a communication path capable of transmitting and receiving a signal using a carrier of a predetermined frequency, a communication speed determining unit for determining a communication speed in the communication with the external device, and a communication controlling unit for allowing the Q value of the communication antenna to be set to a value corresponding to a determined communication speed based on the communication speed determined in the communication speed determining unit. | 06-03-2010 |
20100144271 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A REDUCED USB POLLING RATE TO SAVE POWER ON A BLUETOOTH HOST - A Bluetooth host in a normal mode is enabled to monitor activities at USB endpoints. A Bluetooth USB radio has one or more active Bluetooth connections with peer Bluetooth radios. When each of the Bluetooth connections is in sniff mode, the Bluetooth host enables cancellation of normal USB activities at USB endpoints to enter a low power mode. The Bluetooth connections are still alive while the Bluetooth host is in the low power mode. In the low power mode, the Bluetooth host is enabled not to poll the bulk endpoint and to poll a USB interrupt endpoint in extended intervals for Bluetooth data received from the Bluetooth USB radio. The Bluetooth host is enabled to switch from the low power mode to the normal mode to process the received Bluetooth data over the bulk endpoint when a specific HCI event is received over the interrupt endpoint. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144272 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LOCATING AND ACCESSING WIRELESS RESOURCES - A system and method are disclosed for locating resources available to portable electronic devices which are enabled for short range wireless communications. The system and method include creating and accessing a resource and access location history database accessible via the portable electronic device. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144273 | PORTABLE DEVICE - A communication control unit performs communications with an external device via a first wireless communication unit of which communication distance is short and which is capable of performing high-speed communications or a second wireless communication unit of which communication distance is long compared with the first wireless communication unit and which is capable of performing low-speed communications. A communication state judging unit judges a communication state of the communications with the external device via the first wireless communication unit or the second wireless communication unit. The communication control unit performs switching between the communications with the external device via the first wireless communication unit and the communications with the external device via the second wireless communication unit based on the communication state judged by the communication state judging unit and/or a transmission data amount to be transmitted to the external device. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144274 | Systems, Methods, and Apparatuses for Determining Proximity Between Computing Apparatuses - Methods, apparatuses, and systems are provided for determining proximity between computing apparatuses. A method may include extracting information indicating a transmit signal strength from each of a plurality of electromagnetic transmissions sent by a plurality of second computing apparatuses and received by a first computing apparatus. The method may further include determining received signal strengths of the electromagnetic transmissions. The method may additionally include determining proximities between the first computing apparatus and each of the second computing apparatuses based at least in part upon transmit signal strengths and the received signal strengths. The method may also include generating a list listing the second computing apparatuses and providing an indication of the determined proximities of the second computing apparatuses. Corresponding apparatuses and systems are also provided. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144275 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION UNIT, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND WIRELESS AUTHENTICATION CONTROL METHOD - A wireless communication unit capable of suppressing prevention of signal retransmission by one controlled machine against reception of a signal transmitted from another controlled machine when carrying out wireless authentication with a plurality of controlled machines. The wireless communication unit causes a short-range radio control unit ( | 06-10-2010 |
20100144276 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM EQUIPPED WITH SHARED ANTENNA AND CIRCUIT BOARD THEREOF - A communication system equipped with a shared antenna includes an antenna, a first communication module, a second communication module, and a switch module. The first communication module processes a first communication signal and transmits the first communication signal to the switch module. The second communication module processes a second communication signal and transmits the second communication signal to the switch module. Additionally, the first communication module controls the switch module to transmit the first communication signal or the second communication signal to the antenna, and the antenna emits the first communication signal or the second communication signal. | 06-10-2010 |
20100151786 | Systems and Methods for Channel Pairing a Transmitter and a Receiver - Systems and methods for channel pairing a transmitter and a receiver are provided. In this regard, a representative method, among others, includes selecting a channel in a radio frequency (RF) band; transmitting a carrier and alert tone on the selected channel in the RF band; responsive to detecting the transmitted carrier and alert tone, demodulating the carrier and alert tone on the selected channel in the RF band and producing the demodulated alert tone; and responsive to detecting the produced alert tone, using the selected channel to establish a wireless link between the transmitter and receiver. | 06-17-2010 |
20100151787 | ACOUSTIC SUPPRESSION USING ANCILLARY RF LINK - Methods and systems are described in which the feedback between a transmitter and collocated receiver is reduced so that the overall feedback loop gain is less than 0 dB. Audio is transmitted from the transmitter to the receiver through a primary RF link while RSSI or TOA information to determine the separation between the end devices is exchanged using an ancillary RF link. The total loop gain is calculated using the gain of each end device and the separation. If the distance is less than a threshold distance, the gain of one or more components in the transmitter and/or receiver is reduced. | 06-17-2010 |
20100151788 | Headset and Audio Gateway System for Execution of Voice Input Driven Applications - A system including a headset and an audio gateway, and software applications that may be used with such headsets and gateways. The headset enables a user to discover and interact with applications resident on the headset, gateway, or a network accessible by the gateway. The headset functions as an application platform for the control and execution of the applications. The invention includes a method for providing a service to a user of the headset. The method involves the headset performing service discovery on the audio gateway to determine a method of transferring an application to the audio gateway, where the application provides the service. The headset causes the application to be transferred to the audio gateway using a method based on the service discovery, and the audio gateway executes the application, enabling the user to issue voice commands that are executed by the audio gateway to provide the service. | 06-17-2010 |
20100151789 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, POSITION ESTIMATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION RELAY DEVICE AND CONNECTING STATION - The present invention discloses a technique, according to which estimation of a position of a mobile wireless device can be accomplished in a simple system configuration by using short distance communication functions. A plurality of standard stations | 06-17-2010 |
20100151790 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SHORT RANGE COMMUNICATION - There is provided a communication device and method for contactless short range communication between a device and a terminal. An exemplary communication device comprises a communication component for contactless short range communication with a terminal. The exemplary device also comprises a slave element adapted to execute at least one application for executing transactions between the communication component and the terminal, wherein the slave element is coupled to the communication component via a first interface and wherein the slave element can be coupled to a secure master element via a second interface, the master element being adapted to control the slave element before a transaction is executed using the application. | 06-17-2010 |
20100159830 | IN-HEADSET CONFERENCE CALLING - Systems and methods for establishing conference calls using a headset are presented. The headset includes a wireless communications transceiver operable to form a first local wireless link with a first local telephone in communication with a first far end telephone user and a second local wireless link with a second local telephone in communication with a second far end telephone user. The headset further includes a processor operable to establish a conference call between the headset user, the first far end telephone user, and the second far end telephone user. | 06-24-2010 |
20100159831 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A method for controlling a communication apparatus includes communicating with an external device through close proximity wireless communication, receiving a remote control signal transmitted from a remote controller, storing a remote control setting which enables or disables an operation of the remote controller, making a determination as to whether a connection between the communication apparatus and the external device through the close proximity wireless communication is established, and controlling an operation of the remote controller for the communication apparatus on the basis of the determination. | 06-24-2010 |
20100159832 | METHODS FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATIONS OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, CORRESPONDING STORAGE MEANS AND DEVICES - A method for managing communications in a wireless communications network comprising a set of pairs constituted by a sender device and a receiver device, each of the devices having a determined area of communications coverage, the coverage areas of each pair having a mutual intersection area. Such a method comprises the followings steps: determining future trajectories of a disturbing mobile obstacle as a function of a set of prior positions of the disturbing mobile obstacle, a position of an obstacle being determined as a function of areas of mutual overlapping of at least two disturbed intersecting areas, a disturbed intersecting area having a given state of disturbance according to a determined criterion of quality of communications between the devices of the pairs corresponding to the disturbed intersection area; establishing a forecast diagnostic of quality of communications by examining the determined future trajectory or trajectories; managing the routing of communications as a function of the established forecast diagnostic. | 06-24-2010 |
20100167646 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEVICE PAIRING | 07-01-2010 |
20100167647 | FRAMEWORK OF WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE - A framework of wireless network access device, comprising a communication circuit board with a first electrical connecting portion, a wireless transmission circuit board with a second electrical connecting portion, and at least a signal transmission element connecting with the first and second connecting portions respectively, wherein the signal transmission element is provided for transmitting a signal between the communication circuit board and the wireless transmission circuit board, so as to solve drawbacks of the prior art. | 07-01-2010 |
20100167648 | COMPACT COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A compact communication apparatus comprises: a processor module ( | 07-01-2010 |
20100167649 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE CONFIGURATION OF A MOBILE STATION BASEDBAND CIRCUIT FOR AN ACOUSTIC ACCESSORY - A method and system for the configuration of a mobile station baseband circuit for an acoustic accessory having an identifier, the method comprising the steps of:
| 07-01-2010 |
20100167650 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, STORAGE MEDIUM WITH PROGRAM STORED THEREIN, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - Provided is an information processing apparatus including a first and second communication units: the first for non-contact communication with a first/second external apparatus through a first path; and the second for communication with the first/second external apparatus through a second path. The apparatus also includes a unit for controlling the second communication unit to start communication with the second external apparatus through the second path, by a request for such communication transmitted from the second external apparatus to the first communication unit. The apparatus also includes a unit for managing information to be held when the request is received. The information indicates a state of communication with the first external apparatus through the second path at the reception of the request. Under the control, communication with the first communication unit specified by the information starts through the second path, where communication with the second external apparatus has been terminated. | 07-01-2010 |
20100167651 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - An information processing device is provided, which includes: a first wireless USB unit capable of wirelessly transmitting and receiving data; a second wireless USB unit capable of wirelessly transmitting and receiving data; a data processing unit which executes processing of data input from at least one of the first wireless USB unit and the second wireless USB unit; and a control unit that, when any one of the first wireless USB unit and the second wireless USB unit is connected with an electronic equipment, connection is requested from an electronic equipment which is not connected in accordance with the execution of the data processing, and the data processing is not executed by the electronic equipment which is connected, releases the connection with the electronic equipment which is connected and executes connection of any one of the first wireless USB unit and the second wireless USB unit with the electronic equipment which has requested the connection. | 07-01-2010 |
20100173584 | Method for Operating a Short Haul Radio Transmitting/Radio Receiving System Conforming to a Short Haul Radio Communication Standard and a Master Device for Implementing Said Method - A method and apparatus for operating a short-haul radio transmitting/radio receiving system conforming to a short-haul radio communication standard wherein a maximum number of devices able to communicate is exceeded. The devices exceeding the maximum number of devices communicating with a master device are switched to a park mode and, continually in keeping with a predefined strategy, parked devices are switched to active while active devices are switched to parked. | 07-08-2010 |
20100178869 | Enhanced wireless handset, including direct handset-to-handset communication mode - A wireless handset is provided with enhanced features and capabilities. The wireless handset may be embodied as a full-featured handset that is capable of operating either within a wireless network (such as a cellular or PCS network) or in a direct handset-to-handset communication mode that is independent of the wireless network. Alternatively, the wireless handset may be embodied as a special purpose handset, that is capable of simply operating in a direct handset-to-handset communication mode. The wireless handset may additionally include features for supporting and enhancing direct communication between handsets. Such features may include a find feature that permits a user to determine which objects, including other wireless handset users, are located within a predetermined operating range of the wireless handset. A memorize feature may also be provided to permit handsets and other objects exchange information by wireless transmission. | 07-15-2010 |
20100178870 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE AUDIO QUALITY CONTROL USING BLUETOOTH - An apparatus and a method for playing an audio in an audio player using Bluetooth are provided. The method for playing an audio in an audio player using Bluetooth includes determining an available resource status of the player, transmitting audio data with decreasing audio quality when it is determined that the available resource status is less than a reference value, and transmitting an audio data with increasing audio quality when it is determined that the available resource status is more than the reference value. | 07-15-2010 |
20100178871 | REMOTE USER INTERFACE FOR BLUETOOTH.TM. DEVICE - A system and method of sending data pertaining to an accessory to a mobile device is disclosed. The accessory and the mobile device are communicable with one another using the Bluetooth™ protocol. A Bluetooth connection is established between the accessory and the mobile device. A Bluetooth query is received from the mobile device. The Bluetooth query is executed to obtain the requested data pertaining to the accessory. The requested data is sent back to the mobile device where it can be displayed on a mobile device display. Optionally, a logical link control and adaptation protocol (L2CAP) connection is established with the mobile device when an asynchronous connection-less (ACL) service is required. | 07-15-2010 |
20100184374 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION STATE NOTIFICATION METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic apparatus includes a communication module, a content information acquisition module, and a communication state notification module. The communication module executes close proximity wireless transfer. The content information acquisition module acquires content information about at least one content item to be transmitted between the communication module and an external device by negotiation. The communication state notification module executes either a first communication state notification processing of outputting a start tone indicative of start of transmission of the at least one content item and an end tone indicative of end of transmission of the at least one content item or a second communication state notification processing of suppressing output of the start tone and outputting the end tone, based on the acquired content information, when the at least one content item is transmitted between the communication module and the external device. | 07-22-2010 |
20100184375 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION STATE NOTIFICATION FUNCTION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic apparatus includes a communication module, a communication state notification module, a notification function information obtaining module, and a notification function control module. The communication module executes close proximity wireless transfer. The communication state notification module notifies at least one of a start time and an end time of data transfer executed between the communication module and an external device, the data transfer being executed by the close proximity wireless transfer. The notification function information obtaining module obtains notification function information indicative of a capability relating to a communication state notification function of the external device from the external device. The notification function control module requests the external device to execute or suppress the communication state notification function by the external device, based on the obtained notification function information. | 07-22-2010 |
20100184376 | Bluetooth communicator, short range wireless communicator and communication method - While a handsfree device being multi-profile compatible is maintaining a connection for a handsfree profile (HFP) with a mobile phone handset, the handsfree device cuts off the connection for the HFP based on a user's operation. After cutting off, the handsfree device establishes a connection for a dial-up network profile (DUN), and subsequently transmits a request for a connection for the HFP while maintaining the connection for the DUN. Subsequently, the handsfree device determines whether the handset is multi-profile compatible according to the response to the request from the handset. Based on the determination that the handset is multi-profile compatible, the handsfree device executes the processes for the HFP while maintaining the connection for the DUN. | 07-22-2010 |
20100184377 | MAPPING WIRELESS PROXIMITY IDENTIFICATOR TO SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY FOR HOTSPOT BASED WIRELESS SERVICES FOR MOBILE TERMINALS - A hotspot access point enables a mobile wireless device to resume a service with a network server when service is interrupted by the mobile device moving out of the coverage area of the access point. A short-range communication link is established by the access point with the mobile device based on a local identification of the device. The access point requests additional information from the wireless device. The additional information relates to a wide area network identification of the device. The mobile device transmits additional information to the access point which stores the local area identification and additional identification. The access point transmits to the mobile device a coded identificator of the wireless device based upon the local area identification and a network identification of the device. The access point determines whether service with the mobile device is open and establishes a wide area connection with the mobile device. | 07-22-2010 |
20100184378 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND DEVICES FOR DETECTING AND INDICATING LOSS OF PROXIMITY BETWEEN MOBILE DEVICES - Methods of detecting proximity between a mobile terminal and a wireless accessory device having an associated support function for use with the mobile terminal include establishing a wireless communication connection between the wireless accessory device and the mobile terminal. The established wireless communication connection is utilized to provide the associated support function. In addition, a wireless signal having a limited range is communicated between the mobile terminal and the wireless accessory device. The wireless signal indicates a proximity between the mobile terminal and the wireless accessory device. An alert signal indicating that the proximity between the mobile terminal and the wireless accessory device has exceeded a predetermined range is provided responsive to the communicated wireless signal when the established wireless communication connection is not being utilized to provide the associated support function. Related devices are also provided. | 07-22-2010 |
20100190438 | Universal mutilmedia bluetooth car handsfree device - A universal multimedia bluetooth car handsfree device, aims to transmit signals stored in various types of multimedia storage devices to a car stereo for broadcasting. It includes a bluetooth wireless transmission unit, a handsfree speakerphone unit, a stereo switch unit, a cable signal input unit, a control unit, and a stereo output unit. It is connected to a car stereo and allows the common car stereo to have additional handsfree bluetooth speakerphone function and the ability to connect in wired or wireless fashion to various types of handheld media storage devices to play music. | 07-29-2010 |
20100190439 | MESSAGE TRANSMISSION PROTOCOL FOR SERVICE DELIVERY NETWORK - A reliable protocol is provided for transporting messages between a vehicle-based system and a service delivery network. The protocol is a request/response protocol and can be passed over half duplex or full duplex lines, using a data over voice communication method through a nomadic device such as a PDA or cell-phone. The protocol can also be passed over a data connection such as a dial-up or broadband connection on a nomadic device having a data plan. | 07-29-2010 |
20100190440 | Method for searching and connecting bluetooth devices and apparatus using the same - A Bluetooth master device is capable of performing search and connection method for Bluetooth devices. The Bluetooth master device receives device information from at least one Bluetooth device in response to a Bluetooth device search request made by a user. A responding Bluetooth device that is capable of providing a Bluetooth service in a preset service list is selected. The Bluetooth master device sends a name request signal to the selected Bluetooth device and displays a device name received from the selected Bluetooth device. | 07-29-2010 |
20100190441 | BIOLOGICAL SAMPLE MEASURING APPARATUS - There is provided a biological sample measurement apparatus with which a search for a communication frequency at which communication with a portable terminal is possible is carried out efficiently. This apparatus comprises a measurement component | 07-29-2010 |
20100190442 | WIRELESS FIELD MAINTENANCE ADAPTER - A wireless field maintenance adapter includes a power source, a controller, a low-power radio-frequency communication module, and a wireless process communication protocol module. The controller is coupled to the power source. The low-power radio-frequency communication module is also coupled to the controller. The wireless process communication protocol module is coupled to the controller. The controller is configured to communicate through the wireless process communication protocol module based on information received from the low-power radio-frequency communication module. | 07-29-2010 |
20100197226 | Mobile Station Having Wireless Communication and Radio Frequency Tag Detection Capability - An exemplary mobile station has a transceiver portion configured to communicate over an uplink and a downlink. A detector portion is configured to detect a radio frequency tag. An exemplary method of using a mobile station includes selectively conducting wireless communications over an uplink and a downlink. The mobile station is also selectively used to detect at least one radio frequency tag. | 08-05-2010 |
20100197227 | HEADSET ASSEMBLY FOR BLUETOOTH UTILITIES - Disclosed is a headset assembly for Bluetooth equipment. The headset assembly (H) for Bluetooth communication with mobile communication equipment includes an earphone body part ( | 08-05-2010 |
20100197228 | CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD FOR A SHORT RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A clock synchronization method includes: A) configuring a device to determine a time interval between issuance of a command by a network coordinator and the completion of the transmission of a (SFD) of a beacon frame by the network coordinator; B) upon completion of the reception of the SFD byte of the beacon frame by the device, configuring the device to generate a synchronization signal; C) in response to the synchronization signal, configuring the device to record a first clock time thereof; D) upon completion of the reception of the beacon frame by the device, configuring the device to record a second clock time thereof; E) configuring the device to calculate a synchronization clock time based on the time interval, and the first and second clock times; and F) configuring the device to adjust a clock time thereof to the synchronization clock time. | 08-05-2010 |
20100197229 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device includes: a first communication interface configured to perform a first wireless communication with a first counterpart device; a second communication interface configured to perform a second wireless communication with a second counterpart device; an identification information acquiring module configured to acquire identification information unique to the second counterpart device from the second counterpart device by the second wireless communication performed by the second communication interface; and a transmission controller configured to perform a control so that data is sent to the second counterpart device that is identified by the identification information acquired by the identification information acquiring module by performing the first wireless communication with the second counterpart device according to the first communication method. | 08-05-2010 |
20100203830 | Systems and Methods for Implementing Hands Free Operational Environments - Various systems and methods for implementing operational environments are disclosed. For example, some embodiments of the present invention provide hands free operational environments that include a routing device, an audio transmission device, an audio output device, and an audio input device. The routing device communicably couples the audio transmission device to one or more of the audio input device and the audio output device. The audio input device is operable to receive an audible command. The audible command is operable to cause an operation on at least one of the routing device, the audio output device, and the audio transmission device. | 08-12-2010 |
20100203831 | Headset Charge via Short-Range RF Communication - Embodiments of the present invention enable energy transfer via short-range RF communication between a main device and an associated device, thereby allowing the main device to energy charge the associated device. Accordingly, the need for a separate charger for the associated device can be eliminated. Embodiments of the present invention are suitable for applications in which the main device and the associated device operate in close proximity to each other. Further, embodiments of the present invention are suitable for applications in which the associated device is more energy-constrained than the main device. According to embodiments, energy transfer applications can be supported using near field communication (NFC). In an embodiment, energy transfer via NFC is enabled between a Bluetooth enabled cellular phone and a Bluetooth headset. In another embodiment, energy transfer via NFC is enabled between a Bluetooth enabled digital camera and a Bluetooth enabled digital frame. | 08-12-2010 |
20100203832 | Method and Apparatus for Co-Existence of an OFDMA Transmitter with a Synchronous Frame-Based Transmitter - A method and apparatus reduces the likelihood of packet loss when an OFDMA transceiver and synchronous frame-based transceiver are operating on the same device. More specifically, a method protects reception of Bluetooth signals (such as reception of slave device signals) from co-existence interference caused by co-located OFDMA transceiver transmissions. The method receives a transmission-enable (TXE) signal indicating that the OFDMA transceiver is transmitting, determines an estimated transmission-enable (TXE′) signal indicating when the OFDMA transceiver is expected to be transmitting in the future, and sends the TXE′ signal to the Bluetooth transmitter to shut down Bluetooth transmissions when a transmission is expected to be sent from the OFDMA transceiver. | 08-12-2010 |
20100203833 | PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE WITH PROXIMITY-BASED CONTENT SYNCHRONIZATION - Systems are provided that support millimeter-wave wireless communications between hosts and electronic devices. A host may be formed using a personal computer associated with a user or computing equipment associated with a public establishment. Content can be automatically synchronized between the host and the user's electronic device over a millimeter-wave wireless communications link in a communications band such as a 60 GHz wireless communications band. Synchronization operations may be performed based on user content preferences. Content preference information may be gathered explicitly from a user using on-screen options or may be gathered by monitoring user media playback activities and media rating activities. The content preference information may be transmitted automatically from an electronic device to a host when the electronic device is brought within range of the host. Synchronization operations may be performed automatically when a user is in proximity of a point-of-sale terminal or ticketing equipment. | 08-12-2010 |
20100203834 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTING A MOVING VEHICLE WITHIN A PREDETERMINED AREA - The system allows a reliable and automatic detection of moving vehicles and advantageously also identification of the moving vehicles. A WPAN node device (advantageously a ZigBee node device) is installed on a vehicle to be detected when the vehicle is moving. Three WPAN node devices (advantageously three ZigBee node devices) are installed on the ground. One of the three WPAN node devices has a wide radio coverage area and acts as an “exciter” of the vehicle WPAN node device. Another one of the three WPAN node devices has a wide radio coverage area and acts as the “parent” of the vehicle WPAN node device. A further one of the three WPAN node devices has a narrow radio coverage area and acts as a “detector” of the vehicle WPAN node device. The three radio coverage areas are sized and located so that a moving vehicle to be detected enters the area of the “exciter” before entering the area of the “parent” and before entering the area of the “detector”. After detection, the system provides for sending information to a fourth WPAN node device present in a user mobile telephone terminal. | 08-12-2010 |
20100203835 | Wireless Network Protocol for Converging Braodcasting, Communication and Controlling In a Short Ranged Pico-Cell - In wireless devices for transmitting/receiving at least one of broadcasting, communication and controlling, a wireless network protocol transmits repeatedly data structure with a certain period in a unit of the same cycle, and maintains synchronization of the devices in a unit of the same cycle. As a result, a frequency hopping is performed in a unit of a cycle. Here, length of the cycle is set to below 20 msec so that a buffer used for transmitting/receiving a broadcasting signal and a voice/data communication has length of below 20 msec. Cycles form a network cycle. Control frames included in the cycles in the network cycle are differently assigned in accordance with their use, and so the control frames may be used for various controls. A payload frame in the cycle used by a user may be set freely in the range of length of the cycle. In addition, the user may set optionally transmission direction, transmission velocity, transmission output power, etc in a unit of a frame and use the buffer in a unit of the frame. As a result, a user interface may be set simply. | 08-12-2010 |
20100203836 | Reducing Interference From Closely Proximate Wireless Units - A wireless device may include two or more wireless interfaces capable of transmitting and/or receiving signals over separate wireless networks. To reduce the likelihood of interference, a processing unit may determine whether to permit a transmission under one wireless network when a reception under another wireless network is already in progress. | 08-12-2010 |
20100203837 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system that allows a mobile station to locate a slave and that can be used outside a communication range of a base station of a mobile communication network is provided. A slave transmits and receives information to and from a mobile station, such as a cellular phone, by short-range wireless communication. The slave acquires positioning information on its present position and sends it together with identification information from a short-range wireless communication unit. The mobile station includes a receiving portion, a storage portion, a signal determining portion, and a display portion. The receiving portion receives a transmission signal from the slave, and the signal determining portion compares identification information contained in the transmission signal with identification code registered in the storage portion to determine whether they match. When the signal determining portion determines a match, the display portion plots a present position of the slave on map data about surroundings of the mobile station and displays it. | 08-12-2010 |
20100210208 | MULTI MODE RADIO FREQUENCY TRANSCEIVER FRONT END CIRCUIT WITH INTER-STAGE POWER DIVIDER - A front end circuit for coupling an antenna to a first radio frequency (RF) transceiver and a second RF transceiver is contemplated. The RF transceivers have a signal input, a signal output, a receive enable line and a transmit enable line. In addition to an antenna port, the front end circuit has a first power amplifier and a first low noise amplifier both coupled to first RF transceiver, and a second power amplifier and a second low noise amplifier both coupled to the second RF transceiver. The front end circuit includes a matching network that couples the power amplifiers and the low noise amplifiers, the various outputs and inputs thereof being common. | 08-19-2010 |
20100210209 | RADIOTERMINALS AND OPERATING METHODS THAT RECEIVE MULTIPLE MEASURES OF INFORMATION FROM MULTIPLE SOURCES - A radioterminal includes a receiver that is configured to receive information from a base station by receiving a first measure of the information from the base station and a second measure of the information from a second device. The second device receives a measure of the information from the base station, responsively generates the second measure of the information and transmits the second measure of the information to the radioterminal over a short-range wireless link. Related methods are also described. | 08-19-2010 |
20100210210 | FACILITATING USE OF A DEVICE BASED ON SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY - Various devices may include a short-range wireless transmitter and/or one or more short-range wireless readers. When a first device including the transmitter is placed near a second device including the one or more readers, a relative location of the first device may be determined. Information regarding the relative location of the first device, may be used to facilitate use of the first device with a processing device. In one embodiment, the processing device may automatically configure itself, such that the first device may be used with the processing device. In another embodiment, the processing device may provide feedback, such as, for example, step-by-step instructions to facilitate setup and use of the first device with the processing device. In some embodiments, an application program interface may provide information about the device to an application executing on the processing device. | 08-19-2010 |
20100216398 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A ROTATING FRAME OF REFERENCE AND A NON-ROTATING FRAME OF REFERENCE - A communication system includes a first communication module within a rotating frame of reference and a second communication module within a fixed frame of reference. The first communication module and the second communication module in wireless communication at least partially through a hollow shaft. | 08-26-2010 |
20100216399 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - Provided are wireless communication method and apparatus. The wireless communication method includes: receiving wireless communication module information of a second terminal from the second terminal through a first communicator of a first terminal; and performing a wireless communication with the second terminal using the wireless communication module information through a second communicator of the first terminal. | 08-26-2010 |
20100216400 | Portable terminal device and on-vehicle device - A portable terminal device that is communicable with other devices includes a start record table, an application relation table, a device application correspondence table, an acquiring unit, and a sending unit. Upon receiving a predetermined signal from a communication device, the acquiring unit acquires first application information for specifying an application corresponding to the communication device from the device application correspondence table, and acquires, with respect to a combination of applications of which first application information is started second, second application information for specifying the first application of the combination from the application relation table. When the latest record stored in the start record table is equivalent to the second application information, the sending unit sends information representing that a priority level is high as a response to the predetermined signal that is received from the communication device. | 08-26-2010 |
20100216401 | IN-VEHICLE DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - An in-vehicle device is provided. A wireless communication section is configured to perform wireless communication with a plurality of mobile terminal devices in a vehicle. A specifying section is configured to specify each of the mobile terminal devices based on radio waves which are transmitted from the mobile terminal devices carried in the vehicle and are received by an antenna provided in the vehicle. An information acquiring section is configured to acquire service specifying information for specifying available services for each of the mobile terminal devices from each of the mobile terminal devices specified by the specifying section. A share setting section is configured to set whether or not to share at least one of the available services among the mobile terminal devices based on the service specifying information acquired by the information acquiring section. | 08-26-2010 |
20100222000 | Methods And Apparatus For Use In Selectively Retrieving And Displaying User Interface Information Of A Wireless Peripheral Device - A mobile communication device (e.g. a handheld telephone device) has a first wireless transceiver for communications via a wireless communication network and a second wireless transceiver for communications with a wireless peripheral device (e.g. a wireless audio headset or earpiece). The mobile device receives, from the wireless peripheral, an identification of a type or model of the wireless peripheral. The mobile device causes user interface (UI) function mapping information of the wireless peripheral to be selectively retrieved based on the received identification of the type or model. The UI function mapping information is indicative of a plurality of device functions assigned to a plurality of user input controls of the wireless peripheral. UI instruction information which is based on the retrieved UI function mapping information is then displayed at the mobile device. For example, when an incoming call is received, UI instruction information which identifies a first user input control for causing the incoming call to be answered and a second user input control for causing the incoming call to be ignored is displayed. The UI function mapping information may be selectively retrieved by transmitting, via the first wireless transceiver, a request which indicates the type or model of the wireless peripheral, for receipt by a server having different sets of UI function mapping information stored in association with a plurality of different types or models of wireless peripherals. | 09-02-2010 |
20100227554 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DIRECT COMMUNICATION BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A wireless communication device includes conventional components to permit a network communication link to be established with a wireless communication network. In addition, the wireless communication device includes a non-network short-range transceiver that detects the presence of other similarly equipped devices. When two such equipped devices come within proximity of each other, a direct non-network wireless communication link is established. The two devices exchange portions of profile data and each analyzed the received profile data. If a match occurs, a contact notification is generated. This permits the wireless communication device to act as an auto-detecting social network device that detects the proximity of other devices whose owners have a profile that matches the stored user preference data. Subsequent communication may occur in a conventional manner using the wireless network communication channels and web applications may also be used to gain additional information. | 09-09-2010 |
20100227555 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN A MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE AND AN AUXILIARY SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a system and method for facilitating short-range wireless communications between a mobile wireless device and an auxiliary device. The wireless device includes a short-range transceiver for communicating with an auxiliary device; a signal module for providing a mode control signal; and, a control module for controllably shifting a short-range transceiver between a power saver mode and a search mode based on the mode control signal received from the signal module. When in the search mode, the short-range transceiver is operable to search for the auxiliary device to communicate therewith. When in a power saver mode, the short-range transceiver is not operable to search for the auxiliary device. | 09-09-2010 |
20100227556 | METHOD OF AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLING OPERATION BETWEEN TERMINALS AND TERMINAL SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method of automatically controlling operation between mobile terminals and a terminal supporting the same provide for automatic operation control terminals to control each terminal to recognize a specific operation generated in the terminal. Terminals generating the same operation signal automatically activate a near-distance communication module, and automatically forms a communication channel based on the near-distance communication module. | 09-09-2010 |
20100227557 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING AN UNDERGROUND FACILITY - A wireless communication system for managing an underground facility includes: at least one sensor node attached to the underground facility configured to transmit a sensing signal via magnetic field communication after detecting the status information of the underground facility in accordance with a driving signal, the driving signal comprising a wake-up signal; and an information collection device configured to: transmit the driving signal to the sensor node; collect the sensing signal transmitted from the sensor node; and transmit the collected information to a monitoring system via short-range wireless communication. | 09-09-2010 |
20100227558 | SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CELLULAR PHONE TERMINAL - There is provided a short-range wireless communication apparatus and a cellular phone terminal that can surely and immediately notify a user of the optimum distance between a contactless IC card reader/writer and a contactless IC card not through an MPU or a CPU and if the contactless IC card function is locked, surely notify the user as such. In an RFID card, a magnetic field strength/brightness conversion section adjusts the brightness of two LEDs in accordance with the detected magnetic field strength of a carrier wave. A blink generation circuit detects whether the RFID card is in a communication state and blinks the LEDs if so. A function combining section combines the functions to indicate the magnetic field strength and the communication state with the brightness and blinking of the LEDs. An LED with another color illuminates only when an RFID function LSI is in a lock state. | 09-09-2010 |
20100233959 | System for Limiting Use of Mobile Communication Devices within a Vehicle - A system and apparatus for limiting use of mobile communication devices which utilizes vehicle diagnostic information transmitted via the Bluetooth™ communications protocol to a mobile device (PDA, cell phone, laptop, portable printer, GPS, iPod, etc.). If the vehicle diagnostic data meets predetermined criteria, the software configured to evaluate vehicle diagnostic data selectively authorizes telephone calls, incoming text messages, incoming pager messages, incoming e-mails, outgoing telephone calls, outgoing text messages, etc. If the predetermined criteria are not met, the functionality of mobile communication devices will be limited. | 09-16-2010 |
20100233960 | SERVICE DISCOVERY FUNCTIONALITY UTILIZING PERSONAL AREA NETWORK PROTOCOLS - Techniques to provide service discovery via personal area network protocols. A personal area network is generally a network that covers only a few feet or meters of physical space. Personal area networks can be wired or wireless. Wired personal area networks include, for example, Universal Serial Bus (USB) and IEEE 1394 (or FireWire) connections. Wireless personal area networks can include, for example, IrDA, Bluetooth, UWB, Z-Wave and ZigBee. Service discovery results in indication of services that are available via the personal area network and not necessarily the physical devices that provide the services. A wireless device may utilize DNS formatted data over a Bluetooth connection to determine services that are available from other Bluetooth devices within range. | 09-16-2010 |
20100240304 | PORTABLE ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND PORTABLE TERMINAL SYSTEM - A portable electronic apparatus that is disposed to a portable terminal device includes a contactless communication unit, the apparatus comprises a first interface which performs communication with the portable terminal device a second interface which performs contactless communication by using the contactless communication unit a storage unit which stores a plurality of application programs that execute processing in the contactless communication using the contactless communication unit through the second interface a setting unit which sets an application program capable of responding to an access request in the contactless communication in the plurality of application programs stored in the storage unit and a processing unit by which the application program enabled to respond to the access request in the contactless communication by the setting unit alone responds upon receiving the access request in the contactless communication through the second interface. | 09-23-2010 |
20100240305 | OFFICE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An office communication system provides intra-office communication within a medical or dental office, for example. The system includes a door or wall unit, a table or desk unit, and a wearable or portable unit. The door and desk units are configured to transmit and receive both infrared and radio frequency type wireless signals. The portable unit may include an infrared light transmitter configured to transmit infrared light encoded with a unique address or identifier. The system operates to non-obtrusively notify office personnel whether a practitioner has entered or is presently within a particular exam room of the office, even if a door of the exam room is closed. | 09-23-2010 |
20100240306 | SYNCHRONIZING SATELLITE POSITIONING SYSTEM INFORMATION TO FEATURES OF SHORT-RANGE, AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORK PROTOCOLS - Satellite positioning system information and/or other information is communicated to/from a mobile terminal by synchronizing satellite positioning system information that is communicated to/from the mobile terminal over a short-range, ad hoc wireless network relative to a feature of a protocol that is used for the short-range, ad hoc wireless network communications. The feature may be a header field in the short-range, ad hoc wireless network communications. Related methods, mobile terminals and short-range ad hoc wireless networks are described. | 09-23-2010 |
20100248626 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING FUNCTION SPECIFIC ACCESS TO A MOBILE TERMINAL VIA AN EXTERNAL DEVICE - Methods, systems, and apparatus for providing customizable interaction with a mobile terminal using external input devices are provided. A first activation signal that corresponds to a first function in the mobile terminal is received into the mobile terminal from a first external input device of the plurality of input devices that is configured to receive a first activating input from a user. The first function is activated in the mobile terminal responsive to receiving the first activation signal. A second activation signal is received into the mobile terminal from a second external input device of the plurality of external input devices that is configured to receive a second activating input from the user. The second activation signal corresponds to a second function in the mobile terminal. The second function is activated in the mobile terminal responsive to receiving the second activation signal. | 09-30-2010 |
20100248627 | Identification of Make and Model of Communication Devices over Bluetooth Protocol - Embodiments herein provide methods and systems for identifying make and model, and other features of a communication device using the MAC ID, profile name and services offered on the communication device. Also, disclosed herein is a method of building a database where a range of MAC IDs is mapped to a particular make and model, and other features of communication devices. On obtaining the MAC ID of a communication device, the make and model, and other features of the device can be identified. Such information may be used to tailor content according to the capabilities of a communication device. | 09-30-2010 |
20100248628 | INTEGRATED COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - An integrated communication apparatus is linked to the PSTN or the Internet for making a PSTN call or a VoIP call. The integrated communication apparatus includes a Bluetooth earphone having a signal transmitting terminal, and a body having an earphone receiving slot and a control circuit board. The earphone receiving slot is used for receiving the earphone and the signal transmitting terminal of the Bluetooth earphone is electrically connected with the control circuit board. The control circuit board includes a control module. The control module is connected with a Bluetooth module, a wireless VoIP module, a PSTN module, a voice-signal encoding/decoding circuit, a judging and charging circuit, and a voice-signal switching module for operating and controlling the modules and the circuits. The voice-signal switching module is connected with a speaker and a microphone via an ECHO eliminating circuit. | 09-30-2010 |
20100261428 | ROAD-VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - First and second roadside apparatuses for short-range communication with a vehicle-mounted device mounted in a vehicle are disposed upstream and downstream of a one-way road. The first and second roadside apparatuses installed on the road acquire vehicle identification information for identifying the vehicle when the vehicle passes through the communicative areas thereof. A administration device capable of communicating with the first and second roadside apparatuses stores the vehicle identification information acquired by the first roadside apparatus in a storage unit. If the vehicle identification information acquired by the second roadside apparatus is not included in the vehicle identification information stored in the storage unit, the administration device provides the vehicle with a reverse-way driving warning information through the second roadside apparatus. Thus, the road-vehicle communication system for warning a vehicle being driven or fully expected to be driven in the reverse-way on a one-way road such as a toll road against the reverse-way driving. | 10-14-2010 |
20100261429 | PHY LAYER OPTIONS FOR BODY AREA NETWORK (BAN) DEVICES - In at least some embodiments, a communication device includes a transceiver with a physical (PHY) layer. The PHY layer is configured for body area network (BAN) operations in a limited multipath environment using M-ary PSK, differential M-ary PSK or rotated differential M-ary PSK. Also, the PHY layer uses a constant symbol rate for BAN packet transmissions. | 10-14-2010 |
20100261430 | Embedded RFID Scanner For Mobil Product Management - The present invention generally provides methods and systems for reading information from a signal-emitting device, such as a wireless identification tag. In one embodiment, the method includes providing an electronic reading device mounted to a body-worn harness adapted to be worn on a body of a user. The method further includes detecting a predefined physical configuration assumed by at least a portion of the body by determining that a pressure value measured via a pressure sensor connected to the body-worn harness is above a threshold pressure value. In response to detecting the predefined physical configuration, the electronic reading device is activated. Upon being activated, the electronic reading device is configured to receive a signal from the signal-emitting device, the signal containing data pertaining to a physical object associated with the signal-emitting device. | 10-14-2010 |
20100267334 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic device includes a communication module, a connection establishment module, a negotiation module, a service execution module, and an execution control module. The communication module executes close proximity wireless transfer. The connection establishment module establishes a connection between the communication module and an external device which are in a close proximity state. The negotiation module determines a service to be executed between the communication module and the external device through a negotiation process when the connection is established. The service execution module executes the service. The execution control module executes the negotiation process again in response to a user's request or a request from the external device if the connection is kept after the completion of the service. | 10-21-2010 |
20100267335 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PROGRAM, AND DATA SELECTION METHOD - The present invention aims to enable appropriate selection of data to be transmitted/received based on the distance between communication devices. | 10-21-2010 |
20100267336 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus includes: a communication circuit section that processes a high-frequency signal for transferring data; a transfer path for the signal connected to the circuit section; a ground; a coupling electrode supported opposite and away in height from the ground; a resonance section that increases a current flowing into the electrode via the path; and a main body housing that assumes a plurality of placement postures and houses the respective components, one end surface of the housing serving as a reading surface in which the electrode is disposed offset from a center of the reading surface. An infinitesimal dipole is formed from a line segment connecting between a center of a charge in the electrode and a center of an image charge in the ground. The signal is transferred toward a communication partner disposed oppositely to form an angle of substantially 0 degrees with a direction of the dipole. | 10-21-2010 |
20100273417 | Establishing Full-Duplex Audio Over an Asynchronous Bluetooth Link - A method to establish a full-duplex audio connection over an asynchronous Bluetooth link between an audio terminal and a wireless audio device exchanges supported service classes and codecs between the audio terminal and the wireless audio device, negotiates a service class and a codec that are common to the audio terminal and the wireless audio device, and establishes an asynchronous audio connection between the audio terminal and the wireless audio device using the common service class and the codec. The audio connection established can depend on the software application desiring the audio connection plus the available service classes and codecs at the audio terminal and wireless audio device. For non-internet protocol (non-IP) audio applications, an ACL using AVDTP may be selected; for IP audio applications, an ACL using BNEP may be selected. Both AVDTP and BNEP can use codecs that support wide bandwidth audio. | 10-28-2010 |
20100273418 | STATIC NODES POSITIONING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Positions in a region serviced by a short range wireless network are established by defining a grid for the region. The grid is divided into a plurality of cells having a predetermined size. A plurality of static nodes can be placed in the cells. A network identifier that is associated with a standard protocol for the network is assigned to each of the static nodes. The identifier is assigned so as to identify the node and to represent a set of X, Y coordinates associated the cell where static node is located. The X,Y coordinate are assigned to the identifier without deviating from the standard protocol. The identifier is periodically broadcast from the static nodes. A cell of the grid within which a mobile node is located is estimated based on the identifier and an additional parameter received from one of the static nodes. | 10-28-2010 |
20100273419 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MAC LOGICAL CHANNEL SELECTION FOR OPERATING PICONETS IN BODY AREA NETWORKS - A portable device capable of controlling a piconet selects a logical channel when forming the piconet. The device includes a controller configured to start a first piconet. The controller couples to at least one secondary device in the first piconet. The portable device also includes a transmitter configured to communicate with the at least one secondary device via a wireless communication channel. The controller is configured to select communication channel resources based at least in part on resources allocated to a second piconet in order to mitigate interference between the piconets. The controller is configured to form the first piconet to operate in either a non-interference mode when the controller is able to establish communications with a second controller in the second piconet or a coexistence interference mitigation mode when the controller is unable to establish communications with the second controller in the second piconet. | 10-28-2010 |
20100273420 | DEVICE, SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR SYSTEM - A communication device includes a communication unit wirelessly communicating with another communication device in a connectable area; an acquiring unit acquiring a state of the communication device; a setting unit making a setting as to whether a connection is permitted to be established by the communication unit, on the basis of the state acquired by the acquiring unit; and a communication control unit responding to a connection request sent from the other communication device when connection with the other communication device is permitted by the setting unit. | 10-28-2010 |
20100273421 | ELECTRICAL ACCESSORY CONFIGURED TO TRANSMIT ELECTRICAL SIGNALS BETWEEN A FIRST ELECTRICAL DEVICE, A SECOND ELECTRICAL DEVICE AND A THIRD ELECTRICAL DEVICE AND A METHOD OF PROVIDING AND USING THE ELECTRICAL ACCESSORY - In some embodiments, an electrical accessory can be configured to transmit one or more first data signals to a receiving device. The electrical accessory can include: (a) a first electrical interface configured to mechanically and electrically couple to a first connector of a first electrical device, the first electrical interface further configured to receive a first part of the one or more first data signals from the first electrical device; (b) a first transmitter configured to transmit one or more second data signals to a second electrical device; (c) a first receiver configured to receive a second part of the one or more first data signals from the second electrical device; (d) a second transmitter electrically coupled to the first electrical interface and the first receiver, the second transmitter configured to transmit the one or more first data signals to the receiving device; (e) a first microphone electrically coupled to the first transmitter and configured to receive sounds and convert the sounds into the one or more second data signals; and (f) a controller electrically coupled to the first transmitter, the first receiver, the second transmitter, and the first microphone. The controller can be configured such that the controller instructs the first electrical device to stop providing the first part of the one or more first data signals before or when the first receiver receives the second part of the one or more first data signals from the second electrical device. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 10-28-2010 |
20100273422 | USING A BLUETOOTH CAPABLE MOBILE PHONE TO ACCESS A REMOTE NETWORK - In one example, a Bluetooth enabled mobile device discovers the Bluetooth profile capability of a plurality of mobile phones and stores the profile information in a database. Thereafter, when access to a remote network such as an Internet Protocol (IP) network is necessitated by an event, the Bluetooth enabled mobile device can establish a Bluetooth connection with an available mobile phone according to a comparison of the event to the stored profile information for that mobile phone. The Bluetooth enabled mobile device can then establish a transport layer connection that extends over the established Bluetooth connection and a wireless telecommunications network associated with the available phone and exchange data with a remote network using the established transport layer connection. | 10-28-2010 |
20100273423 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPLICATION FOR COORDINATING THE TRANSMISSION OF A GEOLOCATED INSTRUCTION FROM A ROAMING ELEMENT TO AN ONBOARD MULTIMEDIA ELEMENT - A method, a management system and an application for coordinating the transmission of a geolocated instruction from a roaming element ( | 10-28-2010 |
20100273424 | Method for Enjoying a Service Through a Mobile Telephone Terminal and Subscriber Identification Card for Implementing It - A method is provided which allows a service to be enjoyed through a mobile telephone terminal without the need of paying for this service. The can be achieved by allowing a first subscriber to use the credit or subscription of a second subscriber. The subscriber identification cards at least of the two subscribers involved are provided with short range radio communication transceivers and establish a short range communication channel between them so that one card may request the other card to pay for this service and the other card may grant this request through this channel. Then the mobile telephone networks of the cards are informed of the granted request. Before, during and after the grant of the request, the subscriber identification cards remain active and operative in communicating together and with the associated terminals. | 10-28-2010 |
20100279608 | Bluetooth device - A Bluetooth device is adapted to be carried on a human body, and includes: a Bluetooth module wirelessly receiving an external audio signal; a loudspeaker module for reproducing the audio signal received by the Bluetooth module; a sensing unit including a sensing circuit for sensing a conductive unit so as to generate a physical characteristic value associated with the conductive unit; and a processing unit receiving the physical characteristic value from the sensing circuit, and outputting a control signal to the Bluetooth module based on the physical characteristic value received thereby. The Bluetooth module is operable, based on the control signal from the processing unit, between one of a power-saving state, where the Bluetooth device is distal from the human body, and a working state, where the Bluetooth device is close to the human. body. | 11-04-2010 |
20100279609 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING OVER AN 802.15.4 NETWORK - A method of reducing data transfer while increasing image information over an 802.15.4 network includes obtaining an image with a sensor, modulating a representation of the image using a first 802.15.4 modem, sending the representation of the image to a coordinator, demodulating the representation of the image using a second 802.15.4 modem, and digitally enhancing at least one of the representation of the image and the image. A system for communication over an 802.15.4 network includes a sensor for obtaining data, the size of the data being at least an order of magnitude greater than the size of an 802.15.4 packet, a first 802.15.4 modem coupled to the sensor, a buffer for temporarily storing the data to allow transmission of portions of the data; the buffer being coupled to the sensor, a coordinator coupled to the sensor, the coordinator being capable of communicating with a computer, and a second 802.15.4 modem coupled to the coordinator. | 11-04-2010 |
20100279610 | SYSTEM FOR RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING ENCRYPTED DATA - The invention regards a system where only one first device has a radio frequency identification tag that is recognized by payment software and vice versa. Hence, it is preventing that the payment software is utilized as a clone in other first devices. The first device can be a cellular phone ( | 11-04-2010 |
20100279611 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND TERMINAL RECOGNIZING METHOD - Wireless communication terminals whereby it is possible for users who are acquainted with one another to recognize that the users are approaching one another without revealing private information to a third party. Each of the wireless communication terminals comprises a local-terminal identifying information storing part ( | 11-04-2010 |
20100279612 | Method of Pairing a Portable Device with a Communications Module of a Vehicular, Hands-Free Telephone System - A method of pairing Bluetooth™ enabled devices including a portable phone with a Bluetooth™ communications module of a vehicular, hands-free telephone system includes using vocal communications to prompt an operator of the phone to enter a given PIN number into the phone. The presence of any Bluetooth™ enabled devices within the vicinity of the communications module is searched. Vocal communications are used to prompt the operator to vocally state a name for the phone and to vocally state a pairing priority to be assigned to the phone. If the assigned pairing priority is not assigned to another Bluetooth™ enabled device, then the name and the pairing priority are associated with the phone. Communications between the communications module and the phone are then enabled if the phone has the highest pairing priority amongst all of the Bluetooth™ enabled devices present within the vicinity of the communications module. | 11-04-2010 |
20100285749 | Hiding A Device - The object of the invention is a method where a first communications device ( | 11-11-2010 |
20100291872 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING COMMUNICATION OVER DIFFERENT RANGES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and apparatus well suited for supporting communications over different ranges in, for example, a peer to peer wireless communications system, are described. In the peer to peer network at least some of the types of signals, e.g., peer discovery signals and/or paging signals, are transmitted with no closed loop power control. An exemplary peer to peer timing structure includes air link resources allocated for a particular type of signaling in which the resources are segmented into multiple blocks which do not overlap in time, different ones of the multiple blocks being associated with different ranges. The characteristics of the basic transmission units of the multiple blocks based on range are different, e.g., tone size and symbol width are different. A wireless communications device implements the peer to peer timing structure and uses resources from different range based blocks at different times. Data traffic transmission units may be the same regardless of the range. | 11-18-2010 |
20100291873 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND TRIPARTITE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication terminal device includes a terminal body which enables a communication with a radio communication network by a first radio communication, a separating member which may be separated from the terminal body and enables a communication with the terminal body by a second radio communication, a tripartite communication unit which enables a tripartite communication among the terminal body, the separating member, and the radio communication network when the separating member and the terminal body are separated, and a control unit which controls howling between the terminal body and the separating member when the separating member and the terminal body are close during the tripartite communication. | 11-18-2010 |
20100291874 | Wireless Communication Method - Methods of communicating between a mobile unit and a peripheral device are described. In a first embodiment, a method of wireless communication is described. In a second embodiment, an apparatus for wirelessly communicating with a peripheral device is described. | 11-18-2010 |
20100297940 | BLUETOOTH PERIPHERAL AND PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE USING SAME - A Bluetooth peripheral includes a sleeve, a Bluetooth earphone received in the sleeve, and a stylus latched to the sleeve. The invention also discloses a portable electronic device using the Bluetooth peripheral. | 11-25-2010 |
20100297941 | REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD EMPLOYING CELLULAR TELEPHONES WHICH INCLUDE SHORT RANGE RADIO TRANSCEIVERS - A novel remote control system and method is disclosed which includes a user control and a control module. The system employs one or more cellular telephones as the user control which reduces the cost of the system. Further, by employing the inherent functionality of the cellular telephone, novel modes of interacting with the control module and the target devices it is connected to can be achieved. In the case of the cellular telephone being a smartphone, more advanced modes of interacting with the control module and the target devices can be achieved. Examples of target devices controlled by the system and method include, without limitation, electric garage door openers, lighting systems, thermostats, alarm systems, etc. | 11-25-2010 |
20100297942 | METHOD FOR INTEGRATING A FIELD DEVICE INTO A PROCESS AUTOMATIION TECHNOLOGY NETWORK - A method for integrating at least one field device, which is connected with a mobile unit, into a network of process automation technology. The mobile unit authenticates itself via a connection in the network, and that it receives at least one integration parameter for integration into the network ( | 11-25-2010 |
20100297943 | WIRELESS VIDEO HUB - A method for transmitting data from a digital device to a computing device. The method includes determining that a physical location of a digital device is within a predetermined range of a communications hub that is less than a maximum operable range of the communications hub, receiving first video data from the digital device in accordance with a first communications protocol, and transmitting second video data to a computing device in accordance with a second communications protocol. | 11-25-2010 |
20100297944 | MULTI-DEVICE CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A multi-device control method and a related apparatus are provided for transmission of information between communication devices. In the method, a master device shares particular information with a serving device after accessing the serving device through a communication channel, including a human body. Then the master device measures signal strength of each of slave devices using the communication channel. The slave devices include the serving device. The master device selects one of the slave devices as a target device with relatively greater signal strength, and then transmits the information to the target device through the communication channel. | 11-25-2010 |
20100297945 | Arrangement and a method in a telephony system - A mobile telephone is easy to carry around but has a small keypad and a small display. A normal deskphone has a big keypad and display and has a convenient handset, but is stationary. A stationary communications terminal is described which is connected to a mobile telephony network via a mobile telephone. The mobile and the stationary terminal have each a BLUETOOTH radio transceiver and are interconnected via a BLUETOOTH link. The stationary communications terminal lacks identity in the mobile network. A subscriber, owning the mobile, can call on the stationary communications terminal and can move to another network having another stationary terminal, on which he can make a call. Another subscriber with a mobile can call on the communications stationary terminal. To prevent misuse the subscribers take an authentication code for his respective mobile on the stationary terminal, and the authentication can be made valid for a predetermined period by taking a service code. | 11-25-2010 |
20100304672 | WIRELESS ACTIVE MONITOR SYSTEM FOR CONTAINERS AND CARTS - Wireless active monitor system for containers/carts that hold item(s). Includes a container mount, and sensor for example to weigh the item(s), and a wireless transmitter/transceiver to transmit sensor data from the sensor to a database for remote access. The sensor may be protected via shock pads to prevent damage to the sensor if the container is dropped. The system may be implemented with a printed circuit board having a central processing unit and memory that holds program code to execute on the central processing unit, for example to transmit sensor data via the wireless transmitter. May utilize a unique identifier associated with each container, and/or vehicle utilized to interface with the container. Enables rapid determination of the physical characteristics associated with items in the container without requiring physical contact with the container. For example, allows the weight of garbage containers to be determined remotely. | 12-02-2010 |
20100304673 | Wireless Communication Apparatus and Wireless Communication Method - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus comprises a communication module configured to execute wireless communication with a communication counterpart device, an execution module configured to execute one or more applications, and a communication controller configured to identify the communication counterpart device by wireless communication by the communication module, to select one of a transmission mode in which communication data is transmitted to the communication counterpart device and a reception mode in which communication data is received from the communication counterpart device based on an execution state of the application, to determine communication data based on data handled by the application, to determine a communication protocol based on attribute information of the data handled by the application, and to control communication with the communication counterpart device. | 12-02-2010 |
20100304674 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING BLUETOOTH DEVICES - A system and method for connecting Bluetooth devices are provided. The system includes a first device comprising a Bluetooth module, a relay terminal for transmitting information regarding the first device selected by a touch signal together with a Bluetooth connection request, and a second device for receiving the Bluetooth connection request and device information from the relay terminal, for analyzing the received Bluetooth connection request and the device information, and for transmitting a Bluetooth connection response accepting the request to the first device. The information includes an address of the first device and a name of the first device. | 12-02-2010 |
20100304675 | Information processing apparatus and information processing method having communication function - The present invention is an information processing apparatus which obtains identification information of an electronic device and makes communication with the electronic device via a network based on the identification information. When a portable telephone ( | 12-02-2010 |
20100311328 | CONTACTLESS DATA TRANSMISSION - A contactless device having an energy antenna configured to transmit/receive an energy signal; and a data antenna configured to transmit a data signal. Also, a method for transmitting a contactless signal including transmitting/receiving an energy signal from an energy antenna of a contactless device; and transmitting a data signal from a data antenna of the contactless device. | 12-09-2010 |
20100311329 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OBTAINING MAXIMUM GAIN OF A PASSIVE UPCONVERSION MIXER UTILIZED IN A TRANSMITTER - A RF transmitter is operable to transmit a signal at a frequency specified by the Bluetooth protocol. A passive upconversion mixer, which comprises a pair of MOSFET switches, is utilized inside the RF transmitter. The passive upconversion mixer is operable to receive analog local oscillator (LO) signals to be utilized for controlling operation of each of the pair of MOSFET switches to transmit signals with maximum gain. A MOS threshold voltage V | 12-09-2010 |
20100311330 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATION HANDOVER BY USING DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION MODES - A wireless communication system includes a terminal device; a first wireless communication device; and a second wireless communication device. When the first wireless communication device communicates with the second wireless communication device by wireless LAN communication after a handover and completes prescribed processing to the second wireless communication device, the first wireless communication device sends first disconnection information to the second wireless communication device to disconnect the second wireless communication device. The second wireless communication device stores wireless LAN connection information before communicating with the first wireless communication device by the wireless LAN communication when the second wireless communication device is connected with the terminal device at a time of the handover. The second wireless communication device disconnects the first wireless communication device and connects with the terminal device based on the wireless LAN connection information when the first disconnection information is received. | 12-09-2010 |
20100311331 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - When a communication apparatus is brought within a predetermined range of a partner apparatus in a state where data of transmission target is designated, the communication apparatus notifies the partner apparatus of a transmission notification indicating that data transmission is performed, before transmission of the data of transmission target is started. When the communication apparatus has received the transmission notification from the partner apparatus, a transmission order of data is determined, and a communication is performed by switching between transmission of the data to the partner apparatus and reception of the data from the partner apparatus according to the determined transmission order. | 12-09-2010 |
20100311332 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CHIP-TO-CHIP COMMUNICATION VIA ON-CHIP LEAKY WAVE ANTENNAS - Methods and systems for chip-to-chip communication via on-chip leaky wave antennas are provided. In this regard, RF signals may be communicated between a first leaky wave antenna in a first integrated circuit and a second leaky wave antenna in a second integrated circuit, where the first integrated circuit and the second integrated circuit are housed in a single integrated circuit package. The first integrated circuit and the second integrated circuit may be electrically isolated from one another. One or both of the first leaky wave antenna and the second leaky wave antenna may comprise a pair of coplanar conductive lines. Spacing between the coplanar conductive lines may be configured by applying a voltage which causes one or both of the coplanar conductive lines to deflect towards or away from the other one of the coplanar conductive lines. | 12-09-2010 |
20100311333 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR POINT-TO-POINT WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS UTILIZING LEAKY WAVE ANTENNAS - A method and system for point-to-point wireless communications utilizing leaky wave antennas is provided. In this regard, a first device may transmit a RF signal via a leaky wave antenna, and may determine an angle between the leaky wave antenna of the first device and a leaky wave antenna of a second device by adjusting a frequency of the RF signal until a response is received from the second device. The first device may be configured based on the determined angle. A wireless connection may be established between the leaky wave antenna of the first device and the leaky wave antenna of the second device based on the configuration. The first device may generate a notification when the angle is beyond a threshold. The wireless connection may adhere to wireless USB protocols and/or Bluetooth protocols, for example. The second device may generate the response after receiving sufficient energy from the RF signal. | 12-09-2010 |
20100311334 | Integrated Signal Receiver - A signal receiver having: an input for receiving radio signals; a clock; a receiving section for processing signals received at the input, the receiving section being configured to operate in: (a) a first mode for processing the received signals in accordance with a first protocol and in dependence on the state of the clock, and (b) a second mode for processing the received signal in accordance with a second protocol by steps including storing a sample of data received in accordance with the second protocol together with a representation of the state of the clock when that data was received, and subsequently comparing a timing indicated by the content of the stored sample of data with the timing indicated by the stored state of the clock. | 12-09-2010 |
20100311335 | DEVICES FOR POINT-TO-POINT WIRELESS HIGH-OUTPUT DATA TRANSMISSION BETWEEN A PARKED VEHICLE AND A FIXED INFRASTRUCTURE - A wireless high-rate communication device for a vehicle, adapted for data exchange between at least one computer system of the vehicle and at least one computer system of a structure separate from the vehicle. The device includes at least one antenna connected to at least one emitter/receiver in turn connected to the at least one computer system of the vehicle, the device adapted for exchanging data according to a point-to-point ultra-wideband communication mode, with a device of the structure including at least one antenna connected to at least one emitter/receiver in turn connected to at least one computer system of the structure when the at least one antenna of the vehicle is in a vicinity of the at least one antenna of the structure. | 12-09-2010 |
20100317289 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BLUETOOTH LOW POWER LINK LAYER CONNECTION SETUP - A mobile device such as a Bluetooth low energy (BLE) device detects out-of-band blocking signals and manages packet transmission in associated BLE link layer connections based on the detected out-of-band blocking signals. The BLE device is operable to measure out-of-band RSSI to detect out-of-band transmission interferences. The BLE device compares the measured out-of-band RSSI with an out-of-band energy profile such as a LTE energy profile or a WiMAX energy profile to determine the out-of-band blocking signals indicating cadence or periodic out-of-band traffic activities. A remote BLE deice (advertiser) aperiodically or periodically transmits an advertising packet to the BLE device for a specific link layer connection. If not connected within a determined time period, the remote BLE device (advertiser) reduces transmission power for transmitting the advertising packet. The BLE device receives the advertising packet and sends a connection request packet to the remote BLE device (advertiser). | 12-16-2010 |
20100317290 | Handheld Electronic Device Including Simplified Enabling and Disabling of Short-Range Wireless Communications Element, and Associated Method - An improved handheld electronic device and an associated method provide a simplified mechanism for enabling and disabling a short-range wireless communications element used to create a connection to a short-range wireless network, such as a Bluetooth™ network. The method, implemented by the handheld electronic device, includes enabling the short-range wireless communications element, pairing the handheld electronic device with a second electronic device using the short-range wireless communications element, and providing a first icon on the handheld electronic device after pairing the handheld electronic device with the second electronic device. Thereafter, the method includes disabling the short-range wireless communications element and providing a second icon on the handheld electronic device whenever the first icon is activated, and enabling the short-range wireless communications element and providing the first icon on the handheld electronic device whenever the second icon is activated. | 12-16-2010 |
20100323618 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Described herein are mobile communication devices that are insertable within a slot of a host system. The mobile communication device is sized to fit within the host system. When inserted within the slot of the host system, the mobile communication device may interface with the host system to exchange data. | 12-23-2010 |
20100323619 | Headset Adapter and Methods for Communicating Between a Hands-Free Headset and a Landline Telephone - A hands-free headset adapter comprises a first telephone connector configured to couple with the base unit of a landline telephone; a second telephone connector configured to couple with the handset of the landline telephone, the second telephone connector coupled to the first telephone connector via a communication channel; receive and transmit circuits coupled to the communication channel and configured to receive and transmit audio information with the base unit of the landline telephone; and a hands-free transceiver coupled to the receive and transmit circuits and configured to communicate over a desired standard, e.g., the Bluetooth® standard, with a hands-free headset. The second connector may be configured to reconnect the original telephone handset, thereby maintaining the original integrity of the desk/wall-mount telephone. The desired standard may include the same wireless standard as a user's cellular telephone. | 12-23-2010 |
20100323620 | System and Method for Streaming Identical Data Over Several Links - Method for streaming data over a plurality of data links formed between a master device and a plurality of slave devices includes constructing a vendor specific command packet, sending the vendor specific command packet to a host controller of the master device, and constructing at least one baseband packet addressed to each slave device of the plurality of slave devices. The vendor specific command packet includes a plurality of headers of a first type, a plurality of headers of a second type, and a payload. A device configured to stream data over a plurality of data links formed between a plurality of slave devices includes a host adapted to construct a vendor specific command packet, a transport layer and a host controller adapted to receive the vendor specific command packet over the transport layer. | 12-23-2010 |
20100330907 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD EMPLOYING THE SAME - An exemplary embodiment of communication device includes a signal communication module, a first switch module, a processor, a second switch module, and a power amplifying module. The signal communication module, the first switch module, the processor, the second switch module, and the power amplifying module are electrically connected in series. The signal transceiver receives and sends a wireless communication signal. The first switch module and the second switch module are used for switching on corresponding receiving and sending paths of the wireless communication signal under the control of the processor. The power amplifying module is configured for amplifying and adjusting signal strength of the broadcast signal from the second switch module controlled by the processor. | 12-30-2010 |
20100330908 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEVICE WITH VOICE-CONTROLLED FUNCTIONS - A system and method for providing wireless voice-controlled walk-through pairing and other functionality of telecommunications, audio headsets, and other communications devices, such as mobile telephones and personal digital assistants. In accordance with an embodiment, a headset, speaker or other device equipped with a microphone can receive a voice command directly from the user, recognize the command, and then perform functions on a communications device, such as a mobile telephone. The functions can, for example, include requesting the telephone call a number from its address book. In accordance with various embodiments the functions can also include advanced control of the communications device, such as pairing the device with an audio headset, or another Bluetooth device. | 12-30-2010 |
20100330909 | VOICE-ENABLED WALK-THROUGH PAIRING OF TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEVICES - A system and method for pairing communications devices using voice-enabled walk-through pairing. In the context of Bluetooth and other protocols, pairing allows two or more devices to be paired so that they can thereafter communicate wirelessly using the Bluetooth protocol. In accordance with an embodiment, a wireless audio headset, speaker, speakerphone, or other Bluetooth-enabled device can include a pairing logic and sound/audio playback files, which verbally walk the user through pairing the device with another Bluetooth-enabled device. This makes the pairing process easier for most users, particularly in situations that might require pairing multiple devices. | 12-30-2010 |
20100330910 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA USING E-FIELD IN PORTABLE TERMINAL AND APPARATUS THEREOF - A method and apparatus are provided for transmitting and receiving data using an electric field. A first device determines whether a transmission path to a second device is formed through a part of a human body using an electric field. A connection is established with the second device through the transmission path by the first device, when the transmission path is formed through the part of the human body. Connection information for the second device is obtained through the transmission path by the first device. Data is transmitted from the first device to the second device using the obtained connection information of the second device. | 12-30-2010 |
20100330911 | TELECOMMUNICATION INTELLIGENT CARD AND METHOD FOR SIGNALING INTERACTION WITH EXTERNAL NON-CONTACT CARD - A telecommunication intelligent card and a method for signaling interaction between a telecommunication intelligent card and an external non-contact card. The telecommunication intelligent card includes: a control unit for controlling a transmission unit to perform interactive communication with an external non-contact card, and processing signaling data from the transmission unit; and a transmission unit for interactive communication with the external non-contact card, and transmitting the signaling data received from the external non-contact card to the control unit. | 12-30-2010 |
20110003547 | Communication System and Method of Controlling the Same - Disclosed are a communication system and a control method thereof. The communication system comprises a terminal apparatus for converting regional information or position information into network connection information, and a communication apparatus for performing network communication by generating a data packet comprising the network connection information. In the communication system and the control method thereof, a number, a floor and a room of a building, a number of a shelf, a multilayer, and positions of goods are input, so that a network having no data collision is established, and thus a user conveniently use an office/home network service. An integral input system for network connection information is provided using regional or position information, so that communication is stably performed without using an additional manager. | 01-06-2011 |
20110003548 | TECHNIQUE THAT ENABLES EACH OF A SYSTEM OF BLUETOOTH DEVICES TO APPEAR AND FUNCTION, IN RELATION TO CLIENT DEVICES, AS THE SAME ONE DEVICE. - Disclosed is a technique that enables each of a system of Bluetooth devices to appear and function as the same one device in relation to client devices. This eliminates any repercussions to the client device or its end-user of obtaining service from multiple devices, such as the need to pair with each. To affect this, the set of devices that comprise the system are reconfigured such that their wireless identities (their BD_ADDR) are the same, and they share information about client devices including their security credentials (their link keys). | 01-06-2011 |
20110003549 | AUTOMATIC RESOURCE AVAILABILITY USING BLUETOOTH - A method, apparatus, and system for automatically sharing data resources between Bluetooth devices. A Bluetooth device is paired with a “trusted” Bluetooth device. When paired devices are found, the Bluetooth device automatically allows the other device to present a virtual representation of data that is shared. The shared data can be selectively downloaded for use by the other device as long as the devices are in proximity. In an alternate embodiment, the devices may share pairing information with a network, so that the same shared resource can be made available at a large number of access points but specifically only for one paired, trusted device. | 01-06-2011 |
20110009059 | EXTENDED NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio system includes a server connected to a network, at least one bi-directional radio connected to the network and at least one uni-directional radio not connected to the at least one bi-directional radio and not connected to the server. A mobile device is configured to receive data from at least one uni-directional radio and communicate with at least one bi-directional radio. | 01-13-2011 |
20110009060 | Systems and Methods for Reducing Interference Between a Plurality of Wireless Communications Modules - A wireless communications system is provided with a first wireless communications and a second wireless communications. The first wireless communications module transmits or receives a first wireless signal in a first frequency band selected from a first frequency range. The second wireless communications module transmits or receives a second wireless signal in a second frequency band selected from a second frequency range, and adjusts a transmission power of the second wireless signal in response to that a frequency offset between the first frequency band and the second frequency band falls within a predetermined range. | 01-13-2011 |
20110009061 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING AND MAINTAINING CRITICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENT - An apparatus, system and method for maintaining critical medical equipment for stockpile applications are provided. The apparatus, system and method of the present disclosure can be used to monitor and maintain critical medical equipment in a continuous state of readiness. The apparatus includes a storage case which protects a medical device disposed therein and the accessories required for its immediate application while also providing for constant or intermittent charging of the device's internal battery and serial data monitoring of the primary systems. The system and method also incorporate design features in the medical device which enable performance testing via a remote interface while the device is secured within the storage case. | 01-13-2011 |
20110009062 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR PROVIDING MOBILE AD HOC COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND RELATED DEVICES - A method of operating a mobile electronic device includes detecting at least one other mobile electronic device within a predetermined distance of the mobile electronic device, and determining a spatial relationship of the at least one other mobile electronic device relative to the mobile electronic device. An ad hoc wireless connection is established with the at least one other mobile electronic device based on the determined spatial relationship. Data may be transmitted to and/or received from the at least one other mobile electronic device over the ad hoc wireless connection based on the determined spatial relationship. Related systems, devices, and computer program products are also discussed. | 01-13-2011 |
20110009063 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING A HIGH FREQUENCY PHY LAYER FOR HIGH SPEED DATA TRANSMISSION BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - A single communication stack may be utilized to setup a data transmission session between wireless devices. A primary physical layer corresponding to the single communication stack may be utilized by the wireless devices to perform discovery, pairing, and security setup operations when setting the data transmission session. A secondary physical layer may be utilized to perform high speed data transmission. The secondary physical layer may be integrated or managed via the single communication stack corresponding to the primary physical layer, and applications running on top of the single communication stack may utilize the secondary physical layer transparently. A portion of the transmitted data may be multiplexed onto other secondary physical layers that may be available to the wireless devices. Alternatively, transmission of data may comprise switching among available secondary physical layers. The primary physical layer may be utilized during data transmission to continually monitor and/or manage the data transmission. | 01-13-2011 |
20110014866 | System and Method for Radio Antenna Sharing in an Information Handling System - An information handling system includes a processing system with a radio output, another processing system with a radio output, and a radio selector operable to couple an antenna to a selected one of the radios. A radio selector board includes a radio, a selector switch with an input terminal coupled to the radio, another input terminal coupleable to another radio, a control input coupleable to a control module, and an output coupleable to an antenna. In response to a control signal from the control module, the selector switch connects the first radio to the antenna, and in response to another control signal, the selector switch connects the other radio to the antenna. | 01-20-2011 |
20110014867 | WIRELESS ELECTRONIC DEVICE REMOTE CONTROLLER - The present invention relates to a wireless electronic device remote controller, comprises: a hand-held wireless communication device in which at least one display device, a first wireless communication module and a second wireless communication module are installed, wherein the first wireless communication modules is able to be connected to a base station for a communication purpose; and a power adapter having communication function, coupled to an electronic device, the power adapter having communication function at least includes a third wireless communication module that receives commands from the second wireless communication module to determine whether supply power to the electronic device. | 01-20-2011 |
20110014868 | METHOD FOR RECOGNIZING A MODULE, APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING THE SAME - An apparatus for recognizing a module and method thereof are disclosed. The present invention includes querying whether a first short-range communication module of a correspondent device exists by a first short-range communication scheme, if the first short-range communication module exists, receiving one of vendor information and minor device information from the correspondent device, and checking whether a second short-range communication module of the correspondent device exists based on one of the vendor information and the minor device information. | 01-20-2011 |
20110014869 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD OF COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - To enable a user to easily approximate a portable information device to a position where the portable information device should be approximated so as to cause the portable information device and a communication apparatus to communicate with each other by wireless communication, there is provided a control method for controlling the communication apparatus, comprising: performing data transfer between the communication apparatus and the portable information device by the wireless communication through a communication unit; acquiring identification information for identifying the portable information device; and displaying position information which indicates the position where the portable information device should be approximated to the communication apparatus so that the portable information device identified by the acquired identification information and the communication unit perform the data transfer by the wireless communication. | 01-20-2011 |
20110014870 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND ADAPTER FOR CONNECTING A PLURALITY OF DEVICES - There is provided a method for connecting a first device and a second device. An exemplary method comprises establishing a first connection between the first device and the second device via a first communication channel. Configuration data may be exchanged between the first device and the second device via the first connection. Using the configuration data, a second connection may be set up between the first device and the second device via a second communication channel. | 01-20-2011 |
20110014871 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND SOUND VOLUME CONTROL METHOD - A wireless communication terminal comprising a network communication unit, short distance wireless communication unit, an input unit and a control unit. The network communication unit transmits radio signals to communication network via a base station. The short distance wireless communication unit transmits radio signals to and from an external device. The short distance wireless communication unit establishes a voice link between the wireless communication terminal and the external device to transmit sound data. The input unit inputs a volume control instruction. The control unit controls the short distance wireless communication unit to send a signal based on the volume control instruction if the voice channel is established between the wireless communication terminal and the external device. | 01-20-2011 |
20110021142 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A DUAL-MODE BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY DEVICE - A dual-mode BLE device identifies idle intervals within Bluetooth BR/EDR traffic communications. The identified idle intervals are used by the dual-mode BLE device to concurrently perform various BLE activities. For example, advertising packet transmissions, advertising packet scanning, connection setup, and/or data packet communication may be concurrently performed within identified idle intervals within the Bluetooth BR/EDR traffic communications. Packet transmission timing, advertising interval, scan window, and/or packet size are determined based on the identified idle intervals within the Bluetooth BR/EDR traffic communications. A scan window is adjusted based on timing of expected advertising transmissions and/or advertising interval(s) for saving power. BLE packets and Bluetooth BR/EDR packets may be detected in a single advertising channel. Maximal payload size is set based on the identified idle intervals within Bluetooth BR/EDR traffic communications. As a slave, the dual-mode BLE device updates connection parameters based on the identified idle intervals within Bluetooth BR/EDR traffic communications. | 01-27-2011 |
20110021143 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REDUCING BURDEN ON A BLUETOOTH LOW POWER END-POINT DEVICE - A relay host wireless device is paired with a target host wireless device over a secure link. The relay host wireless device is operable to acquire link security information, which is associated with a link between the target host wireless device and a wireless end-point device, from the target host wireless device. The relay host wireless device is enabled to establish a link with the target host wireless device by faking its identity as an assumed identity of the target host wireless device. The acquired link security information is applied to the established link. The relay host wireless device is enabled to relay content between the target host wireless device and the wireless end-point device via the established fake link using said assumed identity of the target host wireless device and the secure link between the relay host wireless device and the target host wireless device, successively. | 01-27-2011 |
20110021144 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TESTING BLUETOOTH FUNCTION OF ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method is used for a testing device to test the Bluetooth function of an electronic device and comprises the following steps. The testing device receives a password from the electronic device. The password is predetermined by the electronic device, and a first file is stored in the electronic device. The testing device sends the received password to the electronic device. The testing device receives the first file from the electronic device and saves as a second file. A third file is stored in the testing device. The testing device judges whether the second file is same as the third file. | 01-27-2011 |
20110021145 | System and method for targeting data processing system(s) with data - Provided is a system and method for targeting data processing system(s) with data by aiming a sending data processing system at a receiving data processing system and performing a shoot action. In a preferred embodiment, aiming information is transmitted from the sending data processing system to receiving data processing systems in the vicinity for determining whether or not a receiving data processing system was targeted by the sending data processing system, for example to direct data. Aiming information includes location information for determining a starting location of the shoot action, directional and posture information for determining a target of the shoot action, distance information for determining a distance of the shoot action, target size for determining the inclusion of receiving data processing system(s) targeted by the shoot action, and perhaps other shooting data to further qualify the shoot action. For example, a user physically points (aims) his mobile data processing system at another user's mobile data processing system and shoots it for pulling data from it, pushing data to it, or subsequently interacting with it. Permissions and configurations can govern what types of data may be pulled or pushed. In another example, a user physically aims his mobile data processing system at another data processing system and shoots it in order to interact with it. Wave forms which are not controllably aimed by nature (radio waves, sound waves, etc) can be accurately aimed. | 01-27-2011 |
20110021146 | RADIO ACCESS CONTROL UTILIZING QUALITY OF SERVICE ACCESS WINDOWS - A system for managing the operation of a plurality of radio modules ( | 01-27-2011 |
20110021147 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING CONNECTIVITY STATUS OF SHORT RANGE WIRELESS DEVICES - A method and apparatus for generating alerts once connectivity to a designated short range wireless (SRW) device is lost. Once connectivity is lost, an alert is sent to a master device (such as a mobile phone) notifying the master device user that connectivity to the designated SRW device has been lost. The master device user designates one or more paired SRW devices from a list of all paired SRW devices registered on the master device. For each SRW device of interest, a default or preferred alert method is chosen. The SRW devices of interest and their associated alert methods are saved in a file that resides either on the master device or a shared host device. A background process runs on the master or host device so as to read and parse the user's preferences and, accordingly, generates and sends alerts. For devices that support global system events and that expose SRW connectivity events, the background process intercepts those events associated with SRW devices of interest and generates alerts accordingly. For devices that do not support global system events or do not expose SRW connectivity events, the background process polls the connectivity with each SRW device of interest based on a pre-determined interval. If polling fails, indicating a lost connection, the appropriate alerts are triggered. | 01-27-2011 |
20110021148 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication device for communicating with an external device using a human body as a signal transmission path, includes an electric field strength measuring unit configured to measure a noise level from a detected received electric field strength at the time of no signal after the received electric field strength is detected by the communication device when a transmission signal to be output to the external device is absent, a transmission output determination unit configured to determine an output level of the transmission signal to be transmitted to the external device on the basis of the measured noise level, and an output execution unit configured to output a transmission signal of the determined output level to the external device. | 01-27-2011 |
20110021149 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION STATION, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND DEDICATED-SHORT-RANGE-COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A mobile communication station is provided with a type information registration unit ( | 01-27-2011 |
20110021150 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING NETWORK CONNECTIONS BETWEEN STATIONARY TERMINALS AND REMOTE DEVICES THROUGH MOBILE DEVICES - A technique is provided for a seamless and transparent handoff from a user's mobile device to the user's stationary terminal of a network address of a remote device for the purpose of establishing a direct communication channel between the stationary terminal and a remote device, where the remote device first contacted the user's mobile device to initiate communications with the user. | 01-27-2011 |
20110021151 | MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE, INFORMATION DELIVERY DEVICE, INFORMATION DELIVERY SYSTEM, AND INFORMATION DELIVERY METHOD - Provided is an information distribution system having a simple configuration and capable of selecting information without inconvenience to the user. A mobile terminal device ( | 01-27-2011 |
20110028091 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NEAR-FIELD WIRELESS DEVICE PAIRING - A first communication device (e.g., a radio) and a second communication device (e.g., an accessory) implement a wireless device pairing procedure to exchange numerical credentials so that the devices can subsequently form a link for communications using electromagnetic radio signals. The accessory transmits a beacon comprises a pairing request. Upon a user bringing the radio and accessory in close enough proximity, the radio receives the beacon using near-field apparatus included in the radio. In response to receiving the beacon, the radio initiates a pairing procedure, wherein the pairing procedure comprises a data exchange between the radio and accessory, and wherein the beacon and the data exchange comprise a non-propagating radio signal generated using the near-field apparatus. Upon completing the pairing procedure, the radio forms a link with the accessory to communicate using propagating electromagnetic radio signals. | 02-03-2011 |
20110028092 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication device includes a proximity wireless communication antenna for contactless proximity wireless communication with a counterpart instrument antenna in proximity, a first wireless communication processing unit to conduct contactless proximity wireless communication using the proximity wireless communication antenna, a second wireless communication processing unit to conduct wireless communication in a wireless communication format different from that of the first processing unit, a ground potential to be disposed in a surrounding area of the proximity wireless communication antenna and to be connected to a counterpart instrument ground potential when the instrument is in proximity, a detection unit to detect that the counterpart instrument is connected while allowing contactless proximity wireless communication, and a control unit to restrict wireless communication with the second processing unit when the detection unit detects connection and to remove the restriction after connected to the counterpart instrument ground potential with the ground potential during the restriction. | 02-03-2011 |
20110028093 | Bluetooth Proximity Detection System and Method of Interacting With One or More Bluetooth Devices - Some embodiments teach an apparatus for determining a proximity of one or more first Bluetooth devices. The apparatus can include: (a) at least one Bluetooth base station with (1) a Bluetooth transmitter configured to transmit one or more service discovery requests to the one or more first Bluetooth devices; and (2) a Bluetooth receiver configured to receive one or more responses from the one or more first Bluetooth devices to the one or more service discovery requests; and (b) a computational module configured to run on one or more processors and further configured to determine one or more approximate distances between the at least one Bluetooth base station and the one or more first Bluetooth devices based on the one or more responses from the one or more first Bluetooth devices. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 02-03-2011 |
20110028094 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND DEVICE REGISTRATION METHOD - According to one embodiment, a storage module stores device information of a counterpart device generated by an authentication process required for wireless communication, a registration information control module registers location information as either of first location information of a location where the device information of the counterpart device will be stored after termination of wireless communication with the counterpart device and second location information of a location where the device information will not be stored after termination of the wireless communication, and a wireless communication control module receives location information of the wireless communication device at the time of execution of the wireless communication, determines whether the received location information coincides with the first location information or not, and executes an authentication process by use of the device information storied in the storage module to enable the wireless communication when the received location information coincides with the first location information. | 02-03-2011 |
20110028095 | RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND DEVICE START METHOD - Provided is a user-friendly radio communication terminal on which a plurality of radio communication devices are mounted. The radio communication terminal includes a request data information holding unit ( | 02-03-2011 |
20110028096 | DATA RECEIVING APPARATUS, DATA TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME AND PROGRAM - The present invention enables a data obtaining apparatus to select data to be transferred without maintaining a communication connection through close-proximity wireless communication. Accordingly, when a digital camera is communicatively connected to an external device through close-proximity wireless communication, a central processor of the digital camera obtains, from the external device, index information indicating a list of data stored in the external device. Next, the central processor terminates the communication connection to the external device and receives a designation of data to be transferred via an operation unit based on the index information. After having designated data to be transferred, an image processing unit of the digital camera obtains designated data from the external device when the camera is communicatively reconnected to the external device through close-proximity wireless communication. | 02-03-2011 |
20110034125 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING PUSH-TO-TALK STATE TO A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Apparatus, which has a multilayer protocol stack for processing incoming messages, determines PTT state from messages received from a peripheral over a wireless serial communication channel. The apparatus: receives, from the peripheral, a sequence of messages comprising a plurality of data messages (e.g., RFCOMM messages), wherein each of the data messages provides an indication of a PTT state for the apparatus, and wherein the sequence of data messages is received over a short range wireless data path for exchanging priority data that comprises a wireless serial communication channel and that is different from a short range wireless data path for exchanging non-priority data. A pattern detector in the apparatus performs a pattern matching process, within the first two layers of the multilayer protocol stack, to determine the PTT state indicated by each of the data messages and sets the apparatus to have the determined PTT states. | 02-10-2011 |
20110034126 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRIORITY SIGNALING OVER A WIRELESS SERIAL COMMUNICATION CHANNEL - A communication device performs a method for establishing a fast path for signaling priority data. The method includes: establishing a first short range wireless data path to a second communication device for exchanging non-priority data; and establishes a second autonomous short range wireless data path to the second communication device, for exchanging priority data, wherein the second short range wireless data path comprises a wireless serial communication channel such as a radio frequency communication Bluetooth (RFCOMM) channel. An application layer in an upper layer stack of the communication device establishes both the first and the second short range wireless data paths. Non-priority data communicated to the second communication device along the first short range wireless data path is processed by the application layer. However, priority data communicated to the second communication device along the second short range wireless data path bypasses the application layer. | 02-10-2011 |
20110034127 | SETTING UP A DIRECT LINK IN A PEER TO PEER WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for setting up a direct link between a first client station and a second client station is described. The method is performed by the first client station. The first client station communicates with a group owner (GO) via a first peer to peer (P2P) wireless link. Whether to set up a tunneled direct link setup (TDLS) direct link between the first client station and the second client station is determined. The TDLS direct link between the first client station and the second client station is set up. The first client station then communicates directly with the second client station via the TDLS direct link. | 02-10-2011 |
20110045770 | Apparatus and Method for Providing Wireless Communication and Global Positioning For A Wireless Computer Mouse - Wireless computer mouse operation may be provided by receiving a user detection signal from a sensor of the wireless computer mouse to determine the presence of a user. In one embodiment, an operation mode of the wireless computer mouse may be determined by a controller based, at least in part, on the user detection signal. Thereafter, the controller can enable at least one of a short range wireless communication module and a global positioning receiver of the wireless computer mouse based on the operation mode determined by the controller. | 02-24-2011 |
20110045771 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MITIGATING THE EFFECTS OF INTERFERERS WHILE PERFORMING CONDITIONAL DEVICE SCAN - A method, a personal area network device operating as a slave, and a short range communications device operating as a slave are disclosed. A data storage | 02-24-2011 |
20110045772 | TRIGGERING CONTROL DEVICE AND METHOD THEREOF - A triggering control device for enabling a data collection host assembled on it to execute a corresponding function action comprises a Bluetooth communication module, a control module, a power supply module and a housing containing the foregoing components. The Bluetooth communication module for communicating the triggering control device is controlled by the control module to drive the Bluetooth communication module to output a triggering signal, and the data collection host is enabled while receiving the triggering signal. Thereby, the triggering control device enables the data collection host to proceed a functional action by the Bluetooth communication module, so as to solve the contact fault or interference problem of the prior art. | 02-24-2011 |
20110045773 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING COOPERATIVE FUNCTION AUTOMATICALLY AND DEVICE USING THE SAME - A method for performing a cooperative function and a device thereof are provided. It is determined whether another device is in a surrounding area of a device. When it is determined that the other device is in the surrounding area, the cooperative function is performed by the device with the other device according to a location of the other device. Accordingly, the cooperative function may be performed automatically if devices are in adjacent areas without a user's command. | 02-24-2011 |
20110045774 | DATA OUTPUT APPARATUS, METHOD OF CONTROLLING SAME AND OUTPUT SYSTEM - In an image output apparatus for outputting an image supplied from an image supply apparatus, the image supply apparatus and the image output apparatus are connected wirelessly and send and receive data. The state of the wireless connection is determined and the image to be output is changed in accordance with the determined state of the connection. | 02-24-2011 |
20110053505 | Portable distress device with a bluetooth signal - A portable distress device with a Bluetooth signal includes a control unit, a power unit, a Bluetooth signal control module, and an I/O control unit. When the I/O control unit activates an input signal, the control unit first controls the Bluetooth signal control module and the I/O control unit to issue an alarm and a distress signal. In a fixed time after activating the distress signal, without releasing from a distress condition, a low frequency heart beat simulator will be activated automatically, to generate sound like a human heart beat. The Bluetooth signal control module contains a Bluetooth signal transmitter which may or may not require a pair matching, enabling any product, such as a notebook computer, a cellular phone, and a PDA, which is equipped with a device for receiving the Bluetooth signal, to be used as a life searching receiver to proceed with the rescue. | 03-03-2011 |
20110053506 | Methods and Devices for Controlling Particular User Interface Functions of a Mobile Communication Device in a Vehicle - Disclosed are methods and devices for controlling particular user interface functions of a mobile communication device when the device is used by a driver of a moving vehicle. A disclosed method includes determining if the mobile communication device is within a predetermined proximity to the driver's seat. The method further includes determining if the mobile communication device is moving at a predetermined speed or acceleration. When those conditions are met, the method includes substantially disabling particular user interface functions of the mobile communication device. Particular user interface functions that may be disabled or inhibited may include, for example, at least one of a display function, a keypad function or a touchscreen function. In this way, a driver may not be able to utilize one or more particular user interface functions while driving. | 03-03-2011 |
20110053507 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION PERFORMANCE IN MOBILE TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method for maintaining a communication connection by increasing a transmission bandwidth of voice data and changing a compression rate depending on a Bluetooth communication state to transmit voice data in order to improve Bluetooth communication performance are provided. The apparatus includes a device connector. The device connector increases a transmission bandwidth of voice data by transmitting voice data through an Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link during data transmission when transmitting voice data via a Bluetooth apparatus. | 03-03-2011 |
20110053508 | DATA SUPPLYING APPARATUS, DATA PROCESSING APPARATUS AND DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A data supplying apparatus detects a change in the status of the wireless connection established with an external apparatus. When the status of the wireless connection is restored after a change has been detected in the status of the wireless connection, the data supplying apparatus transmits, to the external apparatus, a different data file from the previous data file transmitted by the wireless connection before restoration of the connection. | 03-03-2011 |
20110059697 | WIRELESS HEADSET SYSTEM FOR THE AUTOMOBILE - A wireless headset system (and method) for connection to a gateway such as a mobile cellular phone that includes a dock assembly and a wireless headset. The dock assembly includes a presence sensor, a first docking connector, and a circuit for sending a connection signal to the first docking connector in response to a triggering of the presence sensor. The headset includes a second docking connector for releasably connecting with the first docking connector, and connection circuitry for initiating a wireless connection with the gateway (e.g. mobile cellular phone) in response to receiving the connection signal via the first and second docking connectors. The dock assembly further includes a power connector for receiving electrical power (e.g. from a car cigarette lighter connector) and for supplying the electrical power through the first and second docking connectors and to a battery in the wireless headset. | 03-10-2011 |
20110065387 | ANTENNA APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus includes a coupler for first wireless communication and a loop antenna for second wireless communication. The coupler is electrically asymmetrical, and arranged in such a manner that a feed point substantially coincides with a center position of the second wireless communication. | 03-17-2011 |
20110065388 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND MEDIUM PROCESSING APPARATUS - A wireless communication device according to embodiments includes a position detection unit configured to detect the position of the wireless communication medium in a moving path, and a control unit configured to control communication based on the detection signal from the position detection unit. | 03-17-2011 |
20110065389 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication apparatus comprises a selection module to select an application from applications to be run on the apparatus, a movement information generation module to generate movement information indicating positional change of the apparatus by detecting a position of the apparatus, a target selection module to select a counterpart wireless communication apparatus as a connection target from other apparatuses which are wirelessly connectable with the apparatus by referring to a type of the application selected by the selection module and the movement information generated by the movement information generation module, and a wireless communication module wirelessly transmits data handled by the application to the counterpart wireless communication apparatus selected by the target selection module. | 03-17-2011 |
20110070835 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EFFECTING CONTEXT-COGNIZANT MEDICAL REMINDERS FOR A PATIENT - A system for effecting context-cognizant medical reminders for a patient; the system including: (a) at least one sensor unit situated proximately with the patient; the at least one sensor unit sensing and indicating at least one aspect of a personal context of the patient; (b) at least one long-range communication unit configured for wireless communication with a remote patient care monitoring facility via a wireless communication network; and (c) at least one short-range communication unit communicatingly coupled with the at least one sensor unit and with the at least one long-range communication unit; the at least one short-range communication unit and the at least one long-range communication unit cooperating to convey information from the at least one sensor unit to the remote patient care monitoring facility regarding the personal context of the patient. | 03-24-2011 |
20110070836 | METHOD FOR OPERATING MULTI-TYPE BEACONS - Provided is a method for operating multi-type beacons by a first terminal connected with at least one second terminal through short-range communication. The method includes checking at least one variable related to the second terminal, allocating one selected from a plurality of beacons having different characteristics to the second terminal, taking into account the checked variable, and transmitting the beacon allocated to the second terminal. | 03-24-2011 |
20110076944 | Wireless communication device, wireles transmission system and wireless transmission method - Disclosed herein is a wireless communication device, including: a plurality of communication units for transmission adapted to modulate and transmit a transmission subject signal; the communication units for transmission including a communication unit or units for transmission which adopt a method which modulates the amplitude and a communication unit or units for transmission which adopt a modulation method which modulates at least the phase or the frequency and requires transmission power lower than that of the method which modulates the amplitude. | 03-31-2011 |
20110076945 | Methods for Controlling a Main Clock Source Shared Between Different Wireless Communication Modules and Apparatuses Using the Same - A wireless communications module coexisting with a wireless telephony communications module includes a radio frequency (RF) module, a MODEM, a clock generator and distributor and a system control logic. The system control logic issues an external interrupt (EINT) signal to the wireless telephony communications module for activating a clock source via the wireless telephony communications module. When the clock source is activated, the clock generator and distributor receives a reference clock from the activated clock source, converts the reference clock into one or more internal clocks and drives the internal clock or clocks to the RF module and the MODEM for synchronization therebetween. | 03-31-2011 |
20110076946 | Method, mobile terminal, transponder device and system for monitoring an object with respect to the mobile terminal - A system for monitoring an object includes a transponder device associated with the object and an acceleration sensor operable to provide an acceleration signal. The transponder device is operable to emit a radio signal based on the acceleration signal. A mobile terminal having a short range radio interface and a secondary radio interface, comprising a wireless network interface, is operable to communicate with the transponder device using the short range radio interface. The mobile terminal is operable to receive the radio signal so as to indicate that the object is present within a coverage area defined by the short range radio interface. The mobile terminal is operable to emit a first alert signal when the radio signal is not received by the mobile terminal within a first predetermined time interval. The transponder device is operable to repeatedly emit the radio signal during a second predetermined time interval when the radio signal is not received by the mobile terminal within the first predetermined time interval. The mobile terminal is operable to emit a second alert signal and communicate with a party of a communication network when the radio signal is not received by the mobile terminal within the second predetermined time interval. | 03-31-2011 |
20110076947 | INTEGRATED WIRELESS TRANSCEIVER AND AUDIO PROCESSOR - Circuits, methods, and apparatus incorporate both a wireless physical interface and audio processing unit on a single integrated circuit. The wireless physical interface may include a receiver, transmitter, or a complete transceiver. The audio processing unit is typically in communication with both the wireless interface and one or more wired physical interfaces. The integrated circuit may be as simple as a wireless physical interface and audio processing unit, or it may include other circuits such as graphics processors, networking interfaces, memories, or other circuits. | 03-31-2011 |
20110076948 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMIC FORMATION OF A COMMUNICATION NETWORK USING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A short-range wireless communication network may be established by direct communication between two or more wireless communication devices. A conventional cellular telephone includes an integrated short-range transceiver. The short-range transceivers of multiple wireless communication devices can be coupled together to form a short-range communication network without utilizing any wireless communication network supported by wireless service providers. The short-range communication network may be extended as additional devices come within range or consolidated as wireless communication devices leave the communication range. The short-range communication network is built upon the proximity of wireless communication devices with each other. Data is disseminated between the wireless communication devices using a data message synchronization process. Messages may also be carried from one wireless network to another as the communication devices are carried by individuals. | 03-31-2011 |
20110076949 | LOCATION SYSTEM FOR BLUETOOTH ENABLED DEVICES - A method, apparatus, and system for tracking and locating Bluetooth enabled devices is described. A network of Bluetooth sniffers can be used to rapidly locate lost devices and their owners. Wearable child devices maintain low power contact with parent devices until such time as a signal limit is reached, at which point the parent devices alarm. An optional network of fixed sniffing devices can be used to coordinate a search for lost child devices once an alert is issued to the system. | 03-31-2011 |
20110081858 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCED COEXISTENCE ALGORITHMS IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus for mitigating the effects of interference between multiple air interfaces located on an electronic device. In one embodiment, the air interfaces include a WLAN interface and PAN (e.g., Bluetooth) interface, and information such as Receiver Signal Strength Index (RSSI) as well as system noise level information are used in order to intelligently execute interference mitigation methodologies, including the selective application of modified frequency selection, variation of transmitter power, and/or change of operating mode (e.g., from multiple-in multiple-out (MIMO) to single-in, single-out (SISO)) so as to reduce isolation requirements between the interfaces. These methods and apparatus are particularly well suited to use cases where the WLAN interface is operating with high data transmission rates. Business methods associated with the foregoing technology are also described. | 04-07-2011 |
20110081859 | MOBILE TERMINAL CAPABLE OF BEING CONNECTED TO AUDIO OUTPUT DEVICE USING SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE OPERATION OF THE MOBILE TERMINAL - A mobile terminal and a method of controlling the operation of the mobile terminal are provided. The method includes receiving a first key signal for controlling a first profile and an audio playback operation from an audio output device, the first profile being a profile for playing audio data; connecting the mobile terminal to the audio output device using the first profile; and suspending the processing of a command corresponding to the first key signal for a predetermined amount of time. Therefore, it is possible to suspend the processing of a command for a predetermined amount of time during the connection of the mobile terminal to the audio output device and thus to prevent an unwanted operation from being performed. | 04-07-2011 |
20110086592 | METHOD FOR DISPLAYING CALENDAR DATA - A method and portable terminal for displaying calendar data in by indicating an owner of the calendar data is provided. The method includes generating, by a portable terminal, calendar data where IDentification (ID) information of the portable terminal is stored, transmitting, by the portable terminal, the generated calendar data to a partner portable terminal, and indicating that the displayed calendar data is calendar data of a user of the portable terminal by using the ID information of the portable terminal, when displaying the transmitted calendar data in the partner portable terminal. | 04-14-2011 |
20110092156 | Short Range FM Modulator/Transmitter and System Incorporating Same - A short range radio transmitter device includes a radio signal modulator and transmitter, a receiver and a controller coupled to the receiver. The controller and receiver operate to examine a frequency spectrum to select a transmission frequency for the radio signal modulator and transmitter. A receiver system for use with the transmitter includes a data channel service enabled receiver and a controller. The controller of the receiver system automatically tunes the data channel service enabled receiver to a frequency identified in a data channel service component of a received signal. | 04-21-2011 |
20110092157 | Device Wearing Status Determination Using RSSI - Methods and apparatuses for determining the wearing status of body worn devices are disclosed. In one example, RSSI values are processed to identify the wearing status of a body worn device. | 04-21-2011 |
20110092158 | PORTABLE SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND RELATED METHOD - A portable satellite data communication device that provides data communication capabilities to cellular only smartphone and similar device globally. The portable satellite data communication device is equipped with a short range wireless transceiver such as Bluetooth for communication with the smartphone and a satellite data transceiver for communication with the satellite. The device acts as network bridge between the smartphone and the satellite network. Using that device allows smartphone users to keep sending and receiving data messages like emails anywhere in the world even if there is no cellular coverage. The portable satellite data communication device also has built-in functionalities for monitoring the satellite signal and the arrival of new messages at the satellite gateway. | 04-21-2011 |
20110092159 | DISABLING OF SERVICES ON A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method, a system, and a computer program product for operating a communication device. A location information of a communication device is received. Based on the location information of the communication device, it is determined whether the communication device and another communication device are co-located. Based on the determination, operation of the communication device is controlled. | 04-21-2011 |
20110097997 | Transmission Method and Related Apparatus for Reducing Radio Resource Overhead - The present invention provides a transmission method for reducing radio resource overhead for a slave device of the Bluetooth system. The transmission method includes the steps of setting an active time slot window on a communication time comprising at least a reception time slot and transforming the reception time slots in the active time slot window into transmission time slots. | 04-28-2011 |
20110097998 | System and methods for enhancing coexistence efficiency for multi-radio terminals - A method of scheduling transmitting and receiving communication slots for co-located radio devices is provided. A Bluetooth (BT) device first synchronizes its communication time slots with a co-located radio module, and then obtains the traffic pattern of the co-located radio module. Based on the traffic pattern, the BT device selectively skips one or more TX or RX time slots to avoid data transmission or reception in certain time slots and thereby reducing interference with the co-located radio module. In addition, the BT device generates a co-located coexistence (CLC) bitmap and transmits the CLC bitmap to its peer BT device such that the peer BT device can also skip data transmission or reception in certain time slots affected by the co-located radio module. The skipped time slots are disabled for TX or RX operation to prevent interference and to achieve more energy saving. | 04-28-2011 |
20110097999 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTISESSION COMMUNICATION USING MULTIPLE PHYSICAL (PHY) LAYERS - A wireless device comprising a single communication stack accessing a corresponding radio interface accessed via a corresponding physical layer, may utilize a plurality of communication sessions to perform a plurality of applications simultaneously. The corresponding radio interface may be utilized to perform initial connectivity and/or control functionality associate with each of the communication sessions; whereas data communication during the communication sessions may be performed utilizing one or more other radio interfaces supporting high speed data standards, which may also be accessed by the single communication stack, using corresponding other PHY and/or MAC layers. The connectivity and/or control functionality may comprise discovery, pairing, and/or initial connection. The plurality of high speed data standard may comprise WLAN, ultra-wideband (UWB), and/or 60 GHz PHY and/or PHY/MAC layers. Two or more of the communication sessions may contemporaneously utilize different PHY and/or PHY/MAC layers pertaining to the same high speed data standard. | 04-28-2011 |
20110098000 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING BLUETOOTH-ENABLED DEVICES TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER - An interface which effects communication between first and second systems and includes a first arrangement for communicating with the first system using a first protocol and a second arrangement for communicating with the second system using a second protocol. At least one of the arrangements includes a mechanism for effecting wireless communication. In accordance with the invention, a third arrangement is included for translating data received from the first system in accordance with the first protocol into data adapted for the second system in accordance with the second protocol. In the illustrative embodiment, the inventive interface further includes an arrangement for translating data received from the second system in accordance with the second protocol into data adapted for the first system in accordance with the first protocol. In the illustrative embodiment, the second system is a Personal Computer, the first system is a peripheral adapted to be connected to the computer, the first protocol is a Bluetooth protocol and the second protocol is a Universal Serial Bus (USB) protocol. In the illustrative embodiment, the inventive interface leverages Universal Serial Bus technology, particularly “plug and play” capability, to simplify the installation and use of Bluetooth-enabled peripherals. | 04-28-2011 |
20110098001 | SHORT RANGE RF MONITORING SYSTEM - A wireless short range radio-frequency master device adapted to create and maintain a portable private network of wireless short range radio-frequency slave devices wherein the master device is configured to detect and register suitable slave devices for a network, and is capable of determining the proximity of any registered slave device with respect to the master device in use, the master device further being adapted to enable a user to define two or more groups of registered slave devices selected from the total number of registered slave devices and to enable a user to select a defined group of such registered slave devices as an active group, thereby forming an active portable private network of wireless short range radio frequency devices comprising the master device and selected registered slave devices within the selected group. | 04-28-2011 |
20110105023 | ADAPTIVE ANTENNA TUNING SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Embodiments include antenna tuning systems and methods of tuning an antenna of a wireless device with an antenna, a circuit with at least one tunable component, and a processing system. The processing system determines tuning selection inputs during a communication session. Based on the tuning selection inputs, the processing system determines one or more component values for one or more tunable components. In an embodiment, the component value(s) are determined from a set of pre-defined component values. The tunable component(s) are controlled to have the determined component value(s). The circuit may be an impedance matching circuit that includes at least one tunable reactive component. Alternatively, the circuit may be an antenna tuning circuit that includes at least one variable component. In an embodiment, both an impedance matching circuit and an antenna tuning circuit may be implemented, with each type of circuit having one or more tunable components. | 05-05-2011 |
20110105024 | TRANSPORT INDEPENDENT SERVICE DISCOVERY - A system for disseminating resource (e.g., service) availability information throughout a group of wireless-enabled apparatuses. For example, one or more apparatuses may act as service information holders configured to maintain information regarding their own services, as well as about services that are available from other apparatuses that were previously in communication with the service information holding apparatuses. As a result, information regarding available resources in multiple apparatuses may be obtained from a single apparatus via a single wireless communication protocol, regardless of whether the service is actually accessible via the wireless communication protocol, or even available from the apparatus that is performing the advertising. | 05-05-2011 |
20110105025 | ADAPTIVE TUNING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A COMBO WIRELESS SYSTEM - An adaptive tuning method comprises the steps of: obtaining a statistical result; determining whether an adaptive tuning procedure is to be performed in accordance with the statistical result; obtaining reference information of the first wireless module; and performing the adaptive tuning procedure in accordance with the reference information. | 05-05-2011 |
20110105026 | COMBO WIRELESS SYSTEM AND METHOD USING THE SAME - A combo wireless system comprises a Bluetooth module, a wireless fidelity (WiFi) module, a single pole triple throw (SP3T) switch and an antenna. The antenna is utilized to transmit/receive Bluetooth signals for the Bluetooth module and to transmit/receive WiFi signals for the WiFi module. The SP3T switch is coupled between the antenna, the Bluetooth module and the WiFi module. The SP3T switch is controlled to select a path for the Bluetooth module to transmit/receive Bluetooth signals through the antenna, to select another path for the WiFi module to transmit WiFi signals through the antenna or to select another path for the WiFi module to receive the WiFi signals through the antenna. | 05-05-2011 |
20110105027 | BLUETOOTH INTRODUCTION SEQUENCE THAT REPLACES FREQUENCIES UNUSABLE DUE TO OTHER WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY CO-RESIDENT ON A BLUETOOTH-CAPABLE DEVICE - Interference from other wireless technology co-resident on a Bluetooth-capable device may render one or more Bluetooth frequencies unusable for a Bluetooth introduction sequence. In this case, one or more usable frequencies may be substituted for the one or more unusable frequencies to permit the introduction sequence to proceed. The one or more usable frequencies may be selected from a known set of usable frequencies in the current Bluetooth frequency train. Alternatively, a frequency re-mapping process may be used to select the one or more usable frequencies from the current Bluetooth frequency train. | 05-05-2011 |
20110105028 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR DETERMINING A COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL - A mobile terminal and method for communicating through an optimum communication protocol selected from among a plurality of communication protocols. The mobile terminal includes a communication unit which communicates with a counterpart mobile terminal by a plurality of communication protocols in a network; a signal processor which processes a signal transmitted from or received by the communication unit; a display unit which displays thereon a processed signal; and a controller which controls the communication unit to communicate with the counterpart mobile terminal by an optimum communication protocol among the plurality of communication protocols. | 05-05-2011 |
20110105029 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, SOFTWARE ACQUIRING METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication terminal apparatus including a second apparatus having a communication function and a first apparatus connectable to the second apparatus. The communication terminal apparatus includes an external communication function unit that is disposed in the second apparatus and acquires software, which is executable in the first apparatus, from an outside, a second memory that is disposed in the second apparatus and stores the software which is acquired, a first memory that is disposed in the first apparatus, and storage unit that is disposed in the first apparatus and stores the software read out from the second memory to the first memory according to a connection between the first apparatus and the second apparatus. | 05-05-2011 |
20110105030 | DATA TRANSFER SYSTEM, DATA ACQUISITION DEVICE, DATA ACQUISITION METHOD, DATA ACCUMULATION DEVICE, DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND PROGRAM FOR THE SAME - A data acquisition device includes a wireless communication unit for performing wireless communication of data with a data accumulation device in which data is accumulated, a type registration unit wherein data types of necessary data are registered beforehand, a type comparison unit for comparing the data type of data received via the wireless communication unit with data types registered in the type registration unit, a data extracting unit for extracting only data of which the data type matches, and a data holding unit for holding the extracted data. | 05-05-2011 |
20110111696 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING, SHARING AND DISPLAYING ELECTRONIC CONTENT - The present disclosure provides a device, system and method to present electronic content on a first mobile electronic device in communication and configured to receive electronic content from a second electronic device. | 05-12-2011 |
20110111697 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING, SHARING AND DISPLAYING ELECTRONIC CONTENT - The present disclosure provides a device, system and method to present electronic content on a first mobile electronic device in communication and configured to receive electronic content from a second electronic device. | 05-12-2011 |
20110111698 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND ACCESS CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic apparatus includes a storage device, a communication module, a connection establishing module, and a storage area information transmitter. The communication module executes close proximity wireless transfer. The connection establishing module exchanges a unique identifier of the communication module and a unique identifier of an external device between the communication module and the external device which are in a close proximity state, and establishes connection between the communication module and the external device. The storage area information transmitter specifies a storage area in the storage device which can be provided to the external device based on the unique identifier of the external device, and transmits storage area information, which includes information of a logical hierarchical structure set in the specified storage area, to the external device by the close proximity wireless transfer. | 05-12-2011 |
20110111699 | Portable Device Having Sterio-image Capturing Module - A method for a portable communication device to play stereo image, comprising providing the portable communication device with a stereo image capture module, wherein the portable communication device includes a control unit; a first communication module coupled to the control unit; a display coupled to the control unit; the stereo image capture module being coupled to the control unit to facilitate to capture stereo image; and a stereo image generation module coupled to the control unit for generating stereo image from data received from the stereo image capture module, wherein the stereo image generation module can be stored in a remote computer, a remote server, or the portable communication device, wherein the stereo image capture module comprises two image capture elements arranged linearly with a distance; capturing a two images by the stereo image capture module; generating a stereo image from the captured two images by the stereo image generation module, storing the stereo image. | 05-12-2011 |
20110111700 | WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM USING VARIABLE POWER DUAL MODULATION TRANSCEIVERS - A wireless control system that operates in Industrial, Scientific and Medical (ISM) frequency bands that employs one or more variable power dual modulation radio frequency transceiver-controllers that are capable of receiving and/or transmitting signals and communicating with each other over a configurable range, from short to long range. The wireless control system is suitable for use in a wide range of medical, industrial, agricultural, military and commercial applications, including, for example, the management of irrigation systems, manufacturing processes, security systems, sewage treatment and handling systems, hospital management systems, tracking systems, ground telemetry systems, environmental monitoring systems for agriculture, viticulture, pipelines and dams, HVAC management systems, water, gas and electrical metering, parking meters, asset and equipment tracking, traffic control, fire protection, public space management, intruder detection and biological research. | 05-12-2011 |
20110117840 | Bluetooth Earphone And Host Device Using The Bluetooth Earphone - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a Bluetooth earphone and a host device using Bluetooth earphone, which are capable of providing an automatic switch of the Bluetooth earphone. According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the Bluetooth earphone and the host device may perceive each other. When the Bluetooth earphone is in use, the earphone and the Bluetooth module of the host device will be switched on automatically, and a connection thereof will also be built automatically. When the Bluetooth earphone is not in use, the earphone and the Bluetooth module of the host device will be switched off automatically to save power. Embodiments of the present disclosure further provide a new charging mode of the Bluetooth earphone. Therefore, the Bluetooth earphone will no longer use a separate charging device, instead, the host device will take the responsibility for charging the Bluetooth earphone. Embodiments of the present disclosure further provide a lodging space at the host device for lodging the Bluetooth earphone. When not in use, the Bluetooth earphone may be placed at the lodging space. | 05-19-2011 |
20110117841 | INTERACTING WITH DEVICES BASED ON PHYSICAL DEVICE-TO-DEVICE CONTACT - A device may receive a signal from a sensor coupled to a first device, determine whether the first device is tapped against a second device based on the signal, send a message to the second device when the first device is tapped against the second device, determine if the taps are valid user input based on a response from the second device, and perform an application specific action when the taps are valid user input. | 05-19-2011 |
20110117842 | Method and mobile device for selectively displaying list of peripheral devices based on short range communication - A mobile device and method selectively displays a list of peripheral devices available for an application to be performed depending on a short range communication. When one of an end-user function and a content supported by the mobile device is selected, the mobile device acquires a profile of the selected end-user function or content. Then the mobile device acquires information about specific peripheral devices that are capable of forming a short range communication channel with the mobile device and also capable of enabling the selected end-user function or content. The mobile device outputs a list of the specific peripheral devices depending on the acquired information. | 05-19-2011 |
20110117843 | Terminal and method for controlling function using short-distance communication - A method, apparatus, and a non-transitory computer readable medium allows a terminal to concurrently receive control input from multiple secondary devices through a short distance communication mode. The terminal is connected with at least two secondary devices in the short distance communication mode. A key map is applied to the connected secondary devices. When a key signal is received from at least one of the connected secondary devices, the secondary device that transmitted the key signal is identified. And a function mapped to the key signal is executed according to the key map applied to the identified secondary device. | 05-19-2011 |
20110117844 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION RELAY APPARATUS, AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A communication relay apparatus transmits a list of external apparatuses connected to itself to a communication apparatus, and closes the first close proximity wireless communication. After the user designates one apparatus used to make a data communication from the list of external apparatuses in the communication apparatus, when the communication apparatus and communication relay apparatus are connected again in the close proximity wireless communication mode, the communication relay apparatus establishes a communication path between the communication apparatus and the external apparatus used to make the data communication. Then, when a communication is to be made with one of a plurality of external apparatuses connected to the communication relay apparatus via the communication relay apparatus, the communication partner apparatus can be easily selected. | 05-19-2011 |
20110117845 | System and Method for Hands Free Connect Application for the Automobile Environment - A module executed on a mobile communications device (MCD) to automatically pair the MCD with a vehicle. The module determines whether the MCD's short range communication technology, e.g., Bluetooth® technology is enabled. If not, the module turns on the MCD's short range communication technology. The module also determines whether the MCD is in a discovery mode, which is the mode of the MCD that enables the MCD to pair. If not, the module turns on the MCD's discovery mode. The module then automatically pairs the MCD and the vehicle. In an embodiment the automatic pairing includes setting the vehicle's hands free telephone module to a discovery mode, if the short range communications from the MCD and HFT are being seen by each other than a personal identification number (PIN) is obtained. In an embodiment the PIN is not entered by a user of the MCD or vehicle, but is automatically determined. The MCD and HFT are then securely paired using conventional pairing techniques. | 05-19-2011 |
20110117846 | METHOD FOR USING vNote IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - A method for using vNote in a portable terminal is provided. The method includes requesting transmission of a vNote message, inserting a variable for setting the vNote message as a message to be used for a Bluetooth messenger into the vNote message, and transmitting the vNote message into which the variable for setting the vNote message is inserted as a message to be used for the Bluetooth messenger. | 05-19-2011 |
20110117847 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, a communication module executes close proximity wireless transfer. A connection control module establishes a connection between the communication module and an external device which are in a close proximity state when the communication module is in an unconnected state, and releases the connection when a period in which a response from the external device is absent exceeds a connection time-out value. A communication control module executes a service by close proximity wireless transfer. A detection module detects a start and a stop of the service. A change module changes the connection time-out value in response to detection of the start and the stop of the service, in such a manner that the connection time-out value during a period in which the service is being executed is greater than the connection time-out value during a period in which the service is not executed. | 05-19-2011 |
20110117848 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile phone | 05-19-2011 |
20110117849 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention relates to a communication system and a communication method for simply and quickly starting communication. A cellular phone is loaded with a non-contact IC card that communicates with a reader/writer of a personal computer using an electromagnetic wave. When the non-contact IC card receives the electromagnetic wave emitted from the reader/writer with the cellular phone placed close to the personal computer, the cellular phone notifies the personal computer of a card ID set in the non-contact IC card. When the personal computer acquires Bluetooth device names of the cellular phone and PDA with intra-piconet synchronization established between the cellular phone and the PDA, the personal computer identifies the cellular phone as a communication partner based on the Bluetooth device names already notified of as the card ID. The present invention is applicable to an information processing apparatus such as a personal computer and a cellular phone. | 05-19-2011 |
20110124287 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION LINK BY SELECTING OBJECT FROM SCREEN - A method for establishing a communication link of a first communication device by selecting a target from a screen includes: selecting a second communication device for establishing a communication link on a screen of the first communication device; transmitting a request for a communication link including information regarding the establishment of a link on the basis of the first communication device required for establishing a communication link to the selected second communication device; receiving a communication link response including information regarding the establishment of a communication link on the basis of the second communication device required for establishing a communication link from the second communication device; and establishing a communication link between the first communication device and the second communication device by using the information regarding the establishment of a link on the basis of the first communication device and the information regarding the establishment of a link on the basis of the second communication device. | 05-26-2011 |
20110130096 | OPERATION CONTROL AND DATA PROCESSING IN AN ELECTRONIC PEN - An electronic pen is configured for transmitting coordinate data to an external terminal. The pen includes an image component ( | 06-02-2011 |
20110130097 | WIRELESS USB DEVICE AND WIRELESS USB COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless USB device that performs a communication conforming to a wireless USB standard with a plurality of wireless USB hosts includes a reception-time-information receiving unit that receives reception time information indicating a data reception time specified by each of the wireless USB hosts, a configuration determining unit that determines, when the reception-time-information receiving unit receives the reception time information from a wireless USB host, whether a configuration is set for the wireless USB host, and a configuration unit that sets, when the configuration determining unit determines that the configuration is not set for the wireless USB host that transmitted the reception time information, the configuration for the wireless USB host that transmitted the reception time information. | 06-02-2011 |
20110136432 | Using an electric power cable as the vehicle for communicating an information-bearing signal through a barrier - The RF signal generated by a ZigBee radio on the outside of a building structure is conveyed to the interior of the building by guiding it as a surface wave along an electric cable bundle that passes through the building's wall to supply domestic electric power to the interior of the structure. The RF signal is launched by a unique coupler comprising a pair of insulated foil conductors. | 06-09-2011 |
20110136433 | Heterogeneous Wireless Sensor Network Bridging Device and Control Method and Flow Balancing Method Thereof - A control method for a heterogeneous wireless sensor network (WSN) bridging device includes initializing Zigbee sensor nodes, switching a Zigbee transceiver module to a sleep mode, switching a wireless network transceiver module to an active mode, receiving an task list from a remote main control device, switching the wireless network transceiver module to the sleep mode, switching the Zigbee transceiver module to the active mode, transmitting an operating instruction to the Zigbee sensor nodes, receiving at least one sensing signal from the Zigbee sensor nodes, and determining whether the sensing signals have been received. If yes, a back transmission procedure is executed. The control method solves an interference problem among heterogeneous wireless networks and overcomes a bottleneck in data transmission. | 06-09-2011 |
20110136434 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN BLUETOOTH DEVICES - A Bluetooth device and a method for transmitting data among Bluetooth devices are provided. The method includes, at a first Bluetooth device, receiving data from a second Bluetooth device with which the first Bluetooth device establishes a Bluetooth connection, at the first Bluetooth device, determining whether a forwarding mode is activated, and if the forwarding mode is activated, transmitting the received data to at least one target Bluetooth device selected depending on preset forwarding information. | 06-09-2011 |
20110136435 | ON-VEHICLE INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - An on-vehicle information processing apparatus for implementing various functions in cooperation with a portable apparatus connected thereto in a cabin of a vehicle is disclosed. The on-vehicle information processing apparatus comprises: a communication device configured to communicate with the portable apparatus; and a screen generating device configured to generate an operation screen for the functions which can be implemented in cooperation with the portable apparatus. The screen generating device is configured to identify the functions which can be implemented in cooperation with the portable apparatus connected thereto via the communication device, based on information of the connected portable apparatus, and generate the operation screen which varies according to the identified available function or functions. | 06-09-2011 |
20110136436 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SHORT RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A magnetic induction data transmission network comprising a master hub, at least one sensor node communicatively coupled to the master hub and a magnetic induction coil preferably adapted to be worn about a body part of a subject such as an individual's waist or neck. In at least one embodiment of the invention, the magnetic induction coil preferably includes a connector which serves as an intermediary between the coil and the hub to allow data communication. | 06-09-2011 |
20110136437 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR DISPLAYING CAPACITY OF BLUETOOTH DEVICE ON MOBILE TERMINAL - A method, device, and system for displaying a capacity of a Bluetooth device on a mobile terminal with a Bluetooth function are provided. The method includes: receiving, by the mobile terminal, a residual capacity value from a Bluetooth device, in which the residual capacity value is configured to indicate a residual capacity of the Bluetooth device; and displaying the residual capacity of the Bluetooth device on a screen of the mobile terminal. The method enables a user of the mobile terminal with the Bluetooth function to know a capacity condition of the Bluetooth device in real time, and replace or charge the battery in time when the capacity of the Bluetooth device is low, thereby preventing the user experience from being affected or preventing a great loss from occurring. | 06-09-2011 |
20110143664 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BLUETOOTH PUSH TO TALK - A wireless communication device is described. The wireless communication device includes a wireless transceiver capable of communicating with a Bluetooth-enabled wireless device having a call button for initiating a command. A control switch is coupled to the wireless transceiver for initiating a push to talk session in the wireless transceiver. A processor is coupled to the control switch and the wireless transceiver. The processor initiates the push to talk session upon receiving the command from the Bluetooth-enabled wireless device. | 06-16-2011 |
20110143665 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE ACCESS FOR DIRECTIONAL WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method, system, apparatus and article are described for providing multiple access for directional wireless networks. A method may comprise, for example, establishing a distributed contention-based period (CBP) for a directional wireless network and transmitting information from a first device to a second device based on one or more distributed CBP rules, wherein the transmission comprises a directional transmission. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 06-16-2011 |
20110143666 | OPERATING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USER INTERFACE IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - An operating method for a user interface in a portable terminal and an apparatus thereof are provided. The operating method for a user interface in a portable terminal includes registering Bluetooth connection information in a phone book of the portable terminal, and displaying peripheral Bluetooth device information and phone book information on a screen indicating a searching result for peripheral Bluetooth devices. The method allows a user to easily and rapidly perform Bluetooth communication connection with another user trying performing Bluetooth communication upon using a Bluetooth communication function of the portable terminal. | 06-16-2011 |
20110143667 | System and Method for Providing Interactive Mobile Content Using Multiple Communication Paths - A method of and system for providing interactive services to a set of mobile devices is provided, comprising: providing at least one set of first information adapted for over-the-air broadcast to a set of mobile devices by at least one first facility, wherein the first information is selected from the group comprising program content, basic information and cloud content; providing at least one set of second information adapted for transmission to at least one of the mobile devices by at least one second facility, wherein the second information is selected from the group comprising non-linear information, on-demand information, cloud content and user-defined content, and wherein the second facility comprises a transmitter selected from the group comprising a short range wireless transmitter in intermittent communication with at least one of the mobile devices and a long range wireless transmitter; and receiving at least one set of third information based on information selected from the group comprising the first information and the second information from at least one of the mobile devices, wherein the third information is forwarded by a third facility comprising a receiver selected from the group comprising a short range wireless receiver in intermittent communication with at least one of the mobile devices and a long range wireless receiver. | 06-16-2011 |
20110143668 | Flexible Telematics System and Method for Providing Telematics to a Vehicle - A retrofitting telematics device for a vehicle that has an integrated communication device with a short range wireless personal area network transceiver (e.g., a Bluetooth transceiver) and a memory holding a list uniquely identifying at least one mobile communication device that is a currently paired mobile communication device, a previously paired mobile communication device, and/or a pre-defined mobile communication device. The retrofitting telematics device includes a user-removable telematics component with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device, a short range wireless personal area network transceiver (e.g., a Bluetooth transceiver) that is operable to communicatively connect to the transceiver of the vehicle, and a data pump communicatively coupled with the GPS device and the transceiver of the user-removable telematics device and programmed to transmit a request for information to the off-site telematics provider utilizing a communications path and request the off-site telematics provider to automatically send the information to the at least one mobile communication device. | 06-16-2011 |
20110143669 | Flexible Telematics System and Method for Providing Telematics to a Vehicle - A method for providing telematics to a vehicle includes the steps of providing a user-removable telematics component with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device, a data pump, and a short range wireless personal area network transceiver (e.g., Bluetooth transceiver), communicatively connecting the telematics component to an integrated communication device of the vehicle, the integrated communication device having a vehicle short range wireless personal area network transceiver operable to connect and communicate with at least one of at least one mobile communication device selected from a currently paired mobile communication device, a previously paired mobile communication device, and a pre-defined mobile communication device and a least one vehicle communications bus, receiving at the data pump a request from the at least one mobile communication device to perform a vehicle function, and performing the vehicle function with the telematics component. | 06-16-2011 |
20110143670 | Flexible Telematics System and Method for Providing Telematics to a Vehicle - A method for providing telematics to a vehicle includes providing a user-removable telematics component with a GPS device, a data pump, a short range wireless personal area network (e.g., Bluetooth) transceiver, and a user interface. The telematics component connects to an integrated communication device of the vehicle having a transceiver and a memory storing a list including a number of a currently paired mobile communication device. In response to a request for assistance, the user interface receives the request and the data pump receives at least the number. An assistance request is transmitted out from the telematics component utilizing a data pump communications path, the request including the number. An off-site telematics provider receives the request for assistance and a communication link between the off-site telematics provider and the at least one currently paired mobile communication device is opened. | 06-16-2011 |
20110143671 | INPUT DEVICE WITH MULTI-OBJECT SWITCH TRANSMISSION - An input device with multi-object switch transmission aims to establish a data transmission link between an input device and at least one information processing system. The input device contains a Bluetooth transmission device, a memory unit, a circuit unit and a micro control unit. The memory unit presets a plurality of protocol data fields. The Bluetooth transmission device gets multiple sets of Bluetooth communication protocol codes from multiple linkable information processing systems. The micro control unit saves each set of Bluetooth communication protocol code corresponding to each information processing system in each protocol data field of the memory unit. The circuit unit is triggered by a user to output a corresponding selection signal. The selection signal triggers the micro control unit to access the Bluetooth communication protocol code in a selected protocol data field from the memory unit to link the Bluetooth transmission device to one information processing system. | 06-16-2011 |
20110151781 | DATA PACKET PROCESSING FOR ESTIMATION OF A DIRECTION TOWARDS A TRANSMITTER - It is disclosed to insert an anti-whitened data block, which is obtainable from a specific data block by anti-whitening, into a data block that is to be whitened by a whitening to yield a whitened data block, wherein the anti-whitening compensates the whitening so that the whitened data block will comprise the specific data block in non-whitened form. It is further disclosed to output, in a first operating mode, an output data block generated by one of whitening and de-whitening an input data block in its entirety, and outputting, in a second operating mode, one of: an output data block generated by one of whitening and de-whitening all parts of an input data block under exclusion of a specific data block contained in the input data block. | 06-23-2011 |
20110151782 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION WITH HANDS-FREE PROFILE - The present invention relates to a system and a method for communication with hands-free profile. The method includes the steps of: providing illumination devices which microphones and speakers are respectively disposed on; providing a detection mechanism for detecting the position of a specific illumination device corresponding to a position of a user; when a communication device receives an incoming telegram signal: sending a preset ring by the speakers; and transmitting the sound transmitted from the communication device to the speaker of the specific illumination device and transmitting the sound received from the microphone of the specific illumination device to the communication device so that the communication is performed. | 06-23-2011 |
20110151783 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD THEREOF - A communication device between multiple communication networks, comprises an main controller and an audio gateway. The main controller directs the audio gateway to answer a second incoming call through a second communication control unit when a first incoming call has been answered by the audio gateway through a first communication control unit. | 06-23-2011 |
20110151784 | CONTROL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - According to one embodiment, a control apparatus includes a connection module, a communication module and a controller. A connection module is configured to connect by wire to a communication device with an antenna. A communication module is configured to communicate with a wireless communication device via the communication device. A controller is configured to instruct the communication device to report a communication state between the communication module and the wireless communication device. | 06-23-2011 |
20110151785 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS HAVING CONTROL FUNCTION USING HUMAN BODY COMMUNICATION AND PORTABLE TERMINAL HAVING ELECTRONIC APPARATUS CONTROL FUNCTION USING HUMAN BODY COMMUNICATION - An electronic apparatus having a control function using human body communication includes: a first control unit reading control data and performing a control to provide the read control data; a first human body communication unit converting the control data into a signal, which is transmittable through human body communication, according to a control signal outputted from the first control unit; an electrode installed in an outer housing of the electronic apparatus and transmitting the signal provided from the first human body communication unit to a user's body which comes into contact with the electronic apparatus; and a first storage unit storing the control data. | 06-23-2011 |
20110151786 | ROUTING METHOD FOR GUARD LAMP USING SHORT DISTANCE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Provided is a routing method for a guard lamp using a short distance wireless communication, the method including: performing, by a neighbor setup guard lamp, a neighbor setup operation; transferring, by the neighbor setup guard lamp, an initialization request message (Init_Request Message) to a neighbor guard lamp and receiving an initialization response message (Init-Rep Message) from the neighbor guard lamp to form a guard lamp network; receiving, by the neighbor setup guard lamp, a data message from the neighbor guard lamp; and repairing a path of the neighbor guard lamp having an error caused by a link loss at the receiving of the data message. | 06-23-2011 |
20110151787 | METHOD OF USING A TELEPHONE DEVICE TO VIEW CONTENT STORED THEREIN ON A NEARBY DISPLAY SCREEN WHICH IS NOT PHYSICALLY CONNECTED TO THE TELEPHONE DEVICE - A method is provided of using a telephone device to view full content on a nearby display screen which is not physically connected to the telephone device. The telephone device includes a display screen, a button which facilitates communication of the full content between the telephone device and a local control device connected to the nearby display screen, and a wireless transmitter. The full content is stored in the telephone device. Only a portion of the full content is displayed on the display screen of the telephone device. The full content is communicated from the telephone device to the local control device via a signal sent by the wireless transmitter upon selection of the button. The local control device receives the signal and provides the full content to the nearby display screen for display thereon. | 06-23-2011 |
20110151788 | System and Method for Automatically Switching Connection of a Wireless Interface - A system is provided including a device and a control module. The device has a first wireless interface for connecting to a first further device and a second wireless interface for connecting to the control module. The first wireless interface is suitable for detecting that a second further device is located within its coverage area. The second wireless interface is suitable for communicating to the control module that the second further device is located within the coverage area. The control module is suitable for executing a service logic and for transmitting to the second wireless interface a command to disconnect the first wireless interface from the first further device. The first wireless interface is configured for executing the command, thus automatically disconnecting from the first further device, and for connecting the device to the second further device. | 06-23-2011 |
20110159813 | Wireless Device Pairing and Grouping Methods - Methods for pairing devices to a group are disclosed. The methods include initiating a plurality of wireless device for communication with a base computing system. Then, receiving signals indicative of setting of each of the plurality of wireless devices in pairing mode. The method then detects a physical tap between two or more of the plurality of wireless devices. The physical tap setting a pairing of the wireless devices to a group for communication with the base computing system. The devices in the group being managed in a database to associate capabilities of the wireless devices to components of a multimedia feed being used by the group. | 06-30-2011 |
20110159814 | Wireless Device Multimedia Feed Switching - Methods for enabling group switching of paired wireless devices are disclosed. The method includes receiving signals indicative of setting of each of a plurality of wireless devices in pairing mode. Then, detecting a physical contact between two or more of the plurality of wireless devices. The physical contact setting a pairing of the wireless devices to a group for communication with the base computing system, and enabling the group to participate in interaction with a first multimedia feed. The method further includes detecting switch signal from one of the wireless devices of the group. The switch signal discontinuing the first multimedia feed and enabling interaction with a second multimedia feed, such that each of the wireless devices of the group switch together as a group from the first multimedia feed to the second multimedia feed. | 06-30-2011 |
20110159815 | Wireless Device - The present invention discloses a wireless device, which includes a substrate and an antenna. The antenna includes a printed antenna element and a 3-dimensional antenna element. The printed antenna element is printed on the substrate, while the 3-dimensional antenna element is disposed on the substrate and coupled to the printed antenna element. The printed antenna element and the 3-dimensional antenna element jointly have a physical length of a desired frequency | 06-30-2011 |
20110159816 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - The present invention relates to a communication system, a communication device, a communication method, and a program, which make it possible to achieve a reduction in communication time. When performing communication in passive mode, the initiator transmits a polling request frame where a first value is set in time slot information, and when performing communication in simple mode, the initiator transmits a polling request frame where a second value different from the first value is set in time slot information. When the time slot information included in the polling request frame from the initiator has the first value, the target transmits a polling response frame including an ID for identifying the target at the timing of a time slot determined by a random number, and when the time slot information has the second value, the target transmits a polling response frame including real data at the timing of a time slot set in advance. The present invention can be applied to, for example, an IC card system that performs near field communication. | 06-30-2011 |
20110165840 | TRANSLATING TELEMETRY STATIONARY ANTENNA - Certain embodiments of the invention may include systems and methods for providing a translating telemetry stationary antenna. According to an example embodiment of the invention, a method is provided for automatically aligning a stationary antenna with a corresponding rotor antenna. The method provides for mounting a stationary antenna with respect to a rotor antenna associated with a rotor. The method includes mounting a stationary antenna to an inner circumference of a support frame, mounting a plurality of radial air bearings to the support frame for maintaining radial alignment of the stationary antenna with respect to the rotor antenna, and mounting a plurality of axial air bearings to the support frame for maintaining axial alignment of the stationary antenna with respect to the rotor antenna. | 07-07-2011 |
20110165841 | MOBILE TERMINAL, MOBILE TERMINAL SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING OPERATION OF THE SAME - A mobile terminal which can enter a content share mode, a mobile terminal system, and a method for controlling the operation of the same are provided. After entering a content share mode, a mobile terminal can transmit and receive content to and from another mobile terminal which is in the content share mode and within a predetermined distance. The mobile terminal can also specify a content transmission format. Before the content is transmitted, the content may be displayed on another mobile terminal using a thumbnail of the content. Users can conveniently transmit content between mobile terminals. | 07-07-2011 |
20110165842 | MULTI-MODE CELLULAR IC FOR MULTI-MODE COMMUNICATIONS - An RFIC includes an RF section, a memory interface, a display interface, an audio codec, a bus matrix, and a processing unit. The RF section converts a first inbound RF signal into a first inbound symbol stream and converts a second inbound RF signal into a second inbound symbol stream. The memory interface is operably coupled to retrieve a video file from memory and the display interface is operable to provide video data to a display. The audio codec converts an output digital signal into an output voice signal. The processing unit converts the first inbound symbol stream into streaming video data; converts the second inbound symbol stream into the output digital signal; and facilitates providing, via the bus matrix, at least one of: the video file to the display interface as the video data; the streaming video data to the display interface as the video data; and the digital output signal to the audio codec. | 07-07-2011 |
20110171908 | METHOD OF CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT AND BLUETOOTH DEVICE - A connection establishing method for a slave Bluetooth device supporting a plurality of Bluetooth profiles, includes generating an indication value according to a selecting signal inputted to the Bluetooth device, the indication value indicating a Bluetooth profile to be used, deciding whether to modify a hardware address of the Bluetooth device according to the indication value and a state value that indicates a Bluetooth profile currently used, and establishing a connection with a master Bluetooth device according to the Bluetooth profile to be used indicated by the indication value. | 07-14-2011 |
20110171909 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY CONNECTING SHORT RANGE WIRELESS NETWORK IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - A method and an apparatus for automatically connecting a short range wireless network in a portable terminal. The method for automatically connecting a short range wireless network in the portable terminal includes, when registering to an Access Point (AP), storing location information of the AP. The method also includes obtaining location information of the terminal. The method further includes controlling an activation cycle of a communication module by comparing the location information of the terminal and the location information of the AP. The method still further includes, when the communication module is activated, searching for the AP. | 07-14-2011 |
20110177784 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE CONFIGURATION OF A MOBILE STATION BASEBAND CIRCUIT FOR AN ACOUSTIC ACCESSORY - A method and system for the configuration of a mobile station baseband circuit for an acoustic accessory having an identifier, the method comprising the steps of: determining whether the mobile device recognizes the identifier of the acoustic device; and configuring the baseband circuit with a DSP filter response and CODEC acoustic gain parameters for the acoustic device if the mobile device recognizes the identifier of the acoustic device. The system comprising: an identifier for each of the plurality of acoustic devices; a local memory in the mobile station storing a frequency (filter) response and gain parameters for at least one of the plurality of acoustic devices and for mapping them to the identifier; and a digital signal processor to re-shape an acoustic frequency response and adjust an audio gain of a baseband circuit for the mobile station based on the stored frequency response and gain parameters. | 07-21-2011 |
20110183612 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR VISUAL PAIRING OF MOBILE DEVICES - System and method for visual pairing between wireless devices, according to which a first software component is installed on a first WCD with a display screen and a second software component is installed on a second WCD having a camera and then a request to establish an open WCC is sent from the second WCD to the first WCD. If the request is approved by the first WCD, an image with graphically encoded unique one-time information is generated on the display screen using the first software. The image is captured by the camera and the information is decoded in the captured image by using the second software component. This information is used to establish an open WCC between the second WCD and the first WCD. | 07-28-2011 |
20110183613 | DEVICE SETUP EXTENSION FOR APPLICATIONS - A first wireless device is configured to be used with a second wireless device. The configuration is performed after the first wireless device establishes a connection with the second wireless device. The first wireless device identifies services supported by the second wireless device without user intervention, and passes identified services to a plugin system in the first wireless device. The plugin system includes plugins that are associated with the identified services. The plugins present configuration options that are associated with the identified services via a user interface. From the user interface, the first wireless device receives a selection of the configuration options and is configured according to the selection. | 07-28-2011 |
20110183614 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A communication terminal includes an authentication control module configured to: determine whether or not the counterpart device for which the communication mode switching request is permitted is a registered counterpart device based on a pairing request corresponding to the communication mode switching request notified from the communication mode controller; and control the pairing controller to discard the pairing request corresponding to the communication mode switching request notified from the communication mode controller not to perform pairing including an authentication process by the second wireless communication module when determined that the counterpart device for which the communication mode switching request has been permitted is the registered counterpart device. | 07-28-2011 |
20110183615 | System Having Co-Located Functional Resources Amd Applications Thereof - Disclosed herein are systems, apparatuses, and methods for wirelessly coupling functional resources. Such a system includes a plurality of co-located, wireless-enabled functional units of a first type and a plurality of co-located, wireless-enabled functional units of a second type. At least one of the wireless-enabled functional units of the first type is wirelessly coupled with one or more of the wireless-enabled functional units of the second type. The wireless-enabled functional units of the first type may be wireless-enabled processing units, and the wireless-enabled functional units of the second type may be wireless-enabled memory units. In an example, the plurality of wireless-enabled functional units of the first type are co-located on a first chip, and the plurality of wireless-enabled functional units of the second type are co-located on a second chip. The first chip and the second chip may be located in a single device or in separate devices. | 07-28-2011 |
20110183616 | Wireless Bus for Intra-Chip and Inter-Chip Communication, Including Scalable Wireless Bus Embodiments - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to a scalable wireless bus for intra-chip and inter-chip communication. The scalable wireless bus includes a plurality of wireless-enabled components (WECs). In an embodiment, the scalable wireless bus may have at least one of the number of links among WECs and the capacity of said links adapted based on one or more factors. For example, the number of links and the capacity of the links may be adapted according to one or more of, among other factors, expected activity level over the wireless bus, desired power consumption, delay, and interference levels. | 07-28-2011 |
20110183617 | Establishing A Wireless Communications Bus And Applications Thereof - Disclosed herein are systems, apparatuses, and methods for establishing wireless communications among a plurality of wireless-enabled components (WECs), and applications thereof. Such a system includes a plurality of WECs, each configured to transmit and receive over a wireless bus. The wireless bus includes (i) a first channel to identify proximally located WECs and (ii) a second channel to support communications among the proximally located WECs. The plurality of WECs may be located on a single chip, on multiple chips of a single device, or on multiple chips across multiple devices. | 07-28-2011 |
20110183618 | Locating Wireless-Enabled Components and Applications Thereof - Disclosed herein are systems, apparatuses, and methods for locating wireless-enabled components, and applications thereof. Such an apparatus includes a wireless-enabled component (WEC), which may be a functional block of an integrated circuit (IC), an IC, or a device that includes an IC. The WEC includes a functional module (e.g., a processing resource or a memory resource) and an antenna element coupled to the functional module. The antenna element is configured to (i) transmit a search signal to locate a proximally situated WEC and (ii) transmit a communication signal to communicate with the proximally situated WEC. The antenna element may be a phased array, an electrically steered phased array, a mechanically steered phased array, a directional antenna, a mechanically steered directional antenna, an RF antenna, an optical antenna, and/or any combination thereof. | 07-28-2011 |
20110183619 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A mobile communication terminal apparatus including: a mobile communication terminal main body; and an extension unit detachable from the mobile communication terminal main body and capable of performing short-range wireless communication with the mobile communication terminal main body when being detached in a separated state from the mobile communication terminal main body. | 07-28-2011 |
20110183620 | AUTOMATIC NETWORK AND DEVICE CONFIGURATION FOR HANDHELD DEVICES BASED ON BLUETOOTH DEVICE PROXIMITY - A method, apparatus, and system for automatically configuring Bluetooth devices for communication to an outside network is described. A Bluetooth device is paired with a “trusted” Bluetooth device. When paired devices are found, the Bluetooth device automatically configures itself to use the lowest cost connection option from the available set of paired devices that are in proximity with the Bluetooth handheld device. If no device is found, the Bluetooth device may revert to a built-in access method. The network accessed can be the internet or an office network such as an 802.11 network. | 07-28-2011 |
20110189955 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD USING THE SAME - Mobile terminals and a communication method using the same in which a mobile terminal includes a display unit to display image information processed in the mobile terminal; a conversion unit to convert an image signal corresponding to the image information output from the display unit into an electric signal; and an electrical output unit to output the electric signal converted by the conversion unit. Further, a mobile terminal includes an electrical reception unit to receive an electric signal for image information; a conversion unit to convert the electric signal received by the electrical reception unit into an image signal; and a display unit to display image information corresponding to the image signal converted by the conversion unit. | 08-04-2011 |
20110189956 | MODULAR, RECONFIGURABLE AND COGNITIVE MICROSYSTEM FOR THE MONITORING AND REMOTE CONTROL OF SMART COMMUNICATING OBJECTS - The present invention is a modular, reconfigurable and cognitive Microsystem that dynamically adapts itself to a given radio context for an improved user experience and health risk detection while enabling the realization of custom telehealth products in a flexible and highly integrated manner. The Microsystem of the invention is made of one or several semiconductor dies, with complementary functionality, that are integrated both vertically and horizontally. By default, the Microsystem of the invention includes a ‘base’ die made of dual-mode and dynamically reconfigurable functional blocks implementing the whole ‘Bluetooth Low Energy’ standard and a portion of the ‘Zigbee/IEEE 802.15.4’ specification. The Microsystem according to the invention is particularly well-suited for the collection and transfer of (tele)health data but can also be applied to other application markets and devices having the need to support the operating modes, ‘Bluetooth Low Energy’ and/or ‘Zigbee/IEEE 802.15.4’, in a modular, reconfigurable and cognitive manner. | 08-04-2011 |
20110195663 | Mobile terminal, information transmitting/receiving method, server apparatus, reader-writer, and member privilege acquiring system - There is provided a mobile terminal including: a contactless communication unit transmitting an IC identifier to a reader-writer that carries out contactless communication and receiving link information including the IC identifier from the reader-writer; and a wireless communication unit accessing a server based on the link information, transmitting the link information to the server, transmitting the IC identifier to the server separately to the link information, and operable, when the server has judged based on the IC identifier that contactless communication with the reader-writer and access to the server were both carried out using a same mobile terminal owned by a user, to receive information relating to privilege available to the user on a service used by the user from the server apparatus. | 08-11-2011 |
20110195664 | WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM FOR A SPA - A wireless control system is provided for remotely controlling various modules of a spa. The control system comprises a wireless interface for receiving a combination of communication signals containing control data and BLUETOOTH signals from a remote wireless device. The communication signals contain at least control data for controlling the various modules of the spa and the BLUETOOTH signals contain media data such as streaming audio data. The communication signals can be transmitted using Wi-Fi, GSM or CDMA protocols. The control system further comprises a wired interface connected to the various modules of the spa and in communication with the wireless interface. The wired interface controls the various modules of the spa in response to the control data. | 08-11-2011 |
20110195665 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND USE OF PRESENCE DETECTION - The system and method provide for a small, low-power device, e.g., a Bluetooth® device, in a carryable or wearable form, that allows a controlled device to respond to the presence of the user. The device may be worn on one's person and allow other devices, by means of Bluetooth® pairing and protocols, to detect the presence of a user. The controller or controlling device may emit a signal in the vicinity of the user to allow the controlled device to know whether or not the controlling device is present, and the signal may be a pulse of data that is transmitted every few seconds. The pulse of data between the transmitter and the receiver may be encrypted to be used for higher-security applications as a means of dual-factor authentication. The presence of the user may be employed to control a device, e.g., to control access to a computer, to unlock/lock doors, to turn lights on and off, and so on. | 08-11-2011 |
20110195666 | ACCESSORY FOR AN IMPLANT - An accessory ( | 08-11-2011 |
20110201272 | INTERACTIVE BASE STATION WITH PROCESSOR AND BODIES - The invention relates to a base station ( | 08-18-2011 |
20110201273 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADAPTIVELY USING VNOTE IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - Provided is a method and apparatus for adaptively using vNote in a portable terminal. The method includes determining whether a Bluetooth messenger is in operation upon reception of a vNote message, preventing a display notification window indicating reception of the vNote message if it is determined that the Bluetooth messenger is in operation, and displaying the received vNote message through the Bluetooth messenger in operation. | 08-18-2011 |
20110201274 | ACTIVE WIRELESS TAG AND AUXILIARY DEVICE FOR USE WITH MONITORING CENTER FOR TRACKING INDIVIDUALS OR OBJECTS - The invention is directed to a location tracking device and auxiliary device for use with a monitoring center for tracking individuals or objects. The location tracking device has position determining circuitry and first wireless circuitry that communicates position data representative of the location of the tracking device to a remote location (e.g., a monitoring station). The tracking device also has second wireless circuitry that communicates with the auxiliary device. The tracking device has at least two operational modes. The tracking device switches operational modes when communication is established between the tracking device and the auxiliary device. The auxiliary device generally has an associated auxiliary device ID and wireless circuitry that communicates the auxiliary device ID to the location tracking device. The tracking device has a first operational mode, when communication is not established with the auxiliary device, wherein the position determining circuitry is maintained in a normal power state. The tracking device can also have a second operational mode, when communication is established between the tracking device and the auxiliary device. In the second operational mode, the second wireless circuitry receives the auxiliary device ID from the auxiliary device and the first wireless circuitry communicates the auxiliary device ID to the remote location. The tracking device can also have a third operational mode, when communication is established between the tracking device and the auxiliary device. In the third operational mode, the position determining circuitry is placed in a reduced power state. | 08-18-2011 |
20110201275 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGEMENT OF A DYNAMIC NETWORK USING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A short-range wireless communication network may be established by direct communication between two or more wireless communication devices. A conventional cellular telephone includes an integrated short-range transceiver. The short-range transceivers of multiple wireless communication devices can be coupled together to form a short-range communication network without utilizing any wireless communication network supported by wireless service providers. The short-range communication network may be extended as additional devices come within range or consolidated as wireless communication devices leave the communication range. The short-range communication network is built upon the proximity of wireless communication devices with each other. Data is disseminated between the wireless communication devices using a data message synchronization process. Messages may also be carried from one wireless network to another as the communication devices are carried by individuals. | 08-18-2011 |
20110201276 | SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING INFORMATION BETWEEN AN IMPLANT AND AN EXTERNAL DEVICE - For communicating information between a medical implant in a patient's body and an external communication unit ( | 08-18-2011 |
20110207404 | COUPLER AND ELECTRONIC APPARATUS - According to one embodiment, a coupler which transmits and receives an electromagnetic wave to and from another coupler includes a substrate, a coupling element, a ground plane, and a feed terminal. The coupling element is positioned at a first surface of the substrate and includes a feed point. The ground plane is positioned at a second surface of the substrate. The ground plane includes a base portion and a protrusion. A first surface of an end of the protrusion is in contact with the second surface of the substrate. The base portion faces the second surface of the substrate with a gap therebetween. The feed terminal is positioned at a second surface of the end of the protrusion and connected to the feed point of the coupling element via a first through-hole in the substrate. | 08-25-2011 |
20110207405 | NEAR FIELD WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - According to one embodiment, a near field wireless communication device includes a receiver and a controller. The receiver is configured to obtain data by receiving a wireless signal. The controller is configured to stop the receiving operation of the receiver in the case where the receiver receives an unwanted signal. | 08-25-2011 |
20110207406 | Method and system for connecting wireless communications unit users - A system and method for wireless communications unit users within proximity to make social connections. Users can dynamically discover potential matches in the proximity and interactively find out mutual intentions to socially connect in an anonymous and discreet manner. | 08-25-2011 |
20110207407 | RECOMMENDER SYSTEM/METHOD, SERVICE SERVER, TERMINALS, CONNECTION METHOD AND STORAGE MEDIA FOR EFFICIENT CONNECTION - The present invention relates to a system, a method, a service server, an end-point terminal, a connection method and storage media for recommending an efficient connection path, in which if an end-point terminal connected to a mobile communication terminal through a short-range communication network can be connected to a service server through two or more mobile communication terminals, the end-point terminal can use a service through a mobile communication terminal capable of providing an optimum connection. The recommending system according to the present invention comprises: an end-point terminal connected to a mobile communication terminal through a short-range communication network, for playing back contents requested and received from an application server; the mobile communication terminal connected to the end-point terminal through the short-range communication network and connected to a service server through a mobile communication network, for transferring data between the end-point terminal and the service server; and the service server connected to the mobile communication terminal through the mobile communication network and connected to the application server through either the mobile communication network or a wired communication network, for providing the end-point terminal with information on a mobile communication terminal capable of providing an optimum connection, by examining a connection history between the end-point terminal and the mobile communication terminal or based on hardware specifications of mobile communication terminals connectible to the end-point terminal. | 08-25-2011 |
20110207408 | PEER TO PEER COMMUNICATION USING DEVICE CLASS BASED TRANSMISSION RULES - Data such as image, sound or other media content is delivered between peer devices over a dedicated peer-to-peer communications medium. According to an example embodiment, data is communicated between peer devices respectively belonging to one of a plurality of device classes respectively identified by a device-class identification (ID). Data is stored to identify communications that are to be carried out between devices having respective IDs, such that each pair of IDs has predefined execution steps based upon operational status of the devices. Based upon the device-class ID pair of two peer devices and an operating status of one or both devices, the devices automatically select and execute a communications approach to communicate data therebetween. This communication can be effected in response to a simple user input (e.g., which is specific to neither data nor transfer direction). | 08-25-2011 |
20110212690 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS COLLECTION AND TRANSMISSION OF MEASUREMENTS - Disclosed methods and systems feature a portable device for wirelessly receiving a measurement of an object and transmitting the measurement and an object identifier. The device includes two communication modules and a memory. The first communication module receives a first wireless signal that corresponds to the measurement of the object. The memory stores the measurement derived from the first wireless signal in association with the object identifier. The second communication module transmits a second wireless signal that corresponds to the measurement and the objection identifier. | 09-01-2011 |
20110217928 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISPLAYING CALLER-IDENTIFICATION - An application for a caller-identification system includes a circuit for receiving caller-identification information from a tip and ring interface and a circuit for wirelessly transmitting at least a subset of the caller-identification information to a display system. In the display system includes a circuit for receiving the caller-identification information and a circuit for displaying the caller-identification information on a display. | 09-08-2011 |
20110217929 | METHOD FOR USING A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONNECTED TO A PLURALITY OF MOBILE DEVICES AND PRIORITIZING THE MOBILE DEVICES, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND USE THEREOF - A method and a communication system is disclosed for using a communication system connected to at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device, wherein the communication system is operable in at least a first operating state and a second operating state, wherein the connection of the communication system to the first mobile device is prioritized in the first operating state and wherein the connection of the communication system to the second mobile device is prioritized in the second operating state. | 09-08-2011 |
20110217930 | Method of Remotely Controlling an Ear-Level Device Functional Element - A method controls a functional element of an ear-level device of a type including a functional element, a memory, a microphone and a speaker, each coupled to a processor. Communication between the ear-level device and a companion device, such as a mobile phone, is established. A functional element for control is selected through the user interface of the companion device. A control instruction for controlling the selected functional element is chosen using the user interface and is transmitted from the companion device to the ear-level device to provide instruction to the ear-level device to control the selected functional element in the chosen way. | 09-08-2011 |
20110217931 | SIMULATION TESTING SYSTEM FOR A MOBILE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND SIMULATION TESTING METHOD THEREOF - A simulation testing system for a mobile communication apparatus and a simulation testing method thereof are disclosed. The simulation testing system comprises a first mobile communication device and a second mobile communication device. The first mobile communication device comprises a first command processing module and a data processing module. The first command processing module sends an attention command. The second mobile communication device comprises a second command processing module, having a simulation unit for receiving the attention command and simulating a modulator/demodulator to transmit a simulation connection command. After the first mobile communication device receives the simulation connection command, the data processing module sends the testing data to the second mobile communication device. Compared with previous testing system of a mobile communication apparatus, the simulation testing system does not need a network. Therefore, the development of video phone would be more smoothly than before. | 09-08-2011 |
20110223862 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - The risk of a third party able to conduct pairing is reduced, and operation is also made simple. In S | 09-15-2011 |
20110223863 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR AUTOMOBILE - The invention relates to a communication system for an automobile, that comprises: a receiver (R) housed in the automobile ( | 09-15-2011 |
20110230137 | Switchable Wired-Wireless Electromagnetic Signal Communication - An apparatus include a first electronic component having first interface circuitry configured to generate an electromagnetic signal. The first electronic component is switchable such that in a first mode of operation, the first interface circuitry is configured to transmit the generated electromagnetic signal via a first antenna, and in a second mode of operation, the first interface circuitry is configured to transmit the electromagnetic signal to a second electronic component via a constrained signal path coupling the first electronic component and the second electronic component. The generated electromagnetic signal may be a radio frequency signal or an optical signal. | 09-22-2011 |
20110230138 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic device comprises a close proximity wireless transfer device and a connection mode switching module. The close proximity wireless transfer device executes a close proximity wireless transfer. The connection mode switching module alternately switches, when the close proximity wireless transfer device is not connected to another close proximity wireless transfer device, a connection mode of the close proximity wireless transfer device between a first mode that requests connection to the other close proximity wireless transfer device and a second mode that detects a connection request from the other close proximity wireless transfer device. | 09-22-2011 |
20110230139 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR WI-FI PROTECTED SETUP IN ADHOC NETWORK - In order to provide communication parameters with ease and efficiency even in ad-hoc mode, a device that provides the communication parameters adds specific additional information to a notification signal, and transmits the notification signal. A device that receives this notification signal also adds the same additional information when transmitting the notification signal. A device that is to receive the communication parameters requests the provision of the communication parameters from the device denoted in the received information. | 09-22-2011 |
20110230140 | BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATOR - While a handsfree device being multi-profile compatible is maintaining a connection for a handsfree profile (HFP) with a mobile phone handset, the handsfree device cuts off the connection for the HFP based on a user's operation. After cutting off, the handsfree device establishes a connection for a dial-up network profile (DUN), and subsequently transmits a request for a connection for the HFP while maintaining the connection for the DUN. Subsequently, the handsfree device determines whether the handset is multi-profile compatible according to the response to the request from the handset. Based on the determination that the handset is multi-profile compatible, the handsfree device executes the processes for the HFP while maintaining the connection for the DUN. | 09-22-2011 |
20110237188 | WIRELESS INTERFERENCE MITIGATION - Mitigating interference in a mobile wireless communication device by using an estimation of the performance impact of interfering signals generated by a wireless cellular transmitter and received by a co-located Bluetooth receiver. Bluetooth frequency channels are marked suitable or unsuitable for transmission based on the performance impact estimation and the state of the wireless cellular and Bluetooth connections. The estimation accounts for properties of the wireless cellular transmitter and Bluetooth receiver as well as operational characteristics of the wireless cellular and Bluetooth connections. | 09-29-2011 |
20110237189 | DATA TRANSMISSION DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD USING THE SAME - A data transmission device connected to a monitor includes a wireless transmission module, a multimedia processing unit and an output interface. The wireless transmission module wirelessly receives a multimedia data transmitted by an electronic apparatus. The multimedia processing unit receives and decompresses and decodes the multimedia data, and the output interface transmits the multimedia data to the monitor for displaying the multimedia data. The display area of the monitor is larger than the display area of the display unit of the electronic apparatus. A user is allowed to watch the multimedia data generated from the electronic apparatus executing a multimedia file on the monitor with a large display area. | 09-29-2011 |
20110237190 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING ENHANCED CONTACTLESS COMMUNICATION USING CONTACTLESS MODULE - A method and mobile terminal for enhanced contactless communication are discussed. According to an embodiment, the invention provides a mobile terminal comprising: a plurality of antennas designated for a contactless reception/transmission of signals from/to an external device, each of the plurality of antennas configured to receive a signal provided from the external device; and a contactless module operatively coupled to the plurality of antennas, and including a controller, the controller configured to check a strength of the signal received from each of the plurality of antennas, to select one of the plurality of antennas based on the checked result, and to receive the signal continuously or a new signal using the selected antenna. | 09-29-2011 |
20110237191 | SHORT RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A short range wireless communication apparatus is disclosed. When multiple communication protocols including a first communication protocol and a second communication protocol are simultaneously connected between the short range wireless communication apparatus and another short range wireless communication apparatus, the short range wireless communication apparatus notifies the another short range wireless communication apparatus a second communication protocol connection request if the first communication protocol is disconnected in response to transmission of a first communication protocol disconnection request to the another short range wireless communication apparatus and then the second communication protocol is disconnected in response to transmission of a second communication protocol disconnection request from the another short range wireless communication apparatus. | 09-29-2011 |
20110237192 | TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS WITH HIGH-DIRECTIONAL STEERABLE ANTENNAS COMBINING QUASI OMNI-DIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSIONS WITH BEAMFORMING TRAINING - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method, comprising communicating in a wireless network using a low-rate quasi omni-directional communications mode implemented as TX-RX space scanning using directional antennas, and a high-rate directional communications mode with beamformed directional antennas, and wherein the quasi low-rate omni-directional communications mode using TX-RX space scanning uses a same frame to simultaneously carry control information and perform beamforming training of the directional antennas. | 09-29-2011 |
20110237193 | GESTURING TO SELECT AND CONFIGURE DEVICE COMMUNICATION - Described is a technology by which a gesture made with a source device (e.g., a cellular telephone), such as a throwing or pointing motion, is used to automatically set up a connection with another device to which the gesture is directed. Audio signals output during the gesture, e.g., such as at the start and end of the gesture, are detected by candidate (listening) devices. The device having the least time difference between detection of the start and end signals is the device that is generally best aligned with the throwing or pointing motion, and thus may be selected as the target device. Once selected, a connection such as a network connection may be set up between the source device and the target device for further communication, such as for application data exchange. | 09-29-2011 |
20110244798 | Data Packet Generator and Implementations of Same - A data packet generator transmits data packets using radio frequency signals. The data packets are included, in some embodiments, in a network name. The network name can be detected by a computing device, which receives the data packet. The data packet can then be used for a variety of purposes. | 10-06-2011 |
20110244799 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR OPERATING TRANSACTION TERMINALS - Methods, systems and apparatus are provided including a proximity payment device reader which includes a reader control program to control a process to execute process, where a first process is executed upon receipt of an activation signal, the activation signal indicating the initiation of a transaction involving a proximity payment device with the reader, the first process causing at least a first signal to be transmitted to a second process, the second process causing the transmission of at least a second signal to the proximity payment device through a transceiver. In some embodiments, the first process and the second process each have a queue in which received signals are placed and handled in a first in first out basis allowing the processes to run concurrently with each other. In some embodiments, the processes may be executed to compare at least a portion of application data received from the payment device to data stored in a transaction log of the reader device to determine if the proximity payment device was recently involved in an interrupted transaction at said reader device, and if the proximity payment device was recently involved in an interrupted transaction at the reader, transmitting a signal to the proximity payment device to attempt to retry the interrupted transaction. | 10-06-2011 |
20110244800 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BETWEEN USER EQUIPMENTS - A method of providing wireless communication between user equipments, comprising the steps of: retrieving ( | 10-06-2011 |
20110250842 | BLUETOOTH RADIO DEVICE AND MANAGEMENT APPLICATION FOR INTEGRATION WITH A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In one embodiment, a method includes determining when a device is in a range of a first aggregator and, if the device is determined to be in the range of the first aggregator, causing the first aggregator to support the device. The method also includes determining when the device is in a range of a second aggregator and not in the range of the first aggregator. When the device is determined to be in the range of the second aggregator, the second aggregator is caused to support the device. | 10-13-2011 |
20110250843 | BLUETOOTH UNIT OF MOUNTING TYPE - A mounting type Bluetooth unit is provided, which can lengthen the life span of a battery. The mounting type Bluetooth unit is fixedly installed in the interior of a vehicle and is provided with a casing body that packages a circuit board having a controller with control logic for performing Bluetooth communication with a Bluetooth device of a portable phone. The controller further includes a human body sensor as a control switch of operation logic. Also, the controller further includes a logic for sensing a driver's getting into/out of the vehicle in accordance with existence/nonexistence of a sensing signal of the human body sensor and controlling the operation of the Bluetooth unit in a sleep/awake or power-on/off state to cancel pairing with the Bluetooth device in a non-use state. | 10-13-2011 |
20110250844 | ASYMMETRIC RTT RANGING WITH MULTIPATH CORRECTION - A method, system, and device provide asymmetric round-trip-time (RTT) ranging with multipath correction. A RTT ranging determination using the resulting composite received signal contains multipath error, and compensation or correction of this error in a manner compatible with low-power, low-complexity devices, such as tag devices, is provided. | 10-13-2011 |
20110256830 | Wireless Communication Headset system - A wireless communication headset system comprises a plurality of wireless communication headset devices and at least one transponder; in which the wireless communication headset device transmits a control signal in order to perform corresponding control actions with the signal and transmits a voice signal, while the transponder transmits the control signal to the wireless communication headset device within a communication range and transmits the voice signal. The transponder enables the functions of transmitting the control signal to the wireless communication headset device, creating connections among the plurality of wireless communication headset devices, controlling the communication mode of the wireless communication headset device and switching the communication channel. In addition, when the transponder moves, the communication range shifts accordingly along with the transponder as well. | 10-20-2011 |
20110256831 | BLUETOOTH MOUSE FOR FAST SWITCHING LINKING OBJECTS - A Bluetooth mouse for fast switching linking objects comprises a signal processing circuit triggered by a key unit to generate a control signal according to a displacement amount of the mouse. The signal processing circuit is electrically connected with a Bluetooth transmission device. The mouse has a pairing information memory storing pairing codes for establishing data transmission linkages between the Bluetooth transmission device and at least one information processing systems. The key unit is programmed one key or a combination of the keys to trigger the signal processing circuit to generate an object-switching signal. The object-switching signal drives the Bluetooth transmission device to access one pairing code from the pairing information memory according to the displacement amount of the mouse, and establishes a data transmission linkage with one information processing system corresponding to the pairing code. | 10-20-2011 |
20110256832 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SMART CARD COMPRISED OF MULTI SENSOR - Provided are a smart card controlling apparatus for controlling a smart card which includes a multi-sensor, and a method thereof. The smart card controlling apparatus may include an interface unit that is connected to a USB terminal of the smart card which includes a multi-sensor and recognizing the smart card, and a communication module to control communication between the recognized smart card and a card reader based on short-range wireless communication. | 10-20-2011 |
20110263200 | VIBRATING MOTOR DISPOSED EXTERNAL TO ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A system for providing vibratory alerts includes an electronic device having a first housing and configured to provide vibratory alert control signals. The system further includes a vibrating motor disposed within a second housing that is external to the first housing of the electronic device, wherein the second housing is mountable adjacent to or near the body of a user to cause vibratory alerts in response to the vibratory alert control signals, and wherein the second housing includes one of: a clip mounted externally on the first housing of the electronic device and wherein the clip is configured to clip the electronic device adjacent to the body of the user, a holster to hold the electronic device and wherein the holster is configured to hang, clip, or affix the second housing adjacent to or near the body of the user, a wrist band of a bracelet, or a buckle or strap of a belt. | 10-27-2011 |
20110263201 | Method and Apparatus for Providing Files To Electronic Devices - Method and apparatus for transferring a file from a sending wireless device to a receiving wireless device in a short-range wireless system. A file to be sent to the receiving wireless device is selected on the sending wireless device. The sending wireless device has a device list of receiving wireless devices. If the receiving wireless device is absent on the device list, the sending wireless device searches and identifies new devices. A device among the identified new devices is selected as the receiving wireless device. A connection is established between the sending wireless device and the receiving wireless device; and the file is sent to the receiving wireless device. | 10-27-2011 |
20110263202 | BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - A Bluetooth communication method and system allows a Bluetooth device to rapidly establish a Bluetooth connection. A first Bluetooth device that is in a client mode displays a visual representation of its ID on a display unit. A second Bluetooth device that is in a host mode acquires the displayed visual representation of the ID of the first Bluetooth device via a camera module and extracts the ID of the first Bluetooth device. The second Bluetooth device transmits a Bluetooth communication-connection-request signal to the first Bluetooth device using the extracted ID. The first Bluetooth device transmits a replay signal responding to the Bluetooth communication-connection-request signal to the second Bluetooth device. The second Bluetooth device receives the reply signal and establishes a Bluetooth communication channel with the first Bluetooth device. | 10-27-2011 |
20110263203 | CONNECTOR FOR MEDICAL DEVICE - An apparatus includes a housing, a plurality of electrical contacts, and a transceiver. The housing is configured to engage a feature of a portable device. The plurality of electrical contacts are coupled to the housing and configured to establish an electrical connection with an electrical circuit of the portable device. The transceiver is coupled to the housing and configured to communicate with a secondary device. | 10-27-2011 |
20110263204 | VIRTUAL MACHINE READABLE COMMUNICATION TAG - A system for imitating the functionality of a machine readable tag using a virtual tag. In at least one embodiment, a WCD ( | 10-27-2011 |
20110263205 | CONTAINER COMMUNICATION MODULE - Systems and method for safely distributing software for electronic controllers in the refrigeration container industry, and also communication systems primarily for electronic controllers related to refrigeration containers in which fast software distribution in container controllers is achieved by introducing a buffer memory in the communication system, which buffer memory includes a new container controller software version. The communication system distributes the new container controller software version by a communication device, to receiving communication systems where the new software version is placed in the buffer memory. As a result, it can be achieved that software distribution starts automatically as soon as only one communication system includes the new software version, this software version will in a very short period be spread into all container controllers, e.g., on board a ship or in a container yard. | 10-27-2011 |
20110269400 | METHOD OF OPTIMIZED-SHARING OF MULTIMEDIA CONTENT AND MOBILE TERMINAL EMPLOYING THE SAME - An apparatus and method for displaying information using a mobile terminal connectable to peripheral devices through corresponding wireless communication is provided. The method includes receiving profile information from one or more of the peripheral devices connected through the corresponding wireless communication, each received profile information having identification information identifying the corresponding one or more peripheral devices and content information on the corresponding one or more peripheral devices, and listing the received profile information organized according to signal strength of the one or more peripheral devices from which the profile information is received. | 11-03-2011 |
20110269401 | METHOD FOR MEASURING FLUID FLOW IN A NON-CONDUCTIVE PIPE - A microradio is provided with a hysteretic switch to permit an optimum range increasing charging cycle, with the charging cycle being long relative to the transmit cycle. Secondly, an ensemble of microradios permits an n | 11-03-2011 |
20110275320 | MULTIMEDIA PLAYBACK CALIBRATION METHODS, DEVICES AND SYSTEMS - A multimedia playback calibration method includes a calibration module operating on a mobile communications device to cause it to: introduce test data at a first end, in the mobile device, of a playback path and receive data, played back by a playback device at a second end of the playback path, at a sensor integral to the mobile device; compare the received data against the test data to determine a characteristic of the playback path; and configure the mobile device to compensate for this characteristic. The mobile device may comprise a handheld casing enclosing a central processing unit, a multimedia player module for initiating playback of at least one data stream on a playback device, communication capability for forwarding the at least one data stream from the mobile device to the playback device along a playback path and the calibration module, | 11-10-2011 |
20110275321 | Integrated Vehicle Key and Mobile Phone System for Preventing Mobile Phone Use While Driving - A system and method for controlling wireless communications in a vehicle is disclosed. The system comprises a vehicle key ( | 11-10-2011 |
20110275322 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND PROGRAM - To start secondary use of a spectrum without causing an adverse effect on a communication service for primary usage, provided is a communication control method including the steps of acquiring data related to a communication environment surrounding a first communication device at the first communication device, determining that a second communication service using a part or whole of a spectrum assigned to a first communication service is available when the acquired data related to the communication environment satisfies a first condition, and permitting usage of the second communication service when the data related to the communication environment satisfies a second condition at the first communication device or a second communication device. | 11-10-2011 |
20110275323 | Headset System With Two User Interfaces - A headset system ( | 11-10-2011 |
20110275324 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH MICRORADIOS - A microradio is provided with a hysteretic switch to permit an optimum range increasing charging cycle, with the charging cycle being long relative to the transmit cycle. Secondly, an ensemble of microradios permits an n | 11-10-2011 |
20110275325 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING TRANSMITTING DIVERSITY AND RECEIVING DIVERSITY - The method for implementing transmitting diversity includes receiving a symbol from a destination mobile terminal, by a mobile terminal which is in the same mobile terminal group with the destination mobile terminal, wherein the symbol is also sent from the destination mobile terminal to a base station; and processing, by the mobile terminal, the symbol and transmitting the symbol processed to the base station. The method for implementing receiving diversity includes receiving, by a mobile terminal, a symbol from a base station; finding a destination mobile terminal which is in the same mobile terminal group with the mobile terminal if the mobile terminal is not the destination of the symbol; and forwarding the symbol to the destination mobile terminal. Embodiments of the present invention solve the problem of excessive size of a mobile terminal used for implementing transmitting diversity and receiving diversity, and also reduces bit error rate (BER). | 11-10-2011 |
20110281519 | Information Exchange Via Bluetooth Service Discovery Protocol Service Records - Methods and apparatuses for Bluetooth communications are disclosed. In one example, data is exchanged between Bluetooth devices utilizing Service Discovery Protocol service records. | 11-17-2011 |
20110281520 | WIRELESS HEAT SINK, WIRELESS HEAT SINK SYSTEM AND WIRELESS HEAT SINKING METHOD FOR THE SAME - A wireless heat sink, a wireless heat sink system and a wireless heat sinking method are disclosed. The wireless heat sink receives a control command sent by an external device. An internal heat sink device is controlled according to content of the control command to control power ON or power OFF of a thermoelectric cooler of the heat sink device or to control power ON, power OFF, or change rotation speed setting of a heat sink fan in the heat sink device. Thus, the heat sink auto switches operations of the heat sink device correspondingly according to temperature changes of the external device. | 11-17-2011 |
20110281521 | PING FEATURE FOR ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A pinging electronic device, a pingable electronic device and a network for the devices are disclosed. The ping electronic devices comprising a ping function and a transmitter wherein the ping function is adapted to generate and the transmitter is adapted to transmit over an ad hoc wireless network at least one associated ping control message to at least one pingable electronic device paired to the pinging electronic device for actuation of at least one indicator element of the at least one pingable electronic device. | 11-17-2011 |
20110281522 | TRACTOR TRAILER DATA COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - A tractor-trailer PLC apparatus has a BlueTooth RF transceiver coupled to a PLC reader or gateway to communicate PLC data from the tractor and/or trailer through an antenna to a cellular data transceiver in the tractor or trailer for remote communication to an external computer based system. | 11-17-2011 |
20110281523 | PAIRING SYSTEM, PAIRING APPARATUS, METHOD OF PROCESSING PAIRING APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM - Disclosed is a pairing apparatus | 11-17-2011 |
20110294422 | Method and apparatuses for transmitting information by means of far field and short range communication - The present invention relates to a method and apparatuses for transmitting information. More particularly, the present invention relates to a method and apparatuses for transmitting information comprising first and second information to and/or from a mobile terminal in environments where different wireless access technologies are available. In accordance with the inventive method, the first information is transmitted by means of far field communication to and/or from a base station of a first communications network, and the second information is transmitted by means of short range communication to and/or from a short range communication device which is communicatively coupled to a second communications network. The second communications network is communicatively coupled to the first communications network. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294423 | DUAL-MODE EARPHONE AND METHOD FOR ANSWERING USING THE SAME - Provided is an earphone with dual communication modes and a method for answering using the same. The earphone wirelessly links a first remote device and a second remote device. The earphone particularly includes a microprocessor coupled with a Bluetooth communication module, a DECT communication module, a microphone, and a speaker. The microprocessor is controlled by a first control signal, and used for transmitting a first incoming signal or a second incoming signal to the speaker. The microprocessor then sends a reply signal to the first remote device via the Bluetooth communication module, or to the second remote device via the DECT communication module. The first incoming signal is outputted as the first remote device receives an incoming call, and the second incoming signal is outputted when the second remote device receives the incoming call. Finally, the microphone outputs the reply signal. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294424 | OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR INTEROPERABLE SAFETY AND NON-SAFETY COMMUNICATIONS IN WIRELESS ENVIRONMENTS - For enhanced interoperability of safety and non-safety communications, a dual-radio type T RSU for improving services includes a first radio dedicated to the control channel and a second radio dedicated to the safety channel. The control channel is divided into a number of synchronous intervals, each about 100 milliseconds in duration. The safety channel is also divided into a number of synchronous intervals, each about 100 milliseconds in duration. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294425 | Electronic business/personal card and method of use thereof - The present invention includes a wireless communication method and device comprising a one-to-one exchange of wireless electronic device identifications or unique profile IDs between a sending and a receiving party who are both registered users of the electronic business/personal card service and further comprising upload of the wireless electronic identifications to a data server computer system wherein said system matches said identifications with those of registered users and said computer system displays information about the user associated with each identification. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294426 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM - There is provided an information processing apparatus including a transmission processing section which performs short-range one-to-one communication with a communication partner device, a reception processing section, a received data processing section which acquires information displayed by the communication partner device by communication with the communication partner device, a display processing section which performs processing for displaying information acquired by the information acquisition section, and a display section which displays the information. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily and visually recognize the information displayed on the communication partner device of a connection destination. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294427 | DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A system is provided for transmitting data between a first component and a second component, which rotates relative to the first component. The system includes a first coupling element of limited angular extent mounted to the first component, and a second coupling element of limited angular extent mounted to the second component. The first and second coupling elements come into angular alignment once per revolution of the second component relative to the first component. The system further includes a first transceiver connected to the first coupling element, and a second transceiver connected to the second coupling element. The first and second transceivers are configured to detect the angular alignment of the first and second coupling elements. The first and second transceivers are further configured to transmit data between the first and second transceivers via the first and second coupling elements when the angular alignment is detected. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294428 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, READER/WRITER DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - There is provided a communication device including a secure communication unit configured to perform secure communication with an external reader/writer device, the secure communication being secure close-proximity communication, a first communication unit configured to perform high-speed communication with the reader/writer device, the high-speed communication being close-proximity communication that is faster than the secure communication, a second communication unit configured to, when communication via the high-speed communication is disconnected, communicate with the reader/writer device with a communication mode that is different from a communication mode of the high-speed communication, a power transmission unit configured to receive power transmitted from the reader-writer device by power transmission, and a secondary battery configured to store the power received by the power transmission unit. The second communication unit may be configured to, when communication via the high-speed communication is disconnected, operate with the power stored in the secondary battery. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294429 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - The communication device ( | 12-01-2011 |
20110294430 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING AN END TERMINAL TO A PLURALITY OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINALS TO BE PROVIDED WITH A SERVICE IN A CPNS ENVIRONMENT, AND CPNS SERVER AND END TERMINAL FOR SAME - The present invention is a method and system, with the system comprising an CPNS server and an end-point terminal for connecting the end-point terminal to a plurality of mobile communication terminals for providing the end-point terminal with a variety of services in a CPNS environment. The CPNS server makes a request for a CPNS service via a second mobile communication terminal, analyzes the request as transmitted to provide the end terminal with the service. The end-point terminal is connected to the first mobile communication terminal through a short-range wireless communication network for performing the CPNS service and is connected to a second mobile communication terminal through short-range wireless communication during the performance of the CPNS server to request and receive specific CPNS service from the CPNS server. Since the end-point terminal is connected to a plurality of mobile communication terminals and provided with CPNS services, the end-point terminal can simultaneously provide a variety of services. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294431 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN A NETWORK COMPRISING A BATTERYLESS ZIGBEE DEVICE, NETWORK AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to method for wireless communicating in a network comprising a resource-constrained end device, and a first router device, wherein the method comprises the following steps:—the end device (ZBLD) sending a trigger for proxy search procedure,—the first router (R | 12-01-2011 |
20110294432 | FAST AND RELIABLE CHANNEL CLASSIFICATION ALGORITHMS IN BLUETOOTH NETWORKS TO DETECT AND AVOID 2.4 GHZ INTERFERERS - A method for frequency selection in a wireless communication system, includes performing in a wireless device, receiving at least one signal at a current frequency; processing at least one data packet received via the received at least one signal to determine the presence of bit errors; characterizing the received at least one signal received at the current frequency based on the processing of the at least one data packet; classifying the current frequency based on at least the characterization of the received at least one signal; and selecting the current frequency based on the classification. At least one signal strength measurement may be performed on the received at least one signal, and the processing of the at least one data packet may be performed within a current channel classification update interval. | 12-01-2011 |
20110300802 | EXCHANGING IDENTIFIERS BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TO DETERMINE FURTHER INFORMATION TO BE EXCHANGED OR FURTHER SERVICES TO BE PROVIDED - A server facilitates a transaction between a first wireless device and a second wireless device. An identifier associated with the second wireless device has been sent to the first wireless device using a short range wireless connection; the server receives the identifier. The server then determines location information associated with both the first and said second wireless devices. If the location of the first and second wireless devices is appropriate for authorizing the transaction, the server then determines authentication information relating to the second wireless device. The server then provides authorization to the first or second wireless device to proceed with the transaction. The authorization may be based at least in part upon the identifier, the authentication information and the locations of said first and second wireless devices. | 12-08-2011 |
20110300803 | System and Method for Secure Short-Range Communication - A system and method for enabling secure short-range communication. A close proximity transmitter is used that is designed with a relatively poor radiator as compared to a conventional transmitter supporting conventional transmissions such as mobile phone communications, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth communication. The close-proximity transmitter and the conventional transmitter are selectively activated based on a communication mode. | 12-08-2011 |
20110306297 | Antenna Control - In at least some embodiments, a computer system includes a first wireless technology (FWT) module and a second wireless technology (SWT) module. The computer system also comprises control logic coupled to the FWT module and the SWT module. The control logic determines if the FWT and SWT modules are both turned on and, if so, disables at least one SWT antenna based on its proximity to a FWT antenna being less than a predetermined distance while enabling at least one other FWT antenna. | 12-15-2011 |
20110306298 | Intelligent Presence Management in a Communication Routing System - Systems and methods for intelligent presence management in a communication routing system are provided. In exemplary embodiments, an inbound communication may be received for a user. The user's presence status is determined and a profile associated with the user is reviewed. Based on rules contained within the profile, appropriate instructions may be generated for routing the inbound communication in accordance with some embodiments. In other embodiments, instructions may be generated to log the user in or out with the communication routing system. | 12-15-2011 |
20110312273 | Cellular Phone Entry Techniques - A cell phone is mated with the vehicle system and thereafter used to obtain access to the vehicle. A user who has a cell phone automatically can obtain access to the vehicle. An embodiment describes a USB key that provides access to the vehicle, and in an emergency, either a complete or partial version of the key can be downloaded from a server. | 12-22-2011 |
20110319020 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTI-STAGE DEVICE FILTERING IN A BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY DEVICE - A Bluetooth low energy (BLE) device receives advertising packets from an advertising BLE device. The BLE device filters the received advertising packets utilizing hardware to search for the advertiser. If the advertiser is not found by the hardware, the packet filtering continues utilizing firmware. Device identity information, comprising non-private and/or private device identities, of preferred BLE devices is partitioned to form a different white list for the hardware, firmware, and host, respectively, to concurrently support privacy and white listing. If the advertiser is found by the hardware, the hardware sends a response to the advertiser following a successful CRC check performed in the hardware. If the advertiser is found by the firmware, the device identity information of the advertiser is inserted in the white list for the hardware. The host may be awakened based on the device configuration and/or attribute type information of the received advertising packets. | 12-29-2011 |
20110319021 | INTRA-ORAL TISSUE CONDUCTION MICROPHONE - Intra-oral tissue conduction microphone apparatus and methods are described for internal, but non-surgically installed microphones located in the oral cavity. An intra-oral tissue conduction microphone may be attached, adhered or integrated with a removable dental appliance which is positioned against the inside surfaces of the cheek, palate or gingiva. The sensor serves as a component in a non-observable hearing, body sound monitoring or communications device that can operate in environments incompatible with most existing devices. Generally, a piezoelectric film serves as the sensor that is well matched to tissue and which directly converts to an electrical signal by the piezoelectric effect signals which are received through the oral mucosa, gingiva or palate. | 12-29-2011 |
20110319022 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MONITORING AND LOCATING ITEMS - A monitoring system includes a first device and a second device. The first device includes: a first Bluetooth transceiver, for transmitting a first message to a second Bluetooth transceiver, wherein the first message includes a request from the second Bluetooth transceiver to transmit a second message that includes a second message transmission power indicator that is indicative of a transmission power of the second message; and for receiving the second massage by the first Bluetooth transceiver and measuring a reception power of the second message; and a distance calculator for calculating the distance between the first and second Bluetooth transceivers based on a relationship between the transmission power of the second message and the reception power of the second message. The second device includes: a second Bluetooth transceiver, for transmitting the second message to the first Bluetooth transceiver, wherein the second message includes the second message transmission power indicator that is indicative of the transmission power of the second message. | 12-29-2011 |
20110319023 | FREQUENCY SEPARATION FOR MULTIPLE BLUETOOTH DEVICES RESIDING ON A SINGLE PLATFORM - A single host device, comprising a plurality of wireless devices, estimates bandwidth requirements such as maximum rates and/or an average data rate expected by each of a plurality of applications to be run on the single host. For each wireless device, available frequencies utilized are determined based on the estimated bandwidth requirements. Each of the plurality of applications is allocated to corresponding one or more wireless devices based on the determined available frequencies so as to, for example, concurrently run corresponding applications on the single host. The determined available frequencies are assigned to corresponding wireless devices based on the estimated bandwidth requirements. The determined available frequencies and the plurality of applications may be reassigned and reallocated, respectively. Each of plurality of applications is allocated to the corresponding one or more wireless devices based on the assigned/reassigned available frequencies and/or the estimated bandwidth requirements. | 12-29-2011 |
20120003931 | Method for Dynamic Changes to a User Profile Based on External Service Integration - The different illustrative embodiments provide a method, system, and program product for dynamic changes to a user profile based on external service integration. The method, system and program product comprise establishing a direct two-way communication between a first mobile device and a second mobile device when a first mobile device direct transceiver and a second mobile device direct transceiver are within a range of each other. A number of data is gathered from a number of internal sources or a number of external sources. An analysis of the number of data to determine a modification to a first list stored in the first device is performed. A modified first list is generated based on the analysis. The modified first list is automatically sent from the first mobile device to the number of second devices responsive to establishing the direct two-way communication between the first mobile device and a number of second devices. | 01-05-2012 |
20120003932 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION IN BLUETOOTH PROXIMITY IMPLEMENTATIONS - A Bluetooth host controller located in a Bluetooth proximity host comprising a Bluetooth host device may be configured to automatically generate a set of notifications or triggers based on the relative proximity to other Bluetooth devices. The Bluetooth host device stays in a lower power mode until one of the Bluetooth triggers is received. | 01-05-2012 |
20120003933 | MEDICAL DEVICES WITH PROXIMITY DETECTION - A wireless medical device is disclosed. The wireless medical device comprises a processor, a memory, a sensor for detecting a physiological signal, a radio and a proximity detector to measure a distance of the wireless medical device relative to a second wireless medical device. The proximity detector includes a ranging functionality. A wireless communication channel is created when a distance between the wireless medical device and the second wireless medical device is within a first predetermined threshold. The distance is greater than zero. | 01-05-2012 |
20120003934 | COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A HOST DEVICE AND AN ACCESSORY VIA AN INTERMEDIATE DEVICE - A host device and an accessory exchange information (e.g., commands and data) via an intermediate device. The host device and accessory can each connect to the intermediate device through a direct wired path and can exchange commands and data with the intermediate device. The host device and the accessory can also “tunnel” information to each other through the intermediate device, by packaging the tunneled information as a payload of a command recognizable by the intermediate device; the intermediate device can repackage and forward the payload. In some embodiments, the tunneled information relates to configuring a wireless link (e.g., a Bluetooth pairing) between the host device and the accessory. | 01-05-2012 |
20120003935 | COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A HOST DEVICE AND AN ACCESSORY VIA AN INTERMEDIATE DEVICE - A host device and an accessory exchange information (e.g., commands and data) via an intermediate device. The host device and accessory can each connect to the intermediate device through a direct wired path and can exchange commands and data with the intermediate device. The host device and the accessory can also “tunnel” information to each other through the intermediate device, by packaging the tunneled information as a payload of a command recognizable by the intermediate device; the intermediate device can repackage and forward the payload. In some embodiments, the tunneled information relates to configuring a wireless link (e.g., a Bluetooth pairing) between the host device and the accessory. | 01-05-2012 |
20120003936 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN A MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE AND AN AUXILIARY SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a system and method for facilitating short-range wireless communications between a mobile wireless device and an auxiliary device. The wireless device includes a short-range transceiver for communicating with an auxiliary device; a signal module for providing a mode control signal; and, a control module for controllably shifting a short-range transceiver between a power saver mode and a search mode based on the mode control signal received from the signal module. When in the search mode, the short-range transceiver is operable to search for the auxiliary device to communicate therewith. When in a power saver mode, the short-range transceiver is not operable to search for the auxiliary device. | 01-05-2012 |
20120009874 | ALLOWED SPECTRUM INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - A system for determining allowed channels for operating in unlicensed bandwidth. Initially, an apparatus may determine whether valid allowed channel information corresponding to the current position of the apparatus already exists in the apparatus. If the allowed channel information corresponding to the current position of the apparatus does not exist in the apparatus or is invalid, the apparatus may then determine if the allowed channel information can be provided by another apparatus. If the allowed channel information is available from another apparatus, this information may be requested from the other apparatus. Otherwise, the allowed channel information may be requested from a database. | 01-12-2012 |
20120009875 | Short Range Wireless Communications - This document presents a wireless communication scheme utilizing a combination of two wireless communication schemes: a short range communication scheme and a radio communication scheme having a longer wireless transmission range than the wireless transmission range of the short range communication scheme. A short range signal is used to indicate a radio resource to be used for transmitting a radio signal, and the radio signal is then communicated in the radio resource indicated by the short range signal. | 01-12-2012 |
20120009876 | Process of Audio Data Exchanges of Information Between a Central Unit and a Bluetooth Controller - Electronic device comprising audio/video functionalities including: a central processing unit ( | 01-12-2012 |
20120009877 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN A VEHICLE - A control module for a wireless communication system in a vehicle having a plurality of operational settings includes a memory, a control circuit and a radio frequency transceiver. The memory is configured to store a plurality of performance characteristics associated with at least one mobile wireless communication device. The control circuit is coupled to the memory and is configured to retrieve at least one performance characteristic for a mobile wireless communication device associated with a vehicle occupant and used in conjunction with the wireless communication system. The control circuit is further configured to adjust at least one operational setting of the wireless communication system based on the at least one performance characteristics of the mobile wireless communication device. The radio frequency transceiver is coupled to the control circuit and is configured to communicate with the mobile wireless communication device. | 01-12-2012 |
20120009878 | Vehicle Communication System - A vehicle communication system detects the presence of a passenger wearable communication device. The system receives audio signals from multiple sources inside or outside of a vehicle. The system processes the signals before routing the signals to multiple destinations. The destinations may include wearable personal communication devices, front and/or rear speakers, and/or a remote mobile device. | 01-12-2012 |
20120009879 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AN ELECTRICAL SIGNAL - The invention provides a method for communicating an electrical signal from a first region to a second region via an electrically conductive wall between the first region and the second region, the method comprising using a transmitter for generating the signal in the first region, using the wall as part of a transmission path for the signal between the first region and the second region, wherein the transmitter comprises an output impedance and means for matching the output impedance and an impedance of the wall determined by an electrical property of the wall. The invention further provides a combination of a segment of a wall between a first region and a second region and a transmitter for use in the present method, and a system comprising a first region which is separated from a second region by means of an electrically conductive wall, wherein the first region comprises a transmitter for generating an electronic signal in the first region, which transmitter comprises an output impedance and means for matching the output impedance and an impedance of the wall determined by an electrical property of the wall. | 01-12-2012 |
20120015604 | REMOTE DEVICE PAIRING SETUP - A communication device having a display and instructions for displaying a short range wireless function. The instructions can cause the display of a Toolkit homepage in response to a Toolkit application being selected in a homepage of the communication device. In response to the short range wireless function being selected in the Toolkit homepage, status of the short range wireless function on the communication device can be displayed. In response to the short range wireless function being turned on, a short range wireless function menu can be displayed. In response to a pairing option being selected from the displayed short range wireless function menu, menu options for pairing a short range wireless device with the communication device can be displayed. | 01-19-2012 |
20120021685 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION STATE NOTIFICATION FUNCTION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic apparatus includes a communication module, a communication state notification module, a notification function information obtaining module, and a notification function control module. The communication module executes close proximity wireless transfer. The communication state notification module notifies at least one of a start time and an end time of data transfer executed between the communication module and an external device, the data transfer being executed by the close proximity wireless transfer. The notification function information obtaining module obtains notification function information indicative of a capability relating to a communication state notification function of the external device from the external device. The notification function control module requests the external device to execute or suppress the communication state notification function by the external device, based on the obtained notification function information. | 01-26-2012 |
20120028580 | AFTERMARKET TELEMATICS UNIT FOR USE WITH A VEHICLE - An aftermarket telematics unit for use with a vehicle includes, but is not limited to, a housing that is configured for mounting in an interior of a vehicle, a receiver mounted within the housing and configured to receive a first short range wireless signal at a first frequency, a fob component mounted within the housing and configured to transmit a second short range wireless signal at a second frequency, and a controller mounted within the housing and coupled to the wireless receiver and the fob component. The controller is configured to provide instructions to the fob component to transmit the second short range wireless signal when the wireless receiver receives the first short range wireless signal. | 02-02-2012 |
20120028581 | PORTABLE TERMINAL FOR HAVING DETACHABLE BLUETOOTH HEADSET - A portable terminal with a detachable BLUETOOTH headset is provided. The terminal includes the BLUETOOTH headset installed detachably in the portable terminal, a receiver module and a microphone module installed in the BLUETOOTH headset and used for phone call, an electrical connection means for, when the BLUETOOTH headset is installed in the portable terminal, electrically connecting the BLUETOOTH headset with the portable terminal, and a controller for detecting an installation or non-installation of the BLUETOOTH headset and for performing a corresponding operation. When the BLUETOOTH headset is installed in the portable terminal, the receiver module of the BLUETOOTH headset is used as a receiver module for the portable terminal. | 02-02-2012 |
20120028582 | METHODS OF OPERATING ELECTRONIC DEVICES, AND METHODS OF PROVIDING ELECTRONIC DEVICES - Some embodiments include a method disposing an integrated circuit die within a housing, the integrated circuit die having integrated circuitry formed thereon, the integrated circuitry including first transponder circuitry configured to transmit and receive radio frequency signals, wherein the integrated circuit die is void of external electrical connections for anything except power supply external connections; and disposing second transponder circuitry, discrete from the first transponder circuitry, within the housing, the second transponder circuitry being configured to transmit and receive radio frequency signals, wherein the first and second transponder circuitry are configured to establish wireless communication between one another within the housing, the second transponder circuitry being disposed within 24 inches of the first transponder circuitry within the housing. | 02-02-2012 |
20120034871 | INTRA-DEVICE RF BUS AND CONTROL THEREOF - A device includes a first integrated circuit, a second integrated circuit and an RF bus controller. Each of the first and second ICs includes a radio frequency (RF) bus transceiver. The RF bus controller is coupled to control intra-device RF communications between the RF bus transceivers of the first and second ICs. | 02-09-2012 |
20120034872 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GENERATING RF WITHOUT HARMONIC INTERFERENCE - A transmitter capable of operating according to a first standard that does not interfere with a nearby frequency generator operating according to a second standard. The transmitter comprises an oscillator, a frequency divider, a mixer, and a filter. The oscillator is configured to output a first frequency that is outside of a frequency harmonic of the frequency generator. The frequency divider is coupled to the oscillator and divides the first frequency by a selective divide ratio to produce a second frequency. The mixer is configured to receive the first and second frequencies, which combines them to produce a mixed frequency. The filter is then used to filters the mixed frequency to obtain the higher portion of the mixed frequency. The divide ratio of the frequency divider is selected base on the desired output frequency of the transmitter such that a 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz ISM band frequency is achieved. | 02-09-2012 |
20120040615 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR COMMUNITY-WIDE INFORMATION EXCHANGE VIA INDIVIDUAL COMMUNICATIONS TERMINALS - A method for detecting matching profiles in an environment of wireless terminals each having a short range communications capability, comprises the steps of: generating profiles respectively belonging to a plurality of users, storing said profiles in wireless terminals associated with said user, when a pair of terminals become in range with each other, automatically establishing a short range bidirectional communications channel therebetween, through this channel, transmitting the profiles stored in each terminal to the other terminal, performing a matching test between said received profiles and other profiles previously stored in the terminal, and when a matching between profiles is determined by a terminal, providing profile matching information so that the users to which said profiles belong can be put in connection with each other. The present invention also provides other related communication methods, as well as a terminal and a system for implementing the methods. | 02-16-2012 |
20120045990 | Intelligent Audio Routing for Incoming Calls - A user's wireless communication device communicates cellular signals with a remote party over a wireless communications network and short-range wireless signals with a headset worn by the user. Upon receiving an incoming call, a controller in the user's device determines whether a microphone integrated with the user's device, or a microphone integrated with the headset, is closest to the user's mouth. Based on that determination, the controller routes the incoming audio signals to whichever speaker is associated with the microphone that is closest to the user's mouth. | 02-23-2012 |
20120045991 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, X-RAY SENSOR, AND PROGRAM STORAGE MEDIUM - A wireless communication apparatus includes an X-ray sensor that transmits X-ray image data, a wireless access point that receives the X-ray image data from the X-ray sensor by wireless communication, and an entry apparatus that communicates with the X-ray sensor by short-range communication. A wireless setting apparatus sets wireless communication parameters for starting the wireless communication between the X-ray sensor and the wireless access point to the wireless access point and sets the same wireless communication parameters as those set to the wireless access point to the X-ray sensor by performing short-range wireless communication from the entry device. | 02-23-2012 |
20120045992 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SHARING DATA IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - Provided is an apparatus and method for sharing data in a portable terminal. The apparatus includes a first Bluetooth module, a second Bluetooth module, and a sharing managing unit. The first Bluetooth module is configured to set a first communication area to which the portable terminal belongs, and the second Bluetooth module is configured to set a second communication area adjacent to the first communication area. The sharing managing unit is configured to control the first Bluetooth module and the second Bluetooth module to share data including Bluetooth Ids of other terminals of the first communication area and data of the second communication area for a subsequent display. | 02-23-2012 |
20120045993 | Apparatus for discovering devices in a wireless network - A Bluetooth-enabled computing device includes a user interface for displaying a prompt to specify a descriptive identifier for a network device prior to performance of a Bluetooth Device Discovery Routine, the descriptive identifier being different from Bluetooth Device Discovery Routine Identifiers. A system memory has entries including descriptive identifiers, each descriptive identifier corresponding to a network device pre-configured with a connection profile. A connection manager determines if a specified descriptive identifier is a match to any entry in the system memory and to implements a connection to a network device corresponding to a matching entry. Otherwise the connection manager performs a discovery routine to locate and establish a connection to at least one available network device corresponding to the specified descriptive identifier. A Bluetooth compatible wireless transceiver is operable to transmit and receive signals associated with the connection to the network device and the discovery routine. | 02-23-2012 |
20120058723 | GUIDING MODULE AND METHOD OF USING THE SAME - Disclosed is a guiding module and method of using the same. The guiding module includes an access unit, a memory unit, a controller and a projection unit. The access unit is used for receiving the guiding information which stores in an electronic product with guiding function. The memory unit is used for storing the guiding information which is sent by the electronic product. The controller is used for processing the guiding information and sending it. The projection unit is used for receiving the guiding information which is sent out by the controller and projecting it. The guiding module utilizes the projection unit for projecting the guiding information of the electronic product so as to magnify the projection picture, therefore, the driver can clearly identify the guiding information. | 03-08-2012 |
20120058724 | In-vehicle apparatus - An in-vehicle apparatus for performing a short range communication with a road side apparatus, which performs a hybrid communication including a broadcast communication and a point-to-point communication, is disclosed. The in-vehicle apparatus includes a communication unit and a retry count determination unit that determines whether a count of failure to establish the communication in an activation channel in the communication unit reaches a preset retry count. The in-vehicle apparatus re-selects a communication frequency when the retry count determination unit determines that the count of failure to establish the communication in the activation channel reaches the preset retry count. | 03-08-2012 |
20120058725 | Handheld Media and Communication Device with a Detachable Projector - A novel handheld media and communication device with a detachable projector unit is disclosed. A media library for media assets is included in a file storage system of the projector unit while metadata of the assets is stored in a file storage system of the media and communication device. The device is used as a remote control device to control the operation of delivering media assets through the projector unit after the unit is detached from the device. The projector unit may also be used to connect to a media delivery unit such as a desktop projector, a TV terminal or an audio system for delivering media assets. | 03-08-2012 |
20120058726 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, EXTERNAL DEVICE EXTENSION SYSTEM, EXTERNAL DEVICE EXTENSION METHOD, EXTERNAL DEVICE EXTENSION PROGRAM, AND PROGRAM RECORDING MEDIUM - By effectively using various functions of other terminals, the convenience of an information processing device is improved. | 03-08-2012 |
20120064829 | MOBILE DEVICE INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE EXPANSION DEVICE AND SYSTEM HAVING THE SAME - A method and apparatus is disclosed herein for providing an I/O extension for a mobile device. In one embodiment, the apparatus comprises: a first interface to the mobile device; a second interface to a cloud; a third interface to a display device; a fourth interface to one or more user input devices; and a controller, coupled to the first, second, third and fourth interfaces, to coordinate information exchange between the mobile device, the cloud and the one or more user input devices to enable display on the display device of data from the mobile device and the cloud, including full-resolution rendered web pages from a full browser running on the mobile device. | 03-15-2012 |
20120064830 | In-vehicle apparatus - A frequency switching terminal is provided to input a signal for switching frequencies of a reception circuit. A smart ECU is connected to the frequency switching terminal via a connection cable. When the signal for switching the frequencies is inputted into an external input terminal of the reception circuit from the smart ECU via the frequency switching terminal, the reception circuit receives a first electric wave transmitted from a portable terminal for smart entry. In contrast, when the signal for switching the frequencies is not inputted into the external input terminal of the reception circuit from the smart ECU via the frequency switching terminal, the reception circuit receives a second electric wave transmitted from a tire sensor. | 03-15-2012 |
20120071092 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE INCLUDING ACTUATOR AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING SAME FOR PROVIDING TACTILE OUTPUT - A method of controlling an electronic device includes detecting receipt of an input, determining a response number in response to receipt of the input, and actuating an actuator of the electronic device a discrete integer number of times based on the response number. | 03-22-2012 |
20120071093 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING BLUETOOTH CONNECTION BETWEEN CRADLE AND HANDHEL DATA CAPTURE DEVICE - A method and apparatus for identifying a Bluetooth connection between a cradle and at least one handheld data capture device that includes a barcode reading arrangement or an RFID reader. The apparatus includes a cradle configured to accommodate a handheld data capture device detachably settled therein. The apparatus also includes a connection indicator configured to be activated, in response to a find-connection command, if a Bluetooth connection between the cradle and the handheld data capture device is identified. In some implementations, the connection indicator is on the cradle and it can be a light emitting diode, a speaker, or a vibration generator. | 03-22-2012 |
20120071094 | Communication through a composite barrier - The present invention discloses a system that implements data communications through a barrier composed of composite, layered materials. A low frequency electromagnetic signal is used to achieve acceptable channel losses as the signal passes through a composite barrier which may comprise materials with variable conductivity and/or permeability. | 03-22-2012 |
20120071095 | Device Arranged To Use An Electromagnetic Link To Replicate A Serial Port - A device arranged to connect to a serial port and to use an electromagnetic link to replicate a serial connection thereto, the device comprising a link-processing module arranged to establish the electromagnetic link and at least one switching device capable of being switched from at least a first configuration to a second configuration and the link-processing module being further arranged to monitor at least one line of the serial port and the switching device being arranged to connect the or each monitored line to the link-processing module in a first and second configurations; the link-processing module being further arranged to
| 03-22-2012 |
20120071096 | In-vehicle apparatus - When connecting a multi-profile device by Bluetooth, an in-vehicle apparatus performs a MAP connection establishment process in succession to an HFP connection establishment process to have a MAP connection established earlier than a conventional timing, thereby reducing a waiting period before receiving a new message arrival notification from the multi-profile device through the MAP connection. | 03-22-2012 |
20120071097 | In-vehicle apparatus - A control circuit of an the in-vehicle apparatus repeatedly performs a Bluetooth connection operation to connect to both of registered cellular phones and registered portable AV players in such a manner that, if an HFP connection has already been established to a cellular phone prior to an AVP connection to a portable AV player, the control circuit performs one round of AVP connection attempts to all of the registered portable AV players according to a priority order, prior to performing connection attempts to connect other data communication type profile to the cellular phone. By using such a profile connection scheme, the AVP connection attempt will not be delayed until after a connection attempt of the other data communication type profile. | 03-22-2012 |
20120071098 | IMPROVEMENTS TO SHORT RANGE WIRELESS NETWORKS - A sensor for use in a wireless sensor network of devices, comprising:
| 03-22-2012 |
20120071099 | PORTABLE DEVICE - When a first module and a second module of a plurality of modules | 03-22-2012 |
20120071100 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A processing system is described that includes a wireless communication interface that wirelessly communicates with one or more wireless client devices in the vicinity of an establishment. The wireless communication interface receives a remote order corresponding to an item selected by at least one of the wireless client devices. A local server computer located in proximity to the establishment generates instructions for processing the remote order received from the wireless communication interface. The local server computer then passes the processing instructions to an order processing queue in preparation for processing of the remote order. | 03-22-2012 |
20120077435 | TK wireless adapter - An adapter for providing wireless communication between a transducer and a computer. The adapter of the present invention includes a processor and a first connector operable for connecting the adapter to the transducer. The connector is in electrical communication with the processor such that the processor receives at least one measured parameter from the transducer. The present invention also includes at least one radio transmitter in electrical communication with the processor, the processor operable to transfer the measured parameter to the at least one radio transmitter for wirelessly transmitting the measured parameter to the computer. The radio transmitter is able to broadcast in one or more wireless communication protocols. The adapter of the present invention is suitable for operation with any type of transducer that functions as a sensor/detector, an actuator, or the like, and is able to transfer the measured parameter detected by the transducer wirelessly to a computer. | 03-29-2012 |
20120077436 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO TRANSFER FILES BETWEEN TWO TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACES - Systems and methods for configuring transferring a file between wireless communication devices are presented. The source device receives an input via a touch screen interface. It queries a destination device to determine if the destination device has received an input via the destination devices touch screen interface that completes a file transfer gesture. The source device transfers the file based on the response of the destination device to the query. | 03-29-2012 |
20120077437 | Navigation Using a Headset Having an Integrated Sensor - A wireless communication device is configured to communicate signals with a headset worn by a user. The headset includes a sensor that measures the orientation of a user's head to determine which direction the user is looking. The sensor sends that information to the user's device. The device uses the orientation information and a determined geographical position of the user to predict a destination location for the user. | 03-29-2012 |
20120077438 | BLUETOOTH HEADSET FOR HELMET HAVING INTER-COMMUNICATION FUNCTION - A Bluetooth headset for a helmet having an inter-communication is provided. The Bluetooth headset includes a headset body configured to be mounted on a helmet, a microphone and a speaker that are configured to be installed on the headset body, a jog dial configured to be installed to perform a rotation operation and be subject to a push operation, a Bluetooth module configured to be accommodated in the headset body and to perform wireless communication while paired with an external Bluetooth device, and a control unit configured to be accommodated in the headset body to process a signal input from the microphone, a signal input according to the rotation operation and the push operation of the jog dial and a signal received from the Bluetooth module and output the processed signal to the speaker and the Bluetooth module. | 03-29-2012 |
20120077439 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND WIRELESS DEVICE FOR MONITORING PROTECTIVE HEADGEAR - A wireless device includes a sensor module that generates sensor data in response to an impact to the protective headgear. The sensor module includes an accelerometer and a gyroscope and wherein the sensor data includes linear acceleration data and rotational velocity data. A device processing module generates event data in response to the sensor data. A short-range wireless transmitter transmits a wireless signal that includes the event data. | 03-29-2012 |
20120077440 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND WIRELESS DEVICE FOR MONITORING PROTECTIVE HEADGEAR BASED ON POWER DATA - A wireless device includes a sensor module that generates sensor data in response to motion of protective headgear, wherein the sensor data includes acceleration data. A device processing module includes an event processing module that analyzes the sensor data to generate power data that represents power of impact imparted to the protective headgear and that generates event data that includes the power data. A short-range wireless transmitter transmits a wireless signal that includes the event data. | 03-29-2012 |
20120077441 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND WIRELESS DEVICE WITH POWER MANAGEMENT FOR MONITORING PROTECTIVE HEADGEAR - A wireless device includes a sensor module generates a wake-up signal and sensor data in response to motion of protective headgear, wherein the sensor data includes acceleration data. A device processing module generates event data in response to the sensor data. A short-range wireless transmitter transmits a wireless signal that includes the event data. A power management module selectively powers the short-range transmitter and the device processing module in response to the wake-up signal. | 03-29-2012 |
20120083207 | Method and System for 60 GHZ Distributed Communication - Methods and systems for 60 GHz distributed communication are disclosed and may include generating IF signals from baseband signals in a computing device with wireless capability. The IF signals may be communicated to remote RF modules within the computing device via coaxial lines. The IF signals may be up-converted to RF signals and transmitted via the RF modules. The IF signals in the coaxial lines may be tapped via taps coupled to the RF modules. The baseband signals may comprise video data, Internet streamed data, and/or data from a local data source. The RF signals may be communicated to a display device. Control signals for the RF devices may be communicated utilizing the coaxial lines. One or more of the RF devices may be selected based on a direction to a receiving device. The remote RF devices may comprise mixers. The RF signals may comprise 60 GHz signals. | 04-05-2012 |
20120083208 | WIRELESS ACCESSORY DEVICE PAIRING TRANSFER BETWEEN MULTIPLE HOST DEVICES - A wireless communications system includes an accessory device and multiple host devices. A host device pairs wirelessly with an accessory device using a unique link key, detects a primary trigger event and responds by transferring automatically its pairing with the accessory device to a second host device while all devices remain within wireless range of each other. The pairing transfer involves communicating the link key to the second host device, unpairing the accessory device from the first host device, and establishing a wireless pairing of the accessory device to the second host device. The primary trigger event can involve establishing a ported connection between host devices. A secondary trigger event results in the first host device automatically reclaiming its pairing with the accessory device. An accessory device can also select and pair with one of multiple host devices in response to a specific user gesture detected by the accessory device. | 04-05-2012 |
20120083209 | WIRELESS ACCESSORY DEVICE PAIRING DETERMINATION FOR MULTIPLE HOST DEVICES - A wireless communications system includes an accessory device and multiple host devices. A host device pairs wirelessly with an accessory device using a unique link key, detects a primary trigger event and responds by transferring automatically its pairing with the accessory device to a second host device while all devices remain within wireless range of each other. The pairing transfer involves communicating the link key to the second host device, unpairing the accessory device from the first host device, and establishing a wireless pairing of the accessory device to the second host device. The primary trigger event can involve establishing a ported connection between host devices. A secondary trigger event results in the first host device automatically reclaiming its pairing with the accessory device. An accessory device can also select and pair with one of multiple host devices in response to a specific user gesture detected by the accessory device. | 04-05-2012 |
20120083210 | Channel Randomization for Backoff Efficiency Improvement - Methods and apparatus for solving problems caused by backoff procedures like that specified in the BLUETOOTH Link Layer Specification, by introducing selected randomizations of communication channels used for communication by scanning devices. | 04-05-2012 |
20120083211 | MOBILE DEVICE AND METHOD OF ACCESSING CHANNEL USING MOBILE DEVICE - Disclosed is a mobile device to calculate an energy efficiency degree corresponding to a ratio of an amount of transmission of a data packet to an expected energy consumption, in response to the transmission of the data packet to a base station, to set a threshold value of the energy efficiency degree, and to determine whether to access a channel of the base station, based on the threshold value of the energy efficiency degree. | 04-05-2012 |
20120083212 | DATA TRANSMITTING SYSTEM AND DATA TRANSMITTING METHOD - A data transmitting system, comprising: a processor; a first transmitting interface; a first transmitting apparatus; a second transmitting interface; a second transmitting apparatus and a signal transmitting line. The processor enters a power down mode when the first transmitting apparatus does not output data. The first transmitting generates a data transmitting indication signal when the processor is operated in the power down mode and the first transmitting apparatus has data to be output. The second transmitting apparatus generates a recovery signal according to the data transmitting indication signal, and transmits the recovery signal to the processor via the second transmitting interface. Thereby the processor goes back to a normal mode to control the first transmitting apparatus to output data. | 04-05-2012 |
20120083213 | PORTABLE MOBILE APPARATUS PROVIDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE FOR USER AND METHOD THEREOF - The prevent invention relates to a portable mobile apparatus for a user for providing a supplementary service and a method for providing a supplementary service by using the same, and more particularly, to an apparatus and a method for providing supplementary enhanced services by using an application run in a portable mobile terminal when the portable mobile terminal such as a cellular phone or a smart phone is used for a service through short-range RF communication. The present invention can provide a variety of supplementary services to the user by using an operation function included in the application in the mobile terminal when performing the services through the short-range RF communication. Specifically, it is possible to automate the supplementary function or provide convenience to the user and interact with the user. | 04-05-2012 |
20120083214 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic device includes a communication module, a connection establishment module, a negotiation module, a service execution module, and an execution control module. The communication module executes close proximity wireless transfer. The connection establishment module establishes a connection between the communication module and an external device which are in a close proximity state. The negotiation module determines a service to be executed between the communication module and the external device through a negotiation process when the connection is established. The service execution module executes the service. The execution control module executes the negotiation process again in response to a user's request or a request from the external device if the connection is kept after the completion of the service. | 04-05-2012 |
20120088450 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING COMMUNICATION OVER DIFFERENT RANGES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and apparatus well suited for supporting communications over different ranges in, for example, a peer to peer wireless communications system, are described. In the peer to peer network at least some of the types of signals, e.g., peer discovery signals and/or paging signals, are transmitted with no closed loop power control. An exemplary peer to peer timing structure includes air link resources allocated for a particular type of signaling in which the resources are segmented into multiple blocks which do not overlap in time, different ones of the multiple blocks being associated with different ranges. The characteristics of the basic transmission units of the multiple blocks based on range are different, e.g., tone size and symbol width are different. A wireless communications device implements the peer to peer timing structure and uses resources from different range based blocks at different times. Data traffic transmission units may be the same regardless of the range. | 04-12-2012 |
20120088451 | DEVICE, SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF WIRELESS TRANSFER OF FILES - Device, system, and method of wireless transfer of files. For example, a method includes: identifying a selection of a representation of a digital object stored in a mobile device by detecting contact on a touch-sensitive surface of the mobile device at a contact position that corresponds to said representation; identifying a directional movement of said contact position on the touch-sensitive surface; and in response to said directional movement, wirelessly transferring data corresponding to the digital object to a nearby computing device. | 04-12-2012 |
20120094600 | PLATFORM FOR PATIENT MONITORING - A gateway device includes a transceiver in electrical communication with a processor, the transceiver being configured to communicate over a wireless network to both receive data from at least one body-worn sensor and transmit the data, and a plurality of indicator lights in electrical communication with the processor. A first of the indicator lights indicates successful power-on of the gateway device. A second of the indicator lights indicates establishment of a Bluetooth connection with a body-worn sensor. A third of the indicator lights indicates successful creation of a WiFi connection. A fourth of the indicator lights indicate successful creation of a cellular connection. | 04-19-2012 |
20120094601 | BLUETOOTH HEADSET WITH CAMERA FUNCTION AND REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM EMPLOYING THE SAME - A Bluetooth headset includes a camera circuit, a radio frequency circuit and an antenna. The camera circuit includes a lens module and an image processing circuit electrically connected to the lens module. The lens module is for capturing and obtaining images, and the processing circuit is for processing the images from the lens module. The radio frequency circuit is electrically connected to the camera circuit, and the antenna is electrically connected to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit processes the images from the image processing circuit, and the processed images from audio frequency circuit are transmitted to a portable electronic device through the antenna for the purpose of display. A rear view monitor system employing the Bluetooth headset is also described. | 04-19-2012 |
20120094602 | BLUETOOTH HEADSET FOR MOBILE PHONE - A Bluetooth headset for a mobile phone includes a body configured to transmit and receive a signal to and from a mobile phone via Bluetooth communication. The body is connected to at least one of a Subscriber Identification Module (SIM) card and a Universal SIM (USIM) card, and is further configured to obtain subscriber information from the one of the SIM card and the USIM card to provide the obtained subscriber information to the mobile phone. | 04-19-2012 |
20120094603 | Device and method for contactless short range communication - The subject innovation relates to a device for contactless short range communication. An exemplary device comprises a contactless communication module enabled for contactless short range communication with an external target. A processor of the device is configured to execute at least one contactless application. The exemplary device includes a smart card external to the processor and connected to the contactless communication module. The smart card provides an interface used by the contactless application to access functions of the contactless communication module via the smart card. | 04-19-2012 |
20120100806 | Utilization of Ubiquitous Transmitting Devices to Provide Access Control to Vehicles and /or Other Controlled Access Items/Areas - A first device for use to gain access to a vehicle or to a controlled access item or area, wherein access is controlled by a second device. The first device for carrying on a person of a user and paired with the second device. The first device comprises components having a primary function not related to gaining access; a limited range transmitter for transmitting a signal to the second device, the second device receiving the signal and determining whether the signal was transmitted from the first device; responsive to determining that the signal was transmitted from the first device, the second device for issuing a control signal permitting the user to gain access to the vehicle or to the controlled access item or area. | 04-26-2012 |
20120100807 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, a communication apparatus comprises a close proximity wireless transfer device, a closeness detection module and a device control module. The close proximity wireless transfer device executes a close proximity wireless transfer. The closeness detection module detects that the close proximity wireless transfer device and an external device are in a close proximity state. Power which the closeness detection module consumes is lower than power which the close proximity wireless transfer device consumes in an idle state. The device control module is configured to activate the close proximity wireless transfer device when the closeness detection module detects the close proximity state. | 04-26-2012 |
20120100808 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND DATA DOWNLOAD METHOD - The present invention aims to relay data by using two kinds of communication systems for continuous and smooth transferring of data in accordance with a connection state. A mobile communication terminal | 04-26-2012 |
20120108171 | Telemetry Conveyed by Pipe Utilizing Specks - Drill pipe segments, communication systems, and methods of manufacturing pipe segments usable for communicating data wirelessly between sensors and tools placed in an oil and/or gas well are provided. Communication specks are applied on at least one of an outer surface or an inner surface of the pipe segments or coil tubing. | 05-03-2012 |
20120108172 | PERSONAL DIGITAL CONTEXT - A personal digital context may be provided. A context element may be identified and used to update a context state associated with a user. Upon determining that a context-aware device is available, the context state may be provided to the context-aware device. | 05-03-2012 |
20120108173 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONNECTING WIRELESS NETWORK IN A DIGITAL DEVICE - A method and an apparatus for automatically connecting a wireless Local Area Network (LAN) between digital devices and executing an application program based on the wireless LAN, and more particularly, an apparatus and a method for generating device information indicating attributes in a digital device and obtaining attributes of a peripheral device by analyzing device information of the peripheral device. The apparatus includes a device information generation part configured to generate device information including information about attributes by analyzing the attributes of the digital device. The apparatus also includes a device recognition part configured, when receiving device information of a peripheral device, to obtain attribute information of a device corresponding to the received device information. The apparatus further includes a controller configured to control to transmit the device information generated by the device information generation part, to the peripheral device. | 05-03-2012 |
20120108174 | TECHNIQUES TO IMPROVE THE RADIO CO-EXISTENCE OF WIRELESS SIGNALS - Techniques are described that can be used to perform one or more of the following actions in order to reduce signal interference between WLAN and BlueTooth radios that are proximate to one another. One action is to selectively reduce a filter bandwidth in a WLAN radio applied to a received WLAN radio signal to reduce BlueTooth signal interference. An additional or alternative action is to selectively indicate a WLAN radio channel bandwidth larger than a channel bandwidth used for the WLAN radio so that the BlueTooth radio avoids transmitting over the indicated channel bandwidth. An additional or alternative action is to selectively reduce BlueTooth transmitter power in response to antenna isolation between BT and WLAN radio being less than a first threshold in order to reduce the likelihood of WLAN radio front end saturation. | 05-03-2012 |
20120115416 | WIRELESS DEVICE LIMITING GAIN OF A SHARED GAIN ELEMENT BETWEEN DIFFERENT WIRELESS PROTOCOLS - Limiting gain for simultaneously receiving first wireless signals according to a first wireless protocol and second wireless signals according to a second wireless protocol. The first signals may be received using a shared gain element. The shared gain element may be used by the first wireless protocol and the second wireless protocol. A transmission or reception of the second signals may be predicted. The transmission or reception of the second signals may be predicted for transmission or reception while receiving the first signals. Gain of the shared gain element may be limited based on the prediction. | 05-10-2012 |
20120115417 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING SERVICES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and method for selecting a preferred connection point from a choice of one or more available connection points in a wireless communication network. The system and method include: determining a link quality for the one or more available connection points; establishing a connection to a first connection point when there is no existing established connection, the first connection point offers a desired service, and the link quality for the first connection point exceeds a first threshold value, wherein a service priority is considered in determining the link quality of the first connection point; maintaining the established connection to the first connection point when the link quality exceeds a second threshold value; and making eligible the established connection to the first connection point for preemption by a second connection point, when the link quality for the first connection point is less than the second threshold value. | 05-10-2012 |
20120115418 | Vehicle Audio Application Management System Using Logic Circuitry - A method is described for operating a vehicle audio system having a wired audio source, a display, multiple speakers and logic circuitry. The system is configured to sense the availability of a wireless audio device that is located near the vehicle, and identify a wireless audio device record stored in memory. The wireless device record includes data codes from the wireless audio device and from a software application running on the device. When the data codes and a software application are identified on the device, a second software application is downloaded from memory and data is processed from the device with the second software application. The method provides a vehicle occupant with an option to play sound from the wireless audio device through vehicle speakers or a speaker in the device. | 05-10-2012 |
20120115419 | TECHNIQUES FOR MMWAVE WPAN COMMUNICATIONS WITH HIGH-DIRECTIONAL STEERABLE ANTENNAS COMBINING OMNI-DIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSIONS WITH BEAMFORMING TRAINING - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method for communicating in a millimeter wave (MMWAVE) wireless personal area network (WPAN) system using a reliable low-rate omni-directional communications mode implemented as TX-RX space scanning using directional antennas; and using a high-rate directional communications mode with beamformed directional antennas. | 05-10-2012 |
20120115420 | CHANNEL WIDTH SWITCHING IN MULTIPLE OBSS SYSTEMS - Briefly, in accordance with one or more embodiments, a device is capable of operating at a first bandwidth or a second bandwidth, and further capable of operating using a communication method intolerant to operation at the first bandwidth. If operation using a communication method intolerant to operation at the first bandwidth is desired, the device transmits an assertion of intolerance of operation at the first bandwidth to one or more devices on the network to cause the one or more devices on the network to switch operation at the second bandwidth. | 05-10-2012 |
20120122399 | WIRELESS SIGNAL PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - An apparatus and method are provided for receiving and processing a control signal and/or a data signal through a short-range wireless communication. The wireless signal processing apparatus preferably includes a connection detection unit that detects a connection of a peripheral device, and a communication unit that receives the control signal and the data signal from a client device through the short-range wireless communication. A data processing unit sends the received data signal to the peripheral device, and a mode control unit for controlling the communication unit to send the received data signal to the data processing unit when the connection detection unit detects the connection of the peripheral device. The apparatus and method may be utilized for various purposes on the basis of the short-range wireless communication, depending on whether or not the peripheral device is connected. | 05-17-2012 |
20120122400 | PROXIMITY WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS INCLUDING FIXED HOUSING AND MOVABLE HOUSING ROTATED ENDLESSLY - One array antenna including three induction coils is formed on an application integrated circuit of a fixed housing. Eight array antennas, each of which is arranged in a manner similar to that of the array antennas of the application integrated circuit, are formed at intervals of 45 degrees around a rotation axis on an imaging process integrated circuit of a movable housing. A controller selects one of the eight array antennas of the imaging process integrated circuit so that a magnitude of a difference between a rotation angle of a movable housing and a rotation angle of the movable housing becomes equal to or smaller than 22.5 degrees based on the rotation angle of the movable housing, and controls a stepping motor so that a selected array antenna opposes to the array antenna on the application integrated circuit. | 05-17-2012 |
20120129453 | DOCK FOR GUIDING ORIENTATION OF A MOBILE PHONE FOR ENHANCED ACOUSTIC DATA TRANSFER - An acoustic dock for guiding placement and orientation of a mobile device for enhanced acoustic data transfer comprises a bottom surface; a plurality of sides attached to the bottom surface for receiving a mobile device having a transducer; and one or more transducers placed in proximity to at least one of the plurality of sides, where the acoustic dock is configured to assist orientation of the mobile device in the acoustic dock so that the mobile device transducer is adjacent to and in proximity to the one or more transducers of the acoustic dock to facilitate acoustic data communication. | 05-24-2012 |
20120129454 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication terminal ( | 05-24-2012 |
20120135683 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING AN ACCESS LIST FOR BLUETOOTH DEVICES - A system and method are provided for configuring an access list on a first computing device for defining communication between the first computing device and a plurality of computing devices in a Bluetooth communication local network. The method comprises: generating a discovery request at the first computing device, the discovery request targeted to the plurality of computing devices and configured to generate a list of discovered devices for communication; and identifying at the first computing device, via a user interface, at least one selected computing device from the discovered devices being permitted to access the first computing device, the at least one selected computing device being defined with at least one device identifier to identify each of the at least one selected computing device in the access list, the access list for subsequent use in preventing access between the first computing device and each computing device not on the access list. | 05-31-2012 |
20120135684 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CUSTOMIZING BROADBAND CONTENT BASED UPON PASSIVE PRESENCE DETECTION OF USERS - Systems and methods for customizing broadband content based upon passive presence detection of users are provided. A user device in proximity to a customer premise device may be detected. The customer premise device may be configured to output programming content received from a service provider. An identifier of the detected user device may be determined. Based at least in part on the identifier, an identity of a user may be determined. Based at least in part on the identity of the user, content that is output by the customer premise device may be customized. | 05-31-2012 |
20120135685 | USER INTERFACE FOR A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is provided having an improved user interface in which an audible indicator is played out from an audio accessory to confirm radio transmission of a message sent from the audio accessory in response to activation of a wireless push-to-talk (PTT). The wireless PTT may be located on the audio accessory itself or embodied as a standalone device. The wireless PTT may be operated in conjunction with a two-way radio and a wired or wireless audio accessory device. The audible indicator ceases being played out of the accessory in response to deactivation of the wireless PTT and ending of the radio transmission. | 05-31-2012 |
20120135686 | Method and system for orderly connection of a bluetooth headset controlled by terminal - The disclosure provides a method for orderly connection of a bluetooth headset controlled by a terminal. The method includes: a terminal sets Hands-Free Profile (HFP) service status as visible and connectable, and sets Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) service status and Audio Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) service status as invisible and unconnectable; a bluetooth headset sends an HFP connection request to the terminal; and the terminal sends a response of accepting an HFP connection to the bluetooth headset. The disclosure also provides a system for orderly connection of a bluetooth headset controlled by a terminal. Application of the method and system may avoid different connection order of the profiles due to different manufacturers of the bluetooth headset when the bluetooth headset actively initiates a connection, which achieves a compatible connection of the profiles. | 05-31-2012 |
20120135687 | COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES BASED ON DEVICE-TO-DEVICE PHYSICAL CONTACT - A method includes detecting one or more physical contacts between the device and another device and determining whether the one or more physical contacts correspond to one or more taps. The method further includes initiating a discovery request to the other device, when it is determined that the physical contact corresponds to the one or more taps, and communicating to the other device when a communication link is established between the device and the other device based on the discovery request. | 05-31-2012 |
20120135688 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION STATE NOTIFICATION FUNCTION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic apparatus includes a communication module, a communication state notification module, a notification function information obtaining module, and a notification function control module. The communication module executes close proximity wireless transfer. The communication state notification module notifies at least one of a start time and an end time of data transfer executed between the communication module and an external device, the data transfer being executed by the close proximity wireless transfer. The notification function information obtaining module obtains notification function information indicative of a capability relating to a communication state notification function of the external device from the external device. The notification function control module requests the external device to execute or suppress the communication state notification function by the external device, based on the obtained notification function information. | 05-31-2012 |
20120142271 | Windows Portable Devices Interface for Bluetooth Low Energy Devices - A method and system are provided in which a Windows Portable Devices (WPD) driver installed and executed on a central device enables one or more applications on that device to interface with a peripheral device, such as a Bluetooth low energy (BLE) device. The peripheral device may utilize a Generic Attribute Profile (GATT) to interface with the WPD driver. Through the WPD driver, the central device may access, transmit, receive, and/or modify information associated with the peripheral device and/or control the peripheral device. The information associated with the peripheral device may include services, characteristics, and/or descriptors. A WPD device and objects that logically or virtually represents the peripheral device may be generated to map attributes of the WPD device to services and/or characteristics associated with the peripheral device. More than one WPD device may be available when multiple peripheral devices are represented in the central device. | 06-07-2012 |
20120142272 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD OF PROCESSING THEREBY, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus transmits an annunciation signal and detects an annunciation-signal transmission apparatus that is transmitting an annunciation signal. The communication apparatus places the transmission of its annunciation signal in a suspended state when annunciation-signal transmission apparatuses in excess of a predetermined number thereof are detected in a case where the communication apparatus is not currently connected to another communication apparatus. | 06-07-2012 |
20120149304 | SYSTEM FOR PROXIMITY BASED AD-HOC DATA SHARING ACROSS DEVICES WITH INTUITIVE INTERFACES - A system for transferring data between devices with user via a short range wireless communication system is disclosed. The system may include a first device configured to activate an intuitive interface on the first device having a system for proximity based ad-hoc data sharing between the first device with an intuitive interface and at least a second device with an intuitive interface. Once, the first device is determined to be within range of a second device with proximity based ad-hoc data sharing, data may be received by the intuitive interface on the first device and data may be sent from the intuitive interface on the first device to an intuitive interface on the second device using an intuitive interface on the first device without relying on an external communication network. The data may be transferred with a single click to the receiving device in a paste-to format. | 06-14-2012 |
20120149305 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A REDUCED USB POLLING RATE TO SAVE POWER ON A BLUETOOTH HOST - A Bluetooth host in a normal mode is enabled to monitor activities at USB endpoints. A Bluetooth USB radio has one or more active Bluetooth connections with peer Bluetooth radios. When each of the Bluetooth connections is in sniff mode, the Bluetooth host enables cancellation of normal USB activities at USB endpoints to enter a low power mode. The Bluetooth connections are still alive while the Bluetooth host is in the low power mode. In the low power mode, the Bluetooth host is enabled not to poll the bulk endpoint and to poll a USB interrupt endpoint in extended intervals for Bluetooth data received from the Bluetooth USB radio. The Bluetooth host is enabled to switch from the low power mode to the normal mode to process the received Bluetooth data over the bulk endpoint when a specific HCl event is received over the interrupt endpoint. | 06-14-2012 |
20120156996 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISPLAYING AN IMAGE OF A DEVICE BASED ON RADIO WAVES - The present invention relates to an information processing apparatus and method, and a program in which information can be reliably exchanged when performing wireless communication by allowing a user to know a communication distance at which devices can be connected. For example, a communication unit | 06-21-2012 |
20120156997 | BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION METHOD AND TERMINAL ADOPTING SAME - A communication method and a terminal adopting same are provided. The method includes setting a calling terminal in a short-range wireless communication standby mode; and transmitting, upon detecting movement of the calling terminal during the short-range wireless communication standby mode, data to a called terminal via a short-range wireless communication. | 06-21-2012 |
20120164945 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING STORED THEREON INFORMATION PROCESSING PROGRAM, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - Another information processing apparatus in a communicable range of a short-distance wireless communication is repeatedly searched for, and wireless communication is automatically established therewith, first data is automatically transmitted to the other information processing apparatus with which the wireless communication has been established, and first data transmitted from the other information processing apparatus is automatically received by means of the short-distance wireless communication. Further, transmission of second data is permitted which is different from first data to the other information processing apparatus with which the transmission/reception of the first data has been performed before. | 06-28-2012 |
20120164946 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING STORED THEREON INFORMATION PROCESSING PROGRAM, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - Another information processing apparatus in a communicable range of a short-distance wireless communication is repeatedly searched for, wireless communication is automatically established therewith, data is automatically transmitted to the other information processing apparatus with which the wireless communication has been established, and data transmitted from the other information processing apparatus is automatically received. Then, based on an operation by a user, evaluation data is generated which indicates an evaluation by the user with respect to the data content indicated by the received data. Further, the transmission source of the data which has become a target of the evaluation indicated by the evaluation data is specified and the generated evaluation data is transmitted to the transmission source. | 06-28-2012 |
20120164947 | BYPASSING BLUETOOTH DISCOVERY FOR DEVICES IN A SPECIAL LIST - A method of rejecting a Bluetooth communications request is disclosed. A portable device receives a Bluetooth communications request from a computing device. The communications request includes a device identification of the computing device. A list of trusted device identifications stored in a memory resource of the portable device is automatically accessed. The Bluetooth communications request is rejected in response to determining that the device identification is not in the list of trusted device identifications. | 06-28-2012 |
20120171955 | ACTIVE RF CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT - A method and system is disclosed that includes a controller that selects a frequency channel for a communication module joining a network of a home. Each module is assigned by the controller a frequency channel to communicate on that excludes channels already being used by a network of the home. Separate networks of a home are joined without communicating on the same frequency channel. | 07-05-2012 |
20120171956 | BLUETOOTH SECURITY SYSTEM - A Bluetooth security system includes a master unit and a slave unit for matched connection by means of Bluetooth technology, an inquiry procedure adapted for monitoring the connection signal between the master unit and the slave unit, and an alarm device installed in each of the master unit and the slave unit and adapted for receiving a feedback signal from the inquiry procedure to output an alert message when the strength of the connection signal between the master unit and the slave unit drops below a predetermined threshold. | 07-05-2012 |
20120171957 | UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS MOUSE - A universal serial bus (USB) mouse includes a USB plug, a USB hub circuit, a mouse control circuit, a BLUETOOTH module, a network adapter, and an antenna. The USB hub circuit is connected to the USB plug. The mouse control circuit is connected to the USB hub circuit. The BLUETOOTH module is connected to the USB hub circuit. The network adapter is connected to the USB hub circuit and the BLUETOOTH module. The antenna is connected to the BLUETOOTH module. The BLUETOOTH module together with the antenna functions as a BLUETOOTH receiver. The network adapter transmits network data through the BLUETOOTH module and with the antenna. | 07-05-2012 |
20120171958 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING DATA IN A SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A short-range communication system, such as a Bluetooth communication system, is provided that provides for a source communication device to multiplex data packets that are intended for different sink communication devices of multiple sink communication devices into a single stream that is broadcast to all of the multiple sink communication devices, and for each of the multiple sink communication devices to decode only the data packets intended for that sink communication device. Further, the communication system provides for a first sink communication device of the multiple sink communication devices to negotiate connection parameters associated the broadcast and to convey the negotiated connection parameters to a second sink communication device of the multiple sink communication devices, as opposed to each sink communication device setting up its own connection with the source communication device. | 07-05-2012 |
20120171959 | STORAGE DEVICE - A storage device includes an access control module and a Bluetooth transmission module. The storage device can control a data access right through a mobile device performing authentication. After receiving a start signal, the Bluetooth transmission module searches for a mobile device, and permits access to the access control module according to a Bluetooth position and pairing data. | 07-05-2012 |
20120171960 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING MESSAGES RECEIVED FROM A PAGING NETWORK ON A PAGING DEVICE TO ELECTRONIC DEVICES - Systems, methods, and media are provided for transmitting a message received from a paging network on a paging device to wireless or other electronic devices. The paging device establishes a radio connection with the wireless device and transmits the received messages to the wireless device through the established radio connection. In response to receiving a message from the paging device, the wireless device sends an acknowledgment to the paging network that the message was received and displays the message. | 07-05-2012 |
20120171961 | System and Method for Quick Authentication between Bluetooth Devices - A system and method for quick authentication between Bluetooth devices are disclosed. The method includes: adding a central node ( | 07-05-2012 |
20120171962 | Image Processing Apparatus, Processing Method, and Recording Medium - The present invention comprises an input part for inputting image data, a receiving part for receiving production information relating to production transmitted from another apparatus, a recording part for recording the production information received by the receiving part and image data input by the input part, a detection part for detecting a recording position on a recording medium at an editing point of image data recorded by the recording part, and a transmission part for transmitting information of the recording position detected by the detection part, whereby identification information for identifying image data and voice data is recorded in a recording medium or a recording device, this relieving a burden on a photographer and an editor and facilitating extraction of image data and voice data. | 07-05-2012 |
20120178368 | Wireless Communication Techniques - Wireless communication techniques are described. In one or more implementations, techniques are described that involve active power control such that a device may bypass use of a power amplifier to communicate wirelessly. In one or more additional implementations, wireless communication techniques are described in which multiple bands may be leveraged to provide wireless communication. In one or more further implementations, wireless communication techniques are described in which a frame buffer on a receiving device is leveraged by a sending device. Yet further, in one or more implementations wireless communication techniques are described in which a sending device employs codec adaptation. Still yet further, in one or more implementations, wireless communication techniques are described which may be used to change characteristics of a channel used to communicate data. Yet further again, in one or more implementations, a receiving device is configured to adjust a display based on wireless communications received from a plurality of devices, such as to leverage a display by multiple wireless sources. | 07-12-2012 |
20120178369 | SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION THEREOF - A short-range wireless communication apparatus and method establish a connection thereof by simply selecting a connection target through a camera and providing an identifiable image of a target. In the method, the apparatus captures an identifiable image of a connection target device and recognizes identifiable information corresponding to the captured identifiable image. Then the apparatus either automatically selects or in conjunction with user approval selects the connection target device corresponding to the recognized identifiable information and establishes a connection with the selected target device through a short-range wireless communication. | 07-12-2012 |
20120184209 | AREA TRACKING SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF TRACKING ELECTRONIC DEVICES - Area tracking systems including a plurality of short range sensors that are communicatively connected to a server and methods of tracking electronic devices. The electronic devices are tracked by polling for the electronic devices, the polling including transmission of electronic addresses corresponding to the electronic devices and determining whether a reply to the poling is received. The electronic addresses are each stored on one of a plurality of lists. Each of the lists may be polled at a different frequency and may include a different number of electronic device addresses. | 07-19-2012 |
20120184210 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISPLAYING ELECTRIC QUANTITY OF BLUETOOTH EARPHONE ON PORTABLE ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT - The present disclosure provides a system and a method for displaying an electric quantity of a bluetooth earphone on a portable electronic equipment. The system includes a bluetooth earphone and a portable electronic equipment. The bluetooth earphone includes a first communication module, a power management module, and a control module. The portable electronic equipment includes a second communication module, a processing module and a display module. The display module receives an electric quantity value from the processing module and displays it in form of an icon. The present disclosure can make a user observe a currently-used electric quantity of the bluetooth earphone when the bluetooth earphone is worn and cannot be observed. | 07-19-2012 |
20120184211 | Cellular Telephone and Personal Digital Assistant - The handheld personal electronic device has a first body having a display, a second body having a plurality of manual inputs, the second body capable of attachment to the first body, the personal electronic device having an open position wherein the display of the first body and the manual inputs of the second body are accessibly exposed. And, the personal electronic device having a closed position wherein the display of the first body is protected by the second body and the manual inputs of the second body are accessibly exposed. | 07-19-2012 |
20120184212 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR USING MULTIPLE DEVICES - An apparatus and method for providing a communication service to a terminal having a specific identifier (ID), and an apparatus and method for receiving a communication service are disclosed. The method includes recognizing an attribute of a terminal, determining whether the communication service is appropriate for the terminal, and if it is determined that the communication service is appropriate, setting the terminal to an active mode. | 07-19-2012 |
20120184213 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device for effecting wireless communication using a short-range wireless communication method having a ranging function, which carries out wireless connection establishment/disconnection control using ranging information. For example, the wireless communication device determines the range to another wireless communication device within wireless communication range, and if it finds a wireless communication device present within a predetermined range establishes a wireless connection with that wireless communication device, and disconnects the connection if the wireless communication device with which the device is in wireless connection passes beyond a predetermined range. | 07-19-2012 |
20120184214 | CELL PHONE TERMINAL, METHOD FOR STARTING DATA PROCESSING, METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING DATA - The present invention provides a portable terminal which can easily start processing for data selected to be processed, a method for starting data processing, and a method for transferring data. A cell phone terminal | 07-19-2012 |
20120190301 | MOTION-BASED INTERACTION BETWEEN A PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND A STATIONARY COMPUTING DEVICE - The disclosed embodiments provide a system for interacting with a stationary computing device. During operation, the system detects a proximity of a user of the portable electronic device to a stationary computing device. Next, the system uses the proximity to obtain identity data associated with at least one of the user and the portable electronic device. The system then uses the identity data to establish a connection with the portable electronic device. Finally, the system performs one or more tasks for the user on the stationary computing device based on a set of motion-based commands from the portable electronic device. | 07-26-2012 |
20120190302 | NON-NETWORKED MESSAGING - A system for facilitating short-range wireless data exchanges between apparatuses that are not linked by a wireless network connection. For example, an apparatus may initially determine if data suitable for transmission without first establishing a formal network connection is pending. For example, in terms of Bluetooth the data may suitable for transmission to another apparatus without having to first negotiate a Bluetooth piconet including both apparatuses. If it determined that data is pending for transmission, the apparatus may scan for apparatus detection packets transmitted from other apparatuses (e.g., enter an inquiry scanning mode). Upon reception of an apparatus detection packet, the apparatus may transmit one or more messages via wireless communication (e.g., execute an extended inquiry response procedure) comprising at least the data. | 07-26-2012 |
20120190303 | CELL-PHONE COMPATIBLE WIRELESS STETHOSCOPE - A cell phone-compatible wireless stethoscope has an auscultation piece secured to an audio transmitter. The audio transmitter is configured to transmit audible biosignals detected by the auscultation piece. The signals may be transmitted via Bluetooth® to any Bluetooth®-capable cell phone and then transferred over a cellular network. The device may be used for remote medical examination and diagnosis. | 07-26-2012 |
20120190304 | Bluetooth Function Providing Method and Terminal for Computer - A method for providing a Bluetooth function for a computer is disclosed, including: inputting a switch indication, and a terminal switching a working mode to a Bluetooth adapter mode; connecting the terminal to the computer via a universal serial bus (USB) interface; receiving an upload configuration parameter sent from the computer, and the terminal transmitting configuration parameters stored therein to the computer to enable the computer to regard the terminal as a Bluetooth adapter; the terminal sending an HCI command transmitted via the USB interface by the computer via its Bluetooth chip, converting a radio frequency signal received by its Bluetooth chip into an HCI event to transmit to the computer via the USB interface. Also disclosed in the present invention is a terminal for providing a Bluetooth function for a computer, including a user interface (UI), a switching module, a USB interface, an enumerating module and a Bluetooth module. | 07-26-2012 |
20120196534 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR BROADCASTING IN SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION - Method, apparatus, and computer program product example embodiments establish a broadcast operating mode on a Bluetooth Low Energy data channel by creating operating parameters for a data channel broadcast connection. Then data channel broadcast connection parameters are transmitted to other devices indicating the data channel broadcast connection and the operating parameters associated with the data channel broadcast connection are transmitted on a Bluetooth Low Energy advertising channel. Then information on the Bluetooth Low Energy data channel broadcast connection to the other devices, according to the operating parameters associated with the data channel broadcast connection. The bit rate of the Bluetooth Low Energy data channel used for broadcasting is not constrained by the required limits placed on the bit rate in the Bluetooth Low Energy advertising channels. | 08-02-2012 |
20120196535 | USER-CONTROLLED METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MODIFYING THE RADIATION OF A WIRELESS DEVICE IN ONE OR MORE USER-SELECTED VOLUMES - A user-controlled method for modifying the radiation of a wireless device ( | 08-02-2012 |
20120196536 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REMOTELY CONTROLLING CONSUMER ELECTRONICS DEVICE BY USING WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - A method and apparatus for communicating with a target device in a personal area network (PAN), when a multi-function remote controller (MRC) is outside the coverage area of the target device. The apparatus includes a proxy device which automatically forms a virtual PAN by setting up a pairing link with the target device to control the target device. Accordingly, a user may continuously control the target device irrespective of the location of the MRC. | 08-02-2012 |
20120196537 | Communication Method, Communication System and Communication Apparatus - When wireless communications are performed with other communication devices, an inquiry message to discover other communication devices residing in the vicinity is wirelessly transmitted by having communication ranges altered at a plurality of stages; response messages to the transmitted inquiry message are received; information relating to a receiving state or frequency of receipt of the response messages from the respective communication ranges is preserved with respect to each communication device which is a source of the response message; and based on the preserved information relating to the receiving state or the frequency of receipt of the response messages a communication device to be a connection object for wireless communication is selected. By doing so, when short-range wireless communications are performed, communication services can be performed appropriately between required devices. | 08-02-2012 |
20120196538 | HANDS-FREE DEVICE - The invention relates to a device of the type commonly known on the market as “hands-free”, i.e. devices that do not require input from the hands (fingers) in order to function, which has the essential feature of the device being installed, in one of the preferred embodiments thereof, inside a helmet, this embodiment applying to persons driving a vehicle with two or more wheels, to cyclists, skiers and other users of any type of helmet. Furthermore, the device of the invention may be used, in addition to being used for communication between passengers in the same vehicle, for communication between passengers in different vehicles or as a means of communication between two users who are walkers, cyclists or participants in other sports. | 08-02-2012 |
20120202425 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INITIATING AD-HOC COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MOBILE HEADSETS - A system and method are provided for a system and method for initiating ad-hoc communication between mobile headsets. A communication device is provided, including a processor and a control circuit which is connected to the processor and which has a paired-communication module that configures the processor to provide paired communication with at least one additional device. The control circuit further includes an ad-hoc communication module that configures the processor to establish and maintain an ad-hoc communication session with a second communication device that is not presently paired with the first communication device. The referenced communication session is enabled by acquiring an open communication channel. Additionally, a method for providing an ad-hoc communication session with at least one communication device is provided. The method begins by identifying a second communication device within communication range of a first communication device and which is not presently paired to the first communication device. The method continues by requesting a communication channel through which the first communication device and the second communication device can communicate, and pairing the first communication device and the second communication device. Then, an acceptance from the second communication device to join the ad-hoc communication session is received. Upon receiving the acceptance, the communication channel for communication between the first communication device and the second communication device is opened. Upon termination of the ad-hoc communication session, the first communication device and the second communication device are disconnected. | 08-09-2012 |
20120202426 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device which stores and transfers entire digital media files for later use at transfer speeds compliant with the 60 GHz wireless standard. An example wireless communication device includes a receiver for wirelessly receiving an entire digital media file and associated usage rights from a kiosk while the receiver is within a wireless reception range of the kiosk, a memory for storing the digital media file and the associated usage rights, transfer circuitry for transferring the digital media file and the associated usage rights, and a controller for operating the receiver to receive the entire digital media file and associated rights, for storing the digital media file for later playing, and for operating the transfer circuitry to transfer the digital media file and associated rights. | 08-09-2012 |
20120202427 | DOCKING STATION FOR PORTABLE COMPUTING DEVICES - A docking station that includes a base and a retention structure. The base is structured to rest on an underlying surface. The retention platform includes a receiving surface that is elevated from and supported by the base. A magnetic coupling mechanism is provided on the retention platform in order to magnetically retain a computing device that is rested on the receiving surface. | 08-09-2012 |
20120202428 | Systems and Methods for Defining Group of Users with Mobile Devices - The present solution defines groups of users with mobile devices that will be used for the outdoor activity. A group of users may defined with mobile computing devices capable of sending and receiving certain data via radio waves. Each of these devices is equipped with at least one button which can be pressed to invoke the grouping process. One additional mobile computing device capable of sending and receiving information via radio waves and able to receive and store information from any of the mobile computing devices, store these, allow any of the same computing devices to retrieve this information and able to send such information to one or mobile computing devices in such a way that the information arrives at the mobile computing devices via radio waves. | 08-09-2012 |
20120208461 | MOBILE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING FUNCTION BASED ON SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION - A mobile device and method for performing a function using a short-range communication tag are provided. In the method, the mobile device inputs function-related information into a short-range communication tag, and recognizes proximity to or contact with the short-range communication tag. Then the mobile device reads the function-related information from the short-range communication tag, and performs a function correlated with the function-related information. This allows performing various functions of the mobile device, only depending on a user's action to bring the mobile device in proximity to or contact with the Near Field Communication (NFC) tag. | 08-16-2012 |
20120208462 | PORTABLE TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR DISCOVERING WIRELESS DEVICES THEREOF - A portable terminal and a method for discovering wirelessly connectable devices are provided. The method includes requesting discovery of wirelessly connectable devices, discovering peripheral devices that are wirelessly connectable in at least one of a plurality of wireless communication schemes supported by the portable terminal, and displaying a list of the discovered devices. The method may discover and display peripheral devices capable of establishing a wireless communication connection in at least one of various wireless communication schemes supported by the portable terminal at one time to improve the convenience for a user. In addition, the method may display connectable wireless communication schemes together with a list of discovered devices to more easily establish a wireless communication connection in a desired scheme of the user. | 08-16-2012 |
20120208463 | Bluetooth Security Profile - A user configurable security profile defining relationships between a plurality of communications devices is utilized to secure a communications device in response to an occurrence of an event. In an example embodiment, the devices are linked together using a short range wireless communications protocol. If one of the devices becomes disconnected from the link, another device determines what actions to take based on the profile and the specific actions associated with the disconnected device. A device can be unlocked by providing a code, PIN, password, or the like. A legitimate disconnection from the link, such as turning a device off, or the battery dying, will not result in the remaining devices being locked. If a device is stolen and not recovered, the user can reconfigure the security profile to exclude the stolen device. | 08-16-2012 |
20120208464 | RF BUS ACCESS PROTOCOL AND TRANSCEIVER AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A method includes determining whether information is to be transmitted via a radio frequency (RF) bus that supports direct intra-device communication between at least three circuits in a millimeter wave frequency band. When the information is to be transmitted via the RF bus, the method determines whether the RF bus is available. When the RF bus is available, the information is converted into RF bus signal, access to the RF bus is secured, and after access to the RF bus is secured, the RF bus signal is transmitted via the RF bus. | 08-16-2012 |
20120214415 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTRA-CABINET WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A system, method and apparatus is provided for linking an assembly of electronic components disposed inside a cabinet for wireless communication therebetween. The method consists of (a) selecting a plurality of the electronic components for inter-communication therebetween, and linking each of the plurality of electronic components, directly or indirectly, to a wireless multi-link device, the wireless multi-link device including one or more radiating elements; (b) providing an RF/microwave chamber within or adjacent to the cabinet, the dimensions of which are optimized to promote signal propagation inside the RF/microwave chamber, whereby the RF/microwave chamber is operable to substantially confine signals emitted by the radiating elements within the RF/microwave chamber; (c) confining the radiating elements within the RF/microwave chamber; (d) connecting the wireless multi-link devices to a wireless medium that is operable within an air medium of the RF/microwave chamber; and (e) activating the wireless multi-link devices to inter-communicate via the wireless medium by operation of the radiating elements. The RF/microwave chamber dimensions are optimized so that the minimum cross-sectional dimensions perpendicular to and averaged over each possible signal trajectory within the RF/microwave chamber are greater than or substantially equal to lambda/2. The system consists of a wireless-linking system for enabling electronic components disposed inside, a cabinet to inter-communicate wirelessly, the system including a plurality of wireless multi-link devices and the RF/microwave chamber. A wireless transceiver is also provided for managing wireless inter-connection between the wireless multi-link devices. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214416 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES - A method of communicating between at least two mobile devices in which the method comprises the steps of obtaining an invitation code and transforming the invitation code into a sound wave signal designed to be transmitted by a mobile device. After the invitation code is transformed into the sound wave signal, the sound wave signal is transmitted from a speaker of the mobile device. Additional mobile devices may receive the sound wave signal, resulting in a connection state between the devices. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214417 | SYSTEMS FOR REMOTELY WAKING UP APPLICATION PROCESSOR OF MOBILE DEVICE - Systems for waking up an application processor (AP) of a mobile device are disclosed. In one embodiment, one of the systems of the mobile device includes a Bluetooth device with Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) feature configured to receive a connection request signal from an external device and a hardware module coupled to the Bluetooth device with BLE feature. The hardware module is configured to forward an AP ON request signal received from the external device via the Bluetooth device with BLE feature if the pairing request signal is determined to be valid, and wherein the Bluetooth device with BLE feature and the hardware module are supplied with quiescent current from a battery of the mobile device prior to the wake up of the AP. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214418 | WIRELESS CHARGING OF MOBILE DEVICE - Systems, circuits, and devices for wirelessly charging a mobile device are disclosed. In one embodiment, a system of a mobile device comprises a low power PAN module and a controller for the low power PAN module configured to monitor a connection request signal communicated from an external device while the mobile device is in a sleep mode, where the controller is supplied with quiescent current from a battery of the mobile device during the sleep mode. In addition, the system comprises an AP of the mobile device configured to wake up from the sleep mode when the connection request signal is validated by the controller, forward to the external device an equipment identity data of the mobile device and a charging status of the battery, and charge the battery of the mobile device with energy received from a wireless charging module associated with the external device. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214419 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING NETWORK CONNECTIONS BETWEEN STATIONARY TERMINALS AND REMOTE DEVICES THROUGH MOBILE DEVICES - A technique is provided for a seamless and transparent handoff from a user's mobile device to the user's stationary terminal of a network address of a remote device for the purpose of establishing a direct communication channel between the stationary terminal and a remote device, where the remote device first contacted the user's mobile device to initiate communications with the user. | 08-23-2012 |
20120220230 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING PROGRAM STORED THEREIN, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - Provided is a communication system which includes a plurality of game apparatuses. Each game apparatus performs short-range wireless communication with another game apparatus among the plurality of game apparatuses. Through the short-range wireless communication, the game apparatus receives identification information of the other game apparatus (other-apparatus identification information) from the other game apparatus. The game apparatus detects the communication status of the short-range wireless communication with the other game apparatus. Based on the detection result, the game apparatus determines whether or not to register the other game apparatus which is associated with the received other-apparatus identification information. When determining to register the other game apparatus, the information processing apparatus registers the other game apparatus and performs communication with the registered other game apparatus. | 08-30-2012 |
20120220231 | C2X COMMUNICATION WITH REDUCED DATA VOLUME - By reducing the packet size for C2X data transmission, it is possible to increase the transmission range and the number of transmitted data packets per unit time. By way of example, only component information items are transmitted, which can be converted into a full information item by the receiver using supplementary information items that come from a different source. In order to obtain the full information items, it is possible to utilize firstly transmission properties of the radio medium and secondly common information bases as determined by the system. | 08-30-2012 |
20120220232 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A wireless communication terminal may include a first interface that receives urgency data indicating urgency of an event detected by an implantable medical device and being transmitted from the implantable medical device using a first wireless communication protocol, and detailed data indicating details of the event and having a greater data size than the urgency data and being transmitted from the implantable medical device using a second wireless communication protocol, a second interface that transmits the detailed data to an external device using the second wireless communication protocol, a display unit that displays information, and a control unit that performs control to cause the display unit to display summary information based on the urgency of the event, and the second interface to transmit the detailed data received by the first interface to the external device based on the urgency data received by the first interface. | 08-30-2012 |
20120220233 | RANGING WITH BODY MOTION CAPTURE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques of performing ranging with body motion capture. | 08-30-2012 |
20120220234 | BIOLOGICALLY FIT WEARABLE ELECTRONICS APPARATUS AND METHODS - Detachable wearable electronic eyeglasses and head mounted gear with a plurality of electronic functions and interchangeable electronic function, and a wearable computer with optimal weight distribution and stretchable arms. | 08-30-2012 |
20120220235 | DYNAMIC NETWORKING MODES METHOD AND APPARATUS - A portable electronic device is disclosed. The portable electronic device includes a wireless transceiver, a processor coupled to the wireless transceiver, a memory coupled to the processor and a program stored in the memory and running on the processor. The program provides automatic transitioning between a wireless infrastructure communication mode to an ad-hoc communication mode. The infrastructure mode is used when a request from a mobile device is received to access a communications network. The ad-hoc mode is used when a request from the mobile device is received to access resources on the portable electronic device. | 08-30-2012 |
20120220236 | System, Method and Apparatus for Communicating With Vehicle Occupants - An application for a two-way communication system for communicating with a person who is within a vehicle includes a short-range radio transmission to transmit audio to a radio within the vehicle. Communication from the person is done by reflecting a light beam on a window of the vehicle and receiving the light beam. The light beam is modulated by vibration of the window caused by the person's voice. The received light beam is then processed to reproduce the sound of the person's voice. | 08-30-2012 |
20120225622 | SEPARABLE MOBILE DEVICE HAVING A CONTROL MODULE AND A DOCKING STATION MODULE - The technology provides a mobile communication device having separable components, including a control module configured for only short-range wireless communication and a docking station module configured for both long-range wireless communication and short-range wireless communication. The control module includes a touch-sensitive display, a short-range wireless transceiver and a processor that electrically couples the touch-sensitive display and the short-range wireless transceiver. The docking station module includes a docking area that receives the control module, a docking short-range wireless transceiver configured to communicate with the control module, a long-range wireless transceiver that is configured to communicate with a. long-range network and a docking processor that electrically couples the docking short-range wireless transceiver and the long-range wireless transceiver. The technology provides a sleek light-weight control module having full functionality of the docking station module. | 09-06-2012 |
20120231737 | ENERGY DISTRIBUTION AMONG ANTENNAS IN AN ANTENNA SYSTEM | 09-13-2012 |
20120231738 | ENHANCING VEHICLE INFOTAINMENT SYSTEMS BY ADDING REMOTE SENSORS FROM A PORTABLE DEVICE - A vehicle display device is provided with a communications interface, which couples the vehicle display device to portable input devices inside the vehicle. The portable input devices are thus provided with the ability to control the display device and what is displayed thereon. The communications interface also enables the portable input device to control vehicle subsystems such as a climate control system, entertainment system and the like. Portable input devices equipped with sensors have sensor-generated information displayed on the vehicle display device. | 09-13-2012 |
20120231739 | COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATIONS IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - A method is provided for communications in a cellular network ( | 09-13-2012 |
20120238208 | MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND SERVERS - In an embodiment, a mobile radio communication device may be provided. The mobile radio communication device may include a short range wireless receiver, configured to receive data from another mobile radio communication device. The mobile radio communication device may further include a cellular wireless transmitter, configured to transmit to a mobile radio base station of a cellular mobile radio communication system information related to a set of cells of the cellular mobile radio communication system as a set of candidate cells for communication of the other mobile radio communication device with the cellular mobile radio communication system. | 09-20-2012 |
20120238209 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO OBTAIN TRANSACTION INFORMATION - Methods and apparatus to obtain transaction information are described. One example method includes conducting a transaction using a proximity-based communication link, storing information related to the transaction in a database of a mobile device, identifying a service based on the information, querying the service from the mobile device, wherein the query is based on the information, and obtaining detail of the transaction from the service based on the information. Other implementations are possible. | 09-20-2012 |
20120238210 | CLOSE PROXIMITY ANTENNA MEASUREMENT AND TUNING - A method and apparatus for providing close proximity antenna measurement and tuning, includes a first receive-only antenna, a second antenna operable in a transmit mode, a tuning circuit coupled to the first antenna, a transmitter coupled to the second antenna, a receiver coupled to the first antenna, the receiver operable to measure a power into the first antenna delivered by a signal from the second antenna driven by the transmitter, and a processor coupled to the tuning circuit, transmitter, and receiver, the processor operable to step changes in the tuning circuit until a substantially maximum power of the signal is measured by the receiver. | 09-20-2012 |
20120238211 | Portable AISG Controller With Smartphone Interface And System - A Master Antenna Controller System is provided. In one example, the Master Antenna Controller System comprises a handheld wireless device and a RET Master. The handheld wireless device may comprise an Android OS or iOS based smartphone or tablet that includes Wi-Fi capabilities communications capabilities. The RET Master may provide full RET control based on the AISG 1.1 and 2.0 standards and communicate with the handheld wireless device via a wireless access point, such as a Wi-Fi server. The combination may be configured to provide extensive, screen-guided, intuitive RET diagnostics functionality. The RET Master itself may also include multiple different pre-defined tests (e.g. test one actuator, test one RET cable, test AISG signal from TMA) and also some standard electrical tests, e.g. measuring voltage, current etc. Additional higher-level functions may be provided on an Application on the handheld wireless device and communicated to the RET Master wirelessly or by USB connection. | 09-20-2012 |
20120238212 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PAIRING BLUETOOTH DEVICES - Embodiments of software-supervised pairing processes are provided. The processes enable a user to pair a mouse and keyboard with a Bluetooth transceiver without having to use a second mouse and keyboard. At least two separate processes are provided, including a long transition for initial pairing or re-pairing and a short transition for re-establishing a connection after devices have already been paired. | 09-20-2012 |
20120238213 | CONTROL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - According to at least one embodiment, a control apparatus includes a connection module, a communication module and a controller. A connection module is configured to connect by wire to a communication device with an antenna. A communication module is configured to communicate with a wireless communication device via the communication device. A controller is configured to instruct the communication device to report a communication state between the communication module and the wireless communication device. | 09-20-2012 |
20120244805 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BATTERY WITH SECURE ELEMENT - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, mobile device comprises a battery, a short-range wireless communication (SRW) chip set, a secure element incorporated into the battery, and a bootloader, wherein the SRW chip set is configured to sense proximity to a point of sales terminal and, in response, initiate bootup of the mobile device, and wherein the bootloader is configured to determine that bootup was initiated by the SRW chip set and, in response, power up only the SRW chip set and the secure element. | 09-27-2012 |
20120244806 | MEMORY DEVICE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - According to one embodiment, a memory device includes a first interface, a wireless communication unit, and first and second memories. The wireless communication unit is capable of wireless communication. The first memory is nonvolatile and capable of storing data. The second memory is capable of temporarily holding data received by the wireless communication unit. The wireless communication unit sets, by transmitting a first frame, a period during which data is not transmitted to the wireless communication unit when remaining capacity of the second memory has become smaller than first capacity. | 09-27-2012 |
20120244807 | SHORT-DISTANCE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - In particular, even if sensors have their respective different timer precisions, the number of occasions when the sensors wait for data can be minimized, thereby reducing the output consumptions on the sensor sides. A coordinator ( | 09-27-2012 |
20120244808 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONNECTING TO NETWORK IN A SHORT-RANGE MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method and apparatus are provided for reconnecting from a serving coordinator of a serving WPAN to a coordinator of another WPAN. The method includes broadcasting a neighbor terminal information request message periodically to neighbor terminals; receiving a neighbor information response message, having neighbor terminal information and LQI, from at least one neighbor terminal, responding to the neighbor terminal information request message; storing a neighbor table having the LQI and the neighbor terminal information included in the neighbor information response message, the neighbor terminal information including the LQI, a PAN ID of a WPAN to which the at least one neighbor terminal belongs and neighbor router information about the at least one neighbor terminal; and reconnecting to the coordinator of the another WPAN using the LQI and the neighbor terminal information and communicating with the coordinator of the other WPAN. | 09-27-2012 |
20120244809 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK BETWEEN PARTICIPANTS OF AN ASSIMILATION STEP - A method of building a wireless communication network between a plurality of pre-defined devices which include spatially distributed inverters for feeding electric energy into an AC power grid and which each have a spatially limited range in wireless communication is provided. The method includes the steps of assimilating the pre-defined devices for a limited period of time, and in the step of assimilating, generating at least one network ID and persistently storing the at least one network ID in each pre-defined device participating in the step of assimilating. The method further includes, after the step of assimilating, connecting each pre-defined device exclusively to such other pre-defined devices in which network IDs originating from the same step of assimilating are stored. | 09-27-2012 |
20120244810 | IDENTIFICATION OF PROXIMATE DEVICES - A method of identifying proximate client devices ( | 09-27-2012 |
20120244811 | Method, Apparatus and System for Transmitting Multimedia Data by Bluetooth and Real-Time Playing - The disclosure discloses a method, an apparatus and a system for transmitting multimedia data by bluetooth and real-time playing, wherein the method includes: a bluetooth apparatus at a transmitting terminal encodes multimedia files to be transmitted, and converts them into stream media files; the bluetooth apparatus at the transmitting terminal transmits the stream media files to a bluetooth apparatus at a receiving terminal through an Object Push Profile (OPP); the bluetooth apparatus at the receiving terminal plays the received stream media files. It is because the bluetooth apparatus at the transmitting terminal transmits the stream media files through the OPP and the bluetooth apparatus at the receiving terminal receives and plays them, and then the waiting time for playing is reduced. It is solved the problem in the prior art that audio or video playing can be carried out only after the completion of the transmission by bluetooth and the waiting time is longer. | 09-27-2012 |
20120252364 | METHOD OF USING A SMART PHONE AS A TELEMATICS DEVICE INTERFACE - A system and method for controlling a vehicle telematics unit via a smart phone using the steps of: storing a software application for remotely controlling the telematics unit at the smart phone; using the stored software application to communicatively connect the smart phone with the telematics unit via a short-range wireless communication link; receiving data from the telematics unit that is used to display a menu of telematics service selections at the smart phone; receiving a telematics service selection from a vehicle occupant at the smart phone that is chosen from one of the displayed telematics service selections; and transmitting a command that controls at least one function of the vehicle based on the received telematics service selection from the smart phone to the telematics unit over the short-range wireless communication link. | 10-04-2012 |
20120252365 | BATTERY POWERED PASSIVE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM FOR PREMISE ENTRY - A passive keyless entry (PKE) system, comprising a DC power source and a base station with a housing that includes a first portion being made of a first material that shields radio frequency (RF) signaling and a second portion being made of a second material that permits RF signaling, is particularly adapted for premise entry and is designed to be powered by common household batteries to unlock a premise door as a user approaches within a prescribed arms-length distance from the premise door. The PKE system further comprises a printed circuit board and a low frequency (LF) emitting antenna coil positioned both perpendicular to the printed circuit board and behind the second material of the housing while having a center axis oriented in a horizontal orientation. The LF emitting antenna coil transmits a LF interrogating signal upon detecting a user within the prescribed arms-length distance from the base station. | 10-04-2012 |
20120258664 | RESOLVING AN APPLICATION SERVICE CHANGE IN A SYSTEM USING BLUETOOTH - Peer-to-peer communication is established between applications in different Bluetooth enabled devices in a Bluetooth network by using Bluetooth protocol messages to discover peer-to-peer bus daemons. In the Bluetooth enabled computing devices, an initiating peer-to-peer bus daemon initiating a connection from a first device to a second device discovers an accepting peer-to-peer bus daemon at the second device. After the discovery of the accepting peer-to-peer bus daemon by the initiating peer-to-peer bus daemon, the initiating peer-to-peer bus daemon sends SDP protocol messages to find a named application available through the accepting peer-to-peer bus daemon. An extended inquiry response with a unique identifier is created and sent by the accepting peer-to-peer bus daemon to the initiating peer-to-peer bus daemon. This unique identifier contains a revision count and the revision count indicates the current version of an application name list for application services available at the accepting peer-to-peer bus daemon. | 10-11-2012 |
20120258665 | Electronic Apparatus, Proximity Network System and Connecting Method Thereof - A proximity network system comprises a plurality of Bluetooth devices disposed respectively in each one of a plurality of electronic apparatuses. The Bluetooth devices are arranged for enabling the electronic apparatuses to receive and transmit Bluetooth wireless signals with each other, wherein each Bluetooth device comprises a community relationship module, an identifying module and a distance detecting module. The community relationship module stores a community relationship data of each Bluetooth device. The identifying module reads the community relationship data of each Bluetooth device to identify whether each Bluetooth device has the same community relationship. The distance detecting module determines whether each Bluetooth device is in a proximity network. When the Bluetooth devices are identified to have the same community relationship with each other and are in the proximity network, each electronic apparatus is allowed to receive and transmit the Bluetooth wireless signals with another electronic apparatus. | 10-11-2012 |
20120258666 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus includes a determination unit, a first setting unit, a second setting unit and a wireless unit. The determination unit determines whether a signal degradation degree is higher than a threshold value. The first setting unit sets first parameters relating to a first data rate and a first communication robustness. The second setting unit sets second parameters relating to a second data rate and a second communication robustness if an instruction signal is received and if the signal degradation degree is higher than the threshold value. The wireless unit communicates with a communication partner using one of the first parameters and the second parameters. | 10-11-2012 |
20120258667 | Method and System for Bluetooth HID Activity Prediction for Wireless Coexistence Throughput Optimization - A host device may be enabled to support a plurality of wireless interfaces, wherein some of these interfaces may be utilized to support human interface device (HID) based communication. The host device may be enabled to monitor activity of HID devices based on communications via HID capable wireless interfaces, may predict future use of the HID devices based on the monitoring, and may manage sniff communication that is utilized to track and/or detect activities in the HID devices. The management of the sniff communication may comprise adjusting characteristics of the sniff communication to enable improving throughput of other wireless interfaces available via the host device that may be affected by the sniff communication. The adjustment of the characteristics of sniff communication may comprise adjusting, statically and/or dynamically, length of sniff intervals and/or designating of sniff packets as high priority requests. | 10-11-2012 |
20120264375 | Devices, Systems, and Methods for Sponsored Tethered Connectivity - Devices, systems, and methods are disclosed which relate to establishing an STC connection by tethering a special purpose connected device (SPCD) through a tethering mobile device having network access. The SPCD accesses an application server on the network, and is authenticated before service to the SPCD begins. Once authenticated, the service provider is billed for the STC connection instead of a user of the tethering mobile device. | 10-18-2012 |
20120270502 | INFORMATION PROCESSOR, DISPLAY DEVICE, AND DEVICE CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an information processor includes a first location acquisition module, a second location acquisition module, an identifying module, and a transmitter. The first location acquisition module acquires own location information representing the location of the information processor. The second location acquisition module acquires display device location information representing the location of each of display devices capable of displaying data. The identifying module identifies one of the display devices to display the data based on the distance between the information processor and each of the display devices from the display device location information and the own location information. The transmitter transmits a request to display the data to the display device identified by the identifying module. | 10-25-2012 |
20120270503 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEARCHING LOCATION RELATED CONTENTS IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - A method and apparatus search for a place involving contents stored to a portable terminal. Operations of the portable terminal include receiving contents comprising a device address for short range communication; storing the device address; and searching for a short range communication device which uses the device address. | 10-25-2012 |
20120276847 | Obtaining vehicle traffic information using mobile Bluetooth detectors - A method and system for obtaining traffic information from mobile Bluetooth detectors is disclosed. A mobile Bluetooth detector is a device located in a moving vehicle that includes Bluetooth and GPS firmware for collecting data from Bluetooth enabled devices. The mobile Bluetooth detector transmits the collected data to a remote facility where the data is processed to generate traffic information. A pair of mobile Bluetooth detectors may be used to collect data for generating ground truth. | 11-01-2012 |
20120276848 | WIRELESS ARRAY DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING WIRELESS ARRAYS HAVING MAGNETOMETERS - A wireless array for providing access to a network is provided. The wireless array includes at least two transceivers in signal communication with a client. A magnetometer of the wireless array provides orientation information relating to an orientation of the wireless array relative to a magnetic field. A controller of the wireless array is in signal communication with the transceivers and the magnetometer. The controller manages the communications exchanged via the transceivers and receives the orientation information provided by the magnetometer. | 11-01-2012 |
20120276849 | Adaptive control of a personal electronic device responsive to a micro-impulse radar - A personal electronic device is configured to be adaptively controlled responsive to data from a micro-impulse radar (MIR). | 11-01-2012 |
20120276850 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic apparatus includes a communication module, a connection establishing module, and a session control module. The communication module executes close proximity wireless transfer. The connection establishing module establishes a connection between the communication module and an external device. The session control module executes a first service when the connection has been established, and executes a second service when a threshold time has passed while the close proximity state is maintained after completion of the execution of the first service. | 11-01-2012 |
20120276851 | SYSTEM FOR AUTO-IDENTIFICATION AND AUTO-ASSOCIATION OF AN AMUSEMENT DEVICE VIA A MOBILE DEVICE - A system for automatically identifying and associating with an amusement device using a mobile device is provided. The system includes an amusement device connected to a network, a mobile device having a controller, and an application program stored within the mobile device. The amusement device has a display screen, a memory and a controller. The application program is configured to (i) automatically detect when the mobile device is within a predetermined geographic range of the amusement device, (ii) automatically issue an alert on the mobile device of the detected amusement device, and (iii) prompt the controller of the mobile device to automatically associate the mobile device with the detected amusement device. | 11-01-2012 |
20120276852 | Proximity-Based Mobile Message Delivery - Proximity-based mobile message delivery is described. In an embodiment, a first user stores a message intended for a second user on a first mobile terminal, whilst the first mobile terminal is located remote from a second mobile terminal of the second user. Subsequent to this, the first mobile terminal detects that it is now in proximity with the second mobile terminal, and this triggers the first mobile terminal to transmit the message to the second mobile terminal. In embodiments, authentication of the second mobile terminal can be performed before transmitting the message. In another embodiment, a mobile terminal comprises a short-range wireless transceiver that can detect that a further mobile terminal is in proximity, and trigger the transmission of a pre-stored message to the further mobile terminal. | 11-01-2012 |
20120282859 | System and Method for Transmitting Data Between Communication Terminals - The invention relates to a system for transmitting data between at least two communication terminals ( | 11-08-2012 |
20120289156 | Multiple uses of an e-book reader - An e-book reader aids in the translation and display of a query. The translation is done by an external website. Another use is for a website to make a customised electronic tourist guide downloadable to the reader, based on an itinerary provided by the user. Also, a reader and cellphone can be interlinked, so photos taken by the latter can be viewed and stored on the reader. Audio conversations and data from sensors associated with the cellphone can also be stored on the reader. The reader's keyboard might be used as the cellphone's keyboard. A reader can extend the scope of using mobile tags and virtual tags for locations where Internet access is lacking. | 11-15-2012 |
20120289157 | TOUCH INQUIRY - A system for expediting wireless connection establishment between wireless-enabled apparatuses. In at least one example implementation an apparatus may transmit discovery messages for discovering other apparatuses. The apparatus may receive one or more messages responding to the discovery message, and may determine whether any of the received responses satisfy a predetermined response criteria. If the apparatus determines that any of the received messages satisfy the response criteria, wireless connection establishment may be expedited between the apparatus and a source apparatus for each of the received messages that satisfy the response criteria. In an alternative scenario where a touch mode may be active in an apparatus that receives a message from at least one other apparatus, the apparatus may determine whether the message satisfies a predetermined criteria. If the message is determined to satisfy the criteria, the apparatus may expedite wireless connection establishment to the other apparatus. | 11-15-2012 |
20120289158 | INQUIRY RESPONSE EVENT CONTROL - A system for selectively expediting connection establishment between apparatuses. In at least one example implementation, an apparatus may comprise at least a control entity and a communication entity. The control entity may transmit a command to the communication entity, the command instructing the communication entity to set certain operational parameters. The communication entity may then send a response to the command, and the control entity may determine if the certain operational parameters have been set in the communication entity based on the response. If the certain operational parameters have been set, the control entity may initiate a first device discovery mode in the apparatus. Alternatively, a second device discovery mode may be initiated by the control entity if it is determined that the certain operational parameters have not been set in the communication entity. | 11-15-2012 |
20120289159 | MULTIPLE APPARATUS SELECTION VIA TOUCH - A system for expediting connection establishment between apparatuses. In at least one example implementation, an apparatus may transmit discovery messages and may receive response messages. If any of the response messages are determined to satisfy predetermined response criteria, the apparatus may further determine if any of these response messages (e.g., the messages that were determined to satisfy the predetermined response criteria) are associated with apparatuses that satisfy selection criteria for the selection of multiple apparatuses that may, in some instances, operate together as a group. Apparatuses that are determined to satisfy the multiple selection criteria may then be selected, wherein connection establishment is expedited for the selected apparatuses. | 11-15-2012 |
20120289160 | SENSOR-BASED TOUCH INQUIRY CONTROL - A system for selectively expediting connection establishment between apparatuses. In accordance with at least one embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus may sense a first change in the disposition of the apparatus, and may initiate device discovery based on the first sensed change. A determination may then be made in the apparatus as to whether another apparatus encountered by the apparatus during device discovery satisfies a predetermined response criteria. The apparatus may then select the other apparatus if it is determined that the other apparatus satisfies the predetermined response criteria. | 11-15-2012 |
20120289161 | METHOD OF POWER NEGOTIATION BETWEEN TWO CONTACTLESS DEVICES - The invention is a method of power negotiation between a first contactless device and a second contactless device which provides an electromagnetic field set to a first power level. The method comprises the steps of: a) sending a request from the first device to the second device. The request targets a second power level and an associated duration. The next step is: b) sending a response to the first device. The response reflects a decision of the second device corresponding to the request. The final step is: c) switching the electromagnetic field to the second power level if the decision is positive. | 11-15-2012 |
20120295544 | EXCLUSIVE-LOCK CONTROL METHOD FOR RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A radio communication device includes, a radio communication device includes, a plurality of IC chips that conducts radio communicate with a reader/writer, a first setting unit that sets one IC chip selected from the plurality of IC chips to an exclusive-lock release state that allows radio communication to be conducted with the reader/writer, a determination unit that determines whether the radio communication is being conducted normally when radio communication between the one IC chip set to the exclusive-lock release state and the reader/writer is conducted, and a second setting unit that sets the one IC chip set to the exclusive-lock release state to a exclusive-locked state that does not allow radio communication with the reader/writer when the radio communication is determined as not being conducted normally, and sets another IC chip that is different from the one IC chip set to the exclusive-locked state to the exclusive-lock release state. | 11-22-2012 |
20120295545 | METHODS FOR USE IN CONJUNCTION WITH A HANDHELD WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE HAVING AN ADJUNCT DEVICE COUPLED THERETO - A method includes executing a homing application of the handheld wireless communication device for finding at least one personal object coupled to at least one remote wireless device. The homing application includes generating data to present for display on the handheld wireless communication device a graphical user interface that receives an indication of a user to locate the at least one personal object and that generates a location signal in response thereto. The location signal is communicated to an adjunct device via the communication port of the handheld wireless communication device to cause the adjunct device to transmit an RF paging signal to at least one remote wireless device via a short-range wireless transceiver of the adjunct device. | 11-22-2012 |
20120302167 | MOBILE TERMINAL - A mobile terminal including a wireless communication unit configured to wirelessly communicate with at least one other terminal; a touch screen; an input unit configured to generate input data; and a controller configured to activate a handwriting input function in response to the input data generated by the input unit, capture an image of a display screen being displayed on the touch screen, receive handwriting input received through the touch screen, generate output data corresponding to the received handwriting input, and generate a file including the generated output data and the captured image of the display screen. | 11-29-2012 |
20120302168 | ARRANGEMENT FOR PERFORMING A MEASUREMENT, RFID MODULE AND SENSOR MODULE - Anchoring devices, anchoring systems for intervertebral implants, intervertebral implants, and instruments and methods for implanting implants are disclosed. In preferred configurations, these various objects share the feature of comprising or cooperating with an anchoring device ( | 11-29-2012 |
20120309313 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND PAIRING METHOD THEREOF - A communication terminal includes a request unit, an illuminating unit, a detecting unit, a capturing unit, an analyzing unit, and a pairing unit. The request unit is used for generating a pairing signal when communication pairing function is enabled. The illuminating unit is used for generating predetermined light when communication pairing function is enabled. The detecting unit detects whether the pairing signal from another terminal has been received, and if it has, generates a signal to the capturing unit. The capturing unit is used for capturing an image of the light generated by the illuminating unit of the other terminal The analyzing unit is used for analyzing the captured image. The pairing unit is used for completing the communication pairing with the other terminal when the captured image of the light includes a predetermined characteristic. | 12-06-2012 |
20120309314 | METHOD, MOBILE DEVICE AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR TRIGGERING AN EVENT OF INTEREST BASED ON COMMUNICATIONS ESTABLISHED WITH NEARBY WIRELESS DEVICES - Triggering an event of interest in a mobile device based on communications established with nearby wireless devices can include receiving a challenge of the event of interest; obtaining a corresponding expression of a combination key with reference to the event in response to the challenge; receiving an identified data of the wireless devices in the vicinity of the mobile device; comparing the identified data with the expression to determine if the expression is a true value; and executing the event of interest in response to the true value. | 12-06-2012 |
20120309315 | SHORT RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - An in-vehicle apparatus selects, as a profile connection mode, one connection mode out of a first connection mode and a second connection mode, and performs profile connection using the selected one connection mode. The first connection mode is to transmit a profile connection request signal to a communication partner so as to start a connection procedure; the second connection mode is to wait for reception of a profile connection request signal from the communication partner for a predetermined time so as to start the connection procedure. When the profile connection using the selected one connection mode fails, a connection procedure using the other connection mode that was not selected previously is started. When the profile connection using the other connection mode is successful, upon occurrence of a next profile connection request, the other connection mode is selected as a profile connection mode. | 12-06-2012 |
20120309316 | COMMON COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - A common communications device comprising an array of near-field coupled resonant elements, the elements each comprising a coupling portion comprising a loop portion with free ends, the device being provided in combination with a data transmission unit and a data reception unit, each unit having a coupling portion, the units being arranged to communicate with one another by means of the coupling portion of each unit and the common communications device, the coupling portion of the data transmission unit comprising a resonant element comprising a loop portion arranged to be near-field coupled to the loop portion of a first resonant element of the device, the coupling portion of the data reception unit comprising a resonant element comprising a loop portion arranged to be near-field coupled to the loop portion of a second resonant element of the device not being the first resonant element. | 12-06-2012 |
20120309317 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN A MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE AND AN AUXILIARY SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a system and method for facilitating short-range wireless communications between a mobile wireless device and an auxiliary device. The wireless device includes a short-range transceiver for communicating with an auxiliary device; a signal module for providing a mode control signal; and, a control module for controllably shifting a short-range transceiver between a power saver mode and a search mode based on the mode control signal received from the signal module. When in the search mode, the short-range transceiver is operable to search for the auxiliary device to communicate therewith. When in a power saver mode, the short-range transceiver is not operable to search for the auxiliary device. | 12-06-2012 |
20120309318 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A communication device includes a communication unit that performs a wireless communication with an external device. The communication device also includes a control unit that establishes the wireless communication between the communication unit and the external device by using setting data received from the external device. Further, the communication device includes a data processing unit that stores the setting data in a storage unit before the wireless communication is released. The communication device additionally includes a power input unit, and a communication releasing unit that releases the wireless communication between the communication unit and the external device. The control unit uses the setting data stored in the storage unit at a time of re-performing a wireless communication between the communication unit and the external device. The communication releasing unit releases the wireless communication when power is not being supplied via the power input unit. | 12-06-2012 |
20120315850 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS USING INTRABODY TRANSMISSION FOR CONTROLLING PERSONAL COMMUNICATIONS - A system and method for controlling personal communications. The system includes a transmitter configured to emit a transmitted signal suitable for intrabody transmission, and a receiver configured to determine if a received signal exhibits a characteristic that corresponds to a received signal that would arise from the transmitted signal being coupled to the receiver via intrabody transmission. The system also includes a controller configured to control personal communications such as text messaging based on the received signal characteristic. In one example, the system uses intrabody transmission or intrabody communication to determine if an operator of a vehicle is touching or trying to use a personal communication device while driving the vehicle. | 12-13-2012 |
20120315851 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SWITCHING ANTENNA IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - A method and apparatus of switching an antenna in a portable terminal having a plurality of antennas, a plurality of communication modules, and a switch unit for switching a wireless path are provided. The method includes determining whether a received signal strength of at least one communication module is reduced to or below a preset reference value, measuring, when the received signal strength of the at least one communication module is determined to be reduced to or below the preset reference value, respective received signal strengths of the plurality of the antennas with respect to a frequency band supported by the at least one communication module, and controlling the switch unit, based on the measurement result, such that a wireless path is formed between the at least one communication module and an antenna having a greatest received signal strength among the plurality of the antennas. | 12-13-2012 |
20120315852 | Zero Client Device With Integrated Bluetooth Capability - System and method for zero client communications. A zero client device includes a housing, and in the housing, a transcoding processing unit (transcoder) and a communications processing unit coupled to the transcoder. The transcoder is configured to receive input data from human interface device(s), encode the input data, and provide the encoded input data to the communications processing unit for transmission over a network to a server. The communications processing unit is configured to receive the encoded input data from the transcoder, transmit the encoded input data over the network to the server, receive output data from the server, and send the output data to the transcoder. The transcoder is further configured to receive the output data from the communications processing unit, decode the output data, and send the decoded output data to at least one of the human interface devices. | 12-13-2012 |
20120315853 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMICALLY ADJUSTING A CONFIGURABLE PARAMETER OF A DISCOVERY PROTOCOL DURING DISCOVERY OF DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for performing a discovery of one or more wireless devices. The method includes initiating, at a first wireless device, a discovery protocol having a configurable parameter, the discovery protocol being associated with discovery of one or more second wireless devices; determining a number of second wireless devices within a predetermined range of the first wireless device; and adjusting the configurable parameter of the discovery protocol based on the number of second wireless devices determined to be within the predetermined range of the first wireless device. The method further includes at the first wireless device, completing the discovery of one or more second wireless devices in accordance with the configurable parameter of the discovery protocol as adjusted based on the number of second wireless devices determined to be within the predetermined range of the first wireless device. | 12-13-2012 |
20120322376 | Centralized Bluetooth device pairing - This disclosure relates to centralized Bluetooth™ pairing. The centralized pairing provides the ability to have a Bluetooth device that has been paired to one personal use phone on a Voice over Internet Protocol system automatically pair to another personal use phone on the system when the user logs into that phone. This pairing can be tied to a user profile and be initiated once the user logs into the other phone. Centralized pairing can also be provided to allow a Bluetooth device that has been paired to a common use device in one meeting room automatically pair to another common use device in a different meeting room when they enter the room. The Bluetooth interface in the common use devices can periodically scan for Bluetooth devices within range and pair the device if it is still within range after a predetermined number of scans. | 12-20-2012 |
20120322377 | COMPUTER TO VEHICLE WIRELESS LINK - A wireless data link system between a vehicle having a vehicle controller and a computing device having a computing processor is provided. The wireless data link system includes a vehicle data link (“VDL”) device and a computing data link (“CDL”). The VDL device has a VDL controller, a VDL memory, and a VDL interface circuitry. The VDL interface circuitry provides a connection to the vehicle controller for exchanging data. The VDL memory stores a passcode that provides a secure connection and a VDL recognizable code that is associated with the VDL device. The CDL device has a CDL controller, a CDL memory, and CDL interface circuitry. The CDL interface circuitry provides a connection to the computing processor for exchanging data. | 12-20-2012 |
20120322378 | Wireless Communication Apparatus and Method - A wireless communication apparatus includes a body, a first antenna, a second antenna, a sensor, a wireless transceiver, and a switch. Both of the first antenna and the second antenna are disposed in or on the body. The sensor is electrically connected to the first antenna and the second antenna for sensing whether an object is close to at least one of the first antenna and the second antenna to provide a sensing result. The wireless transceiver has a main antenna connection port. The switch is coupled to the wireless transceiver, the first antenna, and the second antenna for selecting one from the first antenna and the second antenna to be electrically connected to the main antenna connection port of the wireless transceiver according to the sensing result. | 12-20-2012 |
20120322379 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA COMMUNICATION METHOD AND TERMINAL SUPPORTING THE SAME - Provided is a method and terminal for wireless local area communication enabling nearby terminals to be paired by generating an identifier containing identification information of an application and randomly selected channel information; broadcasting the identifier to external terminals; performing a pairing procedure with an external terminal having responded to the broadcast identifier; and communicating data related to the application with the paired external terminal. | 12-20-2012 |
20120322380 | LOCALIZED TRACKING OF ITEMS WITH ELECTRONIC LABELS - In one aspect, the present disclosure describes a method that may include identifying, by a monitoring device, a transmission signal of an electronic label, where the monitoring device includes an antenna and a processor. The method may include determining a distance for monitoring the transmission signal of the electronic label, and calibrating a transmission strength for communication with the electronic label via the transmission signal, where the transmission strength is calibrated to approximately achieve the distance. The method may include configuring a communication link between the antenna and the electronic label at approximately the transmission strength, monitoring availability of the communication link, identifying a loss of connection with the communication link, and responsive to the loss of connection, causing, by the monitoring device, an alert to be issued. | 12-20-2012 |
20120322381 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication apparatus is capable of generating a gain/noise characteristics control signal for an amplifier and a filter without degrading an amount of electrical power, or distance information contained in the electrical power. The wireless communication apparatus includes: a rectifier circuit; a circuit power supply for receiving electrical power from the rectifier circuit so as to supply required electrical power; a sampling circuit for performing sampling on an output of the rectifier circuit; a discrete filter capable of performing discrete processing on an output of the sampling circuit so as to selectively remove a frequency component contained in the output of the sampling circuit; and power control for controlling a bias required for a radio transmitter and/or a radio receiver based on the DC component output from the discrete filter. | 12-20-2012 |
20120322382 | PORTABLE WIRELESS TERMINAL, WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A battery accumulates electric power. A terminal high-speed wireless communication portion wirelessly communicates information. A terminal communication setting portion sets predetermined setting information related to wireless communication by the terminal high-speed wireless communication portion. A coil antenna is an antenna that receives electric power for recharging the battery in a contactless manner from an external terminal, the coil antenna transmitting or receiving the setting information to or from the external terminal. | 12-20-2012 |
20120322383 | PREDICTIVE MOBILE AD HOC NETWORKING INCLUDING ASSOCIATED SYSTEMS AND METHODS - The mobile ad hoc network (MANET) includes a plurality of wireless mobile nodes and a plurality of wireless communication links connecting the nodes together. A method for operating a MANET includes predicting future-needed network services, network resources and network configurations in the MANET. A network response is predicted, based upon the predicted future-needed network services, network resources and network configurations. The MANET is adjusted based upon the predicted network response before the future-needed network services, network resources and network configurations are actually needed in the MANET. | 12-20-2012 |
20120329395 | DYNAMIC ANTENNA SHARING - A mobile communication device capable of dynamically sharing antennas is disclosed. The mobile communication device includes a wireless local area network (WLAN) control circuit to generate a Wi-Fi signal, a Bluetooth control circuit to generate a Bluetooth signal, and a cellular control circuit to generate a cellular data signal. The Wi-Fi and Bluetooth control circuits are coupled to a first antenna, while the cellular control signal is coupled to a second antenna. The mobile communication device further includes an antenna sharing logic coupled between the control circuits and the first and second antennas. The antenna sharing logic is configured to selectively couple either the Wi-Fi control circuit or the Bluetooth control circuit to the second antenna based, at least in part, on a level of activity of the cellular control circuit. | 12-27-2012 |
20120329396 | SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - A short-range wireless communication apparatus comprising an own connection device and a control device is disclosed. The own connection device is capable of connecting a first predetermined communication protocol to a communication-destination-side connection device. The control device performs a first connection process of connecting the first predetermined communication protocol between the own connection device and the communication-destination-side connection device. The control device performs the first connection process at a time that is outside a period during which a second connection process of connecting a second predetermined communication protocol between the communication-destination-side connection device and a different connection device is performed. | 12-27-2012 |
20120329397 | Wireless Network Based Plant Tissue Culture LED Light Source Control System - The invention discloses a ZIGBEE wireless network based plant tissue culture LED (light-emitting diode) light source control system, aiming to solve the problem that a plant tissue culture light source system cannot be monitored and treated with full time sections at present. The invention adopts the technical scheme that the wireless network based plant tissue culture LED light source control system comprises a master control end and a plurality of slave control ends. The system is characterized in that the master control end comprises a first microprocessor, a second microprocessor, a memory, a real-time clock, a display device, a temperature sensor, a humidity sensor, a serial communication interface (SCI), a USB (Universal Serial Bus) communication interface, operation keys and control software embedded in the two microprocessors; and each slave control, end comprises a third microprocessor, an extended memory, a real-time clock, an SCI, a temperature sensor, a humidity sensor, an I/O (input/output) extended interface and control software embedded in the third microprocessor. The invention can be used for carrying out centralized control on LED light, sources in a large-scale field. | 12-27-2012 |
20130005254 | DEVICE DATA COLLECTION USING BLUETOOTH - In accordance with aspects of the present disclosure, a method is described that includes establishing a wireless communication link between a mobile device and a document processing device; transmitting, by a transmitter of the document processing device, data stored in a memory of the document processing device related to the functionality of the document processing device to the mobile device; and receiving, by a receiver of the document processing device, data to control a functionality of the document processing device from the mobile device. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005255 | Secure Context-Based Computing - An embodiment of the invention includes an article with instructions that enable a first unit to: (a) sense the first unit's local surroundings to determine sensed data; (b) receive and decrypt encrypted context data directly from a second unit (the second unit located nearby the first unit and the context data corresponding to the first unit's local surroundings); and (c) based on the sensed data and the decrypted context data, communicate directly with the second unit. Other embodiments are described herein. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005256 | UNSOLICITED BROADCAST PACKET TRANSMISSION THROUGH CLOSE-BY COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL - A method is provided for generating a broadcast packet at a first device including an address; transmitting the generated broadcast packet to a second device through a first protocol. The first device may communicate with the second device via the transmitted address through a second protocol different from the first protocol. Alternatively, an apparatus is provided to receive an unsolicited broadcast packet including an address through a wireless, close-by communication protocol; extract from the broadcast packet identification information about the remote device; and store the extracted identification information in association with the remote device. Alternatively, a computer-readable medium is provided storing instructions to receive a an unsolicited broadcast packet including an address through a first protocol; extract from the broadcast packet identification information, including the address and a service available at the remote device; and communicate with the remote device via a second protocol. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005257 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENABLING DISCOVERY OF SERVICES AND AUTOMATED EXCHANGE OF DATA BETWEEN BLUETOOTH DEVICES - A method and system for enabling discovery of services and automated exchange of data between multiple Bluetooth devices are disclosed. The method includes measuring signal attenuation of a Bluetooth signal between a first Bluetooth device and a second Bluetooth device. The method further includes comparing the signal attenuation with a set of predefined threshold values. The set of predefined threshold values is associated with a set of services. The method also includes activating a corresponding service from among the set of services based on the comparison. Activating the corresponding service enables discovery of the service and automated exchange of data between the first Bluetooth device and the second Bluetooth device. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005258 | SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, IN-VEHICLE APPARATUS, AND PORTABLE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A short-range communication system includes a portable communication terminal and an in-vehicle apparatus communicatively connected to the portable communication terminal. When connection is established between the portable communication terminal and the in-vehicle apparatus, a content is executed in the in-vehicle apparatus. When the connection therebetween is released while the content is being executed in the in-vehicle apparatus, the portable communication terminal executes the content by taking over an application execution state of the in-vehicle apparatus which is transmitted from the in-vehicle apparatus. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005259 | VEHICULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, VEHICULAR COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND PORTABLE TERMINAL APPARATUS - A vehicular communication system includes: a vehicular communication apparatus; and a portable terminal apparatus. The vehicular communication apparatus includes: a vehicular storage device that stores a predetermined vehicular application for a predetermined function; and a vehicular input device that enters an operation for the predetermined function. The portable terminal apparatus includes: a mobile storage device that stores a predetermined mobile application for the predetermined function; a mobile input device that enters an operation for the predetermined function; an interoperation detection device that detects establishment of an interoperation state, in which the predetermined vehicular application and the predetermined mobile application interoperate with each other; and an operation input disable device that prevents the mobile input device from entering the operation when the interoperation detection device detects the establishment of the interoperation state. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005260 | SHORT RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - Multiple profiles are concurrently connected between an in-vehicle apparatus and a mobile phone. A streaming function is performed based on a related profile of the multiple profiles. A dial-up networking profile connection request occurs but is rejected to make connection unsuccessful. In such a case, the in-vehicle apparatus disconnects the related profile out of the currently connected multiple profiles or interrupts the streaming function based on the related profile. The in-vehicle apparatus then performs a re-connection of the dial-up networking profile with the mobile phone because the cause of rejecting the dial-up networking profile connection request is removed. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005261 | SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A short-range wireless communication apparatus comprising a connection device and a control device is disclosed. The connection device connects a sound data transfer protocol and a control data transfer protocol to a communication destination apparatus. When the control device determines that a streaming status reported from the communication destination apparatus with use of the sound data transfer protocol is an output-in-progress state, the control device identifies the state of the communication destination apparatus in accordance with a play status reported from the communication destination apparatus with use of the sound data transfer protocol. When the control device determines that the streaming status is a stopped state, the control device identifies the state of the communication destination apparatus as one of a temporarily-stopped state and a stopped state even if the reported play status is a reproduction-in-progress state. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005262 | SHORT RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A short range wireless communication device includes: a connection unit connectable with an external connection unit according to multiple data communication protocols defining data communication via a short range communication line covering a communication band; and a control unit that controls connection/disconnection of protocols. The protocols include high and low priority data communication protocols corresponding to high and low priority parts of the communication band, respectively. When a request for concurrently executing data communications under protocols is issued, the control unit preserves the high priority part of the communication band in priority to the low priority part of the communication band to execute high priority data communication under the high priority data communication protocol in priority to low priority data communication under the low priority data communication protocol. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005263 | SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A short-range wireless communication apparatus including a connection device and a control device is disclosed. The connection device is capable of connecting a communication protocol to a communication destination device. After transmitting a connection request signal of a first protocol to the communication destination device, the connection device waits for receipt of a response signal. When a request to connect a second protocol is generated while the connection device is waiting for receipt of a response signal, the control device causes the connection device to interrupt waiting for the receipt of the response signal and transmits the connection request signal of the second protocol to the communication destination device. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005264 | SHORT RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A short range wireless communication apparatus includes: a connection device that connects with an external apparatus via a short range wireless communication line according to a data communication protocol for defining data communication, wherein the external apparatus switches to a normal mode from a power-saving mode under a condition that the external apparatus receives a power-saving mode release signal from the short range wireless communication apparatus while the external apparatus operates in the power-saving mode; a transmission device that transmits the power-saving mode release signal to the external apparatus; and a control device that controls the transmission device to transmit the power-saving mode release signal to the external apparatus when the control device determines that the connection device connects with the external apparatus according to the data communication protocol. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005265 | Hand-Held, Portable Electronic Device With Retainer Port For Receiving Retainable Wireless Accessory For Use Therewith - A hand-held, portable electronic device is provided with a retainer port that defines an accessory retaining structure formed in an exterior periphery of a device housing for removably retaining a retainable wireless accessory in a cavity of the accessory retaining structure. In one embodiment of the present invention, the hand-held, portable electronic device includes a first transceiver adapted to communicate with the retainable wireless accessory over a short-range wireless communication link. The retainable wireless accessory may include a second transceiver adapted to communicate with the hand-held, portable electronic device using the short-range wireless communication link. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005266 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO CONNECT WIRELESS-ENABLED DEVICES - Example methods and apparatus to connect wireless-enabled devices are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves collecting first biophysical signal data via a first wireless-enabled device and establishing a wireless connection between the first wireless-enabled device and a second wireless-enabled device based on a comparison of the first biophysical signal data and second biophysical signal data collected at the second wireless-enabled device. | 01-03-2013 |
20130012128 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDS-FREE FUNCTION OF PORTABLE TERMINAL - Disclosed is an apparatus and a method for performing a hands-free function of a portable terminal by allowing the portable terminal to perform a hands-free accessory function of a device in communication with the portable terminal through wireless communication. The apparatus includes: a hands-free function unit connected to an audio gateway function unit of a device to implement a hands-free communication mode; and an audio gateway function unit for outputting audio data received from the device and transmitting audio data input from the portable terminal to the device during the hands-free communication mode. | 01-10-2013 |
20130012129 | PORTABLE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - The communication module | 01-10-2013 |
20130012130 | FREQUENCY SEPARATION FOR MULTIPLE BLUETOOTH DEVICES RESIDING ON A SINGLE PLATFORM - A single host device, comprising a plurality of communication devices, estimates bandwidth requirements such as maximum rates and/or an average data rate expected by each of a plurality of applications to be run on the single host. For each communication device, available frequencies utilized are determined based on the estimated bandwidth requirements. Each of the plurality of applications is allocated to corresponding one or more communication devices based on the determined available frequencies so as to, for example, concurrently run corresponding applications on the single host. The determined available frequencies are assigned to corresponding communication devices based on the estimated bandwidth requirements. The determined available frequencies and the plurality of applications may be reassigned and reallocated, respectively. Each of plurality of applications is allocated to the corresponding one or more communication devices based on the assigned/reassigned available frequencies and/or the estimated bandwidth requirements. | 01-10-2013 |
20130012131 | USING A SECURE ELEMENT AS A PASSIVE TAG - A method for configuring a mobile communication device to perform transactions using a second communication channel that is different from a first communication channel through which the mobile communication device sends voice data. The method includes attaching a secure element to the mobile communication device. The secure element includes a memory storing an application, a processor configured to execute the application stored in the memory; and a wireless transceiver configured to send transaction data associated with the executed application through the second communication channel to a terminal that is remote from the mobile communication device. | 01-10-2013 |
20130012132 | COLLISION DETECTION METHOD FOR A RADIO-FREQUENCY SIM CARD WITH LOW-FREQUENCY MAGNETIC COMMUNICATION - A collision detection method for a radio-frequency SIM card with low-frequency magnetic communication comprises: transmitting by a card reader low-frequency card seeking characteristic information; determining by a radio-frequency SIM card A whether an intensity of a low-frequency magnetic induction signal reaches a preset threshold value; if yes, receiving low-frequency card seeking characteristic information and transmitting card seeking response information through a radio-frequency channel; receiving by the card reader the card seeking response information, establishing a radio-frequency connection with the radio-frequency SIM card A, and opening a preset time window; when the preset time window closes, interrupting by the card reader a transaction process with the radio-frequency SIM card A and re-transmitting the low-frequency card seeking characteristic information; if receiving by the card reader card seeking response information transmitted by another radio-frequency SIM card B, ascertaining that a radio-frequency SIM card collision exists. | 01-10-2013 |
20130017786 | ANTENNA DEVICE - An antenna device includes a first antenna configured to operate within a first frequency band, a second antenna configured to operate within a second frequency band, wherein the second antenna is separated from the first antenna by a distance, and at least one parasitic antenna element, wherein the at least one parasitic element is substantially orthogonal to the first antenna, to the second antenna, or to both the first and second antennas, so as to substantially isolate between the first antenna and the second antenna. | 01-17-2013 |
20130017787 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHODAANM ESHITA; ShiroAACI TokyoAACO JPAAGP ESHITA; Shiro Tokyo JP - There is provided a communication apparatus including a short-range wireless communication unit for performing a short-range wireless communication with an external communication device, a position detection unit for detecting current position information, a storage unit for storing a communication position list registering therein position information at a time of performing the short-range wireless communication, and a control unit for acquiring the current position information from the position detection unit and for controlling a generation state of a standby radio signal from the short-range wireless communication unit in accordance with a comparison result obtained by comparing the acquired current position information with the communication position list. | 01-17-2013 |
20130017788 | PROTECTIVE CASE FOR ADDING WIRELESS FUNCTIONALITY TO A HANDHELD ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A protective case for an electronic device may comprise a wireless adaptor for adding wireless capabilities, including support of additional wireless communication protocols, to the electronic device. The system may enable, for example, location based services functions, social networking functions, and messaging functions. | 01-17-2013 |
20130017789 | Systems and Methods for Accessing an Interaction State Between Multiple Devices - The present application discloses systems and methods for accessing digital content between multiple devices. The systems and methods may be directed to providing access to an interaction with a first application on a head-mounted display (HMD) to a second device. Contextual information relating information of the HMD and information associated with the interaction to describe an interaction state may be stored. A second device may be selected upon which the interaction state may be accessed and a determination of attributes of the second device may be made. The HMD may transfer to the second device the stored contextual information such that the second device may provide via the second application access to the interaction state. Information associated with a user input to the first application may also be transferred. In one example, the contextual information may describe an identified occurrence of digital content accessed via the first application. | 01-17-2013 |
20130017790 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - The present disclosure is directed to an information processing apparatus. The information processing apparatus may have a memory configured to store an identification information of an IC tag in association with a communication profile in a table. The information processing apparatus may also have a first communication unit configured to communicate with the IC tag using a first communication function. The information processing apparatus may also have a second communication unit configured to communicate with an external apparatus using a second communication function different from the first communication function. In addition, the information processing apparatus may have a controller, which may be configured to receive identification information from the IC tag through the first communication unit and to establish a connection with the external apparatus through the second communication unit based on the received identification information and the table stored in the memory. | 01-17-2013 |
20130017791 | MEDICAL BODY AREA NETWORK (MBAN) WITH KEY-BASED CONTROL OF SPECTRUM USAGE - A medical body area network (MBAN) system ( | 01-17-2013 |
20130023212 | DATA PROTECTION SYSTEM - A protection system includes a storage device and a portable electronic device. The storage device includes a connecting portion, a memory, a first Bluetooth device, and a controller. The connecting portion, the memory, and the first Bluetooth device are connected to the controller. The memory has a read/write port. The controller controls the read/write port to connect the connecting portion for data transmission. The portable electronic device includes a second Bluetooth device and a verifying module. When the connecting portion is connected to the computer, the first Bluetooth device can send an interrogation signal to the second Bluetooth device, the verifying module of second Bluetooth device can permit reading of data in the memory, and the second Bluetooth device sends a reading-permitted signal to the first Bluetooth device, and the controller connect the read/write port to the connecting portion for data transmission. | 01-24-2013 |
20130023213 | METHOD OF OPERATING A MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION TERMINAL - As a realistic alternative to traditional business cards for fast and flawless electronic exchange of contact data, a search for additional mobile telecommunication terminals within a predetermined range of a mobile telecommunication terminal is conducted using a wireless connection. When a second mobile telecommunication terminal is within the predetermined range, an identification element associated with the user of the additional mobile telecommunication terminal is loaded into memory of the first mobile telecommunication terminal and displayed together with a confirmation control element on a user interface of the first telecommunication terminal. Upon actuation the confirmation control element, presence of a consent element generated by the user of the second telecommunication terminal and associated with the user of the first telecommunication terminal is checked. When the consent element is present, contact data of the user of the second mobile telecommunication terminal are loaded into the memory of the first mobile telecommunication terminal. | 01-24-2013 |
20130023214 | CENTRALIZED DYNAMIC CHANNEL ALLOCATION FOR MEDICAL BODY AREA NETWORKS - A centralized frequency agility technique is employed in conjunction with a plurality of medical body area network (MBAN) systems ( | 01-24-2013 |
20130023215 | MEDICAL BODY AREA NETWORK (MBAN) WITH AUTOMATIC IN-FACILITY SPECTRUM USE ENFORCEMENT - A medical system comprises: a medical body area network (MB AN) system ( | 01-24-2013 |
20130029599 | Method and Apparatus for Communication Between a Vehicle Based Computing System and a Remote Application - A vehicle-based computing apparatus includes a computer processor in communication with persistent and non-persistent memory. The apparatus also includes a local wireless transceiver in communication with the computer processor and configured to communicate wirelessly with a wireless device located at the vehicle. The processor is operable to receive, through the wireless transceiver, a connection request sent from a nomadic wireless device, the connection request including at least a name of an application seeking to communicate with the processor. The processor is further operable to receive at least one secondary communication from the nomadic device, once the connection request has been processed. The secondary communication is at least one of a speak alert command, a display text command, a create phrase command, and a prompt and listen command. | 01-31-2013 |
20130029600 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication system comprises a leaky coaxial cable configured to be vertically arranged on a placing surface, a base station configured to make the leaky coaxial cable radiate electric wave, and an illumination unit configured to illuminate an area coincident with a communication area formed by the electric wave radiated from the leaky coaxial cable arranged on the placing surface. | 01-31-2013 |
20130029601 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH SIMULTANEOUS WIRELESS LAN AND BLUE-TOOTH COMMUNICATION CAPABILITY - A communication device is disclosed, having a wireless LAN transceiver, a wireless LAN demodulation circuit, a Bluetooth transceiver, a Bluetooth demodulation circuit, an oscillator, and a mixer. The wireless LAN transceiver conducts communication in a first frequency band and the wireless LAN demodulation circuit demodulates the wireless LAN signals. The Bluetooth transceiver conducts communication in a second band and a third frequency band, which are higher and lower than the first frequency band, respectively. The oscillator generates oscillating signals. The mixer mixes the signals in the second frequency band with an oscillating signal, which is higher than the second frequency band, and mixes the signals in the third frequency band with another oscillating signal, which is lower than the third frequency band to generate mixed signals. The Bluetooth demodulation circuit demodulates the mixed signals of the mixer. | 01-31-2013 |
20130029602 | METHOD OF ACQUISITION BY A MOBILE TERMINAL OF COMPLEMENTARY INFORMATION RELATED TO AT LEAST ONE POSTER PRESENT ON A DISPLAY PANEL - A method of acquisition by a mobile terminal ( | 01-31-2013 |
20130029603 | DUAL RANGE RADIOFREQUENCY COMMUNICATION OBJECT AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING SAME - The present invention relates to a communication object comprising means for radiofrequency communication with a remote device, wherein said communication means are capable of establishing a first short-range communication and a second communication having a longer range than the first communication, said long range being enabled by Bluetooth or Wifi technology. The communication means use the same type of communication technology for the first and second communications. The invention also relates to a method for implementing the dual-range radiofrequency communication of the object. | 01-31-2013 |
20130029604 | SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A subject short-range wireless communication apparatus capable of simultaneously connecting multiple profiles with another short-range wireless communication apparatus acting as a connection counterpart is disclosed. The subject apparatus comprises: a communication disconnection detection device that, in cases where a first profile is connected between the subject apparatus and the another apparatus, detects whether or not the first profile is disconnected due to the subject apparatus' non-acceptance of a connection request of a second profile sent from the another apparatus; and a communication re-connection device that, in response to disconnection of the first profile detected by the communication disconnection detection device, re-connects the first profile with the another apparatus. | 01-31-2013 |
20130035038 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A base unit of a radio communication apparatus of the present invention includes a controller that discriminates whether or not company identifying information transmitted from a cordless handset is specific information in connecting a line in a Bluetooth (BT) communication mode, performs communication in another radio communication standard (company's own mode) on determining that the company identifying information is the specific information, and performs the communication in a BT standard on determining that the company identifying information is not the specific information, and a registering unit for registering an ID peculiar to the apparatus. This simple structure allows long-distance communication at higher sound quality with the other apparatus capable of performing CDL communication in the company's own mode using an error handling function, and sound communication at usual sound quality in a BT data format allowing short-distance communication even when the company identifying information is not the specific information. | 02-07-2013 |
20130035039 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRIGGERING NETWORK DEVICE DISCOVERY - A compass output in a first portable electronic device is monitored as the first device and a second electronic device come closer to each other. It is determined, by a process running in the first device, whether a magnetic field signature that is based on the monitored compass output is associated with a previously defined type of electronic device with which a network device discovery process is to be conducted. Other embodiments are also described and claimed. | 02-07-2013 |
20130040572 | PROXIMITY DETECTION FOR SHARED COMPUTING EXPERIENCES - Systems and methods for detecting whether or not two devices are proximate to one another in order to provide a shared computing experience are provided. The method includes broadcasting audio from a first computing device; receiving the broadcast audio at a second computing device; and processing the received audio to identify a unique audio signature within the broadcasted/received audio. The unique audio signature uniquely identifying the first computing device. The method may further include determining that the first computing device and the second computing device are proximate to one another based on the broadcast audio; and providing a shared computing experience at one or both of the first computing device and the second computing device, where the shared computing experience is not provided in the event that it is determined that the first and second computing devices are non-proximate to one another. | 02-14-2013 |
20130040573 | Systems and Methods for Low Power Short Range Wireless Device Communication Advertisement - The present invention relates to a system and method for improving directed connectable advertising in a low energy Bluetooth device. The host on the Bluetooth device configures an advertisement interval length, an advertisement window length, and a number of attempts. The advertisement window length is equal to or shorter than the advertisement interval length, which may be less than 1.28 seconds. Next, advertising packets are transmitted for the length of the advertising window on three advertising channels. Packets are transmitted consecutively, with no more than a 3.75 millisecond delay between packets, until the end of the advertisements window. After transmitting, a link layer of the Bluetooth device decrements the number of attempts. Once all attempts have been exhausted, the advertisements end. Otherwise, the link layer waits for the end of the advertisement interval. The link layer generates a pseudorandom delay between 0 and 10 milliseconds, and waits for this time to pass before initiating another advertisement interval with transmission during the advertisement window. If a connection is made at any point, the advertisement may be ended. | 02-14-2013 |
20130040574 | Systems and Methods for Low Power Short Range Wireless Device Communication Scanning - The present invention relates to a system and method for improving scanning in a low energy Bluetooth device. The host configures a scan interval length, and a scan window length. The scan window length is equal to or shorter than the scan interval length. Next, a link layer initiates a scan interval, and also generates a random delay. The random delay may be anywhere between zero and the difference between the scan window length and the scan interval length. The link layer waits for the delay to complete before scanning is performed by the transceiver. The transceiver scans for the duration of the scan window. After scanning, the system waits for the end of the scan interval before the link layer generates a subsequent randomized delay and the transceiver again scans for the duration o the scan window. This process may continue indefinitely until a connection is established. In some embodiments, the scan window may be subdivided into a number of sub-windows, each preceded by a randomized delay. In some embodiments, the scan window may be interrupted for other high priority radio procedures. In other embodiments, the link layer may identify these radio usage conflicts, and may recalculate the random delay in order to avoid the conflict entirely. | 02-14-2013 |
20130040575 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND BLUETOOTH DEVICE UTILIZING THE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication method for a Bluetooth device in a scatternet which may include several piconets is proposed. The method includes transmitting data to a peer device in the first piconet, determining whether there is any buffered data to be transmitted to the peer device in the first piconet, and switching from the first piconet to the next piconet to transmit data to a peer device in the second piconet according to the determination result. | 02-14-2013 |
20130040576 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORMING WI-FI P2P GROUP USING WI-FI DIRECT - Provided is a method for forming a Wi-Fi Peer-to-Peer (P2P) group using Wi-Fi Direct. The method includes acquiring device information of other P2P device corresponding to a connection target by P2P devices that will form a Wi-Fi P2P group; checking a type of the other P2P devices based on the acquired device information; adjusting an intent value of a P2P device depending on the checked type of the other P2P devices; and forming a Wi-Fi P2P group based on the adjusted intent values of the P2P devices. | 02-14-2013 |
20130045683 | VEHICLE WIRELESS HUB - A vehicle wireless hub includes a vehicle power connector that can draw power from a vehicle battery on a vehicle, a first wireless transmission circuit that can send or receive data with base stations in a long-range wireless network, a second wireless transmission circuit that can provide a short-range wireless network and to transfer data to and from electronic devices, and a network processor that can process data in the first wireless transmission circuit and the second wireless transmission circuit. The vehicle power connector can supply power to the first wireless transmission circuit, the second wireless transmission circuit, and the network processor. | 02-21-2013 |
20130045684 | AUDIO TRANSFER USING THE BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY STANDARD - The described embodiments include a system for communicating between electronic devices. During operation, a receiving electronic device receives a data channel protocol data unit (PDU) in a link layer of a Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE) protocol stack. The receiving electronic device then reads a field in a header of the data channel PDU to determine if the header indicates that a payload of the data channel PDU contains audio data. When the header indicates that the payload of the data channel PDU contains audio data, the receiving electronic device is configured to send the audio data from the payload to an audio layer in the BTLE protocol stack for processing. | 02-21-2013 |
20130045685 | HEALTH CARE SANITATION MONITORING SYSTEM - A medical sanitation device may include a detector for detecting the physical presence of a clinician token within a detection area in the vicinity of the medical sanitation device. The clinician token may be indicative of the identity of a clinician. The medical sanitation device also includes a sanitation module configured to be used by the clinician to perform a sanitation task. Detection of a clinician in proximity to the medical sanitation device may be used to at least partially control access to, or operation of, a medical patient monitoring device. | 02-21-2013 |
20130045686 | SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION - A system, a mobile communication terminal, and a method for providing information. The system for providing information includes: a tag configured to store tag information; a mobile communication terminal configured to obtain the tag information using short-range communication and to calculate position information of the mobile communication terminal when the tag information is obtained; and an information providing server configured to receive the tag information and the position information from the mobile communication terminal, extract service address information which provides information for connecting to a service identified by the tag information and based on the position information, and provide the extracted service address information to the mobile communication terminal. The mobile communication terminal is connected to the service based on the service address information. | 02-21-2013 |
20130045687 | Short-Range Wireless Communication - The present specification describes techniques and apparatus that enable wireless devices to communicate effectively at short ranges. In one implementation, the transmit power of a transmitting device is reduced to permit a receiving device to demodulate a signal. | 02-21-2013 |
20130045688 | Short-Range Wireless Communication - The present specification describes techniques and apparatus that enable wireless devices to communicate effectively at short ranges. In one implementation, the transmit power of a transmitting device is reduced to permit a receiving device to demodulate a signal. | 02-21-2013 |
20130052954 | DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN MOBILE COMPUTING DEVICES - A first mobile computing device comprising a first mobile computing device touch screen, one or more files, one or more sensors adapted to detect a first location of a second mobile computing device relative to the first mobile computing device upon the second mobile computing device being located proximally to the one or more sensors, and one or more first mobile computing device applications, wherein, the one or more first mobile computing device applications, communicatively receives the first location of the second mobile computing device from the one or more sensors, and communicatively transfers the one or more files to the second mobile computing device upon at least one of, touching the first mobile computing device touch screen with a touching device and sliding the touching device towards the first location of the second mobile computing device, and moving the second mobile computing device from the first location to a second location. | 02-28-2013 |
20130052955 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication apparatus carries out a first data transfer in a first wireless communication method to another apparatus using a physical layer and a data link layer of the first wireless communication method, carries out a second data transfer of a higher speed than the first data transfer to the other apparatus in the first wireless communication method using a physical layer and a data link layer of a second wireless communication method, and further carries out a third data transfer to the other apparatus in the second wireless communication method using the physical layer and data link layer of the second wireless communication method; and limits operations of carrying out the third data transfer by the physical layer and data link layer of the second wireless communication method when an instruction for the second data transfer is given. | 02-28-2013 |
20130052956 | Hand-Held Mobile Device Dock - A mobile device dock is provided. The dock is a hand-held mobile device that receives a mobile phone, tablet, or other mobile device. The dock improves a user's grip of a mobile device, allows for hands-free use of the mobile device, and/or may improve sound quality of the mobile device. | 02-28-2013 |
20130059538 | VEHICLE MULTIMEDIA HEAD UNIT WITH TWO BLUETOOTH ANTENNAS AND TWO RECEIVERS - Examples of the present invention include a head unit for a vehicle entertainment system, including a housing, a radio, a first wireless transceiver, and a second wireless transceiver. The second wireless transceiver may be used to provide a dedicated communications link between the head unit and another electronic device, such as an auxiliary unit. The second wireless transceiver may have a serial port profile (SPP), and may be a Bluetooth transceiver. | 03-07-2013 |
20130059539 | SHORT RANGE RF MONITORNING SYSTEM - A wireless short range radio-frequency master device adapted to create and maintain a portable private network of wireless short range radio-frequency slave devices wherein the master device is configured to detect and register suitable slave devices for a network, and is capable of determining the proximity of any registered slave device with respect to the master device in use, the master device further being adapted to enable a user to define two or more groups of registered slave devices selected from the total number of registered slave devices and to enable a user to select a defined group of such registered slave devices as an active group, thereby forming an active portable private network of wireless short range radio frequency devices comprising the master device and selected registered slave devices within the selected group. | 03-07-2013 |
20130059540 | Methods, Systems, And Computer Program Products For Providing Mobile Ad Hoc Cooperative Communication Systems And Related Devices - A method of operating a mobile electronic device includes detecting at least one other mobile electronic device within a predetermined distance of the mobile electronic device, and determining a spatial relationship of the at least one other mobile electronic device relative to the mobile electronic device. An ad hoc wireless connection is established with the at least one other mobile electronic device based on the determined spatial relationship. Data may be transmitted to and/or received from the at least one other mobile electronic device over the ad hoc wireless connection based on the determined spatial relationship. Related systems, devices, and computer program products are also discussed. | 03-07-2013 |
20130059541 | Wireless Communication Authentication for Medical Monitoring Device - Methods, systems, and devices for authenticated wireless protocol pairing are provided. Authenticated wireless protocol pairing may include detecting an analyte sample; determining an analyte concentration associated with the detected analyte sample; generating an unauthenticated pairing with an external device by initiating a pairing procedure of a wireless protocol stack with the external device, and on a condition that the wireless protocol stack issues a pairing message, suppressing the pairing message; preventing communication based on the unauthenticated pairing with the external device; generating an authenticated pairing based on the unauthenticated pairing by displaying a pairing authentication message, and in response to user input indicating that the unauthenticated pairing is an authenticated pairing, converting the unauthenticated pairing to an authenticated pairing; and transmitting an indication of the analyte concentration to the external device. | 03-07-2013 |
20130065525 | Transmit Power Control in Multi-Radio Apparatus - A method, apparatus, and computer program for controlling transmission power of a radio apparatus are provided. The method includes: determining, in a radio apparatus configured to support a cellular radio access technology in communication with a cellular counterpart apparatus and a short range radio access technology in communication with a short range counterpart apparatus, a maximum total transmit power of the radio apparatus; causing the radio apparatus to use a first transmit power level in transmission to the cellular counterpart apparatus; determining a remaining transmission power margin by computing a difference between the maximum total transmit power and the first transmit power level; and causing the radio apparatus to autonomously limit a second transmit power level to fall within the remaining transmission power margin and to use the second transmit power level in transmission to the short range counterpart apparatus. | 03-14-2013 |
20130065526 | Platform-Enabled Proximity Service - Embodiments include processes, systems, and devices for initiating proximity actions upon the activation of a proximity connection. A proximity service receives an indication from a proximity provider that a proximity connection is established, and then determines a joint proximity context of the proximity connection. The proximity service then initiates a proximity action to facilitate a proximity function indicated by the joint proximity context. Joint proximity contexts include indications that an application has queued content to be shared with a proximity device, that an application has registered to publish messages on a namespace, that an application has subscribed to messages on a namespace, that an application has registered to find a peer application on a proximity device to enable multi-user collaboration, and that a device seeks to pair with another device. | 03-14-2013 |
20130065527 | WIRELESS TERMINAL WITH SWITCHED AUXILIARY DEVICE PORT APPARATUS AND METHOD - A wireless terminal switched device port apparatus adapted for use in a communication system Shaving a switching system member, a radio transceiver connector element, a wired accessory port connector element, a wireless transceiver element, and an antenna is disclosed. | 03-14-2013 |
20130065528 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device including: a setting portion that sets the communication device as a main device when communication device is connected to another device and receives an electric power from an external power supply, and sets communication device as a client device when communication device is connected to another device and receives an electric power from another device; an update portion that transmits first and second identifiers to another device, receives from another device third and fourth identifiers, forms a network to which communication device and another device belong with second identifier when communication device is set as the main device, and updates second identifier with fourth identifier when communication device is set as the client device; and a wireless communication portion that, when another device is disconnected from communication device, communicates wirelessly with another device with first and third identifiers, and any one of second and fourth identifiers. | 03-14-2013 |
20130065529 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus includes a communication unit configured to conduct close proximity wireless communication with another communication apparatus, and a controller configured to apply control to alternately set transmit rights for transmitting data to a communication peer by the close proximity wireless communication between the communication apparatus and the other communication apparatus by adjusting the transmit start timing for data to be transmitted to the other communication apparatus. | 03-14-2013 |
20130065530 | SWITCHING DEVICE FOR CAR-TO-X COMMUNICATION AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A switching device for connection to an antenna unit and a computing unit to form a communication device for car-to-X communication, in particular a DSRC communication device. The switching device has at least one interface for communication with a mobile terminal device, in particular a mobile telephone. The switching device includes a computing unit and a control device to forward at least a part of received messages to the mobile terminal device and/or to transmit messages on the basis of a control command from the mobile terminal device. | 03-14-2013 |
20130065531 | System And Method To Communicate Targeted Information - A method for targeted advertising is disclosed. The method includes accessing at least one piece of demographic information associated with a user of a portable device, selecting an advertisement to be delivered to the user based at least in part on the demographic information, and initiating communication of a version of the advertisement configured for presentation at the portable device. | 03-14-2013 |
20130072119 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING WITH BLUETOOTH DEVICE IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method operative in a portable terminal, for connecting with a Bluetooth or other short range protocol device are disclosed. The portable terminal searches for the presence of accessories such as a headset or printer within a short range. The terminal pairs with at least one discovered accessory in a pairing process and acquires and stores connection information associated with each paired accessory in the pairing process. The connection information includes at least one of a Bluetooth address, a WiFi address, a security key, and function information for the paired accessory. The connection information is then shared with at least one peer terminal to facilitate subsequent pairing between the at least one peer terminal and the accessory. | 03-21-2013 |
20130072120 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING AN INFRARED CAMERA USING A MOBILE PHONE - The present application provides a system and method for controlling an infrared camera by using a mobile phone. The system includes a client and an infrared camera used as a server and connected to the client through a communication network. The infrared camera is mounted in a location to perform infrared measuring and/or monitoring, so as to provide infrared image videos of a monitored object and temperature data of the points contained in an infrared image. The client is mounted in a position far away from the location of the infrared camera to provide a remote control for the infrared camera. The present application allows monitoring personnel or a user to remotely monitor and control an infrared camera by using a mobile phone. | 03-21-2013 |
20130072121 | Radio Beacon and Method for Selectively Communicating in Accordance with 5.8 and 5.9 GHz DSRC Standards - A radio beacon and a method for selective radio communication with a first onboard unit and a second onboard unit, in which a sequence of first data packet is transmitted to the first onboard unit in a first frequency band in accordance with 5.8 GHz DSRC standards, a sequence of second data packet is transmitted or received to/from the second onboard unit in accordance with 5.9 GHz DSRC standards, wherein the transmission of a data packet of the sequence of first data packet is delayed by the duration of the second data packet if the second data packet appears in the second frequency band. | 03-21-2013 |
20130072122 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CHANNEL PAIRING A TRANSMITTER AND A RECEIVER - Systems and methods for channel pairing a transmitter and a receiver are provided. In this regard, a representative method, among others, includes selecting a channel in a radio frequency (RF) band; transmitting a carrier and alert tone on the selected channel in the RF band; responsive to detecting the transmitted carrier and alert tone, demodulating the carrier and alert tone on the selected channel in the RF band and producing the demodulated alert tone; and responsive to detecting the produced alert tone, using the selected channel to establish a wireless link between the transmitter and receiver. | 03-21-2013 |
20130078923 | PAIRING WITH DIRECTIONAL CODE SEQUENCE - Disclosed are various embodiments of pairing with a directional code sequence. In one embodiment a method includes discovering that a user device is within proximity of a pairing device. A directional code sequence based upon variations in the position of the user device is obtained and a communication link is established between the user device and the pairing device in response to the directional code sequence. In another embodiment, a system includes a user device and a pairing device configured to establish a communication link with the user device in response to a sequence of position variations of the user device. In another embodiment, a method includes obtaining a sequence of characters corresponding to a directional code sequence from a pairing device and transmitting a signal from a user device to the pairing device from a sequence of positions corresponding to the sequence of characters. | 03-28-2013 |
20130084805 | Orientation Determination For A Mobile Device - A system determines an orientation of a user of a mobile device has a head-mounted accessory device including a first digital compass for providing a first orientation signal and a short-range wireless transmitter for transmitting the first orientation signal to the mobile device. The mobile device includes a short-range wireless receiver for receiving the first orientation signal from the head-mounted accessory device. A processor in the mobile device determines the orientation based on the first orientation signal. The mobile device may include a second digital compass. The system with two compasses provides greater accuracy. By comparing the two orientation signals, the device can infer whether the user is viewing the mobile device. Tilt sensors in the accessory device and mobile device can also be used with the orientation signals to infer whether the user is viewing the mobile device and thus to control content delivered by the mobile device. | 04-04-2013 |
20130084806 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE CONFIGURATION OF A MOBILE STATION BASEBAND CIRCUIT FOR AN ACOUSTIC ACCESSORY - A method and system for the configuration of a mobile station baseband circuit for an acoustic accessory having an identifier, the method comprising the steps of: determining whether the mobile device recognizes the identifier of the acoustic device; and configuring the baseband circuit with a DSP filter response and CODEC acoustic gain parameters for the acoustic device if the mobile device recognizes the identifier of the acoustic device. The system comprising: an identifier for each of the plurality of acoustic devices; a local memory in the mobile station storing a frequency (filter) response and gain parameters for at least one of the plurality of acoustic devices and for mapping them to the identifier; and a digital signal processor to re-shape an acoustic frequency response and adjust an audio gain of a baseband circuit for the mobile station based on the stored frequency response and gain parameters. | 04-04-2013 |
20130090060 | WIRELESS MODEM - A wireless modem is disclosed. In one embodiment, the wireless modem includes a first transceiver configured to wirelessly transmit and receive first data according to a long-range communication standard and a second transceiver configured to wirelessly transmit and receive second data according to a short-range communication standard. The modem may further include a wireless interface configured to wirelessly communicate the second data with a first computing device according to the short-range communication standard and a controller configured to perform a signal conversion between the first data and second data. | 04-11-2013 |
20130090061 | LOW POWER WIRELESS DEVICE DISCOVERY - An efficient wireless connection protocol is described. | 04-11-2013 |
20130090062 | HEAD-MOUNTED COMPUTER WITH PERIPHERAL EXPANSION PORT - A head-mounted computing device is described. The head-mounted computing device includes a processor. Coupled to the processor is a memory for storing a software application for execution on the processor. A battery provides current to the processor. A frame supports the processor, the memory, and the battery. The frame includes a mechanical coupling feature and an electrical connector for receiving a peripheral. | 04-11-2013 |
20130090063 | DATA MERGING FOR BLUETOOTH DEVICES - A device having a first processing system for providing the functionality of the upper layers of a Bluetooth stack, including a first L2CAP layer, a Bluetooth Controller for providing the functionality of the lower layers of the Bluetooth stack, the first processing system and the Bluetooth Controller being connected by a Host Controller Interface (HCI), a second processing system including an implementation of a second L2CAP layer for transmission of data to the Bluetooth Controller for transmission over a Bluetooth Link established by the first processing system and L2CAP layer, and the first processing system being configured to distribute flow-control tokens between the first and second L2CAP layers both layers can transmit data to a remote device using the Bluetooth Link. | 04-11-2013 |
20130090064 | DYNAMIC RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS ACCESS POINT - The claimed subject matter provides for systems and/or methods for a dynamic range wireless access point to initiate deliberate and/or selective communications with one or more wireless devices over a short range radio path. One embodiment of an access point system comprises a processor that transfers one or more wireless devices to a long range radio path once a transition condition has been met. In another embodiment, an access point system may affect transactions between user/customer's smart devices and a commercial place of business where the access point system and the smart devices initiate communications when the smart devices are deliberately placed within the proximity of the access point antenna and/or the smart devices are brought within the vicinity of the access point antenna such as by passing through the entrance or exit to the place of business. | 04-11-2013 |
20130090065 | METHOD OF OPERATING GESTURE BASED COMMUNICATION CHANNEL AND PORTABLE TERMINAL SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING THE SAME - Methods and apparatus are provided for operating a close proximity communication channel based on a gesture. A gesture event is generated on a touch screens of a portable terminal. The portable terminal includes a close proximity communication module. The portable terminal generates a context message corresponding to the gesture event. The context message is transmitted to at least one other portable terminal. The close proximity communication channel is established based on the context message. | 04-11-2013 |
20130090066 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE PROCESSING CONTROL OF MULTIPLE RADIO FREQUENCY COMMUNICATION STREAMS BY AN INTEGRATED CIRCUIT CARD - The present invention relates to a method for processing a plurality of radiofrequency communication streams by way of an integrated circuit card, the streams originating from at least two terminals, and the card being connected to a device equipped with a radiofrequency communication interface which is suitable for the connection of a plurality of host terminals. The method includes monitoring the reception and/or transmission at and/or to the card of a first and second stream of data originating respectively from a first and second host terminal. The monitoring step includes a step of checking the availability of the card before the second stream of data is transmitted to the card. The invention also relates to the corresponding monitoring system and device. | 04-11-2013 |
20130095760 | System and Methods for Avoiding Interference Between Communications in Different Frequency Bands - An electronic device may include wireless communications circuitry that communicates in multiple radio-frequency communications bands such as cellular or local area network bands. The radio-frequency communications bands may be divided into channels that are each associated with a frequency range within a corresponding radio-frequency communications band. The electronic device may identify whether frequency harmonics associated with communications in a first radio-frequency communications band interfere with communications in a second radio-frequency communications band. The electronic device may identify channels in the second radio-frequency communications band that are affected by the frequency harmonics of the communications in the first radio-frequency communications band and configure the wireless communications circuitry to avoid communicating in the identified channels. | 04-18-2013 |
20130095761 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SEAMLESS SWITCHING BETWEEN A PLURALITY OF WIRELESS CONNECTIONS FOR WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS - A wireless communications system is provided with a first wireless communications module, a second wireless communications module, and a connection management module. The first wireless communications module operates in compliance with a first wireless communication protocol, and transmits data by wireless transceiving via a first wireless connection. The second wireless communications module operates in compliance with a second wireless communication protocol. The connection management module requests the second wireless communications module to establish a second wireless connection in response to a signal indicator of the first wireless connection having a value within a predetermined range, and transfers the data to the second wireless communications module to be transmitted via the second wireless connection. | 04-18-2013 |
20130095762 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention relates to a communication system and a communication method for simply and quickly starting communication. A cellular phone is loaded with a non-contact IC card that communicates with a reader/writer of a personal computer using an electromagnetic wave. When the non-contact IC card receives the electromagnetic wave emitted from the reader/writer with the cellular phone placed close to the personal computer, the cellular phone notifies the personal computer of a card ID set in the non-contact IC card. When the personal computer acquires Bluetooth device names of the cellular phone and PDA with intra-piconet synchronization established between the cellular phone and the PDA, the personal computer identifies the cellular phone as a communication partner based on the Bluetooth device names already notified of as the card ID. The present invention is applicable to an information processing apparatus such as a personal computer and a cellular phone. | 04-18-2013 |
20130102250 | CLOSE-PROXIMITY WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TRANSFER - A system for transferring active communication sessions between apparatuses. In at least one example implementation, a first apparatus may receive information including at least identity information corresponding to a second apparatus via close-proximity wireless communication. The receipt of the identity information may then trigger the first apparatus to determine whether it is already in a communication session. If it is determined that the first apparatus is in a communication session, it may be further determined, based on the identity information, whether automatic transfer of the communication session is permitted. If the first apparatus determines that the automatic transfer is permitted, the first apparatus may then initiate a transfer of the communication session to the second apparatus. | 04-25-2013 |
20130102251 | DATA TRANSFER USING THE BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY STANDARD - During operation in the described embodiments, a transmitting electronic device transmits a first data channel protocol data unit (PDU) with a payload containing data D to a receiving electronic device using a Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE) interface in a sending window for the transmitting electronic device during a regular event, wherein transmitting the first data channel PDU during the regular event comprises using a first frequency to transmit the first data channel PDU. The transmitting electronic device then transmits a second data channel PDU with a payload containing the same data D to the receiving electronic device using the BTLE interface in a sending window for the transmitting electronic device during a corresponding retransmission event, wherein transmitting the second data channel PDU during the retransmission event comprises using a second frequency to transmit the second data channel PDU. | 04-25-2013 |
20130102252 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AND DISTANCE BOUNDING SYSTEM - The method for communicating between a first device and a second device includes the steps of: the first and second device communicating by exchanging messages that are based on signals that are transmitted through a plurality of communication channels; the first device sending a challenge message to the second device over one communication channel; the second device sending, upon reception of the challenge message, a response message to the first device through at least two communication channels that have essentially identical signal propagation velocities; the first device measuring the time elapsed between the sending of the challenge message to the reception of the response message; and the first device computing its distance to the second device based on this time, knowledge about travelling speed of the challenge and the response message and the processing delay that the second device adds to generate and send the response message. | 04-25-2013 |
20130102253 | DISTRIBUTED CONTROL OF MEDICAL DEVICES TO AVOID EFFECTS OF INTERFERENCE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for transmitting relatively more critical information between devices using a first wireless technology and transmitting relatively less critical information using a second wireless technology more susceptible to interference than the first wireless technology. One example method generally includes performing an association with a second apparatus via a first wireless technology, wherein the first wireless technology requires proximity between the first and second apparatuses; communicating first information with the second apparatus via the first wireless technology, a second wireless technology, or a combination of both the first and second wireless technologies, while the first and second apparatuses are still in proximity; and communicating second information with the second apparatus via the second wireless technology. | 04-25-2013 |
20130109313 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR DISCOVERY OF WIRELESS NETWORKS | 05-02-2013 |
20130109314 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR STOPPING RECEPTION OF DISCOVERY RESPONSES IN WIRELESS NETWORKS | 05-02-2013 |
20130109315 | Concurrent BLE scanning and initiation for bandwidth efficiency and power saving | 05-02-2013 |
20130109316 | Connectivity Sled for Electronic Pairing and Physical Cooperation Between a Mobile Device and Associated Peripheral Devices | 05-02-2013 |
20130109317 | SIGNAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, CONNECTOR APPARATUS, ELECTRONIC DEVICE, AND SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD | 05-02-2013 |
20130109318 | DATA CONTROL APPARATUS, DATA CONTROL METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM | 05-02-2013 |
20130115880 | Pairing a Bluetooth Device to a Virtual Desktop in a Hosted Desktop Environment - Techniques are provided for a client to send a message to a server comprising information configured to indicate that a user has logged on to the client. A determination is made as to whether the user logging on for the first time. When the user logs on for the first time, a message is received comprising a pseudo hardware address for a client wireless device associated with the client. The pseudo hardware address is assigned to the client wireless device. The client wireless device is paired with a wireless device associated with the user. A message is generated comprising pairing information for a pairing between the client wireless device and the user wireless device and the pairing information is sent to the server for storage. When the user subsequently logs on, a message is received comprising the pairing information and the client wireless device is provisioned with the pairing information. | 05-09-2013 |
20130115881 | WIRELESS OBTAINING METHOD FOR EXTERNAL DATA, ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND APPLICATION PROGRAM - A wireless method for obtaining external data is comprised of an electronic apparatus, an external message and an external apparatus. The electronic apparatus reads an external message without physical contact and identifies a Media Access Control (MAC) Address of an external apparatus in accordance with the contactless message. The electronic apparatus establishes a wireless connection with the external apparatus directly using the identified MAC Address, and obtains necessary data from the external apparatus through the wireless connection. Therefore this wireless method circumvents the hassle for user to turn on and off a Bluetooth transmitting component of the electronic apparatus, select a connecting target, and establish the wireless connection with the external apparatus manually all together. | 05-09-2013 |
20130115882 | WIRELESS HEADSET SWITCHING SYSTEM - A wireless headset system including a switching unit having a detection circuit coupled to a wireless adapter. The detection circuit provides a first output signal to the wireless adapter upon detection of a triggering event, such as activation of a manual switch or detection of voltage of an audio output signal from a mobile communications device. The first output signal causes the wireless adapter to enter into an active audio channel mode. The detection circuit also provides a second output signal to the wireless adapter when no triggering event is detected, and the second output signal causes the wireless adapter to enter into a standby mode. Placing at least the wireless adapter in a standby mode saves battery life of the system. | 05-09-2013 |
20130115883 | ENHANCED WIRELESS HANDSET, INCLUDING DIRECT HANDSET-TO-HANDSET COMMUNICATION MODE - A wireless handset is provided with enhanced features and capabilities. The wireless handset may be embodied as a full-featured handset that is capable of operating either within a wireless network (such as a cellular or PCS network) or in a direct handset-to-handset communication mode that is independent of the wireless network. Alternatively, the wireless handset may be embodied as a special purpose handset, that is capable of simply operating in a direct handset-to-handset communication mode. The wireless handset may additionally include features for supporting and enhancing direct communication between handsets. Such features may include a find feature that permits a user to determine which objects, including other wireless handset users, are located within a predetermined operating range of the wireless handset. A memorize feature may also be provided to permit handsets and other objects exchange information by wireless transmission. | 05-09-2013 |
20130115884 | FIVE-BAND BLUETOOTH BUILT-IN ANTENNA AND ITS MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A five-band Bluetooth built-in antenna and its mobile communication terminal provide bandwidth for communication. A built-in antenna comprises an antenna radiation unit and a first slot, a second slot and a third slot; Slots are added to approach a center frequency of a low-frequency branch part of the antenna so that the antenna generates resonance, so the low-frequency bandwidth of the antenna is increased. A high-frequency part of the antenna generates resonance by means of capacitive coupling | 05-09-2013 |
20130115885 | METHOD FOR ENERGY EFFICIENT BODY SENSOR NETWORK DISCOVERY - When monitoring a patient in a healthcare environment, a location of a battery-powered mobile aggregator (MA) sensor ( | 05-09-2013 |
20130122810 | Device Association - A method of associating a first device with a second device is disclosed. The first device through its speaker broadcasts a request for association using an audio signal. The broadcasted audio signal is received by the second device through its microphone. The first and second devices then cooperatively verifies a security code and upon a successful verification of the security code, the first and the second devices are enabled to communicate with each other. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122811 | MITIGATING TRANSMISSION INTERFERENCE BETWEEN DIGITAL RADIO AND BROADBAND COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A broadband device ( | 05-16-2013 |
20130122812 | SHORT RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING PHONE SOUND QUALITY - Disclosed are a short range wireless communication apparatus and a method for improving phone sound quality. The short range wireless communication apparatus a microphone to receive a phone voice to output an audio signal, an equalizer to compensate the audio signal output from the microphone for signal distortion according to a frequency response characteristic of a terminal, and a wireless communication unit to transmit the compensated audio signal to the terminal. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122813 | NETWORK NODE FOR A WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A network node for a wireless communication network, in particular for a wireless sensor network, includes a wireless communication device operable in a first communication mode in which the communication device emits; with a first transmit power, first communication signals for contactless communication with other network nodes in the communication network. The communication device is further operable in a second communication mode, in which the communication device emits, with a second transmit power, second communication signals for communication with a transponder, whereby the second transmit power is greater than the first transmit power. In the first communication mode, by the communication device there is detectable the presence of a transponder in the environment of the network node by the first communication signals. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122814 | GESTURING TO SELECT AND CONFIGURE DEVICE COMMUNICATION - Described is a technology by which a gesture made with a source device (e.g., a cellular telephone), such as a throwing or pointing motion, is used to automatically set up a connection with another device to which the gesture is directed. Audio signals output during the gesture, e.g., such as at the start and end of the gesture, are detected by candidate (listening) devices. The device having the least time difference between detection of the start and end signals is the device that is generally best aligned with the throwing or pointing motion, and thus may be selected as the target device. Once selected, a connection such as a network connection may be set up between the source device and the target device for further communication, such as for application data exchange. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122815 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A method for controlling a communication apparatus includes communicating with an external device through close proximity wireless communication, receiving a remote control signal transmitted from a remote controller, storing a remote control setting which enables or disables an operation of the remote controller, making a determination as to whether a connection between the communication apparatus and the external device through the close proximity wireless communication is established, and controlling an operation of the remote controller for the communication apparatus on the basis of the determination. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122816 | WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE HAVING AN ENSURED SHORT RANGE FUNCTIONALITY - A wireless mobile communication device having short range functionality that is designed to always be capable of short range functionality, including secure short range functionality by having a first and second energy source where charging of the second energy source may be achieved by the voltage induced by the received short range signal. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122817 | SYSTEM COMPRISING A CONTAINER AND VISUAL MEANS ABLE TO EXPRESS A PLURALITY OF VISUAL STRUCTURES - A system in the technical field of rigid or semi-rigid packaging for cosmetic or pharmaceutical products, is intended to generate visual expressions on a plurality of packagings on the basis of information provided by an outside creator ( | 05-16-2013 |
20130130622 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PAIRING A SENSOR DEVICE TO A USER - A method, system, and a computer-readable medium for pairing a wireless sensor device to a user are disclosed. The method, system, and computer-readable medium comprise providing an identification code that includes a network address within the wireless sensor device. The method, system, and computer-readable medium include utilizing an application within a mobile device. The application selects the user, obtains the identification code, scans for network addresses, and compares the network address to the scanned network addresses. When the network address matches one of the scanned network addresses, the wireless sensor device is paired to the user by the application. | 05-23-2013 |
20130130623 | PORTABLE COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING BETWEEN A LOCAL TERMINAL AND A PLURALITY OF PORTABLE EQUIPMENT - Portable equipment, a system and a method of communication between a local terminal and a plurality of portable equipment via contactless communication means is provided. Each item of equipment has a first storage medium for storing a plurality of applications, a first processing system for carrying out an application transaction with the local terminal, a second processing system distinct from the first processing system for carrying out at least one application function with the terminal, and a second storage medium, the second processing system being suitable for writing to the second storage medium data representative of the result of at least one application function and the first processing system being suitable for reading the data from the second storage medium so as to carry out at least one application transaction with the local terminal. | 05-23-2013 |
20130130624 | TECHNIQUES FOR MMWAVE WPAN COMMUNICATIONS WITH HIGH-DIRECTIONAL STEERABLE ANTENNAS COMBINING OMNI-DIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSIONS WITH BEAMFORMING TRAINING - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method for communicating in a millimeter wave (MMWAVE) wireless personal area network (WPAN) system using a reliable low-rate omni-directional communications mode implemented as TX-RX space scanning using directional antennas; and using a high-rate directional communications mode with beamformed directional antennas. | 05-23-2013 |
20130130625 | HANDHELD ELECTRONIC DEVICE INCLUDING SIMPLIFIED ENABLING AND DISABLING OF SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS ELEMENT, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD - An improved handheld electronic device and an associated method provide a simplified mechanism for enabling and disabling a short-range wireless communications element used to create a connection to a short-range wireless network, such as a Bluetooth™ network. The method, implemented by the handheld electronic device, includes enabling the short-range wireless communications element, pairing the handheld electronic device with a second electronic device using the short-range wireless communications element, and providing a first icon on the handheld electronic device after pairing the handheld electronic device with the second electronic device. Thereafter, the method includes disabling the short-range wireless communications element and providing a second icon on the handheld electronic device whenever the first icon is activated, and enabling the short-range wireless communications element and providing the first icon on the handheld electronic device whenever the second icon is activated. | 05-23-2013 |
20130130626 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system for communicating information facilitates wireless communication between electronic devices. The system includes a transceiver provided in a vehicle. The transceiver communicates with an electronic device located external to the transceiver using a Bluetooth communications standard. | 05-23-2013 |
20130137374 | VIRTUAL LINKING USING A WIRELESS DEVICE - A system and method for virtual linking a wireless device to another device is disclosed herein. The system includes an access point and a controller configured to mediate transmissions between the wireless device and the another device. The system further includes a virtual device table and a permissions filter to ensure virtual linking between devices that have matching access right and requested services. The wireless device and the another device may have the same or dissimilar protocols. | 05-30-2013 |
20130137375 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND MOBILE DEVICE FOR PRIORITIZING A DISCOVERED DEVICE LIST - The described embodiments relate generally to methods, systems and computing devices, including at least a mobile device, for ordering a discovered device list according to a Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) of each device in the discovered device list. Thus, the discovered device list has at the top of the list the device that has the highest RSSI, with the remaining devices in the discovered device list presented in descending order of RSSI. | 05-30-2013 |
20130143494 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS OPTIMIZATION BASED ON PLATFORM CONFIGURATION AND USE CASES - Methods and apparatus for optimizing wireless network performance by incorporating platform configuration and use case information. In one exemplary scheme, a client device provides the wireless network with an indications of impacted operations based on the client device's platform configuration. The wireless network can adjust the radio link to the client device so as to best accommodate the impacted operation. In one embodiment, a client device that includes a 3×3 Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) (or 4×4, 2×2, etc.) and Bluetooth (BT) module identifies a subset of modulation and coding schemes (MCS) that are preferred for operation. The client device provides the identified subset to the WLAN access point (AP). Responsively, the WLAN AP selects a MCS, such that the client device's overall performance remains at an acceptable level. In another embodiment, the server/client can adjust MCS and/or active antenna chains based on the noise floor (NF) level. | 06-06-2013 |
20130143495 | MOBILE HOT SPOT/ROUTER/APPLICATION SHARE SITE OR NETWORK - Methods and systems for a complete vehicle ecosystem are provided. Specifically, systems that when taken alone, or together, provide an individual or group of individuals with an intuitive and comfortable vehicular environment. The present disclosure includes a system to generate a vehicle communication system. The vehicle communication system can determine which devices are within the vehicle. From this determination, the vehicle communication system may create a universal bus and hotspot where applications, data, multimedia information, and resources can be shared both with the vehicle and with the other devices in the vehicle. | 06-06-2013 |
20130143496 | DUMMY TOUCH SCREEN SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING A PLURALITY OF MOBILE TERMINALS - Disclosed is a dummy touch screen system. The dummy touch screen system includes a host mobile terminal and a dummy touch screen. Here, the host mobile terminal includes a first touch screen unit having a first touch panel and a first display, a first application module driven by receiving a first touch signal generated by a touch of the first touch panel, a first display module receiving a first image signal output by a drive of the first application module, a first image communication module receiving a second image signal output by the drive of the first application module, and a first human interface device (HID) module transmitting a touch signal transmitted from the outside to the first application module. The dummy touch screen includes a second image communication module receiving the second image signal, a second display module receiving the second image signal from the second image communication module, a second touch screen unit having a second display displaying a second image display signal output by a drive of the second display module, and a second HID module receiving a second touch signal generated by a touch of the second touch panel. | 06-06-2013 |
20130143497 | DEVICE FOR ROUND TRIP TIME MEASUREMENTS - An appliance facilitates localization of a station (STA) in a network, for example, a short-range wireless network. An automatic response to a request for a measurement related communication is provided. The appliance can include a radio frequency (RF) interface and a media access control (MAC) section. The MAC section can receive the request and generate the automatic response immediately after a uniform period that is uniform among any such appliance within the network. The appliance performs only the generation of the automatic response, though the response can include additional information such as (x, y) coordinates of the appliance. | 06-06-2013 |
20130143498 | INDIRECT DEVICE COMMUNICATION - There is disclosed means for in a communications device enabling an indirect communications channel between the communications device and at least one further communications device. A data service selected from a set of data services is associated with an identity code. The identity code identifies the communications device. Data related to the identity code is transmitted to a server. The data is preferably transmitted through a radio-frequency based communications interface. The identity code is broadcasting during a predetermined period of time and intended to be received by the at least one further communications device. The broadcast is preferably transmitted through a short-range non-radio frequency based communications interface. | 06-06-2013 |
20130143499 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A master device transmits a beacon signal including information related to a proximity wireless communication area in a predetermined cycle by using a transmission power which allows the beacon signal to reach beyond the proximity wireless communication area. When a slave device receives the beacon signal from the master device, the slave device estimates a distance to the master device in accordance with the information of the beacon signal. When a wireless communication terminal is located within the proximity wireless communication area, the slave device is connected to the master device by using a proximity wireless communication. | 06-06-2013 |
20130149964 | Extending the Functionality of a Mobile Device - Devices, systems, and methods are disclosed for extending the functionality of a mobile device by including a cover for the mobile device with a substantial portion of the exterior overlaid with a touch-sensitive surface. Logic stored on the cover senses a user's touch on the touch-sensitive surface, and transmits the touch input to the coupled mobile device. Logic stored on the coupled mobile device may receive and interpret the touch input as a function or command of an operating system, or a function or command of a program within the operating system of the mobile device. | 06-13-2013 |
20130149965 | BIOLOGICAL ENTITY COMMUNICATION CHANNEL - Biological entity communication channel techniques are described. In one or more implementations, an apparatus includes a signal conductor having a side that is configured to be disposed proximal to a surface of a biological entity to use at least a part of the biological entity as a transmission channel to transmit a signal received by the signal conductor from an electrical device. The apparatus also includes a ground layer configured to be disposed on an opposing side of the signal conductor from the side of the signal conductor that is configured to be disposed against the surface of the biological entity. | 06-13-2013 |
20130149966 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - Provided are a communication method, apparatus, and system. The communication method comprises registering addresses of opponent devices to communicate with in advance between a ZigBee coordinator and an end device, thus preventing an unauthorized device from joining a network or avoiding unnecessary joining due to a user's mistake. | 06-13-2013 |
20130149967 | RELIABLE COMMUNICATIONS FOR WIRELESS DEVICES - A method and apparatus for connectivity management of a wireless device is provided, such as a wireless medical device. The method comprises providing a wireless connection between at least two medical devices, the at least two medical devices comprising a primary medical device and a secondary medical device, causing the primary medical device to transmit and the secondary medical device to receive state signals wirelessly across a plurality of communication data channels, and reporting a non-active state for one of the plurality of data channels from the primary medical device to the secondary medical device using the plurality of communication data channels. | 06-13-2013 |
20130149968 | Digital Radio Network System - The present invention is directed to a system for operating a network of digital radios comprising a digital radio configured with a Bluetooth type protocol. The digital radio further comprises a radio directory, with the radio directory operable to retrievably store radio reception information for a plurality of radios. The radio reception information comprises a unique identifier and Bluetooth address. The digital radio further comprises a radio directory handler, the directory handler configured to selectively retrieve radio reception information from the radio directory for a recipient radio and store the retrieved radio reception information in active memory for communication according to the Bluetooth protocol. The radio directory is preferably populated with radio reception information of a plurality of radios, with the radio reception information for each radio being based on the pairing process between a controller radio and a member radio. The radio directory is then distributed to each member radio, enabling direct communication among all radios in the radio directly. Optionally, the system includes a gateway where the network data can be bridged to external communication systems. | 06-13-2013 |
20130149969 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR COLLECTING EARPIECE DATA FROM A MOBILE TERMINAL - A system for collecting earpiece data from a mobile terminal comprising an earpiece includes an earpiece data module in the mobile terminal configured to obtain earpiece data based on usage of the earpiece. A mobile terminal memory is in the mobile terminal and is configured to store the earpiece data. A communications module is in the mobile terminal and is configured to connect the mobile terminal to a remote earpiece data collection module that is remote to the mobile terminal. The earpiece data module is further configured to determine if the earpiece data in the mobile terminal memory satisfies a threshold and to transmit the earpiece data to the remote earpiece data collection module by the communications module if the earpiece data satisfies the threshold. | 06-13-2013 |
20130157568 | MEDIA EXPOSURE LINKING UTILIZING BLUETOOTH SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS - A computer-implemented method for establishing media data exposure for a computer processing device, where media data received in the computer processing device. The computer processing device pairs itself with a plurality of portable computing devices using a Bluetooth connection when media data is received. A signal strength characteristic of the Bluetooth connection is established in the computer processing device for each of the paired plurality of portable computing devices. Each signal strength characteristic with the received media data is then established to determine which signal strength characteristic is the strongest when the media data was received in the computer processing device. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157569 | Systems and Methods of Distributed Tag Tracking - RF tags may be used to acquire data. If the tag is attached to a particular article, information regarding that article may be acquired. In an example embodiment, items are fitted with RF tags. A mobile phone or other wireless device can track when the tags are in RF range. When a user wants to know data regarding the article, he may consult the information on the phone. The phones running the system may report any compatible tags that are found, even ones that have no ownership connection to a central server where the data is compiled. “Foreign” tag information is submitted to the server and can be turned over to the owner of the tags. In this implementation, the reach of the system may be increased compared to the previous, local implementation. In an example embodiment, information may be anonymized in the server to deal with privacy concerns. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157570 | MONITORING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A MOBILE DEVICE - In a method for monitoring a second mobile device using a first mobile device and wireless communication, a prompting file, a time interval, and a name of a second communication module of the second mobile device are set in the first mobile device. A first communication module of the first mobile device searches for discoverable devices within a predetermined coverage area of the first mobile device. Each found discoverable device is entered in a device list of the first mobile device. If the second communication module is found, a timer starts timing the time interval. After the time interval has elapsed, the first communication module searches for the discoverable devices again, for updating the device list. If the second communication module is not in the updated device list, the prompting file is outputted to alert a user of the first mobile device. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157571 | System for wireless remote monitoring of alarm events of a medical device and corresponding patient - A wireless remote alarm system is described to allow a mobile caregiver or clinician to track the alarm status of a life-critical medical device and patient while the caregiver or clinician is located away from the patient. The system includes automatic recognition of the medical device's alarm output circuit for universal compatibility, in order to render the system practical, convenient and reliable to deploy, and protocols for signal reliability, security and power management. The system also includes alarm differentiation protocols to assist the caregiver with alarm prioritization, and remote patient management applications via wider-area network connectivity. The system is especially useful in alternate care and homecare settings, and for monitoring patients using a ventilator. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157572 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING AN IMAGE BETWEEN TWO MOBILE TELEPHONE DEVICES - The present invention relates to a method of transferring an image of a mobile telephony device named transmitter (T) to another mobile telephony device named receiver (R), the method comprising of step ( | 06-20-2013 |
20130157573 | MOBILE BLUETOOTH DEVICE - A wireless communication system comprises a mobile Bluetooth device, first and second Bluetooth terminals, the mobile Bluetooth device comprising a memory and a controller performing a first pairing process with the first Bluetooth terminal as a result of which identical first link keys are stored in the mobile Bluetooth device and in the first Bluetooth terminal, the controller further performing a second pairing process with the second Bluetooth terminal such that identical second link keys are stored in the mobile Bluetooth device and in the second Bluetooth terminal. The controller stores in the memory a first location, a first vicinity and/or a first transmit power indication of the first Bluetooth terminal when performing the first pairing process and to store in the memory a second location, a second vicinity and/or a second transmit power indication of the second Bluetooth terminal when performing the second pairing process. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157574 | Driver Electronic Device Automatic Deactivation System and Method - A system and method of automatically prevents an electronic device operated by a driver from receiving or transmitting text and email messages while driving a motor vehicle. The system includes a first Bluetooth transceiver located inside a motor vehicle that is configured to create a link, such as a piconet, with a compatible second Bluetooth receiver located in the electronic device that has text and email messaging capabilities. The electronic device includes a software program loaded into its memory designed to automatically disable the device's text and mail messaging capabilities when the link is created. Upon entering and starting the motor vehicle, the link is established, which automatically blocks or deactivates the device's transmission and receiving message capabilities. In one embodiment, the software program provides a menu page that allows the driver to selectively turn ON or OFF different features when the two transceivers are linked. Access to the menu page may be controlled by passwords. | 06-20-2013 |
20130165044 | Bluetooth Low Energy Module Systems and Methods - Disclosed are various embodiments of Bluetooth low energy (BLE) modules and methods implemented therein. An embodiment of the disclosure can obtain in a BLE module an advertiser packet transmitted by a BLE advertiser. An advertiser cache can be checked to determine whether the advertiser cache in the BLE module contains an entry associated with an advertiser address from the advertiser packet. The BLE module can determine whether a payload value of the advertiser packet has changed relative to a previous advertiser packet associated with the advertiser address. The BLE module can then suppress forwarding of the packet to a host processor and/or on-board processor executing firmware. The BLE module can also suppress sending a scan request packet back to the BLE advertiser. | 06-27-2013 |
20130165045 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SHARING RESOURCES VIA BLUETOOTH NETWORK - An electronic device capable of sharing resources with another electronic device via a BLUETOOTH network includes a motion sensor, a BLUETOOTH unit, and a control unit. The motion sensor detects a motion of the electronic device. The control unit determines a trajectory of the motion of the electronic device according to data from the motion sensor, and determines whether the trajectory as determined matches a predefined trajectory. If the trajectory as determined matches a predefined trajectory, the control unit creates a sharing process in relation to at least one application currently running on the electronic device and any object being opened by the application, and sends the created sharing content to another electronic device via the BLUETOOTH unit. | 06-27-2013 |
20130165046 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS THAT FACILITATE THE TRANSFER OF POWER AND INFORMATION AMONG RADIO FREQUENCY-BASED DEVICES - The present invention is directed to apparatuses, systems, methods, and computer readable media that can facilitate the transfer of power between at least two electrical devices. At least one of the electrical devices is preferably a battery operated device. The present invention may also be used to facilitate the transfer of information among electrical devices. For example, the present invention may be used to automatically pair two Bluetooth devices together. | 06-27-2013 |
20130165047 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A search part sends out a connection request signal and receives a connection response signal. A radio strength acquiring part acquires radio strength of an available device that has sent the connection response signal. A connection determining part determines whether or not the radio strength has increased, then becomes greater than or equal to a threshold value and has been constant for a period of time longer than or equal to a predetermined period of time. If it is determined that the radio strength has increased, then becomes greater than or equal to the threshold value and has been constant for a period of time longer than or equal to the predetermined period of time, an inter-device authentication part performs inter-device authentication with the available device. | 06-27-2013 |
20130171934 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMISSION IN A TRUNKED RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmission in a trunked radio communication system comprises a first mobile radio subscriber unit receiving identity data from one or more other mobile radio subscriber units. The first mobile radio subscriber unit detects the distance from the first mobile radio subscriber unit to each of the one or more other mobile radio subscriber units. This information is transmitted to the infrastructure of the system, which selects a communication channel for the first mobile radio subscriber unit, so as to reduce close proximity interference between the mobile radio subscriber units. The mobile radio subscriber units may check for blocking conditions prior to initiating communication, and when necessary may delay transmission. The check may be based on information received via Bluetooth from other mobile radio subscriber units, and Bluetooth signal strength information. | 07-04-2013 |
20130171935 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A method for establishing a connection between wireless communication devices suitable for sharing data between a sender and a receiver is provided. Both the sender and the receiver respectively have a built-in acceleration sensor to enable the sender and the receiver obtaining an internal tap-data and external tap-data. A first-connection is established between the sender and at least one receiver all around. The sender bumps the receiver both for sharing data. The sender receives the external tap-data from at least one receiver via the first-connection, the internal tap-data is compared with the external tap-data to filter out not-bumped receivers and then the bumped receiver is confirmed. Then, a second-connection is established between the bumped sender and receiver according to a security protocol so as to mutually share data through the second connection between the sender and the receiver. | 07-04-2013 |
20130171936 | Scheme for Relatively Low Power FM Transmissions - Short range FM signal transmission apparatus comprising a generator configured to generate a set of FM transmissions occupying separate bands of frequencies and an RF transmitter configured to transmit the transmissions simultaneously. | 07-04-2013 |
20130171937 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING MOBILE SERVICES OUTSIDE OF CELLULAR COVERAGE - The application provides a method, apparatus and computer program product to enable the provision of mobile services outside the typical coverage area of a cell. Moreover, some embodiments of the application may enable the provision of burst radio link communications over long distances between transmission and reception devices (e.g., access points) having devices within their respective coverage areas in order to enable the devices to provide data or content from one device to another. Furthermore, in some embodiments, the access points may be enabled to communicate with the devices within their respective coverage areas via short range communication techniques and aspects of cognitive radio may be employed. | 07-04-2013 |
20130171938 | HANDHELD DIABETES MANAGER WITH AUTOMATED DISCONNECT FEATURE - A computer-implemented method is provided for a handheld diabetes-management device to establish a data connection with a Continua manager. The method includes: receiving a request to establish a new data connection with a computing device, where the computing device is physically separated from the diabetes-management device and operates as a manager in accordance with IEEE standard 11073; determining whether the diabetes-management device has an existing data connection with a medical device that is physically separated from the diabetes-management device; terminating the existing data connection with the medical device in response to the determination that the diabetes-management device has an existing connection with the medical device; and establishing a new data connection with the computing device in accordance with IEEE standard 11073. | 07-04-2013 |
20130171939 | LOW COST PROXIMITY PAIRING MECHANISM IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORKS - A wireless networking method includes placing a master device and at least one peripheral device within proximity of each other. A radio frequency request for proximity pairing is transmitted from the peripheral device to the master device. Radio frequency proximity pairing signals implementing the proximity pairing are transmitted from the master device to the peripheral device. The proximity pairing signals are transmitted with a first level of transmission power. After the proximity pairing is complete, operational signals are transmitted from the master device to the peripheral device. The operational signals are transmitted with a second level of transmission power greater than the first level of transmission power. | 07-04-2013 |
20130171940 | Easily Operated Wireless Data Transmission/Reception System and Easily Operated Wireless Data Transmission/Reception Program - There is provided a simple data wireless transmission/reception system and program which enables a user to transmit an image folder easily and instinctively without performing a complicated communication process setting. | 07-04-2013 |
20130178160 | SYSTEMS FOR FACILITATING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION AND RELATED METHODS - Systems for facilitating wireless communication and related methods are provided. In this regard, a representative system includes: an electronic device operative to communicate using Bluetooth and Wi-Fi, the device having a Wi-Fi monitoring system operative to: monitor Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) advertising channels; receive information corresponding to a Wi-Fi-capable device via BLE Advertisement packets communicated on at least one of the BLE advertising channels; and establish communication with the Wi-Fi-capable device using the information provided by the BLE Advertisement packets. | 07-11-2013 |
20130178161 | MULTIFUNCTIONAL CARRYING CASE FOR A TABLET COMPUTER - A carrying case includes a frame member to retain a tablet computer and a base member having a keyboard housing to receive a keyboard. The frame member is rotatably and slidably coupled to the base member to enable the frame member to be rotated through a variable angle with respect to the base member and also translated with respect to the base member such that an edge of the frame member is offset from a corresponding edge of the base member by a variable distance. | 07-11-2013 |
20130178162 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LOCATING A HEARING AID - A smart phone including a computer readable storage medium to store a hearing aid locator application and a processor coupled to the computer readable storage medium to execute the hearing aid locator application to track a last known location of a hearing aid. | 07-11-2013 |
20130178163 | Systems for Facilitating Wireless Communication and Related Methods - Systems for facilitating wireless communication and related methods are provided. In this regard, a representative system includes: an electronic device operative to communicate using Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) and at least a second radio format different from BLE, the device having a radio monitoring system operative to: monitor BLE advertising channels; receive information corresponding to a multi-radio-capable device via BLE Advertisement packets communicated on at least one of the BLE advertising channels; and establish communication with the multi-radio-capable device using the information provided by the BLE Advertisement packets. | 07-11-2013 |
20130178164 | SYSTEM INCLUDING BLUETOOTH MODULE AND WIRELESS LAN MODULE AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - An embodiment of the disclosure provides a control method between a Bluetooth module and a wireless LAN module, for an electronic device with a Bluetooth module and a WiMAX module. The method comprises: determining whether the priority of the Bluetooth module is higher than that of the WiMAX module; determining whether data transmitted or received by the WiMAX module has to be protected; and when the priority of the Bluetooth module is not higher than that the WiMAX module and the data transmitted or received by the WiMAX module has to be protected, setting the Bluetooth module to be in an inactive mode. | 07-11-2013 |
20130178165 | VERY SHORT-RANGE INTERCONNECTION DEVICE BETWEEN COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT AND A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A device (D) is dedicated to the interconnection between communication equipment (EC), equipped with a very short-range radio communication module (MCR) and a communication network (RC). This device (D) comprises i) relay means (MR) operative to relay received data to and from coupling means (MCP) coupled to said communication network (RC) and ii) an antenna (AN) capable, firstly, of radiating, or respectively capturing, very short-range electromagnetic waves, which are representative of data, to the, or respectively from the, radio communication module (MCR) whenever the communication equipment is placed within its immediate vicinity, and secondly, coupled to the relay means (MR) in order to transmit to them the data to be relayed coming from the radio communication module (MCR), and to receive from them (MR) the relayed data that comes from the coupling means (MCP). | 07-11-2013 |
20130178166 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING OUTSIDE NETWORK SERVICE BASED ON ADVERTISMENT VIEWING - Disclosed is a telephony service in a public place, and a method and an apparatus for an advertisement viewing based free telephony service. The method includes a process in which a telephony client requests a free call service in order to enable a specific telephony client to use the telephony service free of charge in a public place such as a subway, a process of providing an advertisement to a telephony client having requested the service, and a process of setting a telephony server in order to enable a telephony client having received an advertisement to use the service. | 07-11-2013 |
20130183900 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK (PAN) DEVICE - A method of controlling a wireless personal area network (PAN) device, such that the PAN device performs at least one from among a coordinator role, a router role, and an end device role in a plurality of networks by using a single physical layer includes setting a first role corresponding to a first network and a second role corresponding to a second network; acquiring activation interval information of the first network and the second network based on the first role and the second role that are set in correspondence to the first network and the second network, respectively; performing the first role during the activation interval of the first network based on the acquired activation interval information; and switching the first role to the second role and performing the second role during the activation interval of the second network. | 07-18-2013 |
20130183901 | Call Management Through A Hands Free Communication Device - A hands free communication device ( | 07-18-2013 |
20130183902 | CONTACTLESS CONNECTOR - A contactless connector includes a waveguide structure having a waveguide body extending between a first end and a second end and a septum received in the waveguide body and extend at least partially along an interior of the waveguide body. The septum divides at least a portion of the waveguide body into a first chamber and a second chamber. The waveguide structure conveys RF signals between the first and second ends. The contactless connector includes a communication module having a circuit board positioned at the first end of the waveguide body with transmit and receive communication chips coupled to the circuit board. The waveguide guides the RF signals from and to the transmit and receive communication chips, and the septum isolates the RF signals associated with the communication chips. | 07-18-2013 |
20130183903 | SCALABLE HIGH-BANDWIDTH CONNECTIVITY - A scalable, high-bandwidth connectivity architecture for portable storage devices and memory modules may utilize EHF communication link chip packages mounted in various two-dimensional and three-dimensional configurations on planar surfaces such as printed circuit boards. Multiple electromagnetic communication links between devices distributed on major faces of card-like devices may be provided with respectively aligned pairs of communication units on each device. Adjacent communication units on a printed circuit board may transmit or receive electromagnetic radiation having different polarization, such as linear or elliptical polarization. Power and communication between communication devices may both be provided wirelessly. | 07-18-2013 |
20130196600 | SYSTEM AND METHODS THAT ENABLE AUTOMATED TESTING OF MOBILE DEVICES AT A REMOTE MONITOR SITE - A computer-implemented system is provided that enables automated testing of a plurality of mobile devices residing at a monitor site. The system is comprised generally of a test controller in data communication with the plurality of mobile devices. The test controller transmits a test request over a wireless network to each of the plurality of mobile devices, where the test controller communicates via a persistent data channel using a short range communication protocol such as a Bluetooth. Each of the mobile devices is configured with a test agent that is configured to receive the test request from the test controller and execute a test in response to the test request. | 08-01-2013 |
20130196601 | PROXIMITY-RELATED DEVICE DETERMINATIONS - In general, one aspect of the subject matter described herein can be embodied in methods that include the actions of: for each of a plurality of devices, perceiving, in relation to the device, one or more proximate devices, generating a record of the perception of the one or more proximate devices, receiving, from at least one of the one or more proximate devices, one or more records of respective prior perceptions of one or more devices in relation to the at least one of the one or more proximate devices, and providing, to another device that is not among the one or more proximate devices, (a) the record of the perception of the one or more proximate devices and (b) the one or more records of respective prior perceptions. | 08-01-2013 |
20130196602 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS USING COINCIDING MULTIPLE PAIRING CRITERIA - A system including a first mobile device and a second mobile device is disclosed. The first mobile device has a first interactive pairing criterion associated therewith, and the second mobile device has a second interactive pairing criterion associated therewith. The first mobile device includes a processor configured to perform and/or initiate the following. Upon the second mobile device being geographically positioned within a predetermined geographic distance from the first mobile device, an automatic query is issued to determine whether the first interactive pairing criterion and the second interactive pairing criterion at least partially coincide with one another. Upon a determination that the first interactive pairing criterion and the second interactive pairing criterion at least partially coincide with one another, a digital media file associated with the second mobile device is downloaded. | 08-01-2013 |
20130203353 | SHORT-RANGE RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OPERATING THE SAME - A Short-range Radio Communication (SRC) system and method are provided. The system includes a first terminal and a second terminal capable of connecting to each other by one or more SRCs. When having share information and being connected to the second terminal by the one or more SRCs, the first terminal transmits the share information to the second terminal. When being SRC-connected to the first terminal the one or more SRCs, the second terminal receives the share information from the first terminal | 08-08-2013 |
20130203354 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF CONNECTIVITY RECOVERY IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless communication device and a method of re-establishing a connection with a WPAN master device is presented. The method includes detecting that a first master station of a WPAN session which includes the first master device and one or more stations becomes unavailable, activating a master station application to become a second master station and sending one beacon to notify the stations of the session about the second master station connectivity parameters. | 08-08-2013 |
20130203355 | SHORT-DISTANCE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Provided is a contactless communication R/W device that has low power consumption and a wide communication area in contactless communication that performs delivery of electronic data with a contactless communication device. The contactless communication R/W device includes an antenna coil, a resonance frequency setting section which sets a resonance frequency, and a coupling degree detecting section which detects a coupling degree corresponding to the resonance frequency of a counterpart antenna coil. The contactless communication R/W device transmits, in a first period before the start of communication, a carrier wave at a first level, and detects the coupling degree while changing the resonance frequency, and then, in a second period, the antenna coil transmits a carrier wave at a second level that is larger than the first level. | 08-08-2013 |
20130210356 | SEQUENTIAL ANTENNA SWITCHING SCHEME FOR RFID SYSTEM - A device, system, antenna system including a reader and a plurality of antennae, antenna product, method for the addressing antennae, and method for switching the antenna in a radio frequency identification (RFID) system, wherein the method includes switching the reader in a sequential manner to each of the antennae successively according to a radio frequency communication signal from said reader, where the radio frequency communication signal is provided for the reader to communicate with a tag such that it is simple to form a network and easy to implement the network at low cost. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210357 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICE PAIRING - A method for radio frequency device pairing includes: after a pairing instruction is received, sending a discovery request message to a second radio frequency device; receiving a discovery response message returned by the second radio frequency device; sending a first pairing request message to the second radio frequency device; receiving a first pairing response message returned by the second radio frequency device; after a button instruction entered by the user according to interface information displayed by the second radio frequency device is received, sending, to the second radio frequency device, a second pairing request message which contains button information corresponding to the button instruction; receiving a second pairing response message which is returned by the second radio frequency device and contains a confirmation result indicating that the button information and the interface information are successfully matched; exchanging keys with the target second radio frequency device, thereby completing pairing. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210358 | Application Control Method and Mobile Electronic Device thereof - By checking a type of a foreground application of a mobile electronic device in response to an instruction triggered on a Bluetooth device and transmitted to the mobile electronic device in a wireless manner, a function of the foreground application will be executed corresponding to the instruction, where the type of the foreground application may be optionally switched before executing the function. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210359 | METHOD OF UPDATING INTO SERVICE CATEGORY TABLE IN DEVICE AND DEVICE FOR THE SAME - A method for acquiring a service category table required for finding a service includes acquiring information on a latest service category table by identifying version information of a service category table from a broadcasting signal received from adjacent devices during, a process of searching for a device supporting a service desired among devices, and acquiring a service category table of a latest version by establishing a session connection with a device supporting the service category table of the latest version based on the information. By acquiring, the information on the latest service category table, a session connection with only the device providing the desired service is established so that an optimized session connection establishing process can be performed and a total network capacity can be efficiently managed. Also, the latest service category table can be acquired from the session-connected device, and thus a new service can be easily identified. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210360 | METHODS OF COMMUNICATING IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION AND A RESPONSIVE COMMAND VIA SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATIONS, AND RELATED DEVICES - Methods of operating a short-range Radio Frequency (RF) device are provided. The methods may include transmitting identification information that identifies the short-range RF device and/or sensor information generated by a sensor associated with the short-range RF device, using a short-range RF communication protocol. The methods may include receiving a command, responsive to the identification information and/or the sensor information, from a server via a first device using the short-range RF communication protocol to control a second device associated with the short-range RF device. Related devices are also provided. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210361 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION GAME SYSTEM - A wireless communication game system includes a plurality of mobile game apparatuses, which function as a parent device or a child device and are capable of making a communication with each other, and broadcasts from the parent device a parent device packet including a parent device PID, a user name UserName, a game name GameName, an OC flag, an E slot, a U slot, and a payload. All the parent device packets are received from the parent device existing within a communicationable range of a user's own apparatus, and the user's own apparatus creates a parent device list, and displays the parent device list on an LCD. Therefore, a user or a player of his own apparatus looks at the game name of the parent device list, for example, and operates a cross key included in an operation key so as to select one desired parent device. Then, transmitting a child device number CID of the user's own apparatus at the E slot designated by the parent device packet, the user's own apparatus transmits a connection request to the parent device. | 08-15-2013 |
20130217330 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING DATA BETWEEN ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A system and method are provided for transferring data from a first mobile device to another device by determining a set comprising one or more items, initiating a first transfer of at least some data associated with at least one of the one or more items to the other device, detecting an interaction with the set, and enabling a second transfer of additional data associated with the set. | 08-22-2013 |
20130217331 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR VEHICLE POLICY ENFORCEMENT - This disclosure relates to systems and methods for vehicle policy management and enforcement. In certain embodiments, a method for enforcing a policy may include receiving policy information at a device including one or more conditions relating to a policy-managed location in a vehicle. A determination may be made whether the device is within the policy-managed location based on signals received by a short-range communication system included in the device and/or the vehicle. The received policy information may be evaluated to determine and implement one or more device actions associated with the one or more conditions. | 08-22-2013 |
20130217332 | Platform for Wireless Identity Transmitter and System Using Short Range Wireless Broadcast - Methods, systems and devices for locating a wireless identity transmitter with a central server connected with one or more proximity broadcast receivers, such as stationary receivers or mobile devices operating as wireless receivers. The wireless identity transmitter may be a compact device configured to broadcast messages, such as through Bluetooth® advertisements, including an identification code. When within proximity, a proximity broadcast receiver may receive broadcast messages from the wireless identity transmitter and relay location information along with the wireless identity transmitter's identification code to a central server as sighting messages. The proximity broadcast receiver's own location may provide an approximate location for the wireless identity transmitter. The central server may process sighting messages, which may include signal strength information, to accurately locate the wireless identity transmitter. The central server may transmit data to third-party devices and/or mobile devices of users in response to receiving sightings messages. | 08-22-2013 |
20130217333 | DETERMINING REWARDS BASED ON PROXIMITY OF DEVICES USING SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS BROADCASTS - Methods, systems and devices for presenting rewards to users based on proximity of short-range wireless devices. A wireless identity transmitter may periodically transmit wireless broadcast messages that include obscured identifiers. When within proximity, a proximity broadcast receiver, such as a mobile device carried by a user, may receive and relay the broadcast messages to a server which may process the included information. Based on decrypting the obscured identifiers, the central server may determine whether relayed messages relate to devices associated with a reward program, and may calculate rewards, such as coupons, money, or prizes. Rewards may be presented to users based on sensor data indicated within broadcast messages. In an embodiment, when the server receives a sighting message related to an active search for a target device, a reward is presented to the user of the proximity broadcast receiver that transmitted the sighting message. | 08-22-2013 |
20130217334 | FAST ACCESS SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - Systems, devices, and methods allow quick establishment of short-range, high-speed wireless communications between a host communication device and a slave communication device, where range control is realized through a low-speed connection using signals (such as magnetic signals or ultrasonic signals) different from the high-speed communications. The host communication device includes: a reference unit, a first wireless communication unit, and a first control unit. The reference unit is configured to send a first range reference signal to control a communication range of the wireless communication connection. The slave communication device configured to determine whether the distance satisfies a predetermined range according to the received first range reference signal, and if so, the host communication device and slave communication device quickly establish a wireless communication connection and exchange data according to a predetermined protocol. | 08-22-2013 |
20130217335 | Bump button - A fixed bump button may: (1) report its identification to a server connected to the internet when the button is bumped by a mobile device; and/or (2) emit a beacon signal identifying the button to a mobile device. | 08-22-2013 |
20130217336 | CONTACTLESS DATA TRANSFER SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Data may be transferred from a communication subsystem of a first device to a communication subsystem of a second device contactlessly, at high speed, and without intervention by host processors of either device. Devices may be programmed or personalized at the factory or warehouse, and may personalized at a warehouse or at a point of sale while in the box. Various modes of operation and use scenarios are described. Portions of the devices themselves, or a transmission path between the devices may be shielded against snooping by a material which degrades an EHF signal passing therethrough. | 08-22-2013 |
20130217337 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, a connection control module is configured to transmit a connection request signal during a period in which a communication module is in an unconnected state, and to establish a connection between the communication module and an external device which are in a close proximity state. A halt module is configured to halt a communication control module from executing a negotiation with the external device, when the connection between the communication module and the external device is released by the connection release request signal from the external device and thereafter the connection between the communication module and the external device is re-established by the connection control module. | 08-22-2013 |
20130217338 | METHOD OF MULTI-TARGET SWITCH TRANSMISSION THROUGH AN EXTERNALLY CONNECTED BLUETOOTH SELECTION DEVICE - A method of multi-target switch transmission through an externally connected Bluetooth selection device aims to switch at least one input module having a wired connection mode to connect with a first information device and a wireless connection mode to connect with one of at least two second information devices. The method of switch transmission includes the steps of: establishing device connection, setting multi-target devices, determining wired connection mode or wireless connection mode, and determining the second information devices to be connected under the wireless connection mode. Through the externally connected Bluetooth selection device the input module can be switched and usable on the first information device and second information devices at the same time, and also establish connection with the corresponding information device according to requirements. | 08-22-2013 |
20130225078 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERCONNECTED DEVICES - A computer implemented method performed by an electronic device having a display and an input device for receiving user input. The device is connected via a first communication channel to a plurality of other electronic devices. The method comprises determining a distance between the electronic device and at least one of the plurality of other electronic devices and establishing a second communication channel between the electronic device and the at least one other electronic device when the determined distance satisfies a threshold condition. | 08-29-2013 |
20130225079 | Providing Continued Operation of NFC Mobile Devices and Tags - Methods and apparatuses are described herein for providing continued operation of NFC-enabled mobile devices and NFC-enabled tags. The techniques described herein relate to methods and systems using a short-range frequency-enabled tag that can be applied to a short-range frequency-enabled mobile device, resulting in the reduction of interference between the internal short-range frequency circuitry of the mobile device and the short-range frequency receiver and transmitter circuitry of the tag—particularly when communicating with other short-range frequency devices. The techniques provide the advantage of enabling use of both the internal short-range frequency capabilities of the mobile device and the short-range frequency capabilities of the tag, leading to flexible and dynamic applications that leverage both sets of features, as well as access to a wider variety of current and future applications. | 08-29-2013 |
20130225080 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INFORMATION SHARING USING NEAR PROXIMITY COMMUNICATION - Source data stored on a source device may be shared with other devices. Sharing the source data may include facilitating communication associated with the source data, based on a first communication protocol, between a first device and another device. Receiving a first token associated with the source data may be facilitated. The first token may be encoded to enable communication using a near proximity communication (NPC) protocol. Communication of the first token may be provided to a second device, located within five feet of the first device, using the NPC protocol, to enable the second device to access the source data utilizing a second communication protocol. The NPC protocol is a wireless communication protocol, and supports automatic connection between at least two devices located within five feet. The first and second devices are NPC-enabled devices. | 08-29-2013 |
20130225081 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INFORMATION SHARING USING NEAR PROXIMITY COMMUNICATION - Source data stored on a source device may be shared with one or more devices. Sharing the source data may include facilitating receiving, at a first device, a first token associated with the source data, from a second device, using a near proximity communication (NPC) protocol. The NPC protocol may support generation of the first token based on detection of presence of the first device within five feet of the second device. The first token may be encoded for NPC communication and may be non-public. The first token may be based on the source data and the receipt of the first token may be based on the detection. The first token may be decoded and communicated, based on a first communication protocol, to a third device to download the source data using the decoded first token. The second device may be an NPC-enabled device. | 08-29-2013 |
20130225082 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS POWER TRANSMISSION - A power supply apparatus for wirelessly supplying power to one or more terminals includes a signal transceiver configured to receive a charging state message indicating a charging state from the one or more terminals, a display unit configured to display the charging state of each of the one or more terminals based on the charging state message, an interface unit configured to receive a charging control signal for controlling a charging operation of each of the one or more terminals, a controller configured to control the signal transceiver to transmit a power reception control signal for controlling whether the one or more terminals receive power by analyzing the charging control signal for the one or more terminals and a power supplier configured to wirelessly supply power to the one or more terminals under a control of the controller. | 08-29-2013 |
20130225083 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A communication device includes a control unit that establishes a wireless communication between a communication unit and an external device by using setting data received from the external device. The device also includes a data processing unit that stores the setting data in a storage unit before the wireless communication is released. Further, the device includes a power input unit that receives power from outside. A communication releasing unit releases the wireless communication between the communication unit and the external device. The control unit uses the setting data stored in the storage unit at a time of re-performing a wireless communication between the communication unit and the external device. The communication releasing unit does not release the wireless communication when the power is being supplied via the power input unit even when a predetermined time has passed. | 08-29-2013 |
20130225084 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A CONTINUING SCAN IN A BLUETOOTH WIRELESS SYSTEM - Methods and systems for wireless communication are disclosed and may include controlling one or more scans of a received signal detection frequency across a frequency range and storing a magnitude of the received signal at each frequency where the magnitude exceeds a threshold level. A type of one or more signals in the received signal may be determined based on a bandwidth of the signals. A Bluetooth page/inquiry scan may be initiated if the determined type is a page/inquiry signal, and scans may be continued if the determined type may not be a page/inquiry signal. The scans may be repeated on a periodic basis and may be controlled utilizing a voltage controlled oscillator. Each of the scans may include a plurality of discrete frequency steps or a continuous frequency ramp. The controlling may include a start frequency, an end frequency and a frequency step size for the scans. | 08-29-2013 |
20130225085 | Method and System for Auto Coexistence Priority Selection For A SCO Link - Methods and systems for auto coexistence priority selection for a SCO link are disclosed. Aspects of one method may include a first Bluetooth device communicating with a collocated WLAN device via a coexistence method. The first Bluetooth device, prior to executing a non-SCO task, which may comprise tasks that do not involve SCO packet transfer, may communicate low priority via the coexistence method if a Bluetooth SCO link is present between the first Bluetooth device and a second Bluetooth device, and if a current task being handled by the first Bluetooth device is a high priority task. If a SCO link is not present between the first and second Bluetooth devices, and if the current non-SCO task is a high priority task, the first Bluetooth device may communicate high priority via the coexistence method prior to executing the non-SCO task. | 08-29-2013 |
20130231049 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO DYNAMICALLY ENABLE AND CONTROL COMMUNICATION LINK OPTIMIZATIONS ON A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Embodiment methods and systems include external hardware that can be fitted to a wireless communication device to optimize group communications on the wireless devices. The wireless device may be coupled to an external case configured with a physical button that enables group communication such as push-to-talk and other push-to-experience capabilities. Optimizations for push-to-talk communication may be implemented in a push-to-talk mode in response to detecting connection to the external hardware. Signaling between the external case and the wireless device allows detection of the switch to (or from) push-to-talk mode when a user depresses (or releases) the hard key. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231050 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND CHANNEL SETTING METHOD - There is provided an information processing device including a determination unit that, when in each of a plurality of spaces short-range wireless communication is simultaneously performed in each space using a plurality of wireless communication devices, determines a channel to be used in each space for each space based on a predetermined rule, and a control unit that performs control of setting the channel determined in accordance with the space in which the wireless communication device is used in the wireless communication device. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231051 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD OF INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM - In an information processing apparatus capable of executing a first wireless communication method and a second wireless communication method having a communication range wider than that of the first wireless communication method, an apparatus to be caused to execute predetermined processing is searched for using both the first wireless communication method and the second wireless communication method. When a common apparatus has been found by both the first wireless communication method and the second wireless communication method, the common apparatus is decided as the apparatus to be caused to execute the predetermined processing by the second wireless communication method. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231052 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES IN A VEHICLE - A method and system for establishing secure short range wireless communication between devices in a vehicle. The method involves obtaining a vehicle identifier associated with the vehicle and a module identifier associated with a vehicle module. Then, the method determines a secure pin number for the vehicle module and a similar pin for a vehicle telematics unit. Once the secure pin number is determined at both devices then the devices can communicate via short range wireless communication in a secure manner using the secure pin number. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231053 | Automatic Power-Off of Bluetooth Device from Linked Device - Methods and systems for powering-off a Bluetooth device from a linked device are provided. A device can transmit a Bluetooth signal to a linked device to instruct the linked device to power-off. In this manner, the user need only turn off one device manually which results in all linked devices being powered off. This process can be initiated by a user through a device directly linked with the device to be powered-off or through a device that is indirectly connected, through one or more Bluetooth networks, with the device to be powered-off. This process can also be automatically initiated by a device when a set of predetermined conditions exist. Once instructed to do so, a device can initiate a predetermined power-off process which can involve terminating any ongoing functions and turning off various subsystems. In accordance with the present invention, a user can initiate a power-off of all the devices on a Bluetooth network through a single device. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231054 | Establishing Directed Communication Based Upon Physical Interaction Between Two Devices - A method and system for establishing wireless communication with a device is provided. Aspects of an exemplary embodiment include detecting, at a first device, a physical interaction involving the first device and a second device. Further, the first device identifies a network address usable for establishing communication between the first device and the second device, the network address identified based on information associated with the detected physical interaction. Further, a role of the first device is determined, wherein the role of the first device is an initiator device. Further, based on the role of the first device as the initiator device, the network address is wirelessly provided to the second device. Further, content is wirelessly transferred between the first device and the second device using the network address. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231055 | MOBILE DEVICE CONTROL WITH EXTERNAL DEVICE - A mobile arrangement ( | 09-05-2013 |
20130231056 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention relates to a communication system and a communication method. The communication system includes a micro IC card, a radio frequency (RF) card sleeve and a multi-frequency card reader. The micro IC card is used to communicate with the RF card sleeve through a contact interface. The multi-frequency card reader is used to perform an RF communication with the RF card sleeve. The communication method includes exchanging data with a micro IC card through an RF channel; and the micro IC card sleeve exchanges data with the micro IC card by a contact communication. The communication system and method provide operators a working environment to adapt cards with different frequencies. Thus, telecommunication operators and financial service providers are able to independently issue their own cards, which lowers difficulties of promoting mobile payment services, and aids to boost the popularization and applications of the mobile payment services. | 09-05-2013 |
20130237155 | MOBILE DEVICE DIGITAL COMMUNICATION AND AUTHENTICATION METHODS - Embodiments of the present invention provide various approaches for mobile device intercommunication (e.g., digital) as well as various authentication methods. In one embodiment, the present invention provides direct line-of-sight visual digital communication between mobile devices for controlled security. In another embodiment, the present invention provides direct contact motion-based digital communication between mobile devices for controlled security. Embodiments of the present invention also provide various authentication methods. One such example relates to secure authentication code exchange with subsequent digital communications in one or more channels. In another example, human-readable information is used along machine-readable digital codes (e.g., quick response (QR) codes to verify visual codes. Still yet, embodiments of the present invention provide non-obtrusive visual codes that maintain a user's access to a mobile device screen. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237156 | Wireless Device with an Aggregate User Interface for Controlling Other Devices - An apparatus, device, methods, computer program product, and system are described that make a determination that a wireless device is in proximity to at least one secondary wireless device, and determine an aggregate user interface on the wireless device based on the determination. | 09-12-2013 |
20130244578 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Example method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed to enable remote wireless control of an electronic device while in standby mode. Example embodiments of the invention include a method comprising the steps of transmitting, by a device, short-range wireless polling signals via a short-range wireless interface according to a first poll interval; determining whether the device is active, or in a stand-by, low power, idle, or sleep mode state; and when the device is determined to be in a stand-by, low power, idle, or sleep mode state, causing the device to enter into a polling mode for transmitting short-range wireless polling signals via a short-range wireless interface according to a second poll interval that may be the same or different from the first poll interval and ignoring received short-range wireless response signals. | 09-19-2013 |
20130244579 | METHOD OF ENABLING PROXIMITY BASED CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN MOBILE DEVICES USING DIFFERENT OPERATING SYSTEMS - A method and system for enabling cross-platform connectivity and operable communication between two portable communication devices, operating through different operating systems, operably connects the two devices to a service infrastructure through a network. A unique identifier of the first device is retrieved and communicated to the service. Bluetooth or WLAN operation of the two devices is enabled. The second device detects any other device in proximity, within the network, and delivers identifying information of the detected devices to the service. If the identifying information corresponds to the identifier of the first device registered with the service, the service sends a push notification message to a push notification service corresponding to the first device. The push notification service sends an alert to the first device notifying the first device that it has been detected. Connectivity and operable communication between the two devices is enabled. | 09-19-2013 |
20130252548 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF DISCOVERING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of wireless communication discovery. For example, a first wireless communication device may include a wireless communication unit to discover a second wireless communication device according to an asymmetric discovery process, in which the wireless communication unit is to operate in only one first state selected from a searching state and a listening state, while the second wireless communication device is to operate in only one second state selected from the searching state and the listening state. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252549 | RADIO APPARATUS - According to one embodiment, a radio apparatus configured to communicate with a second radio apparatus after receiving plural first signals transmitted from the second radio apparatus in a constant cycle, the radio apparatus includes: a communication circuit configured to communicate with the second radio apparatus; a wave detection circuit configured to generate a wave detection signal by envelope-detecting the plural first signals; a bandpass filter having an IIR filter, configured to generate a detection signal form the wave detection signal, the detection signal having amplitude is increased at a frequency corresponding to the constant cycle; and a control unit configured to cause supply of power to the communication circuit if the amplitude is larger than a first threshold value. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252550 | Wireless Device Pairing Recovery - A refrigerated container system is described that includes a wireless personal area network (WPAN) including a plurality of wireless sensor nodes and a coordinator node through which the sensors provide sensor data to a controller for the refrigerated container system. The wireless sensors and the coordinator incorporate a variety of features that ensure efficient utilization of battery life by preventing unintended pairing of sensors with other WPANs and excessive sensor signal processing arising from door chatter. Finally, pairing is performed without pressing a button on the wireless door sensor. Instead, the sensor's magnetic reed switch is enlisted to detect swiping of a magnet by a user to enter a pairing mode. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252551 | Means for Pairing A Hermetically Sealed Wireless Device - A refrigerated container system is described that includes a wireless personal area network (WPAN) including a plurality of wireless sensor nodes and a coordinator node through which the sensors provide sensor data to a controller for the refrigerated container system. The wireless sensors and the coordinator incorporate a variety of features that ensure efficient utilization of battery life by preventing unintended pairing of sensors with other WPANs and excessive sensor signal processing arising from door chatter. Finally, pairing is performed without pressing a button on the wireless door sensor. Instead, the sensor's magnetic reed switch is enlisted to detect swiping of a magnet by a user to enter a pairing mode. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252552 | Door Ajar Detection and Recovery for a Wireless Door Sensor - A refrigerated container system is described that includes a wireless personal area network (WPAN) including a plurality of wireless sensor nodes and a coordinator node through which the sensors provide sensor data to a controller for the refrigerated container system. The wireless sensors and the coordinator incorporate a variety of features that ensure efficient utilization of battery life by preventing unintended pairing of sensors with other WPANs and excessive sensor signal processing arising from door chatter. Finally, pairing is performed without pressing a button on the wireless door sensor. Instead, the sensor's magnetic reed switch is enlisted to detect swiping of a magnet by a user to enter a pairing mode. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252553 | ULTRA-LOW POWER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - An ultra-low power wireless communication apparatus and an ultra-low power wireless communication method are provided. The ultra-low power wireless communication apparatus includes a sensing unit configured to sense state information of frequency channels in a frequency band. The ultra-low power wireless communication apparatus further includes a channel determining unit configured to divide the frequency band into frequency bands based on an allowable output power, assign a priority to one of the frequency bands that includes an output power that is less than or equal to the allowable output power, and determine a communication channel based on the state information of the frequency channels. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252554 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication device includes a first wireless communication device that conforms to the Bluetooth standard, and a second wireless communication device that conforms to a second wireless communication standard different from the Bluetooth standard. The first and second wireless communication device are connected to each other by means of a signal line by which wireless communication arbitration control between the two devices is carried out. When Bluetooth communication between the first wireless communication device and a third wireless communication device is granted, a mask setting component generates a mask interval, during which the second wireless communication device is not permitted to perform wireless communication. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252555 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR LINK SETUP USING ELECTRIC FIELD - Disclosed are an apparatus and method for setting up a communication link in an electronic device by using Electric Field Communication (EFC). A method for communication link setup in a first electronic device includes: setting up an EFC link with a second electronic device; determining connection setup information of the second electronic device through the EFC link; and setting up a short range communication link with the second electronic device based on the connection setup information. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252556 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM USING EVENT FILTERS FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK DATA - A wireless sensor node, WSN, tag and method for filtering sensor data obtained by the WSN. At least one event filter is applied to sensor data. The sensor data is based at least in part on motion of the WSN tag. The at least one event filter includes at least one filter parameter, and the at least one filter parameter includes a minimum amount of movement of the WSN tag within a predetermined time threshold. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252557 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ROLE MANAGEMENT FOR COMPLEX BLUETOOTH.RTM. DEVICES - Methods and systems for controlling a plurality of personal area network access devices are disclosed herein. In a personal area network device, a new connection is received from another personal area network device in a personal area network. The new connection is associated with a first application having a first role preference. It is determined whether the first role preference conflicts with a current role. It is determined whether the first role preference conflicts with a second role preference associated with a second application using the current role. The current role is switched to a role specified in the first role preference in response to determining that the first role preference conflicts with the current role and that the first role preference does not conflict with the second role preference. | 09-26-2013 |
20130260686 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR A BANDWIDTH EFFICIENT SCHEDULER - Methods and apparatus for scheduling shared time resources. In one embodiment, Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11 interfaces with overlapping frequency ranges are managed by an intelligent scheduler entity or process that schedules time slots for human interaction devices based on predictions on which Bluetooth device is active. By reducing the number of time slots reserved for inactive Bluetooth devices, the scheduler can free up time slots for IEEE 802.11 systems without significant perceptible impact on the Bluetooth devices. The freed time slots can increase in IEEE 802.11 performance by providing additional bandwidth (which can be perceptible by the user), thereby increasing user satisfaction and experience. | 10-03-2013 |
20130260687 | METHOD AND DEVICE TO SYNCHRONIZE BLUETOOTH AND LTE/WIMAX TRANSMISSIONS FOR ACHIEVING COEXISTENCE - A communication unit has BT and LTE transceivers, and a BT processor. The BT processor sets up a BT connection over the BT transceiver; performs a legacy command to synchronize BT transactions over the BT connection based on LTE frames in a LTE connection over the LTE transceiver, so that a BT network clock is synchronized to LTE frames. The legacy command is a role switch command that is used to set a BT alignment time of a switch point between Bluetooth master/slave packets to a LTE switch between transmit and receive; and is specified in a BT Core Specification 4.0 or earlier. The processor can determine an expected alignment time to align BT master and slave packets to transmit and receive in the LTE frame based on a start time of the LTE frame, and can indicate the expected alignment time in the legacy command. | 10-03-2013 |
20130260688 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR WIRELESS SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION ESTABLISHMENT - Method, apparatus, and computer program product example embodiments enable devices to initiate a communication connection. In an example embodiment, a method includes receiving one or more device detection messages at an apparatus; transmitting, by the apparatus, one or more response messages including information usable for a wireless device receiving the one or more response messages to estimate a distance to the apparatus; and receiving, at the apparatus, a reverse response message including an information message from the wireless device, containing information usable for estimating a distance between the apparatus and the wireless device. | 10-03-2013 |
20130260689 | Wirelessly Powered Input Device - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for powering a battery-less wireless input device are provided in which the battery-less wireless input device is coupled with a short-range communications target. The short-range communications target includes an energy harvester for harvesting energy generated by a short-range communications initiator when the short-range communications initiator communicates with the short-range communications target. The battery-less wireless input device receives the harvested energy for powering itself from the energy harvester when the short-range communications initiator communicates with the short-range communications target. The battery-less wireless input device may include a capacitor for storing the received harvested energy. Accordingly, the input device may electrically operate without being powered by a battery, and may therefore have a reduced size and weight. | 10-03-2013 |
20130260690 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BLUETOOTH CONNECTION IN MOBILE TERMINAL AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM THEREOF - A method and apparatus establish a connection in a mobile terminal with a device compatible with BLUETOOTH, a short range wireless communications technology at the 2.4 GHz band. If connectable BLUETOOTH devices are detected in the vicinity of the mobile terminal and there is at least one priority-registered BLUETOOTH device among the detected BLUETOOTH devices, the mobile terminal connects with a highest-priority BLUETOOTH device among the detected BLUETOOTH devices. If other connectable BLUETOOTH devices are detected in the vicinity of the mobile terminal while the mobile terminal is connected to a BLUETOOTH device, and there is at least one priority-registered BLUETOOTH device higher in priority than the currently connected BLUETOOTH device, among the detected BLUETOOTH devices, the mobile terminal switches the connection to a highest-priority BLUETOOTH device among the detected BLUETOOTH devices. | 10-03-2013 |
20130260691 | CONTENT IDENTIFICATION AND RETRIEVAL BASED ON DEVICE COMPONENT PROXIMITY - The invention provides proximity based content retrieval. A proximity element is provided for each of a plurality of components associated with a primary device. Identification information of each proximity element for an associated particular proximity space is communicated to a mobile wireless device. Upon the mobile wireless device being located within the associated particular proximity space of a particular proximity element, the mobile device receives associated identification information of the particular proximity element. The mobile device retrieves video content based on the associated identification information. | 10-03-2013 |
20130267176 | DETECTING A COMMUNICATION TAP VIA SIGNAL MONITORING - Using a Bluetooth communication channel for point of sale processing simulates a near field communication connection. A contactless device and the point of sale reader establish an unsecure communication channel. The user taps the contactless device with a point of sale terminal reader. The contactless device creates receive signal strength indicator (“RSSI”) value spikes. The terminal reader measures the RSSI values and transmits them to the contactless device, which determines if the RSSI value reaches or exceeds a threshold configured for the contactless device. If the threshold is reached, the terminal reader and the contactless device establish a secure communication connection. The devices communicate via the secure communication connection, and the connection is terminated when a request to terminate is received. | 10-10-2013 |
20130267177 | TERMINAL COORDINATION SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREFOR - There is a demand for a technique that enable plural terminals devices to be easily paired with plural mobile terminals possessed by their respective users in a room where the terminal devices that can be shared among the users are installed. Each terminal device searches for mobile terminals present within the wireless range. If the plural mobile terminals are present within a searchable area, the search result indicates plural mobile terminals, making it difficult to determine with what mobile terminal should the terminal device be paired. The current states of various sensors of the mobile terminals are included in information indicating the names of the mobile terminals and are searched by the terminal device. Under circumstances where the plural terminal devices and the plural mobile terminals exist within short distances, the mobile terminal unit to be paired with the terminal device can be found with ease. | 10-10-2013 |
20130273847 | Method and Apparatus for a Mobile Safety Platform with Multiple Communication Interfaces - A system includes one or more sensors, one or more output devices, a vehicle computing system (VCS) configured to receive information from the one or more sensors and to output information to the one or more output devices, a wireless receiver in communication with the VCS, and a wireless transmitter in communication with the VCS. The VCS is further configured to filter information received from the one or more sensors and broadcast the information through the wireless transmitter to a first device, while simultaneously communicating with the first device over the wireless receiver to receive a request relating to use of a vehicle output device, to verify the permissibility of the request and to provide output in accordance with a verified request over the vehicle output device. | 10-17-2013 |
20130273848 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WLAN AND SCO BLUETOOTH COEXISTENCE - In a wireless communication device having collocated Bluetooth and WLAN systems, wireless communication in a device having Bluetooth and WLAN systems, the device monitors for beacon transmission from an access point for a threshold number of access point beacon intervals when an SCO Bluetooth link is active. Once a threshold number of beacon intervals have passed without receiving a beacon transmission from the access point, the WLAN module sends a PS-Poll message to the access point to maintain the link and so that any queued data for the device can be transmitted. | 10-17-2013 |
20130273849 | Wireless Earphone for use in Bluetooth Piconets - An audio device includes a Bluetooth receiver, a Bluetooth transmitter, a speaker and a housing. The Bluetooth receiver is capable of wirelessly receiving signals in at least two audio channels. The Bluetooth transmitter is capable of wirelessly retransmitting at least a first one of the two audio channels. The speaker plays the second one of the two audio channels. The housing contains the Bluetooth receiver, the Bluetooth transmitter, and the ear phone. The housing is shaped to fit in or on an ear of a user. | 10-17-2013 |
20130273850 | METHOD OF REDUCING A WAITING TIME WHEN CANCELLING A CONNECTION AND AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREFOR - A method and apparatus attempt to connect Wi-Fi direct devices with each other and quickly recognize a cancellation of a connection when the connection is cancelled. The method includes performing a provision discovery process with a counterpart Wi-Fi electronic device, performing a group owner negotiation process with the counterpart Wi-Fi electronic device, and sending a cancellation notification to the counterpart Wi-Fi electronic device when connection with the counterpart Wi-Fi electronic device is ended. | 10-17-2013 |
20130273851 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of Bluetooth communication. For example, a Bluetooth communication unit may be capable of detecting a Bluetooth signal via a first antenna, and, upon detecting the Bluetooth signal, to switch to a second antenna, which is shared between the Bluetooth communication unit and an other, different, wireless communication unit, for establishing a Bluetooth communication link. | 10-17-2013 |
20130281020 | Methods And Apparatus For Use in Facilitating Communications Over First And Second Wireless Connections Of A Wireless Transceiver - A wireless communication device includes a first wireless transceiver and a second wireless transceiver. The wireless device is configured for communicating via the first transceiver over a first connection with a first device, where communications to and from the wireless device are addressed with a first hardware address assigned to the first transceiver. The wireless device is further configured for communicating via the first transceiver over a second connection with a second device, where communications to and from the wireless device are addresses with a second hardware address assigned to the second transceiver. The first transceiver may be configured for communications in accordance with IEEE 802.11, and the second transceiver may be configured for communications in accordance with BLUETOOTH®. The first connection may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) infrastructure connection, and the second connection may be a WiFi Peer-to-Peer (P2P) connection. | 10-24-2013 |
20130281021 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SWITCHING ACCESS POINTS BASED ON TOUCH SELECTION - An approach is provided for configuring one or more mobile devices to multiple access points and/or services associated with at least one structure. An access platform determines status information associated with at least one structure, wherein the at least one structure is associated with one or more access points located in one part of the at least one structure, one or more other access points located in another part of the at least one structure, or a combination thereof. The access platform then processes and/or facilitates a processing of the status information to cause, at least in part, an activation, a deactivation, or a combination thereof of the one or more access points, one or more services associated with the one or more access points, the one or more other access points, one or more other services associated with the one or more other access points, or a combination thereof. | 10-24-2013 |
20130281022 | Low-Power Wireless Beaconing Network Supporting Proximal Formation, Separation and Reformation - At least one of the wireless devices of a wireless network attempts to reestablish communications with a separated wireless device. Further, the separated wireless device may also attempt to reestablish communication with the wireless network. At least two of the wireless devices may separate from the wireless network to form an alternate wireless network separate from the wireless network. In such case, the at least two wireless devices of the alternate network may rejoin the wireless network after the separation. The wireless devices may establish the wireless network when proximate to one another and operating at a lower power level while continuing operation at a higher power level. The wireless devices establish the wireless network when in a first proximity to one another and continue to communicate while in a second proximity to one another. | 10-24-2013 |
20130288600 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR WIRELESS CHARGING DETECTION - Method, apparatus, and computer program product example embodiments provide wireless charging detection. According to an example embodiment of the invention, a method comprises advertising by a wireless charging device, an availability for wireless charging over a wireless communication interface; scanning, by the wireless charging device, for wireless signals from one or more other wireless devices; providing, by the wireless charging device, information usable for characterizing charging capabilities of the wireless charging device; transmitting, by the wireless charging device, one or more wireless communication packets over the wireless communication interface, including the information usable for characterizing the charging capabilities of the wireless charging device, in response to receiving one or more wireless signals from the one or more other wireless devices; and providing, by the wireless charging device, power to the one or more other wireless devices over a wireless power interface. | 10-31-2013 |
20130288601 | AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION OF ELECTRONIC DEVICES - The disclosed embodiments provide a system that facilitates the configuration of a first electronic device. During operation, the system detects a non-configured state of the first electronic device in proximity to a second electronic device. Next, the system establishes a network connection between the first and second electronic devices. Finally, the system uses the network connection to transmit configuration information from the second electronic device to the first electronic device, wherein the configuration information is used to configure the first electronic device without receiving manual input from a user through a user interface of the first electronic device. | 10-31-2013 |
20130288602 | CONTENT AWARENESS AND CONTROL AMONG PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION DEVICES - Apparatus and methods for collaboratively presenting content that is distributed among a plurality of communication devices are disclosed. The method includes initiating, at a host communication device, a peer-to-peer session with other communication devices, and sending a playlist of content to the other communication devices. In addition, information about content listed in the playlist that is currently being presented is also sent to the other communication devices. And at the request of one or more of the other communication devices, digital files that are stored among the other communication devices are added to the playlist. When the digital file is listed at a top of the playlist, the digital file from a corresponding one of the other communication devices is presented. | 10-31-2013 |
20130288603 | ORIENTATIONAL COLLABORATION OF DATA BETWEEN MULTIPLE DEVICES - The disclosure provides for collaborating user data maintained in separate mobile devices by tangibly manipulating the distance and orientation between the mobile devices. The placement of one device with respect to one or more other devices triggers an action when the proximity and orientation between the devices is detected. The data on each proximal device is temporarily shared among the devices, allowing the users of the devices to see the aggregated data. | 10-31-2013 |
20130288604 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION - Disclosed are a Bluetooth communication method and system which enable a Bluetooth device to be connected to other terminals without a pairing process and data to be transmitted through Bluetooth communication when the Bluetooth device is paired with any of a plurality of terminals having the same device information. The Bluetooth communication method includes receiving, by a receiving unit in a central communication server, communication information from a first terminal when the first terminal and a Bluetooth device are paired, transmitting, by a transmitting unit in the central communication server, the communication information to a second terminal having the same device information as the first terminal, and establishing, by the second terminal, a communication channel with the Bluetooth device, without the pairing process, on the basis of the received communication information. | 10-31-2013 |
20130288605 | WIRELESS TERMINAL AND METHOD OF DATA COMMUNICATION THEREIN - A wireless terminal and a method of data communication between such wireless terminals includes a first wireless terminal determining whether a second wireless terminal is located within a preset distance, the first wireless terminal determining whether the first wireless terminal is tilted at more than a preset slope and the first wireless terminal transmitting a preset packet of data to the second wireless terminal where it determines that the second wireless terminal is located within the preset distance from the first wireless terminal and the first wireless terminal is tilted at more than the preset slope. | 10-31-2013 |
20130295848 | System and Method for Polling a Network Service - A method of operating a mobile device is provided, the method comprising: pairing the mobile device with a second device; having the second device poll a network service on behalf of the mobile device; and obtaining data provided by the network service. A method of operating on behalf of a mobile device is also provided, the method comprising: pairing a second device with the mobile device; polling a network service on behalf of the mobile device; and enabling data provided by the network service to be sent to the mobile device. | 11-07-2013 |
20130295849 | DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - A method of data transfer between wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) is described. The WTRUs may be within a given geographic area of each other or in communication with the same network. Location information relating to the WTRUs may be determined. The location information may be presented to a user of the WTRU. Data may be transferred from one WTRU to a target WTRU based on user input. The WTRU may determine the target WTRU based on user input and/or location information. The user input may be a gestural input. The gestural input may be received via a display or touchscreen. The user input may identify a given action or identify a particular file for transfer. The WTRU may receive data from the target WTRU. | 11-07-2013 |
20130303087 | Connected Device Platform - A system for communicating via a wireless link is disclosed. The system may include a watch movement, a wristband, or an appliance. The system may also include a microprocessor having a Bluetooth® low energy radio. The microprocessor may be configured to receive a notification of an event from a Bluetooth® device and, in response to receiving the notification, activate an indicator on the watch movement, wristband, or appliance. Furthermore, the microprocessor may be configured to receive user input and transmit data via a Bluetooth® link to a smartphone or tablet where it may be received by an application. | 11-14-2013 |
20130303088 | SYSTEM LEVEL PROCEDURES AND METHODS TO ENABLE DATA SHARING IN CELLULAR NETWORK - Methods and systems may enable the setup and configuration of proximity services between wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) over different sharing paths including via a direct air interface, a radio access network (RAN) or one or more network nodes. Mobility management entities (MMEs) may exchange messages to initiate, modify or terminate a proximity service session between WTRUs, and may negotiate data paths for proximity services with or without the assistance of WTRUs. WTRU-to-WTRU control plane messages may be exchanged between WTRUs with limited involvement from other network entities and may avoid the setup of resources for data plane communications. Mobility management entities (MMEs) may exchange messages to initiate, modify or terminate a proximity service session between WTRUs, and may negotiate data paths for proximity services with or without the assistance of WTRUs. | 11-14-2013 |
20130309971 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK ACCESS TO GUEST APPARATUS BASED ON PRESENCE OF HOSTING APPARATUS - Example method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed to enable granting access rights to guest devices. Example embodiments include a method comprising receiving, by a first device, an input from a user of the first device to grant access rights to a wireless short-range communication network to a user of a second device when the first device is present within coverage of the wireless short-range communication network; and transmitting, by the first device, an access grant message to a control node managing the wireless short-range communication network, wherein the access grant message comprises one or more rules indicating that access rights for a second device are to be granted only when the first device is present within coverage of the wireless short-range communication network. | 11-21-2013 |
20130309972 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING PROXIMATE DEVICES - An apparatus, method, and computer program product are described that provide for a user to share content with other users who are proximate to his or her device in a simple and intuitive manner. In some embodiments, a “wave” gesture is used to identify users of devices that nearby to the source user's device with whom the source user may communicate, such as to share content. Upon receiving a first orientation input, a scanning mode may be initiated during which one or more devices proximate the apparatus are determined. A second orientation input that is different from the first orientation input, and the scanning mode may be terminated in response. As a result, a communication with at least one selected device of the one or more devices determined to be proximate the apparatus may be facilitated. | 11-21-2013 |
20130309973 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERSISTENT WIRELESS DOCKING - Various aspects of the present disclosure enable a persistent docking procedure that, once a persistent docking environment has been established, can simplify the future establishment of a docking environment between the dockee and docking host. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 11-21-2013 |
20130309974 | PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A portable electronic device is disclosed. The portable electronic device includes a housing, an input module, a near distance communication chip and a near distance communication module. The input module includes a near distance communication antenna. The near distance communication chip is electronically connected with the near distance communication antenna. The near distance communication module is disposed at the housing and communicates with the near distance communication chip via the near distance communication antenna. A communication method of a portable electronic is also provided thereof. | 11-21-2013 |
20130316649 | SMART PAIRING USING BLUETOOTH.RTM. TECHNOLOGY - Various embodiments provide systems and methods among wireless nodes in a wireless communication network that enable pairing a third-party device to all wireless devices of a composite electronic device in a single user step. A first wireless node may negotiate a first wireless pairing with third-party device for a second wireless node, and pairing information may be relayed to the second wireless node to enable the second wireless node to communicate with the third-party device as if the second wireless node had itself directly negotiated the wireless pairing. | 11-28-2013 |
20130316650 | MOUNTING APPARATUS, METHOD, AND SYSTEM FOR SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A mounting apparatus enables a near field communication (NFC) tag, radio frequency identification (RFID) tag, bar code or other machine-readable symbol, or other information-storage element located on the mounting apparatus to be read/interrogated by a user's wireless communication device, such as for example to obtain business card information. A system and method is also disclosed that connects consumers with retail employees on a social network and allows for consumers to collect and store contact information of retail establishments and its employees, within a retail environment. Communication is provided between consumers and retail professionals and consumers may also bookmark, manipulate, or share contact information, provide feedback and interact; and store professionals contact information locally or remotely. Retail business owners may also present an electronic list of a plurality of its employees and their contact information thereby providing the consumer a choice to save the contact information locally or remotely. Consumers may connect with a plurality of employees within an out of home environment. | 11-28-2013 |
20130316651 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING SERVICE DISCOVERY OVER ALTERNATE TRANSPORTS - Methods and apparatus for providing primary transport service discovery information over one or more alternate transports that are not normally associated with the primary transport services. In one embodiment, the primary transport comprises a first wireless interface (e.g., Bluetooth), and the alternate transport comprises a second wireless interface (e.g., WiFi or WiMAX). Service profile information relating to the primary transport is broadcast to other users over the alternate transport in a more efficient and streamlined manner than that available on the primary transport. The other users store this service profile information so that it can be subsequently accessed for service profile discovery of the transmitting device by those other devices, thereby obviating subsequent transfer of the data over any transport (primary or alternate). | 11-28-2013 |
20130316652 | METHOD TO USE AUXILIARY CHANNEL TO ACHIEVE FAST AND POWER-EFFICIENT ASSOCIATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A medical system includes one or more MBAN devices that acquire and communicate patient data. The medical system further including one or more medical body area network (MBAN) systems, each MBAN system including the one or more MBAN devices that communicate the patient data with a hub device via short-range wireless communication, the communication of the patient data via the short-range wireless communication being within a predefined spectrum. The hub device receives patient data communicated from the one or more MBAN devices and communicates with a central monitoring station via a longer range communication. The one or more MBAN devices transmit an association request to the hub device on one or more auxiliary channels to associate each MBAN device with the MBAN system, the auxiliary channels being outside the predefined spectrum. | 11-28-2013 |
20130324045 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, GAME SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, RECORDING MEDIUM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An example system includes: a communication device including a first wireless communication part performing short-distance wireless communication; and an information processing apparatus including a second wireless communication part performing short-distance wireless communication, a processing part performing processing concerning input or output of information, a restriction part, in correspondence to the processing of one of the second wireless communication part and the processing part, restricting the processing of the other, and an information processing part performing information processing corresponding to a processing result of the second wireless communication part or the processing part whose processing is not restricted by the restriction part. | 12-05-2013 |
20130324046 | Bluetooth connection method and system - The present disclosure provides a Bluetooth connection method, the method includes that: a client reads information stored in a Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) card and establishes a Bluetooth connection with a server according to the read information. The present disclosure also provides a Bluetooth connection system, wherein a Bluetooth address and an identification (ID) value of the RFID card are pre-stored in the RFID card; after reading the information stored in the RFID card, the client directly uses a Service Discovery Protocol (SDP) service search to carry out an interaction with the server, achieving automatic completion of a Bluetooth authentication while a Bluetooth service search is performed, thereby establishing a secure and reliable Bluetooth connection; The method significantly reduces the time for establishing a Bluetooth connection, and makes the application of the Bluetooth service more concise and rapid to realize, costing less, more efficient, and easier to popularize. | 12-05-2013 |
20130331031 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR WIRELESS SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION DISCONNECTION - Method, apparatus, and computer program product example embodiments enable devices to disconnect a communication connection. In an example embodiment, a method includes measuring, by an apparatus, a power level of one or more wireless communication messages received from a selected wireless device over a wireless communication connection, after an interval following an establishment of the wireless communication connection; and disconnecting, by the apparatus, the wireless communication connection with the selected wireless device, if the one or more wireless communication messages received over the wireless communication connection, has a measured power level greater than a threshold value. | 12-12-2013 |
20130331032 | CONFIGURING A CODEC FOR COMMUNICATING AUDIO DATA USING A BLUETOOTH NETWORK CONNECTION - In the described embodiments, when configuring a Bluetooth network connection between a first electronic device and a second electronic device, the first electronic device sends a configuration message to the second electronic device that indicates that a first codec is preferentially to be used when communicating audio data using the Bluetooth network connection. Upon receiving a response from the second electronic device that indicates that the first codec is permissible to use, the first electronic device configures itself to use the first codec when communicating audio data using the Bluetooth network connection. Otherwise, upon receiving a response from the second electronic device that indicates that the first codec is not permissible to use, the first electronic device configures itself to use a second codec when communicating audio data using the Bluetooth network connection. | 12-12-2013 |
20130331033 | IMMEDIATE CONNECTION FOLLOWING DEVICE DISCOVERY - An electronic device is described. During operation, this electronic device activates a communication channel having a carrier frequency in a radio in an interface circuit to listen for an advertising frame of interest from another electronic device during a scan window having a predefined duration. If the advertising frame of interest is received from the other electronic device, the electronic device terminates the listening before the predefined duration has expired and, using the communication channel in the radio, transmits the connect request to the other electronic device to establish the connection with the other electronic device. In this way, the delay between discovery of the other electronic device and establishing the connection is reduced. In addition, the power consumed by the electronic device while scanning for the other electronic device and initiating the connection is reduced. | 12-12-2013 |
20130331034 | Supplemental Audio Signal Processing for a Bluetooth Audio Link - Providing supplemental audio signal processing for a Bluetooth audio link. A wireless device may establish a bi-directional wireless audio link with a Bluetooth device. An indication may be received that the Bluetooth device supports audio signal processing. A device type of the Bluetooth device may be determined. The wireless device may perform one or more audio signal processing operations on audio data transmitted to and/or received from the Bluetooth device via the bi-directional wireless audio link. The audio signal processing operations may be selected based on the device type of the Bluetooth device, and may be performed in addition to audio signal processing operations which may be performed on the audio data by the Bluetooth device. | 12-12-2013 |
20130331035 | INPUT DEVICE AND BLUETOOTH CONVERTER THEREOF - A bluetooth converter of an input device has a micro-controller unit (MCU), a first-protocol connection port, a second-protocol connection port, a protocol signal converter and a bluetooth unit. The first-protocol connection port is connected to an input and output (I/O) terminal of the MCU. The second-protocol connection port is another I/O terminal of the MCU through the protocol signal converter. The MCU is further connected to the bluetooth unit. When a wired computer input device is connected with the first-protocol connection port or the second-protocol connection port, the output signals can be wirelessly transmitted to a paired computer through the MCU and the bluetooth unit so that the wired computer input device can be converted to wirelessly input data to a paired computer compatible with a specific protocol. | 12-12-2013 |
20130337747 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TERMINALS - A method and an apparatus are provided for performing wireless communication between terminals. An inquiry message is transmitted to a neighboring terminal. An inquiry response message is received from the neighboring terminal. It is determined whether the apparatus overlaps the neighboring terminal. When the apparatus overlaps the neighboring terminal, paging is automatically performed, without intervention of a user of the apparatus, and pairing between the apparatus and the neighboring terminal is established. | 12-19-2013 |
20130337748 | NON-NETWORKED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - According to one embodiment, the invention relates to a method comprising: transmitting ( | 12-19-2013 |
20130337749 | SPECTRUM REALLOCATION WITH PRIORITIZED SCHEDULE - A medical system includes one or more medical body area network (MBAN) systems. Each MBAN system including one or more MBAN devices which acquire and communicate patient data via a hub device via a short-range wireless communication channel. The communication of the patient data via the short-range wireless communication channel within a predefined spectra. One of the spectra being a spectrum belonging to a third party primary user. The hub device receives patient data communicated from the one or more MBAN devices and communicates with a central monitoring station via a longer range communication. In response to the third party primary user requesting the third party primary user spectrum, the hub device reallocates to other spectra based on a priority of an acuity level of services communicated by each hub device. | 12-19-2013 |
20130344809 | MULTI-PROFILE APPLICATION FRAMEWORK - Systems and methods are disclosed in which a controller enables communication between a Bluetooth®-wireless-protocol unaware host and a Bluetooth®-wireless-protocol enabled remote device. As such, one embodiment of the invention is a controller, which comprises a controller transport to enable communication of data with a Bluetooth®-wireless-protocol unaware host device. The controller further comprises a controller application and a controller Bluetooth® stack to enable communication of the data using Bluetooth® wireless protocol. One embodiment can be seen as a method comprising the steps of receiving data from a Bluetooth®-wireless-protocol unaware host, converting the received data to a Bluetooth® wireless protocol, and transmitting the converted data to a Bluetooth®-wireless-protocol enabled remote device. | 12-26-2013 |
20130344810 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO AVOID SATURATION OF AN ASSOCIATING WIGIG STATION - A system and method are provided to facilitate establishing WiGig communications links between WiGig-enabled wireless devices and WiGig PBSS Control Points and Access Points (PCP/AP). The PCP/AP transmits beacons that are intended to assist the wireless devices in locating the PCP/AP. Based on the directional nature of WiGig communications, the beacons are transmitted directionally in a number of sectors in multiple directions simultaneously or in sequence. When devices, such as wireless devices, attempting to connect via a PCP/AP, are positioned very close to the PCP/AP, the devices may be incapable of receiving the transmitted beacons because the low noise amplifier (LNA) located in the individual wireless device receiver may become saturated. The disclosed systems and methods broadcast the beacons at lower power according to different schemes at certain intervals to avoid saturating the LNAs. | 12-26-2013 |
20130344811 | METHOD FOR OPERATING AND COMMISSIONING DEVICES IN A ZIGBEE NETWORK - A method for operating devices in a ZigBee network comprising ZigBee Green Power (ZGP)-capable devices and non-ZGP-capable devices, both to be controlled by at least one ZGPD device is disclosed. In one example, the method comprises:
| 12-26-2013 |
20130344812 | PAIRING BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - The present invention relates to a method for enabling a wireless communication between at least one peripheral unit (a | 12-26-2013 |
20140004796 | DISCOVERING PROXIMITY DEVICES IN BROADBAND NETWORKS | 01-02-2014 |
20140004797 | Coordinating devices to estimate distance, relative position, and device attitude | 01-02-2014 |
20140004798 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION | 01-02-2014 |
20140004799 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT | 01-02-2014 |
20140011453 | SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE AND METHOD OF MANUFACTURING THE SAME - Disclosed is a semiconductor device that is capable of handling multiple different high-frequency contactless communication modes and that is formed by a multi-chip structure. A first semiconductor chip, which performs interface control of high-frequency contactless communication and data processing of communications data, is mounted on a wiring board; and a second semiconductor chip, which performs another data processing of the communication data, is mounted on the first semiconductor chip. In this case, transmission pads in the first semiconductor chip are arranged at positions farther from a periphery of the chip than those of receiving pads, and the second semiconductor chip is mounted by being biased on the first semiconductor chip so as to keep away the transmission pads. | 01-09-2014 |
20140011454 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND METHOD AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - An information processing apparatus includes a first communication unit that receives management data including at least identification information of content data from a different device by using a first communication method. The apparatus also includes an output unit that outputs a first display based on the management information received by the first communication unit. Further, the apparatus includes a selection acceptation unit that accepts a selection of the content data according to a selection operation on the first display. The apparatus additionally includes a second communication that sends a request for the content data of which the selection acceptation unit accepts the selection to the different device and receives the content data corresponding to the request by using a second communication method whose communication range is wider than that of the first communication method. | 01-09-2014 |
20140018000 | BLUETOOTH PHONE RECONNECTION STRATEGY - When a wireless communications module, such as a Bluetooth transceiver in a vehicle, is confronted with numerous devices that it can choose to connect to, one particular device of many is chosen by the Bluetooth transceiver by determining a connection priority for each available, connectible device. Priority can be determined by factors that change over time and for different users and different devices. Examples include time of day, day of the week, direction, who is driving a vehicle, where a vehicle is going, and where a vehicle has been. The importance of any given factor can be user-specified or programmed into the Bluetooth transceiver. | 01-16-2014 |
20140018001 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASSET TRACKING IN CONSTRAINED ENVIRONMENTS - Wireless tracking systems and devices to detect the status of cargo containers, such as aircraft cargo. The system has a transmitter device, a router, and intelligent software. The transmitter device has automatic on-off capability during use, without the need for human intervention. The transmitter device has a basic “listening state” and the router has a basic “beacon broadcast state.” Only when the transmitter device is within range of the router's beacon does the device transmit data via RF signal to the router. | 01-16-2014 |
20140018002 | NETWORK, MASTER, HUB AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A BLUETOOTH INFRASTRUCTURE - An apparatus and method for providing a Bluetooth infrastructure. A master of a network for providing the Bluetooth infrastructure connects with at least one device via bidirectional Bluetooth communication. A hub of the network connects between the at least one device and the master via the bidirectional Bluetooth communication. | 01-16-2014 |
20140018003 | In-Vehicle Handsfree Apparatus - If a cellular phone with which a communication link is established is compliant with PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile), an in-vehicle navigation apparatus with a handsfree function stores and arranges, in a work memory device, phone book data transmitted automatically from the cellular phone. Thus, the newest phone book data can be made available. On the other hand, if the cellular phone is not compliant with PBAP, the in-vehicle navigation apparatus stores and arranges, in the work memory device, phone book data, which are presently stored in a storage memory device. Thus, if the presently stored phone book data, which are not newest, are desirable, they can be made available. | 01-16-2014 |
20140024312 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REMOTE COMMUNICATION - A method, device, and system for a user to place an order with a service provider using a Bluetooth-enabled apparatus that connects to a Bluetooth-enabled phone. Upon pressing a button on the Bluetooth-enabled apparatus, the apparatus and the phone automatically pair, and the phone automatically dials a preset number and sends a preset message to the service provider. A confirmation can be sent to the user. An order can also be placed automatically when the lid of the apparatus is opened. The apparatus can include indicator lights to signal errors and/or the status of the order. | 01-23-2014 |
20140024313 | Data Collection Network For Agriculture And Other Applications - A data collection network for agriculture and other applications is disclosed herein. Multiple monitors positioned in an area receive an energy signal from a receiver of a transport device. The energy signal powers a wireless signal from the transceiver of the monitor to the transceiver of the transport device. The wireless signal comprises soil data for the geographical area | 01-23-2014 |
20140024314 | SMART CONNECTORS AND ASSOCIATED COMMUNICATIONS LINKS - “Smart” connectors with embedded processors, measurement circuits and control circuits are disclosed for establishing a “contactless” radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic (EM) Extremely High Frequency (EHF) communications link between two electronic devices having host systems. The connectors are capable of monitoring, controlling, and directing (managing) link operation to dynamically adapt to conditions, as well as monitoring and altering (or modifying) data passing through the connector, and selecting a protocol suitable for a communications session. The connectors are capable of identifying the type of content being transferred, providing authentication and security services, and enabling application support for the host systems based on the type of connection or the type of content. The connectors may operate independently of the host systems, and may perform at least one of sensing proximity of a nearby object; detecting a shape of a nearby object; and detecting vibrations. | 01-23-2014 |
20140038523 | HIERARCHICAL NAVIGATION AND REMEDIATION IN DATACENTERS - Methods, devices, and machine-readable and executable instructions are provided for hierarchical navigation and remediation in datacenters. An example method to provide hierarchical navigation and remediation confirmation in datacenters includes providing navigation toward a reported component with a mobile electronic device via a hierarchy of navigational functionality that includes a differential wireless signal positioning system and a short range beacon detection system, verifying an identity of the reported component with the mobile electronic device, providing a testing protocol with the mobile electronic device to diagnose a fault associated with the reported component, providing a number of remedial instructions regarding the reported component with the mobile electronic device, and providing a remediation verification protocol with the mobile device to confirm whether the remediation was successful. | 02-06-2014 |
20140038524 | METHOD AND APPARATUS PERTAINING TO THE TIMING OF STYLUS LOCATION TRANSMISSIONS - A stylus includes a stylus housing that contains a location-beacon transmitter, a wireless receiver, and a control circuit that operably couples to the preceding. By one approach the control circuit is configured to use the location-beacon transmitter to transmit signals as a function of at least one signal received via the wireless receiver. The aforementioned wireless receiver can comprise a Bluetooth™-compatible wireless transceiver that pairs with the corresponding display-based device. The signal received via this wireless receiver can comprise transmission-synchronization information that represents a video-display event for the display-based device such as refreshing the display of the display-based device. In such a case, the signal can comprise a vertical synchronization pulse as sourced by the display-based device. So configured, the stylus can time the transmission of its location-beacon signals to arrive at the display-based device just prior to when the latter refreshes its display. | 02-06-2014 |
20140038525 | INPUT DEVICE WITH WIRELESS HEADSET FUNCTION FOR PORTABLE TERMINAL - Disclosed is a pen-like input device for a portable terminal which can provide the function of a wireless headset. The input device includes a housing configured with at least first and second spaced apart microphone holes formed therein. A transmitting/receiving (T/R) module is disposed inside the housing and coupled to the microphone element and a speaker. The T/R module transmits/receives communication signals to and from the portable terminal. A sound transferring part is provided within the housing to transfer sounds to a microphone element via a plurality of air pathways connected to the first and second microphone holes. | 02-06-2014 |
20140038526 | Mobile Social Media Platform and Devices - Methods, systems, and devices are presented relating to networking through a wireless mesh network. The method comprises pairing a first handheld device with a first machine to machine networking device associated with a first user and pairing a second handheld device with a second machine to machine networking device associated with a second user. The method further comprises matching the first user with at least the second user over a wireless mesh network and communicating the match to at least the first user. The matching of users can involve determining the first and second user have at least one defined preference in common. | 02-06-2014 |
20140045427 | DATA TRANSMISSION FOR TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT - A portable wireless data transfer and display device includes a user interface, a communication module, a display, and a short-range wireless communication module configured to wirelessly receive vehicle data from a data acquisition device mounted inside a vehicle when in close proximity to the data acquisition device. The portable wireless data transfer and display device is configured to accept inputs of driver information from a user via the user interface and further includes a long-range wireless communication module configured to send the vehicle data and the driver information through the communication module in real-time or at intervals that approximate real-time to a remote network device via a long-range wireless network. The portable wireless data transfer and display device is further configured to present at least one of: the vehicle data, the driver information, processed data, driver communications to the user via the display. | 02-13-2014 |
20140045428 | VEHICLE DATA AND DRIVER ASSOCIATION FOR TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT - A portable wireless data transfer and display device comprises a user interface, a communication module, a display, and a short-range wireless communication module configured to wirelessly receive vehicle data from a data acquisition device mounted inside a vehicle when in close proximity to the data acquisition device. The device is configured to accept inputs of driver information from a user via the user interface. The device is configured to associate the inputs of driver information with the vehicle data, and further includes a long-range wireless communication module configured to send the vehicle data and the driver information, and the association of the vehicle data and the driver information through the communication module to a remote network device via a long-range wireless network. The device is further configured to present at least one of: the vehicle data, the driver information, processed data, driver communications to a user via the display. | 02-13-2014 |
20140045429 | COMMERCIAL TRANSPORTATION INFORMATION PRESENTATION TECHNIQUES - A portable wireless data transfer and display device includes a user interface, a display, a processor, and a short-range wireless communication module configured to wirelessly receive vehicle data, in real-time, from a data acquisition device mounted inside a vehicle when in close proximity to the data acquisition device. The device is configured to receive an input of driver information and driver communications from a user via the user interface. The short-range wireless communication module is configured to communicate two ways, in real-time, the driver communications via a long-range wireless network. The device is configured to process into a trip schedule at least one of: the vehicle data, the driver information, and the driver communications via the processor. The device is further configured to present the trip schedule and the driver communications to the user via the display. | 02-13-2014 |
20140045430 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal including a display unit configured to display a Bluetooth setting menu for establishing a Bluetooth connection to a specific external device; a short range communication module configured to attempt to establish the Bluetooth connection to the specific external device; and a controller configured to receive an input request for attempting to establish the Bluetooth connection to the specific external device via the Bluetooth setting menu, control the short range communication module to search for the specific external device to attempt to establish the Bluetooth connection with the specific external device, and control the display unit to display indication information indicating a failure of the search for the specific external device if the search for the specific external device fails. | 02-13-2014 |
20140051357 | DETERMINING DEVICE IN-RANGE PROXIMITY - Devices and methods are provided for determining the proximity of client nodes within a wireless-enabled communication environment. A first client node comprises a database containing identification data associated with a plurality of wireless network access nodes and fingerprint data associated with the client node and a plurality of second client nodes. As the fingerprint information is updated, it is processed by the first client node to identify second client nodes that have matching, or similar, fingerprint information. Those that do are determined to be within a viable device-to-device (D2D) communication range. | 02-20-2014 |
20140051358 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK ASSOCIATION AND SECURITY FOR CONTROL OF INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT IN HARSH ENVIRONMENTS - In certain embodiments, a system includes a master node device. The master node device includes communication circuitry configured to facilitate communication with a welding power supply unit via a long-range communication link, and to facilitate wireless communication with one or more welding-related devices via a short-range wireless communication network. The master node device also includes control circuitry configured to associate the one or more welding-related devices with the short-range wireless communication network. The master node device further includes means for manually initiating association of the one or more welding-related devices with the short-range wireless communication network. | 02-20-2014 |
20140051359 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK IMPROVED ROBUSTNESS FOR CONTROL OF INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT IN HARSH ENVIRONMENTS - In certain embodiments, a system includes a master node device. The master node device includes communication circuitry configured to facilitate communication with a welding power supply unit via a long-range communication link, and to facilitate wireless communication with one or more welding-related devices via a short-range wireless communication network. The master node device also includes control circuitry configured to continuously improve reliability of wireless communications between the communication circuitry and the one or more welding-related devices via the short-range wireless communication network. | 02-20-2014 |
20140051360 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING INTER-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A device and method for performing inter-device communication are disclosed. The inter-device communication method includes searching for a second device supporting inter-device communication, receiving service information from the searched second device, determining that one of the first and second devices is a group owner and the other is a group client to compare the received service information of the second device with service information of a first device, receiving a group owner intent value of the second device from the second device, and setting a group owner intent value of the first device such that the group owner intent value of the device determined as the group owner is greater than the group owner intent value of the device determined as the group client to compare the group owner intent value of the first device with the group owner intent value of the second device. | 02-20-2014 |
20140051361 | LOCATION AWARE AD-HOC GAMING - A method of mobile gaming is disclosed. The method includes configuring a mobile device to communicate in a first communication protocol and a second communication protocol, determining location information for the mobile device, communicating the location information and a gaming request via the first communication protocol to a game server, receiving a gaming request response from the game server via the first communication protocol, initiating a gaming session in response to the gaming request response, wherein the gaming session is conducted via the second communication protocol. | 02-20-2014 |
20140051362 | BLUETOOTH DEVICE CONNECTION METHOD AND BLUETOOTH DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a bluetooth device connection method and a bluetooth device. The method includes: determining a device class of a to-be-connected bluetooth device, where the device class includes an audio device class and a non-audio device class; and if it is determined that the device class of the to-be-connected bluetooth device is the audio device class, using a preset connection identifier corresponding to the to-be-connected bluetooth device to establish a data connection with the to-be-connected bluetooth device. In the embodiments of the present invention, there is no need to obtain a connection identifier corresponding to the to-be-connected bluetooth device of the audio device class, thereby shortening time for establishing a data connection, and improving efficiency for establishing a data connection. | 02-20-2014 |
20140057563 | SMART PROXIMITY PRIORITY PAIRING - A method for overriding a pairing priority for a slave device connected to a master device, or for connecting a new slave device to the master device and setting a new pairing priority relative to an existing paired slave device over a short-range wireless connection such as Bluetooth®. The method includes executing an application and setting a connection priority override on either the slave device or the master device. When a connection between the slave device and master device is requested and negotiated, a priority override is communicated to the master device or queried on the master device, and if the priority override is higher than an existing priority, a connection for that device is completed with the master device, and additional slave devices in a list of last paired devices is adjusted by the master device. | 02-27-2014 |
20140057564 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING ADVERTISEMENTS IN CONJUNCTION WITH DEVICE DISCOVERY - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided for facilitating device discovery so as to consume less power with reduced channel occupancy. In regards to a method implemented by a master device, a scan for an advertisement is caused to be performed and an advertisement packet is received during the scan that defines a time period in which the source device of the advertisement packet will be performing a page scan. The method also determines the time period in which the source device of the advertisement packet will be performing the page scan. The method also causes a page to be issued during the time period in which the source device of the advertisement packet will be performing the page scan, and then receives a page response in response to the page. Corresponding apparatus and computer program products as employed by both master and slave devices are also provided. | 02-27-2014 |
20140057565 | CONTROL METHOD AND CONTROL APPARATUS FOR APPARATUS INCLUDING SHORT RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION MODULE - A control method and control apparatus for determining a relative location of a mobile terminal with respect to a display apparatus by using short range wireless communication. A method of controlling a display apparatus including a plurality of short range wireless communication modules, the method includes: performing short range wireless communication with a mobile terminal through a short range wireless communication module included in the display apparatus; identifying the short range wireless communication module performing the short range wireless communication with the mobile terminal from among the plurality of short range wireless communication modules; determining a relative location of the mobile terminal with respect to the display apparatus according to the result of identifying; and determining a location on a screen of the display apparatus to display data according to the relative location and displaying the data on the screen of the display apparatus according to the determined location. | 02-27-2014 |
20140057566 | ENHANCED HIGHER LAYER DISCOVERY METHODS FOR PROXIMITY SERVICES - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are disclosed to a method of establishing a wireless connection. The wireless connection may be an interface between an eNodeB and a proximity server. The interface may a direct interface between the eNodeB and the proximity server, for example, such that the only node between a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and the proximity server on the interface is the eNodeB. The interface may be a user plane interface. An eNodeB may receive an indication to set up the interface between the eNodeB and the proximity server. The indication may be a S1AP message received from a mobility management entity (MME), an RRC message received from the WTRU, and/or the eNodeB discovering the proximity server. Upon receiving the indication, the eNodeB may establish the interface between the eNodeB and the proximity server. The eNodeB and/or the proximity server may utilize unique session identification to identify the WTRU. | 02-27-2014 |
20140057567 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTI-STAGE DEVICE FILTERING IN A BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY DEVICE - A Bluetooth low energy (BLE) device receives advertising packets from an advertising BLE device. The BLE device filters the received advertising packets utilizing hardware to search for the advertiser. If the advertiser is not found by the hardware, the packet filtering continues utilizing firmware. Device identity information, comprising non-private and/or private device identities, of preferred BLE devices is partitioned to form a different white list for the hardware, firmware, and host, respectively, to concurrently support privacy and white listing. If the advertiser is found by the hardware, the hardware sends a response to the advertiser following a successful CRC check performed in the hardware. If the advertiser is found by the firmware, the device identity information of the advertiser is inserted in the white list for the hardware. The host may be awakened based on the device configuration and/or attribute type information of the received advertising packets. | 02-27-2014 |
20140057568 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MITIGATING THE EFFECTS OF INTERFERERS WHILE PERFORMING CONDITIONAL DEVICE SCAN - A method, a personal area network device operating as a slave, and a short range communications device operating as a slave are disclosed. A data storage | 02-27-2014 |
20140065962 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONDUCTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A system and method for improved wireless communications at a host device (e.g., a portable computing device, a mobile communications device) having multiple wireless communication abilities (e.g., Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi®). When a component (e.g., a monitor, an Ethernet dongle) having Bluetooth capability is coupled to the host device (e.g., wired or wirelessly), the host device copies its Bluetooth link keys to the component, deactivates its own Bluetooth module and activates (or initiates activation of) the component's. The component's Bluetooth module is operated using a software stack executing on the host device. Thereafter, the component handles Bluetooth operations and the host device communicates with Bluetooth devices via the component. Greater radio isolation is thus provided between antennae used by Bluetooth and Wi-Fi. | 03-06-2014 |
20140065963 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN PEER DEVICES, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE USING THE SAME AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - A method for establishing a communication between a first peer device and a second peer device is provided. The method includes detecting the second peer device by the first peer device. The method also includes checking, by the first peer device, whether there is a deposited second address of the second peer device in an address database of the first peer device. The method further includes setting a role for the first peer device by the first peer device according to a first address and a second address when there is the deposited second address of the second peer device in the address database of the first peer device. The method further includes establishing a connection between the first peer device and the second peer device based on the role set for the first peer device. | 03-06-2014 |
20140065964 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR THE EXCHANGING OF INFORMATION BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES FOR JOINING - Method, apparatus, and computer program product example embodiments exchange information between wireless devices for joining. In example embodiments, a method comprises receiving wireless messages, each of the wireless messages including a first timing synchronization function value of a respective one of candidate beacon groups from which the wireless messages are sent; calculating a first difference between a selected target timing synchronization function value and a timing synchronization function value of the apparatus; receiving subsequent wireless messages, each of the subsequent wireless messages including a second timing synchronization function value of a respective one of the candidate beacon groups from which the subsequent wireless messages are sent; calculating second differences between the subsequently received second timing synchronization function values and the timing synchronization function value of the apparatus; and selecting a target beacon group for joining having a second difference within a predefined threshold from the first difference. | 03-06-2014 |
20140065965 | CONTEXT ADAPTIVE CONTENT INTERACTION PLATFORM FOR USE WITH A NOMADIC DEVICE - A vehicle computer system comprising a transceiver in a vehicle configured to wirelessly connect with a nomadic device, wherein the nomadic device is capable of running a contextual application which operates at least in part based on vehicle environment data. The vehicle computer system further comprises one or more vehicle modules configured to receive environment data and capable of causing the transceiver to provide the vehicle environment data to the nomadic device for processing by the contextual application. | 03-06-2014 |
20140065966 | FEED-FORWARD INTERACTION WITH A NETWORK INTERFACE - In order to facilitate timely communication between electronic devices via a previously established communication link, a feed-forward technique may be used to transition the communication link from a power-saving mode to an active mode before a software application executing on one of the electronic devices attempts to communicate information. For example, if the software application determines that the information needs to be communicated to another electronic device at a future time, the software application provides a command to an interface circuit in the electronic device to transition the communication link to the active mode. After receiving a confirmation that the communication link is in the active mode, the software application provides the information to the interface circuit for communication to the other electronic device. In this way, the information can be communicated at the time without a time delay associated with the transition. | 03-06-2014 |
20140065967 | PROCESSOR-INDEPENDENT COMMUNICATION OF NETWORK AVAILABILITY - In some embodiments, an electronic device includes a host processor and a module, coupled to the host processor, to communicate over a wireless network using a first wireless communications protocol. The electronic device also includes a controller, coupled to the host processor and the module, to communicate wirelessly with a remote device using a second wireless communications protocol, to obtain a status of the wireless network from the module independently of the host processor, and to transmit the status of the wireless network to the remote device. | 03-06-2014 |
20140065968 | CONSUMER ELECTRONIC DEVICE HAVING A DISTRIBUTED FORM FACTOR MILLIMETER WAVE RECEIVER AND TRANSMITTER - A consumer electronic device having distributed form factor millimeter wave receiver and transmitter comprising a first motherboard part including a baseband module; a second motherboard part including a receive (RX) active antenna, wherein the RX active antenna is connected to the baseband module using a pair of cables; and a third motherboard part including a transmit (TX) active antenna, wherein the TX active antenna is connected to the baseband module using a pair of cables. | 03-06-2014 |
20140065969 | METHOD FOR CONNECTIVITY INFORMATION CONTROL AND AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - A method and apparatus for controlling connectivity information in an electronic device. The method includes receiving connectivity information on at least one wireless device, analyzing the received connectivity information, and establishing a connection with a neighbor wireless device by using the connectivity information. A first electronic device may store connectivity information with respect to the plurality of wireless devices. A second electronic device can receive a connectivity information file transmitted from the first electronic device. In the case where a second electronic device attempts to initially establish a connection with the plurality of neighbor wireless devices, the second electronic device can easily establish a connection with the plurality of wireless devices by decoding a connectivity information file transmitted from the first electronic device. | 03-06-2014 |
20140065970 | MECHANISM FOR IMPROVED INTEROPERABILITY WHEN CONTENT PROTECTION IS USED WITH AN AUDIO STREAM - A method and system that configure communication between devices in a network, where one device may support content protection, and another device may or may not support content protection. The devices may support communication utilizing Bluetooth® technology. A first device may determine whether a second device provides content protection support. If the second device does not support content protection, the first device may utilize a configuration that does not require content protection for communicating data with the second device. If the second device supports content protection, the first device may utilize a configuration that requires content protection for communicating data. If communicating data utilizing content protection fails, the first device may revert to utilizing a configuration that does not require content protection for communicating data with the second device. | 03-06-2014 |
20140065971 | TERMINAL DEVICE, CONTROL DEVICE, FAULT DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM, AND FAULT DIAGNOSIS METHOD - A state updating unit updates first information stored in a storage unit whenever the state of a control unit transitions from an idle state to an active state or from the active state to the idle state. A second power supply unit induces electric power from radio waves received by the antenna unit. An information acquiring unit operates after receiving the supply of electric power from the second power supply unit, acquires second information indicating whether electric power is supplied from the first power supply unit, acquires the first information from the storage unit, and transmits the acquired first and second information to the control device. A diagnosing unit diagnoses faults in the terminal device based on the first and second information transmitted from the information acquiring unit of the terminal device. | 03-06-2014 |
20140065972 | MBAN CHANNEL USE REGULATION SCHEME AND ADAPTIVE CHANNELIZATION FOR IEEE 802.15.4J STANDARDIZATION - A medical system includes one or more medical body area network (MBAN) systems. Each MBAN system includes one or more MBAN devices which acquire and communicate patient data with a hub device via short-range wireless communication. The communication of the patient data via the short-range wireless communication is within a predefined spectrum. The hub device receives patient data communicated from the one or more MBAN devices and communicates with a central monitoring station via a longer range communication. A MBAN channelization scheme defines one or more overlapping channels in the predefined spectrum and a MAC parameter dynamically enables or disables access to each defined channel. A channel regulator manages the MBAN utilization of the predefined spectrum by setting the MAC parameter to dynamically enable/disable the one or more predefined MBAN channels within the predefined spectrum. | 03-06-2014 |
20140073245 | PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION INITIATED BY SHARED PHYSICAL EXPERIENCE - Apparatus and methods for pairing communication devices are disclosed. An exemplary apparatus includes at least one sensor to produce a data signal responsive to sensing physical characteristics of an environment of the communication device, and a capture component to capture portions of the data signal to generate local data indicative of the physical characteristics. A peer interface component receives, via the wireless transceiver, remote data from at least one other communication device that is indicative of physical characteristics of an environment of the other communication device. A data correlation component compares the local data with the remote data and initiates, when the comparison indicates the communication device and the other communication device are sensing the same physical characteristics, a pairing of the communication device with the other communication devices. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073246 | PORTABLE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING WIRELESS CONNECTION THEREOF - A portable communication apparatus and a method for establishing a wireless connection thereof are provided. The method is adapted to the portable communication apparatus establishing the wireless connection with at least one peripheral apparatus by using a first wireless communication module and a second wireless communication module, in which a signal range of the first wireless communication module is larger than that of the second wireless communication module. In the present method, at least one peripheral apparatus located within the signal range of the first wireless communication module is searched by using the first wireless communication module, and a first wireless connection with the searched peripheral apparatus is established. Next, state information of a corresponding second wireless communication on each peripheral apparatus is obtained through the first wireless connection. Then, a second wireless connection with the at least one apparatus is established by using the second wireless communication module. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073247 | MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile wireless device has a first communication unit configured to perform proximity wireless communication with a communication device, a certification unit configured to perform a certification process between the mobile wireless device and the communication device via the proximity wireless communication using the first communication unit, a second communication unit configured to perform proximity wireless communication with an extra mobile wireless device, and an operation controller configured to control the extra mobile wireless device via the proximity wireless communication using the second communication unit, after the certification process is normally completed. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073248 | MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile wireless device has a power receiver configured to wirelessly receive power, a first communication unit configured to sequentially perform information transmission, waiting operation, information reception, and internal processing for a certification process, by using the received power, a second communication unit configured to perform wireless communication for data communication during the certification process, by using the received power, and a communication controller configured to control performing the data communication by the second communication unit within a period after the first communication unit starts information transmission for the certification process until the first communication unit completes information reception for the certification process. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073249 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING HARDWARE COMMUNITY - The invention relates to a method for permitting communication between a first Bluetooth-enabled device and one or more additional Bluetooth enabled devices, the method comprises performing of a coupling procedure that causes storage at said first device of the Bluetooth Device Address (BD Addr) of each of the one or more devices with which said first device needs to be permitted to communicate. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073250 | HAND-HELD, PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE WITH RETAINER PORT FOR RECEIVING RETAINABLE ACCESSORY FOR USE WIRELESSLY THEREWITH - In one embodiment of the present invention, a hand-held, portable electronic device is provided for use with a retainable accessory including a conductive male member which extends longitudinally from an end of the retainable accessory. The hand-held, portable electronic device may comprise a cavity in an exterior periphery of the hand-held, portable electronic device. The cavity may be configured to receive the conductive male member of the retainable accessory for storing the retainable accessory by inserting the conductive male member of the retainable accessory within the cavity. The retainable accessory may be adapted to communicate with the hand-held, portable electronic device wirelessly via an electronic signal such that the conductive male member of the retainable accessory to enable flow of charge such that the retainable accessory can function by electronically communicating with the hand-held, portable electronic device when physically not connected thereto. The retainable accessory is stored for reuse within the cavity by physically connecting to the hand-held, portable electronic device. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073251 | Short-Range Wireless Communication - The present specification describes techniques and apparatus that enable wireless devices to communicate effectively at short ranges. In one implementation, the transmit power of a transmitting device is reduced to permit a receiving device to demodulate a signal. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073252 | INFORMATION PROVIDING METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL THEREFOR - An information providing method using a mobile terminal is provided. The method includes placing the mobile terminal within a communication range of a sensor based Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) device previously registered in the mobile terminal, receiving identification information and sensing information detected by the sensor based BLE device from the sensor based BLE device, extracting notification information corresponding to the received identification information of the sensor based BLE device, comparing a previously set reference sensing information included in the extracted notification information and the received sensing information, and outputting a notification message included in the notification information based on the comparison of the previously set reference sensing information and the received sensing information. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073253 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING, SHARING AND DISPLAYING ELECTRONIC CONTENT - The present disclosure provides a device, system and method to present electronic content on a first mobile electronic device in communication and configured to receive electronic content from a second electronic device. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073254 | VEHICLE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - An information transfer ECU provided to a vehicle acquires and accumulates vehicle information output from a plurality of vehicle ECUs connected to a CAN communication line. Then, the information transfer ECU transfers the accumulated vehicle information to a portable information terminal to/from which short-range radio communications have been established by a short-range communication control unit. The portable information terminal transmits the transferred vehicle information to a vehicle information center through an external communication line network in order. When acquiring information for identifying the vehicle information whose transmission has been completed from the vehicle information center, the portable information terminal supplies the information to the information transfer ECU. The information transfer ECU erases the vehicle information whose transmission has been completed based on the acquired information. | 03-13-2014 |
20140080415 | System and Method for Communicating Over an 802.15.4 Network - A method of reducing data transfer while increasing image information over an 802.15.4 network includes obtaining an image with a sensor, modulating a representation of the image using a first 802.15.4 modem, sending the representation of the image to a coordinator, demodulating the representation of the image using a second 802.15.4 modem, and digitally enhancing at least one of the representation of the image and the image. A system for communication over an 802.15.4 network includes a sensor for obtaining data, the size of the data being at least an order of magnitude greater than the size of an 802.15.4 packet, a first 802.15.4 modem coupled to the sensor, a buffer for temporarily storing the data to allow transmission of portions of the data; the buffer being coupled to the sensor, a coordinator coupled to the sensor, the coordinator being capable of communicating with a computer, and a second 802.15.4 modem coupled to the coordinator. | 03-20-2014 |
20140080416 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal including a display configured to display information; a short range communication module configured to exchange a signal with an external control device; and a controller configured to receive the signal from the external control device, determine a context at a timing point of receiving the signal, and control an operation corresponding to the signal to be performed in the determined context. Further, the operation includes at least one of activation/deactivation of the display, an activation/deactivation of a lock mode of the mobile terminal, a volume operation and a camera operation. | 03-20-2014 |
20140080417 | WIRELESS CONNECTIONS WITH VIRTUAL HYSTERESIS - Circuit connectors for establishing EHF communication include a receiver configured to receive a transmitted EHF electromagnetic signal, and an output circuit coupled to the receiver. The output circuit has two states of operation that correspond to enabling a signal output and disabling the signal output. The output circuit is also configured to change its state of operation responsive to a state of a control signal, and a controller is coupled to the receiver and configured to produce the control signal. The control signal has two states that correspond to a first condition when the received signal exceeds a first threshold and a second condition when the received signal is less than a second threshold. | 03-20-2014 |
20140080418 | Method and System for Bluetooth HID Activity Prediction for Wireless Coexistence Throughput Optimization - A host device may be enabled to support a plurality of wireless interfaces, wherein some of these interfaces may be utilized to support human interface device (HID) based communication. The host device may be enabled to monitor activity of HID devices based on communications via HID capable wireless interfaces, may predict future use of the HID devices based on the monitoring, and may manage sniff communication that is utilized to track and/or detect activities in the HID devices. The management of the sniff communication may comprise adjusting characteristics of the sniff communication to enable improving throughput of other wireless interfaces available via the host device that may be affected by the sniff communication. The adjustment of the characteristics of sniff communication may comprise adjusting, statically and/or dynamically, length of sniff intervals and/or designating of sniff packets as high priority requests. | 03-20-2014 |
20140087663 | TRANSMISSION POWER MODULATION TO FACILITATE IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES - A method of modulating transmission power to facilitate in-device coexistence between wireless communication technologies is provided. The method can include determining a scheduled time period during which data is received by a device via a first wireless communication technology. The method can further include reducing a transmission power of a transmission from the device via a second wireless communication technology to a threshold level prior to the scheduled time period and controlling the transmission power so that the transmission power does not exceed the threshold level during the scheduled time period. The method can additionally include, subsequent to the time period, increasing the transmission power to a level exceeding the threshold level. | 03-27-2014 |
20140087664 | INCREASING POWER AMPLIFIER LINEARITY TO FACILITATE IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES - A method of increasing power amplifier linearity to facilitate in-device coexistence between wireless communication technologies is provided. The method can include determining a scheduled time period during which data is received by a device via a first wireless communication technology. The method can further include adjusting an operational parameter of a power amplifier applied to a transmission from the device via a second wireless communication technology to increase a linearity of the power amplifier during the scheduled time period. | 03-27-2014 |
20140087665 | Method for Bluetooth Accessory Pairing with Bluetooth Device, and Bluetooth Accessory - The disclosure relates to a method for a Bluetooth accessory pairing with a Bluetooth device, and a Bluetooth accessory, in both of which the Bluetooth accessory can check a pairing list stored in a Bluetooth device; when the pairing list is not empty, the Bluetooth accessory searches for a preset number of Bluetooth devices from the pairing list according to connection priorities of Bluetooth devices and establishes connections with the preset number of Bluetooth devices searched out. The disclosure takes the number of times of connections between the Bluetooth device and the Bluetooth accessory as the connection priority, and implements the establishment of a connection between the Bluetooth accessory and the Bluetooth device according to the connection priority, in this way, the Bluetooth accessory can automatically pair with a plurality of Bluetooth devices. In addition, during the search process of the Bluetooth accessory, the Bluetooth accessory can terminate the search at any time according to an external instruction from a user and enter a discoverable mode, so as to pair and establish a connection with a device other than the devices in the pairing list; therefore, the flexibility of pairing is greatly improved, the delay of pairing is reduced and the user experience is improved. | 03-27-2014 |
20140094121 | INTEGRATING WIRELESS INPUT FUNCTIONALITY INTO SECURE ELEMENTS - Systems and methods may provide for establishing an out-of-band (OOB) channel between a local wireless interface and a remote backend receiver, and receiving information from a peripheral device via the local wireless interface. Additionally, the information may be sent to the backend receiver via the OOB channel, wherein the OOB channel bypasses a local operating system. In one example, a secure Bluetooth stack is used to receive the information from the peripheral device. | 04-03-2014 |
20140094122 | WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK (WWAN) MANAGED DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION USING NARROWBAND WI-FI IN A LICENSED BAND - Technology for establishing a device to device (D2D) connection is disclosed. One device comprises a UE that includes a proximity discovery module configured to receive discovery information from at least one of a wireless wide area network (WWAN) and a wireless local area network (WLAN) to assist in establishing a D2D communication channel with at least one additional UE. A D2D communication module is configured to establish the D2D communication channel between the UE and the at least one additional UE using the discovery information. The D2D communication channel is established in a licensed radio frequency band and is managed by the WWAN. | 04-03-2014 |
20140094123 | MANAGING CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - The subject disclosure relates to a method for managing connectivity of a central device with a peripheral device, the method comprising, determining a location of a central device, determining a proximity of the central device to a peripheral device group based at least in part on a comparison of the location of the central device to a location profile associated with the peripheral device group and adjusting a scanning duty cycle of the central device in response to the determined proximity of the central device to the peripheral device group. Bluetooth Low Energy modules and systems are also provided. | 04-03-2014 |
20140094124 | TRANSFERRING DATA OVER BLUETOOTH USING INTERMITTENT BRIDGE - In one or more embodiments, a first device such as a mobile phone can establish a wireless connection with second device, and the second device can act as a bridge between the first device and a peripheral device, such as a printer, so that the first device need not establish a secure pairing or other type of direct connection with the peripheral device. The second device provides a profile of the peripheral to the first device. The first device can then use the profile to access the peripheral device via the second device, with the second device passing data between the first device and the peripheral identified by the profile. This bridging feature simplifies the process of using the peripheral devices, since no secure pairing or other configuration procedure is needed to enable the first device to access the peripheral. | 04-03-2014 |
20140099893 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ACTIVE INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION TO IMPROVE COEXISTENCE - This disclosure describes techniques for providing active interference cancellation in a wireless communication system having a Bluetooth transmit chain and a WLAN receive chain. A signal sampled from the Bluetooth transmit chain is gain and phase adjusted to offset interference in the WLAN receive chain. A quadrature phase shifter may be used to generate quadrature components of the sampled signal that are selectively combined to achieve a desired phase adjustment. The phase shifter may be stabilized by a variable capacitor. These techniques may be extended to MIMO systems. | 04-10-2014 |
20140099894 | APPARATUS AND METHOD PERTAINING TO TESTING A STYLUS COMMUNICATION PATH FOR INTERFERENCE - An apparatus having a stylus scribing surface and a sensor configured to communicate with a stylus via a wireless communication path regarding a location of the stylus with respect to that stylus scribing surface also has a control circuit that operably couples to that sensor. The control circuit is configured to automatically test that wireless communication path for interference. In response to detecting an undue level of interference the control circuit instructs the stylus to modify the wireless communication path (for example, by switching to a different carrier frequency). | 04-10-2014 |
20140099895 | SHORTWAVE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A shortwave communication device includes first and second carriers, a processing unit, first and second transmission units and a flexible connecting portion, and the first and second transmission units are installed on the first and second carriers respectively, and the first transmission unit is coupled to the processing unit, and the flexible connecting portion is coupled between the first and second carriers, and the flexible connecting portion has a connected line for constituting an electric connection between the processing unit and the second transmission unit. With the flexible connecting portion, relative position of the first and second carriers can be changed freely to expand the transmission range and enhance the transmission effect. | 04-10-2014 |
20140099896 | System and Methods for Enhancing Coexistence Efficiency for Multi-Radio Terminals - A method of scheduling transmitting and receiving communication slots for co-located radio devices is provided. A Bluetooth (BT) device first synchronizes its communication time slots with a co-located radio module, and then obtains the traffic pattern of the co-located radio module. Based on the traffic pattern, the BT device selectively skips one or more TX or RX time slots to avoid data transmission or reception in certain time slots and thereby reducing interference with the co-located radio module. In addition, the BT device generates a co-located coexistence (CLC) bitmap and transmits the CLC bitmap to its peer BT device such that the peer BT device can also skip data transmission or reception in certain time slots affected by the co-located radio module. The skipped time slots are disabled for TX or RX operation to prevent interference and to achieve more energy saving. | 04-10-2014 |
20140099897 | Information Processing Apparatus and Information Processing Method Having Communication Function - The present invention is an information processing apparatus which obtains identification information of an electronic device and makes communication with the electronic device via a network based on the identification information. When a portable telephone ( | 04-10-2014 |
20140099898 | Terminal Device and Method for Transceiving Data Thereof - A terminal device and a data transceiving method are provided. The terminal device includes a sensing unit which senses a momentum of the terminal device, an interface unit which receives a momentum from at least one external device, and a control unit which performs one of a data receiving operation, a data transmitting operation, and a data transceiving operation with the at least one external device depending on a comparison value obtained from a comparison of the sensed momentum with the received momentum to allow two devices to exchange data more easily. | 04-10-2014 |
20140099899 | Methods and Apparatuses for Personalized Device Usage - Methods and arrangements in a first primary device ( | 04-10-2014 |
20140106674 | Managed spectrum control and Information system - A system for predicting the performance of and operating a robust wireless network in the managed spectrum. The system comprising of at least one Managed Spectrum Device, one wireless spectrum network access point and one Integrated Management Application. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106675 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDS-FREE PROFILE CONTROL, AND ASSOCIATED COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method and apparatus for performing hands-free profile (HFP) control and associated computer program product are provided. The method is applied to an electronic device. The method includes: establishing a plurality of Bluetooth (BT)-Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) links between the electronic device and a plurality of wireless accessory devices, respectively; and dynamically updating a default-active-device parameter in a device information table to be a unique identification of a specific wireless accessory device of the plurality of wireless accessory devices, in order to maintain a single BT-Synchronous Connection-Oriented (SCO) link between the electronic device and the specific wireless accessory device according to the default-active-device parameter, where the device information table includes unique identifications of the wireless accessory devices of which the BT-ACL links are established with the electronic device. For example, the electronic device can be an Audio Gateway (AG) device, and the wireless accessory devices can be Hands-Free Unit (HF) devices. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106676 | CASE WITH EMBEDDED ELECTRONICS TO PROVIDE INTERFACE BETWEEN GLUCOSE SENSOR AND SMARTPHONE - A mobile phone case with an embedded wireless interface for enabling communications between a continuous glucose monitoring (CGM) sensor and a mobile phone is described. The mobile phone case includes an autonomous battery and an autonomous alarm speaker for enabling communication with a CGM sensor in situations where the mobile phone is unavailable. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106677 | Wireless Area Network Enabled Mobile Device Accessory - A wearable wireless portable device (“WWPD”) includes cellular/WAN communications circuitry for establishing a direct connection to a telecommunication network and a low-power short range radio for establishing an indirect connection to the telecommunication network via the communications circuitry of the more feature-rich mobile device. The WWPD may be configured to deactivate its cellular/WAN communications circuitry (and other resource such as GPS) to communicate with a more feature-rich mobile device (e.g., a smartphone) via low-power short range communication technologies when it is in close proximity to the mobile device, and activate its cellular/WAN circuitry to provide cellular and/or network connectivity when it is not in close proximity to the mobile device. The WWPD does not require the bulky battery systems, which enables the WWPD to be packaged into a small and lightweight device, such as a wrist watch or pendant and enables longer battery life for the battery of the WWPD. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106678 | PROTOCOL ADAPTATION LAYER FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Protocol adaptation layer for wireless communications. Communication devices that include one or more radio modules operable in accordance with multiple communication protocols establish communications using one communication protocol and then switch to another communication protocol. This switching to another communication protocol may be performed based on a variety of factors including effectuating communications of higher throughput, supporting uni-directional communications vs. bi-directional communications, or any other desired factor. In some embodiments, various communication devices include two radio modules that are each implemented to operate in accordance with one particular communication protocol. Alternatively, a multi-protocol capable radio module may support and operate in accordance with more than one communication protocol. Examples of possible communication protocols include those compliant with Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11, and/or 802.15.3c. | 04-17-2014 |
20140113556 | NETWORK-ASSISTED DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A device may receive, over a radio access network and from a first user device, an indication that the first user device and a second user device are to communicate, and may obtain session setup information for establishing a communication session, via a local network, between the first user device and the second user device. The device may determine, based on the session setup information, that the second user device is capable of participating in the communication session, and may transmit, over the radio access network and to the first user device and the second user device, session management information that permits the first user device and the second user device to establish the communication session via the local network. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113557 | Systems and Methods for Wirelessly Modifying Detection Characteristics of Portable Devices - A computer-implemented method for modifying operation of a portable processing device configured to scan for wireless signals under a first scan rate. As wireless signals are received in the portable processing device, characteristics of the wireless signals are analyzed, and if the characteristics match one or more characteristics, the operation of the portable processing device is modified. Under one exemplary embodiment, the first scan rate is modified to a second scan rate, where the second scan rate being different from the first. Under another exemplary embodiment, monitoring capabilities in the portable processing device are activated or modified to collect research data on media data. The characteristics may include identification information or messages/commands that are transmitted wirelessly. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113558 | PROXIMITY DETECTION USING AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method and system are described for proximity detection performed at an electronic device. In the described embodiments, an application is executing on the electronic device. The electronic device determines a target wireless signal strength based on a target distance. The electronic device receives a Bluetooth low energy (BLE) wireless signal from a second electronic device and generates a received wireless signal strength based on the received BLE wireless signal. The electronic device then compares the received wireless signal strength to the target wireless signal strength and on the condition that the received wireless signal strength exceed the target wireless signal strength, the electronic device performs one or more operations wherein the one or more operations include restricting a functionality of the application. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113559 | PROACTIVE ROLE AWARE ASSET MONITORING - According to one general aspect, a method may include establishing a short-range wireless communication between a user device and a point-of-interest (POI) device, wherein the POI device is associated with a POI data structure that represents a physical POI. The method may include receiving a request to perform a POI action in regards to the physical POI. The method may include causing the POI action to be performed. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113560 | DYNAMIC INTERACTIVE ZONE DRIVEN PROXIMITY AWARENESS SYSTEM - A system of short-range communication devices identify specific regions of interest within an area. In addition, a set of ranges or zones is defined for each of the short-range communication devices and conditions and actions are assigned to the zones. A client device senses a short-range communications device and associates conditions and actions to the client device. The client device determines its zone, analyzes the conditions and, if at least one condition is met, triggers the action(s). The history or context of the client device within the area may be analyzed to generate additional conditions and/or actions, or to modify existing conditions and/or actions associated with the specific zones. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113561 | USING A WIRELESS RADIO TO MANAGE POWER CONSUMPTION - Particular embodiments of a wireless communication system comprise a wireless device and a base station having at least one network connection and an RF transceiver. The base station may be configured to generate an RF signal and communicate with the wireless device using backscatter communication. The wireless device may be configured to generate operating power for the wireless device from the RF signal and to receive data transmitted using the RF signal and communicate data to the base station using backscatter communication. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113562 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND OPERATING METHOD USING BLUETOOTH - A Bluetooth pairing method in an electronic device is provided. The method includes detecting a change of a switching state of a switch of the electronic device, selecting a Bluetooth Device (BD) address according to the changed switching state among a plurality of stored BD addresses, and applying the selected BD address to a Bluetooth pairing. The method can facilitate Bluetooth pairing to selectable types of host devices. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113563 | ELECTRONIC LOCK HAVING HARDWARE BASED MULTI-WIRELESS PROFILE DETECTION AND SETTING - An electronic lock with a wireless module configured to communicate wirelessly using a selected wireless communication protocol. The lock includes a hardware profile selector, such as a plurality of switches, which can be configured to set the wireless protocol used by the wireless module. For example, the hardware profile selector can be adjusted to change the wireless protocol used by the lock. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113564 | INTELLIGENT DATA NETWORK WITH POWER MANAGEMENT CAPABILITIES - In one embodiment, a method for implementing two-way communication between at least first and second devices comprises steps of: (a1) during finite time periods following transmission of respective first messages from the first device to the second device, using the first device to listen for second messages transmitted from the second device to first device; and (a2) after each of the finite time periods following the transmission of the respective first messages from the first device to the second device, ceasing to use the first device to listen for second messages transmitted from the second device to the first device until after the first device transmits another first message to the second device. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113565 | PORTABLE DEVICE - Wireless device ( | 04-24-2014 |
20140113566 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - Provided is a communication apparatus including a short-range wireless communication unit that performs short-range wireless communication with an external communication device, an acceleration sensor that detects an acceleration by a movement of a chassis, and a control unit that estimates whether the chassis approaches the external communication device, from acceleration variation information recognized by an acceleration detection signal from the acceleration sensor, performs a communication opportunity determination using a result of the estimation, controls the short-range wireless communication unit to generate a standby radio wave in a dense state in a case where a communication opportunity is determined, and controls generation of the standby radio wave by the short-range wireless communication unit to be in a rough state or a stopped state in a case other than the case of determining the communication opportunity. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113567 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR CONFIGURATION AUTOMATION - Methods and apparatuses for automated configuring of user preferences. In one aspect of the present invention, a method to operate a data processing system, includes: detecting whether or not a portable device is connected to the data processing system; and automatically configuring one or more user preferences of the data processing system according to an identity of the portable device in response to a change in whether or not the portable device is connected to the data processing system. In one aspect of the present invention, call forwarding of at least one of a land line phone and a mobile phone is automatically configured when the mobile phone is brought close to the land line phone or when the mobile phone is taken away from the land line phone. | 04-24-2014 |
20140120837 | WIFI DIRECT SETUP USING OUT OF BAND SIGNALING - Disclosed in some examples is a method including receiving at a coordinator node a plurality of operational reports from a plurality of devices, each device engaging in a WiFi Direct communication session, the operational reports identifying a first communication parameter used for the WiFi Direct wireless communication session and a second communication parameter observed of a neighboring communication session; calculating one or more optimal communication parameters for one or more of the plurality of devices using the first and second communication parameters from the plurality of operational reports; and sending to the one or more of the plurality of devices the calculated one or more optimal communication parameters, wherein the plurality of operational reports are received and the optimal communication parameters are sent over a network out-of-band from the WiFi Direct communication sessions. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120838 | DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO MEASURE AND PROCESS SPORT MOTIONS - A distributed, multi-stage, intelligent system is configured to determine user action performance characteristics parameters in action sports. Raggedness, complexity, and cost are unevenly distributed among components across the stages for improved overall performance and reduced cost. The system includes stage-one, wearable devices configured to use sensors to collect initial data and transfer the initial data to stage-two devices which may temporally store the initial data and/or perform further data processing to generate intermediate data for communication to one or more stage-three devices configured for long term data storage, further processing and presentation. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120839 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND APPARATUSES FOR INCORPORATING WIRELESS HEADSETS, TERMINALS, AND COMMUNICATION DEVICES INTO FASHION ACCESSORIES AND JEWELRY - A communication device including a wearable accessory having a first power source, a telecommunications device including a transceiver configured to allow wireless communication, wherein the telecommunications device is configured to couple and decouple with the wearable accessory, and wherein the telecommunications device is configured receive power from the first power source when coupled with the wearable accessory. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120840 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS, AND TERMINAL WITH TOUCH SCREEN - A data transmission method and apparatus are disclosed, and a terminal with a touch screen. The method includes: when a touch on a file displayed on a touch screen is detected, determining whether an attribute of the touch meets a preset condition, where the attribute of the touch includes at least one of the following: a duration of touching the file, a track of dragging the file, and a final object location to which the file is dragged; and when the attribute of the touch meets the preset condition, transmitting the file to an object terminal through an established short-distance wireless communication data channel. Data transmission efficiency can be improved with the embodiments of the present invention. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120841 | Proximity Based Selection of an Implantable Medical Device for Far Field Communication - Devices and systems provide for proximity based selection of an implantable medical device for far field communication with an external device. By using a proximity communication that is limited to the IMD of interest during the selection process, the external device can eliminate those IMDs that are in range of far field communications but are able to receive the proximity communication. Thus, information may be shared via a proximity communication that is validated via a far field communication, or shared via a far field communication as a challenge and then validated via a proximity communication. The proximity communication may be used to initially limit the number of devices that respond to a discovery request and then subsequently used to select the intended implantable medical device as well as automatically select the appropriate therapy application corresponding to the selected IMD. | 05-01-2014 |
20140127999 | System and Method For Situational Awareness - A system for determining the location of a person relative to a vehicle. In one embodiment, the system includes a first device comprising a first Bluetooth transceiver in the vehicle, a portable second device comprising a second Bluetooth transceiver and a first application program. The first application program identifies a first condition in which a link based on Bluetooth RF transmission exists between the first device and the second device when the person is in a first position close to or in the vehicle. The application program determines when the link is broken based on drop in signal level and provides notification through a network to a computer system when a determination is made that the link is broken. The notification is indicative of the person having moved farther away from the vehicle to a second position. | 05-08-2014 |
20140128000 | Method for Channel Searching in a Medical Body Area Network - Provided is a method for channel searching for enabling a medical body area network (MBAN) terminal, which operates in an allocated frequency band, to use another frequency band. The method may comprise the steps of receiving an identifier of a specific channel group, from among a plurality of channel groups, from an MBAN coordinator in the allocated frequency band; and searching for a channel in a channel group relating to the received identifier of the channel group in a different frequency band. The identifier of the channel group indicates a channel group including channels that the terminal preferentially searches for in the other frequency band. | 05-08-2014 |
20140128001 | PROXIMITY CONTROL USING BLUETOOTH CONNECTION - A system includes a Bluetooth wireless network configured to enable altering an operating condition of a network device to manage energy use at a site. The system also includes a controller configured to detect a mobile device establishing or losing a wireless connection with the Bluetooth enabled wireless network, and then alter an operating condition at the site in response to detecting the mobile device establishing the Bluetooth enabled wireless connection and alter an operating condition at the site in response to detecting the mobile device losing the Bluetooth enabled wireless connection. A method includes detecting a mobile device establishing or losing a wireless connection with a Bluetooth enabled wireless network, and then altering an operating condition of a site in response to detecting the mobile device establishing the wireless connection and altering an operating condition of the site in response to detecting the mobile device losing the wireless connection. | 05-08-2014 |
20140134947 | DEVICE-CENTRIC OR INTERACTIVE DISCOVERY - Methods and apparatus are provided for discovering computing devices in a local area. The disclosed methods include receiving, by a first device, a request to provide discovery information, generating, by the first device, the discovery information, wherein the discovery information includes a communication address of the first device, and providing, by the first device, the discovery information using a short-range protocol that can be received only within a defined distance of the first device. The methods can further include receiving, by a second device, the discovery information, wherein the second device is located within the defined distance of the first device, extracting, by the second device, the communication address of the first device from the discovery information, and initiating, by the second device, communication with the first device using the communication address and a communication protocol associated with the address. | 05-15-2014 |
20140134948 | Method and System for Accurate Straight Line Distance Estimation Between Two Communication Devices - A method and system is provided for estimating proximity and accurately calculating the straight line distance between the communicating Bluetooth enabled portable communication devices. Particularly, the invention provides a method and system for capturing the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) values form at least one target communication device ( | 05-15-2014 |
20140134949 | SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - An onboard apparatus uses two modes to transfer audio data from a mobile phone. A first mode transfers and outputs audio data stored in the mobile phone. The first mode communicates control data according to a control data transfer protocol and transfers and outputs audio data according to an audio data transfer protocol. The second mode permits the mobile phone to successively buffer audio data stored in a server on a communication network and to concurrently transfer and output the buffered data. The second mode replaces the control data transfer protocol with a specific data communication protocol. The second mode communicates control data according to the specific data communication protocol and transfers and outputs audio data according to the audio data transfer protocol. The second mode can communicate any commands and data using the specific data communication protocol regardless of commands specified in the control data transfer protocol. | 05-15-2014 |
20140134950 | Vertical System Integration - The Vertical System Integration (VSI) invention herein is a method for integration of disparate electronic, optical and MEMS technologies into a single integrated circuit die or component and wherein the individual device layers used in the VSI fabrication processes are preferably previously fabricated components intended for generic multiple application use and not necessarily limited in its use to a specific application. The VSI method of integration lowers the cost difference between lower volume custom electronic products and high volume generic use electronic products by eliminating or reducing circuit design, layout, tooling and fabrication costs. | 05-15-2014 |
20140134951 | SONIC FAST-SYNC METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BLUETOOTH - A method, apparatus and computer program product for fast-synching a wireless Bluetooth connection using a first device's wireless identifier is provided. One implementation of the present invention modulates the wireless identifier as a sonic Bluetooth code over a sonic carrier signal. To send the wireless identifier, one implementation accesses a storage area associated with the first wireless device holding the sonic carrier signal. Aspects of the invention then transmit the sonic Bluetooth code as modulated over the sonic carrier signal. A sonic transducer, such as a microphone on the second wireless device, receives the sonic carrier signal and wireless identifier for demodulation. In response, the second wireless device requests to establish a physical channel with the first wireless device using the wireless identifier received over the sonic carrier signal. | 05-15-2014 |
20140141719 | PERSONAL COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PRESENTING DIGITAL ITEMS THEREOF - A method for presenting digital items is provided. The method is executed by a first PCD and includes the following steps. Detect the existence of one or more second PCDs by the first PCD. Update the state of each said second PCD according to the detection. Rank the order of the one or more second PCDs according to the state, wherein the order of the second PCDs whose state is present is higher than the order of the second PCDs whose state is absent. Present one or more digital items according to the order of the one or more second PCDs. | 05-22-2014 |
20140141720 | Cloud Service for making Social Connections - A cloud service for making social connections includes a remote computer storing user accounts, each account including user information and an anonymous ID bound to the user information. A first mobile device transmits an anonymous ID using a limited range wireless signal module and a second mobile device receives the anonymous ID using a limited range wireless signal module of the second mobile device. The second mobile device transmits the received anonymous ID to a remote computer using an Internet connection module and receives the user information bound to the anonymous ID from the remote computer. | 05-22-2014 |
20140141721 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SYSTEM INCLUDING ELECTRONIC TAG, MOBILE DEVICE, AND DISPLAY DEVICE, AND MOBILE DEVICE AND DISPLAY DEVICE OF THE SAME - A method for controlling a system including an electronic tag, a mobile device, and a display device, and a mobile device and a display device of the same are disclosed herein. The control method includes the steps of, when the mobile device is positioned within a predetermined range from the electronic tag, transmitting data stored in the electronic tag to the mobile device from the electronic tag, having the mobile device determine whether or not pairing information is included in the stored data, when pairing information is included in the stored data, establishing wireless communication connection between the display device being identified by the pairing information and the mobile device, and having the mobile device display at least two or more options for selecting a device correspond to a content that is to be outputted. | 05-22-2014 |
20140141722 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING AND PROCESSING DATA - A mobile telecommunication device is configured to receive data from a remote apparatus, process the data and (i) delete the data if the data has previously been received and stored by the device or (ii) store the data in the device. The device communicates with a remote server to access information associated with the apparatus and selectively process the information associated with the apparatus. The device is configured to operate independently of the apparatus to access information associated with the apparatus without a connection thereto. | 05-22-2014 |
20140141723 | Method for Establishing Bluetooth Connection, Mobile Terminal, Bluetooth Device, and System - A method for establishing a Bluetooth® connection, where the method includes: establishing data connections with at least two Bluetooth® devices; obtaining a voice connection instruction, where the voice connection instruction includes identification information of a target Bluetooth® device selected by a user from the Bluetooth® devices; and establishing a voice connection between the mobile terminal and the target Bluetooth® device according to the voice connection instruction; and a mobile terminal, a Bluetooth® device, and a system. A voice connection is established with a Bluetooth® device selected by a user, so as to improve an extent to which a Bluetooth® connection is established intelligently and a capability of interacting with the user. Therefore, the user can, according to needs, freely select a Bluetooth® device with which a connection is established, thereby improving convenience of the user in using the Bluetooth® device. | 05-22-2014 |
20140148099 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR OPTIMIZED DISCOVERY BETWEEN MOBILE DEVICES - Method, apparatus, and computer program product example embodiments enable optimized discovery between mobile devices. In example embodiments, a method comprises transmitting, by a wireless device, a periodic beacon message, the beacon message including an indication that the wireless device is currently unconnectable and indicating a next awake period and response opportunity for connecting the wireless device; entering, by the wireless device, a sleep state until the next awake period; awaking from the sleep state for transmitting the periodic beacon message and determining whether the awake period contains a response opportunity; and when determining that the awake period contains a response opportunity, remaining in an awake state for listening for responses to the periodic beacon message. | 05-29-2014 |
20140148100 | METHOD FOR CHANNEL SWITCHING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention provides a method for switching an operating channel of a device in a wireless personal area network (WPAN) system, and an apparatus therefor. Specifically, the method includes the steps of: setting an association with a first frequency band coordinator; receiving channel switching information from the first frequency band coordinator; channel switching to a second frequency-band channel using the received channel switching information; and setting an association with a second frequency band coordinator, wherein the channel switching information includes a residual time with a time limit which channel switches from a first frequency band to a second frequency band, an operating channel in the second frequency band, and a prearranged transmission time of a beacon frame in the operating channel in the second frequency band. | 05-29-2014 |
20140154984 | REDUCED POWER WIRELESS WAKE ON CONNECTION - An aspect provides a method, including: receiving, at a low power wireless communication subsystem of an information handling device, a beacon from a wirelessly connectable device; determining, with the low power wireless communication subsystem, if the received beacon warrants executing a communication protocol; in response to determining the received beacon warrants executing a communication protocol, powering on a main system component and a higher power wireless communication subsystem; and establishing a wireless connection between the higher power wireless communication subsystem and the wirelessly connectable device. Other aspects are described and claimed. | 06-05-2014 |
20140154985 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING BLUETOOTH DEVICE FOR POWER CONSERVATION - A method for controlling a Bluetooth device for power conservation includes the steps of: establishing a Bluetooth link; controlling the Bluetooth device to enter sniff mode; handling a sniff anchor point after wakeup preparation and before sleep preparation; and handling a wakeup operation between the wakeup preparation and the sleep preparation. The wakeup/sleep preparation can be also done as few times as possible in the invention such that the power consumption of the Bluetooth device is effectively reduced. | 06-05-2014 |
20140154986 | INFORMATION PROVIDING METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL THEREFOR - An information providing method using a mobile terminal is provided. The information providing method includes placing the mobile terminal within a communication range of a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) device previously registered in the mobile terminal, receiving identification information from the BLE device, extracting previously set notification information corresponding to the received identification information of the BLE device, and outputting a notification message to the mobile terminal based on the extracted previously set notification information. | 06-05-2014 |
20140154987 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING FUNCTION OF THE MOBILE TERMINAL - A method of controlling a function of a mobile terminal is provided. The method includes placing the mobile terminal within a communication range of a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) device previously registered in the mobile terminal, receiving identification information of the BLE device from the BLE device, extracting function information corresponding to the received identification information of the BLE device, and performing a previously set function corresponding to the extracted function information. | 06-05-2014 |
20140154988 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO SORT MESSAGES EXCHANGED IN A WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK ACCORDING TO RELATIVE ORIENTATIONS AND POSITIONS OF SENDING AND RECEIVING DEVICES - Apparatus and methods are described herein for sorting messages sent and received, for example in a wireless Personal Area Network (PAN), according to whether the receiving device is within a radially defined region of space. The space may be defined by one or more parameters set by the sending device. A wireless PAN may define the range of peer-to-peer transmission and reception of radio waves between at least two wireless devices. Location and orientation information may be transmitted by a communication device and combined with user and/or software defined boundary limits to filter short range wireless messages. | 06-05-2014 |
20140154989 | WIRELESS HANDS FREE DEVICE FOR EQUESTRIAN RIDING ACTIVITIES - A hands free device adapted to be used during equestrian riding activity is described. The hands free device includes: an enclosure that houses a set of speakers, a microphone, and a wireless communication module; and a securing feature that is adapted to be coupled to the enclosure and secured to an attachment point. A portable speaker adapted to be used during horseback riding includes: a crescent-shaped enclosure that includes: a set of speakers; and a recessed area running along an outer surface of the enclosure; and a securing strap that includes: a retaining loop adapted to form a compression fit about the enclosure at the recessed area; and an adjustable securing feature that includes a retaining element and a set of receptacles, each receptacle adapted to be able to be coupled to the retaining element. A media playback device adapted for use during horseback riding is described. | 06-05-2014 |
20140154990 | Automatic Multimedia Upload For Publishing Data And Multimedia Content - Disclosed herein is a method and system for utilizing a digital data capture device in conjunction with a Bluetooth (BT) enabled mobile device for publishing data and multimedia content on one or more websites automatically or with minimal user intervention. A client application is provided on the BT enabled mobile device. In the absence of inbuilt BT capability, a BT communication device is provided on the digital data capture device. The BT communication device is paired with the BT enabled mobile device to establish a connection. The client application detects capture of data and multimedia content on the digital data capture device and initiates transfer of the captured data, multimedia content, and associated files. The digital data capture device transfers the captured data, multimedia content, and the associated files to the client application. The client application automatically publishes the transferred data and multimedia content on one or more websites. | 06-05-2014 |
20140162554 | Transmitter To Receiver Communication Link In A Wireless Power System - A method and system for establishing a communication link in a wireless power system from a wireless power transmitter (WPT) to a wireless power receiver (WPR) is provided. A flux modulator is operably disposed in the WPT for dynamically changing the WPT's impedance so as to modulate a magnetic field produced on the transmitter coil when a primary voltage applied to the WPT. A flux demodulator is operably disposed in the WPR for receiving and demodulating a secondary voltage induced on a receiver coil due to the modulated magnetic field on the transmitter coil. The induction of the secondary voltage on the receiver coil due to the modulated magnetic field on the transmitter coil establishes the communication link from the WPT to the WPR. The flux demodulator is configured as an analog signal processing chain or a digital signal processing block for decoding information obtained from the WPT. | 06-12-2014 |
20140162555 | CONTROL OF THE TRANSMISSION OF A VOICE SIGNAL OVER A BLUETOOTH.RTM. RADIO LINK - It is proposed a method for controlling the transmission of a sampled voice signal over a Bluetooth® radio link. The method comprises the steps of:
| 06-12-2014 |
20140162556 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES AND A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A wireless media player and a related system and methodology are disclosed. One aspect of the wireless media player system pertains to a virtual connector system, apparatus, and method for the automatic establishment of wireless connectivity with other electronic devices. In one embodiment, the media player device employs the use of integrated Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) technology to exchange communication settings, media capability, and other parameters with an external device that also has integrated RFID technology. The automatic exchange of settings and other information via a proximity-based RFID data exchange allows a media player to quickly establish a secure communication link with another device via a commonly supported wireless protocol such as Ultra Wideband (UWB) or Bluetooth. Another aspect of the media player system pertains to a method of using the captured media capability of the connecting device to customize certain menu options and software parameters in the media player. | 06-12-2014 |
20140162557 | PORTLESS ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A portable electronic device includes an outer assembly that lacks ports or other openings through which water or fluids may enter into an interior of the portable electronic device, which is defined by the outer assembly and, thus, into the presence of electronic components within the interior of the portable electronic device. The outer assembly may only include a display and a housing, or it may additionally include a waterproof microphone and at least one waterproof speaker. A protective coating, such as a moisture resistant film or coating, may coat some or all of the internal electronic components and/or some or all of the internal surfaces of the outer assembly. | 06-12-2014 |
20140162558 | PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICES, AND METHODS OF PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION OF MEDIA BETWEEN THE SAME - A wireless media player and a related system and methodology are disclosed. One aspect of the wireless media player system pertains to a virtual connector system, apparatus, and method for the automatic establishment of wireless connectivity with other electronic devices. In one embodiment, the media player device employs the use of integrated Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) technology to exchange communication settings, media capability, and other parameters with an external device that also has integrated RFID technology. The automatic exchange of settings and other information via a proximity-based RFID data exchange allows a media player to quickly establish a secure communication link with another device via a commonly supported wireless protocol such as Ultra Wideband (UWB) or Bluetooth. Another aspect of the media player system pertains to a method of using the captured media capability of the connecting device to customize certain menu options and software parameters in the media player. | 06-12-2014 |
20140170978 | MOBILE COMPUTING DEVICE APPLICATION SHARING - Technologies pertaining to sharing an application installed on a mobile computing device with another computing device are described herein. An indication is received that the application is desirably shared with the another computing device. Responsive to receiving such indication, a communications channel is automatically established between the mobile computing device and the another computing device, and display data generated at the mobile computing device is transmitted to the another computing device by way of the communications channel. The display data is displayed on the another computing device. | 06-19-2014 |
20140170979 | CONTEXTUAL POWER SAVING IN BLUETOOTH AUDIO - A method of reducing power consumption in a wireless headset paired to a mobile device is disclosed. The mobile device receives a first audio signal via a microphone on the mobile device, and determines an audio quality of the first audio signal. In response thereto, the mobile device may selectively deactivate a microphone on the headset to reduce its power consumption. For some embodiments, the audio quality may be determined, in part, upon a distance between the mobile device and the headset. For other embodiments, the audio quality may be determined, in part, upon a comparison between audio signals received by the mobile device microphone and the headset microphone. | 06-19-2014 |
20140170980 | STATIONARY PROXIMITY WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, PORTABLE PROXIMITY WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, PROXIMITY WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND PROXIMITY WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A stationary proximity wireless communication apparatus has an electromagnetic-wave transmitting and receiving part comprising a first indicator that indicates a zone to place a portable proximity wireless communication apparatus and an antenna that is installed in the zone to emit electromagnetic waves having directivity in a direction of a recommended optimum position suitable to place the portable proximity wireless communication apparatus in the zone from a position different from the recommended optimum position, and a wireless communication part configured to perform modulation and demodulation processes of electromagnetic waves transmitted and received at the antenna. | 06-19-2014 |
20140170981 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD - The present invention discloses an electronic apparatus and a data transmission method. The electronic apparatus includes a touch control communication unit for executing touch control input or communication data transmission, a touch control driving unit for providing a driving signal to and receiving a touch control signal from the touch control communication unit, a communication driving unit for providing communication data to be transmitted to and receiving it from the touch control communication unit, and a control unit for controlling the touch control communication unit to be in a first working status in which the touch control communication unit is electrically connected to the touch control driving unit and executes touch control input or a second working status in which the touch control communication unit is electrically connected to the communication driving unit and executes communication data transmission according to predetermined conditions. | 06-19-2014 |
20140170982 | CONTACTLESS DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT DATA TRANSFER SYSTEMS AND METHODS - One or more files may be transmitted from a first electronic device to a second electronic device via an EHF communication link. The first and second electronic devices may each include a processor coupled to a memory and to an EHF communication unit. The processors may be configured to establish the EHF communication link between the EHF communication unit of the first electronic device and the EHF communication unit of the second electronic device, and to transmit a copy of the one or more files via the EHF communication link. | 06-19-2014 |
20140179227 | APPARATUS AND ASSOCIATED METHODS - An apparatus, the apparatus comprising at least one processor, and at least one memory including computer program code, the at least one memory and the computer program code configured, with the at least one processor, to cause the apparatus to perform at least the following: when the determined relative position of a first portable electronic device with respect to at least a second electronic apparatus is within a predetermined proximity, automatically provide for an availability status update, associated with a user of the first portable electronic device, for use by a third party electronic device. | 06-26-2014 |
20140179228 | AUTO-PAIRING WIRELESS AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM - A method of auto-pairing a receiver/transmitter system for use with a vehicle having an operator portion and a transporting portion, the method including the steps of initiating, searching and sending. The initiating step initiates the transmitter into a pairing mode by way of an electrical power sequencing of the transmitter. The searching step searches for the transmitter to be in the pairing mode by the receiver. The sending step sends a signal to the transmitter that the transmitter is paired to the receiver upon the receiver finding the transmitter to be in the pairing mode in the searching step. | 06-26-2014 |
20140179229 | PEER-TO-PEER WIRELESS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - A peer-to-peer wireless transmission system and method uses an application program of a first system to carry out the steps of automatically searching a second system or a third system in an environment, reading and recording an identification code of the second or third system, transmitting a connection request and a set parameter from the first system according to a click of the application program, such that the second or third system performs a system installation and a network configuration, and authorizing an online connection after comparing and confirming the identification code of the first system to control data transmission or synchronization between the first system and the second or third system or control the first system to authorize the data transmission or synchronization between the second and third systems, so as to improve the mobility, timeliness and convenience of the data transmission. | 06-26-2014 |
20140179230 | LOCATION-BASED SELECTION OF WIRELESS PERIPHERAL DEVICES - Based upon the present location and historical usage at that location, the technologies disclosed herein select a wireless peripheral device (e.g., a printer, monitor, keyboard) for wireless connection with a portable device (e.g., a laptop computer or tablet). This Abstract is submitted with the understanding that it will not be used to interpret or limit the scope or meaning of the claims. | 06-26-2014 |
20140179231 | SMART VENDING MACHINE - A vending machine includes a product dispensing unit and a transceiver configured to communicate via a network. The vending machine further includes a first user interface disposed at a first location on a face of the vending machine and configured to permit users to engage in vending operations so as to cause the dispensing unit to dispense products from the vending machine, and a second user interface disposed at a second location on the face of the vending machine and configured to display information received via the transceiver. The transceiver may include a wireless transceiver and the network may include a cellular network. | 06-26-2014 |
20140179232 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A WIRELESS CONNECTION BETWEEN TWO DEVICES BASED ON THE PERMISSION STATUS - A communication device includes a communication unit wirelessly communicating with another communication device in a connectable area; an acquiring unit acquiring a state of the communication device; a setting unit making a setting as to whether a connection is permitted to be established by the communication unit, on the basis of the state acquired by the acquiring unit; and a communication control unit responding to a connection request sent from the other communication device when connection with the other communication device is permitted by the setting unit. | 06-26-2014 |
20140179233 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING CONTENT IN TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method for receiving content in a terminal, by which the terminal can receive, with low power consumption, content from an adjacent service provider by using a wireless communication technology. A low-power short-range communication unit; and a controller for controlling the low-power short-range communication unit to broadcast an advertising packet including information of the terminal at regular intervals, and control the low-power short-range communication unit so as to connect to a particular service provider which has scanned the advertising packet. A control operation is then performed so as to receive content from the particular service provider. | 06-26-2014 |
20140179234 | BLUETOOTH DEVICE PAIRING METHOD AND BLUETOOTH DEVICE - A Bluetooth device and its pairing method capable of performing an accurate pairing with a user-desired Bluetooth device provide e transmitting an inquiry message for searching for at least one peripheral Bluetooth device, and in response the peripheral Bluetooth device transmits an inquiry response message including predefined pairing acceptance mark data, then upon receiving the inquiry response message including the pairing acceptance mark data, the Bluetooth device transmits a pairing request message for pairing to the peripheral Bluetooth device that forwarded the inquiry response message. | 06-26-2014 |
20140187159 | PAIRING THROUGH DEVICE INTERACTION - Improved pairing through device interaction is generally disclosed. For example, a first device to pair with a second device using a wireless technology standard may include a transmitter to transmit wirelessly using a technology different from the wireless technology standard, and an announce engine, responsive to a user input, to selectively communicate an identification using the transmitter to indicate a request to initiate a pairing process using the wireless technology standard. In another example, a first device to pair with a second device using a wireless technology standard may include a receiver to receive wirelessly using a technology different from the wireless technology standard, and a listen engine, responsive to a user input, to listen for an identification, using the receiver, and to initiate a pairing process using the wireless technology standard with the second device indicated by the identification. In this way, one skilled in the art would appreciate that a wireless technology standard pairing algorithm would be alleviated of the potentially difficult step of identifying with which device to pair. Other embodiments are also disclosed and claimed. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187160 | CONTACT INFORMATION SOCIAL EXCHANGE METHOD AND SYSTEM - Methods, systems, and computer storage media for a wearable device are presented. The wearable device includes a wearable housing and a transceiver attached to the wearable housing and configured to receive a first data item. The first data item is contact information or an event identifier. The transceiver is further configured to transmit a second data item. The second data item is contact information. The transceiver has an effective range of less than one meter. The transceiver is able to receive the first data item and transmit the second data item in less than three seconds. The wearable device also includes a memory configured to store the first data item and the second data item. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187161 | COST-EFFECTIVE MOBILE CONNECTIVITY PROTOCOLS - Structures and protocols are presented for signaling a status or decision concerning a wireless service or device within a region to a network participant or other communication device (smartphone or motor vehicle, e.g.). | 07-03-2014 |
20140187162 | Method for sharing data between devices - A method for data sharing between a first device and a second device is disclosed. The method includes steps of the first device detecting whether the second device is within a specific range; at least first one of the first device and the second device exchanging at least one spatial condition information through a communication channel if the second device is within the specific range; at least second one of the first device and the second device verifying whether the at least one spatial condition information matches a predefined condition; and the at least second one of the first device and the second device activating data sharing between the first device and the second device when the at least one spatial condition information matches the predefined condition. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187163 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - An information processing apparatus, for communicating with a communication device using a first wireless communication protocol and a second wireless communication protocol, includes a first wireless communication unit configured to use the first wireless communication protocol and configured to receive information, relating to a start-up state of the communication device, from the communication device using the first wireless communication protocol, a second wireless communication unit configured to use the second wireless communication protocol, and a control unit configured to control a sequence for establishing connection, using the second wireless communication unit and the second wireless communication protocol, with the communication device. The control unit is arranged to change the sequence for establishing connection, using the second wireless communication unit and the second wireless communication protocol, in accordance with the content of the received information relating to the start-up state of the communication device. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187164 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CREATING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONNECTION THEREFOR - An electronic device for creating a wireless communication connection includes a wireless communication unit, a processing unit, a camera unit, and a memory. The camera unit captures a picture of a neighboring wireless communication-enabled device. The memory stores a number of pictures of wireless communication-enabled device which can be communicated with the electronic device via wireless communication. When the processing unit determines the captured picture matches a picture pre-stored in the memory, the wireless communication unit creates a communication connecting between the electronic device and the neighboring wireless communication-enabled device. A method applied in the electronic device is also provided. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187165 | Method for Handling Device to Device Communication and Related Communication Device - A method of handling device to device communication for a first user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system includes establishing a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection to a network of the wireless communication system; and receiving a first RRC message indicating to the first UE to use a first data radio bearer (DRB) for a proximity-based services (ProSe) communication with a second UE of the wireless communication system, wherein the first DRB is different from a second DRB for communication between the first UE and the network. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187166 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING SHORT RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A method and device for controlling short range wireless communication in an electronic device are provided. The method includes detecting a moving speed of the electronic device; and when the detected moving speed exceeds a reference speed, stopping a short range wireless communication module. | 07-03-2014 |
20140194062 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR WIRELESS SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION - Method, apparatus, and computer program product example embodiments enable devices to invoke a programmed process, if the one or more wireless communication messages received over the wireless communication connection, has a measured power level greater than a threshold value. In an example embodiment, a method includes measuring, by an apparatus, a power level of one or more wireless communication messages received from a selected wireless device over a wireless communication connection; and invoking, by the apparatus, a programmed process, if the one or more wireless communication messages received over the wireless communication connection, has a measured power level greater than a threshold value. | 07-10-2014 |
20140194063 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PAIRING MOBILE DEVICES - An apparatus and method for pairing mobile terminals are provided. The method includes detecting, by a first mobile terminal, a touch input corresponding to a request to pair a first mobile terminal with at least one other mobile terminal, broadcasting, by the first mobile terminal, pairing information, and connecting the first mobile terminal with the at least one other mobile terminal. | 07-10-2014 |
20140194064 | TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION SYSTEM, TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING UNIT, AND TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING METHOD - In a transmission and reception system, a transmitting and receiving unit is configured to acquire a message, and generate candidates of a reply message to the acquired message. A wearable computer is configured to perform a short-distance communication with the transmission and reception unit to receive the candidates of the replay message transmitted from the transmission and reception unit, and transmit a desired reply message selected from among the candidates of the replay message to the transmission and reception unit. | 07-10-2014 |
20140194065 | AD-HOC Network - The invention is a mobile device collaboration framework (MDCF)—a form of communications framework, which enables devices to discover other devices that support the framework, access applications and services on those devices and exchange a variety of media and application-specific data. It is not tied to any one communications medium or protocol. It supports access restriction and data security at many levels. Sessions can involve multiple devices, creating subnets of devices, each with a shared purpose or task. | 07-10-2014 |
20140206285 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING IN-BAND CONNECTIONS USING OUT-OF-BAND CONNECTIONS - Systems and methods for establishing an in-band connection using an out-of-band connection are provided. In some aspects, a system includes a handshake module configured to communicate, by a first electronic device with a second electronic device, connection setup information over a first connection. The system also includes a security module configured to select a security scheme based on the communicated connection setup information. The system also includes a role module configured to determine a communication role of the first electronic device and a communication role of the second electronic device based on the communicated connection setup information. The system also includes a connection module configured to facilitate establishing a second connection between the first electronic device and the second electronic device based on the selected security scheme, the communication role of the first electronic device, and the communication role of the second electronic device. | 07-24-2014 |
20140206286 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR WIRELESS DEVICE DISCOVERY PROCESS - Method, apparatus, and computer program product example embodiments enhance wireless communications device discovery processes. In an example embodiment, a method includes detecting a wireless device discovery message at an apparatus, and in response to detecting the wireless device discovery message, temporarily tuning, by the apparatus, device discovery parameters to increase a rate of detecting wireless device discovery messages. | 07-24-2014 |
20140206287 | MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT METHOD BETWEEN MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A mobile electronic device and a connection establishment method between the mobile electronic devices are provided. The connection establishment method includes the following steps. When a first mobile electronic device detects a control gesture applied to the first mobile electronic device, whether a second mobile electronic device is searched by the first mobile electronic device is determined, in which the second mobile electronic device detects the same control gesture applied to the second mobile electronic device. If the second mobile electronic device is searched by the first mobile electronic device, a first proximal wireless network connection between the first mobile electronic device and the second mobile electronic device is then established. | 07-24-2014 |
20140206288 | DEVICE, METHOD, AND SYSTEM FOR SECURELY PAIRING MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES USING MOVEMENT - A device, method, and system for securely pairing mobile communication devices using device movement includes capturing a begin movement, capturing arbitrary pairing movement, and capturing an end movement. The mobile communication devices verify that they are within a secure range during the pairing process. The captured pairing movement may be normalized, depending on the relative orientation of the mobile communication devices. The captured pairing movement data of each mobile communication device is compared. If the captured pairing movement data matches, then the mobile communication devices are successfully paired. | 07-24-2014 |
20140206289 | DATA-CAPABLE BAND MANAGEMENT IN AN INTEGRATED APPLICATION AND NETWORK COMMUNICATION DATA ENVIRONMENT - Techniques for data-capable band management in an integrated application and network communication data environment are described, including detecting a signal configured to initiate a pairing function being transmitted from a wearable computing device to an application, pairing the wearable computing device to the application, establishing a data communication link between the wearable computing device and the application, and configuring the application to transfer data between the wearable computing device and the application. | 07-24-2014 |
20140206290 | BLUETOOTH DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING AND OBTAINING BLUETOOTH DEVICE INFORMATION - A method for providing information associated with a target Bluetooth device. A first, search-attempting Bluetooth device sends an inquiry message for searching for a nearby target Bluetooth device. A target Bluetooth device responds by sending an inquiry response message including predefined information mark data. The first Bluetooth device extracts link information from the information mark data, and uses the link information to access information associated with the target Bluetooth device. If the link information includes a user manual link or an application link, after the first Bluetooth device and the target Bluetooth device are paired, the manual link or the application link are used for obtaining a manual associated with the target Bluetooth device or downloading an application associated with the target Bluetooth device. | 07-24-2014 |
20140213186 | PROXIMITY AND INTEREST DETERMINATION BY A WIRELESS DEVICE - A first wireless device determines whether the first wireless device is in a specified proximity to a second wireless device based on a signal wirelessly transmitted by the second wireless device. Based on information transmitted by the second wireless device, it is determined whether the first wireless device shares a common interest with the second wireless device. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213187 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, PLACE MANAGEMENT SERVER, AND METHOD OF DETECTING PLACE INFORMATION THEREOF - A first Bluetooth terminal having a short range communication module that is set as an anchor searches for a peripheral Bluetooth terminal and transmits information of the found Bluetooth terminal to a place management server. The place management server updates place information of a user of the found Bluetooth terminal to place information of the first Bluetooth terminal and transmits the updated place information to the found Bluetooth terminal. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213188 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING NFC SERVICE IN ELECTRONIC DEVICE NOT HAVING NFC MODULE - A system provides NFC service, comprising a second mobile terminal including, an NFC module for acquiring an NFC Data Exchange Format (NDEF) message from an NFC tag and an executable NFC application supporting automatically forwarding information comprising the NFC Data Exchange Format (NDEF) message data to a first mobile terminal. A wireless communication unit forwards the information to the first mobile terminal using a non-NFC communication method in response to at least one of, (a) a request message received from the first mobile terminal and (b) a predetermined stored command. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213189 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING BLUETOOTH DATA IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method for processing Bluetooth data in a portable terminal are provided. The apparatus includes a first control unit for transmitting a predetermined data transmission condition, a second control unit for receiving and storing the data transmission condition, for determining whether the data transmission condition is satisfied when data is received from an accessory through Bluetooth communication, and for transmitting the received data to the first control unit when the data transmission condition is satisfied as a result of the determination. | 07-31-2014 |
20140220893 | BLUETOOTH RECEIVING DEVICE WITH DECORATIVE FUNCTION - A Bluetooth receiving device with a decorative function includes a Bluetooth body and a decorative cover coupled to the Bluetooth body to form an ornament. The ornament may be a facial ornament, a brooch, a wristlet, a tie clip or an ornament retained to a user's personal belonging. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220894 | METHOD OF SWITCHING PAIRING BETWEEN BLUETOOTH DEVICES - A method of switching pairing between Bluetooth devices is disclosed. In one embodiment, the method is adapted to a Bluetooth server and two Bluetooth clients. The method enables the first Bluetooth client to interchange its pairing information with the Bluetooth server and the second Bluetooth client. Therefore, the Bluetooth server could use the interchanged pairing information to quickly connect with the second Bluetooth client. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220895 | DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICES, SYSTEMS AND RELATED DEVICE-TO-DEVICE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS METHODS - A communication device for performing device-to-device (D2D) wireless communications with a first neighboring communication device is provided. The D2D communication device includes a wireless module, a counter, and a controller module. The wireless module performs wireless transmissions and receptions. The counter has a count value and a threshold value. The controller module determines whether to broadcast proximity signal via the wireless module according to a comparison result of the count value and the threshold value, wherein the controller module determines to broadcast a first proximity signal to the first neighboring communication device via the wireless module when the count value reaches the threshold value, wherein the count value of the counter is changed according to a second proximity signal broadcasted by the first neighboring communication device. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220896 | Establishing Directed Communication Based Upon Physical Interaction Between Two Devices - Establishing communication with a device includes detecting, at a first device, a physical interaction between the first device and a second device; at least one of obtaining at the first device and providing to the second device, a network address usable for establishing communication between the first device and the second device, the network address identified based on information associated with the detected physical interaction; and automatically wirelessly transferring content using the network address, wherein transferring content includes at least one of receiving content at the first device from the second device and providing content from the first device to the second device. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220897 | PAIRING METHOD BETWEEN BLUETOOTH DEVICES AND BLUETOOTH SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A pairing method between Bluetooth devices can be applied to a Bluetooth system, a Bluetooth client and a Bluetooth server. The Bluetooth server has an image corresponding to an identifier of the Bluetooth server. A Bluetooth client device captures the image, analyze the image to obtain the identifier, and send out a pairing command having the identifier. The Bluetooth server starts a connected mode with the Bluetooth client according to the pairing command. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220898 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING COLLABORATIVE COEXISTENCE BETWEEN BLUETOOTH AND WI-FI - Methods and systems are described for providing Bluetooth and Wi-Fi coexistence on an electronic device. Aspects of exemplary embodiments include determining Bluetooth link parameters for a Bluetooth connection and Wi-Fi link parameters for a Wi-Fi connection. Also, a Bluetooth path loss for the Bluetooth connection and a Wi-Fi path loss for the Wi-Fi connection can be determined. According to this embodiment, one or more link conditions, based upon one or more of the Bluetooth link parameters, the Wi-Fi link parameters, the Bluetooth path loss, and the Wi-Fi path loss, may be calculated to determine if simultaneous collaboration between the Bluetooth connection and Wi-Fi connection is feasible. In response to simultaneous collaboration being feasible, the Bluetooth link parameters and the Wi-Fi link parameters are customized based on the one or more link conditions to permit simultaneous collaboration between the Bluetooth connection and the Wi-Fi connection. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220899 | Mobile Communication Device with Subscriber Identity Module - In one embodiment, a method of directing calls on a mobile communication device comprises receiving a call at the mobile communication device; determining that the received call is directed to subscriber identity information associated with a short-range enabled communication device; selecting on which of the mobile communication device and the short-range enabled device to answer the call; and directing the call to the selected device. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220900 | DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - Detecting wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs), by a WTRU over Bluetooth, is disclosed. An input from a multi-touch display to select a target WTRU from the detected WTRUs is processed. The WTRU transfers to the selected target WTRU over WiFi a selected media. | 08-07-2014 |
20140235166 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS DEVICE PAIRING - Embodiments of the present invention include a system and method for wirelessly identifying and validating an electronic device in order to initiate a communication process with another device or a service. In an embodiment, the system includes a portable biometric monitoring device that is identified by a client device or a server for the purpose of initiating a pairing process. In an embodiment, pairing implies pairing the portable device to an online user account with minimal user interaction. After pairing, the portable device and appropriate client devices and servers communicate with little or no user interaction, for example to upload sensor data collected by the portable device. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235167 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONNECTING SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN TERMINAL - A method and an apparatus for connecting short-range wireless communication in a terminal are provided. The method includes connecting with an external device through a short-range wireless communication unit, and after connecting with the external device, providing information about at least one other connectable external device. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235168 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS DEVICE PAIRING - Embodiments of the present invention include a system and method for wirelessly identifying and validating an electronic device in order to initiate a communication process with another device or a service. In an embodiment, the system includes a portable biometric monitoring device that is identified by a client device or a server for the purpose of initiating a pairing process. In an embodiment, pairing implies pairing the portable device to an online user account with minimal user interaction. After pairing, the portable device and appropriate client devices and servers communicate with little or no user interaction, for example to upload sensor data collected by the portable device. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235169 | Computer Headset with Detachable 4G Radio - A headset computer includes a removablely attachable cellular radio. The cellular radio when detached from the headset computer may be coupled to a docking station for WIFI or similar network communication to the headset computer. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235170 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR CONNECTING MULTIPLE DEVICES ONLINE - A method and system for establishing network connections among multiple devices are disclosed. The method includes the steps of a server establishing a network using Bluetooth and Wi-Fi technologies, and a first client initiating a Bluetooth connection or a Wi-Fi connection. The method further includes the steps of connecting the first client to the server and the first client exchanging data with an application hosted on the server. The method and system consistent with the present disclosure may improve the user experience for online computer games. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235171 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS DEVICE PAIRING - Embodiments of the present invention include a system and method for wirelessly identifying and validating an electronic device in order to initiate a communication process with another device or a service. In an embodiment, the system includes a portable biometric monitoring device that is identified by a client device or a server for the purpose of initiating a pairing process. In an embodiment, pairing implies pairing the portable device to an online user account with minimal user interaction. After pairing, the portable device and appropriate client devices and servers communicate with little or no user interaction, for example to upload sensor data collected by the portable device. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235172 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATING BETWEEN DEVICES - A method and system for communicating between devices according to the present invention are provided. The method for communicating between the devices according to the present invention is used for communicating with a first terminal, and is carried out in a device having a capacitive touch screen. The method includes: detecting a change in capacitance for a specific part of the capacitive touch screen, which occurs by means of the first terminal; and acquiring information transferred from the first terminal on the basis of the detected change in capacitance of the capacitive touch screen. The communicating method using such a touch screen may be easily used for various services such as authenticating terminals or transferring files between local terminals. | 08-21-2014 |
20140242912 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, COMPUTER-READABLE NON-TRANSITORY STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING STORED THEREIN INFORMATION PROCESSING PROGRAM, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - Predetermined data is transmitted from a first information processing apparatus to an unspecified number of or a plurality of other information processing apparatuses. A second information processing apparatus is capable of detecting a motion applied to the second information processing apparatus itself. When application of the predetermined motion is detected, the second information processing apparatus executes a response process to the predetermined data received from the first information processing apparatus. Thereafter, predetermined processing such as a process for establishing wireless connection is executed between the first information processing apparatus and the second information processing apparatus. | 08-28-2014 |
20140248837 | ISOLATION TUNERS FOR DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS - A device according to one embodiment includes a variable-capacitor-tuned isolation tuning circuit having a directional coupler having an input port, an output port, an isolation port, and a coupling port. The variable-capacitor-tuned isolation tuning circuit also has and a tunable capacitor coupled in shunt to the coupling port of the directional coupler. | 09-04-2014 |
20140248838 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE CONFIGURATION OF A MOBILE STATION BASEBAND CIRCUIT FOR AN ACOUSTIC ACCESSORY - A method and system for the configuration of a mobile station baseband circuit for an acoustic accessory having an identifier, the method comprising the steps of: determining whether the mobile device recognizes the identifier of the acoustic device; and configuring the baseband circuit with a DSP filter response and CODEC acoustic gain parameters for the acoustic device if the mobile device recognizes the identifier of the acoustic device. The system comprising: an identifier for each of the plurality of acoustic devices; a local memory in the mobile station storing a frequency (filter) response and gain parameters for at least one of the plurality of acoustic devices and for mapping them to the identifier; and a digital signal processor to re-shape an acoustic frequency response and adjust an audio gain of a baseband circuit for the mobile station based on the stored frequency response and gain parameters. | 09-04-2014 |
20140256257 | ENABLING AN INPUT DEVICE SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH MULTIPLE ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A method for using an input device simultaneously with multiple electronic devices is described. A first connection is established with a first electronic device. The first connection enters an active mode. A second connection is established with a second electronic device. The second connection enters the active mode. The first connection switches to a standby mode in response to the second connection entering the active mode. The first connection and the second connection switch between the active mode and the standby mode, where only one connection is in the active mode at a time. | 09-11-2014 |
20140256258 | PARKED VEHICLE LOCATING SMARTPHONE APPLICATION - A smartphone automatically determines the location of a parked vehicle by monitoring a received signal associated with the vehicle and a motion of the smartphone. If the smartphone travels a distance greater than the coverage area of received signal while in range of the received signal, then the smartphone is determined to be traveling in a vehicle. A typical Bluetooth signal range is ten meters while a typical vehicle trip is significantly greater. The location of the smartphone is correlated to the location of the parked vehicle when the absence of the received signal is determined. Pairing of a smartphone with a Bluetooth equipped vehicle is not required to automatically determine the parked vehicle location. | 09-11-2014 |
20140256259 | Bluetooth Communication System And Method For Selectively Switching Modes Of Operation In Between Electronic Devices - Disclosed is a Bluetooth Communication System and related method thereof for switching mode of operations between electronic devices. The system comprising a first Bluetooth enabled electronic device, one or more second Bluetooth enabled electronic devices, wherein the first Bluetooth enabled electronic device comprising a Bluetooth chip, a processing circuitry, and a user operable interface configured thereon to switch the processing circuitry to a desired second Bluetooth enabled electronic devices, and switch operational mode of the desired second Bluetooth enabled electronic devices from a first mode of operation to a second mode of operation or vice versa to establish a Bluetooth communication link between the first Bluetooth enabled electronic device and desired second Bluetooth enabled electronic device. | 09-11-2014 |
20140256260 | Wireless Device Pairing - A wireless communication network includes a communication source device, such as a Bluetooth digital music player and a communication destination device, such as a Bluetooth headphone or speaker device. The communication source device is configured to transmit audio signals, such as encoded electrical signals in the audio frequency band, to the communication destination device via a wireless or wired audio communication channel. Upon receiving the audio signal, the communication destination device is configured to uniquely identify the communication source device and subsequently enter a discoverable mode to establish a wireless communication channel with the source device, such as via Bluetooth pairing. With such a configuration, the wireless communication channel connection process can be automated requiring little to no user action on either the source or destination device to accomplish the wireless pairing process. | 09-11-2014 |
20140256261 | Proximal Equipment Data Capture - A system and method for capturing logged data from proximal equipment onto a form. A form creation application determines equipment in proximity to a portable computing device, receives a selection of a piece of equipment from a user, extracts logged data from the piece of equipment that is selected, determines a form with a structure to fill in with the logged data, parses the logged data and fills in at least one field in the form, generates graphical data for displaying the form to the user, provides the form to the user, receives input on the form from the user and stores the form and the input received on the form. | 09-11-2014 |
20140256262 | DEVICE DISCOVERY WITH PRIVACY SUPPORT - Systems, methods, and devices are directed to wireless proximate-based communications with privacy support. A first wireless communication device is configured to discover and wirelessly communicate with one or more proximately-located wireless devices. The first wireless communication device includes logic configured to generate a temporary transformed address and expiration time and to format the temporary transformed address and expiration time into a packet and a communications module configured to transmit the packet directly to the one or more proximately-located wireless devices during discovery. The first wireless communication device is capable of exchanging information directly with the one or more proximately-located wireless devices based on the transformed address, until the expiration time has lapsed. | 09-11-2014 |
20140256263 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING AND CATEGORIZING DISTRIBUTED DEVICES - Systems for identifying and categorizing distributed devices, e.g., lighting fixtures and thermostats, is disclosed. In an embodiment, a user ( | 09-11-2014 |
20140273844 | AUTOMATED PAIRING OF REMOTE DEVICES - In embodiments, apparatuses, methods and storage media are described that are associated with remote control of media devices. In embodiments, a remote control and a content player may be configured to facilitate a secured pairing process. The remote control may be configured to send non-secured signals (such as through an IR transmitter) as well as send and receive secured signals (such as via Bluetooth™ using an RF transceiver). The remote control, in response to being turned on or asked to pair, may send a pairing request to the player that includes an identifier for the remote control and which identifies the remote control as an eligible pairing device without requiring separate entry of a security code by a user. The remote control and player may then perform a pairing process without requiring additional action on the part of a user. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 09-18-2014 |
20140273845 | Method and Apparatus to Facilitate Pairing Between Wireless Devices - A method and apparatus to facilitate pairing between a first wireless device and a second wireless device includes a pairing apparatus for determining ( | 09-18-2014 |
20140273846 | Data Transmission Method and Data Transmission System - A data transmission method comprises steps of: implement a first operation at a first time to generate a first operation information by a first mobile communication apparatus; implementing a second operation at a second time to generate a second operation information by a second mobile communication apparatus; implementing an identification procedure according to the first time, the first information, the second time and the second information; and determining if a data of the first mobile communication apparatus is transmitted to the second mobile communication apparatus through a communication interface according to the result of the identification procedure. A data transmission system is also disclosed. By the data transmission method and system, the data transmission between the mobile communication apparatuses can be performed more intuitively and conveniently. | 09-18-2014 |
20140273847 | CONTEXT SENSITIVE MOBILE CONTROL IN A PROCESS PLANT - A mobile device for context-sensitive operation in a process control environment, and a system including such a device, includes a first circuit for acquiring information associated with a process entity in the process control environment. The mobile device also includes a processor, communicatively coupled to the first circuit, for identifying the process entity based on the acquired information. Further, the mobile device includes a network interface, communicatively connected to the processor, for receiving work item data associated with a process entity. The work item data indicates a target function associated with the process entity. The processor triggers an event to facilitate implementing the target function associated with the process entity in response to the proximity of the mobile device to the process entity and the work item data. | 09-18-2014 |
20140273848 | DATA-CAPABLE BAND MANAGEMENT IN AN INTEGRATED APPLICATION AND NETWORK COMMUNICATION DATA ENVIRONMENT - Techniques for data-capable band management in an integrated application and network communication data environment are described, including receiving input from one or more sensors coupled to a wearable computing device, processing the input to generate a control signal, the control signal being configured to initiate execution of one or more operations of a device in data communication with the wearable computing device, and initiating a data communication protocol, the data communication protocol being configured to transmit the control signal from the wearable computing device to the device. | 09-18-2014 |
20140273849 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal and controlling method thereof are disclosed, which facilitates a terminal to be used in further consideration of user's convenience. According to at least one of embodiments of the present disclosure, provided is a method of controlling an operation of a specific mobile terminal by forming a wireless communication group through a short range communication and then synthesizing analyses of motion patterns detected through mobile terminals belonging to the wireless communication group. Accordingly, in performing a function through a motion of each of a plurality of mobile terminals belonging to a single wireless communication group, the present disclosure activates a function more accurately and improving accessibility to the function activation, thereby enhancing user's convenience. | 09-18-2014 |
20140273850 | METHOD OF PROVIDING PROXIMITY SERVICE COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TERMINALS SUPPORTING PROXIMITY SERVICE COMMUNICATIONS - The present invention relates to a method of providing proximity service communication between terminals. In accordance with an embodiment, a first terminal makes connection to a second terminal with network assistance. The first terminal requests information required to search for the second terminal from a network management server. The network management server determines a communication mode for proximity service communication. The network management server transmits a request message requesting communication between the first terminal and the second terminal in the communication mode to the first and second terminals. In accordance with another embodiment, a first terminal may switch its proximity service communication technology for better QoS without network assistance. The first terminal monitors link status. If the link status is deteriorated, the first terminal requests a second terminal to change proximity service communication technology. The first and the second terminal switch their proximity service communication technologies. | 09-18-2014 |
20140273851 | NON-CONTACT VAD WITH AN ACCELEROMETER, ALGORITHMICALLY GROUPED MICROPHONE ARRAYS, AND MULTI-USE BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE VISOR AND HEADSET - Electronic hardware, software, wired and/or wireless network communications, Bluetooth systems, RF systems, self-powered wireless devices, signal processing, audio transducers, accelerometers, and consumer electronic (CE) devices for a wireless portable headset and a portable wireless speaker phone that the wireless portable headset docks with and communicates with are disclosed. The headset and speaker phone may wirelessly communicate with each other (e.g., Bluetooth radios or other) when docked, un-docked, or both. When docked, an internal rechargeable power source in the speaker phone may recharge another internal rechargeable power source in the headset (e.g., rechargeable Lithium-Ion type batteries). A USB connector or the like may be used to electrically communicate power between the internal rechargeable power sources and may communicate other signals, such as signals from one or more microphones to form a microphone array (e.g., when docked). Magnet(s) may be used to facilitate/retain docking of the headset with the speaker phone. | 09-18-2014 |
20140273852 | VIRTUALIZED PHYSICAL LAYER ADAPTED FOR EHF CONTACTLESS COMMUNICATION - A Physical Layer (PHY) of a host system of an electronic device may be implemented as a contactless PHY (cPHY) for extremely high frequency (EHF) contactless communication and the operation of EHF transmitters (TX), receivers (RX) and transceivers (EHF-XCVR) in an extremely high frequency integrated circuit (EHF IC) of the electronic device. The Host-cPHY translates logical communications requests from the Link Layer (LINK) into hardware-specific operations to affect transmission or reception of signals over an EHF contactless link. The Link Layer (LINK) may also be optimized as a contactless Link Layer (cLINK) for EHF contactless communication. A virtualized contactless Physical Layer (VcPHY) may comprise a contactless Physical Layer (Host-cPHY), and a contactless Link Layer (cLINK) for coupling a conventional Link Layer (LINK) with the contactless Physical Layer (Host-cPHY). Multiple data streams may be transported over the EHF contactless link over a range of frequencies. | 09-18-2014 |
20140273853 | Misalignment-Tolerant High-Density Multi-Transmitter/Receiver Modules For Extremely-High Frequency (EHF) Close-Proximity Wireless Connections - Docked devices communicate wirelessly and in close proximity using multiple transmitters of Extremely High-Frequency (EHF) signals of 30-300 GHz. The devices may not be precisely aligned when docked. Tolerance of misalignment is improved by adding barriers such as solid metal blocks or rows of metal-filled vias that have a spacing of less than one-quarter the EHF wavelength. The barriers reflect EHF radiation and prevent EHF radiation from penetrating the barrier. Barriers placed between adjacent transmitters and receivers block stray electromagnetic radiation from causing cross-talk. The barriers can be placed closer to the transmitters than to the receivers to allow for a wider area for reception, permitting a wider misalignment. EHF reflecting features such as ground planes spaced a quarter-wavelength apart may be added to an end of a substrate near a connecting edge to act as a barrier and reflect electromagnetic radiation back toward an intended receiver. | 09-18-2014 |
20140273854 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PEER-TO-PEER, PAIRED, AND SYNCHRONIZED NODES - The present disclosure provides for a method of pairing wireless devices as well as wireless devices employing the pairing methodology. The wireless devices each possess individual identifiers. The individual identifiers comprise a 64 bit number. Each device also possesses a number of selection indicator identifiers. The selection indicator identifier is a preferably a color comprising a 24 bit number. The individual identifier and selection indicator identifier are combined using a hash function to create a 32 bit hash group identification. A simultaneous holding of buttons on the wireless devices creates the pairing between the devices and stores the 32 bit hash group identification in the device's memory. When two unpaired devices sharing a group identification number are brought within a predetermined proximity to one another, the devices automatically pair. | 09-18-2014 |
20140273855 | COMMUNICATION CONNECTION METHOD IN BLUETOOTH DEVICE AND APPARATUS THERETO - A BLUETOOTH communication connection method of a host device communicating with an external device is provided. The method includes determining whether a device to be connected among scanned external devices comprises a predetermined profile based device, and transmitting, by the host device, predetermined identification information to a corresponding connected device when the device to be connected comprises the predetermined profile-based device. | 09-18-2014 |
20140273856 | EXTREMELY HIGH FREQUENCY SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF OPERATING THE SAME - Embodiments discussed herein refer to systems, methods, and circuits for establishing EHF contactless communications links. The EHF contactless communication link may serve as an alternative to conventional board-to-board and device-to-device connectors. The link may be a low-latency protocol-transparent communication link capable of supporting a range of data rates. The link may be established through a close proximity coupling between devices, each including at least one EHF communication unit. Each EHF unit involved in establishing an EHF communication link may progress through a series of steps before data can be transferred between the devices. These steps may be controlled by one or more state machines that are being implemented in each EHF communication unit. | 09-18-2014 |
20140273857 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO SECURE SHORT-RANGE PROXIMITY SIGNALS - A system for short-range communications includes a device and a server. The mobile device receives information via short range wireless signals, processes that information, and transmits information to the server. The server uses the information to verify that the information from the device is consistent with a device currently located in the location. Such verification may be done using cryptographic or signal processing techniques. | 09-18-2014 |
20140273858 | ADAPTIVE DATA TRANSFER USING BLUETOOTH - Biometric monitoring devices, including various technologies that may be implemented in such devices, are discussed herein. Additionally, techniques, systems, and apparatuses are discussed herein for utilizing two different Bluetooth communications interfaces, one that provides Bluetooth classic (base rate/enhanced data rate) communications functionality and one that provides Bluetooth low-energy communications functionality, in a common device. The techniques, systems, and apparatuses may elect to use a particular Bluetooth interface based on various criteria. | 09-18-2014 |
20140287684 | RESPONDER DEVICE BINDING IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - A wireless system ( | 09-25-2014 |
20140287685 | PORTABLE BRIDGE DEVICE - A portable bridge device and methods for transmitting application data from the portable bridge device to one or more local devices of varying types, platforms and operating systems are described. In one embodiment, the method comprises establishing communication channels between the portable bridge device and first and second local devices, determining a platform or operating system of the local devices, and formatting, based on the determined platform or operating system, application data and transmitting the formatted application data to a portable bridge device interface module of the local devices via the communication channels. The portable bridge device may also establish a long-range communication channel to a remote computing device, and may operate as a gateway to a remote source of applications or resources. Operation of locally connected devices with the portable bridge device is not impacted by a temporary loss of connectivity between the portable bridge device and remote sources. | 09-25-2014 |
20140287686 | PAIRING METHOD BETWEEN ELECTRONIC DEVICES INCLUDING COMMUNICATION FUNCTION AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE - Disclosed is a pairing method which pairs electronic devices. Each electronic device includes a communication unit to communicate data and a light receiving unit to detect receiving light amount. The method includes the following. The electronic devices are set to a pairing standby state. Light intensity on the light receiving units is changed under a same light receiving environment. Time series data of receiving light amount detected by the light receiving unit of a second electronic device is transmitted from the second electronic device to a first electronic device. The electronic devices are paired based on time series data of receiving light amount detected by the receiving light units. | 09-25-2014 |
20140287687 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING BLUETOOTH BONDING FOR PRE-PAIRING AND IMPERSONATION - Methods and systems are provided that allow Bluetooth bonding of machine-to-machine (M2M) devices to be remotely managed by a third party on behalf of a user. | 09-25-2014 |
20140287688 | ELECTRONIC DATA SHARING DEVICE AND METHOD OF USE - An electronic data sharing device for sharing user related information with users of other functionally similar electronic data sharing devices, the electronic data sharing device configured to: generate a temporary, non-unique, identification tag to identify the electronic data sharing device, transmit from the electronic data sharing device the generated identification tag via a wireless medium, receive at the electronic data sharing device a further identification tag generated by a further electronic data sharing device, and generate an alert on the electronic data sharing device when the transmission and reception of the identification tags coincide to indicate that the further electronic data sharing device is in the vicinity. | 09-25-2014 |
20140287689 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, there is provided information processing apparatus, including: a first communication module configured to perform a communication under a first communication scheme which corresponds to a proximity wireless communication requiring no authentication; a second communication module configured to perform a communication under a second communication scheme which has a communicable distance longer than that of the proximity wireless communication; and a communication controller configured to perform a control, after the first communication module has started a data transmission with another information processing apparatus under the first communication scheme, so as to change-over the first communication scheme to the second communication scheme and then perform the data transmission. | 09-25-2014 |
20140295758 | DOCKING STATION FOR A HANDHELD TELECOMMUNICATION DEVICE - A docking station ( | 10-02-2014 |
20140295759 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - Provided is a wireless communication apparatus wherein when a wireless communication having high directivity is performed together with another wireless communication apparatus, the user can clearly recognize a communicatable range of the wireless communication. In this apparatus, a periphery image capturing unit ( | 10-02-2014 |
20140295760 | TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONNECTION - A method for establishing a local wireless communication connection includes searching, by a first terminal, for a second terminal capable of establishing a local wireless communication connection with the first terminal; obtaining identification information from the second terminal; determining whether the identification information of the second terminal corresponds to information stored in the first terminal; obtaining user identification information corresponding to the second terminal if the identification information of the second terminal corresponds to the information stored in the first terminal; and displaying, on the first terminal, the user identification information of the second terminal for selection. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295761 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SECURE PAIRING OF BLUETOOTH DEVICES - A system of securely paired Bluetooth devices includes a host device and a peripheral device, where each device includes an audio interface and a Bluetooth transceiver. The host device and the peripheral device connect to each other by physically connecting their corresponding audio interfaces and communicate with each other by establishing an out-of-band audio communication channel via the connected audio interfaces. The host device and the peripheral device exchange Bluetooth authentication data via the out-of-band audio communication channel, and then are securely paired with each other by turning on and initializing the corresponding Bluetooth transceivers with the corresponding exchanged Bluetooth authentication data. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295762 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION IN ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND THE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method for connecting short-range communication in an electronic device, and the electronic device, in which an information exchange operation with an information server may be selectively performed are provided. The method includes detecting second identification information for identifying a service venue of a service provider from discovery information received from a first external device and connecting communication with the first external device by using network information of the first external device, which is stored in the electronic device, if the detected second identification information exists in the electronic device. Other embodiments are also possible. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295763 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SHARING DATA WITH AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method and apparatus for sharing data with another electronic device are provided. The apparatus includes a processor, and a memory for storing program instructions. The program instructions are configured to have the processor sense a tagging with the another electronic device; determine a service level of the another electronic device; identify shared data corresponding to the determined service level of the another electronic device; and transmit the identified shared data to the another electronic device. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295764 | MEDIA EXPOSURE LINKING UTILIZING BLUETOOTH SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS - A computer-implemented method for establishing media data exposure for a computer processing device, where media data received in the computer processing device. The computer processing device pairs itself with a plurality of portable computing devices using a Bluetooth connection when media data is received. A signal strength characteristic of the Bluetooth connection is established in the computer processing device for each of the paired plurality of portable computing devices. Each signal strength characteristic with the received media data is then established to determine which signal strength characteristic is the strongest when the media data was received in the computer processing device. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295765 | Method for Transmitting Data Between Terminals and Terminal - A method for transmitting data between terminals is provided. The method includes: a sending terminal determines data to transmit and a receiving terminal corresponding to a selected contact from an address book for receiving the data, if the sending terminal finds a radio frequency identifier of the receiving terminal, the data is transmitted via a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) Direct connection established between the sending terminal and the receiving terminal. | 10-02-2014 |
20140302783 | DETECTING INTERACTION AMONG ENTITIES VIA PROXIMITY - Approaches, techniques, and mechanisms are disclosed for determining interaction among animals via proximity relationships. An interaction between two or more animals may generally refer to any action by an animal that influences one or more other animals and that may be inferred based on a detected physical proximity relationship between the animals. According to various embodiments, proximity relationships between animals may be detected based on determining an approximate physical distance between computing devices associated with the animals. In other embodiments, proximity relationships between animals may be detected based on detecting the co-location of computing devices associated with the animals. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302784 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROXIMITY DISCOVERY FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A method, network node, and user equipments for providing parameters to a first user equipment served by the network element, the parameters describing at least a second user equipment for the purpose of the first user equipment initiating a device to device proximity discovery service with the second user equipment, the method collecting information for user equipments desiring device to device proximity discovery; creating a candidate user equipment list for a candidate tier based on the collected information at the network element, wherein each candidate tier comprises one or more thresholds based on timing advance values in use at the first or the at least the second user equipment; and providing the parameters describing at least a second user equipment to the first user equipment. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302785 | NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION DATA TRANSFER - A device includes a near field communication (NFC) module that stores data and a list of devices authorized to receive the data. A request for the data is received at the NFC module from a second device while the device is operating in a first mode. The data is transferred from the NFC module to the second device using NFC communications protocol based on a determination that the second device is an authorized device. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302786 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR AVOIDING REPLY STORMS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Method, apparatus, and computer program product example embodiments enable access to a wireless communications medium. In example embodiments, a method comprises receiving, by a first node, at least one of a wireless discovery response message or a wireless discovery announcement message; marking, by the first node, a receive time of the received at least one of the wireless discovery response message or the wireless discovery announcement message; and transmitting, by the first node, a wireless discovery query message including a value representing the marked receive time or an instant later than the receive time. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302787 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR SYNCHRONIZATION PACKET TRANSMITTER SELECTION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Method, apparatus, and computer program product example embodiments enable access to a wireless communications medium. In example embodiments, a method comprises determining, by a first wireless node, whether there are enough master nodes within range in a wireless communication network comprising a plurality of wireless nodes; and assuming, by the first wireless node, a role of a master node to participate in synchronization message contention in the wireless communication network, in response to determining that there are not enough master nodes within range. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302788 | SMARTPHONE PROXIMITY CARD EMULATION - Methods, systems, and computer program products are provided that enable a portable computing device to emulate a proximity card. A portable computing device is provided that includes an antenna, storage that stores an identification number, and a processor. The processor is configured to control modulation of the identification number onto a carrier signal received by the antenna from a proximity card reader device. In this manner, an applicable function may be enabled, and the portable computing device emulates a proximity card. The antenna may be specific to proximity card emulation, or may be shared with other portable computing device functions, such as wireless charging. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302789 | INTELLIGENT DATA NETWORK WITH POWER MANAGEMENT CAPABILITIES - In one embodiment, a method for implementing two-way communication between at least first and second devices comprises steps of (a1) during finite time periods following transmission of respective first messages from the first device to the second device, using the first device to listen for second messages transmitted from the second device to first device; and (a2) after each of the finite time periods following the transmission of the respective first messages from the first device to the second device, ceasing to use the first device to listen for second messages transmitted from the second device to the first device until after the first device transmits another first message to the second device. In another embodiment, a method for implementing two-way communication between at least first and second devices comprises steps of: (a1) during finite time periods following reception by the second device of respective first messages from the first device, using the second device to transmit second messages to the first device; and (a2) after each of the finite time periods following reception by the second device of respective first messages from the first device, ceasing to use the second device to transmit second messages to the first device until after the second device receives another first message from the first device. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302790 | CONTEXT RECOGNITION AND SOCIAL PROFILING USING MOBILE DEVICES - A method for using Bluetooth® information for inferring user context and computing sociability is presented. The method includes receiving wireless sensor data from wireless sensor communication for an electronic device. Information units are formed using the wireless sensor data. User context is inferred using the information units. An entropy metric is computed based on the inferred user context. Social profiling is created based on the entropy metric and one or more user context characteristics. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302791 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for supporting an application by Device to Device (D2D) communication in a wireless network includes acquiring range control information from an application upon selection of the application installed in the source device, controlling transmission power of a discovery signal for discovering a target device to conduct D2D communication, based on range control information defined for the selected application, and transmitting the discovery signal with the controlled transmission power. An apparatus includes a controller configured to acquire range control information from an application upon selection of the application installed in the source device, and control transmission power of a discovery signal for discovering a target device to conduct D2D communication, for the selected application based on range control information defined for the selected application, and a transmitter configured to transmit the discovery signal with the controlled transmission power. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302792 | RADIO SYSTEM WITH CONFIGURABLE LINKS - A system includes radio devices where radio links between the devices are configured by bringing the radio devices in close proximity for a few seconds. A proximity detector of a radio device detects the proximity of another radio device and an automatic registration process begins to configure a link between the devices. One-to-one or one-to-many links may be established. Links may be cancelled by repeating the process. The devices may include an indicator to indicate establishment of the link. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302793 | Method, device and system for transmitting wireless data - A method, device and system for transmitting wireless data are disclosed. In the present disclosure, a local mobile terminal not only may exchange information with a base station, but also may exchange information with other mobile terminals by using a short distance transmission system of the mobile terminals, and transmit, by combining Local Area Network (LAN) communication and Wide Area Network (WAN) communication are combined, data simultaneously via an LAN and a WAN. A target mobile terminal may also receive and send data via the LAN and the WAN. The present disclosure can implement multi-channel transmission of wireless data, thus relieving network load greatly and improving the efficiency of data transmission. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302794 | CLOSE PROXIMITY BASED EVENT TRIGGERING - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus, a computer program product and a method is provided for device and/or user identification. The example embodiment comprises receiving, at an apparatus, a wireless signal comprising at least one of an address or an indication identifying a wireless communication device initiating the wireless signal, transmitting a query to a remote network entity, the query including at least one of the received address or indication identifying the wireless communication device and an indication associated with identity of the apparatus, and receiving a response to the query including information relating to identity of the wireless communication device if an association exists between the apparatus and the wireless communication device. | 10-09-2014 |
20140308897 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROVIDING DEVICE, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION TO MOBILE TERMINAL - Downlink is achieved by point-to-multipoint communication. There is provided a radio communication system | 10-16-2014 |
20140315489 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING WIRELESS DISPLAY SHARING, AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUS AND ASSOCIATED COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method and apparatus for performing wireless display sharing and an associated computer program product are provided, where the method is applied to an electronic device. The method includes the steps of: performing device detection by using a proximity sensing module of the electronic device to associate the electronic device with another electronic device to form a group, wherein the group may include a plurality of electronic devices such as the electronic device and the other electronic device; providing a user of the electronic device with a user interface to allow the user to select a specific digital data display arrangement type of a plurality of digital data display arrangement types for the electronic device; and obtaining data corresponding to the specific digital data display arrangement type and utilizing a display module of the electronic device to display the data. | 10-23-2014 |
20140315490 | Enhancing efficiency of communication terminals using radio communication - The proposed embodiment provides a method and system for enhancing efficiency of a communication terminal. The method includes configuring short-range communication and long-range communication in the communication terminal, receiving parameters associated with a node in a communication network, and switching among the short-range communication and the long-range communication within a data session based on the received parameters. | 10-23-2014 |
20140315491 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR POWER-EFFICIENT DATA TRANSFER - Some embodiments herein include at least one of systems, methods, and devices for power-efficient data transfer between two communicating devices. The two devices establish two wireless links between each other; the first link using a low-power/low-throughput protocol and utilized to maintain a second link, the second link using a high-power/high-throughput protocol. When first device data is available for transmission, the first device instructs the second device via the first link to switch to the second link for data reception. The first device then transmits data to the second device via the second link. When the transmission is complete, both devices switch back to using the first link to maintain their connection to each other. In some embodiments, the first device may be a Human Interface device and the second device may be a Bluetooth controller of a computing device. | 10-23-2014 |
20140315492 | CONTENT DELIVERY TO A SECONDARY DEVICE VIA A PRIMARY DEVICE - Systems, methods and apparatus are disclosed for providing secondary content to a secondary device from a primary device. The secondary content is content that is related to primary content being provided to the primary device, and that is to be executed and rendered at the secondary device. The primary device is paired with the secondary device. This pairing includes establishing a connection between the primary device and the secondary device. The primary device and the secondary device can then negotiate establishment of secondary content delivery session between the primary device and secondary device. When the secondary content delivery session is established between the primary device and the secondary device, the primary device can communicate the secondary content to the secondary device. | 10-23-2014 |
20140315493 | Information Processing Apparatus, Computer-Readable Storage Medium Having Information Processing Program Stored Therein, Information Processing Method, And Information Processing System - A search for another information processing apparatus and an access point is performed. When a result of the search is the other portable information processing apparatus, a process of performing data communication with the other information processing apparatus is performed. On the other hand, when the result of the search is the access point, a process of performing data communication via the access point is performed. | 10-23-2014 |
20140315494 | PROXY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN BAN ENVIRONMENT AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed is a control method of a communication system including at least one sensor that a user wears, a wireless communication apparatus and a coordinator. The control method of the communication system includes: in the coordinator, receiving a proxy authority request for proxy with respect to the at least one sensor and the coordinator from the wireless communication apparatus, and granting the proxy authority to the wireless communication apparatus; in the wireless communication apparatus, creating a user identifier corresponding to the user; in the wireless communication apparatus, searching for the at least one sensor that the user wears, and forming a pairing with the at least one found sensor; in the wireless communication apparatus, making a request to the at least one found sensor for association information for the association with the coordinator and the sensor, and receiving the association information; in the wireless communication apparatus, making a request to the coordinator for association proxy for an association between the at least one found sensor and the coordinator, and receiving the association proxy in response to the request; and in the coordinator, requesting data by forming an association with the at least one found sensor, and receiving data corresponding to the data request. | 10-23-2014 |
20140323046 | ANTENNA, TRANSMITTER DEVICE, RECEIVER DEVICE, THREE-DIMENSIONAL INTEGRATED CIRCUIT, AND CONTACTLESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system including a device with a first chip and a device with a second chip, to realize contactless communication therebetween. The first chip includes a transmitter circuit converting parallel data into a differential signal and a transmitting antenna transmitting the signal to the second chip. The second chip includes a receiving antenna receiving the differential signal from the transmitting antenna and a receiver circuit converting the differential signal into the parallel data. The transmitting and receiving antenna each include at least two antenna elements, first and second terminals, and first and second junctions. The antenna elements consist of wiring lines on the chips. The terminals are connected with circuits on the chips. At the first junction, first ends of the antenna elements meet to connect to the first terminal. At the second junction, second ends of the antenna elements meet to connect to the second terminal. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323047 | Communication System With At Least Two Mobile Parts - A communication system includes at least two mobile parts ( | 10-30-2014 |
20140323048 | COMMUNICATION SERVICE IN COMMUNICATION MODES - Disclosed herein are a method and apparatus for establishing communication between a plurality of devices. A first advertising packet comprising an identifier of the first electronic device is broadcast to at least one other device in a first radio communication mode. At least one responding advertising packet request is received from the at least one other device. A communication link in a second radio communication mode is established with a device from which a responding advertising packet was received. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323049 | WIRELESS CONNECTION METHOD, MACHINE-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE USING OUT-OF BAND CHANNEL - A wireless connection method between a plurality of electronic devices using an out of band channel is provided. The wireless connection method includes receiving a first hash value through the out of band channel, receiving device identification information of electronic devices in proximity to an electronic device through a main wireless channel, calculating hash values of the device identification information, and performing a wireless connection of the electronic device with a surrounding electronic device that has the hash value identical to the first hash value among the calculated hash values. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323050 | SYSTEM FOR MONITORING AND CONTROLLING THE POWER OF A RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) SIGNAL IN A SHORT-RANGE RF TRANSMITTER - A system for monitoring and controlling the power of a Radio Frequency (RF) signal in a short-range RF transmitter. An RF signal-generation unit generates the RF signal. A power amplifier amplifies the RF signal. An impedance-matching network matches the output impedance of the power amplifier to input impedance of an antenna. One or more RF power monitors monitor the voltage amplitude of the RF signal at the output of at least one of the RF signal-generation unit, the power amplifier and the impedance-matching network. The one or more RF power monitors further generate at least one alarm signal, based on the voltage amplitude of the RF signal. A control unit modifies at least one operating parameter of at least one of the RF signal-generation unit and the power amplifier, based on the at least one alarm signal generated by the one or more RF power monitors. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323051 | DETECTING A COMMUNICATION TAP VIA SIGNAL MONITORING - Using a Bluetooth communication channel for point of sale processing simulates a near field communication connection. A contactless device and the point of sale reader establish an unsecure communication channel. The user taps the contactless device with a point of sale terminal reader. The contactless device creates receive signal strength indicator (“RSSI”) value spikes. The terminal reader measures the RSSI values and transmits them to the contactless device, which determines if the RSSI value reaches or exceeds a threshold configured for the contactless device. If the threshold is reached, the terminal reader and the contactless device establish a secure communication connection. The devices communicate via the secure communication connection, and the connection is terminated when a request to terminate is received. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323052 | NETWORK UPDATES OF TIME AND LOCATION - Methods and systems utilize a shake and transfer process to initiate a wireless communication and provide a user device with time and location information of the communication, which can be associated with contact information of a user of the other device. As a result, a user has additional information associated with a contact, and the time and location information can be used to determine or track elapsed time and distance traveled between communications. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323053 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PORTABLE TERMINAL, COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM, AND SERVER - A proximity wireless power supply unit ( | 10-30-2014 |
20140329465 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNAL STRENGTH BASED CONNECTION PARAMETERS ADJUSTMENT - A method, apparatus and computer program product are disclosed to allow for proximity detection in a manner that advantageously balances power consumption and latency. In the context of a method, the presence of a communication device is detected and a wireless link is caused to be established to provide a connection, such as a session description protocol (SDP) connection, with the communication device. The method may also detect the proximity of the communication device based upon signal strength of one or more signals communicated via the established wireless link. The method may also adjust one or more connection parameters of the established wireless link based at least upon the signal strength of the one or more signals communicated via the link. A corresponding apparatus and computer program product are also disclosed. | 11-06-2014 |
20140329466 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS WITH THE FUNCTION OF SWITCHING BETWEEN WIRED AND WIRELESS CONNECTION - An electronic apparatus with the function of switching between a wired and wireless connection is disclosed. The electronic apparatus includes an electronic apparatus body, a wireless module and a charging battery. When the electronic apparatus is connected to a host from a plug connection part in a wired way, the electronic apparatus proceeds data communication with host in a wired way, or when the electronic apparatus is connected to the host wirelessly, the electronic apparatus proceeds data communication with host through the wireless module wirelessly. Moreover, through a software setting, a user may switch the function of the wire and wireless either by an auto-determination from a microcontroller of the electronic apparatus, or a mechanical switch. | 11-06-2014 |
20140329467 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS CAPABLE POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT AND TECHNIQUES FOR COMMUNICATING THEREWITH - Methods, systems, and devices for wireless communication between a PDU and one or more devices within a limited communications range are described. A power distribution unit may be provided with a wireless communications module that may operate to communicate with user devices within a relatively close proximity. The wireless communications module may provide information reporting and may, in some examples, provide a user of the user device with configuration and other command capabilities. | 11-06-2014 |
20140335787 | SHORT RANGE WIRELESS FILE SHARING - In one embodiment, for example, a method of short range wireless peer-to-peer file sharing is provided. The method includes establishing a short range wireless communications link between a local computing device and a peer computing device and transmitting to the peer computing device over the short range wireless communications link a consolidated catalog of accessible files stored locally in the local computing device, remotely in a remote computing device, or both. The method further includes receiving from over the short range wireless communications link a request by the peer computing device to retrieve a selected one of the files. The method includes responding to a determination that the selected one of the files is stored remotely in the remote computing device by facilitating the retrieval by the peer computing device of the selected one of the files from the remote computing device for delivery to the peer computing device. | 11-13-2014 |
20140335788 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION OF FOOD - A method for the transmission of process data between different devices that are involved in a process for the production of food, in particular devices involved in a filling line, wherein the data communication between two devices takes place exclusively between at least one transmitter of a first device and at least one receiver of a second device, and/or between at least one transmitter of the second device and at least one receiver of the first device. | 11-13-2014 |
20140335789 | DEVICE PAIRING VIA DEVICE TO DEVICE CONTACT - A system may include and/or involve a first device, a second device, and logic to effect pairing of the first and second devices upon detection of physical contact between the devices. | 11-13-2014 |
20140335790 | METHOD, WIRELESS DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM TO GUIDE A USER OF A WIRELESS DEVICE TO ESTABLISH AN OPTIMAL WIRELESS DIRECT LINK TO ANOTHER WIRELESS DEVICE - A system, method and protocol for guiding a user to establish an optimal wireless link. The method provides a first device ( | 11-13-2014 |
20140335791 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROVIDING A PROXIMITY SERVICE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and device for providing a proximity service. According to one embodiment of the present invention, the method for providing a proximity service (ProSe) for user equipment in a wireless communication system may include: transmitting ProSe capability related information on the user equipment to a network node; receiving information on the provision of a ProSe related network from the network node; determining the ProSe usage of the user equipment based on the ProSe capability related information on the user equipment and/or the received information on the provision of a ProSe related network; and transmitting the determination result of the ProSe usage of the user equipment to the network node. | 11-13-2014 |
20140335792 | APPLICATION BASED CONNECTIVITY EVENT TRIGGERING - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus, a computer program product and a method is provided for application based connectivity event triggering. The example embodiment comprises determining, at an apparatus, whether an active application satisfies predefined criteria for connectivity event, and triggering a radio module at the apparatus to enter into a device discovery mode for transmitting device discovery messages in response to determining that the apparatus is actively operating an application satisfying the predefined criteria for connectivity event. | 11-13-2014 |
20140335793 | System And Method For Reducing Signal Interference Between Bluetooth and WLAN Communications - Methods and systems are disclosed for reducing signal interference between Bluetooth (BT) and WLAN (e.g. WiFi) communications in an information handling system. The WLAN receiver has configurable front-end filter circuitry. Based upon information concerning the BT frequency region for current BT communications, the WLAN receiver can adjust or set its configurable front-end filter circuitry to filter out the BT communications. As the BT communications hop from frequency to frequency, the WLAN receiver can continue to adjust its configurable front-end filter circuitry accordingly. Example implementations for the configurable front-end filter circuitry include bandpass filters and selectable low pass and high pass filters. These filters are selected and/or tuned such that BT frequency regions are filtered from the WLAN input signal before further WLAN signal processing is conducted, thereby improving the performance of simultaneous BT and WLAN communications. | 11-13-2014 |
20140342667 | Enhancing the Security of Short-Range Communication in Connection with an Access Control Device - An apparatus for enhancing the security of short-range communication in connection with an access control device may be provided. The system includes a mobile device and an application executing thereon. The application is configured to store a user-defined authentication for permitting short-range communication with the associated access control device and configured to control access to a secure location. The authentication is related to an action of an end user of the mobile device. The application is configured to determine when the devices are in proximity to one another, detect a movement of a user of the mobile device, and permit short-range communication between the devices when the devices are in proximity to one another and the detected movement is substantially similar to the defined authentication. The permitted short-range communication is related to information for permitting the user to access the secure location. | 11-20-2014 |
20140342668 | SMART PHONE CASE - Systems and methods that facilitate communication between a smart device and a vehicle are discussed. One such system can include a smart device case that can house the smart device and can include a receptacle. The system can also include a key fob associated with the vehicle that can couple with the receptacle and can establish a communications link with the smart device. Additionally, the system can include mobile application software that can translate one or more user inputs received via the smart phones into a command. The mobile application software can transmit the command to the key fob via the communications link, and the key fob can relays the command to the vehicle in order to control at least one system of the vehicle. | 11-20-2014 |
20140342669 | DOCKING STATION FOR SMARTPHONE - A dock for connecting a smartphone to a display and peripherals is disclosed. The dock uses a single connector to transfer audio/video data to a display and input-output data and to establish a wireless link with peripherals. The dock has a controller with a switch, a wireless communication module, a USB hub, a relay, a first connector, an audio/video (AV) converter and a second connector. The relay normally connects AV data from the smartphone to the AV converter. The controller switches the relay while the switch is being operated, and then the controller links the USB hub, the first connector and the wireless communication module, and the wireless communication module establishes the wireless link with the smartphone. | 11-20-2014 |
20140342670 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND DEVICE - A communication method used by a first device that communicates with a second device is provided. The method includes detecting an occurrence of a predetermined event related to a device scan, scanning the second device that provides identifier information and capability information, establishing a first communication link with the scanned second device by using a first communication method, determining a second communication method for communicating data with the second device via the first communication link, and establishing a second communication link with the second device by using the determined second communication method. | 11-20-2014 |
20140349576 | BLUETOOTH DATA/CONTROL MESSAGE TRANSMISSION MODULE, INTERACTION SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - A Bluetooth data/control message transmission module, an interaction device and a method thereof are provided in the present invention. The Bluetooth data/control message transmission module connects to a mobile device with Bluetooth. The Bluetooth data/control message transmission module includes a process unit, a modulation module and a Bluetooth module. The process unit is for providing a digital data. The modulation module receives the digital data and modulates the digital data with a analog carrier signal to generate a modulation signal whose frequency is lower than 8 KHz. The Bluetooth module uses a headset profile to link with the mobile device, wherein the mobile device serves the Bluetooth module as a headset. The Bluetooth module samples the modulation signal, to serve the sampled modulation signal as a voice signal to send to the mobile device through the Bluetooth protocol. | 11-27-2014 |
20140349577 | Communication Device and Non-Transitory Computer-Readable Recording Medium - A communication device may include an NFC interface configured to perform communication by using a NFC system and a controller. The controller may include a processor and a memory storing computer-readable instructions therein. The computer-readable instructions may instruct the communication device to determine whether a state is a first state, set an operation mode to a CE mode when it is determined that the state is the first state, transmit data to one external device when the operation mode is set to the CE mode when the state of the device is the first state. Additionally or alternatively, the communication device may further be caused to set the operation mode to a first mode when it is determined that the state is not the first state, and communicate communication target data with another external device when the operation mode is set in a specified mode. | 11-27-2014 |
20140349578 | WIRELESS DOCKING ARCHITECTURE - In one example, a method includes performing, by a wireless dockee (WD), a plurality of operations to wirelessly dock with a wireless docking center (WDC) such that the WD may access one or more peripheral functions (PFs) associated with the WDC. In this example, the WD includes a docking service, an application service platform (ASP), and one or more peripheral services that each correspond to at least one PF of the one or more PFs associated with the WDC. In this example, the method also includes interfacing, by the docking service and with the ASP, to perform a first subset of the plurality of operations, and interfacing, by the docking service and with the one or more peripheral services, to perform a second subset of the plurality of operations. | 11-27-2014 |
20140349579 | Method, Device, and System for Establishing Device-To-Device Connection - The present invention discloses a method, a device, and a system for establishing a device-to-device connection and relates to the field of communications technologies. The method includes sending, by a first device in D2D communication, a D2D authentication request to an MME that serves the first device, so as to trigger the MME to authenticate the first device. The first device receives a D2D authentication response message transferred by the MME by using an eNB and enables, according to the D2D authentication response message, D2D monitoring and broadcasting functions. When the first device detects a second device in the D2D communication, the first device sends a connection establishment request message to the eNB, so as to trigger the eNB to establish a D2D communication link between the first device and the second device. | 11-27-2014 |
20140349580 | Data Transmission Method and Device - The embodiments of the present disclosure disclose a data transmission method, including: receiving, by a data transmission device, a user gesture; and, when the user gesture is the same as a preset data transmission action, transmitting, by the data transmission device, data to be transmitted to a receiving device. The embodiments of the present disclosure also disclose a data transmission device. By using the method and the device in the embodiments of the present disclosure, data transmission can be implemented conveniently and quickly, which is convenient for users to use and improves user experience. | 11-27-2014 |
20140357192 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONNECTIONLESS PROXIMITY DETERMINATION - A method of determining proximity of Bluetooth/Bluetooth Low Energy (BT/BLE) devices, in a connectionless session includes executing a contiguity profile at a first device, the contiguity profile providing for connectionless proximity determination. The method further includes determining a proximity of a second device using Bluetooth/Bluetooth Low Energy (BT/BLE) protocol without establishing a Bluetooth/Bluetooth Low Energy (BT/BLE) connection to the second device. | 12-04-2014 |
20140357193 | DSRC LISTEN MODE FOR WI-FI USING DSRC SPECTRUM - Methods, systems, and devices are described for detecting dedicated short range communications (DSRC) transmissions to determine whether to use at least a portion of the DSRC spectrum. In one embodiment, a multi-mode device may be operated outside of the DSRC spectrum using a first clock rate, and may then be switched to a second clock rate while operating outside of the DSRC spectrum to detect DSRC transmissions using the DSRC spectrum. | 12-04-2014 |
20140357194 | Interference Reduction using Signal Quality - Techniques are described for interference reduction using, e.g., a Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) or packet error rate threshold. UEs that implement these techniques may reduce interference among personal area network enabled devices, for example, with the added benefit of reducing power consumption by reduced RF transmissions. By reducing interference, the performance of personal area network devices may be improved. | 12-04-2014 |
20140364060 | Ordering a List of Wireless Devices for Display in a Graphical User Interface - This document describes, inter alia, techniques for use at a wireless device for establishing communications with other devices, and for displaying related information in a graphical user interface. The wireless device may discover, pair with, and/or connect to other wireless devices, and may display a list of information regarding the other wireless devices in a graphical user interface. The wireless device may order the list based on factors such as: the connectivity status of the other devices (e.g., whether the other devices are connected, paired, or discovered); the types of the other wireless devices (e.g., whether the devices are human interface devices (HIDs), audio devices, phones, imaging devices, computers, or other types of devices); whether device names for the other wireless devices are known/unknown; and/or other factors. The features described herein may be implemented using Bluetooth wireless technology, and/or any other wireless technology. | 12-11-2014 |
20140364061 | WIRELESS TRANSMISSION APPARATUS WITH BLUETOOTH AND SHORT DISTANCE COMMUNICATION - A wireless transmission apparatus with Bluetooth and short distance communication includes a processing unit, a Bluetooth communication side interface unit, a Bluetooth communication unit, a short distance communication side interface unit, and a short distance communication unit. The processing unit is configured to control the Bluetooth communication unit through the Bluetooth communication side interface unit to transmit information in the Bluetooth communication unit to the processing unit and the short distance communication unit. The processing unit is configured to control the short distance communication unit through the short distance communication side interface unit to transmit information in the short distance communication unit to the processing unit and the Bluetooth communication unit. | 12-11-2014 |
20140364062 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SPECIFICATION METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - Disclosed is a communication system including a plurality of communication terminals having their own position information and performing communication between the communication terminals, wherein one communication terminal determines a specific direction, and specifies a target communication terminal which is to be a communication target with its own terminal, based on the determined direction and position information from the other communication terminals. | 12-11-2014 |
20140364063 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA USING SELECTED TRANSMISSION TECHNOLOGY FROM AMONG OTHER TRANSMISSION TECHNOLOGIES - This disclosure describes systems and methods for selecting from among two or more wireless transmission technologies depending on one or more factors. Aspects of this disclosure may apply to various computer systems that use Bluetooth technologies for transmitting and receiving data between two devices. In particular, aspects of this disclosure may be used in a gaming environment such that data is transmitted based on any of the shared capabilities of the devices, the type of data, the amount of the data, latency constraints associated with the data, and other considerations. | 12-11-2014 |
20140370807 | COMMUNICATING WIRELESS PAIRING INFORMATION FOR PAIRING AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE TO A HOST SYSTEM - During a pairing procedure between an electronic device and a host system, the host system may output audiovisual data that communicates wireless pairing information. The electronic device may detect the audiovisual data and determine the wireless pairing information by processing the audiovisual data that it detects. The wireless pairing information may facilitate pairing the electronic device to the host system in accordance with the short-range wireless communication protocol. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370808 | NEGATIVE ION WIRELESS ACCESSORY - A negative ion wireless accessory. The negative ion wireless accessory includes an anion emitting ornament. The negative ion wireless accessory also includes an auxiliary device attached to the anion emitting ornament and configured to establish a wireless connection to communicate with an external device. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370809 | INTER-FRAME SPACING ADAPTATION FOR YIELDING TO DSRC OPERATION - Methods, systems, and devices are described for adapting access timing parameters when using DSRC spectrum. A multi-mode device may adapt at least one access timing parameter while operating within the DSRC spectrum. The at least one access timing parameter may be adapted to provide priority to transmissions of DSRC devices using the DSRC spectrum. The multi-mode device may increase a duration of a short inter-frame spacing (SIFS) to be at least equal to a duration of a SIFS used by a DSRC device. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370810 | VICINITY-BASED UNDOCKING FOR A WIRELESS DOCKING APPLICATION - This disclosure describes wireless communication techniques, protocols, methods, and devices applicable to a docking system environment in which aspects of wireless docking may function using vicinity-based undocking techniques. In some examples, the techniques of this disclosure enable a wireless docking center to undock a wireless dockee in a situation where a wireless dockee moves out of the vicinity of a wireless docking center so as to prevent malicious users from using peripheral devices available through the wireless docking center to interact with the wireless dockee without the wireless dockee user's knowledge. In other examples, the wireless dockee may undock itself from a wireless docking center when the wireless dockee moves out of the vicinity of a wireless docking center. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370811 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CONTENT IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - A method and an apparatus for transmitting content in a portable terminal are provided. The method includes searching for devices, to each of which content is to be transmitted, by a first communication module, and displaying information indicating devices discovered as a result of the search; determining, when a particular portable terminal to which the content is to be transmitted is selected among the displayed information, whether the selected particular portable terminal is currently performing a communication connection with another portable terminal; requesting and receiving, through a second communication module, in response to determining that the particular portable terminal is currently performing the communication connection with the another portable terminal, an address of a device matched to a selected transmission method; and making a communication connection with the particular portable terminal; transmitting the content to the particular portable terminal, through a third communication module matched to the selected transmission method. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370812 | ENHANCED WIRELESS HANDSET, INCLUDING DIRECT HANDSET-TO-HANDSET COMMUNICATION MODE - A wireless handset is provided with enhanced features and capabilities. The wireless handset may be embodied as a full-featured handset that is capable of operating either within a wireless network (such as a cellular or PCS network) or in a direct handset-to-handset communication mode that is independent of the wireless network. Alternatively, the wireless handset may be embodied as a special purpose handset, that is capable of simply operating in a direct handset-to-handset communication mode. The wireless handset may additionally include features for supporting and enhancing direct communication between handsets. Such features may include a find feature that permits a user to determine which objects, including other wireless handset users, are located within a predetermined operating range of the wireless handset. A memorize feature may also be provided to permit handsets and other objects exchange information by wireless transmission. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370813 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN A MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE AND AN AUXILIARY SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a system and method for facilitating short-range wireless communications between a mobile wireless device and an auxiliary device. The wireless device includes a short-range transceiver for communicating with an auxiliary device; a signal module for providing a mode control signal; and, a control module for controllably shifting a short-range transceiver between a power saver mode and a search mode based on the mode control signal received from the signal module. When in the search mode, the short-range transceiver is operable to search for the auxiliary device to communicate therewith. When in a power saver mode, the short-range transceiver is not operable to search for the auxiliary device. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370814 | CONNECTING WIRELESS DEVICES - The present invention provides a method and system for connecting wireless devices by receiving from a user's wireless device an environmental sound of the environment where the user is located. The method also includes obtaining a list of other wireless devices that are in the same environment as the user, according to the environmental sound and sending the list of wireless devices to the user for the user to select from the list of wireless devices one or more wireless devices for connecting. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370815 | Methods and Apparatus for Lost Connection Handling - A computer-implemented method, executable by a vehicle computing system (VCS), includes determining that a connection between a wireless device and a VCS has been lost. The method further includes determining if a driver is present in the vehicle, upon a lost link detection. The method additionally includes waiting until an enter-event occurs and then attempting to re-establish a connection between the wireless device and the VCS. This last step may be conditional upon a determination that a driver is not present. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370816 | PROXIMITY-RELATED DEVICE DETERMINATIONS - In general, one aspect of the subject matter described herein can be embodied in methods that include the actions of: for each of a plurality of devices, perceiving, in relation to the device, one or more proximate devices, generating a record of the perception of the one or more proximate devices, receiving, from at least one of the one or more proximate devices, one or more records of respective prior perceptions of one or more devices in relation to the at least one of the one or more proximate devices, and providing, to another device that is not among the one or more proximate devices, (a) the record of the perception of the one or more proximate devices and (b) the one or more records of respective prior perceptions. | 12-18-2014 |
20140378054 | OPPORTUNISTIC USE OF THE DSRC SPECTRUM - Methods, systems, and devices are described for opportunistically using at least a portion of a dedicated short range communications (DSRC) spectrum. A multi-mode device is operated outside of the DSRC spectrum. An activity level is detected on at least a portion of the DSRC spectrum, and it is determined whether to use at least the portion of the DSRC spectrum based at least in part on the detected activity level. | 12-25-2014 |
20140378055 | PAIRING A WIRELESS DEVICES WITHIN A VEHICLE - A system and a method for establishing short range wireless communication between two vehicle modules. The system determines the availability of a first vehicle module and a second vehicle module to establish a short range wireless communication connection. The determination may be based upon whether the first vehicle module is storing pairing data. The system validates the pairing data at the second vehicle module using a wired connection. If the pairing data is validated, the first and second vehicle modules may establish a wireless connection using at least a portion of the pairing data. When the wireless connection ends, the system may re-determine the availability and revalidate any pairing data via the wired connection before establishing a wireless connection. | 12-25-2014 |
20140378056 | LOW ENERGY WIRELESS PROXIMITY PAIRING - A method of pairing devices includes causing a Bluetooth-enabled host device and a Bluetooth-enabled peripheral device to be located proximate to each other, the Bluetooth-enabled host device comprising at least a processor, a memory and an antenna, in the Bluetooth-enabled host device, detecting advertising packets broadcast by the Bluetooth-enabled peripheral device on one or more of a plurality of advertising channels, saving a numeric indicator of each of multiple detected advertising packets, determining an average numeric indicator from the saved numeric indicators of each of the separately detected advertising packets, if the average numeric indicator exceeds a proximity threshold, determining whether a set of conditions are met, and initiating a Bluetooth device pairing sequence between the Bluetooth-enabled host device and the Bluetooth-enabled peripheral device if the set of conditions are met. | 12-25-2014 |
20140378057 | LOW ENERGY BLUETOOTH SYSTEM WITH AUTHENTICATION DURING CONNECTIONLESS ADVERTISING AND BROADCASTING - Validation information is communicated in a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) connected session. Validation data is generated using said validation information. An advertisement string is broadcast from the BLE device in a connectionless session along with said validation data. | 12-25-2014 |
20140378058 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHODS AND DEVICES - Methods, devices and apparatus are disclosed, including a method of establishing a wireless connection with a device, the method including transmitting at least one Bluetooth advertising message on at least one Bluetooth channel, receiving a Bluetooth message indicating a connection request from the device, sending a Bluetooth message indicating at least one of a physical channel and an address to the device, and establishing the wireless connection with the device using the at least one of the address and the physical channel, wherein the wireless connection uses a different wireless technology to Bluetooth. Also disclosed is a method of establishing a wireless connection with a device, the method including receiving a Bluetooth advertising message from the device, sending a Bluetooth message indicating a connection request to the device, receiving a Bluetooth message indicating at least one of an address of the device and a physical channel, and establishing the wireless connection with the device using the at least one of the address and the physical channel, wherein the wireless connection uses a wireless technology different to Bluetooth. | 12-25-2014 |
20140378059 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus having a first communication function of periodically transmitting a predetermined signal and communicating with another apparatus and a second communication function of communicating with another apparatus by producing an electric field or magnetic field determines whether a partner apparatus exists in a communicable range of the second communication function, and controls the first communication function to stop transmission of the predetermined signal in the case where it is determined that the partner apparatus exists in the communicable range. | 12-25-2014 |
20140378060 | MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE COORDINATION SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROVIDING APPARATUS, MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE, AND PROGRAM FOR MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A mobile electronic device coordination system includes a vehicle-mounted information providing apparatus and a mobile electronic device. The information providing apparatus and the mobile electronic device are each configured to perform both first type communication and second type communication different from the first type communication. The information providing apparatus acquires unique information from the mobile electronic device via the first type communication through which a communication connection with the mobile electronic device has been established, the unique information being necessary for individual identification of the mobile electronic device for establishing a communication connection with the mobile electronic device via the second type communication. Then, the information providing apparatus establishes a communication connection with the mobile electronic device via the second type communication on the basis of the acquired specific information. | 12-25-2014 |
20140378061 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REMOTE CONTROL OF AN ACTUATOR FOR MOBILE EQUIPMENT IN A BUILDING - The present invention relates to an operating method for a communication device (DC) for remote control of an actuator (ACT) for a piece of mobile equipment (ME) in a building, comprising the steps consisting of: analysing a first received signal (RS) to determine if at least one sequence of the first received signal (RS) can be interpreted as being in accordance with a configuration communication mode which can be used by the communication device (DC); on receipt of at least one sequence of the first received signal which is in accordance with a configuration mode, defining said configuration communication mode (MCi) as the identified configuration communication mode; defining an operational communication mode (MUO) on the basis of the identified configuration communication mode (MCi); receiving a second signal (RS | 12-25-2014 |
20140378062 | Provisioning User Attributes for use with Mobile Computing Device - A mobile computing device hosts an operating system and mobile applications. A provisioning application communicates with a secure element and near field communication (NFC) subsystem. It causes display of an interface for users to enter personal attributes for storage in the secure element. Users discriminately select items from their personal attributes for transmission to a third party recipient so only attributes relative to the third party are sent. Software, interfaces, methods, and apparatus typify the embodiments. | 12-25-2014 |
20150011163 | Apparatus and Method Using Radio Station Mapping - An apparatus including a receiver configured to receive wireless radio station broadcast signals; and a controller including at least one processor, and at least one memory including computer code. The controller is configured with use of the computer code to change a reception frequency of the receiver from a first broadcast radio station transmitting on a first frequency to a second broadcast radio station transmitting on a second different frequency based, at least partially, on location of the apparatus relative to coverage areas of the broadcast radio stations, and at least one substantially common entertainment content attribute of the signals from the first and second broadcast radio stations. | 01-08-2015 |
20150011164 | WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM AND WIRELESS NETWORK EXPANSION METHOD APPLIED THERETO - A wireless control system and a wireless network expansion method applied thereto are provided. The wireless control system comprises a mobile platform and a plurality of wireless devices capable of switching between a first role and a second role. The wireless network expansion method comprises following steps. A mobile platform is turned on. The mobile platforms scans the wireless devices and links to any wireless device serving the first role and then sends a control command to corresponding wireless device, which accordingly broadcasts the control command. The control command is received by at least one wireless device serving the second role. The wireless devices cyclically switch between the first role and the second role to continuously broadcast the control command to other wireless devices serving the second role, so that all of the wireless devices can finally receive the control command from the mobile platform. | 01-08-2015 |
20150011165 | PORTABLE INFORMATION TERMINAL DEVICE HOLDER AND CONTROLLER FOR PORTABLE INFORMATION TERMINAL DEVICE - The Invention is a supporting holder for portable information terminal device and controller for installation of information terminal device without the limitation of size, which is compact and easily portable. The holder of this invention has the Holder ( | 01-08-2015 |
20150011166 | INFORMATION-GATHERING DEVICE - [Problem] To provide a user-friendly information-gathering device enabling users to select buttons easily. | 01-08-2015 |
20150017915 | SYSTEM FOR MANAGING A CABIN ENVIRONMENT IN A PLATFORM, AND ASSOCIATED MANAGEMENT METHOD - The system according to the invention comprises a mobile electronic device, at least one local base, arranged near a predefined location in the cabin, an assembly for pairing the mobile electronic device with the local base, and at least one piece of functional equipment for managing the cabin environment. The memory of the mobile electronic device stores at least one software application for controlling the functional equipment. The pairing system is capable of sending the mobile electronic device at least one location identification data of the local base during pairing between the mobile electronic device and the local base, the mobile electronic device being able to configure the control software application, based on the location identification data. | 01-15-2015 |
20150017916 | TERAHERTZ WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS-BASED METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DATA TRANSMISSION - A first terahertz storage device and a second terahertz storage device may be placed within an effective distance to each other, and, by means of connection and pairing between the first terahertz storage device and the second terahertz storage device, data in the first terahertz storage device may be transmitted to the second terahertz storage device via a terahertz wireless signal. Accordingly, rapid and secure transmission of data is facilitated between two storage devices. Transmission and exchange of data is, thereby, facilitated in a scenario in which a transmission medium cannot be released. | 01-15-2015 |
20150017917 | PROXIMITY INFORMATION REGISTRATION METHOD, QUERY METHOD, AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention provides a proximity information registration method, a query method, and a user equipment. The proximity information registration method includes: sending, by a first user equipment, a proximity service request to a proximity service server, where the proximity service request sent by the first user equipment carries an equipment identifier of the first user equipment; monitoring and obtaining, by the first user equipment, broadcast information of a second user equipment which is broadcast by the second user equipment; and registering the broadcast information of the second user equipment with the proximity service server, so that the proximity service server converts the broadcast information of the second user equipment into an equipment identifier of the second user equipment according to a correspondence between the equipment identifier of the second user equipment and the broadcast information of the second user equipment stored by the proximity service server. | 01-15-2015 |
20150024686 | SECURE SIMPLE PAIRING THROUGH EMBEDDED VEHICLE NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE - Secure simple pairing is provided by receiving, from a mobile communications device, vehicle information and an identifier of the mobile communications device, identifying a vehicle from the vehicle information, and sending the vehicle information and the identifier of the mobile communications device to the vehicle. The vehicle initiates a communication with the mobile communications device using the vehicle information and the identifier of the mobile communications device. | 01-22-2015 |
20150024687 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COEXISTENCE BETWEEN MULTIPLE WIRELESS NETWORKS - Use is made of the Notice-of-Absence (NoA), as is a Wi-Fi/Bluetooth time sharing mechanism. This mechanism dictates ‘n’ cycles of absent and present duration of P2P-GO starting at a defined time ‘t’. The information bits of NoA are communicated from GO to the Client in the Beacons (for the period of NoA in use). Time-sharing between Bluetooth and WLAN at P2P-GO, is communicated using NoA to the P2P-Client. For the duration of both Bluetooth and WLAN radios transmitting/receiving traffic, NoA is used such that the absent duration covers the Bluetooth Interval and present-duration covers the WLAN interval. This NoA remains effective for as long as the time-sharing mode between BT and WLAN radios. As soon as, P2P-GO enters the time-sharing mode, NoA parameters are determined based on the timesharing mode (Dynamic Long and Dynamic Short). The start time of NoA schedule is determined after synchronizing to the time-sharing scheduler. The start time of NoA schedule is ‘n’ TBTTs after entering the time-sharing mode so that the Clients have ample opportunity to receive the NoA information. Until NoA schedule starts, P2P-GO may protect Bluetooth Interval using CTS2S frames. After NoA schedule comes into play, P2P-GO may send CTS2S only for asynchronous Bluetooth traffic. | 01-22-2015 |
20150024688 | Automatic Pairing of a Vehicle and a Mobile Communications Device - A method of associating a second vehicle with a mobile communications device is provided. The method authenticates a user with the second vehicle. The method retrieves user information of the user from a remote server. The user information includes an identifier of a mobile communications device. The identifier of the mobile communications device has been previously sent to the remote server by a first vehicle and stored at the remote server. The method automatically associates with the mobile communications device based on the retrieved user information. | 01-22-2015 |
20150024689 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ASSOCIATING DEVICES BASED ON BIOMETRIC INFORMATION - Various operations may be performed based on a distance-related function associated with two or more devices. For example, an association procedure for two or more devices may be based on one or more determined distances. Similarly, presence management may be based on one or more determined distances. A distance-related function may take various form including, for example, a distance between devices, two or more distances between devices, a rate of change in a relative distance between devices, relative acceleration between devices, or some combination of two or more of the these distance-related functions. | 01-22-2015 |
20150024690 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING BUILT-IN MICROPHONE OF PORTABLE TERMINAL - An electronic device and a method implemented in the electronic device are provided. The method includes detecting, by a device detector, whether a wired external device coupled to the electronic device and including a wired external speaker further includes a wired external microphone; providing a signal, by the device detector, indicating whether the wired external device includes the wired external microphone; detecting, by a controller, a call establishment; and operating, by the controller, a built-in microphone to receive a voice sound if the signal from the device detector indicates that the wired external device does not include the wired external microphone and providing a voice signal received from a second electronic device to the wired external device so that the wired external speaker outputs the voice signal, wherein the built-in microphone and a built-in speaker of the electronic device are coupled to the controller via a COder-DECoder (CODEC). | 01-22-2015 |
20150031290 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING ONE OR MORE FUNCTIONALITIES TO A WEARABLE COMPUTING DEVICE WITH SMALL FORM FACTOR - A method substantially as shown and described in the detailed description and/or drawings and/or elsewhere herein. A device substantially as shown and described in the detailed description and/or drawings and/or elsewhere herein. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031291 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING ONE OR MORE FUNCTIONALITIES TO A WEARABLE COMPUTING DEVICE - Computationally implemented methods and systems include detecting presence of one or more electronic devices near a wearable computing device, the wearable computing device being a computing device designed to be worn by a user; determining which of the one or more electronic devices that are detected as being near the wearable computing device are at least designed to provide one or more specific functionalities that are being sought by the wearable computing device; and acquiring, by the wearable computing device based at least, in part, on said detecting and said determining, one or more specific functionalities that are available through at least one electronic device that was detected as being near the wearable computing device and that was determined to provide the one or more specific functionalities. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031292 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING ONE OR MORE FUNCTIONALITIES TO A WEARABLE COMPUTING DEVICE - Computationally implemented methods and systems include detecting presence of one or more electronic devices near a wearable computing device, the wearable computing device being a computing device designed to be worn by a user; determining which of the one or more electronic devices that are detected as being near the wearable computing device are at least designed to provide one or more specific functionalities that are being sought by the wearable computing device; and acquiring, by the wearable computing device based at least, in part, on said detecting and said determining, one or more specific functionalities that are available through at least one electronic device that was detected as being near the wearable computing device and that was determined to provide the one or more specific functionalities. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031293 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING ONE OR MORE FUNCTIONALITIES TO A WEARABLE COMPUTING DEVICE WITH DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA - Computationally implemented methods and systems include receiving one or more signals through a directional antenna of a wearable computing device, the one or more signals having been transmitted by one or more electronic devices; determining that the one or more electronic devices are within a spatial pod surrounding the wearable computing device based, at least in part, on the one or more signals received by the wearable computing device; and obtaining at least access to one or more functionalities from the one or more electronic devices that were determined to be within the spatial pod of the wearable computing device. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031294 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING ONE OR MORE FUNCTIONALITIES TO A WEARABLE COMPUTING DEVICE WITH DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA - Computationally implemented methods and systems include receiving one or more signals through a directional antenna of a wearable computing device, the one or more signals having been transmitted by one or more electronic devices; determining that the one or more electronic devices are within a spatial pod surrounding the wearable computing device based, at least in part, on the one or more signals received by the wearable computing device; and obtaining at least access to one or more functionalities from the one or more electronic devices that were determined to be within the spatial pod of the wearable computing device. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031295 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATING BEYOND COMMUNICATION RANGE OF A WEARABLE COMPUTING DEVICE - Computationally implemented methods and systems include determining presence of one or more external linking devices within communication range of a wearable computing device designed to be worn by a person, the determining being based, at least in part, on one or more signals transmitted by the one or more external linking devices and received by the wearable computing device, and the one or more external linking devices designed to communicate beyond the communication range of the wearable computing device, and directing the wearable computing device to communicate beyond the communication range via at least one of the one or more external linking devices that were determined to be within the communication range of the wearable computing device. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031296 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SELECTING FOR USAGE ONE OR MORE FUNCTIONAL DEVICES DETECTED WITHIN A COMMUNICATION RANGE OF A WEARABLE COMPUTING DEVICE - Computationally implemented methods and systems include detecting presence of a plurality of functional devices within the communication range of a wearable computing device; and selecting, from the plurality of functional devices, one or more functional devices for providing to the wearable computing device one or more functionalities. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031297 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SELECTING FOR USAGE ONE OR MORE FUNCTIONAL DEVICES DETECTED WITHIN A COMMUNICATION RANGE OF A WEARABLE COMPUTING DEVICE - Computationally implemented methods and systems include detecting presence of a plurality of functional devices within the communication range of a wearable computing device; and selecting, from the plurality of functional devices, one or more functional devices for providing to the wearable computing device one or more functionalities. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031298 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RECEIVING GESTURE INDICATIVE DATA AT A LIMB WEARABLE COMPUTING DEVICE - Computationally implemented methods and systems include soliciting to provide to a limb wearable computing device from one or more functional devices that are within the communication range of the limb wearable computing device gesture indicative data that is indicative of one or more user gestures, the communication range being a spatial volume that includes the limb wearable computing device and being externally defined by an enveloping boundary, where low-power signals transmitted by the limb wearable computing device being discernible over background noise within the enveloping boundary and not discernible over background noise outside the enveloping boundary, the limb wearable computing device being designed to be worn around a limb of a user; and facilitating the limb wearable computing device to receive the gesture indicative data from the one or more functional devices. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031299 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RECEIVING GESTURE INDICATIVE DATA AT A LIMB WEARABLE COMPUTING DEVICE - Computationally implemented methods and systems include soliciting to provide to a limb wearable computing device from one or more functional devices that are within the communication range of the limb wearable computing device gesture indicative data that is indicative of one or more user gestures, the communication range being a spatial volume that includes the limb wearable computing device and being externally defined by an enveloping boundary, where low-power signals transmitted by the limb wearable computing device being discernible over background noise within the enveloping boundary and not discernible over background noise outside the enveloping boundary, the limb wearable computing device being designed to be worn around a limb of a user; and facilitating the limb wearable computing device to receive the gesture indicative data from the one or more functional devices. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031300 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING GESTURE INDICATIVE DATA VIA A HEAD WEARABLE COMPUTING DEVICE - Computationally implemented methods and systems include facilitating a head wearable computing device to receive one or more solicitations via one or more solicitation signals that solicit to provide to a limb wearable computing device gesture indicative data that is indicative of one or more user gestures, the head wearable computing device being designed to be worn on a head of a user and the limb wearable computing device being designed to be worn around a limb of a user; and directing the head wearable computing device to transmit to the limb wearable computing device the gesture indicative data via one or more low-power gesture indicative data signals, the limb wearable computing device being within communication range of the head wearable computing device. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031301 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING GESTURE INDICATIVE DATA VIA A HEAD WEARABLE COMPUTING DEVICE - Computationally implemented methods and systems include facilitating a head wearable computing device to receive one or more solicitations via one or more solicitation signals that solicit to provide to a limb wearable computing device gesture indicative data that is indicative of one or more user gestures, the head wearable computing device being designed to be worn on a head of a user and the limb wearable computing device being designed to be worn around a limb of a user; and directing the head wearable computing device to transmit to the limb wearable computing device the gesture indicative data via one or more low-power gesture indicative data signals, the limb wearable computing device being within communication range of the head wearable computing device. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031302 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL WITH AN RFID MODULE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND A DEVICE STORING A PROGRAM - A wireless communication terminal includes: a wireless communication module, a power supply unit configured to perform electric power supply to the wireless communication module, a power supply control unit configured to perform power supply control of the power supply unit, a control unit configured to set parameters of a layer higher than a data link layer to parameters of the wireless communication module, an RFID module configured to store wireless communication setting information and data presence/absence information and wirelessly transmit the wireless communication setting information, and a data update unit configured to update the data presence/absence information stored in the RFID module. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031303 | Resource Sharing Priority - A device implements multiple protocols that share overlapping resources. In some cases, a first operation, such as a scan, may have a resource conflict with a second operation associated with a different protocol. In some cases, determining grant normal priority level requests associated with the first operation over those at the normal priority level associated with the second operation may lead to operator-noticeable degradation in device performance. A protocol controller may request a selected portion of the first operation at a low priority level. Requesting the selected portion at the low priority level may allow the second operation to selectively override the portion of the first operation. The selective overriding of the first operation may allow for execution of the first and second operations without operator-noticeable performance degradation. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031304 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD FOR SPECIFYING IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION FOR COMMUNICATION WITH COMMUNICATION PARTNER, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication device includes: communication unit receiving from each of other communication devices identification information to enable communication with the other communication device and identification information for visual verification of the other communication device; storage unit that stores, for each of the other communication devices, identification information enabling communication and identification information for visual verification received in the communication unit, which are associated with each other; display unit that displays the identification information for visual verification that was received by the communication unit; acceptance unit that accepts selected identification information that is a piece of identification information for visual verification that was selected from among identification information for visual verification that was displayed on the display unit; and control unit that specifies, as the identification information to enable communication with a communication partner, identification information to enable communication that is associated with the selected identification information in the storage unit. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031305 | Radio Network with a Low Power Consumption and Method for Operating such a Radio Network - In a radio network having a low power consumption—a so-called Low Rate Wireless Personal Area Network (LR-WPAN)—a first network unit is arranged above a first physical transmission unit and a first data link unit connected thereto a first network link having a first switch having echo suppression based on the Low Rate Wireless Personal Area Network being arranged between the first data link unit and the first network unit, and being connected to a second network link having a second switch having echo suppression based on the Low Rate Wireless Personal Area Network via a subsequent connection structure. In this arrangement, this connection structure connects a second network unit to the first network unit for the purpose of communication based on the Low Rate Wireless Personal Area Network. | 01-29-2015 |
20150038082 | PROXIMITY WIRELESS TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION DEVICE - A proximity wireless transmission/reception device of an embodiment includes a first transmission/reception unit, of a first communication scheme, including a first tuned circuit and a first modulation/demodulation circuit, a second transmission/reception unit, of a second communication scheme, including a second tuned circuit and a second modulation/demodulation circuit, an antenna where communication signals of the first and second communication schemes are induced, a switch unit configured to connect the antenna and the first transmission/reception unit or to connect the antenna and the second transmission/reception unit, a reception determination unit configured to determine reception states of the first and second transmission/reception units, and a switch switching unit configured to control the switch unit according to a determination result of the reception determination unit. | 02-05-2015 |
20150038083 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SWITCHING COORDINATOR IN A PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - A method, an apparatus, and a system for switching coordinators in a Personal Area Network (PAN) are provided. The method includes initiating a request for switching at least one device present in a network session to a first priority PAN coordinator, the initiated request including a count of the at least one device, transmitting the initiated request to the first priority PAN coordinator, the initiated request including a requirement for supporting the at least one device of that count, determining whether the first priority PAN coordinator is capable of supporting the at least one device, and switching, when the first priority PAN coordinator is capable of supporting the at least one device, the network session of the at least one device with the first priority PAN coordinator to facilitate establishment of the network session with the first priority PAN coordinator. | 02-05-2015 |
20150038084 | Reduced radiation mobile phone usage via a combined wired and a wireless communication system based on roaming hot backup - The present invention propose a combined communication system which integrate wired and wireless communication, based on several distributed antenna system (access points) which give rise to a significant reduced radiation. Efficient access point roaming techniques is handing over a blue tooth wireless communications session from a first access point to a second access point of distributed antenna system. The distributed antenna system is providing a communication with plurality terminal devices. The link with the more than one access points established via the terminal devices for continues the communication session. | 02-05-2015 |
20150038085 | Method for Data Communication between a Wireless Device and an Electronic Device, and a Data Communication Device - A method for wireless data communication between a wireless device having means for short-range data communication, and an electronic device includes mounting a data communication device having means for short-range radio frequency wireless data communication in a general purpose expansion memory location of the electronic device, activating a short-range radio frequency wireless data communication link between the wireless device and the data communication device, and transmitting data between the electronic device and the wireless device so that the wireless device operates as an ordinary expansion memory from the view point of the electronic device. | 02-05-2015 |
20150044969 | Wireless Transmission System and Method - Wireless transmission using BodyCom communications is a short-range wireless connectivity technology that uses the radio frequency (RF) transmission capability of the human body, or other materials having RF transmission capabilities, to transport radio frequency signals using safe and secure communications between two or more electronically compatible wireless devices. | 02-12-2015 |
20150044970 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING SHORT RANGE COMMUNICATION - A method for establishing a short range connection includes transmitting a first data to an external device through infrared communication, the first data including information on a short range wireless communication other than the infrared communication, the short range wireless communication being supported by an electronic device, establishing the short range wireless communication with the external device on the basis of the first data, and transmitting a second data to the external device through the short range wireless communication. An electronic device includes at least one processor configured to transmit a first data to an external device through infrared communication, the first data including information on a short range wireless communication other than the infrared communication, the short range wireless communication being supported by an electronic device, establish the short range wireless communication with the external device on the basis of the first data. | 02-12-2015 |
20150050884 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXTENDING COVERAGE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A first radio receives, via a land mobile radio (LMR) radio frequency transceiver, a first transmission of an LMR call from a source transmitting radio transmitted on a first LMR frequency for re-transmission to one or more destination radios. The first radio measures a first measured signal level of the first transmission and receives, via a first short-range RF transceiver from a second radio, a second measured signal level of the first transmission as measured by the second radio. The first radio compares the first measured signal level and the second measured signal level and determines, based on the comparing, how the LMR call should be routed from the source transmitting radio to the one or more destination radios via the first and second radios. The first radio then transmits, via the first short-range RF transceiver, a corresponding instruction indicating a result of the determining to the second radio. | 02-19-2015 |
20150050885 | Establishing communication links automatically with local devices - An envoy device for performing transactions with a further device in proximity to the envoy device, the envoy device comprising: a first communication device configured to communicate with the further device that is located within a predetermined distance of the envoy device using a local short range communication link; at least one further communication device configured to communicate with the further device using at least one longer range communication link. The envoy device is configured to respond to detecting the further device within the predetermined distance of the envoy device to: establish communication with the further device using the local short range communication link; receive information from the further device regarding any further communication links that the further device has access to; transmit to the further device information regarding the at least one longer range communication link; and to commence a transaction with the further device using the local short range communication link. | 02-19-2015 |
20150050886 | EFFICIENT PAIRING OF NETWORKED DEVICES - A wireless device may be enabled to pair (e.g., establish a wireless communication link) with multiple other wireless devices that are connected with a wireless network without the need to conduct a separate pairing operation between the wireless device and each of the other network-connected wireless devices. Data exchanged between the wireless device and a peer device (e.g., one of a group of network-connected wireless devices) and that may be used to authenticate communications between the wireless device and the peer device (e.g., a link key) may be stored in a network-accessible data storage and retrieval system. The link key may be used by the wireless device when attempting to establish communications with a different peer device (e.g., another one of the network-connected wireless devices) and may be retrieved by the other network-connected peer devices and may be used to enable authenticated communications between the other peer devices and the wireless device. | 02-19-2015 |
20150050887 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR FACILITATING BLUETOOTH PAIRING USING A CAMERA AS A BARCODE SCANNER - Embodiments of the systems, devices and methods described herein generally facilitate performing Bluetooth pairing between a first device and a second device. In accordance with one example embodiment, a first device generates a barcode that encodes Bluetooth pairing data for transmission to the second device, wherein the pairing data comprises a Bluetooth address associated with the first device, and wherein the pairing data further comprises a personal identification number usable to complete the Bluetooth pairing, the barcode is transmitted to the second device, and Bluetooth pairing is performed with the second device. | 02-19-2015 |
20150050888 | Medical Devices with Proximity Detection - A wireless medical device is disclosed. The wireless medical device comprises a processor, a memory, a sensor for detecting a physiological signal, a radio and a proximity detector to measure a distance of the wireless medical device relative to a second wireless medical device. The proximity detector includes a ranging functionality. A wireless communication channel is created when a distance between the wireless medical device and the second wireless medical device is within a first predetermined threshold. The distance is greater than zero. | 02-19-2015 |
20150056919 | MANAGING SHORT RANGE WIRELESS DATA TRANSMISSIONS - An apparatus and method for relaying short range communication data between electronic devices. In one example, a first and second short range wireless communication link is established with a first and second wireless communication device, respectively. The first wireless communication device maintains a wireless connection to a wireless telecommunications network. A first and second set of data is received from the first and second wireless communication devices over the first and second links, respectively. At least one of the first set of data and the second set of data is relayed to at least one of the second wireless communication device and the first wireless communication device, respectively, over the second and first links, respectively. The relaying forms a multi-party connection with the first wireless communication device and the second wireless communication device to the wireless telecommunications network. | 02-26-2015 |
20150056920 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR MANAGEMENT OF CONNECTED DEVICES, SUCH AS IN A WIRELESS DOCKING ENVIRONMENT - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments enable a wireless docking center device to manage one or more wireless and/or wired peripheral devices on behalf of a wireless dockee device. Example embodiments of the invention include wireless docking management of peripheral devices, power management in wireless docking, intelligent and automatic connection activation in wireless docking, notification based on user proximity to a peripheral device in wireless docking, and redirect data transmission between peripheral devices in wireless docking. Wireless docking is mentioned as example herein, but similar solutions may also be applied to other connected device environments. | 02-26-2015 |
20150056921 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY COMMUNICATING WITH AN IMPLANTABLE MEDICAL DEVICE - A system may include a target implantable medical device (IMD) and an external device configured to selectively communicate with the target IMD. The external device may include a communication module configured to communicate with the target IMD, a response analysis module configured to receive and analyze a target response signal from the target IMD and other response signals from other IMDS, and a power adjustment module configured to receive one or more power-adjustment request signals from the response analysis module. The power adjustment module is configured to adaptively adjust a power of a transmission request over a first frequency band based on the one or more power-adjustment request signals until the response analysis module receives only the target response signal from the target IMD. | 02-26-2015 |
20150056922 | METHOD AND RADIO BEACON FOR LOCALISING AN ON-BOARD UNIT - A method for localising an on-board unit, which has a radio transceiver and an identifier, to a predefined area around a radio beacon, comprising the following steps: a) storing the identifier and an associated radio property in a database; b) sending a first request; c) receiving a first response from an on-board unit; d) determining, from the database, the radio property of the transceiver associated with the received identifier; and e) localising the on-board unit in the predefined area; wherein: the steps b) to e) are repeated, for each run-through of the steps b) to e), a localisation result is stored in a presence list, and the localising is verified when the number of the positive localisation results exceeds a threshold value. | 02-26-2015 |
20150056923 | Automatic Multimedia Upload For Publishing Data And Multimedia Content - Disclosed herein is a method and system for utilizing a digital data capture device in conjunction with a Bluetooth (BT) enabled mobile device for publishing data and multimedia content on one or more websites automatically or with minimal user intervention. A client application is provided on the BT enabled mobile device. In the absence of inbuilt BT capability, a BT communication device is provided on the digital data capture device. The BT communication device is paired with the BT enabled mobile device to establish a connection. The client application detects capture of data and multimedia content on the digital data capture device and initiates transfer of the captured data, multimedia content, and associated files. The digital data capture device transfers the captured data, multimedia content, and the associated files to the client application. The client application automatically publishes the transferred data and multimedia content on one or more websites. | 02-26-2015 |
20150065046 | LOCALIZED VISIBLE LIGHT COMMUNICATIONS AMONG WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A method and apparatus for monitoring a localized region of a touch screen for a plurality of sensor inputs to identify a camera profile of at least one user equipment. In response to identifying the camera profile initiating a localized visual data exchange by displaying data within a region defined by the camera profile. Data communication is initiated with the user equipment over the alternative communication. In order to maintain a secure communication the invention periodically monitors the localized region of the touch screen for the plurality of sensor inputs identified as the camera profile during the localized visual data exchange while communicating over the alternative communication network. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065047 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LOW ENERGY WAKE-UP AND PAIRING FOR USE WITH IMPLANTABLE MEDICAL DEVICES - Techniques are provided for use with implantable medical devices or trial medical devices for wirelessly connecting the devices to external instruments such as tablet computers or smartphones. In an example where the medical device is an implantable neurostimulator, the neurostimulator passively detects wireless wake-up signals generated by the external instrument, i.e. the neurostimulator “sniffs” for advertisement signals generated by the external instrument. In response to passive detection of a wake-up signal, the implantable neurostimulator determines if a response is warranted and, if so, the neurostimulator activates its wireless transmission components to transmit an acknowledgement signal to the external instrument so as to complete a wake-up and handshake protocol. In this manner, power consumption within the implantable device (or within a similarly equipped trial medical device) can be reduced compared to devices that would otherwise periodically transmit advertisement signals even when no external mobile instrument is present. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065048 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION KEYBOARD AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING LINKAGE THEREOF - A wireless communication keyboard includes a key module and a wireless communication module. The key module has a plurality of keys each can be depressed by a user to output a keyboard command. The key module also has a press combination including at least two keys which are depressed by the user at the same time to output a target search command. The wireless communication module is connected to the key module to receive the keyboard command and target search command, and has a linkage target setting state to search a linkable information device within a linkage range upon receiving the target search command. Thus user can quickly search the linkable information device through the press combination. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065049 | APPARATUS HAVING BLUETOOTH MODULE AND METHOD FOR BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION THEREOF - An apparatus having a Bluetooth module and a method for Bluetooth communication thereof are provided. The apparatus may be positioned in a vehicle. As such, the apparatus includes a Bluetooth module configured to perform Bluetooth communication with one or more devices configured to perform the Bluetooth communication. Also included is a processor configured to obtain received signal strength indications (RSSIs) of the devices when searched devices are products manufactured by the same manufacturer as that of the apparatus and perform pairing with a device having the largest RSSI among the obtained RSSIs to connect the Bluetooth communication. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065050 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system has a first communication apparatus and a second communication apparatus. The first communication apparatus has an information generator to generate first information associated with a mobile terminal, an encoder to encode the first information, and a first wireless communication module to transmit the encoded first information to the mobile terminal by close range wireless communication. The second communication apparatus has a second wireless communication module to receive the encoded first information transmitted by the mobile terminal and second information, a decoder to decode the encoded first information, a verification module to verify validity of the first information, and an information processing module to process the second information received by the second wireless communication module when the validity is confirmed by the verification module. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065051 | TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A two-way communication system includes an in-vehicle unit and a plurality of portable units. The in-vehicle unit includes a plurality of in-vehicle communication units, and an in-vehicle control unit. The in-vehicle unit or the portable units each include a received electric field strength detection unit that detects received electric field strength, and a received electric field strength determination unit that performs determination, based on the received electric field strength. In a case where the received electric field strength is less than a predetermined value, the plural in-vehicle communication units and one of the portable units are communication-connected to each other, and in a case where the received electric field strength is greater than or equal to the predetermined value, the plural in-vehicle communication units and the plural portable units are communication-connected to each other on a one-to-one basis. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065052 | EXECUTING APPLICATIONS IN CONJUNCTION WITH OTHER DEVICES - A method and electronic device for executing application concurrently with other devices are provided. An address of an external electronic device and a location of an application is obtained. A connection is established with a device using a short-range communication protocol. The application is obtained and executed in conjunction with the device. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065053 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION AND APPARATUS SUPPORTING THE SAME - An electronic device for controlling short-range wireless communication is provided. The electronic device includes a short-range communication module configured to transmit/receive a short-range communication signal to/from at least one neighboring device and a control module configured to control, when a pairing connection with a first neighboring device is established through the short-range communication module, at least one of turning on/off of a scan operation for waiting for reception of a signal from at least one second neighboring device and configuring a cycle of the scan operation. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065054 | Method and Apparatus for Automatically Connecting Short Range Wireless Network in Portable Terminal - A method and an apparatus for automatically connecting a short range wireless network in a portable terminal. The method for automatically connecting a short range wireless network in the portable terminal includes, when registering to an Access Point (AP), storing location information of the AP. The method also includes obtaining location information of the terminal. The method further includes controlling an activation cycle of a communication module by comparing the location information of the terminal and the location information of the AP. The method still further includes, when the communication module is activated, searching for the AR | 03-05-2015 |
20150072617 | WIRELESS POWER AND DATA APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD - Wireless data communication is implemented using respective carrier frequencies. As may be implemented in accordance with one or more embodiments and apparatuses herein, wireless communications are effected using a resonant circuit having a resonant frequency susceptible to detuning. Radio frequency power is transmitted to a remote transponder circuit, and wireless communications are effected with the remote transponder circuit via at least one of first and second different carrier frequencies, using the resonant circuit and the radio frequency power. The first and second carrier frequencies are respectively sufficiently proximate to the resonant frequency, such that signals communicated based on the resonant frequency can be acquired by demodulating based on the resonant frequency. One of the first and second carrier frequencies is selected based upon a signal sent from the transponder circuit. | 03-12-2015 |
20150072618 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENABLING ADDITIONAL DEVICES TO CHECK IN TO BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY (BLE) BEACONS - Systems and methods are provided for checking many users in to a location using a Bluetooth® low energy (BLE) beacon. The provided systems and methods may allow a BLE beacon to facilitate a check in with a remote server that processes check ins and then disconnect from the device used to check in. The device may be assigned a unique identifier that may be broadcast from the device during the check in so that the BLE beacon can quickly scan for the identifier and connect with the device based on the identifier to provide content and other information to the device. | 03-12-2015 |
20150072619 | WIRELESS MOTION ACTIVATED USER DEVICE WITH BI-MODALITY COMMUNICATION - A device, system or method may include a body-wearable user device including a user device wireless transceiver configured to communicate directly with a secondary device wireless transceiver associated with a secondary device, a sensor configured to sense a physical motion of at least one of the user device and a body part of a user of the user device and output a signal based on the physical motion, and a processor configured, based on the output from the sensor, to cause the user device wireless transceiver to transmit to the secondary device wireless transceiver a pair signal according to a first wireless modality based, at least in part, on the signal and complete a wireless pairing between the user device wireless transceiver and the secondary device wireless transceiver according to a second wireless modality different than the first wireless modality. | 03-12-2015 |
20150072620 | PROTOCOL ADAPTATION LAYER FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Protocol adaptation layer for wireless communications. Communication devices that include one or more radio modules operable in accordance with multiple communication protocols establish communications using one communication protocol and then switch to another communication protocol. This switching to another communication protocol may be performed based on a variety of factors including effectuating communications of higher throughput, supporting uni-directional communications vs. bi-directional communications, or any other desired factor. In some embodiments, various communication devices include two radio modules that are each implemented to operate in accordance with one particular communication protocol. Alternatively, a multi-protocol capable radio module may support and operate in accordance with more than one communication protocol. Examples of possible communication protocols include those compliant with Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11, and/or 802.15.3c. | 03-12-2015 |
20150072621 | IMMEDIATE CONNECTION FOLLOWING DEVICE DISCOVERY - An electronic device is described. During operation, this electronic device activates a communication channel having a carrier frequency in a radio in an interface circuit to listen for an advertising frame of interest from another electronic device during a scan window having a predefined duration. If the advertising frame of interest is received from the other electronic device, the electronic device terminates the listening before the predefined duration has expired and, using the communication channel in the radio, transmits the connect request to the other electronic device to establish the connection with the other electronic device. In this way, the delay between discovery of the other electronic device and establishing the connection is reduced. In addition, the power consumed by the electronic device while scanning for the other electronic device and initiating the connection is reduced. | 03-12-2015 |
20150079906 | Temporary Identifiers and Expiration Values for Discoverable User Equipments (UEs) - A temporary identifier is assigned to a discoverable user equipment (UE) in an assignment, an expiration value is assigned to the assignment, and the temporary identifier and the expiration value are associated to a long-term identifier of the discoverable UE. The temporary identifier and an indication of the expiration value are provided to the discoverable UE. The temporary identifier and an indication of the expiration value are provided to a discovering UE responsive to receipt of an inquiry including the long-term identifier of the discoverable UE The discoverable UE broadcasts the temporary identifier. If the broadcast is heard by the discovering UE, the discovering UE may identify that the broadcast is from the discoverable UE, based on the association of the long-term identifier to the temporary identifier. | 03-19-2015 |
20150079907 | WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A MASTER DEVICE AND A SLAVE DEVICE - A method of wireless communication between a master device and a slave device is disclosed. The method comprises:
| 03-19-2015 |
20150079908 | MEASUREMENT DEVICE - A measurement device and communication method for the same is disclosed. The measurement device is adapted to communicate with a monitor device employing a bi-directional communication protocol. The measurement device is adapted to operate in a uni-directional communication mode such that it transmits messages irrespective of response messages transmitted to the measurement device. | 03-19-2015 |
20150087231 | DEVICE AUTO PAIRING WITHOUT TOUCH AND TAP - A device-to-device (D2D) pairing assembly comprises: a first and a second device detecting and communicating (DDC) component communicatively coupled to each other and to a microprocessor that executes a device pairing parameter exchange (DPPE) utility, which configures the D2D pairing assembly to: detect a communicative coupling of a first user device to the first DDC component; receive from the first user device at least one first pairing parameter, which first pairing parameter enables another device to connect to and participate in a pairing session with the first user device; detect a communicative coupling of a second user device to the second DDC component; and communicate the at least one first pairing parameter to the second user device, via the second DDC component, to trigger the second user device to connect to and participate in a pairing session with the first user device via a direct device-to-device communication channel. | 03-26-2015 |
20150087232 | ANALYSIS OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION LINKS BETWEEN MEDICAL DEVICES - A system and method of processing information regarding medical devices in wireless communication with each other is provided in which a controller device has a first wireless communication link with a first medical device, such as an analyte sensor, and a second wireless communication link with a second medical device, such as a delivery device. A processor in the controller device monitors the status of the first and second wireless links and upon noting a degradation of either one, compares the first wireless link status with the second wireless link status and provides guidance for resolving a communication problem based on the comparison. The latency of the communicating medical devices is considered. | 03-26-2015 |
20150087233 | USER EQUIPMENT-INITIATED CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING PROXIMITY SERVICE - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More particularly, disclosed are a UE-initiated control method and apparatus for providing a proximity service. A method in which first user equipment of a wireless communication system performs a proximity service (ProSe) according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises: a step in which the first user equipment detects second user equipment with which the ProSe can be performed; a step of transmitting a message requesting for a permission of ProSe to a network node; a step of receiving a response to the request for a permission of ProSe from the network node; and a step of setting up a direct data path to the second user equipment. | 03-26-2015 |
20150087234 | VEHICULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, VEHICULAR COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND PORTABLE TERMINAL APPARATUS - A vehicular communication system includes: a vehicular communication apparatus; and a portable terminal apparatus. The vehicular communication apparatus includes: a vehicular storage device that stores a predetermined vehicular application for a predetermined function; and a vehicular input device that enters an operation for the predetermined function. The portable terminal apparatus includes: a mobile storage device that stores a predetermined mobile application for the predetermined function; a mobile input device that enters an operation for the predetermined function; an interoperation detection device that detects establishment of an interoperation state, in which the predetermined vehicular application and the predetermined mobile application interoperate with each other; and an operation input disable device that prevents the mobile input device from entering the operation when the interoperation detection device detects the establishment of the interoperation state. | 03-26-2015 |
20150087235 | Communication Method and Apparatus for NFC Device and NFC Device - A communication method and apparatus for a near field communication (NFC) device and the NFC device, where the method includes determining a radio frequency (RF) protocol supported by at least one discovered target NFC device; and selecting, according to an RF protocol level or an RF protocol priority, an RF protocol for performing NFC from the RF protocol supported by the at least one target NFC device so as to perform communication with a target NFC device corresponding to the RF protocol determined by selection. The communication method and apparatus provided in the embodiments of the present invention solve a problem that a probability of finding a target NFC device matched with an NFC controller (NFCC) chip function on a local NFC device is low and a problem that device host (DH) resource consumption and power consumption incurred thereof are high. | 03-26-2015 |
20150087236 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA COMMUNICATION METHOD AND TERMINAL SUPPORTING THE SAME - Methods and terminals for sharing content are described. In one method, an application is activated, upon detection of an event for executing the application, on a terminal, and an application screen having at least one content is displayed. Upon detecting a touch input for selecting, at least one content is selected. Upon detecting a touch input on a transmission button on the application screen, the selected at least one content is transmitted to an external terminal. In another method, an application screen having at least one icon for executing function is displayed; a touch input for selecting an icon associated with content to be received from an external terminal is detected; at least one identifier broadcast by the external terminal is displayed; and at least one content is received from the external terminal corresponding to the selected identifier, upon detection of a touch input for selecting at least one identifier. | 03-26-2015 |
20150093990 | TECHNIQUES FOR PROXIMITY DETECTION FOR WIRELESS DOCKING - Examples are disclosed for proximity detection for wireless docking. In some examples a wireless device may determine if received signal strength indicator (RSSI) information for a wireless signal received from an apparatus exceeds a first threshold, establish a speculative connection with the apparatus and receive wireless information and ultrasound information from the apparatus if the RSSI information exceeds the first threshold, determine a proximity to the apparatus based on the wireless information and ultrasound information, and establish a non-speculative connection with the apparatus if the RSSI information exceeds a second threshold and the proximity does not exceed a proximity threshold. Other examples are described and claimed. | 04-02-2015 |
20150093991 | MOBILE DEVICE SHARING FACILITATION METHODS AND SYSTEMS - Structures and protocols are presented for using or otherwise relating to a first mobile device (a smartphone or tablet computer or wearable device, e.g.) configured to be shared by two or more parties such that a subset of the parties may be addressed selectively (in content directed to such parties, e.g.) in a cost-effective manner. | 04-02-2015 |
20150093992 | Communication Device and Terminal Device - A system and method for providing network information using a short-range wireless communication path between a communication device and a terminal device is described. In some examples, authentication information is required from the terminal device prior to communication of the network information. In some examples, the short-range wireless communication path is disconnected and reestablished in which one of the terminal device and the communication device changes operation modes of a short-range wireless interface. | 04-02-2015 |
20150093993 | MOBILE DEVICE CONNECTION SYSTEM - A mobile device connection system may identify a mobile device of a present driver and prioritize a wireless connection between the identified mobile device and a built-in hands-free device located in a motor vehicle. The mobile device connection system may include a sensor and a controller. The sensor may be configured to sense an identity of a driver when the driver is within a proximity of the motor vehicle and generate a signal based on the sensed identity. The controller may be coupled to the sensor, and it may be configured to identify the mobile device based on the signal from the sensor, search and detect the identified mobile device, and establish a wireless connection between the detected mobile device and the built-in hands-free device. | 04-02-2015 |
20150099466 | AUDIO SEQUENCE OUT-OF-BAND BLUETOOTH PAIRING - An out-of-band (OOB) mechanism is used to communicate a Bluetooth pairing code from a token to a mobile device. The token may include a light source and the mobile device may include a camera to communicate the Bluetooth pairing code using a light sequence. The token may include a speaker and the mobile device may include a microphone to communicate the Bluetooth pairing code. | 04-09-2015 |
20150099467 | METHOD OF AND DEVICE FOR BROADCASTING BLE PACKET, AND METHOD OF AND DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING OPERATION MODE OF APPLICATION PROCESSOR - A method of broadcasting a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) packet, the method is provided. The method includes generating a random address that includes service identification information of a device, writing the generated random address to a header of the BLE packet, and broadcasting the BLE packet including the header where the generated random address is written, wherein the service identification information of the device includes information to switch an Application Processor (AP) in an external device that receives the BLE packet from a sleep mode to an awake mode. | 04-09-2015 |
20150099468 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND GARMENT - An electronic device includes: a communication unit that is capable of performing short range communication or communication through a human body of a user; a first input unit that, when the user touches a first object provided with a first communication member, inputs information on the first object via the first communication member and the communication unit; and a second input unit that, when the user touches a second object provided with a second communication member in a state where the user is holding the first object, inputs information on the second object via the second communication member and the communication unit. | 04-09-2015 |
20150099469 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ESTABLISHING AND MAINTAINING PRESENCE INFORMATION OF NEIGHBORING BLUETOOTH DEVICES - A communication device and method can include one or more processors operatively coupled to memory, a sensor and an output device, where the one or more processors to perform operations of discovering neighboring short range communication enabled devices such as Bluetooth LE devices, creating presence lists from the discovered devices, and transferring biometric and personal data at least to or from the communication device or at least to or from one of the discovered devices. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 04-09-2015 |
20150099470 | PAIRING TERMINALS WITH A SOUND WAVE SIGNAL - Disclosed herein are a method and apparatus for pairing terminals using a sound wave. A sound wave is transmitted from a first terminal to a second terminal and a response is sent by the second terminal and detected by the first terminal. The first terminal and the second terminal are paired based at least partially on the sound wave signal and the response signal. | 04-09-2015 |
20150105017 | CROSS DEVICE INFORMATION EXCHANGE USING GESTURES AND LOCATIONS - A method, apparatus and software related product (e.g., a computer readable memory) are presented for exchanging information between two or more devices when they are in a close proximity using gestures and web technologies. According to an embodiment, the identification of one or more devices using gestures is asynchronous, so that the two or more devices do not have to be shaken together at the same time synchronously, which is one advantage over conventional approaches. Another advantage is that various embodiments described herein do not require a user to download any special software (application), and it can work on all platforms, for example, with HTML5-compliant browsers. | 04-16-2015 |
20150105018 | Apparatus of Paging Mobile Devices - A vehicle computer system (VCS) configured to communicate with one or more mobile devices, comprising a first processor configured to automatically create a priority list by utilizing one or more factors associated with communication activity between the vehicle computer system and the one or more mobile devices, wherein the priority list includes instructions to pair one or more mobile devices with the VCS and indicates the order of connecting to the one or more mobile devices. The vehicle computer system also includes a wireless transceiver including a second processor configured to receive the priority list from the first processor and establish a wireless connection with one or more mobile devices based on the priority list. | 04-16-2015 |
20150105019 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS PARING METHOD THEREOF - A wireless communication device and a wireless paring method thereof provided. The method is suitable for a first wireless communication device. The first wireless communication device includes a storing module storing a first operation system(OS) and a second OS. The method includes: executing the first OS, and executing a wireless paring of the first wireless communication device and a second wireless communication device through the first OS; storing a paring information into a sharing information backup region of the storing module through the first OS; executing the second OS, and reading the paring information from the sharing information backup region through the second OS; and establishing a wireless connection between the first wireless communication device and the second wireless communication device through the second OS according to the paring information. | 04-16-2015 |
20150105020 | SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A short-range wireless communication device, utilized with a communication partner terminal that executes a cooperative application while switching between foreground and background operations when a predetermined protocol is established between the communication partner terminal and the short-range wireless communication device, and disconnects a protocol by changing the cooperative application from the foreground operation to the background operation, includes: a control device that determines whether a condition of returning the cooperative application from the background operation to the foreground operation is satisfied, determines whether the cooperative application returns to the foreground operation according to an operating status of an application in the communication partner terminal when the condition is satisfied, and transmits a request for establishment of the protocol to the communication partner terminal when the cooperative application returns to the foreground operation. When the cooperative application does not return to the foreground operation, the control device repeatedly acquires the operating status. | 04-16-2015 |
20150105021 | TRANSFERRING A DESCRIPTIVE WEB INTERFACE LANGUAGE CODE BETWEEN TWO NEARFIELD COMMUNICATION DEVICES - It is described a method for a wireless Near Field Communication (NFC) between a NFC enabled device ( | 04-16-2015 |
20150105022 | MULTITASKING SYSTEM OF BLUETOOTH HEADSET - A multitasking system of a Bluetooth headset, which enables users to talk with each other in a telephone call while at the same time enjoying media content played by an external Bluetooth device. The multitasking system of a Bluetooth headset includes: a first Bluetooth headset worn by a first user, and a second Bluetooth headset worn by a second user. The first Bluetooth headset is configured to include a first Bluetooth module, and a second Bluetooth module that is connected to the first Bluetooth module. The second Bluetooth headset is configured to include a third Bluetooth module that is paired with the first Bluetooth module, and a fourth Bluetooth module that is connected to the third Bluetooth module. | 04-16-2015 |
20150105023 | METHOD FOR USING LEGACY WI-FI AND WI-FI P2P SIMULTANEOUSLY - A method for using legacy Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Peer-to-Peer (P2P) simultaneously is provided. The method includes entering a device discovery process of Wi-Fi P2P, if use of a Wi-Fi P2P function is requested while using a legacy Wi-Fi function, acquiring a Group Owner (GO) right of Wi-Fi P2P in the device discovery process, performing a listen state over the same channel as a channel where the legacy Wi-Fi function is in use, through the acquisition of the GO right, and performing a search state over a social channel of Wi-Fi P2P, and repeating the listen state and the search state until the device discovery process is ended. | 04-16-2015 |
20150111498 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING OVER AN 802.15.4 NETWORK - A method of reducing data transfer while increasing image information over an 802.15.4 network includes obtaining an image with a sensor, modulating a representation of the image using a first 802.15.4 modem, sending the representation of the image to a coordinator, demodulating the representation of the image using a second 802.15.4 modem, and digitally enhancing at least one of the representation of the image and the image. A system for communication over an 802.15.4 network includes a sensor for obtaining data, the size of the data being at least an order of magnitude greater than the size of an 802.15.4 packet, a first 802.15.4 modem coupled to the sensor, a buffer for temporarily storing the data to allow transmission of portions of the data; the buffer being coupled to the sensor, a coordinator coupled to the sensor, the coordinator being capable of communicating with a computer, and a second 802.15.4 modem coupled to the coordinator. | 04-23-2015 |
20150111499 | MULTI-HOST WIRELESS INPUT DEVICE - Embodiments of the invention are directed to input devices configured for use with computing devices. The present invention relates to methods and devices for establishing, maintaining and managing, wireless connections with between an input device and one or more host devices that the input device is paired with. The input device may include sensory feedback indicating the host device actively paired with the input device, and may enable switching between host devices. | 04-23-2015 |
20150111500 | BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - A Bluetooth communication method and system for enabling one Bluetooth device to rapidly connect to another Bluetooth device using an audio signal, and also enabling them to transmit data to each other are provided. The system includes first and second Bluetooth devices. The first Bluetooth device transforms authentication information required to establish a Bluetooth communication connection into an audio signal, and broadcasts the audio signal. The second Bluetooth device receives the audio signal and extracts the authentication information from the received audio signal. The second Bluetooth device establishes a Bluetooth communication channel with the first Bluetooth device, using the extracted authentication information. | 04-23-2015 |
20150118966 | SECURE TAP TO TRANSFER OBJECTS - An embodiment provides a method, including: detecting two devices are proximate to one another utilizing a device component; comparing received device motion information to a predetermined motion; and after matching the received device motion information to a predetermined motion, transferring an object between the two devices. Other aspects are described and claimed. | 04-30-2015 |
20150126117 | INTELLIGENT MANAGEMENT OF A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATIONS LINKS - Techniques are disclosed, for intelligent management of multiple communications links. One communications link can be used to bring up another communications link with little or no user input. Selective enablement/disablement of one or more of the communications links is based on system needs and, other criteria. Utilizing one more-secure communications link to improve security on another less-secure communications link between the same devices is also contemplated. | 05-07-2015 |
20150126118 | Method and apparatus for intention based contactless device pairing - A method for intention based contactless device pairing. An intention based contactless device pairing occurs when a first devices is sufficiently close to a second device/object and is pointing sufficiently opposite in direction to the second device/object. A process for validating the device pairing is described. | 05-07-2015 |
20150126119 | BEACON CONTENT PROPAGATION - Systems and methods for transmitting beacon messages are described. A beacon message is transmitted from a first beacon device and broadcast to an area within a transmission range of the first beacon device. A mobile device receives and stores the message. When the mobile device is out of the range of the first beacon device and within the range of a second beacon device, the message is transmitted to the second beacon device and broadcast by the second beacon device. | 05-07-2015 |
20150126120 | ELECTRONIC SYSTEM HAVING SHARED ANTENNA STRUCTURE FOR RECEIVING SIGNALS CORRESPONDING TO VARIOUS FREQUENCY BANDS - An electronic system includes a shared antenna, a diplexer and a processing circuit. The shared antenna corresponds to a first frequency band and a second frequency band, wherein the first frequency band meets a wireless radio frequency identification (RFID) standard, and the second frequency band meets a near field communication (NFC) standard. The diplexer receives a wireless signal from the shared antenna, and divides the signal into a WIRELESS RFID signal component corresponding to the first band and an NFC signal component corresponding to the second band. The processing circuit is coupled to the diplexer, and arranged to process the WIRELESS RFID signal component and the NFC signal component. | 05-07-2015 |
20150126121 | DISPLAY APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING DISPLAY APPARATUS - A display apparatus includes a communication interface configured to search for connectable host apparatuses, a user interface configured to select a host apparatus to be connected to the display apparatus from among the searched host apparatuses, and a controller configured to request for transmission of image data with respect to the selected host apparatus, control the communication interface to receive image data corresponding to the request through a wireless communication method, and control the user interface to display the received image data. | 05-07-2015 |
20150126122 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO CONNECT WIRELESS-ENABLED DEVICES - Examples to establish a connection between wireless-enabled devices involve collecting first biophysical signal data via a first wireless-enabled device, using the first biophysical signal data as a key to decrypt encrypted information received from a second wireless-enabled device to recover first information, and establishing a wireless connection between the first wireless-enabled device and the second wireless-enabled device based on a comparison of the first information and second information stored in the first wireless-enabled device. | 05-07-2015 |
20150126123 | Devices and Methods for Monitoring Terminal Devices - Devices and methods are provided for monitoring terminal devices. For example, one or more first terminal devices are scanned; one or more first identifications of the first terminal devices are recorded; a first list including the first identifications of the first terminal devices is generated; one or more second identifications of one or more second terminal devices are retrieved from a stored second list, the second terminal devices being scanned previously; the second identifications and the first identifications are compared; and in response to the second identifications being different from the first identifications, an alarm message is output. | 05-07-2015 |
20150126124 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND RECORDING MEDIUM RECORDING COMPUTER READABLE PROGRAM - A communication method includes: a first transmission step of transmitting first setting information and first network organization information regarding one information processing apparatus of a second network via a first communication path; a first determination step of determining a role of communication with a first master apparatus via a second communication path on the basis of the first network organization information and role adjustment information; a second transmission step of transmitting second setting information and second network organization information to the first master apparatus via the first communication path; a second determination step of determining a role of the communication with a second master apparatus via the second communication path on the basis of the second network organization information and role adjustment information by the first master apparatus; and a first communication start step of starting the communication via the second communication path with another information processing apparatus. | 05-07-2015 |
20150126125 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING TERMINAL AND METHOD - The present invention relates to a communication system and a method thereof, an information processing apparatus and a method thereof, an information processing terminal and a method thereof, which can start wireless communication easily and promptly. When an electromagnetic wave radiated from a reader/writer of a PDA 2 is received in a reader/writer of a personal computer | 05-07-2015 |
20150133051 | Pairing A Mobile Terminal With A Wireless Device - A mobile terminal includes a camera for capturing a first image, a radio transceiver for discovering wireless devices and determining a position of the discovered wireless devices with respect to the mobile terminal, processing means for projecting the position of each discovered wireless device onto the first image and creating a second image by overlaying symbols at the projected positions, and a display for displaying the second image, the mobile terminal being arranged for pairing, in response to a request from a user of the mobile terminal selecting one of the overlaid symbols, the corresponding wireless device with the mobile terminal. | 05-14-2015 |
20150133052 | DEVICE SELECTION - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for device selection. In one aspect there is provided a method. The method may include receiving, at a wireless device through a short-range transceiver, a connection request received from another wireless device; rejecting, by the wireless device, the received connection request, wherein the wireless device obtains, before the rejecting, information from the received connection request to enable, based on at least the obtained information, a subsequent connection to the other wireless device; and initiating the subsequent connection to the other wireless device based on at least the information obtained from the received connection request. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 05-14-2015 |
20150133053 | AUTOMATIC CONNECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS BETWEEN AN AUTOMOBILE DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE AND A VCI DEVICE - The present invention provides an apparatus for automatic connection between an automobile diagnostic device and a VCI device and a method for the automatic connection. The method includes the steps of: periodically connecting the VCI device with at least one of a plurality of connection modes in pre-stored connection records when the automobile diagnostic device is started; and, when successfully connecting the VCI device with a successful connection mode, communicating with the VCI device with the successful connection mode. The method and apparatus according to this invention significantly improve the operation efficiency and user experience of the automobile diagnostic device. | 05-14-2015 |
20150133054 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR ADAPTIVE DEVICE DISCOVERY IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Method, apparatus, and computer program product example embodiments enable wireless communication devices to reduce connection latency in high device population environments. In example embodiments, a method is disclosed for creating, at an apparatus, operating parameters for a wireless data channel connection and descriptive information regarding a time interval available to the apparatus for transmission of advertising channel messages and a count of a number of previous transmissions of the advertising channel messages to reduce connection latency in high device population environments; transmitting, by the apparatus, one or more wireless advertising channel messages indicating presence of the data channel connection, the operating parameters associated with the data channel connection, and the descriptive information regarding the time interval available for transmission of advertising channel messages and the count of the number of previous transmissions of the advertising channel messages; and transmitting information on the data channel connection according to the operating parameters. | 05-14-2015 |
20150133055 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE BASED ON MULTI TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION - Disclosed is a method of avoiding channel interference by a sensor node including a multi transmission and reception unit in a wireless sensor network. The method includes setting channel A in channel group A for a first wireless transmission and reception unit, and setting channel B in channel group B for a second wireless transmission and reception unit, checking interference for the channel A, detecting interference for the channel B if interference is detected in the channel A, and performing communication through a channel where interference has not been detected among the channel A and the channel B. | 05-14-2015 |
20150133056 | NON-CONTACT TYPE POWER SUPPLY APPARATUS AND NON-CONTACT TYPE POWER SUPPLY METHOD - A non-contact type power supply apparatus may include a power unit transmitting power to a power receiving apparatus in a non-contact type manner, a communicating unit communicating with the power receiving apparatus, and a controlling unit terminating communications with the power receiving apparatus in the case in which a communications signal level of the power receiving apparatus transmitted to the communicating unit is equal to or less than a reference signal level. | 05-14-2015 |
20150140932 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING AN AD HOC COMMUNICATION WITH AN UNKNOWN CONTACT - A method, computer-readable storage device and apparatus for establishing an ad hoc communication with an unknown contact are disclosed. For example, the method receives an authentication token from a recipient endpoint device for authentication of an unsolicited message from a sender endpoint device, wherein the recipient endpoint device is an unknown contact to the sender endpoint device and the unsolicited message is sent over an open communications protocol, authenticates the authentication token, and sends a confirmation that the authentication token is authenticated to the recipient endpoint device to allow the recipient endpoint device to establish a connection to the sender endpoint device to begin the ad hoc communication. | 05-21-2015 |
20150140933 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTED MANAGEMENT OF REMOTE TRANSMITTERS INTERACTING WITH MOBILE DEVICES - A method and system for distributed management and maintenance of remote transmitters, or beacons, via a remotely hosted integrated software platform and the interaction of the beacons with mobile devices in an environment where the beacons are located. | 05-21-2015 |
20150140934 | WIRELESS MOTION ACTIVATED USER DEVICE WITH BI-MODALITY COMMUNICATION - A device, system or method may include a body-wearable user device including a user device wireless transceiver configured to communicate directly with a secondary device wireless transceiver associated with a secondary device, a sensor configured to sense a physical motion of at least one of the user device and a body part of a user of the user device and output a signal based on the physical motion, and a processor configured, based on the output from the sensor, to cause the user device wireless transceiver to transmit to the secondary device wireless transceiver a pair signal according to a first wireless modality based, at least in part, on the signal and complete a wireless pairing between the user device wireless transceiver and the secondary device wireless transceiver according to a second wireless modality different than the first wireless modality. | 05-21-2015 |
20150147968 | SYSTEMS, APPARATUS, AND METHODS FOR PROGRAMMATICALLY ASSOCIATING NEARBY USERS - Systems, apparatus, methods, and non-transitory media for programmatically associating nearby users are discussed herein. Some embodiments may include user-wearable gesture exchange device including a motion sensor and circuitry. The motion sensor may be configured to generate motion data values indicating motion of the gesture exchange device. The circuitry may be configured to monitor motion data values generated by the motion sensor for detection of a gesture exchange signature, such as a handshake, being performed by the user. In some embodiments, the gesture exchange device may be configured to establish a wireless communication connection with a second gesture exchange device for exchange of user data, such as in response to detecting user performance of the gesture exchange signature and/or determining that the second gesture exchange device is within a predetermined proximity. | 05-28-2015 |
20150147969 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DATA TRANSMISSION APPARATUS - A data transmission method and a data transmission apparatus are provided. The method is applied to a first electronic device, and includes: determining first data to be transmitted in the first electronic device; monitoring whether a second electronic device is located in a preset distance from the first electronic device; and sending the first data to the second electronic device through a first wireless transmission channel directly connected between the first electronic device and the second electronic device, in the case where the second electronic device is located in the preset distance from the first electronic device. The method may reduce the complexity of data transmission. | 05-28-2015 |
20150147970 | BLUETOOTH PAIRING SYSTEM, METHOD, AND APPARATUS - The system provides secure controlled access to multiple Bluetooth devices issued to users. For example an officer may be issued a weapon. To enable monitoring of weapon status, a Bluetooth sensor may be fitted to a holster and the Officer issued with a Bluetooth enabled mobile phone. In order to establish a secure Bluetooth connection between the devices, sensor contains a restored link key and the mobile phone stores a partial link key. The supervisor enters their username and password, and a secret key into the phone which is then used with the partial link key to generate a copy of the link key stored in the first device, so that a secure connection can be established with the first device. The officer enters their username and password into the sensor, and once the secure connection is established it is sent over the secure connection to the mobile phone which then sends both user names and passwords to a verification authority. If the officer is verified and authorized to issue the devices, an authorization message is returned and use of the devices allowed. If the authorization fails, a failure message is returned and the devices are not issued and features may be blocked. The verification authority may be internal or external to the phone. If the authority is external, then the supervisor's user name and password could be omitted. | 05-28-2015 |
20150147971 | PORTABLE TERMINAL AUXILIARY DEVICE HAVING SATELLITE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION - The present invention comprises: a satellite terminal short-range communication module that performs short-range radio communication with a portable terminal; a satellite RF module which processes signals in order to communicate with a satellite via a satellite antenna; a voice data input and output unit which inputs and outputs voice data; and a satellite terminal control unit which forms a traffic channel through satellite communication via the satellite RF module when a voice call is requested from the portable terminal via the satellite terminal short-range communication module, transmits the voice data inputted through the voice data input and output unit to the satellite RF module, and outputs the voice data inputted by the satellite RF module via the voice data input and output unit. | 05-28-2015 |
20150147972 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING AN INTERACTION FROM A COMMUNICATING DEVICE CONFIGURED TO ESTABLISH A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CHANNEL AND CORRESPONDING TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method is described for performing an interaction, in particular ‘trusted’, between a first-communication device ( | 05-28-2015 |
20150147973 | ENCODING CONTEXT WITHIN SERVICES DATA - Systems and methods are provided enabling context information, such as a current speed of travel, to be transmitted between a context source, such as a vehicle, and a mobile device. Illustratively, the mobile device may be configured to utilize context information to enforce context-based restrictions on the mobile device, such as to restrict non-emergency functionality of the device when travelling above a threshold speed. Specifically, embodiments of the present application enable context information to be encoded within service data, and transmitted to the mobile device without requiring an established connection (e.g., a “pairing”) between the mobile device and the context source. For example, specific context information may be encoded into a service identifier, and transmitted within a service record to the mobile device. The mobile device may then decode the context information from the service identifier to determine a context, e.g., for use in context-based policy enforcement. | 05-28-2015 |
20150147974 | Accessing a Vehicle Using Portable Devices - A primary portable device can access a vehicle by transmitting an activation message including a vehicle access credential to the vehicle. The primary portable device can additionally enable a secondary portable device to access the vehicle by transmitting the vehicle access credential to the secondary portable device. The connections between the primary portable device, secondary portable device, and vehicle can be based on a short-range wireless protocol, such as Bluetooth or Bluetooth LE. | 05-28-2015 |
20150296020 | BLUETOOTH SERVICE DISCOVERY - A method provides a service in a Bluetooth device. The method includes initiating, in a first Bluetooth device connection establishment with a second Bluetooth device; carrying out a service discovery procedure with the second Bluetooth device, during which at least one unique service identifier associated with a personal training data service is exchanged between the first Bluetooth device and the second Bluetooth device, wherein the personal training data service comprises at least one personal training data item processed by the first Bluetooth device and/or the second Bluetooth device during a physical exercise; and after the service discovery procedure, transferring at least one frame with the second Bluetooth device, wherein the frame comprises an information element specifying personal training data and a command information element specifying how to process the personal training data. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296073 | BLUETOOTH REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM AND RELATED DEVICE - A Bluetooth remote control system and related transmitting-end Bluetooth device and receiving-end Bluetooth device are disclosed. The transmitting-end Bluetooth device includes: a Bluetooth transmitting circuit; a receiving interface configured to operably receive a user trigger signal; a packet generating circuit configured to operably insert a power on request into one or more predetermined advertising packets to form one or more target advertising packets; and a Bluetooth control circuit configured to operably control the Bluetooth transmitting circuit to transmit the one or more target advertising packets. Each of the predetermined advertising packets is an advertising indication (ADV_IND) packet, a non-connectable advertising indication (ADV_NONCONN_IND) packet, or a discoverable advertisement indication (ADV_DISCOVER_IND) packet. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296325 | DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BLUETOOTH INTERFACE - A data transmission system and a data transmission method for a Bluetooth interface are provided. The data transmission system includes a central electronic apparatus and a peripheral electronic apparatus. The central electronic apparatus has a central Bluetooth module, and the peripheral electronic apparatus has a peripheral Bluetooth module. Some Bluetooth characteristic information are transmitted between the central Bluetooth module and the peripheral Bluetooth module, wherein the characteristic information indicates a plurality of pieces of buffer size information in the central and peripheral Bluetooth modules. The central and peripheral Bluetooth modules perform a data transmission operation therebetween based on the characteristic information through a central enable flag and a peripheral Bluetooth module enable flag respectively. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296326 | NETWORK EXPANSION METHOD FOR A BLUETOOTH NETWORK - A method of connecting a further wireless Bluetooth node to a wireless Bluetooth node which participates in a wireless communication network, is disclosed. The method comprises:—initiating, by the further wireless Bluetooth node, a wireless network connection with the wireless Bluetooth node;—determining, by the wireless Bluetooth node, in how many slave connections the wireless Bluetooth node is involved; and—determining by the wireless Bluetooth node, if the connection initiation by the further wireless Bluetooth node is a priority connection request and—setting the predetermined number of free slave connections to one if the connection initiation by the further wireless Bluetooth node is a priority connection request and—setting the predetermined number of free slave connections to two if the connection initiation by the further wireless Bluetooth node is not a priority connection request. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296553 | SYSTEMS, DEVICES, AND METHODS THAT ESTABLISH PROXIMITY-BASED WIRELESS CONNECTIONS - Systems, devices, and methods establish proximity-based wireless connections. A first electronic device and a second electronic device are each operated in respective “connection establishment modes” in which the first electronic device wirelessly transmits wireless signals and the second electronic device wirelessly receives at least one of the signals and determines an indication of a distance between the two devices based on a property of the received signal(s). If the distance is found to be below a threshold, a wireless connection is established between the two devices. In this way, a user may selectively pair a portable electronic device with a particular one of any number of available electronic devices by momentarily placing the portable electronic device in close proximity to the particular electronic device with which a wireless connection is desired. | 10-15-2015 |
20150304022 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - The present disclosure relates to an information processing apparatus, an information processing method, and a program which are capable of swiftly starting wireless data communication between a pair of electronic devices. An information processing apparatus as one aspect of the present disclosure includes an information management unit for categorizing setting information that is obtained as a result of a connection setting process for performing wireless data communication between electronic devices as preferred information that is not deleted at a time of an initialization process or as non-preferred information that is deleted at a time of the initialization process, and managing the setting information. The present disclosure may be applied to electronic devices provided with a bluetooth interface. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304476 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE - An object of the present invention is to provide an electronic device which can output audio without sound skipping and can connect to the Internet. An electronic device according to the present invention includes: communication units that communicate with an outside by predetermined communication systems including a Bluetooth (registered trademark) communication; and a communication controller that controls to communicate with the outside by any of the predetermined communication systems, wherein the communication controller secures in advance an audio-dedicated band in a frequency band used in the Bluetooth communication. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304800 | TETHERING PROVIDING SYSTEM AND METHOD USING SHORT DISTANCE COMMUNICATION - Provided are a tethering providing system and method using short distance communication. More particularly, second short distance communication tethering between a vehicle terminal device and a communication terminal device is set in accordance with whether first short distance communication is established, activated when the vehicle terminal device and the communication terminal device are re-connected through the first short distance communication, and deactivated when the first short distance communication is terminated, thereby providing high-speed data connection through the second short distance communication tethering while reducing battery consumption of the communication terminal device. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304802 | COMMUNICATING WITH AN OWNER OF AN OBJECT WITHOUT THE OWNER'S CONTACT INFORMATION - A method of communication includes a communication hub receiving a message via short range wireless communication directly from a first mobile communication device that is proximate to the communication hub at the time the message is transmitted, and the communication hub receiving the message and automatically forwarding the message via a mobile communications network to a second mobile communication device that is associated with the communication hub without the first mobile communication device identifying the second mobile communication device. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304803 | PROXY CONNECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS - Apparatus has at least one processor and at least one memory having computer-readable code stored therein which when executed controls the at least one processor: to respond to receiving a proxy connection initiation request message from a source, the proxy connection initiation request message being a request to provide a proxy and including an address of a target and an address of the source, by causing sending of an advertising message addressed to the target; and to respond subsequently to receiving a connection request message from the target by causing sending of a proxy setup request message addressed to the source. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304833 | BLUETOOTH ATTRIBUTE REPEATER AND AGGREGATOR - According to various aspects, exemplary embodiments are disclosed of a Bluetooth attribute repeating and aggregating apparatus. In an exemplary embodiment, a Bluetooth attribute repeating and aggregating apparatus generally includes first and second communication modules. The first communication module is configured as a Bluetooth master for receiving attributes from one or more target Bluetooth slave devices. The second communication module is configured as a Bluetooth slave for processing the received attributes and transmitting corresponding attribute information to a control Bluetooth master device. The first communication module is coupled to the second communication module via a hardware interface. The first communication module is configured to transmit the received attributes to the second communication module via the hardware interface. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304835 | LOW POWER WIRELESS DEVICE DISCOVERY - An efficient wireless connection protocol is described. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304866 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR CHECKING STATE OF BEACON DEVICE - A method, system and apparatus for checking the state of a beacon device are disclosed. The system for the checking the state of a beacon device includes a beacon device and a service device. The beacon device transmits information about a beacon state to the service device and then receives a response signal from the service device. The service device receives the information about the beacon state from the beacon device, performs an update with the received information about the beacon state in association with a list of beacon devices, searches for the information about the beacon state of the beacon device, and provides the found information about the beacon state to the terminal. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304941 | HANDLING PACKET DATA UNITS - Apparatus is configured to provide a first packet data unit for transmission as part of a first Bluetooth low energy advertising packet, the first packet data unit including a first indicator indicating the use of a first coordinate frame and first data indicating a location, the first data indicating the location using the first coordinate frame, and to cause transmission of the first Bluetooth low energy advertising packet including the first packet data unit. | 10-22-2015 |
20150312703 | TIMED AND VARIABLE DURATION FOR MULTIPLE DEVICE SYNCHING - A Bluetooth system is comprised of a Bluetooth device and multiple network devices connectable to the Bluetooth device. This Bluetooth device can selectively switch connection pairings with devices in the network based on some triggering event. The switching function automatically occurs between the Bluetooth and network devices without any user intervention. This pairing enables seamless collaboration between devices owned by an owner based on the power settings and usage of the system without needing the user's interaction. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312705 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING, STORING RECEIVING AND/OR RETRIEVING IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION OR DATA AND/OR PAIRING INFORMATION OR DATA BETWEEN ACCESSORIES OR ASSOCIATED PRODUCTS AND SMART ELECTRONIC DEVICES INTO AND/OR FROM ANY DISTINCT SERVER OR STORAGE MEDIA - The present invention relates to a system and method for transmitting, storing receiving and/or retrieving identification information or data and/or pairing information or data between accessories or associated products and smart electronic devices into and/or from any distinct server or storage media. Accordingly, the present invention enables the user to transmit and/or store all identification information or data and/or pairing information or data of accessory or associated products that have been connected or paired to an existing smart device into a distinct server or storage media, and enables those information or data to be retrieved and/or received from the said server or storage media, into the same or another smart electronic device for the purposes of establishing and/or maintain connection and/or communication with the said accessory or associated products without the need to reinitiate the pairing process. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312706 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CAPABLE OF MEDIATING WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS FOR EXTERNAL APPARATUS - A communication apparatus includes a communication unit configured to connect with an external apparatus via communication, and a control unit configured to control the communication, wherein the control unit controls, if the communication unit receives a search request including information indicating that an external apparatus satisfying a predetermined condition is a transmission source via communication, the communication unit so as to transmit a search request designating the communication apparatus as the transmission source to another apparatus via communication, wherein the control unit controls the communication unit so as to receive a search response replying to the search request designating the communication apparatus as the transmission source via communication, and wherein the control unit controls the communication unit so as to transmit information corresponding to the search response received by the communication unit to the external apparatus via communication. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312762 | Systems and Methods for Generating Location Based Entitlements - The present disclosure is directed towards systems and methods for providing one or more security measures in Bluetooth low energy protocol environment, which comprises broadcasting a beacon signal, wherein the beacon signal comprises one or more temporal attributes and a proximity range. A request from an access device is received to authenticate the access device with the beacon signal and is subsequently authenticated with the beacon signal when the access device is within the proximity range. One or more content items are the transmitted to the access device in accordance with the one or more temporal attributes while the access device is authenticated with the beacon signal. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312951 | DEVICE PAIRING - An embodiment provides a method, including: receiving data relating to a first command from a user; recognizing the data relating to the first command as being directed to a first user device; receiving data relating to a second command from a user; recognizing the data relating to the second command as being directed to a second user device; determining that the first user device and the second user device are to be paired with one another based on the data relating to the first command and the data relating to the second command; and pairing the first device with the second device; wherein one or more of the data relating to the first command and the data relating to the second command comprises data related to a non-touch input modality. Other aspects are described and claimed. | 10-29-2015 |
20150319288 | Transportable Wireless Loudspeaker and System And Method for managing Multi-User Wireless Media Playback over a media playback system - A transportable wireless loudspeaker | 11-05-2015 |
20150319554 | IMAGE TRIGGERED PAIRING - An image triggered pairing system may include at least one processor circuit. The at least one processor circuit may be configured to identify a pairable device within an area. The at least one processor circuit may be further configured to determine a pairing status of the pairable device. The at least one processor circuit may be further configured to provide, for display, a graphical representation of the area and the pairable device that indicates the pairing status of the pairable device. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319555 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BLUETOOTH-BASED WI-FI SYNCHRONIZATION - The disclosure relates to a method and apparatus for leveraging Bluetooth (BT) or Bluetooth low energy (BLE) technologies to conserve energy in multi-mode devices. In one embodiment, the disclosure relates to synchronizing a first wireless platform with a second wireless platform by exchanging Wi-Fi synchronization information through BT packets. Each of the first and the second wireless platforms may have integrated Wi-Fi (or other communication modalities) with a BT radio. In one embodiment of the disclosure, the Wi-Fi communication modes are kept at sleep mode while the BT modalities exchange synchronization information. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319557 | WIRELESS STREAMING OF AN AUDIO SIGNAL TO MULTIPLE AUDIO RECEIVER DEVICES - A method of streaming an audio signal from an audio transmission device to first and second audio receiver devices via a Bluetooth link using a protocol that requires an audio data packet to be retransmitted if a positive packet receipt is not received. The first audio receiver device is synchronized to the audio transmission device to enable the first audio receiver device to receive an audio signal stream from the audio transmission device, the second audio receiver device is synchronized to the audio transmission device to enable the second audio receiver device to eavesdrop the audio signal stream to the first audio receiver device. When a positive packet receipt acknowledgement is not transmitted from the first audio receiver device to the audio transmission device, the audio transmission device repeats transmission of that audio data packet irrespective of whether the packet has been correctly received by the first audio receiver device. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319558 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING VEHICLE RADIO TO CONTROL DELIVERY OF PREMIUM CONTENT TO A SMARTPHONE - A system and method for enabling access to premium content, obtained via a smartphone, to be controlled by using a vehicle as a “key” to unlock the premium content. In one implementation the user of the vehicle uses her/his smartphone to establish a wireless link with the vehicle's radio system. The vehicle's radio system supplies a unique radio identifier to the smartphone, which the smartphone forwards to a remote authorization server. The authorization server determines from an internal database if the radio identifier is permitted access to any premium content. If so the authorization server forwards a code or command to the smartphone that the smartphone uses when accessing a web-based or cloud-based content provider, which enables the user to receive premium content form the content provider. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319559 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING UP COMMUNICATION LINK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for setting up a communication link in a wireless communication system are provided. The terminal exchanges at least one information of group formation information required to negotiate a role between the terminal and a counterpart terminal, Internet Protocol (IP) allocation information required for IP allocation and Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) information required for exchange of ARPs, with the counterpart terminal. The terminal sets up a main communication link between the terminal and the counterpart terminal based on the exchanged at least one information. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319596 | BLUETOOTH ASSISTED REMOTE DISCOVERY AND WAKEUP - Disclosed herein are techniques to enable remote discovery of connectivity capabilities and remote connection of devices in a power efficient manner. In particular, discovery and connection requests for connectivity capabilities utilizing a first radio may be communicated using a second radio, the second radio utilizing a lower amount of power relative to the first radio. For example, connectivity capabilities such as Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct, WiGig, Zigbee can be discovered and connection request communicated using a Bluetooth radio. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319598 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ENABLING VIRTUAL DOCKING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and device to implement virtual docking host functionality in a wireless network is disclosed. The method manages at least one docking environment device within a wireless network. Further, the method discovers at least one docking environment and docks a dockee device to at least one docking environment device. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319600 | Method And Technical Equipment For Short Range Data Transmission - The invention relates to a method and an apparatus and a computer program product. The apparatus is capable of transmitting a first advertisement packet indicating that an advertising device is scannable; receiving a scan request from at least one scanning device; determining, based on the received one or more scan requests, whether a corresponding one or more scanning device is an allowed for connection; transmitting a second advertisement packet indicating that said advertising device is connectable; and receiving connection requests from the allowed at least one scanning device. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319674 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BLUETOOTH-BASED GENERAL SERVICE DISCOVERY - The disclosure relates to a method, system and apparatus for extending Bluetooth low energy (BLE) technology to conserve energy in multi-mode wireless devices. In one embodiment, the disclosure relates to a device comprising a first module configured for radio communication at a non-BLE communication mode; a second module to communicate at a BLE communication mode; and a controller for controlling the first and the second communication modules, the controller configured to direct the BLE communication mode to at least one of advertise or scan for information relating to the non-BLE communication mode. | 11-05-2015 |
20150326997 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROL OF DATA TRANSFER IN LOCAL AREA NETWORK - The present invention concerns devices and methods for control of data transfer in a personal area network. The data transfer being performed by body coupled communication (BCC) and short-range wireless communication between a first portable electronic communication device ( | 11-12-2015 |
20150327000 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LOCAL WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATION OF HYBRID FORM - A device, method and system for hybrid-typed local wireless data communication are disclosed. The device for hybrid-typed local wireless data communication includes a communication unit which performs communication with one or more terminals through a plurality of local wireless data communication systems and transmits a hybrid-typed beacon signal to the one or more terminal; and a beacon control unit which includes a hybrid module supporting functions for the plurality of local wireless data communication systems, generates the hybrid-typed beacon signal at a preset period or a request through the hybrid module, and transmits the generated hybrid-typed beacon signal to the one or more terminals. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327001 | EXTENDED BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION MODES - A method and system for an improved communication mode for Bluetooth wireless devices is disclosed. Packets used in the improved communication mode are encoded using a convolutional encoder and transmitted with a particular modulation index such that the improved communication mode provides an improved link margin with respect to a communication mode specified in a Bluetooth wireless communication protocol. In this regard, the improved communication mode allows Bluetooth wireless devices to continue to communicate when a communication link between the Bluetooth wireless devices degrades, whereas otherwise the connection would be dropped. Furthermore, the Bluetooth wireless devices seamlessly switch between the improved communication mode and other Bluetooth communication modes without renegotiating the connection. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327002 | WIRELESS CONNECTOR - Some demonstrative embodiments include a wireless connector and devices and/or systems utilizing one or more wireless connectors. For example, a device may include a wireless connector to be coupled to another device for communicating data with the other device, the wireless connector including a wireless communication unit to communicate the data over a wireless communication link, for example, a short-range wireless communication link, e.g. at a multi-gigabit-per second (MGbs) rate. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327005 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device includes a memory unit that stores a communication setting information, and a communication control unit that controls a wireless communication in accordance with the communication setting information. When the first wireless communication switches to the second wireless communication, the communication control unit keeps the communication setting information of the first wireless communication being stored. After that, when the second wireless communication is turned off, the communication control unit controls the first wireless communication in accordance with the communication setting information of the first wireless communication. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327173 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION - A method for controlling a Bluetooth connection includes turning off an ignition of a vehicle. It is determined whether a terminal connected to a Bluetooth system provided in the vehicle exists or not. When it is determined that the connected terminal exists as a result of determining, a disconnection command for the Bluetooth connection is transmitted from the vehicle to the terminal. The Bluetooth system waits for a time predetermined by the Bluetooth system, after transmitting the disconnection command. After waiting for the predetermined time, it is determined whether a disconnection confirmation message responding to the disconnection command is received from the terminal or not. When it is determined that the disconnection message is received as a result of determining whether the disconnection message is received or not, the Bluetooth system is caused to enter into a sleep mode. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327305 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION - A method for controlling a Bluetooth connection according an embodiment of the present disclosure includes requesting a confirmation of connectable profiles from a vehicle to a terminal, and responding to the connectable profiles in response to the confirmation request, requesting a first connection of the connectable profiles, determining whether a hands-free profile of the connected profiles is connected based on the connection request, and requesting a second connection of the hands-free profile of the connectable profiles prior to other profiles of the connectable profiles which are not connected, when it is determined that the connection of the hands-free profile is failed. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327309 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INDICATING PAIRING AVAILABILITY BETWEEN DEVICES - A system and method are provided including an electronic device having a processor, a display coupled to the processor, a memory coupled to the processor, a short-range communication system coupled to the processor, a transducer coupled to the processor, and a communication module saved in the memory. The communication module configures the processor to execute a communication discovery process, the communication discovery process including sending information via the short range communication system to a pairable device, the information including data for executing a coordinated indication of pairability; receive an affirmative response via the short-range communication system from the pairable device; and perform the coordinated indication of pairability. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327310 | INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND PROGRAM - An information distribution system and information distribution method which enable easy information distribution to an unspecified large number of parties by utilizing short range wireless communication are provided, that is, an information distribution system which utilizes a wireless communication system wherein a master side wireless communication apparatus and a slave side wireless communication apparatus start short range wireless communication in accordance with Bluetooth® protocols, the information distribution system has a first wireless communication apparatus | 11-12-2015 |
20150327319 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION - A method for controlling a Bluetooth connection includes connecting a terminal with a vehicle through a Bluetooth connection. The Bluetooth connection is disconnected according to a disconnection request of the terminal. It is automatically determined whether a Bluetooth communication of the terminal is available or not in the vehicle, when the disconnection of the Bluetooth connection is detected. The Bluetooth connection is requested again from the vehicle to the terminal, when the response indicating the Bluetooth communication is available is received from the terminal. The vehicle and the terminal are connected by requesting the Bluetooth connection again. | 11-12-2015 |
20150333820 | Synchronized Multichannel Data - An apparatus including a wireless configuration interface system configured to assist in establishing a wireless short range communication connection of the apparatus with at least one device; and a wireless short range communication system which, after the wireless communication connection has been established with the at least one device, is configured to separately transmit to each of the at least one device at least one channel of multichannel media for either at least two of the devices to each play a different one of the channels of the multichannel media, or at least two of the apparatus and the at least one device to each play a different one of the channels of the multichannel media. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334511 | PROVIDING ACCESS TO AND ENABLING FUNCTIONALITY OF FIRST DEVICE BASED ON COMMUNICATION WITH SECOND DEVICE - In one aspect, a device includes a processor and a memory accessible to the processor. The memory bears instructions executable by the processor to receive at least a first Bluetooth low energy (BLE) signal from a BLE beacon and enable a first function of the first device at least in part in based on receipt of the first BLE signal. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334514 | INFORMATION PROVIDING SYSTEM, INFORMATION TERMINAL AND INFORMATION PROVIDING SERVER - An information providing system provides delivery information using identification information of an object equipped with a wireless communication function. The information providing system includes a registering unit that registers in advance first link information linking the identification information of the object to the delivery information; a generating unit that generates second link information linking the identification information of the object to delivery information different from the delivery information of the first link information, based on the identification information of the object and identification information of a plurality of information terminals, acquired by communication with the information terminals, which can communicate with the object; and an information providing unit that delivers the delivery information linked by the second link information. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334517 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR MANAGEMENT OF CONNECTED DEVICES, SUCH AS IN A WIRELESS DOCKING ENVIRONMENT - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments enable a wireless dockee device to analyze capability-related information characterizing one or more wireless and/or wired peripheral devices and planned use-related information, and perform an action based on the planned use-related information. A wireless docking center device manages the peripheral devices on behalf of the wireless dockee device. Example embodiments of the invention include wireless docking management of peripheral devices, power management in wireless docking, intelligent and automatic connection activation in wireless docking, notification based on user proximity to a peripheral device in wireless docking, and redirection of data transmission between peripheral devices in wireless docking Wireless docking is mentioned as example herein, but similar solutions may also be applied to other connected device environments. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334519 | MOBILE DEVICE PAIRING - Tools (systems, apparatuses, methodologies, computer program products, etc.) for pairing electronic devices including touchscreen-enabled electronic devices, and for facilitating communication between paired electronic devices. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334520 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING BUILT-IN MICROPHONE OF PORTABLE TERMINAL - An electronic device and method are provided. The electronic device includes a built-in microphone; a Bluetooth communication module configured to wirelessly connect to a first wireless external device including a speaker and a second wireless external device including a speaker; and a controller configured to detect a call establishment, if the call establishment is detected while one of the first and second wireless external devices is connected to the electronic device, operate the built-in microphone to receive sound based on information regarding the connected one of the first and second wireless external devices, and if the call establishment is detected while both of the first and second wireless external devices are connected to the electronic device, select one of the first and second wireless external devices and provide an incoming call audio signal received via the call establishment to the selected one of the first and second wireless external devices. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334549 | Reflection-Based Location Detection - There is provided a system including a mobile device configured to transmit a first advertisement to a listening device and a repeater device, receive a data advertisement from the listening device in response to transmitting the first advertisement to the listening device, the data advertisement including a time difference between the listening device receiving the first advertisement and the listening device receiving a second advertisement transmitted from the repeater device in response to transmitting the first advertisement from the mobile device to the repeater device, and determine a location of the mobile device using the data advertisement including the time difference. In the system, the listening device and the repeater device may each include Bluetooth low energy devices. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334657 | Wirelessly Connecting Mobile Devices and Wearable Devices - The various aspects provide for wirelessly connecting mobile devices and wearable devices, which may enhance battery life and user experience. The embodiments may include a wearable device that may receive from a mobile device a request to wirelessly connect to the wearable device. The wearable device may establish with the mobile device a first wireless connection. The wearable device may recognize termination of the first wireless connection by the mobile device and send to the mobile device a second request to establish a second wireless connection. The wearable device may establish the second wireless connection between the mobile device and the wearable device. | 11-19-2015 |
20150341438 | MANAGEMENT OF MULTIPLE DEVICES WITHIN AN ANALYTE MONITORING ENVIRONMENT - Systems, devices, and methods are provided for the management of multiple sensor control devices and/or multiple reader devices in an in vivo analyte monitoring environment, and also for resolving conflicts when merging data collected by different reader devices. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341440 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LAUNCHING AN APPLICATION - A vehicle computing system having at least one controller communicating with a transceiver. The at least one controller programed to configure a wireless signal having a first application identifier for a first application to be launched at a nomadic device. The at least one controller further programed to broadcast the wireless signal including the first application identifier via the transceiver. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341743 | BLUE-TOOTH COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND BROADCASTING METHOD THEREOF - A blue-tooth communication system and a broadcasting method therefor are provided. The broadcasting method includes: detecting N blue-tooth receivers in a blue-tooth range of a blue-tooth transmitter; broadcasting a data package during at least one transmitting timing window by the blue-tooth transmitter; and receiving N returned data packages which are respectively returned by the corresponding blue-tooth receivers by the blue-tooth transmitter during N receiving timing windows. At least one of the N returned data packages includes an acknowledge message which is recorded in a header field of the corresponding returned data package. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341744 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LAUNCHING AN APPLICATION - A mobile device comprising at least one controller in communication with one or more transceivers. The one or more transceivers are capable of communication with a vehicle computing system. The at least one controller configured to establish a communication link with the vehicle computing system. The controller further configured to receive a signal having an unique user identification from the vehicle computing system. The controller further configured to search for a mobile application based on the signal and enable the mobile application that matches the unique user identifier. The controller further configured to launch the mobile application. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341820 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication method for use in a communication system having a plurality of communication devices includes: a first communication device transmitting within a predefined period a connection request signal requesting a connection with another communication device; a second communication device transmitting a connection permit signal which contains the number of connection request signals received during the predefined period as the number of requesting candidates; the first communication device obtaining a transmission probability defining the probability of signal transmission such that the transmission probability decreases as the number of requesting candidates contained in the connection permit signal received from the second communication device increases; and the first communication device making a decision as to whether or not to transmit a signal out in accordance with the transmission probability at the timing that the signal can be transmitted to the second communication device. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341849 | METHOD FOR SEARCHING FOR SERVICE OR ADVERTISING IN DIRECT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and a method for executing a service search and an advertisement. To this end, the method by which a first wireless device performs a service search comprises the steps of: transmitting a probe request frame which includes a hash value; receiving, from a second wireless device, a probe response frame which includes first service information corresponding to the hash value; transmitting a service search request frame which includes a search word to the second wireless device; and receiving, from the second wireless device, a service search response frame which includes second service information corresponding to the search word, wherein if a preset symbol is attached to the search word, the second service information can include at least one service name having the search word as a prefix. | 11-26-2015 |
20150349853 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR WIRELESS CAPACITIVE RECEPTION AND TRANSMISSION OF SIGNALS WITH DISTORTION COMPENSATION IN A CHANNEL (VARIANTS) - Disclosed is a system for wireless capacitive reception and transmission of signals with distortion compensation in a channel, including a transmitting and a receiving apparatuses, which are configured, respectively, of wirelessly transmitting and receiving signals, wherein the transmitting apparatus comprises a signal precompensator with an input for data signals which are transmitted, a signal driver with an input for prepared signals and precompensation signals, and transmitting terminals which are spaced apart and are connected to the outputs of the signal driver in such a way that corresponding electrical fields are produced. The receiving apparatus includes spaced-apart receiving terminals, which are capable of detecting the electrical fields produced by the transmitting terminals and received signals which are reproduced on the receiving terminals, and an adaptive signal corrector, the inputs of said adaptive signal correcter being connected to the receiving terminals, and which adaptive signal corrector has outputs for received data signals. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350002 | HANDLING SIGNALS - Apparatus comprises a memory configured to store a matrix of transmit data; a multi-element antenna; and a transmitter configured to transmit a signal from a multi-element antenna as part of a packet within a transmit period in a switching interval by: switching between different elements of the multi-element antenna in a sequence of transmit intervals within the transmit period; and deriving the signal for transmission in different transmit intervals from different ones of the transmit data in the matrix. Also, apparatus comprises a receiver configured to receive plural packets; and an accumulator configured, for each packet, to accumulate signals received in a switching interval of the packet. The apparatus is configured to: derive a correlation metric for each of the packets from the accumulated signals for the packets; identify a packet with the best correlation metric; identify a direction associated with the packet identified as having the best correlation metric; and provide the direction as an output. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350810 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SIMULTANEOUS WIRELESS CONTROL OF MULTIPLE PERIPHERAL DEVICES - A system for controlling a plurality of peripheral devices includes a portable electronic device and a plurality of peripheral devices in wireless communication with the portable electronic device. The portable electronic device includes a processor configured to connect to each of the plurality of peripheral devices one at a time based on round-robin scheduling. The processor is configured to execute an instruction for searching for a broadcast signal transmitted from a selected one of the plurality of peripheral devices. The processor is configured to execute an instruction to wirelessly connect with the selected one of the plurality of peripheral devices. The processor is configured to execute an instruction to send a control signal to the selected one of the plurality of peripheral devices. The processor is configured to execute an instruction to terminate the connection between the portable electronic device and the selected one of the plurality of peripheral devices. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350811 | Bluetooth Broadcasting System and Method - A Bluetooth broadcasting system uses Bluetooth technology to deliver content between communication devices in a common network. The content is delivered and received publicly, anonymously, or selectively with codes. The content includes emergency broadcasts, nonemergency broadcasts, or personal broadcasts. The type of content dictates how the content is delivered. For example, an emergency broadcast is publicly delivered from a victim to all communication devices having the software application and Bluetooth enabled. While a personal message is delivered from a sender to a recipient who share a unique and private code. A range module enables public safety personnel to set a desired range for emergency messages. A code module displays to recipients to select a correct code for receiving a nonemergency and personal message. An information level module enables a sender to set the amount of personal and contact information to be delivered. The messages can be recorded, saved, and sent. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350814 | COMPANION APPLICATION FOR ACTIVITY COOPERATION - The described embodiments augment an activity performed in a first application at a source electronic device using a controller at a companion electronic device. The source electronic device receives controller information describing a controller that the activity performed in the first application accepts controller data from, determines a controller identifier for the controller information, and broadcasts a controller advertisement comprising the controller identifier. Upon receiving the controller advertisement, the companion electronic device determines whether a second application that can provide the controller data is available at the companion electronic device. If the second application is available, the companion electronic device establishes a cooperative-activity communication channel with the source electronic device. The companion electronic device uses the cooperative-activity communication channel to provide controller data to the source electronic device. The source electronic device provides the controller data to the first application to cause a corresponding action to be performed. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350815 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR SHARING NETWORK - A method, a device and a system for sharing network among a plurality of mobile terminals are provided. The method includes: connecting the plurality of mobile terminals with each other through short-range wireless communication; and when a first mobile terminal has a network request, transmitting a network packet corresponding to the network request to a network side by the first mobile terminal or a second mobile terminal, so as to share a network, wherein the second mobile terminal is connected to the first mobile terminal through short-range wireless communication and can access the network. The method can share network bandwidth among the plurality of mobile terminals, so as to utilize network bandwidth of each mobile terminal optimally. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350820 | BEACON ADDITIONAL SERVICE OF ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR SAME BACKGROUND ARTS - An electronic device and method are disclosed herein. The electronic device includes a beacon module for detecting a beacon signal, and a processor. The processor may implement the method, including detecting a transmitted beacon signal by a beacon interface, extracting additional information from the detected beacon signal, and accessing a resource using the extracted additional information, the resource accessed from at least one of a source of the beacon signal and a remote terminal discoverable through a network. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350821 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK ASSOCIATION AND SECURITY FOR CONTROL OF INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT IN HARSH ENVIRONMENTS - In certain embodiments, a system includes a master node device. The master node device includes communication circuitry configured to facilitate communication with a welding power supply unit via a long-range communication link, and to facilitate wireless communication with one or more welding-related devices via a short-range wireless communication network. The master node device also includes control circuitry configured to associate the one or more welding-related devices with the short-range wireless communication network. The master node device further includes means for manually initiating association of the one or more welding-related devices with the short-range wireless communication network. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350857 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING VOICE CALL IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to a communication method and a system for converging a 5 | 12-03-2015 |
20150350865 | PREDEFINED WIRELESS PAIRING - In order to reduce latency and overhead during the device discovery process, operations involved in pairing of two electronic devices may be predefined. In particular, when a user specifies a new electronic device in a list of their electronic devices, a computer provides a notification to these electronic devices. In response to the notification, a given one of the electronic devices generates encryption information and identification information for the given electronic device, and provides this encryption information and identification information to the new electronic device via a network (such as the Internet). Then, the new electronic device generates encryption information and identification information for the new electronic device, and provides this encryption information and identification information to the given electronic device via the network. This pairing information may subsequently facilitate secure wireless communication between the two electronic devices. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350946 | MOBILE STATION USE OF ROUND TRIP TIME MEASUREMENTS - Techniques are provided in which a mobile station may determine a first round-trip time (RTT) for a first measurement related communication between the transceiver and a first network device, wherein the first RTT comprises a uniform delay of time applied during the first measurement related communication by the first network device; Determine a second RTT for a second measurement related communication between the transceiver and a second network device, wherein the second RTT comprises the uniform delay of time applied during the second measurement related communication by the second network device; and determine, at least in part, a position of the mobile station with regard to at least the first and second network devices based, at least in part, on the first RTT and the second RTT. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351008 | Centralized Beacon Management Service - A centralized beacon management service includes a beacon database for storing beacon information for different enterprises. The beacon database includes tables that associate beacons deployed by enterprises with beacon information. The beacon information can include information for commissioning the beacons and payload data to be broadcast by the beacon to client devices within communication range of the beacon. Based on proximity sensing data provided by a client device, beacon information is retrieved and sent to the client device over a communication channel (e.g., WiFi, cellular) established with the client device. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351038 | OPERATING-MODE TRANSITIONS BASED ON ADVERTISING INFORMATION - In order to reduce the power consumption of a receiving electronic device, received advertising beacons may be filtered so that the receiving electronic device selectively transitions from a power-saving mode to a normal operating mode. For example, the receiving electronic device may receive a beacon with advertising information for a transmitting electronic device. If the advertising information is changed relative to a previous version of the advertising information for the transmitting electronic device, the receiving electronic device may transition from the power-saving mode to the normal operating mode. In this way, the receiving electronic device may ‘wake up’ if it receives an advertisement that it wants to act on, such as advertisements for: file sharing, wireless streaming of information, proximity pairing and/or continuity of a user experience with an application when the user transitions from the transmitting electronic device to the receiving electronic device. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351143 | SEAMLESS CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN HEARING AID AND MULTIPLE DEVICES - A method for controlling a peripheral from a group of computing devices is provided. The method sets up a group of computing devices for providing media content and control settings to a peripheral device such as a hearing aid. The computing devices in the group are interconnected by a network and exchange data with each other regarding the peripheral. A master device in the group is directly paired with the peripheral device and can use the pairing connection to provide media content or to apply the control settings to the peripheral device. The peripheral device is paired with only the master devices of the group. A slave device can request to directly pair with the peripheral device and become the master device in order to provide media content to the peripheral. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351144 | WIRELESS TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND IMPLEMENTATION METHOD THEREOF - A wireless transmission device and an implementation method thereof, wherein the wireless transmission device is plugged and connected to a host device for receiving a control signal transmitted from an electronic device (such as a mobile phone or a tablet PC), and the wireless transmission device is formed by a central processing module, a storage module, a Bluetooth transmission module and a transmission connector. The central processing module is electrically connected to the storage module, the Bluetooth transmission module and the transmission connector for converting the control signal received by the Bluetooth transmission module into a control instruction, and the transmission connector transmits the control instruction to the host device, and the electronic data stored in the storage module may be transmitted to the host device through the transmission connector and displayed on a display screen connected to the host device. | 12-03-2015 |
20150358053 | AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT, ANTENNA MODULE, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - An amplifier circuit performs an amplification of a carrier signal received by a transmitting and receiving unit. The amplifier circuit includes an impedance matching circuit that performs matching of an impedance of the amplifier circuit when the transmitting and receiving unit and the amplifier circuit are connected. A superposition wave generating unit generates a superposition wave which is superimposed on the received carrier signal. A driver outputs an amplified carrier signal which is obtained by adding the superposition wave to the received carrier signal. An amplitude detecting unit detects whether the received carrier signal is a predetermined carrier signal superimposed with a predetermined communication signal, based on changes of an amplitude value of the received carrier signal. When the predetermined carrier signal is detected, the amplifier circuit outputs the amplified carrier signal. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358759 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BIDIRECTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS VIA A BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY ADVERTISE LINK - The present invention relates to a method, to a computer program and to a system to establish wireless communication between at least two Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) devices the method comprising the steps of:
| 12-10-2015 |
20150358763 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING DATA COMMUNICATION BETWEEN AN IMPLANTABLE MEDICAL DEVICE AND A PATIENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - Embodiments of the invention provide methods, systems, and devices for enabling data communication between an IMD and a host computer. In one embodiment, a device is provided that comprises a frequency and protocol agile transceiver capable of communicating with an IMD via a first communications link and with a host computer via a second wireless communications link, wherein the first wireless communication link is configured for substantially shorter communication range than the second wireless communication link. An apparatus is provided according to another embodiment of the invention that comprises an interface between an IMD and a communications device, such as a wireless telephone or a two-way wireless pager. The interface can communicate directly with the IMD to retrieve clinical data stored in the IMD and can utilize the communications device to transmit the clinical data to a host computer. | 12-10-2015 |
20150359022 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF BLUETOOTH PAIRING WITH A GROUP OF BLUETOOTH DEVICES - A method for pairing a first Bluetooth device with an individual Bluetooth device address with a group of Bluetooth devices, said method comprising: assigning a group Bluetooth device address to each of said group of Bluetooth devices; the first Bluetooth device exchanging Bluetooth device addresses with a second Bluetooth device from said group of Bluetooth devices when said first Bluetooth device comes within communication range of said second Bluetooth device; establishing a link key; storing the group Bluetooth device address and the link key; the first Bluetooth device exchanging Bluetooth device addresses with a third Bluetooth device from said group of Bluetooth devices when said first Bluetooth device comes within communication range of said third Bluetooth device; recognizing the group Bluetooth device address assigned to the third Bluetooth device; and establishing a communications channel between said first Bluetooth device and said third Bluetooth device based on said link key. | 12-10-2015 |
20150365134 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXPANDING FIELD OF NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION - A method, apparatus and computer program are disclosed, which receive information from near field communication for a near field communication application or service, using a protocol stack containing an SNEP layer, SNEP referring to a simple near field communication data exchange format exchange protocol. A short message is received from a mobile telecommunication network. A near field communication extension message is identified in the received short message. The identified near field communication extension message is passed to the near field communication application or service via the SNEP layer in response to the identifying of the near field communication extension message. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365779 | ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION RADIO - A electromagnetic induction wireless communication system including: a magnetic antenna; an electric antenna; a tuning capacitor coupled to the magnetic antenna configured to tune the magnetic antenna; a controller configured to control the operation of the communication system; a signal source coupled to the controller configured to produce a communication signal used to drive the magnetic antenna and the electric antenna; a voltage control unit coupled to the signal source configured to produce one of an amplitude difference, phase difference, and an amplitude and a phase difference between the communication signal used to drive the magnetic antenna and electric antenna. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365780 | Virtual Bluetooth Controller Interfaces - Example embodiments herein disclose methods, Bluetooth devices, and computer-readable media a capable of providing virtual Bluetooth controller (VBC) interfaces for a number of applications. In particular, an example method includes determining a number of applications configured to communicate with a Bluetooth device. Further, the method includes determining a number of virtual Bluetooth controller (VBC) interfaces for the number of applications, where the number of VBC interfaces correspond to respective Bluetooth static random (BSR) addresses of a number of BSR addresses. Yet further, the method includes determining one or more advertising packets for the number of VBC interfaces, where the one or more advertising packets include the respective BSR addresses of the number of BSR addresses. In addition, the method includes transmitting, via a radio of the Bluetooth device, the one or more advertising packets for the number of VBC interfaces. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365781 | SERVER SYSTEMS - Disclosed herein are several server systems, each of which comprises a storage unit, a near field communication (NFC) module, and a central processing module. One embodiment further comprises a management module configured to manage the server system and to generate or modify a system datum. The storage unit stores the system datum. The NFC module, coupled with the storage unit, selectively accesses the system datum in the storage unit and transmits it by NFC. Another embodiment further comprises, in addition to the management module, a basic input/output system (BIOS) or a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), or replaces the management module with a baseboard management controller (BMC), the BIOS or the CPLD. In one embodiment, the NFC module comprises an NFC transceiver unit and an NFC control unit, the latter configured to access the system datum in the storage unit through or bypassing the BMC. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365784 | METHOD AND WEARABLE DEVICE FOR INTERWORKING WITH A PORTABLE TERMINAL - A portable terminal and method thereof are provided for interworking with a wearable device. The method includes recognizing that the wearable device is placed on the portable terminal; displaying first screen data including information of the wearable device; sensing movement of the wearable device; and displaying second screen data corresponding to the movement. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365785 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETECTING A HANDSHAKE SIGNAL - A device is provided for use with a wireless transceiver operable to transmit a handshake signal within a short wavelength frequency band. The device includes a processing component, a location determining component, a mode determining component, a detecting component and a transmitting component. The processing component is operable to operate in a first mode and a second mode. The location determining component determines when the processing component is in a predetermined location and generates a location signal when the processing component is in the predetermined location. The mode determining component generates a location mode signal based on the location signal. The detecting component detects, based on the location signal, the handshake signal and generates a wake-up signal based on the handshake signal. The transmitting component transmits, based on the wake-up signal, a transmission signal to the wireless transceiver within the short wavelength frequency band. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365786 | MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A mobile phone includes a display module, an obtaining module configured to obtain an image, a storage module configured to associate and store person information and address information of a communicated device, a first extraction module configured to extract first address information corresponding to person information of at least one person included in the image from address information, a second extraction module configured to extract second address information corresponding to person information having a predetermined relationship with the person information of at least one person included in the image from address information, and a selection display executing module configured to display on the display module a selection screen for selection of at least one address information from the first address information and the second address information | 12-17-2015 |
20150365817 | TRANSFERRING INFORMATION TO A MOBILE DEVICE - In some examples, a first mobile device is placed into communication with a second mobile device, such as through a short-range radio connection. User information is transferred from the first mobile device to the second mobile device. For example, application information for an application and saved application state information may be transferred to the second mobile device. The second mobile device may configure the application on the second mobile device based in part on the application state information received from the first mobile device. In addition, a user communication ID may be transferred from the first mobile device to the second mobile device, and may be used for communication with a third device with which the first mobile device has previously communicated. For instance, the user communication ID may be used in place of a device communication ID when sending communications from the second mobile device. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365981 | QUALITY OF SERVICE USING A VEHICLE HEAD UNIT - A communication system and various methods using that communication system, including a method of providing short-range wireless communication (SRWC) in a vehicle. The method includes the steps of: (a) establishing a first wireless connection over a first communication channel between a vehicle multi-tainment unit (VMU) and a first mobile device, wherein, with respect to the first wireless connection, the VMU operates as a server and the first mobile device operates as a client; (b) establishing a second wireless connection over a second communication channel between the VMU and a second mobile device, wherein, with respect to the second wireless connection, the second mobile device operates as a server and the VMU operates as a client; and (c) following steps (a) and (b), controlling the second mobile device from the VMU to change the second wireless connection from the second communication channel to the first communication channel. | 12-17-2015 |
20150372770 | BODY COUPLED COMMUNIICATION SYSTEM - A body communication system ( | 12-24-2015 |
20150373121 | WIRELESS PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM - A wireless passenger service system for an aircraft having a power system and a cabin management system that includes a wireless receiver and a wireless passenger control unit. The wireless receiver is able to receive a wireless signal and is operationally connected to the power and cabin management systems of the aircraft. The wireless passenger control unit is able to send a wireless signal. In response to receiving a wireless signal from the wireless passenger control unit, the wireless receiver is configured to activate at least one passenger service function of the cabin management system of the aircraft. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373179 | METHOD FOR SELECTING AND CONFIGURING WIRELESS CONNECTIONS IN AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method and apparatus for selecting and configuring Bluetooth connections in an Electronic device. A graphical user interface is displayed upon an electronic device. A current network profile is selected from multiple available Bluetooth network profiles displayed by the graphical user interface. When a current network profile is selected, the associated connection profile for the current network is automatically displayed. The electronic device is then connected to the current network by communicatively coupling with a Bluetooth wireless device coupled with the current network. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373484 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND METHOD OF PAIRING IN ELECTRONIC APPARATUS - An electronic apparatus is provided. The electronic apparatus includes a communication unit configured to transmit an altered apparatus Identification (ID) and a controller configured to detect a user's action in a pairing mode of the electronic apparatus, to determine additional information according to the user's action, and to transmit the altered apparatus ID including an apparatus ID of the electronic apparatus and the additional information to another electronic apparatus that can be paired with the electronic apparatus. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373485 | SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ACCESS DEVICE, PORTABLE TERMINAL FOR DISCOVERING SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ACCESS DEVICE, AND SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A short-range wireless communication access device controls a first network interface to send broadcast radio data packets for allowing a portable terminal to discover the short-range wireless communication access device in a specified first time range, on the basis of time synchronized with the portable terminal to access a short-range wireless communication network. Further, the short-range wireless communication access device receives operation scenario information for controlling whether to send the broadcast radio data packets through a second network interface, and controls the first network interface to cyclically send the broadcast radio data packets in accordance with a repetition cycle in the first time range based on the repetition cycle included in the operation scenario information, the specified first time range in the repetition cycle, and the time determined from the radio signal received through the second network interface. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373486 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING MOBILE SERVICES OUTSIDE OF CELLULAR COVERAGE - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided for providing mobile services outside of cellular coverage. In the context of a method, an indication is received, at an intermediate device, of data for transmission to a target device for which cellular network communication between an originating device and the target device is not currently available. The method also includes receiving data corresponding to the indication from a memory buffer associated with a short range communication link. The method further includes causing communication of the data via a long range communication link to enable communication of the data to the target device. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373526 | Method and Apparatus for Providing Files to Electornic Devices - Method and apparatus for transferring a file from a sending wireless device to a receiving wireless device in a short-range wireless system. A file to be sent to the receiving wireless device is selected on the sending wireless device. The sending wireless device has a device list of receiving wireless devices. If the receiving wireless device is absent on the device list, the sending wireless device searches and identifies new devices. A device among the identified new devices is selected as the receiving wireless device. A connection is established between the sending wireless device and the receiving wireless device; and the file is sent to the receiving wireless device. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373622 | METHOD AND DEVICE TO PROHIBIT COMMUNICATIONS WHICH REQUIRE ACTIVE PARTICIPATION BY THE DRIVER OF A VEHICLE - Operating a vehicle while texting, using applications or using a mobile device has been shown to be very dangerous and increase the likelihood of accidents. An exemplary embodiment relates to a method, techniques and a system that can prohibit the use of a mobile device by the driver while driving. An exemplary embodiment relates to the fields of communications and control and combines the use of social media and smartphones to create methods to prohibit the use of specific communications on the mobile device including but not limited to texting, etc. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373747 | MANAGING A GROUP OF WIRELESS DEVICES IN CLOSE PROXIMITY - A first device may transmit a message, such as a connection request, to a second device, and the message may include a friendly name associated with the first device. A connection may be established between the first and second devices based on the message, and first data may be transmitted via the connection. The first device may generate a modified message by modifying the friendly name based on second data, and the first device may forward the modified message to a third device. The third device may evaluate the modified message to identify and extract the second data. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373749 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR IMPROVING SECURITY FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - In an example embodiment, a method includes receiving, by an apparatus, one or more wireless discovery messages; determining, by the apparatus, whether a wireless device is in close proximity to the apparatus based on information obtained from the one or more received wireless discovery messages; exchanging, by the apparatus, messages with the wireless device in response to having determined that the wireless device is in close proximity to the apparatus; measuring, by the apparatus, signal strength of the exchanged messages while distance changes to the wireless device; and determining, by the apparatus, whether changes in the measured signal strength of the exchanged messages satisfy a predetermined behavior expected for signal strength as distance varies. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373757 | WIRELESS CONNECTION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS CONNECTION METHOD - A wireless connection system having at least one host device and at least one client device is disclosed. The client device is brought close to the host device, near field wireless communications are performed and an authentication process of authenticating the client device is performed with connection setting information through the near field wireless communications when wireless communications are performed between the host device and the client device based on a predetermined wireless communication standard. When the client device has been successfully authenticated with the connection setting information in the authentication process, the client device is permitted to perform the wireless communications. When the client device has not been successfully authenticated with the connection setting information in the authentication process, the client device is not permitted to perform the wireless communications. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373760 | DEVICE PAIRING - A technique for facilitating connection establishment between wireless devices is provided. According to an example embodiment, the technique comprises storing, at an apparatus for wireless communication, one or more default authentication keys for authenticating a wireless device that is not paired with the apparatus; selectively operating the apparatus in one of predefined states, said states comprising at least a first state where the apparatus is connectable but not discoverable by other wireless devices; verifying, in response to having received, when the apparatus is operated in said first state, a connection request from a first wireless device that is not paired with the apparatus, whether at least one of said authentication keys is a valid authentication key for said first wireless device, and establishing, in response to having found at least one of said authentication keys to be a valid authentication key for said first wireless device, an authenticated connection with said first wireless device. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373761 | PAIRING METHOD AND TERMINAL APPARATUS - In a wireless communication system which includes a first electronic device, a second electronic device, and a plurality of third electronic devices, a pairing method of pairing the second electronic device and a particular third electronic device, includes a step in which the first electronic device receives a plurality of pass keys from part or all of the plurality of third electronic devices, a step in which the first electronic device identifies that a pass key of the particular third electronic device is included in the plurality of pass keys using identification information, a step of transmitting the pass key of the particular third electronic device to the second electronic device, a step in which the second electronic device transmits the pass key of the second electronic device to the particular third electronic device, and a step of establishing connection between the second and third electronic devices. | 12-24-2015 |
20150381269 | STREAMING DISPLAY DATA FROM A MOBILE DEVICE USING BACKSCATTER COMMUNICATIONS - A method of wirelessly communicating a screen image between a mobile device and a base station coupled to a display terminal includes establishing a wireless display session between the mobile device and the base station. Electromagnetic (“EM”) radiation emitted from the base station is incident upon an antenna of the mobile device. The screen image is transmitted to the base station for display on the display terminal by modulating a radar cross-section of the mobile device between two or more states to encode the screen image on a backscatter channel of the EM radiation. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381290 | System and Method for Communication Between Mobile Devices Using Digital/Acoustic Techniques - Techniques have been developed for transmitting and receiving information conveyed through the air from one portable device to another as a generally unperceivable coding within an otherwise recognizable acoustic signal. For example, in some embodiments in accordance with the present invention(s), information is acoustically communicated from a first handheld device toward a second by encoding the information in a signal that, when converted into acoustic energy at an acoustic transducer of the first handheld device, is characterized in that the acoustic energy is discernable to a human ear yet the encoding of the information therein is generally not perceivable by the human. The acoustic energy is transmitted from the acoustic transducer of the first handheld device toward the second handheld device across an air gap that constitutes a substantially entirety of the distance between the devices. Acoustic energy received at the second handheld device may then be processed using signal processing techniques tailored to detection of the particular information encodings employed. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381788 | Method for Establishing Bluetooth Connection and Mobile Terminal - A method for establishing a Bluetooth® connection, where the method includes: establishing data connections with at least two Bluetooth® devices; obtaining a voice connection instruction, where the voice connection instruction includes identification information of a target Bluetooth® device selected by a user from the Bluetooth® devices; and establishing a voice connection between the mobile terminal and the target Bluetooth® device according to the voice connection instruction; and a mobile terminal, a Bluetooth® device, and a system. A voice connection is established with a Bluetooth® device selected by a user, so as to improve an extent to which a Bluetooth® connection is established intelligently and a capability of interacting with the user. Therefore, the user can, according to needs, freely select a Bluetooth® device with which a connection is established, thereby improving convenience of the user in using the Bluetooth® device. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382133 | METHOD TO DISPLAY CONTEXT DEPENDENT INFORMATION TO A USER IN OR FROM A VEHICLE - A method for a user electronic device to present information to a user. A status of a short range communication link between the user electronic device and a vehicle electronic device of a vehicle is monitored. When the user electronic device and the vehicle electronic device are connected, first data associated with the vehicle is retrieved from the vehicle electronic device. Dependent upon the first data, second data, including vehicle data, is retrieved. The second data is formatted in accordance with a messaging protocol of the vehicle electronic device and transmitted to the vehicle electronic device for presentation on a visual or audio interface of the vehicle electronic device. When the short range link is terminated, or at regular intervals, the location of the user electronic device may be stored to enable the vehicle to be located at a later time. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382134 | INPUT SYSTEM - An input system is applicable to a computer. The input system includes a wireless operating apparatus and a portable electronic apparatus. The wireless operating apparatus includes an operating unit and a wireless transmitting unit. The operating unit generates data information. The wireless transmitting unit is electrically connected to the operating unit, and is used to transmit the data information in a wireless manner. The portable electronic apparatus includes a display device, a wireless receiving unit, and a data transmission port. The wireless receiving unit is electrically connected to the display device and the data transmission port, and is used to receive the data information from the wireless transmitting unit of the wireless operating apparatus. The data transmission port transmits the data information to the computer by using a data transmission line. Therefore, a portable electronic apparatus is used as a wireless transceiver. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382142 | METHOD FOR ADJUSTING PROXIMITY SERVICE RANGE AND FILTERING METHOD THEREFOR - The present application provides a method for enabling a UE (User Equipment) detecting a proximity service to adjust the detection range. The method for adjusting the detection range includes the steps of: enabling the detecting UE having joined in the same group of the proximity service to compare the number of the UEs requiring a relay with a predetermined threshold value; enabling the detecting UE to decide whether to expand its detection range if the number of the UEs requiring a relay exceeds the predetermined threshold value; enabling the detecting UE to decide whether to reduce its detection range if the number of the UEs requiring a relay is less than the predetermined threshold value; and enabling the detecting UE to adjust the range class so as to expand or reduce the detection range. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382304 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BLUETOOTH DEVICE SYNCHRONIZATION - The disclosure generally relates to a method and apparatus for Low-Energy Bluetooth (BLE) synchronization. In one embodiment, the disclosure enables BLE devices enabled with both BLE and IEEE 802.11 radios to synchronization using a non-BLE beacon signal. The beacon signal and available shared information between corresponding BLE devices are used to synchronize the BLE devices. In an exemplary method, the first BLE device receives a beacon signal having a reference timestamp and determines a first time-offset as a function of the reference timestamp. The first BLE device then selects an event time window as a function of the first time-offset and conducts a BLE event (advertising or scanning) during the event time window. The second BLE device also uses the beacon signal and the shared information to complement the first device's event by one of advertising or scanning. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382383 | INITIATING AND MONITORING WIRELESS CONNECTION BETWEEN STATION AND ACCESS POINT - Methods, systems, and computer readable media may be operable to facilitate the initiation of a wireless setup between a station and an access point upon the station receiving a predetermined input from a user. The status of a wireless connection between the station and an access point may be displayed to a user through one or more display interfaces or light indicators associated with the station. The methods, systems, and computer readable media described herein allow a user to initiate and monitor a wireless setup between a station and an access point without having to connect a display device to the station. | 12-31-2015 |
20160006852 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO SORT MESSAGES EXCHANGED IN A WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK ACCORDING TO RELATIVE ORIENTATIONS AND POSITIONS OF SENDING AND RECEIVING DEVICES - Apparatus and methods are described herein for sorting messages sent and received, for example in a wireless Personal Area Network (PAN), according to whether the receiving device is within a radially defined region of space. The space may be defined by one or more parameters set by the sending device. A wireless PAN may define the range of peer-to-peer transmission and reception of radio waves between at least two wireless devices. Location and orientation information may be transmitted by a communication device and combined with user and/or software defined boundary limits to filter short range wireless messages. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007138 | COORDINATED GROUPING FOR MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATIONS GROUP BASED SERVICES - A system is disclosed for the coordinated grouping of devices for receipt of network layer group based services. A service layer system such as an SCS generates a request to generate a group of devices to receive network layer services. The request is received at a network layer system such as, for example, an MTC-IWF. Network layer systems such as, for example, an HSS, identifies a manner of communicating the requested service to identified devices and communicates with the devices to provision the devices so as to be included in the requested group. The network layer systems communicate an identifier to the service layer system which the service layer may subsequently use to request execution of the service by the identified group of devices. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007140 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REGISTERING NEW BLUETOOTH DEVICE - An in-vehicle Bluetooth pairing method includes commencing an automatic Bluetooth connection procedure with a first user device when power is supplied to an in-vehicle head unit. A progress state of the commenced automatic Bluetooth connection procedure is checked according to a request of new user device registration. A disconnection procedure corresponding to the checked progress state is performed, and a pairing mode for the new user device registration is applied. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007144 | NETWORK ACCESS METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a network access method and device. The method includes: establishing a Bluetooth connection to a Bluetooth terminal; receiving, by using the Bluetooth connection, a network access request sent by the Bluetooth terminal; and if the Bluetooth terminal is an authorized device, activating a Bluetooth network sharing function automatically and forwarding the network access request to a wide area network. In the network access method and device provided in the present invention, a simple process and low time consumption are achieved for network access. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007181 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR DEVICE TRACKING - In an example embodiment, a method includes measuring, by an apparatus, signal strength of wireless device discovery messages received from a wireless communication device, the wireless discovery messages including a device address of the wireless communication device; storing, by the apparatus, the device address of the wireless communication device and the measured signal strength of the received wireless discovery messages; detecting, by apparatus, other wireless device discovery messages having a different device address; measuring, by apparatus, received signal strengths of the other wireless device discovery messages; and if no messages are received including the device address of the wireless communication device, comparing, by apparatus, the stored signal strength of the wireless discovery messages received from the wireless communication device with the measured received signal strength of the other wireless device discovery messages to determine whether a source of the other wireless device discovery messages is the wireless communication device. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007182 | Directing Information Based on Device Proximity - A method includes detecting on a computing device that a second computing device is within wireless range of the computing device and transmitting an instruction from the computing device to a server to send contact information for interactive communications to the second computing device. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007184 | IDENTIFYING COMPUTER DEVICES IN PROXIMITY TO A GIVEN ORIGIN - A proximity detector running on a server receives a first beacon signature from a first client device, the first beacon signature indicating a plurality of beacons detected by the first client device. The proximity detector determines a second beacon signature associated with a second client device, wherein the second client device is associated with at least one of the plurality of beacons detected by the first client device, and compares the first beacon signature to the second beacon signature. The proximity detector determines a proximity of the first client device and the second client device in view of the comparing of the first beacon signature and the second beacon signature. | 01-07-2016 |
20160013872 | METHODS OF PROVIDING BODY AREA NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS WHEN A USER TOUCHES A BUTTON OF A WIRELESS ELECTRONIC DEVICE, AND RELATED WIRELESS ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND WEARABLE WIRELESS ELECTRONIC DEVICES | 01-14-2016 |
20160014545 | AUTOMATIC CONNECTION OF BLUETOOTH HUMAN INTERFACE DEVICES | 01-14-2016 |
20160014546 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR APPLICATION DRIVING SERVICE | 01-14-2016 |
20160014548 | Method And System For Integrating Wearable Glasses To Vehicle | 01-14-2016 |
20160014550 | METHOD OF DYNAMICALLY MANAGING BLE COMMUNICATIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SYSTEM THEREOF | 01-14-2016 |
20160014551 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PEER-TO-PEER, PAIRED, AND SYNCHRONIZED NODES | 01-14-2016 |
20160014582 | Proximity Based Social Networking | 01-14-2016 |
20160014631 | TRAFFIC CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS | 01-14-2016 |
20160021483 | METHOD OF PROVIDING INFORMATION ON DEVICE-TO-DEVICE RESOURCES, CELLULAR NETWORK NODE AND USER EQUIPMENT - To provide information on resources for a device-to-device discovery and/or a device-to-device communication, a comparison of device-to-device resources for a cell and further device-to-device resources for at least one further cell different from the cell is performed. At least one information element of a message for transmission to a user equipment is generated based on a result of the comparison. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021486 | CLOSE PROXIMITY VEHICULAR DATA TRANSMISSION - A system and method for close proximity vehicular data transmission may include detecting, by a processor onboard a vehicle, a predetermined condition for activating a short range radio frequency (RF) transceiver onboard the vehicle. The onboard short range RF transceiver is configured to transmit and receive signals within a limited distance from the onboard short range RF transceiver. The onboard short range RF transceiver is activated in response to at least detecting the predetermined condition. A communications link is established between the onboard short range RF transceiver and a predetermined mobile communications device assigned to a particular crew member. Vehicular data is transmitted from the onboard short range RF transceiver to the predetermined mobile communications device. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021488 | Range Management with Bluetooth Low Energy - An example method for adjusting the range of transmission of advertising packets is disclosed. In particular, method includes receiving, from an application executing on a mobile computing device, a request. The request may include a request to transmit an advertisement packet via a short-range wireless device of the computing device. Additionally, the request may include a power level for the transmission of the advertisement packet via the short-range wireless device. Additionally, the method may include causing the transmission, via the short-range wireless device, of the advertisement packet. The short-range wireless device may be configured to transmit the advertisement packet at a transmission power level less than or equal to the requested power level. Further, the requested power level may be less than or equal to a nominal power level for the short-range wireless device. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021494 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ADAPTIVE MULTI-FEATURE SEMANTIC LOCATION SENSING - This disclosure describes systems, methods, and computer-readable media related to employing adaptive multi-feature semantic location sensing methods to estimate the semantic location of a mobile device. A set of wireless data scans associated with one or more access points at one or more locations may be received. One or more features of the one or more locations may be identified, based upon the set of wireless data scans wherein the features are associated with one or more location metrics. At least one of the one or more access points may be determined to be associated with a first location based upon, at least in part, the set of wireless data scans. A first classifier for the first location may be generated based upon, at least in part, the one or more features and the associated access points. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021499 | Motion Detection with Bluetooth Low Energy Scan - An example method for providing motion detection via a Bluetooth low energy scan is disclosed. In particular, the method includes performing a scan via a Bluetooth unit of a computing device. Further, the method includes receiving one or more advertisement packets via the Bluetooth unit in response to the performed scan. The one or more advertisement packets may be associated with a respective Bluetooth device. Yet further, the method includes determining if a location of the Bluetooth unit has changed based on received one or more advertisement packets. The determining includes comparing the received one or more advertisement packets with a set of one or more reference advertisement packets. In addition, the method includes enabling an application processing unit in response to determining the Bluetooth unit has changed location. The application processing unit may be configured to determine the location of the Bluetooth unit. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021517 | TERMINAL APPARATUS COMMUNICATING AMONG A PLURALITY OF TERMINAL APPARATUSES WITHIN A GROUP, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A second terminal apparatus, which is used in substitution for a first terminal apparatus that creates a group, collects a third terminal apparatus and so forth that are to be participated in the group. A first request signal receiver receives from the first terminal apparatus a first request signal by which to request the collection of the third terminal apparatus and so forth participated in the group. A second request signal transmitter transmits a second request signal by which to request the third terminal apparatus and so forth to participate in the group, when the first request signal receiver has received the first request signal. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021687 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REUSING GENERIC TOKENS USING BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY (BLE) BEACONS - Systems and methods for reusing generic tokens using a Bluetooth® low energy (BLE) beacon. The systems and methods include a user device including a wireless transceiver, a memory for storing a generic token, and one or more processors coupled to the memory and the wireless transceiver. The wireless transceiver is configured to communicate with a beacon using a BLE communications protocol, receive a beacon identifier from the beacon, send a check in request to the beacon, and receive token differences from the beacon. The processors are configured to recreate a custom token based on the stored generic token and the received token differences. The beacon is configured to forward the check in request to a server. The server is configured to verify the user device and create the custom token and the token differences between the custom and generic tokens for return to the user device via the beacon. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021689 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING WIRELESS TERMINAL TO VEHICLE - A method for connecting a wireless terminal to a vehicle includes checking a wired connection or a wireless connection between an infortainment system of the vehicle and the wireless terminal, recognizing identification of the wireless terminal, determining whether or not the wireless terminal is authenticated and thus suitable for connection with the infortainment system, and connecting the wireless terminal to the infortainment system only in a case in which the wireless terminal is authenticated based on a result of the determining of whether or not the wireless terminal is authenticated. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021690 | METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING A DIRECT CONNECTION BETWEEN APPARATUSES AND SYSTEMS USING THE SAME - The invention introduces a method for establishing a direct connection, executed by a processing unit of a first electronic apparatus, which contains at least the following steps. A first location of the first electronic apparatus and an angle of the first electronic apparatus are obtained. Second locations are collected via a communications interface of the first electronic apparatus, where each second location is of a second electronic apparatus. It is determined which of the second electronic apparatuses the first electronic apparatus is aimed at, according to the first location, the second locations, and the angle of the first electronic apparatus. A direct connection is established with the determined second electronic apparatus via the first communications interface. | 01-21-2016 |
20160028493 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - According to an embodiment, a communication apparatus includes a substrate, a first communication unit, a first signal line, a first terminal, a second signal line, a variable capacitance portion, and an inductor portion. The substrate is provided with a reference potential electrode. The first communication unit transmits and receives. One end of the first signal line is connected to the first communication unit. The first terminal is connected to the other end of the first signal line. The second signal line is connected to the first signal line through the first terminal. One end of the variable capacitance portion is connected to the other end of the second signal line. One end of the inductor portion is connected to the other end of the variable capacitance portion. The communication apparatus executes communication through a living body. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028869 | PROVIDING REMOTE INTERACTIONS WITH HOST DEVICE USING A WIRELESS DEVICE - A wearable device that communicates with a host device can be used to initiate a communication functionality of the host device (e.g., telephone calls, text messages). The wearable device can obtain user input indicating a recipient of the communication and in some instances content for the communication and can provide an instruction to the host device. The host device can use the indicated recipient and content to initiate communication and where applicable to send the content. Recipients and/or content can be selected from predefined lists available on the wearable device. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029148 | METHODS FOR COMMUNICATING SENSOR DATA BETWEEN DEVICES - A low power method of wirelessly transmitting sensor data between devices is disclosed in which a data connection is not required to be established between the devices in order to transfer the sensor data. The method comprises providing a first device ( | 01-28-2016 |
20160029149 | LOW POWER CONSUMPTION SHORT RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-28-2016 |
20160029152 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM - A communication apparatus that determines between apparatuses whether a service is executable before a wireless LAN connection is established and that establishes the wireless LAN connection only when the service is executable includes a determination unit that determines, if the communication apparatus and a communication partner apparatus overlap each other in terms of their roles as a requester when performing a handover, whether to transmit a response message in response to a request message received from the communication partner apparatus, and a transmission unit that transmits, if the determination unit determines to transmit the response message, a response message rejecting the connection using a second communication method to the communication partner apparatus using a first communication unit that performs wireless communication using a first communication method, regardless of whether the connection using the second communication method is executable. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029154 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR FACILITATING BLUETOOTH PAIRING USING A CAMERA AS A BARCODE SCANNER - Embodiments of the systems, devices and methods described herein generally facilitate performing Bluetooth pairing between a first device and a second device. In accordance with one example embodiment, a first device generates a barcode that encodes Bluetooth pairing data for transmission to the second device, wherein the pairing data comprises a Bluetooth address associated with the first device, and wherein the pairing data further comprises a personal identification number usable to complete the Bluetooth pairing, the barcode is transmitted to the second device, and Bluetooth pairing is performed with the second device. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029198 | IMMEDIATE CONNECTION FOLLOWING DEVICE DISCOVERY - An electronic device is described. During operation, this electronic device activates a communication channel having a carrier frequency in a radio in an interface circuit to listen for an advertising frame of interest from another electronic device during a scan window having a predefined duration. If the advertising frame of interest is received from the other electronic device, the electronic device terminates the listening before the predefined duration has expired and, using the communication channel in the radio, transmits the connect request to the other electronic device to establish the connection with the other electronic device. In this way, the delay between discovery of the other electronic device and establishing the connection is reduced. In addition, the power consumed by the electronic device while scanning for the other electronic device and initiating the connection is reduced. | 01-28-2016 |
20160037285 | ACCESSING SERIAL CONSOLE PORT OF A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - A computer readable medium includes instructions which cause performance of operations to configure an access point, including receiving, by a wireless communication controller, wireless communication signals detected by a wireless communication antenna. The access point includes the wireless communication antenna, the wireless communication controller, and a System-On-Chip (SOC) having a serial port configured for receiving input from the wireless communication controller. The wireless communication signals include configuration commands. The operations further include generating, by the wireless communication controller, serial signals based on the wireless communication signals, the serial signals including the configuration commands. The operations further include receiving, by the SOC from the wireless communication controller, the serial signals including the configuration commands in the wireless communication signals detected by the wireless communication antenna, and configuring the access point based on the configuration commands received in the wireless communication signals detected by the wireless communication antenna. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037563 | CONNECTING WIRELESS DEVICES USING VISUAL IMAGE CAPTURE AND PROCESSING - A method facilitates establishment of wireless pairing connections between wireless electronic devices by: initiating, at a first device, a connection utility that enables the first device to establish a wireless connection with at least one second device; capturing an image of a selected second device, representing a second device to which a wireless connection is desired; and scanning for identifying information about each discoverable second device that is within a connection range of the first device. The method further includes: forwarding the captured image and any detected identifying information to a wireless connectivity assist (WCA) service; receiving wireless connection setup and configuration (WCSC) instructions from the WCA service; and establishing the wireless connection with the selected second device utilizing wireless connection setup and configuration (WCSC) instructions received from the WCA service. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037566 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZED BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY COMMUNICATIONS - This concerns a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) device, or system, or method of operating a BLE device and a respective computer program. The BLE device comprises a transceiver to broadcast the at least one advertising packet, a processor connected to the transceiver to generate the advertising packet and/or to trigger broadcasting thereof according to a broadcasting schedule. The device further comprises a verification element connected to the processor and being capable of ascertaining if a predefined condition is met, at least one of the verification element and the processor is capable of modifying the broadcasting schedule based on the predefined condition's ascertainment. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037573 | MOBILE DEVICE AND METHOD OF PAIRING THE SAME WITH ELECTRONIC DEVICE - Methods and devices are provided of pairing glasses with an electronic device is provided. The glasses store identification information and device information regarding a plurality of electronic devices, the device information being usable to pair the glasses with the plurality of electronic devices. The glasses obtain an image of at least one electronic device via a camera of the glasses. The glasses extract identification information of the at least one included in the image. The glasses select the electronic device based on the extracted identification information and the stored identification information. The glasses pair with the electronic device based on the device information of the electronic device. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037574 | DEVICE AUTO PAIRING WITHOUT TOUCH AND TAP - A device-to-device (D2D) pairing assembly comprises: a first and a second device detecting and communicating (DDC) component communicatively coupled to each other and to a microprocessor that executes a device pairing parameter exchange (DPPE) utility, which configures the D2D pairing assembly to: detect a communicative coupling of a first user device to the first DDC component; receive from the first user device at least one first pairing parameter, which first pairing parameter enables another device to connect to and participate in a pairing session with the first user device; detect a communicative coupling of a second user device to the second DDC component; and communicate the at least one first pairing parameter to the second user device, via the second DDC component, to trigger the second user device to connect to and participate in a pairing session with the first user device via a direct device-to-device communication channel. | 02-04-2016 |
20160044443 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING AND MANAGING COMMUNICATION ON DEDICATED SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION CHANNELS - The present disclosure relates to computer-implemented systems and methods for transmitting and receiving audio and video data. A method may include receiving, by a device including one or more processors and a radio transceiver, an indication that the device is a master device. The method may also include determining that the master device is located outside of a vehicle. Furthermore, the method may include identifying, based on determining that the master device is located outside of the vehicle, a client device. Additionally, the method may include transmitting a signal, to the client device, to indicate a peer-to-peer connection in a communication channel is enabled. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044444 | DETERMINING RANGE IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - A method includes obtaining a received signal strength indication and processing the received signal strength indication to determine a range between a first device and a second device free of prior configuration data between the first device and the second device. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044485 | TERMINAL DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, AND CONTROL DEVICE - In a proximity service, when positional information is notifies to a server in advance and the proximity service is started, UE that transmits and receives data receives the proximity degree including a communication target UE from the server before proximity discovery is performed to discover the communication target UE, and the UE controls unnecessary proximity discovery by discovering the communication target UE based on the proximity degree. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044727 | ACCESS CLASS BARRING FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE PROXIMITY SERVICE COMMUNICATIONS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for access class barring (ACB) operations for device-to-device (D2D proximity service communications. An ACB parameter may be defined and assigned to UEs that is associated with discovery or communication operations for normal and high priority user equipments (UEs). The UE may identify a resource for D2D proximity service communications and, when not barred, send a radio resource control (RRC) connection message requesting the available resource. An establishment cause may be defined and included in the RRC connection request message that corresponds to the ACB parameter. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044738 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH CONNECTION RESTORATION AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A wireless communication device includes a wireless charging circuit configurable to receive a wireless power signal from a power transmitting unit and to charge the wireless communication device under control of a processing device and in conjunction with a charging session with the power transmitting unit. A wireless interface device operates under control of the processing device to establish a wireless connection with the power transmitting unit via a connection establishment procedure, wherein the wireless connection is separate from the wireless power signal. Control data is exchanged with the power transmitting unit via the wireless connection, wherein the control data is used by the processing device to implement the charging session with the wireless charging circuit. A response is generated to a disruption event of the wireless communication device that includes implementing a restoration procedure for restoring the wireless connection, without implementing the connection establishment procedure. | 02-11-2016 |
20160049072 | MULTI-DEVICE SYSTEM WITH SIMPLIFIED COMMUNICATION - A system including at least a first command issuing device and at least one second command receiving device, each including a control unit and a short-range radio communication unit, the system configured to use at least a first functional profile allowing execution of a first function, the first profile allowing the first device to generate a first coded message, the first function being executed by the at least one second command receiving device upon receipt of the first coded message by the second device. The system is further configured such that the second command receiving device can execute a second function in response to receipt of the first coded message. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050015 | GPS TIME-AIDING AND FREQUENCY CORRECTION - A system and method for time-aiding an autonomous Global Positioning System device over a Bluetooth connection allows for a faster time to fix by allowing faster acquisition of time and ephemeris data. The time-aiding information may be distributed in a one-to-one manner or in a manner that allows for the synchronization of multiple devices. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050515 | IDENTIFYING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM USING A BLE WIFI BRIDGE - An identification management system is provided at a dwelling. One or more bridges are at the dwelling, each including a computing device in an interior of a dwelling with an internet-facing radio, and a second radio communicating with one or more Bluetooth LE devices or an equivalent device. One or more Bluetooth devices or Bluetooth peripheral devices, collectively, Bluetooth devices are in communication with the bridge. The bridge uses detection of a Bluetooth device that is associated with a person to track the person relative to the dwelling. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050516 | A RECEIVER, TRANSCEIVER, TRANSCEIVER MODULE FOR A BODY COUPLED COMMUNICATION DEVICE, A BODY COUPLED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A METHOD OF WAKING-UP A BODY COUPLED RECEIVER OF A BODY COUPLED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A receiver module ( | 02-18-2016 |
20160050518 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal including a display configured to display information; a short range communication module configured to exchange a signal with an external control device; and a controller configured to receive the signal from the external control device, determine a context at a timing point of receiving the signal, and control an operation corresponding to the signal to be performed in the determined context. Further, the operation includes at least one of activation/deactivation of the display, an activation/deactivation of a lock mode of the mobile terminal, a volume operation and a camera operation. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050553 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERWORKING BETWEEN DEVICES FOR SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION - The present disclosure relates to a communication method and system for converging a 5 | 02-18-2016 |
20160050695 | METHOD FOR DETECTING MANIPULATION BY A USER OF A DEVICE PROVIDED WITH A COMUNICATION TAG, CORRESPONDING COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT, USER TERMINAL DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - The invention concerns a method for detecting manipulation by a user of a device, provided with a communication tag. The user wears a user terminal provided with a communication tag reader, which detects the communication tag associated with the device as soon as the user is sufficiently close to the device. The communication tag reader is activated after a local area network connection has been established between the user terminal and the device, or between the user terminal and a local area network to which the appliance is known to be connected. Through this local network connection, the user terminal may also communicate information on the user to the device, which then knows who is manipulating its front panel. The device may access a user profile stored in the user terminal, in order to deliver a personalized service to the user. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050699 | PAIRING OF BLUETOOTH DEVICES - A method includes a computer device receiving at least one vehicle ID of at least one vehicle; the computer device receiving at least one mobile device ID of at least one mobile device; and the computer device conducting two-way authentication between the at least one mobile device and the at least one vehicle using the at least one vehicle ID and the mobile device ID prior to the at least one mobile device being in direct communication with the at least vehicle. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050705 | DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may detect another WTRU over bluetooth. The WTRU may send to the another WTRU a message to transfer selected media. The WTRU may transfer the selected media to the another WTRU over WiFi. | 02-18-2016 |
20160056884 | TRANSFERRING DATA OVER BLUETOOTH USING INTERMEDIARY BRIDGE - In one or more embodiments, a first device such as a mobile phone can establish a wireless connection with second device, and the second device can act as a bridge between the first device and a peripheral device, such as a printer, so that the first device need not establish a secure pairing or other type of direct connection with the peripheral device. The second device provides a profile of the peripheral to the first device. The first device can then use the profile to access the peripheral device via the second device, with the second device passing data between the first device and the peripheral identified by the profile. This bridging feature simplifies the process of using the peripheral devices, since no secure pairing or other configuration procedure is needed to enable the first device to access the peripheral. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057264 | WIRELESS MUTE DEVICE AND METHOD - A receiving device having a wireless transmission circuit arranged to form a logical communications link between the wireless transmission circuit and an audio output device. The wireless transmission circuit is arranged to communicate audio data to the audio output device via the logical communications link. A wireless reception circuit is arranged to receive user commands, and a first logic circuit is arranged to identify a mute command received via the wireless reception circuit. A second logic circuit is arranged to mute the audio data from transmission to the audio output device while maintaining the logical communications link | 02-25-2016 |
20160057266 | Phonepad - Example apparatus and methods concern a first device (e.g., phone) having a first set of input or output capabilities interacting with a second device(s) (e.g., tablet) having a second set of input or output capabilities. The first device may detect the second device and establish a communication link with the second device. The first device may receive inputs presented at the second device and provide outputs to be presented by the second device. In response to an action (e.g., touch, gesture) on the second device, an application running on the first device may receive an input, which may in turn determine an output that is provided to the second device. The first device may use the second device to provide an input/output experience that is superior to what the first device could provide with its own built-in input/output components. The combination saves energy and reduces computing complexity. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057564 | BLUETOOTH PAIRING METHOD USING A WIRED CONNECTION - A Bluetooth pairing method using a wired connection comprises steps of: connecting a mobile terminal and an infotainment system of a vehicle via a wired connection; inputting a control signal starting a Bluetooth pairing; executing a dedicated application for a Bluetooth pairing provided in the mobile terminal by a controller provided in the infotainment system; transmitting information of the infotainment system for the Bluetooth pairing to the dedicated APP by the controller; and automatically executing a connection screen for the Bluetooth pairing by controlling the mobile terminal based on the information by the dedicated application, wherein the connection screen is a screen displaying the information of the infotainment system. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057799 | INDIVIDUALIZED SHORT-RANGE RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, SYSTEM AND CENTRAL DEVICE FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION THEREOF - A short-range radio communication method is presented including the steps of introducing a first communication device; introducing a plurality of second communication devices in operable communication with the first communication device; detecting one or more signals emitted from the plurality of second communication devices; identifying one or more of the plurality of second communication devices emitting the one or more signals by a unique identifier; and setting up an individualized communication between the first communication device and the one or more second communication devices detected and identified within a region defined by the first communication device. | 02-25-2016 |
20160058133 | ANALOG WATCH WITH DIGITAL WEARABLE SYSTEM - Systems and methods are disclosed for augmenting a wrist-worn jewelry by wearing the jewelry on a top of the wrist and a digital wearable device secured to the analog watch and on the bottom of the wrist; twisting the wrist to read digital messages transmitted from a telephone; and capturing vital sign or fitness information using the digital wearable device. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065301 | LIGHTWEIGHT PAIRING AND CONNECTION TRANSFER PROTOCOL VIA GESTURE-DRIVEN SHARED SECRETS - A gesture is performed by a wireless accessory attempting to pair with a device. The gesture comprises a series of user interactions associated with accessory data detected at the accessory and device data detected at the device. The device begins looking for accessories advertising a Bluetooth service indicating they are attempting to pair. Once an accessory is identified, the device compares the device data to the accessory data for that particular accessory. If the accessory data matches the device data, the gesture detected at the device was made by the accessory and a secure connection can be established. Based on the secure connection, a clock associated with the accessory may synchronize with a clock associated with the device for additional security and fidelity. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066124 | ALERT MANAGER - Systems, methods, and computer-readable medium are provided for managing alerts of one or more computing devices. For example, a user device may configure a user interface to present electronic content corresponding to a first category. The user device may also receive a data structure of rules. At least one rule may correspond to an entry of the data structure for an alert category pairing. The user device may receive information that identifies and incoming alert and determine a presentation method for the incoming alert based at least in part on a corresponding rule. The user device may also present the incoming based at least in part on the determined presentation method. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066125 | SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NODE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR ALARMING ON THE NODE DEVICE ASSEMBLING STATE - A wireless communication node device is provided. The node device includes a network adaptor configured to perform short-range wireless communication, a channel manager configured to receive channel setting information comprising information about channel member nodes through the network adaptor, and to store the received channel setting information, a channel state manager configured to update a channel state table which indicates that the node device is connected to another node device, in response to the node device being connected to the other node device through the network adaptor, and to propagate the updated connection state table via the network adaptor, and an alarm controller configured to verify a connection state between the channel member nodes by analyzing the connection state table, and to generate an alarm control signal based on the verified connection state. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066126 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE SYSTEM, ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD - In an embodiment, an electronic device system including an electronic device and a mobile device detachably connected to the electronic device is provided. The electronic device includes a first detector and a transceiver. The first detector is configured to detect that the mobile device is connected to the electronic device. The transceiver is configured to wirelessly communicate with the mobile device when the first detector detects that the mobile device is connected to the electronic device. The mobile device includes a controller. The controller is configured to execute a first operation when the transceiver performs the wireless communication. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066127 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING AND AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - A control method and an electronic device thereof are provided. A first electronic device can include a communication unit and a control unit configured to perform providing device identification information to a second electronic device based on a beacon received from the second electronic device through the communication unit, and conducting at least one function corresponding to the signal received from the second electronic device. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066129 | SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH SENDER AND RECEIVER - The invention relates to a process to check the pairing of a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) transmitter with a BLE receiver, comprising the following steps:
| 03-03-2016 |
20160066162 | BEACON CONTENT PROPAGATION - Systems and methods for transmitting beacon messages are described. A beacon message is transmitted from a first beacon device and broadcast to an area within a transmission range of the first beacon device. A mobile device receives and stores the message. When the mobile device is out of the range of the first beacon device and within the range of a second beacon device, the message is transmitted to the second beacon device and broadcast by the second beacon device. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066174 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROXIMITY DISCOVERY FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A method, network node, and user equipments for providing parameters to a first user equipment served by the network element, the parameters describing at least a second user equipment for the purpose of the first user equipment initiating a device to device proximity discovery service with the second user equipment, the method collecting information for user equipments desiring device to device proximity discovery; creating a candidate user equipment list for a candidate tier based on the collected information at the network element, wherein each candidate tier comprises one or more thresholds based on timing advance values in use at the first or the at least the second user equipment; and providing the parameters describing at least a second user equipment to the first user equipment. | 03-03-2016 |
20160072177 | ANTENNAS AND METHODS OF IMPLEMENTING THE SAME FOR WEARABLE PODS AND DEVICES THAT INCLUDE METALIZED INTERFACES - Embodiments relate generally to electrical and electronic hardware, computer software, wired and wireless network communications, and computing devices, and, in particular, to antenna structures and formation methods for a wearable pod and/or device implementing a touch-sensitive interface in a metal pod cover. According to an embodiment, formation of a wearable pod includes selecting an antenna having a first surface area that extends beyond a second surface area associated with an attachment portion a cradle for a wearable pod. The method also includes forming an under-anchor portion composed of an interface material configured to bind to the cradle and to an elastomer, and disposing the antenna on a surface of the under-anchor portion at a distance from the second surface area associated with the attachment portion. Also, the method can include forming an over-anchor portion. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073218 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION - A method and device for establishing a Bluetooth connection are provided. The method includes: generating, by a first electrical device, a first part of a Bluetooth identifier according to a user's name and a Bluetooth network-card address; generating a second part of the Bluetooth identifier according to the first part of the Bluetooth identifier, a private key, and a first algorithm; generating the Bluetooth identifier according to the first part of the Bluetooth identifier and the second part of the Bluetooth identifier; generating a password according to the Bluetooth identifier, the private key and a second algorithm; transmitting, by a second electrical device, a Bluetooth pairing request according to the Bluetooth identifier, the private key, the first algorithm, and the second algorithm; and responding, by the first electrical device, the Bluetooth pairing request to establish the Bluetooth connection with the second electrical device. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073219 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication device comprises: a free band calculation means that calculates a free band for Bluetooth™ communication based on a condition of communication with a communicating party's device; a service selection means that selects a service which can be assigned to the free band, from among a service group by a Bluetooth profile for making communication with the communicating party's device wireless, based on predetermined service selection information; a service assigning means that assigns the selected service to the free band; and a service control means that controls communication with the communicating party's device for the service assigned to the free band. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073220 | Rate Indication and Link Adaptation for Long Range Wireless Networks - A method of fast link adaptation for Bluetooth long-range wireless networks is provided. A novel rate indication (RI) field is incorporated in a data packet to enable auto detection of rate adaptation at the receiver side. The data packet comprises a preamble, a first packet portion including the RI field, and a second packet portion including the PDU. The first packet portion is encoded with a first rate while the second packet portion is encoded with a second rate indicated by the RI field. The transmitting device raise/lower the encoding rate when the link quality is good/poor. The receiving device can provide recommended rate or link quality feedback information via an LMP message to help the transmitting device making rate adaptation decision. The transmitter can unilaterally decide the data rate for the second packet portion without receiver recommendation. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073275 | WORK MACHINE AND COMMUNICATION MONITORING - Disclosed are a work machine and a communication monitoring method that allow recording of work information even in the event of interruption of communication in a communication path between the work machine, a mobile communication terminal and a server. There is provided a control section ( | 03-10-2016 |
20160073363 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CAPABLE OF PERFORMING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION VIA ANTENNA AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A communication apparatus comprises a close proximity wireless communication unit which is able to perform close proximity wireless communication with an external apparatus; a power control unit which starts control of power supply of the communication apparatus when the close proximity wireless communication unit receives electromagnetic waves from the external apparatus; and a control unit which executes shutdown processing for reducing power to each block controlled by the power control unit, wherein when the shutdown processing is executed, the control unit disables the close proximity wireless communication unit before start of the shutdown processing. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073439 | DEVICE SELECTION - A technique for wireless communication is provided. According to an example embodiment, the technique comprises carrying out a proximity-based device selection for a second device in response to receiving, from a first device, one or more control messages that indicate presence of said second device and invoking at least one of one or more predefined actions in dependence of identity of said second device in response to said proximity-based device selection having resulted in selecting said second device. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073444 | MEDICAL APPARATUS, MEDICAL APPARATUS CONTROL METHOD, AND MEDICAL APPARATUS COOPERATION SYSTEM - A medical apparatus which is communicable with a plurality of CPR assisting devices, the medical apparatus includes: a connection destination determining unit which is configured to determine a connection destination CPR assisting device that is a connection destination, from the plurality of CPR assisting devices based on a predetermined rule; and a communicating unit which is configured to communicate only with the connection destination CPR assisting device. | 03-10-2016 |
20160080037 | PROXIMATE COMMUNICATION WITH A TARGET DEVICE - Systems and methods may use proximate communication to retrieve information pertaining to a target device. In one example, the method may include detecting the target device within a vicinity of a user device, receiving an information request response communication including information pertaining to the target device, and receiving an operation request response communication including information pertaining to a performed operation. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080891 | TRACKING AND COMMUNICATING WITH SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - First communication circuitry of a first device is made discoverable by a second device via a short-range wireless protocol. A device name for the first communication circuitry is set to a user identifier that is specific to a user of the first device. The second device discovers the first device and the user identifier is transmitted to the second device. A response message can also be included with the user identifier and can be appended to the user identifier. The second device stores the user identifier, and the response message if included, in a log to record a presence of the user of the first device within a range between the first and second devices of the short-range wireless protocol. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080892 | TRACKING AND COMMUNICATING WITH SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - First communication circuitry of a first device is made discoverable by a second device via a short-range wireless protocol. A device name for the first communication circuitry is set to a user identifier that is specific to a user of the first device. The second device discovers the first device and the user identifier is transmitted to the second device. A response message can also be included with the user identifier and can be appended to the user identifier. The second device stores the user identifier, and the response message if included, in a log to record a presence of the user of the first device within a range between the first and second devices of the short-range wireless protocol. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080894 | BLUETOOTH DEVICE, PROJECTION DEVICE AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD - A Bluetooth device used for data transmission between first and second peripheral devices is provided. The Bluetooth device includes a processing circuit and a Bluetooth chip configured to be capable of being operated in a transmitting mode and a receiving mode for data transmitting and data receiving, respectively. In the transmitting mode, a first communication link is established between the Bluetooth chip and the first peripheral device through a first communication protocol. The processing circuit establishes a second communication protocol. In the receiving mode, a second communication link is established between the Bluetooth chip and the second peripheral device through a third communication protocol. The second peripheral device transmits a data to the Bluetooth chip through the second communication link and the Bluetooth chip transmits, based on the second communication protocol, the received data to the first peripheral device through the first communication link simultaneously. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080896 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING AUDIO STREAM IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed herein is a method of sending and receiving(or transceiving) audio stream in a wireless communication system. The method performed by a first device includes receiving reference codec information from a second device, performing an audio codec negotiation procedure for determining an audio codec to be used to send and receive audio stream to and from a third device, checking whether the audio codec determined through the audio codec negotiation procedure is identical with the audio codec supportable by the second device, and operating in bypass mode or conversion mode based on a result of the check. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081135 | DISPLAY APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD OF THE SAME - Disclosed is a communication apparatus including: a first communicator configured to connect with an external device by a first communication mode; a second communicator configured to connect with the external device by a second communication mode different from the first communication mode; and a controller configured to control the first communicator to connect with the external device by the first communication mode, control the first communicator to obtain connection information of the second communication mode from the external device, control the second communicator to be connected to the external device by the second communication mode based on the connection information, and control at least one of the first communicator and the second communicator to transmit data to the external device. | 03-17-2016 |
20160088086 | COOPERATIVE OCCUPANT SENSING - A vehicle system includes a communication interface and a processing device. The communication interface is programmed to pair with at least one mobile device. The processing device is programmed to receive a data file, which includes occupant information, sent from the mobile device. The processing device is further programmed to update at least one vehicle setting based on the occupant information. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088421 | SERIALLY-CONNECTED BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY NODES - Bluetooth Low Energy nodes are serially-connected with a cable that includes power lines and can include communication wires. The nodes do not have individual batteries. Instead, a single common power source is connected to the wires to provide power for all the nodes. The nodes can also be connected in series with the communication wires (which can be the same as the power wires) along a length of the cable. A headend interface can also be connected at one point of the cable to provide a communication interface with the nodes. The nodes can transmit and/or receive beacons to be used for locationing of mobile devices. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088422 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SHARING LOCATION DATA WITHIN A VEHICLE - To determine the location of a portable device operating within a vehicle that is not in direct communication with the vehicle head unit, the portable device may detect an attached portable device which is directly connected to the head unit. Moreover, the portable device may send a request to the attached portable device for the current location of the vehicle. The attached portable device may then transmit the current location of the vehicle to the portable device, and the portable device may estimate its own location based on the current location of the vehicle. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088427 | LINKING MACHINE COMPONENTS IN BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY SYSTEM - The present disclosure is related to a method for linking an unlinked Bluetooth low energy (BLE) tagged component of a target machine with an electronic control module (ECM) of the target machine, wherein a plurality of machines are present. The method includes reading the unlinked BLE tagged component by the ECM of the target machine. The method also includes displaying the unlinked BLE tagged component of the available plurality of machines on a user interface of the ECM of the target machine. The method includes moving the target machine away from the other available plurality of machines by a pre-determined distance. Thereafter, the method includes linking the displayed unlinked BLE tagged component with the ECM of the target machine, when the distance between the target machine and other plurality of machines is more than the pre-determined distance. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088572 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND SYSTEM OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATIONS OF A MULTI-RADIO DEVICE - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and methods of controlling communications of a multi-radio device. For example, a multi-radio device may include a cellular controller to control communication of a cellular radio; and a BT controller to control a transmission power of a BT radio according to a first power level, the BT controller is to receive from the cellular controller an indication of a cellular downlink period, and, during the cellular downlink period, to restrict a transmission power of at least one BT discovery packet to no more than a second power level, which is less than the first power level. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088587 | Information Processing Method and Electronic Apparatus - An information processing method and an electronic apparatus are described. The method is applied to a first electronic apparatus and includes detecting a current state of the first electronic apparatus, when the first electronic apparatus receives first data information; sending the first data information to a second electronic apparatus connected with the first electronic apparatus, when the current state is a first state, so that the second electronic apparatus, after receiving the first data information, outputs a first prompt information; and outputting a second prompt information, when the current state is a second state different from the first state. In the technical solutions of the present disclosure, a new mode for controlling whether to perform the associated reminding between the electronic apparatuses or not is provided. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088670 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROCESSING AND TRANSMITTING SENSOR DATA - Systems and methods for continuous measurement of an analyte in a host are provided. The system generally includes a continuous analyte sensor configured to continuously measure a concentration of analyte in a host and a sensor electronics module physically connected to the continuous analyte sensor during sensor use, wherein the sensor electronics module is further configured to directly wirelessly communicate sensor information to one or more display devices. Establishment of communication between devices can involve using a unique identifier associated with the sensor electronics module to authenticate communication. Times tracked at the sensor electronics module and the display module can be at different resolutions, and the different resolutions can be translated to facilitate communication. In addition, the frequency of establishing communication channels between the sensor electronics module and the display devices can vary depending upon whether reference calibration information is being updated. | 03-24-2016 |
20160094932 | BASE STATION, USER TERMINAL, AND PROCESSOR - A base station comprises: a transmitter configured to transmit, to a user terminal, a measurement request for requesting a measurement of a reception intensity of a signal transmitted from another user terminal that performs D2D communication; a receiver configured to receive, from the user terminal, measurement information indicating the reception intensity measured on the basis of the measurement request; and a controller configured to determine on the basis of the measurement information whether or not the user terminal is able to perform the D2D communication. The controller controls to instruct the D2D communication to be performed when determining that the user terminal is able to perform the D2D communication. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094934 | WIRELESS PROXIMITY PAIRING OF USER-INTERFACE DEVICES - In order to establish a connection between electronic devices, after receiving an advertising packet from another electronic device, an electronic device compares a performance metric associated with the communication with the other electronic device with a threshold value. Based on the comparison, the electronic device provides pairing-intent information specifying a pairing intent for the electronic device and the other electronic device for presentation by the other electronic device. Moreover, after receiving additional pairing-intent information specifying the pairing intent from the other electronic device, the electronic device establishes the connection with the other electronic device when the additional pairing-intent information matches the pairing-intent information. For example, the pairing intent may include a gesture and/or a sequence of one or more characters, and the additional pairing-intent information may include: the sequence of one or more characters; accelerometer data corresponding to the gesture; and/or user-interface data corresponding to the gesture. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094935 | INDIVIDUALIZED SHORT-RANGE RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, SYSTEM AND CENTRAL DEVICE FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION THEREOF - A short-range radio communication method is presented including the steps of introducing a first communication device; introducing a plurality of second communication devices in operable communication with the first communication device; detecting one or more signals emitted from the plurality of second communication devices; identifying one or more of the plurality of second communication devices emitting the one or more signals by a unique identifier; and setting up an individualized communication between the first communication device and the one or more second communication devices detected and identified within a region defined by the first communication device. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095145 | AUTOMATIC PAIRING FOR PORTABLE COMPUTING DEVICES - Systems and methods may provide for establishing automatic pairing between a portable computing device and a base device. A processor is configured to receive a dock event notification when the portable computing device docks with the base device. An identifier retriever is configured to retrieve the identifier of a wireless communication component in a base device. A pairing portion of the processor is configured to automatically pair a wireless communication component in a portable computing device with the wireless communication component in the base device. Automatic wireless connection may follow automatic pairing. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095148 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR A CONTINUOUS MONITORING OF ANALYTE VALUES - Systems and methods for a continuous monitoring of analyte values received from an analyte sensor system are provided. One method for a wireless data communication between an analyte sensor system and a mobile device involves storing identification information associated with a transceiver of the analyte sensor system, the identification information entered by a user of the mobile device via a custom application running on the mobile device; causing the custom application to enter a background mode; searching for advertisement signals; receiving an advertisement signal from the transceiver; authenticating the transceiver based on the identification information; prompting the user to bring the custom application to a foreground mode; causing the custom application to request a confirmation from the user that a data connection with the transceiver is desired; receiving the confirmation from the user; and completing the data connection with the transceiver. | 03-31-2016 |
20160100275 | Short-Range Wireless Controller Filtering and Reporting - Methods and systems for filter data packets using an advertising data packet content filter are disclosed. An example method involves maintaining, by a Bluetooth device, an advertising data content filter. The advertising data content filter includes at least one content filter having at least one respective delivery mode that specifies when to deliver data packets matching the at least one content filter to a host Bluetooth stack. The method also involves receiving, by the Bluetooth device, a data packet from an advertising Bluetooth device. The method further involves determining, by the Bluetooth device, that content of the data packet matches a particular content filter of the advertising data content filter. And the method involves providing a portion of the data packet to the host Bluetooth stack in accordance with a particular delivery mode corresponding to the particular content filter. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100276 | Bluetooth Scanning Enhancements - Methods and systems for storing data regarding received advertising packets are disclosed. An example method involves determining parameters of at least one batch-scan mode for a Bluetooth device. The parameters of the at least one batch-scan mode specify a format for storing data regarding particular advertising packets that are received by the Bluetooth device when operating in the at least one batch-scan mode. The method also involves receiving, by the Bluetooth device, one or more advertising packets on an interval basis. Further, the method involves storing data regarding the one or more advertising packets into a memory of the Bluetooth device in accordance with the at least one batch-scan mode. And the method involves providing the stored data regarding the one or more advertising packets to the host Bluetooth stack. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100279 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PORTABLE STORAGE DEVICES - Systems, methods, and computer program products for portable storage devices are disclosed. A portable storage device may communicate with other devices utilizing a standardized communication system (“SCS”) to transmit data directly between devices including an SCS. The SCS may discover available devices. The portable storage device may be a wearable device. A user may be able to keep the portable storage device with them and access files on the portable storage device wirelessly using any other device utilizing an SCS. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100280 | DYNAMICALLY SWITCHING COMMUNICATION MODES IN MULTI-STANDARD WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - Techniques for wireless communications are described. In an example embodiment, a method of configuring wireless communication between two devices comprises using two different communication channels each having a different number of timeslots, in which the first channel is used in a first mode, the second channel is used in the second mode, and operation transitions between the first mode and the second mode in accordance with a predetermined characteristic corresponding to the communication between the two devices. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100649 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR A HELMET - A communication system for a helmet, in particular for a motorcycle helmet, comprises a communication device, and at least one audio transducer operatively connected to the communication device. According to the invention, the communication device includes bayonet coupling members for detachably coupling the communication device to the outer surface of the external shell of the helmet. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105759 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND DEVICE - A method and device are provided to assist and accomplish a communication between two strange communication terminals without Internet connection. The method includes transmitting a broadcast package via Bluetooth, which comprises identity information of a first communication terminal, obtaining communication information send by a second communication terminal after receiving the broadcast package, and communicated with the first communication terminal by the second communication terminal via Bluetooth, and assisting in completing a communication between the first communication terminal and the second communication terminal according to the communication information. The two communication terminal still can communicate with each other without Internet connection, and the position accuracy is improved by communicating with Bluetooth. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105760 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INFORMATION EXCHANGE, AND DELIVERY TERMINAL - A method and apparatus for information exchange, and a delivery terminal. A broadcast packet is received, which is periodically sent by a smart wearable device through short-range wireless communication, and the broadcast packet includes a delivery identifier of a commodity purchased by a user. The broadcast packet is parsed to obtain the delivery identifier. The delivery identifier is sent to a network side, so that the network side validates the delivery identifier. When the delivery identifier is valid, commodity information corresponding to the delivery identifier is acquired. A commodity is dispensed corresponding to the commodity information. A user who purchases a commodity online can pick up the commodity from a delivery terminal in a self-service manner. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105761 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING DIRECTIONALITY USING BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY COMMUNICATIONS - A method and system detect directionality between two objects by measuring angles of signals incident on antenna arrays on at least one side to determine angle of incidence. The methods utilize Bluetooth Low Energy communications as the means for both the control protocol and for providing updated information for deriving directionality. Directionality information is broadcast on selected BLE advertising or data channels, or broadcast using a hopping pattern over the BLE data channels, both at a specific interval duty cycle. If a hopping pattern is selected to transmit directionality information, then anchor information is simultaneously broadcast on the BLE advertising or data channels at a different, asynchronous duty cycle. In additional embodiments, signals incident on antenna arrays located on both target and tracking sides are used to determine angle of incidence, separate antennas are combined to form new antennas and antenna models are used to anticipate known antenna structure responses. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105762 | ASSET MONITORING AND TRACKING WITH A DISTRIBUTED BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY (BTLE) SENSOR SYSTEM OF HETEROGENEOUS SENSORS OVER WIRELESS NETWORKS - One or more Bluetooth assets having a Bluetooth radio are associated with a specific set of business rules by enterprise users. Scan event data is received from at least one of a plurality of Bluetooth sensors having Bluetooth radios, wirelessly distributed around a communication network. The scan event data results from a scan event wherein the Bluetooth asset was within range of the at least one Bluetooth sensor. The scan event is analyzed against the business rules. Responsive to determining that at scan event meets at least one condition of at least one of the specific set of business rules, a notification can be sent. One specific implementation in a smart car seat safety system notifies a parent when a child is unintentionally left in a smart car seat. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105788 | INTERLEAVING MULTIPLE BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY ADVERTISEMENTS - The present disclosure relates to broadcasting multiple packets at periodic intervals for receipt by other devices. A common device can transmit multiple beacon protocols simultaneously (i.e., an interleaving of different beacons), such that regardless of which protocol a receiving device supports, it may utilize advertisements from that common device (e.g., beacon). Thus, a single or common transmitting device may support multiple advertisements, such that the amount of hardware to be deployed in any network is reduced. Rather than deploying a device per beacon, a single device may be deployed and transmit multiple beacons. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105841 | Apparatus and Method for Transmitting/Receiving Power Transmitting Unit Presence Information in Wireless Charging Network - The present disclosure relates to a sensor network, machine type communication (MTC), machine-to-machine (M2M) communication, and technology for internet of things (IoT). The present disclosure may be applied to intelligent services based on the above technologies, such as smart home, smart building, smart city, smart car, connected car, health care, digital education, smart retail, security and safety services. A method for transmitting power transmitting unit (PTU) presence information is provided. The method includes receiving an advertisement message from a power receiving unit (PRU); determining whether a current state is a state that power is supplied to a resonator; and outputting PTU presence information indicating that a PTU exists, or transmitting the PTU presence information to a management server, if the current state is the state that the power is not supplied to the resonator. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105922 | SYSTEM FOR COUPLING MOBILE DEVICE TO HOST COMPUTER OF AUTOMOBILE AND METHOD THEREOF - A method for coupling a mobile device with a host computer of a vehicle includes establishing a connection relationship between the mobile device and the host computer, sending an invitation to the mobile device according to the established connection relationship, and coupling the mobile device to the host computer after accepting the invitation. The invitation is sent by the host computer automatically after the host computer is turned on. The mobile device couples to the host computer automatically through a corresponding coupling mechanism after accepting the invitation. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105923 | MOBILE TERMINAL, WEARABLE DEVICE, AND EQUIPMENT PAIRING METHOD - The present invention provides a mobile terminal includes a first information recording unit configured to record first motion information of the mobile terminal, and a first pairing processing unit configured to generate a first pairing request. The first pairing request includes the first motion information which will be used as a pairing key, or a second pairing request is parsed. The second pairing request is received from a wearable device by a first data interaction unit, and the second pairing request includes second motion information from the wearable device which will be used as a pairing key. When the second motion information matches the first motion information, the first pairing processing unit generates a response message for the second pairing request, to realize pairing and connection between the mobile terminal and the wearable device. The present invention further provides a wearable device and a pairing method. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105924 | MULTI-CONNECTION METHOD AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE SUPPORTING THE SAME - Disclosed is an electronic device including a communication interface configured to establish a communication channel with at least one another electronic device, and a processor configured to control a communication connection establishment with the at least one another electronic device through the communication interface, wherein when a specified electronic device is connected to the electronic device, the processor transmits additional connection information of the at least one another electronic device connectible to the at least one another electronic device to which the specified electronic device is already connected, to the specified electronic device. | 04-14-2016 |
20160112076 | SIGNAL TRANSMITTER, MESSAGE GENERATING SYSTEM AND SIGNAL POWER ADJUSTING METHOD - A signal transmitter with adjustable signal power includes a housing, a first adjustable metal shielding layer and a circuit board. The first adjustable metal shielding layer is disposed within the housing. The area of the first adjustable metal shielding layer consists of a first shielding area and a first un-shielding area. The first shielding area and the first un-shielding area are adjustable. The circuit board is disposed within the housing, and is located below the first adjustable metal shielding layer. The circuit board is electrically connected with the first adjustable metal shielding layer, and includes a signal emission chip. The signal emission chip is configured for adjusting signal emission power to emit a signal according to the first un-shielding area of the first adjustable metal shielding layer. A message generating system and a signal power adjusting method are disclosed herein as well. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112825 | Rendering A Media Stream By Wireless Devices Sharing Device Identifiers And Encryption Keys - Embodiments include systems and methods of enabling short-range communication among wireless devices. A passive sink device may receive an encryption key and wireless device addresses from an active sink device that has established a communication link with a source device. The passive sink device may use the encryption key and wireless device addresses to receive a media stream transmitted from the source device to the active sink device. The passive sink device may send to the active sink device information to cause the active sink device to instruct the source device to take an action to improve reception of the media stream by the passive sink device. In some embodiments, the processor of the passive sink device may send to the active sink device information about the media stream to cause the active sink device to instruct the source device to retransmit a portion of the media stream. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112839 | DEVICE SEARCHING METHOD AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE SUPPORTING THE SAME - An electronic device is provided. The electronic device includes a first communication module configured to support a first communication method, a second communication module configured to support a second communication method, a memory configured to store data used for operations of the first communication module and the second communication module, and a processor electrically connected to the first communication module, the second communication module, and the memory. | 04-21-2016 |
20160113049 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING TARGET IN DEVICE-TO-DEVICE DIRECT COMMUNICATION - If a master device in device-to-device direct communication designates an object type of a target to be communicated with, transmits a target discovery request message including the object type of the target to be communicated with to a plurality of neighboring target devices, and receives a target discovery response message from one or more target devices corresponding to the object type of the target to be communicated with among the plurality of target devices, the master device determines one target device among one or more target devices as the target to be communicated with. | 04-21-2016 |
20160113051 | DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS BASED ON CAPACITIVE SENSING AND COUPLING VIA HUMAN BODY OR DIRECT DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COUPLING - Systems, devices and techniques disclosed in this document provide device-to-device communications via a human body of a user between (1) a capacitor sensor touch screen device that includes a capacitor sensor touch screen that includes capacitor sensors and provides a display function and (2) a capacitor sensor device that includes one or more capacitor sensors that detect or sense, based on capacitive sensing and without providing a display function, signals transmitted from the capacitor sensor touch screen of the capacitor sensor touch screen device. The human body of a user operates as a signal transmitting medium. In addition, the systems, devices and techniques disclosed in this document provide device-to-device communications via direct device-to-device coupling between two capacitor sensor touch screen devices each including capacitor sensor touch screen that includes capacitor sensors and provides a display function. | 04-21-2016 |
20160119461 | WEARABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND TELEPHONE APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A wearable electronic device performs a voice communication through a host. The wearable electronic device includes a wireless transmission module, an identification module and a voice transceiver module. The wireless transmission module is configured to transmit signals with the host. The identification module is stored with a prepaid amount data provided to the host for a validation, and the wearable electronic device builds up a voice communication through the host when the validation is positive. The voice transceiver module is electrically connected to the wireless transmission module. A telephone apparatus using the aforementioned wearable electronic device is also provided. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119743 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING DEVICE AND DEVICE THEREOF - A device and a method of controlling the device are provided. The method includes detecting a mobile device within a distance from the device, receiving user configuration information from the mobile device, and performing an operation of the device based on the user configuration information. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119878 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION - A method for controlling a Bluetooth connection includes turning off an ignition of a vehicle. It is determined whether a terminal connected to a Bluetooth system provided in the vehicle exists or not. When it is determined that the connected terminal exists as a result of determining, a disconnection command for the Bluetooth connection is transmitted from the vehicle to the terminal. The Bluetooth system waits for a time predetermined by the Bluetooth system, after transmitting the disconnection command. After waiting for the predetermined time, it is determined whether a disconnection confirmation message responding to the disconnection command is received from the terminal or not. When it is determined that the disconnection message is received as a result of determining whether the disconnection message is received or not, the Bluetooth system is caused to enter into a sleep mode. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119961 | SIMPLIFIED PAIRING OF A SECOND DEVICE IN A VEHICLE VIA SHORT RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A vehicle communication system and a method of using the system that includes coupling a second device in a vehicle using short range wireless communication (SRWC) based on a pairing of a first device in the vehicle. The method includes the steps of: pairing at the vehicle the first device with a SRWC module, by performing a pairing procedure; after the pairing step, determining an identifying association of the first and second devices; and partially performing the pairing procedure between the SRWC module and the second device based on the pairing of the first device and the identified association. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119962 | PAIRING APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - A pairing apparatus and method are provided. The pairing apparatus includes: a first communicator configured to broadcast a search signal over a first communication method, and to receive, from the external communication apparatus, a first response signal in response to the search signal; a second communicator configured to receive a second response signal via a second communication method having a shorter transmission range than the first communication method; and a controller configured to, in response to the first communicator receiving the first response signal and the second communicator receiving the second response signal, control to perform a pairing with the external communication apparatus, wherein the second communicator is periodically activated while the pairing apparatus is turned on, and an activation period of the second communicator is set adaptively according to a transmission period of the second response signal. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119966 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR AND RECORDING MEDIUM - An information processing apparatus, for communicating with a communication device using a first wireless communication protocol and a second wireless communication protocol, includes a first wireless communication unit configured to use the first wireless communication protocol and configured to receive information, relating to a start-up state of the communication device, from the communication device using the first wireless communication protocol, a second wireless communication unit configured to use the second wireless communication protocol, and a control unit configured to control a sequence for establishing connection, using the second wireless communication unit and the second wireless communication protocol, with the communication device. The control unit is arranged to change the sequence for establishing connection, using the second wireless communication unit and the second wireless communication protocol, in accordance with the content of the received information relating to the start-up state of the communication device. | 04-28-2016 |
20160122172 | BEVERAGE DISPENSING SYSTEM WITH BEACON TRANSMITTER AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTIVE PRESENTATION OF PREDETERMINED CONTENT - The present system provides a beverage dispensing assembly having a radio transmitter, wherein a personal communication device having associated software receives content from a remote content management system in response to a signal from the transmitter being received at the personal communication device. The radio transmitter may be in a retaining cavity of an extender assembly which is positioned between a faucet and a tap handle of the beverage dispensing assembly. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127854 | WIRELESS AMBULATORY CARE NETWORK - A method for connecting wireless devices using Bluetooth® low energy can be used to connect wireless computing devices with a medical device in an ambulatory care setting. The wireless computing devices can receive measured vital sign data and transmit the vital sign data to a patient's electronic medical record. The wireless computing devices can be configured to include a user-friendly name and the transmitter power in one or more advertising broadcasts. The medical device can receive advertising broadcasts from one or more wireless computing devices and sort the devices by proximity, last use, number of times used, or alphabetically. After the devices exchange information over Bluetooth® low energy, the devices can connect in Bluetooth® Classic. Systems for implementing the method are also disclosed. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127855 | Proximity Based Content Sharing - A sharing user of a content management system can request to share a content item in his namespace. When such a request is made, the sharing user's client device broadcasts a notification that can be received by devices that are within a limited broadcast range of the sharing client device. A receiving user's client device that is within the limited broadcast range of the sharing client device receives the broadcasted notification. Based on the notification, the receiving client device obtains a token from the sharing client device that identifies the content item being shared by the sharing user. At the request of the receiving user, the receiving client device transmits the token to the content management system and requests that the content management system add the shared content item to the receiving user's namespace with the system. The receiving user can then access the item from his namespace. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127856 | AUTOMATIC IMPLEMENTATION OF PREFERENCES BASED ON DETECTION OF A MOBILE DEVICE - A detector, positioned at a first geographic location, receives a message from a mobile device that is sent without a request from the detector and via a short-range communications protocol, such as Bluetooth® or other WPAN. The detector parses the message to obtain data associated with the mobile device, such as extracting a media access control (MAC) address, a device type, or other information from the message. The detector may further identify an attribute, such as a signal power loss or frequency, associated with the received message. A second geographic location, associated with the mobile device, may be determined based on the attribute. The detector may also identify an associated user based on the data associated with the mobile device. The local device may receive data identifying, for example, the user, the second geographic location, or preference data related to user. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127861 | FACILITATING VIRTUAL PERSONAL AREA NETWORKS - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a coordinator device having a memory, and a controller. The memory can have computer instructions, which when executed by the controller, causes the controller to facilitate establishing a first virtual personal area network with a first sensor by executing computer instructions associated with a first application profile, and facilitate establishing a second virtual personal area network with a second sensor by executing computer instructions associated a second application profile. The first application profile can be defined by a first protocol specification, while the second application profile can be defined by a second protocol specification. The first protocol specification can also be operationally distinct from the second protocol specification. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128112 | ACCESS CONTROL IN BLUETOOTH.RTM. LOW ENERGY DEVICES - A computer readable medium comprising instructions which, when executed, cause performance of operations comprising: successfully establishing a Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) device and another device, receiving, by the BLE device from the other device, a request for a change in a configuration, determining, by the BLE device, if the BLE device is in a configuration-changes-enabled state, responsive to determining that the BLE device is in a configuration-changes-enabled state, changing the configuration based on the request, and responsive to determining that the BLE device is not in a configuration-changes-enabled state, refraining from changing the configuration. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128117 | DIGITAL RADIO COMMUNICATION - A method of digital radio communication between a first device ( | 05-05-2016 |
20160128118 | SECURE PAIRING OF PERSONAL DEVICE WITH HOST DEVICE - Pairing one or more personal devices to a host device is provided. An example method includes detecting one or more personal devices in wireless proximity communication range of a host device; allocating and storing a respective unique input instruction for each personal device in range, wherein a unique input instruction is convertible to an augmented reality display input at a personal device; transmitting the unique input instruction to the personal device; providing an input interface of the host device; receiving, from a user of the personal device, user input at the input interface of the host device; and activating an exclusive pairing between the host device and the personal device for which the user input has been received. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128120 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA OF ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE USING THE METHOD - A method of operating an electronic device, an electronic device, and a chip set are provided. The method includes detecting a generation of an event based on at least one of a signal received externally and an internal operation, by the electronic device including a cellular communication module, a first short range wireless communication module and a second short range wireless communication module; determining at least one state of a connection between the electronic device and a first external electronic device that has been connected to the electronic device using the first short range wireless communication module, by the electronic device; and transmitting a signal related to the event, using at least one of the cellular communication module, the first short range wireless communication module and the second short range wireless communication module, based on at least one of the at least one state of the connection between the electronic device and the first external electronic device, by the electronic device. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128121 | TERMINAL DEVICE, REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM, AND REMOTE CONTROL TARGET DETERMINATION METHOD THEREFOR - To accurately determine the nearest electronic device in establishing a pairing with an electronic device to be a target for remote control. A terminal device includes a received signal strength acquiring unit, a device selection processing unit, and a connecting unit. The received signal strength acquiring unit receives a signal transmitted from a plurality of electronic devices and acquires the electric field strength of the received signal. The device selection processing unit selects an electronic device to be a target for connection from the plurality of electronic devices in accordance with a normalized electric field strength that is a value obtained by normalizing the electric field strength of the received signal using a parameter corresponding to and unique to an electronic device that transmits the received signal. The connecting unit establishes a connection with the electronic device selected at the device selection processing unit. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128122 | Inter-Device Session Connectivity Enhancement - Devices and methods are provided for managing device-to-device (D2D) communications session in a wireless-enabled communication environment. A first client node comprises a database containing location and ID information associated with a plurality of second client nodes. The location information in the database is updated as individual second client nodes change their location. As the location information is updated, it is processed by the first client node to determine the distance between it and an individual second client node. If the distance between the first client node and the individual second client node is within a viable D2D communications range, then the user of the first client node is notified that a D2D communications session can be initiate with the individual second client node. | 05-05-2016 |
20160134995 | Short Range Peer-to-Peer Communications System - A short range peer-to-peer communications system for communicating between mobile machines includes a first machine having a first prime mover, a first ground engaging drive mechanism operatively connected to the first prime mover to propel the first machine about a work site, and a first peer-to-peer transmitter system on the first machine for transmitting a first signal indicative of a characteristic associated with operating of the first machine. A second machine has a second prime mover, a second ground engaging drive mechanism operatively connected to the second prime mover to propel the second machine about the work site, and a second peer-to-peer receiver system for receiving the first signal directly from the first peer-to-peer transmitter system. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134997 | FIRST DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD TO COMMUNICATE WITH SECOND DEVICE - The present invention provides a communication method and a communication system between a first computing device and a second computing device. In response to link disconnection of a first communication link mode between the first computing device and the second computing device, data from the second computing device is received from a server, and/or data addressed to the second computing device is transmitted to the server by a second communication link mode. Accordingly, a seamless connection between the first computing device and the second computing device can be established even if they are positioned so far away from each other that the connection of the first communication link mode between the two has been disconnected. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134998 | METHOD OF SHARING DATA BETWEEN ELECTRONIC DEVICES - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method of sharing data between devices, comprising determining an event at each of first and second devices, determining a time of the event at each of the first and second devices based on data wirelessly received at the first and second devices, and associating the first and second devices via a communication protocol to enable data communication therebetween if a time derived from an identifier of at least one of the devices used in the association is within a predetermined window of the time of the event at the other device. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135000 | Cell Phone Peripheral Device, Communication Terminal and Method for a Cell Phone Peripheral Device Communicating with a Cell Phone - A cell phone peripheral device comprises a communication unit, for short-distance wireless communicating between said cell phone peripheral device and the cell phone; a processing unit, for receiving information from said communication unit, processing the information to obtain and analyze data information; a display unit, for receiving and displaying said data information. A method for a cell phone perpheral device communicating with a cell phone comprises receiving information from the cell phone by way of short-distance wireless communication; processing the information to obtain and analyze data information; and displaying, by the cell phone peripheral device, the data information. And a communication terminal comprises: a first communication unit for communicating with a cellular network, a processing unit, and a first input/output unit, and further comprising: a second communication unit, for transmitting voice and data information between the processing unit and the first input/output unit by way of short distance wireless communication. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135032 | BEACON ASSISTED COMMERCIAL RECOGNITION SYSTEM - A system, comprising a primary communication path, a first communication device interfaced with the primary communication path, a second communication device interfaced with the primary communication path for communicating over the primary communication path to the first communication device, a controller for controlling the communication path between the first and second communication devices to allow or inhibit communication there over, a validation communication path, a first validation node interfaced with the validation communication path, a second validation node interfaced with the validation communication path for communicating with the first validation node over the validation communication path where in the presence of a transmission between the first and second validation nodes over the validation communication path constitutes a validation condition to control the mode of operation of the communication to be at least one of inhibiting communication over the primary communication path or allowing communication over the primary communication path. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135036 | DYNAMIC USER RECOMMENDATIONS FOR BAN ENABLED MEDIA EXPERIENCES - Disclosed is a method, performed in a Body Area Network (BAN) enabled media experience device for enabling transmission of a media experience according to a stored, predefined user configuration associated with an identification data, userID, of a BAN enabled communication device, the method comprising: establishing a connection between the BAN enabled media experience device and the BAN enabled communication device by using BAN; retrieving the identification data, userID, of the BAN enabled communication device; retrieving the stored, predefined user configuration associated with the userID of the BAN enabled communication device; and initiating transmission of the media experience by the BAN enabled media experience device according to the stored, predefined user configuration. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135245 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO CONNECT WIRELESS-ENABLED DEVICES - Examples to establish a connection between wireless-enabled devices involve collecting first biophysical signal data via a first wireless-enabled device, using the first biophysical signal data as a key to decrypt encrypted information received from a second wireless-enabled device to recover first information, and establishing a wireless connection between the first wireless-enabled device and the second wireless-enabled device based on a comparison of the first information and second information stored in the first wireless-enabled device. | 05-12-2016 |
20160142263 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING A NODE AND A NODE CONFIGURED THEREFORE - The invention relates a wireless node and to a method for operating the wireless node, wherein the wireless node comprises a controller arranged for communicating wirelessly with at least one further wireless node so as to determine an ability of the wireless node and to create a network, wherein a characteristic of the network depends on the ability of the wireless node. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142863 | SMART CLOTHING CAPABLE OF VISUALLY DISPLAYING INFORMATION ON FLEXIBLE DISPLAYS WHILE RECEIVING WIRELESS SIGNALS FROM ONE OR MORE MOBILE DEVICES OR MOBILE SENSORS - In some implementations, an article of clothing includes material and a display integrated with the material. The display can include a wireless receiver configured to receive wireless signals from an associated mobile device, a flexible screen, and one or more processors. The one or more processors can be configured to determine a plurality of images based on the wireless signals, when the wireless signal includes time intervals, associate each time interval with a corresponding image from the plurality of images, when the wireless signal does not include time intervals, associate a predefined time interval with each of the plurality of images, and update operating parameters of the flexible display to present the plurality of images in accordance with an associated time interval. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142864 | GUIDE SEGMENT IDENTIFICATION - An identification apparatus is provided herein. The identification apparatus may include an identification mechanism coupled to a first guide segment and a reader mechanism coupled to second guide segment. The reader mechanism may receive a set of data of the identification mechanism via a proximity connectivity method. The reader mechanism may communicate the set of data to a controller. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142941 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING IN-VEHICLE SYSTEM NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - Systems and methods for managing in-vehicle system network connectivity. A media system processor may determine an application requirement of an application running on the media system and an available bandwidth of a cellular communication link of the media system. The processor may receive available cellular communication link bandwidths of one or more mobile devices in communication with the media system. The processor may rank an ability of the media system, the first one or more mobile devices to meet the application requirement based on their respective available bandwidths, select the highest ranked of the media system, and the one or more mobile devices via a short-range communication to receive content for presentation by the media system, and may receive the content for the selected highest ranked of the media system, and the one or more mobile devices. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142964 | WIRELESS BEACON DEVICES FOR USE IN MANAGING TRANSPORTATION SERVICE TERMINALS - There are provided systems and methods for wireless beacon devices for use in managing transportation service terminals. A user may travel with a device, such as a communication device, that includes a communication module that may utilize specialized hardware features to establish short range wireless communications with nearby wireless beacons. The wireless beacons may be established at or nearby transportation service terminals, such as bus/train stops. The beacon may provide the aforementioned communication services with the communication device and be utilized to determine whether the user will utilize a transportation service for the terminal. If the user wishes to utilize the transportation service, a transportation service may be alerted. The user may also be alerted of an expected time of arrival for the transportation service, other transportation services available at the transportation terminal, and/or of nearby transportation terminals. | 05-19-2016 |
20160149649 | SITUATIONAL BASED COMMUNICATION - The present disclosure provides for a method and a communication device comprising an Electric Field, EF, sensor and a communication circuitry for initiating situational based communication actions in the communication device. The method comprises detecting a change in the electric field surrounding the communication device using the EF sensor, determining that the change in the electric field has a predetermined characteristic and activating the communication circuitry depending on the determination. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149905 | Apparatus for Authenticating Pairing of Electronic Devices and Associated Methods - An apparatus comprising: a processor; and a memory including computer program code, the memory and the computer program code configured, with the processor, to cause the apparatus to perform at least the following: compare received biometric face vectors, wherein each received biometric face vector is received from a respective electronic device of a plurality of electronic devices and comprises one or more biometric face values determined from a respective image of a person captured by the corresponding electronic device; and provide for pairing authentication of the plurality of electronic devices if the comparison meets a predetermined similarity criterion. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150066 | Method and Apparatus for Providing In-Vehicle Bluetooth Pairing - An in-vehicle Bluetooth pairing providing method and an apparatus using the same are disclosed. The Bluetooth pairing method in an in-vehicle head unit includes: initiating a Bluetooth automatic connection procedure with a pre-registered first user device upon application of power; canceling the initiated automatic connection procedure in accordance with user input; searching for a connectable user device; establishing a logical link with the searched user device; and transmitting a connection request message to the user device through the established logical link. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150351 | REDUCING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN WI-FI AND BLUETOOTH SIGNALS DURING VOICE CALLS - In a wireless network, a method for operating a wireless device including at least a cellular modem, a wireless local area network (WLAN) controller, and a Bluetooth (BT) controller, the method comprising facilitating a voice call with another device; generating a signal, from the cellular modem, indicating whether the cellular modem is active during the voice call; and selectively suppressing background scanning operations based, at least in part, on the signal. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150352 | BLUETOOTH SYSTEM INTEGRATION MODULE - A method of integrating Bluetooth protocols in establishing a connection between a Bluetooth-enabled mobile device and a vehicle telematics system having two or more Bluetooth controllers includes establishing a Bluetooth communication channel between the mobile device and a first Bluetooth controller. The first Bluetooth controller authenticates the mobile device. In response to successful authentication of the mobile device, a secure connection between the first Bluetooth controller and a second Bluetooth controller is established. Authentication credentials of the authenticated mobile device are sent from the first Bluetooth controller to the second Bluetooth controller. Commands received from the mobile device via the Bluetooth communication channel are processed by the first Bluetooth controller or the second Bluetooth controller depending on the protocol utilized by the mobile device. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150353 | RACK SERVER SYSTEM - A rack server system and a wireless communication method are disclosed. The rack server system includes a rack management control unit and a server node. The rack management control unit includes a rack management control module and a first ZigBee communication module. The server node includes a first baseboard management control module and a second ZigBee communication module. The rack management control module generates a first serial communication signal. The first ZigBee communication module is electrically coupled with the rack management control module and transforms the first serial communication signal into a first wireless signal. The first baseboard management control module generates a second serial communication signal. The second ZigBee communication module is electrically coupled with the first baseboard management control module and transforms the second serial communication signal into a second wireless signal. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150355 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING OPERATION MODE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREFOR - A method of controlling an operation mode of an electronic device and the electronic device therefore are provided. The method includes verifying an operation mode of the first electronic device when it is verified that a second electronic device is approached within a predetermined range while transmitting and receiving data with a third electronic device and changing a first mode to a second mode when the first electronic device operates in the first mode. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150583 | Secure Pairing of Devices via Pairing Facilitator-Intermediary Device - The present inventions, in one aspect, are directed to systems and circuitry for and/or methods of establishing communication having one or more pairing facilitator-intermediary devices (for example, a network connected server) to enable or facilitate pairing and/or registering at least two devices (e.g., (i) a portable biometric monitoring device and (ii) a smartphone, laptop and/or tablet) to, for example, recognize, interact and/or enable interoperability between such devices. The pairing facilitator-intermediary device may responsively communicates information to one or more of the devices (to be paired or registered) which, in response, enable or facilitate such devices to pair or register. The present inventions may be advantageous where one or both of the devices to be paired or registered is/are not configured (e.g., include a user interface or certain communication circuitry that is configured or includes functionality) to pair devices without use of a facilitator-intermediary device. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150588 | VEHICLE SUPPORTING EFFICIENT BLUETOOTH CONNECTION AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A method for performing Bluetooth pairing with a mobile device by a head unit of a vehicle includes: initiating a Bluetooth pairing procedure between the mobile device and the head unit; storing an address of the mobile device upon the initiation of the pairing procedure; detecting an error generated in the pairing procedure; and automatically retrying the pairing procedure using the stored address of the mobile device or terminating the pairing procedure, based on a type of the detected error. | 05-26-2016 |
20160157047 | BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION METHOD AND BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION DEVICE | 06-02-2016 |
20160157048 | HANDLING BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY MESSAGES | 06-02-2016 |
20160157049 | HEAD UNIT OF VEHICLE FOR SUPPORTING BLUETOOTH CONNECTION AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF | 06-02-2016 |
20160157050 | LOCATING AND TRACKING SYSTEM | 06-02-2016 |
20160157078 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR DEVICE DISCOVERY | 06-02-2016 |
20160164548 | ANTENNA SHARING IN MOBILE DEVICES FOR BACKSCATTER RADIO - A method and apparatus for wirelessly communicating data that receives electromagnetic (“EM”) radiation incident upon an antenna of a mobile device from a base station is described. The antenna is an element of the mobile device that serves an additional purpose than just as a reflective antenna for backscatter communications. A radar cross-section of the antenna is modulated between two or more states using a backscatter tag coupled to the antenna. Data is encoded onto a backscatter channel of the EM radiation via the modulating. The data is transmitted to the base station over the backscatter channel. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164549 | DEVICE FOR PERFORMING COMMUNICATION AND METHOD THEREOF - An electronic device is provided. The electronic device includes a first communication circuit configured to perform wireless communication with an external electronic device, based on a first communication protocol in which the wireless communication is possible based on at least one of a first frequency or a second frequency, a processor electrically connected to the communication circuit, and a memory electrically connected to the processor. The memory is configured to store instructions, the instructions, when executed, causing the processor to acquire information associated with at least one of a state or an operation of the electronic device and the first communication to perform the wireless communication selectively based on one of the first frequency or the second frequency, based on at least a part of the acquired information. | 06-09-2016 |
20160174020 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR MANAGEMENT OF CONNECTED DEVICES, SUCH AS IN A WIRELESS DOCKING ENVIRONMENT- INTELLIGENT AND AUTOMATIC CONNECTION ACTIVATION | 06-16-2016 |
20160174022 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRACKING LOCATIONS AND ACTIVITIES | 06-16-2016 |
20160174023 | SELECTIVE USER NOTIFICATION FOR LINK TERMINATION EVENTS IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK | 06-16-2016 |
20160174276 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING PROXIMITY SERVICES GROUP IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 06-16-2016 |
20160183029 | SELF-DIRECT M2M (MACHINE-TO-MACHINE) COMUNICATION BASED USER'S DAILY ACTIVITY LOGGING AND ANALYZING SYSTEM WITH WEARABLE AND PERSONAL MOBILE DEVICES | 06-23-2016 |
20160183035 | Methods and Systems for Forming a Wireless Communication Link | 06-23-2016 |
20160183036 | PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE, SERVER AND CONNECTION METHOD THEREOF | 06-23-2016 |
20160183077 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REDUCING CONNECTION LATENCY | 06-23-2016 |
20160184635 | Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving data using bluetooth - A method for transmitting and receiving data by a client device with a fitness device using Bluetooth, includes receiving an advertising message including at least one of type information of the fitness device or service information indicating whether a fitness service is provided, from the fitness device, performing a connection procedure with the fitness device, transmitting a request message requesting feature information that may be provided by the fitness device from the fitness device, receiving a response message including the feature information from the fitness device, transmitting a first write request message including first control information for controlling the fitness device on the basis of the feature information, and receiving a first write response message with respect to the first write request message, wherein the feature information is information related to the fitness service. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191093 | Wireless headset system with two different radio protocols - A headset system comprising a headset and a base station. Each of said headset and base station comprises a transceiver configured to transmit radio signals between said headset and said base station according to a first wireless communication protocol, and each of said headset and base station further comprises a transceiver configured to transmit radio signals between said headset and said base station according to a second wireless communication protocol. At least one of said headset and said base station further comprises selecting means, such as a protocol selector configured to select one of said first and second wireless communication protocols for transmission of radio signals between said headset and said base station. The protocol selector is adapted to select the first wireless communication protocol for transmission of voice communication and the second wireless communication protocol for transmission of media content. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191642 | LOW POWER DIGITAL RADIO RANGE EXTENSION - A method of enabling extended range communication between a first low power digital radio device and a second low power digital radio device via an intermediate access point; which intermediate access point has a low power digital radio interface and an other communications interface and forms part of a communication network; wherein the intermediate access point is adapted to perform a proxy function for the second low power digital radio device, thereby to enable the first low power digital radio device to send and receive data to the second low power digital radio device via the intermediate access point. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192115 | Low-power Wireless Content Communication between Devices - Low-power wireless content communication techniques between devices are described. In one or more implementations, a method is described of controlling transfer of content to a wearable device from one or more computing devices over a lower power wireless communication connection. The method includes initiating a transfer of content to the wearable device over the lower power wireless communication connection to support playback of the content at the wearable device, in which the low power wireless communication connection does not support streaming of the content in an amount sufficient to support real time playback of the content at the wearable device. The transfer is managed of a plurality of portions of the content to the wearable device over the lower power wireless communication connection in which individual ones of the plurality of portions are transferred from the one or more computing device responsive to availability of the lower power wireless communication connection with the one or more computing devices. The plurality of portions of the content are caused to be stored locally at the wearable device. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192116 | SYSTEM FOR EXCHANGING DATA REMOTELY WITH AN NFC RADIO TAG - A system for exchanging data, remotely, between a reading station and a radio tag, the system including: a first assembly including a reading interface configured to read data stored in the radio tag and a first communication mechanism for transmitting a signal representative of the data read in the radio tag; a second assembly including a second communication mechanism connected to the first communication mechanism and configured to receive the signal, and an offset radio tag, including a memory configured to store data representative of the received signal. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192120 | DYNAMIC DATA DISTRIBUTION METHOD IN PRIVATE NETWORK AND ASSOCIATED ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A dynamic data distribution method in a private network and an associated electronic device are provided. The private network includes: a first pairing connection between a first electronic device, a second electronic device, and a second pairing connection between the first electronic device and a third electronic device. The method includes the steps of: receiving sensor data from the second electronic device by the first electronic device; notifying the second electronic device to build a third pairing connection with the third electronic device according to a determination result between the first electronic device and the third electronic device; and terminating the first pairing connection and retrieving the sensor data from the second electronic device through the third electronic device by the first electronic device when the third pairing connection has been built. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192121 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR SHARING CONTACT INFORMATION BETWEEN MOBILE DEVICES - The present disclosure provides a method for exchanging contact information, comprising detecting a first exchange event on a first mobile electronic device of a first user and initiating the exchange of contact information between the first mobile electronic device and a second mobile electronic device of another user that has detected a second exchange event. Next, contact information of the first user is transmitted from the first mobile electronic device to the second mobile electronic device and contact information of the second user is received at the first mobile electronic device. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192409 | METHOD FOR ACCESSING A NETWORK IN ELECTRONIC SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED PORTABLE DEVICE - A method for accessing a network in an electronic system and associated portable device are provided. The portable device includes; a transceiver, supporting a plurality of predetermined communication protocols; and a processor, configured to connect the portable device to a connectivity service device in an electronic system via the transceiver when the portable device enters a coverage region of the connectivity service device. The connectivity service device retrieves service information from a plurality of electronic devices that are connected to the connectivity service device, to build a service list. The processor retrieves the service list from the connectivity service device, and determines a service from the service list to be used for communicating with the plurality of the electronic devices. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192417 | Systems and Methods of Wireless USB Service Discovery - Example embodiments of the systems and methods of wireless USB service discovery disclosed herein provide the querying of the MAC address of devices for available services to determine the information elements provided to the querying devices based on access categories specified by the user of the querying device. Sniffing or querying of the Wi-Fi enabled devices may subsequently determine which of the MAC addresses correspond to known friends and automatically make that content accessible to those friends by including these MAC addresses in file metadata so that a device with this MAC address can subsequently access the file. Availability of this file for download may subsequently be advertised. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192428 | SYSTEMS, APPARATUS, AND METHODS FOR PROGRAMMATICALLY ASSOCIATING NEARBY USERS - Systems, apparatus, methods, and non-transitory media for programmatically associating nearby users are discussed herein. Some embodiments may include user-wearable gesture exchange device including a motion sensor and circuitry. The motion sensor may be configured to generate motion data values indicating motion of the gesture exchange device. The circuitry may be configured to monitor motion data values generated by the motion sensor for detection of a gesture exchange signature, such as a handshake, being performed by the user. In some embodiments, the gesture exchange device may be configured to establish a wireless communication connection with a second gesture exchange device for exchange of user data, such as in response to detecting user performance of the gesture exchange signature and/or determining that the second gesture exchange device is within a predetermined proximity. | 06-30-2016 |
20160198288 | VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT UNIT AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME | 07-07-2016 |
20160198289 | A Method and Device for Selecting a Synchronization Reference | 07-07-2016 |
20160198290 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONNECTING METHOD THEREOF | 07-07-2016 |
20160198291 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION | 07-07-2016 |
20160198339 | D2D and Cellular Operation on Different Carrier Frequencies or Frequency Bands | 07-07-2016 |
20160198512 | USER EQUIPMENT PAIRING PROCESSING METHOD, NETWORK SIDE DEVICE, AND USER EQUIPMENT | 07-07-2016 |
20160205498 | SHORT-DISTANCE RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR VEHICLE | 07-14-2016 |
20160205530 | PROXIMITY REQUEST VALIDATING METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT USING THE SAME, IDENTITY REQUEST METHOD, AND NETWORK ENTITY USING THE SAME | 07-14-2016 |
20160205531 | METHOD OF GENERATING DISCOVERY CODE FOR NETWORK ENTITY AND NETWORK ENTITY USING THE SAME | 07-14-2016 |
20160254843 | Wirelessly Charged Electronic Device With Shared Inductor Circuitry | 09-01-2016 |
20160254845 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM | 09-01-2016 |
20160254859 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING FUNCTION OF THE MOBILE TERMINAL | 09-01-2016 |
20160255015 | COMMUNICATION IDENTIFICATION BETWEEN PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND A MOTOR VEHICLE | 09-01-2016 |
20160255460 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND ELECTRONIC SYSTEM FOR RADIO CONNECTING A PLURALITY OF ELECTRONIC DEVICES | 09-01-2016 |
20160255673 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE | 09-01-2016 |
20160380704 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SHORTENING WIRELESS PAIRING CONNECTION TIME BY DETECTING AN OBJECT OR BODY - Embodiments of the invention are directed to control devices configured for use with computing devices. More specifically, the present invention relates to methods and devices for shortening wireless reconnection time by determining the presence of an object or body near a device. When the control device detects an object or body in proximity to the device, the control device may automatically establish a wireless connection with a host devices, such that when the control device receives any user interactions, the wireless connection has already been established, preventing loss of data. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381491 | PRIORITY HANDLING FOR PROSE COMMUNICATIONS - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are disclosed for priority handling for ProSe Communications. A relay wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may act as a relay between the network and the remote WTRU. The relay WTRU may receive a temporary mobile group identity (TMGI) request message from a remote WTRU. The TMGI request message may include a TMGI, a ProSe per packet priority level associated with the TMGI, etc. The relay WTRU may receive an evolved multimedia broadcast multicast service (eMBMS) data packet from a network. The eMBMS may be associated with the TMGI. The relay WTRU may apply the received ProSe per packet priority level associated with the TMGI to the received eMBMS data packet. The relay WTRU may relay the eMBMS data packet to the remote WTRU based on the ProSe per packet priority level. The relay WTRU may forward the eMBMS data packet to the remote WTRU via a PC5 interface. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381492 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, SERVER, COMMUNICATION METHOD, RECORDING MEDIUM, INFORMATION QUERY METHOD AND INFORMATION SPECIFYING METHOD - A communication system includes a plurality of communication terminals and a server. The plurality of communication terminals perform wireless communication therebetween by a predetermined communication protocol. The server is to be connected with the plurality of communication terminals through a predetermined communication line. The plurality of communication terminals each include a first receiving section which receives identification information sent from another communication terminal for identifying the another communication terminal and a first sending section which sends to the server through the predetermined communication line the identification information received by the first receiving section. The server includes a second receiving section which receives the identification information sent from the communication terminal and a specifying section which specifies, among the plurality of communication terminals, the communication terminal whose identification information has not been received based on the identification information received by the second receiving section. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381493 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, PORTABLE TERMINAL AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND SERVICE PROVIDING SYSTEM - According to this invention, a service providing apparatus displays information of an information device cooperating with a wearable information device connected by wireless communication, and performs service execution processing for the information device cooperating with the wearable information device. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381572 | ADAPTIVE FREQUENCY HOPPING (AFH) WITH CHANNEL INHIBITION (CI) FOR BLUETOOTH - Techniques for employing channel inhibition (CI) with adaptive frequency hopping (AFH) in connection with Bluetooth (BT) are discussed. One example system employing such techniques comprises a BT master component operating on a plurality of channels via AFH; and a processor configured to: assign, based on a set of criteria, a first (e.g., ‘UNUSED’) status and a priority level to one or more channels, and a second (e.g., ‘USED’) status to each other channel; determine whether a total number of channels set as ‘USED’ is less than a minimum number of required channels; and in response to a determination that the total number of channels set as ‘USED’ is less than the minimum number, repeatedly assign a ‘USED’ status to a channel having a lowest priority level among channels with the ‘UNUSED’ status, until the total number of channels set as ‘USED’ equals the minimum number. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381586 | MOBILE MONITORING DEVICE AND METHOD OF COLLECTING SENSOR MEASURED DATA - A mobile monitoring device including a data signal interface for coupling to a data line arranged in an aircraft and carrying one or more sensor signals, such that, in operation, the data signal interface branches off and receives as input signal part of the energy of the sensor signals carried on the data line such that the input signal is characteristic of the one or more sensor signals, and provide an output signal characteristic of the input signal. The mobile monitoring device further includes a wireless communication interface connected to the data signal interface for receiving the output signal and adapted to wirelessly transmit the output signal to a remote location. The present disclosure further relates to a system including an aircraft and the mobile monitoring device, and to a method of collecting sensor measurement data from a plurality of sensors of an aircraft using the mobile monitoring device. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381624 | DEVICE FOR SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION, ADAPTED TO PROVIDE ACCESS TO A REMOTE SERVICE - A hub device is configured for communicating with a terminal by using a short-range wireless connection. The hub device is further configured for connecting to a remote service. More particularly, the device is configured for: receiving from the terminal a request to access the remote service, the access request comprising identification parameters for said service; temporarily storing in memory the identification parameters of the request received, in order to send to the remote service a second access request comprising the identification parameters; and upon response from the remote service to the second request, transferring data relating to the service. The identification parameters. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381633 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION - A method for reducing power consumption between two devices communicating through a BLUETOOTH protocol is operable to be executed in the devices. A first device can adjust connection state according to current communication state with a second device, to achieve a compromise between power saving and effective transmission abilities. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381719 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus according to the present invention includes a storage unit that stores, when the communication apparatus is connected to a first wireless network at a predetermined position, information about the predetermined position, a detection unit that detects whether the communication apparatus exists within a predetermined range including the predetermined position, and a transmission unit that transmits predetermined information, for connecting another communication apparatus to the first wireless network, to the another communication apparatus using a second communication system with a lower power consumption than a first communication system used in the first wireless network in response to the detection unit detecting that the communication apparatus exists within the predetermined range. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381721 | Apparatus And Method For Wireless Connection Of Devices - Disclosed herein is a system and method for wireless connection of at least a first device to at least a second device. The devices are each configured with a sensor for receiving a signal, a data connection element for providing a data transmission channel between the devices, and a control element. The devices each have a timing device for determining the time of reception, with the timing devices can be activated with the reception of the signal. The timing devices are started with the reception of the signal. Furthermore, the devices are configured to record the signal received by the sensor and the time of reception of the signal and to provide to each other the signals received by the sensors and the times of reception of the signals, to compare them with each other and to use them as an identification feature. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381727 | ELECTRONIC DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN TRUST CONTACTS - Mobile devices can be wirelessly linked to an increasing number of wearable devices. Sensors included in both mobile and wearable devices possessed by a first party and a second party can detect physical, biometric, or environmental inputs. A logic circuit in each of the portable electronic devices can autonomously determine whether these inputs are indicative of a trusted contact between the first and the second parties in various social, business, and commercial settings based at least in part on local social, business, and interpersonal practices and norms. A first portable electronic device possessed by a first party and a second portable electronic device possessed by a second party may autonomously exchange public or private information based on detecting a trusted contact between the first party and the second party. Such devices may also track ongoing trusted contact between the first party and the second party in social, business, and commercial settings. | 12-29-2016 |
20170237844 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING MOBILE DEVICES WITH MACHINE VISION SYSTEMS | 08-17-2017 |
20170237846 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING COOPERATIVE FUNCTION AUTOMATICALLY AND DEVICE USING THE SAME | 08-17-2017 |
20170238126 | SENSOR FOR ACQUIRING SENSING DATA IN DISCONNECTED STATE, INTELLIGENT DEVICE, AND METHOD | 08-17-2017 |
20170238127 | COMMUNICATION VIA DEVICE TAP | 08-17-2017 |
20180026712 | System And Method For Communicating Over An 802.15.4 Network | 01-25-2018 |
20180027366 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, AND STORAGE MEDIUM | 01-25-2018 |
20180027368 | CONTROLLING CONNECTED MULTIMEDIA DEVICES | 01-25-2018 |
20180027409 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING A MOBILE DEVICE | 01-25-2018 |
20190149647 | EXECUTING APPLICATIONS IN CONJUNCTION WITH OTHER DEVICES | 05-16-2019 |
20190149960 | SECURITY AND SAFETY PROCESSING BY A VEHICLE COMPUTING SYSTEM | 05-16-2019 |
20190149968 | Priority Handling for Prose Communications | 05-16-2019 |
20190149970 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, RECORDING MEDIUM, AND INFORMATION EXCHANGE METHOD | 05-16-2019 |
20190150089 | INTELLIGENT MANAGEMENT OF A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATIONS LINKS | 05-16-2019 |
20190150203 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND TECHNIQUES FOR DEVICE PAIRING VIA A SHORT-RANGE PAIRING MECHANISM | 05-16-2019 |
20220140854 | IMPLANTABLE MEDICAL DEVICE AND METHOD FOR MANAGING A PHYSICAL LAYER UTILIZED DURING A WIRELESS CONNECTION - An implantable medical device, external device and method for managing a wireless communication are provided. The IMD includes a transceiver configured to communicate wirelessly, with an external device (ED), utilizing a protocol that utilizes multiple physical layers. The transceiver is configured to transmit information indicating that the transceiver is configured with first, second, and third physical layers (PHYs) for wireless communication. The IMD includes memory configured to store program instructions. The IMD includes one or more processors configured to execute instructions to obtain an instruction designating one of the first, second and third PHY to be utilized for at least one of transmission or reception, during a communication session, with the external device and manage the transceiver to utilize, during the communication session, the one of the first, second and third PHY as designated. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141918 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING MASTER AND SLAVE ROLES OF DEVICES FOR USE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A system and method for switching master and slave roles of devices for use in wireless communications. The method includes: establishing a monitoring link for communications between a master device and a host device; and initiating a role exchange request, in which a time point for role exchange is appointed, by the master device or a slave device via the monitoring link when role switching between the master device and the slave device is triggered, and replying with a request receipt acknowledgment packet for the receipt of the role exchange request by the other device via the monitoring link. The system includes the master device, the slave device, and the host device, wherein the master device includes a master processing module; and the slave device includes a slave processing module. The role exchange between the master device and the slave device keeps energy consumptions of the two devices evened out. | 05-05-2022 |